Modern scientific research and their practical application

Transcription

Research Bulletin SWorld
ISSN 2227-6920
Modern scientific research
and their practical application
Published by:
Kupriyenko SV on Project SWorld
With the support of:
Odessa National Maritime University
Ukrainian National Academy of Railway Transport
Institute for Entrepreneurship and morehozyaystva
Lugansk State Medical University
Kharkiv Medical Academy of Postgraduate Education
Volume J21310
November 2013
SWorld /Scientific World/- is a modern on-line project, acting in the name of science to achieve the
high goal “international integration of research” (conferences, workshops, electronic journals,
publishing support for academics)
URL: http://www.sworld.com.ua/e-journal/J21310.pdf
Downloaded from SWorld. Terms of Use http://www.sworld.com.ua/index.php/ru/e-journal/about-journal/terms-of-use
Please use the following format to cite material from this book (italics indicate the fields to change to your data):
Author(s), 'Title of Paper," in Modern scientific research and their practical application, edited by
Alexandr G. Shibaev, Alexandra D. Markova.Vol.J21310 (Kupriyenko SV, Odessa, 2013) – URL:
http://www.sworld.com.ua/e-journal/J21310.pdf (date:...) - Article CID Number.
This volume contains research papers of scientists in the field of Technical sciences.
Editorial board:
Alexandr G. Shibaev – Doctor of Technical Sciences, Prof.
Alexandr V. Yatsenko – associate professor, rector of the Institute for Entrepreneurship and
morehozyaystva
Sergiy M. Goncharuk – Doctor of Technical Sciences, prof., Member of the Russian Academy of
Transport and the International Informatization Academy, Honored Worker of Transport of Russia
Denis V. Lomotko – Doctor of Technical Sciences, Vice-Rector of the Ukrainian State Academy of
Railway Transport, Corr. Transport Academy of Ukraine
Inna A. Lapkina – Doctor of Economic Sciences, Professor.
V. Ivanov - Doctor of Law, Professor;
Victoriya A. Shapovalova - Doctor of Pharmacy, professor;
Alexandr I. Tikhonova - Doctor of Pharmacy, professor;
Alexandr P. Gudzenko - Doctor of Pharmacy, professor;
Valeriy V. Shapovalov - Doctor of Pharmacy, professor;
Dmatriy S. Volokh - Doctor of Pharmacy, professor;
Victor P. Georgievskiy - Doctor of Pharmacy, professor, corresponding member Ukraine NAS;
Alexandr I. Grizodub - Doctor of Chemistry, professor;
Valentine V. Shapovalov - Candidate of Pharmaceutical Sciences;
Sergiy I. Rylov – Ph.D. in Economics, Professor.
Elena V. Kirillova – PhD, associate professor
Petrov I - PhD, associate professor.
Julia L. Kantarovich – Ph.D. in art history science
I. Mogilevskaya - candidate of pedagogical sciences professor;
Demidova V - Ph.D in Pedagogical Sciences
Stovpets A. - Ph.D in Philosophy Sciences, associate professor
Stovpets V. - Ph.D in Philology Sciences, associate professor
Alexandra D. Markova
Published by:
Kupriyenko SV
on Project SWorld
P.O. Box 38, Odessa, 65001Ukraine
Telephone: +380667901205
e-mail: [email protected]
site: www.sworld.com.ua
The publisher is not responsible for the validity of the information or for any outcomes resulting from
reliance thereon.
Copyright
© Authors, 2013
Paper Numbering: Papers are published as they are submitted and meet publication criteria. A unique, consistent,
permanent citation identifier (CID) number is assigned to each article at the time of the first publication.
CONTENTS
J21310-001
METHOD TO REDUCE THE NUMBER OF SOMATIC
CELLS IN MILK TO PRODUCE CHEESE
J21310-002
GRAPHIC PREPARATION OF STUDENTS
ELECTROMECHANICAL SPECIALTIES IN
CONDITIONS OF MODERNIZATION OF THE
RUSSIAN EDUCATION
TECHNOLOGIES OF THE MECHANIZED
FASTENING OF EXCAVATIONS OF
STRENGTHENED COMBINED SUPPORT WITH USE
OF BEING SELF-FIXED ANCHORS AND
CONCRETE "WET" ON UNDERGROUND MINES OF
URAL
J21310-003
J21310-004
NOISE IMMUNITY AS A FACTOR OF NETWORK
RELIABILITY DATA TRANSMISSION ON
TRANSPORT
J21310-005
HELTH – SAFE FOOD IN SPORTS
J21310-006
TECHNOLOGY PRODUCTION OF HIGH STRENGTH WIRE
WITH HIGH PLASTIC PROPERTIES
MODELING SATELLITE DATA TRANSMISSION
CHANNELS WITH CASCADE SIGNAL-CODE
STRUCTURES
J21310-007
J21310-008
THE PROBLEMS OF INNOVATIVE
TECHNOLOGIES SAFETY
J21310-009
CONSTRUCTION OF EXPERIMENTAL JET
CAVITATION APPARATUS
J21310-010
THE PRINCIPLE OF PRODUCING
THERMOPLASTIC POLYURETHANE COMPOSITES
OF IMPROVED WEAR RESISTANCE
AUTOMATED SYSTEM DESIGN OF THE LIGHT
DEVICES
INVESTIGATION OF THE CHARACTERISTICS OF
THE ELECTRONIC PAYMENT SYSTEM BY
ANALITICAL MODELING
J21310-011
J21310-012
J21310-013
J21310-014
CONTROL OF PROTECTIVE CAPACITY OF
STATIONS OF CATHODIC PROTECTION OF THE
GAS PIPELINE
TECHNICAL ASPECTS OF NEW
MONOACYLGLYCEROL OBTAINING
TECHNOLOGY
Ryzhkova T.N.
Kharkov state zooveterinary academy
Kharkiv region, Dergachy district,
62341
Petrovskaya N.M.
Institute of Education, Psychology and
Sociology of the Siberian Federal
University, Krasnoyarsk, Svobodny 79
Kalmykov V.N., Zubkov A.A.
Volkov P.V.,
Pushkarev E.I. Latkin V.V.
Magnitogorsk State Technical
University of G.I.Nosov",
Magnitogorsk, Lenin Avenue 38,
455000
Nyrkov A.P., Sokolov S.S.,
Belousov A.S.
Federal State Financed Educational
Institution of Higher Professional
Education “Admiral Makarov State
University of Maritime and Inland
Shipping”, Russia, Saint-Petersburg,
Dvinskay st., 5/7.
1Tusinov A.G., 2Sklyarenko S.A.
1"Russian State University of Tourism
and Service"
2 "Moscow State University of Food
Production"
Radionov A.A., Radionova L.V.
South Ural State University
Boiko J.M., Boryachok R.O.
Khmelnitskiy National University,
Khmelnitskiy, 11/3 Institutska Str.,
29000
Mykhailova G.N. , Bulenok S. N.
Kiyv National University of Trade and
Economics,
Kioto st. 19, Kyiv, Ukraine, 02156
Anisimov V. V., Ermakov P. P.
SHED “Ukrainian State University of
Chemical Technology”
Anisimov V.N.
Ukrainian State University of Chemical
Technology
Bayneva I.I., Baynev V.V.
Ogarev Mordovia State University
Stepanenko I.A. Lukyanov V.S.
Volgograd State Technical University
Vasilenko A.F. Vasilenko N. V.
Kuban state technological university,
Krasnodar, Moscowskay, 2, 350072
Melnik A.P., Matveeva T.V.,
Papchenko V.Y., Kramarev S.O., Malik
S.G., Getmansev A.M.
National technical university “Kharkov
polytechnic institute”
J21310-015
RESEARCH OF CHARACTERISTICS OF THE
NETWORK TRAFFIC
J21310-016
LABORATORY STUDIES OF COMPLEX BINDER,
WITH THE STRENGTHENING OF SOILS OF
ROADBED OF FOREST ROADS
J21310-017
EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE STORAGE ON
NATURE LOSSES AND QUALITY OF
CHAMPIGNON BISPORED
J21310-018
EFFECT OF STORAGE CONDITIONS ON
BIOCHEMICAL PARAMETERS OF MUSHROOMS
OF CHAMPIGNONS BISPORED
J21310-019
RATIONALE PROCESSING CONES HOPS IN
PELLETS TYPE 90
J21310-020
CARGO FLOWS OPTIMIZATION OF MULTIMODAL
TRAFFIC
J21310-021
THE VIBRATORY MACHINES WITH PNEUMOMECHANICAL CONTROL: EFFECT OF THE
POLYTROPHIC INDEX ON POWER CONSUMPTION
METHODS FOR LARGE IMAGE DISTRIBUTED
PROCESSING AND STORAGE IN LH*RS SCHEMA
J21310-022
J21310-023
THE PROPERTIES OF GYPSUM-SAND
ADMIXTURES USED FOR ARTIFICIAL STONES
MANUFACTURE WITH VARIED ORGANIC
COMPOUND-BASED ADDITIVES
J21310-024
MODERN METHODS OF CONTROL OF
PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGICAL STATE OF
MACHINISTS HIGH-SPEED TRAFFIC
J21310-025
OPERATING CONDITIONS OF AN INDUCTION
MOTOR WITH FREQUENCY CONVERTER, BASED
ON VSI WITH PWM, AND AFE RECTIFIER DURING
VOLTAGE DIPS
THE CAUSES AND THE CONSEQUENCES OF
FAILURE AUTOMATION SYSTEMS IN
OPERATION IN REFINERIES USING A SINGLE
BASE OPERATING DATA
PRACTICAL INFLUENCE OF PROCESSING AND
FREEZING TEMPERATURE ON RESULTS OF THE
ASSESSMENT OF QUALITY OF FIELD
MUSHROOMS
J21310-026
J21310-027
J21310-028
CORROSION-MECHANICAL WEAR
TECHNOLOGICAL EQUIPMENT FOOD
Chupakhina L.R. Kireeva N. V.
Povolzhskiy State University of
Telecommunications and Informatics,
Samara, Lev Tolstoy 23, 443010
Naumenko A. I., Bavbel J. I.,
Lyshchik P. A.
Belarusian state technological
university, Department of transportation
wood
Gun’ko S.M., Trynchuk O.O.
National University of Life and
Environmental Sciences of Ukraine,
Kyiv, Heroyv Oboronu 13, 03041
Bober A.
Environmental Sciences of Ukraine
Sokolov S.S., Ezhgurov V.N.
Federal budget institution of higher
professional education “Admiral
Makarov State University of Maritime
and Inland Shipping”, Russian
Federation, Saint-Petersburg, Dvinskaya
5/7, 198035
Stasiuk V.M.
Lutsk national technical university
Lutsk, Lvivska Street, 75, 43018
Kokoulin A.N.
Perm national research polytechnic
university,
Russia, Perm, Komsomolsky prospect,
29
Lomachenko D.V.
Belgorod Shukhov State Technological
University,
Russia, Belgorod, Kostykov str. 46,
308012
Kopytenkova O.I., Kurepin D.E.,
Aliev O.T.
Petersburg State University of Railway
Transport, St. Petersburg, Moscow
Avenue, 9, 190031
Radionov A.A., Maklakov A.S.
South Ural State University (National
Research),
Chelyabinsk, Lenin ave 75, 454080
Pegushin S.L., Shumihin A.G.
Perm National Research Polytechnic
University,
Perm, Komsomol prospectus 29, 614990
Medvedkova I.I.
Donetsk National University of
Economics and Trade
of a name of M. Tugan-Baranovsky,
Donetsk, Ul. Shchorsа, 31, 83050
1Sukhenko V.J., 2Manuilov V.V.,
1Sukhenko J.G.
1National University of Life and
J21310-029
METHODOLOGICAL ASPECTS OF MANAGEMENT
OF PROJECTS OF TOURIST FLOWS
J21310-030
PROBLEMS OF HYDROELASTICITY OF THE
COAXIAL CYLINDRICAL SHELLS CONTAINING A
STRATUM OF VISCOUS INCOMPRESSIBLE
LIQUID IN CONDITIONS OF VIBRATION
J21310-031
ENERGY INDICATORS OF DUAL RETAINING
CUTTING OF CORNSTALKS
J21310-032
MATHEMATICAL MODELING OF LONGITUDINAL
DEFORMATION WAVES DISTRIBUTION IN
CORN’S EAR DURING ITS PICKING
METHODS OF SELECTING THE DIAGNOSTIC
PARAMETERS IN DETERMINING PARAMETRIC
RELIABILITY OF THE ENGINES OF MOTOR
VEHICLES
ROBUST CONTROL OF NONLINEAR
NONSTATIONARY OBJECT WITH STATIONARY
OBSERVER AND EXPLICIT-IMPLICIT REFERENCE
MODEL
HYDROELASTICITY GEOMETRICALLY
IRREGULAR SHELL CONTAINING THE STRATUM
OF THE VISCOUS LIQUID AND ABSOLUTELY
RIGID CYLINDER, IN CONDITIONS OF
HARMONIC PRESSURE
GEOMETRY OF LUNAR TERMINATOR
J21310-033
J21310-034
J21310-035
J21310-036
J21310-037
J21310-038
THE CONTROL OF NATURAL GAS DEW POINT
TEMPERATURES BY WATER AND
HYDROCARBONS
ANALYSIS METHODS CICN
J21310-039
CICN RESTRUCTURING AND ITS EFFECT ON
PERFORMANCE NETWORK
J21310-040
PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS CICN
J21310-041
DEFORMATION OF STREAM BY MEANS OF
RESISTANCE,
DISPERSED ALONG CROSS-SECTIONAL
INTERSCAPULAR CHANNELS OF CENTRIFUGAL
MACHINE
THE MODIFICATION OF MELT-BLOWN
POLYPROPYLENE MATERIAL INFLUENCE OF
THE FIELD OF MICROWAVE RADIATION
J21310-042
J21310-043
RESEARCH INTO IMPACT FORCE ON A
FLEXIBLE SEGMENT OF INERTIAL CUTTING
ROTOR ACTUATING DEVICE
Kyiv, Heroyiv Oborony, 15, 03041
2Kerch State Marine Technical
University,
Kerch, Ordzhonіkіdze, 82, 98309
Krap N.P., Yuzevych V.M.
Lviv Institute of Economy and Tourism
Lviv, Mentsynsky street, 8
Physico-Mechanical Institute of NAS of
Ukraine
Lviv, Naukova street, 5
Kondratova J.N., Kondratov D.V.,
Mogilevich L.I.
Saratov State University, Saratov,
Stolypin Volga Region Institute, Volga
Region Branch MIIT
Zaviryuha M., Pilip V.
Nikolaev National Agrarian University,
Nikolaev, Krilova St. 17a, 54000
Havrysh V.I., Rakul O.I.
Mykolaiv National Agrarian University,
Mykolaiv, Krylovа St. 17a, 54038
Varnakov D.V.
Ulyanovsk State University,
Ulyanovsk, Leo Tolstoy 42, 432048
Semichevskaya N.P., Kulchanovsky
S.A.
Amur State University
Plaksina I.V., Kondratov D.V.
Stolypin Volga Region Institute,
Russia, Saratov, Sobornaya, 23/25,
410031
Boiko S.M., Honcharov V.V.
Institute of Chemical Technology,
V.Dal’ East-Ukrainian National
University (Rubezhnoe)
Bilynsky Y.Y., Ionina K.Y.
Vinnitsa National Technical University
Kuznetsov E.M.
Volga State University of
Telecommunications and Informatics
Kuznetsov E.M., Banov A.S.
Kuznetsov E., Skvortsov P.S.
Bobkov A.V.
Komsomolsk-on-Amur state technical
university
Lysak I.A., Lysak G.V.
National Research Tomsk Polytechnic
University,
634050, Russia, Tomsk, Lenina, 30
Bukhtoyarov L.D., Sergienko D.S.
Voronezh State Academy of Forestry
and Technologies,
J21310-044
ANALYSIS OF TRANSITION THERMAL PROCESS
IN AUTOMOTIVE LAMPS
J21310-045
PNEUMATIC CLASSIFICATION OF THE
GRANULAR MATERIALS
J21310-046
PHYSICAL MODEL OF HIGH-DISPERSE GASCONDENSATE SYSTEMS FORMATION IN
TURBULENT GAS FLOW
J21310-047
STRUCTURAL TRANSFORMATION AND
ANALYSIS OF A CONTROL SYSTEM BASED ON
DIGITAL DYNAMIC PULSE FREQUENCY
MODULATION FOR OBJECTS WITH TRANSPORT
DELAY
ON THE APPLICATION OF INFORMATIONDIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM “CHART 2020” IN THE
CABINET OF VISION CORRECTION
LINES OF SURFACE PLASTIC DEFORMATION OF
MACHINE DETAILS DEVELOPMENT
J21310-048
J21310-049
J21310-050
EXPERIMENTAL STUDY OF TECHNOLOGICAL
EFFICIENCY VIBRATING PEELING GRAIN
J21310-051
RESERVATION AS AN EFFECTIVE METHOD OF
ENSURING THE RELIABILITY OF COMPLEX
AGRICULTURAL MACHINERY
J21310-052
THEORETICAL ANALYSIS STRUCTURAL AND
KINEMATICS PARAMETERS DEVICE FOR
CLEANING HEADS TO DEVICE COMBINE FOR
COLLECTION OF CORN
THE CLASSIFICATION OF WAYS TO IMPROVE
BUILDINGS ENERGY EFFICIENCY OF
RESIDENTIAL QUARTERS AT COMPLEX
RECONSTRUCTION AND HOUSING
DEVELOPMENT
J21310-053
J21310-054
J21310-055
USE OF NONCONVENTIONAL POWER FOR
WATER-PREPARATION AND HEAT SUPPLIES OF
INDEPENDENT INDUSTRIAL TARGETS OF
MARINE AQUACALTUR
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY IN THE GRAPHIC
PREPARATION STUDENTS. INTERNET: "FOR"
AND "AGAINST"
J21310-056
MODERN TRAINING GRAPHIC DISCIPLINES
J21310-057
QUALITY CONTROL IN KNEADING THE PASTRY
Piontkovskaya S.А., Mastaeva S.P.,
Petinov Y.О.
Togliatti State University, Togliatti,
Belarusian,14, 445667
Litvinenko A.V.,Yuhimenko N.P.
Sumy state university, 2 Rimskogo –
Korsakova street, Sumy 40007
Lyaposchenko O.O., Nastenko O.V.,
Logvin A.V., Al - Rammahi M.M.
Sumy State University, Sumy, 2
Rimsky-Korsakov st., Sumy 40007
Aitchanov B.H., Baimuratov O.A.,
Kozhamzharova D.K., NikulinV.V.
Kazakh National Technical University
after K.I.Satpaev
Almaty, Satpaeva 22
Kol`sunov A.A., Kompaniets V.S.
Southern Federal University,
Taganrog, Tchehova 2, 347928
Bobrovskii N.M., Melnikov P.A.,
Bobrovskii I.N.,
Ezhelev A.V., Lukyanov A.A.
Tolyatti State University, Russia,
Tolyatti
Denisko O.A., Tkachuk A.I.
Ukraine
Boyko A., **Bondarenko O.
National University of Bioresources and
**Nikolaev National Agrarian
University, Nikolaev, Krilova St. 17a,
54038
Gruban V.
Nikolaev National Agrarian University,
Nikolaev, Krilova St. 17a, 54038
Nechepurenko D.S., Epifantseva S.V.
Prydniprovs’ka State Academy of Civil
Engineering and Architecture
Molotkov V.E.
Institute of marine technology problems
FEB RAS,
690091, Vladivostok, Suchanova 5а.
Machekhina D. V.
Polytechnic Institute of the Siberian
Federal University
Krasnoyarsk, ul. Kirenskogo 26
Klesova K. I.
Polytechnic Institute of the Siberian
Federal University
Krasnoyarsk, Kirenskogo, 26
Stadnuk I., Konevech M., 1Vasyliv V.
Ternopil Ivan Pul’uj National Technical
University, Ternopil
1National university of life and
environmental sciences of Ukraine, Kyiv
J21310-058
INNOVATIVE SOLUTIONS TO RESEARCH IN
DRYING TECHNOLOGY OF FOOD RAW
MATERIALS
J21310-059
EFFECT OF FERMENT
MICROFLORA COMBINATIONS ON QUALITY
AND OUTPUT OF GOAT’S CURD
J21310-060
RESEARCH OF CONTRAPERTURE SPEAKERS IN
ACOUSTIC
J21310-061
THE RESEARCH OF HIGH-STRENGTH DIMENSION
STONE MINING
TECHNOLOGICAL SCHEMES IN RUSSIA AND
ABROAD
J21310-062
THE DIRECTION OF THE SOFTWARE
IMPLEMENTATION OF THE ELECTRONIC
EDUCATIONAL RESOURCES
J21310-063
INFORMATION SUPPORT
SCIENTIFIC-RESEARCH WORK OF STUDENTS
J21310-064
APPLICABLE INVESTIGATION OF GEOMETRIC
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE BOILER FURNACE
ON THE FORMATION OF NITROGEN OXIDES
MODELLING OF ANY FUNCTION OF DENSITY OF
DISTRIBUTION BY THE SUM EXHIBITOR
J21310-065
J21310-066
STUDIES OF INFLUENCE ON NETWORK 24-PULSE
RECTIFIER ON BASIS OF THYRISTOR
CONVERTERS
J21310-067
PILOT INSTALLATION FOR THE EXTRACTION OF
SUGAR FROM HYDROLYZED TIMBER
J21310-068
POSSIBLE APPLICATIONS OF AMALGAM
METHOD FOR PRODUCTION OF FLUORESCENT
LAMPS OF SMALL DIAMETER
J21310-069
PROSPECTS OF WIND POWER PLANTS
CONSTRUCTION IN THE REPUBLIC OF
KAZAKHSTAN
J21310-070
AUTOMATION OF WORK OF VALVES OF THE
PISTON COMPRESSOR
Schutyuk V.V., Vasulenko S.M.,
Bessarab A.S., 1Vasyliv V.P.
National university of food tecnologies,
Kyiv
environmental sciences of Ukraine, Kyiv
Ryzhkova T.N.
Kharkiv state zooveterinary academy,
Ministry of Agricultural Policy and Food
of Ukraine, 62341, KSZVA, Malaya
Danilovka, Dergachi district, Kharkiv
region.
Golovkina L.V, Umayrov R.Y.
Kharkov national university of
radioelectronics,
Kharkov, pr. Lenina 14, 61166
Pershin G.D., Karaulov N.G.,
Ulyakov M.S.
FSBEI HРE “Magnitogorsk State
Technical University named after G.I.
Nosov”, Chelyabinsk region,
455000
Vishtak O. V.
Balakovo Institute of technique,
technology and management (a branch)
Saratov State Technical University
named after Gagarin»
Vishtak N. M.
Balakovo Institute of technique,
technology and management (a branch)
Saratov state technical University
named after Gagarin»
Mikhailov G., P.A. Batrakov P.A.,
Terebilov S.V.
Omsk State Technical University
Chupakhina L.R., Kireeva N. V.
Povolzhskiy State University of
Telecommunications and Informatics,
Radionov A.A., Maklakov A.S.,
Karyakina E. A.
Research), Chelyabinsk, Lenin ave 76,
454080
Nenko M.V., Popovich O.M.
Institute of Chemical Technology of the
Volodymyr Dal East Ukrainian National
University (Rubezhnoe),
Rubezhnoe, Lenina 31, 93009
Gorbunov A.A., Lamkov E.A.,
Ruzmanov V.S., Fedorenko A.S.
Saransk, Bolshevistskaya, 68, 40005
Tleuov A.,Pyastolova I., Tleuova A.
S.Seifullin Kazakh Agro Technical
University, Kazakhstan
Astana, av. Victory 62, 010010
Bolshtyansky P.A., Lysenko E.A.,
Bolshtyansky A.P.
Omsk state technical university, Russia
Omsk, Mira pr., 11, 644050
J21310-071
RESEARCH PROCESS FRETTING EQUIPMENT
AND FOOD PROCESSING INDUSTRIES
J21310-072
RAMAN INVESTIGATION OF DIAMOND-LIKE
CARBON FILMS
J21310-073
CALCULATING ESTIMATION OF WEAR
INTENSITY FOR THE CONTACT SURFACES
OBTAINED BY MACHINING
J21310-074
DATA FLOW SAFETY TECHNOLOGIES IN
PRODUCTION CONTROL AUTOMATION
J21310-075
PROCESS BASES OF PROVISION OF THE
PERFORMANCE CRITERIA REQUIRED FOR GTE
PARTS
NEW TECHNOLOGY SOLUTIONS IMPLEMENTED
IN THE COURSE OF GTE BLADE GRINDING
PROCESS AUTOMATION
J21310-076
J21310-077
PROBLEM SOLVING AT THE INITIAL STAGE OF
CASTING PRACTICE PROJECTING FOR
INVESTMENT PATTERNS OF GAS TURBINE
ENGINE BLADES MADE OF REFRACTORY
ALLOYS
J21310-078
CALIBRATION PROFILE Z-SHAPED WIRE
J21310-079
BIOTECHNOLOGY OF SOFT CHEESE PRODUCTS
MADE BY METHOD OF THERMO-ACID
COAGULATION
J21310-080
USE OF CAVITATION EFFECTS TO HANDLE
LIQUIDS
ECM (1985-Ltd) Qiryat-Bialik, Israel
1Sukhenko J.G., 2Dzyub A.G.,
3Manuilov V.V., 1Suhenko V.Y.
1National University of Life and
03041, Ukraine, Kyiv. st. Geroev
Oborony, 15
2National University of Food
Technologies,
01033, Ukraine, Kyiv. st.Vladimirskaya,
68
3Kerchensky State Marine Technical
University,
98300, Ukraine, Crimea, Kerch, st.
Ordzhonikidze, 82
Valuhov D. P., Pigulev R. V., Sidorov
K. I., Tarala V.A., Titarenko А.А.,
Shevchenko M.Yu.
North Caucasus federal university
Stavropol, av. Kulakova 2/2, 355000
Bezyazychny V.F.
Federal State Educational Institution of
Higher Professional Education Rybinsk
State Aviation Technical University by
P.A. Solovyev
Kamakin V.A.
Higher Professional Education Rybinsk
State Aviation Technical University by
P.A. Solovyev
Kozhina T.D., Eroshkov V.Y.
Higher Professional Education
Poletaev V.A.
Rybinsk State Aviation The paper deals
with the issues of provision of the
performance criteria required for parts in
mechanical engineering in terms of GTE
parts. The suggested methods to assign
technological process conditions
depending on the performance criteria
required is based on theoretical evidence
Technical University by P.A. Solovyev
Shatulsky А.А.
Federal State-Financed Educational
Institution of High Professional
Education
«P. A. Solovyov Rybinsk State Aviation
Technical University»
Danenko V.F., Ponkratova G.V.,
Mishchuk H.E., Gultsev E.O.
Volgograd state technical University
Savchenko O.O., Bal-Prylypko L.V.
Kyiv, Heroiv Oborony st., 15, 03041
Matiyaschuk А.N., Matiyaschuk О.V.
Environmental Sciences of Ukraine;
National University of Food
Technologies
J21310-081
APPLICATIVE COMPUTATIONAL
ENVIRONMENTS CONSTRUCTION
J21310-082
MODELING OF HEAT TRANSFER PROCESSES IN
THE ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM WITH HEATING
DEVICE
ANTIJAMMING TRANSMISSION OF
INFORMATION BASED ON MULTVALUED
BINOMIAL CODES
PROBLEMS OF HEAT TRANSFER IN THE
FURNACE OF BOILERS. OVERVIEW OF
CALCULATION METHODS
WAYS OF INCREASE OF EFFICIENCY OF
GRINDING OF HARDLY PROCESSED
MATERIALS
J21310-083
J21310-084
J21310-085
J21310-086
STUDY OF INFLUENCE OF THYRISTOR
CONVERTER ON THE SUPPLY NETWORK
J21310-087
THE SYSTEM OF AUTOMATIC CONTROL OF
PROCESS OF INCINERATION OF FUEL IS IN
РЕКУПЕРАТИВНЫХ
SOKERS
J21310-088
ANALYSIS OF PROBLEMS OF IMPLEMENTATION
AND USE OF HEALTH DIAGNOSTIC EQUIPMENT
J21310-089
MATHEMATICAL MODELLING OF BAY OPTION
OF PRIMORSKAYA EMBANKMENT
RECONSTRUCTION IN THE CITY OF SOCHI
J21310-090
METHODS FOR DETERMINING THE FORM OF
CHANNELS SPRAY DEVICE DRYERS
J21310-091
THE RESEARCH OF AN EFFICIENT BIODIESEL
NEUTRALIZATION
J21310-092
PROJECT TECHNOLOGY OF VEGETABLE
GERODIETETICAL SMOOTHIE
J21310-093
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY FOR
DETERMINATION OF ENVIRONMENTAL
ACTIVITIES FOR COMPANIES REFINERY
Roslovtsev V.V.
National Research Nuclear University
MEPhI,
Moscow, Kashirskoye sh. 31, 115409
Rakov V.A.
Vologda State Technical University,
Vologda, Lenina 15, 160024
Borysenko A. A.,Protasova T.
A.,Protasova K. A.
Sumy State University
Mikhailov A.G., Batrakov P.A.,
Terebilov S.V.
Moroz T.Y.
The Kolomna institute (branch) of
Moscow state university
of mechanical engineering (MAMI)
Russian Federation, Moscow region,
Kolomna, Oktyabrskoy Revolyutsii St.,
408
Radionov A.A., Maklakov A.S.,
Karyakina E. A.
Research), Chelyabinsk, Lenin ave 76,
454080
Radchenko Yu.N., Іvanov V.І.,
Zinchenko V.Yu.
National metallurgical academy of
Ukraine, Dnipropetrovs’k,
Zaporozhya state engineering academy
*Uvaisov S.U., **Avdeuk O.A.
*MIEM HSE Univ. RT,
**Volgograd State Technical University
Makarov N.K.
Sochi State University,
Sovetskaya St. 26 a, 354000, Sochi,
Russia
Bessarab A.S., Schutyuk V.V., Boyko
V.I., 1Vasyliv V.P.
National university of food tecnologies,
Kyiv, Volodimirska st., 68, 01601.
environmental sciences of Ukraine,
Kyiv, Heroyiv Oborony st., 15, 03041
Polishchuk A.V., Kazak, N.I.,
Polishchuk V.N.
National university of life and
environmental sciences of Ukraine
Svidlo K.V. 1,Peresichnyi, M.I. 2,
Dyakov A.G. 3, D.V. Lipovyi D.V. 1
1Kharkiv Institute of Trade and
Economics of Kyiv University of Trade
and Economics, Kharkiv, Otakara
Yarosha 8, 61045
2 Kyiv University of Trade and
Economis, Kyiv, Kioto 19,02156
3 Kharkiv National University of
Catering and Trade, Kharkiv,
Klochkovskaya 333, 61045
Filippov V.N.
Ufa State Petroleum Technological
University,
J21310-094
J21310-095
AND PETROCHEMICAL COMPLEX
BASHKORTOSTAN
PLANNING A WATER-TREATMENT PLANT
CONSTRUCTION IN UNCERTAIN ECONOMIC AND
LEGISLATIVE ENVIRONMENT
STRENGTH AND STIFFNESS ANALYSIS FOR
MECHANICAL TRANSMISSIONS IN
SOLIDWORKS BASED ON API
J21310-096
AUTOMATION OF MULTICRITERIA TRUNCATION
OF THE SET OF TECHNICAL OBJECTS
J21310-097
PERFECTION OF BIOTECHNOLOGICAL
PROCESSES OF PROCESSING OF AGRICULTURAL
RAW MATERIAL
J21310-098
PROGRAM EVALUATION ERGONOMICS
USER INTERFACE WEB-SITES
J21310-099
MODELS OF KNOWLEDGE BASES
J21310-100
MODELING OF THE PROCESS OF DRAWING A
BIMETALLIC WIRE, CARBON STEEL + 12H18N10T
UNDER VARIOUS TECHNOLOGICAL OPTIONS,
DRAWING DIES
ROBUSTNESS OF THE SYSTEM "SMART HOUSE"
J21310-101
J21310-102
DEVELOPMENT OF CORPORATE SYSTEM OF THE
AUTOMATED TESTING OF WEB- APPLICATIONS
J21310-103
ACOUSTICAL TRANSMISSION CHANNEL OF THE
INFORMATION IN UNDERGROUND TURNPIKE
WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS
REACTIVE POWER OF DISPLACEMENT AND
DISTORTION
J21310-104
J21310-105
J21310-106
MODELING OF NOISE ON THE BITMAP IMAGES
WITH THE USE OF GENERATORS OF PSEUDORANDOM VALUES
BUILDING-ROAD MACHINES WITH CYCLOIDAL
MOVEMENT OF WORKING BODIES
J21310-107
THE USE OF CYCLOIDAL FORMS OF OPERATIVE
PARTS IN CONSTRUCTION-ROAD MACHINES
J21310-108
DIGITAL FILTERS
J21310-109
CHANGES OF ADHESION OF THE NEW PASTILA
WARES IN RECREATIONAL PURPOSES
ANALYSIS OF INFLUENCE OF INERTIA FORCES
ON THE DYNAMICS OF TURBINE DISK
J21310-110
Ufa, Kosmonavtov 1, 450062
Nazimko V.V.
Donetsk National Technical University
Chugunov M.V., Osyka V.V.,
Makhrov G.A.
Ogarev Mordovia State University, 68
Bolshevistskaya Str., Saransk 430005,
Russia
Shkurina G.L, Kandirin Y.V.
National research university "MEI"
Volgograd state technical university
Kretova J.I., Potoroko I.J.
« the Southern - Ural state university »
(National research university),
454080 city of Chelyabinsk, Lenin 76
Filippova A.G., Belozjerov E.S.
Filippov V.N.
Ufa State Petroleum Technological
University, Ufa, Kosmonavtov 1,
450062
Burdaev V.P.
The Kharkov national economic
university
Danenko V. F., Ponkratova G.V.,
Nikitin V.A.
Volgograd state technical University,
Volgograd, etc. V.I. Lenin, 28, 400005
Kowalski V.I., Lebedev D.Y.
National Technical University of
Ukraine "Kyiv Polytechnic Institute"
Kyiv, str. Polytechnic 16, 03057
Bednyak S.G., Tikhanov A.A.
Volga region state university of
telecommunications and informatics
Zibrov V.А.
Don state engineering university,
Rostov-on-Don, Gagarin's square, 1.
Solomchak О. V.
Ivano-Frankivsk National University of
Oli and Gas,
Ivano-Frankivsk, Karpats’ka 15, 76019
Atink D.K.
Omsk state technical University, Omsk,
Mira 11, 644050
Lee S.V., Rabat O.Zh., Musin K.S.
Kazakh automobile and road academy
name L.B. Goncharov
Lee S.V., Rabat O.Zh., Musin K.S.
Kazakh automobile and road academy
name L.B. Goncharov
Ihnatenko V. V., Lebedev D. Y.
Shapovalova V. P.
National University of Food technology
Lysenko V.S.
Kazakh National Pedagogical University
by name Abay
J21310-111
FEATURES OF DIAMOND-WIRE SAWS
APPLICATION FOR ROCK OVERBURDEN
REMOVAL AT MARBLE QUARRY
CONSTRUCTION
J21310-112
AUTOMATION OF СOURSE СONTENT
СONSTRUCTION
MODELLING OF THE STUDENT’S EDUCATIONAL
TRAJECTORY WITH REGARD TO THE
REQUIREMENTS OF THE LABOUR MARKET
HYDROELASTICITY GEOMETRICALLY the
IRREGULAR CYLINDRICAL SHELL, CONTAINING
VISCOUS INCOMPRESSIBLE LIQUID AND RIGID
CYLINDER, IN THE CASE OF VIBRATIONS
DEVELOPMENT OF ALGORITHMS OF THREEDIMENSIONAL DESIGN OF DESIGNER
HEADGEAR
EVALUATION BANDAGE LOSS OF CIRCULAR
PROFILE CASCADE OF SMALL
TURBOMACHINERY
REVIEW OF FUTURE DEVELOPMENTS AND
APPLICATION OF COMPOSITES AND SMART
ENGINEERING MATERIALS IN AVIATION,
TRANSPORT AND ENERGETICS
J21310-113
J21310-114
J21310-115
J21310-116
J21310-117
J21310-118
J21310-119
J21310-120
J21310-121
J21310-122
J21310-123
HYDRAULIC FORGING OF STEPPED PIPE STOCK
DESIGN OF PRODUCTION STEPS OF AUTOMATED
TURBINE VANE CUTTING
RESEARCH OF DATA TRANSFER SYSTEM BASED
ON SWITCHED MULTICORE FIBER INTERFACE
HYBRID CATALYTIC ZEOLITE – Ni3Al CERMET
FILTE MATERIALS
STRUCTURAL AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
OF FORCEMEAT SEMI-PRODUCTS OF FLOURY
FOOD PRODUCTS WITH DIETARY SUPPLEMENTS
DEVELOPMENT OF CONVEYOR INFLOW OF
PICKLED APPLES MADE FROM DIFFERENT
VARIETIES
J21310-124
TEMPERATURE MONITORING SYSTEM
J21310-125
VENTILATION SYSTEM BASED ON CO2 LEVEL
J21310-126
SELECTION OF TECHNOLOGICAL SCHEME OF
MILK PROCESSING DEPENDING ON ITS
COMPOSITION
Pershin G. D., Karaulov N. G.,
Ulyakov M. S., Sharov V. N.
Nosov Magnitogorsk State Technical
University, Chelyabinsk region,
455000
Bisikalo O., Kravchuk I.
Mahnitkina O.V.
Altai State University, Barnaul, Lenina
61, 656049
Kalinina A.V. Kondratov D.V.
Russian Presidential Academy of
National Economy and Public
Administration
Kryukova N.A., Levtsova N.B.
Volga region state university of service,
Tolyatti, Gagarinа 4
Каtalazhnova I.N.
Komsomolsk-on-Amur state technical
university
Kozhina Т.D, Eroshkov V.Y.
P.A. Solovyov Rybinsk State Aviation
Technical University
152934, Rybinsk, Yaroslavl region,
Pushkin str., 53
Matveyev А. S.
Poletaev V.A.
Chaika S.V., Sharov V.G.
Soloviev Rybinsk State Aviation
Technical University, Rybinsk,
Yaroslavl region, Russian Federation
Gulyaev P.Yu.
Ugra State University
Kravchenko M., Demichkovska M.
Gun’ko S.M., Potanin D.V.
Glagolev A.A., Lebedev D.Y.
Zaichenko O. O., Lebedev D.Y.
Ryzhkova T.N., Pertsevoy F.V.
Kharkiv state zooveterinary academy,
Ministry of Agricultural Policy and Food
of Ukraine, 62341, KSZVA, Malaya
Danilovka, Dergachi district, Kharkiv
region.
J21310-001
UDC 637.302:637.12’639
Ryzhkova T.N.
METHOD TO REDUCE THE NUMBER OF SOMATIC CELLS IN MILK
TO PRODUCE CHEESE
Kharkov state zooveterinary academy
Kharkiv region, Dergachy district, 62341
The article presents the method to improve physical and chemical values of
cow’s and goat’s milk samples including the reduction of the number of somatic cells
in the above milk samples with the help of aqueous solutions of ascorbic and citric
acids.
Key words: milk, somatic cells, acids, method, cheese.
Introduction. The use of aqueous solutions (ascorbic and citric acids or
mixtures from them) in rennet cheese production provided the increase in the density
of clots and in the decrease in the loss of its constituents with the cheese whey [1].
Thus, the suggestion has been made about the possible effect of organic acids that
reduce the number of somatic cells in milk.
It is known that under the influence of the increased number of somatic cells
in milk the disorder of biochemical and microbiological processes that stimulate the
decrease in such value as its rennetability [2].
The first portions of cow’s milk have low content of fat and a great number of
somatic cells. They have 40 times as many microorganisms as in the final portions
[3]. The conduction of the simple preparatory operation before milking cows: milking
of the first portions of milk allows to improve the composition of milk, to increase
milk yields and increase milk safety from the very beginning [4].
For the first time in Ukraine the author of the article in close cooperation
with the stuff of the Institute of Animal Husbandry of Ukrainian Academy of
Agricultural Sciences developed 2 standards: the first one for goat’s milk; the above
standard was introduced into practice in 2010 [5]; the second standard was developed
by the author for soft rennet cheese made from goat’s milk GOST (State Standard of
Ukraine) “Soft cheese made from goat’s milk. Technical conditions”, at present the
standard is in the final stage of its approval.
According to the above mentioned normative documents it is necessary to
use milk (not lower than sort 1) with the density not less than 1,027 0 A to produce
soft rennet cheese from goat’s milk including pickled cheese. Its bacterial
contamination must be from 100 to 300 000 NCU/ cm3 , the content of somatic cells
(SC) not more than 600 000 NCU /cm3 , the temperature not higher than
6
0
C. By all that the mass rate of protein and fat in goat’s milk must be not
lower than 3,0 and 3,5 % respectively.
It should be noted that the data on the negative influence of the increased
number of somatic cells in milk that effect the reduction of the quality of dairy
products only apply to cow’s milk and products made from it. The information about
the difference and physical and chemical composition of the first “abnormal” and the
second portions of normal milk of two types produced from the udder of the groups
of animals; about the influence of aqueous solutions of the organic acids on the
change of the physical and chemical composition of milk samples including the
amount of somatic cells in milk; about the influence of “normal” and “abnormal”
milk on the expenditure for the production of 1 ton of cheese and its output from 1
ton of mixture of
dairy raw materials
is extremely limited in the scientific
publications.
The aim of the investigation was to study the influence of aqueous solutions
of organic (ascorbic) acid and the mixtures from two kinds of organic acids (ascorbic
and citric) on the changes of samples of two types of milk and expenditure of milk to
produce 1 ton of cheese and its output from 1 ton of mixture.
Materials and methods. The first and the second portions of milk of 250 cm3
each were selected and placed in the separate cups; the portions were taken from the
udders of the group of 10 cows and simultaneously from the same quantity of goats
of Zaanenskaya breed and mixed breeds of goats kept on private farms of Kharkov
region. Moreover the milk from the second portion of the udders of the animals that
was supposed to have the moderate content of somatic cells was marked as the
control sample or “normal milk”. But the milk taken from the first portions of the
udders of cows and goats that was supposed to have the increased number of somatic
cells was designated as an experimental sample or “abnormal milk”. The first and the
second portions of milk from the udders of both kinds of animals were processed to
produce rennet pickled cheese.
Their physical and chemical composition was determined and the
comparative analysis of theoretical and factual output of cheese from the normalized
mixture of dairy raw materials was conducted. The above mixture had 2,9 % of fat,
moderate or increased content of somatic cells in its composition, the titrated acidity
of both types of milk was not higher than 21 o T. The investigations of the physical
and chemical values of cow’s and goat’s milk samples were conducted
instrumentally: on infra-red analyzer Bentley 150 and Somaccount 150-counter of
somatic cells in the certified laboratory of the Institute of Animal Husbandry of
Ukrainian Academy of Agricultural Science in Kharkov region.
The results of the investigation. The physical and chemical composition of
the two kinds of milk (cow’s and goat’s) was determined, the results of the
investigations are presented in table 1.
Table 1
Physical and chemical composition of samples of two kinds of milk
Mass rate%
fat
protein
Name of milk samples
lactose
dry
matter
Number
of
somatic
cells
(thousand/
cm3)
Initial samples of milk
Control № 1 (2nd portion of 3,40±0,05
cow’s milk). “Normal”
Experimental № 2 (1st portion 2,73±0,05
of cow’s milk). “Abnormal”
Control № 3 (2nd portion of 5,34±0,05
goat’s milk). “Normal”
3,57±0,05 4,64±0,05 11,81±0,05 495±0,05
3,51±0,05 4,58±0,05 11,28±0,05 712±0,05
3,55±0,05 4,44±0,05 13,18±0,05 62±0,05
Experimental № 4 (1st portion 3,29±0,05 3,47±0,05 4,43±0,05 11,45±0,05 256±0,05
of goat’s milk). “Abnormal”
With ascorbic acid, 0,02 mass., %
Control № 1 (2nd portion of3,47±0,05
3,73±0,05 4,69±0,05 12,08±0,05 482±0,05
Experimental № 2 (1st portion2,78±0,05s 3,72±0,05 4,62±0,05 11,60±0,05 700±0,05
of cow’s milk). “Abnormal”
Control № 3 (2nd portion of5,27±0,05
3,72±0,05 4,48±0,05 13,35±0,05 60±0,05
goat’s milk) “Normal”
Experimental № 4 (1st portion3,23±0,05
3,52±0,05 4,26±0,05 11,55±0,05 222±0,05
of goat’s milk). “Abnormal”
With ascorbic and citric acid ( 0,02 mass., % each)
Control № 1 (2 nd portion of
Experimental № 2 (1 st
portion of cow’s milk).
“Abnormal”
Control № 3 (2nd portion of
goat’s milk). “Normal”
Experimental № 4 (1st portion
of goat’s milk) “Abnormal”
3,93±0,05
3,67±0,05 4,54±0,05
11,99±0,05 480±0,05
3,43±0,05
3,36±0,05 4,45±0,05 11,82±0,05
5,45±0,05
3,76±0,05 4,29±0,05
13,36±0,05 58±0,05
3,29±0,05
3,48±0,05 4,05±0,05
11,6±0,05
691±0,05
220±0,05
It can be seen from the table that under the influence of the addition of one
kind of acid (ascorbic) into the second portions of the samples of the “normal” and
into the first portions of the samples of the “abnormal” both cow’s and goat’s milk
no trustworthy difference between the values of the mass rate of fat in the samples of
the initial and acidulated milk was detected (P ≤ 0,95).
After applying the additional quantity of another kind of organic acid (citric}
the efficiency of their mutual effect increased. Thus, the addition of the mixture from
ascorbic and citric acids (0,02 mass,, % each) into the second portions of the “normal
“ cow’s milk of the control sample №1 and to the “abnormal” (into the first portions)
of the experimental sample of cow’s milk №2 the mass rate of fat increased by 0,53
and 0,7 % respectively (P ≥ 0,99).
The addition of the analogous amount of the mixture from two acids (into
the second portions) of the “normal” of the control sample of goat’s milk №3
influenced the increase in the mass rate of fat in it by 0,18 % (P>_0,95).
The addition of one ascorbic acid (into the second portions) to the “normal”
of the control sample of cow’s milk №1 and (into the first portions) to the “abnormal”
of the analogous kind of milk of the experimental sample №2 provided the increase
in the mass rate of protein in it by 0,16 and 0,21 % respectively. The addition of the
mixture from ascorbic and citric acids (0,02 mass., % each) to the “normal” cow’s
milk of the control sample №1 promoted the increase in the mass rate of protein by
0,1 % (P ≥ 0,95). The addition of only the above-mentioned (ascorbic) acid (into the
second portions) to the “normal” milk of the control sample of goat’s milk №3
promoted the increase in the mass rate of protein by 0,17 % (P ≥ 0,99). No
trustworthy difference between the values of the mass rate of protein (in the first
portions) in the experimental samples of the “abnormal” goat’s milk № 4 before and
after the acidulation by one kind of organic acid (ascorbic) has been registered. Under
the influence of the mixture of two organic acids (ascorbic and citric) in the abovementioned doses after the addition (into the second portions) to the “normal” milk of
the control sample of goat’s milk №3 the mass rate of protein in it increased by
0,21%. There was no trustworthy difference between the values of the mass rate of
protein (in the first portion) in the “abnormal” milk of the experimental sample of the
analogous kind of milk №4 before and after acidulation (P ≤ 0,95).
It should be noted that the addition of the doses of the organic acids to all
samples of milk used in the test promoted the increase in the amount of lactose
conditioned by the acidic hydrolysis of lactose with the formation of salts of lactic
acid – lactates.
The addition of only ascorbic acid (into the second portions) to the control
sample of “normal” cow’s milk №1 and (into the first portions) of the “abnormal”
one of the analogous kind of milk №2 promoted the increase in the mass rate of dry
matter by 0,27 and 0,32 % respectively (P ≥ 0,99).
Moreover the addition of the increased amount of organic acids (the mixture of
ascorbic and citric acids, 0,02 mass.% each) (into the second portions) to both the
control sample of the “normal” cow’s milk №1 and (into the first portions) to the
“abnormal” analogous kind of milk of the experimental sample №2 favored the
increase in the mass rate of dry matter in both samples of cow’s milk by 0,18 and
0,54 % respectively (P ≥ 0,99). The acidulation of the second portions of the
“normal” control sample of goat’s milk №3 and the first portions of the “abnormal”
experimental sample of the analogous kind of milk № 4 by one kind of ascorbic acid
favored the increase in the mass rate of dry matter in the above samples by 0,17 and
0,1 % respectively. Moreover the acidulation of the above - mentioned samples (the
second portions) of the control sample of the “normal” of goat’s milk №3 and (the
first portions) of the “abnormal” experimental sample of the analogous kind of milk
№4 by the mixtures of two kinds of organic acids favored the increase in the mass
rate of dry matter in milk by 0,18 and 0,15 % respectively.
The addition of only ascorbic acid (into the second portions) of both the
control sample of “normal” cow’s milk №1 and (into the first portions) of the
“abnormal” experimental sample of the analogous kind of milk №2 provided the
decrease in the amount of somatic cells in the above samples by 13 000 and
12 000/cm3 respectively. The addition of the mixtures of two kinds of organic acids
(into the second portions) of the control sample of “normal” cow’s milk
№1 and (into the first portions) of the “abnormal” experimental sample of the
analogous kind of milk № 2 favored the decrease in the number of somatic cells by
15 000 and 21 000/cm3 respectively.
The addition of only ascorbic acid (into the first portions) of the control
sample of “normal” goat’s milk №3 and (into the second portions) of the “abnormal”
experimental sample of the analogous kind of milk №4 provided the decrease in the
amount of somatic cells in the above samples by 2 000 and 34 000/cm3 respectively.
The efficiency of the decrease in the level of somatic cells was high due to the
influence of the mixture of two kinds of acids added to the second portions of the
“normal” control sample of goat’s milk №3 and (into the first portions) of the
“abnormal” experimental sample of the analogous kind of milk
№4. Thus, the
number of somatic cells in them decreased by 4 000 and 36 000/ cm3 respectively.
The first and the second portions of the cow’s and goat’s milk were processed into
rennet pickled cheese. Moreover the pickled cheese “Kozatsky” made from cow’s
milk served as the analogue of the goat’s pickled cheese [6]. According to the
requirements of Technical Conditions of Ukraine and the technological instruction to
them the mass rate of fat in the 5-day-pickled cheese must be higher by 1,5 % as
compared with the values of the mature pickled 30-day cheese and the mass rate of
moisture in it must exceed 51 %. The results of the physical and chemical analysis of
the pickled cheese from cow’s and goat’s milk are presented in table 2
Table 2
Physical and chemical values of the fresh 5-day pickled cheese
mg/100 mg of the product
Kind of milk from
which
cheese
Mass rate, %
was Fat
in moisture
Acidity,
о
Т
Output
of Norm of
cheese from expen ton
of diture of
produced; name of the relation to
1
party.
dry matter
dairy
dairy
in cheese
mixture, kg
mixture
per 1 ton
of cheese,
ton
From cow’s
“Normal” (Control № 46,7±0,05
51,0±0,05 68,0±0,05
1)
111,73±0,0
8,95±0,05
5
“Abnormal”
46,4±0,05
49,8±0,05 80,0±0,05
109,9±0,05
9,10±0,05
(Experimental № 2)
From goat’s
“Normal” ( Control № 46,6±0,05
51,0±0,05 66,0±0,05 111,11±0,0
3)
9,0±0,05
5
“Abnormal”
(Experimental № 4)
46,2±0,05
49,7±0,05
76,0±0,0 109,17±0,0
5
9,16±0,05
5
It can be seen from Table 2 that the indices of the mass rate of fat in relation
to the dry matter of the cheese produced from cow’s “normal” milk had lower values
of mass rate of fat as compared with the same indices of the cheese produced from
“abnormal” milk by 0,3 and 0,4 mass., % (P ≤ 0,99).
The mass rate of moisture in cheese made from cow’s and goat’s “abnormal”
milk from the experimental parties of the pickled cheese №1 and №2 as well as
between №3 and №4 was lower than it was specified in the requirements of the
standard by 1,2 and 1,3 % respectively. The titrated acidity of cheese from the
“abnormal” milk was higher than in the cheese from the “normal” milk by 12 and 10
0
T respectively. As the results of the tasting assessment of the quality of the control
parties of cheese from the “normal” milk and the experimental parties of cheese from
the “abnormal” dairy raw materials conducted by the special commission showed
that all the above-mentioned led to the production of cheese with defects: cheese with
acid taste and odor and crumbled non-elastic consistency. The taste and odor of the
control parties of the pickled cheese produced from both kinds of “normal” milk
were different from the experimental parties of cheese produced from the
“abnormal” raw materials by acid milk taste and odor, by the presence of the elastic
consistency that is common for high-quality product. The expenditure of milk for the
production of cheese from the “abnormal” cow’s milk was higher by 150 kg as
compared with the analogous index of the product from the “normal” raw material of
the same kind. It influenced the reduction of cheese output from 1 ton of the
“abnormal” cow’s milk at 1,83 kg that is 1,68%. The expenditure of milk for the
production of 1 ton of cheese from the “abnormal” goat’s milk was higher by 160 kg
as compared with the analogous index of the product from the “normal” dairy raw
material. It influenced the reduction of the cheese output from 1 ton of the
“abnormal” cow’s milk by 1,94 kg, that is 1,75%.
Conclusion:
1. The use of mixtures from two kinds of organic acids (ascorbic and citric)
provided more effective reduction of somatic cells (SC) in the samples of “normal”
and “abnormal” cow’s and goat’s milk than the use of one kind of organic acids
(ascorbic).
2. The increase of physical and chemical samples of dairy raw material
under the influence of the added doses of organic acids can be explained by its
enrichment by disso loved components of membranes of fat globules of milk.
3. When cheese is produced from two kinds of “abnormal” milk the
expenditure of raw material for the production of 1 ton of the product increases.
Moreover the deviation from its theoretical output in the lesser part can be seen as
compared with the analogous value when pickled cheese is produced from “normal”
cow’s and goat’s milk by 1,63 …1,75%.
Literature:
1.Ryzhkova T.M. Patent for useful model № 45707 “Method of cheese clot
production when rennet cheese from goat’s milk is produced”, registered in the State
Register of Patents of Ukraine for useful models, 25 11.2009, Bul. № 22. –
4 p.
2. Rodionova G.V. Influence of season on milk quality / [Rodionova G.V. et al.]
// Processing of milk. – 2007. - № 3. – P. 20 – 23.
3. Chistyakova T.M. Technology of high quality milk production on dairy farms
// Processing of milk. – 2007. - № 3. – P. 32 – 34.
4. Busenko O.T. Technology of animal product production / [O.T. Busenko et
al.]. Kyiv: Agrarian education, 2001. – 424 p.
5. Goat’s milk, raw material. Technical conditions (SSTU 7006: 2010) – [
Standard 2010 – 01 – 0]. – K. State standard of consumption of Ukraine, 2010. – 9 p.
– (National standards of Ukraine).
6. Pickled cheese. Technical Conditions of Ukraine 46.39.069 – 95 and
technological instruction for them (approved by L. I. Marchuk, the deputy director of
the Chief Administration of Dairy Industry of the Ministry of Agriculture and Food
of Ukraine 11.12.95 ]. – [Date of introduction into practice 01.01.96]. K. - Ministry
of Agriculture and Food of Ukraine. Chief Administration of Dairy Industry. – 77 p.
J21310-002
UDC: 514.18
Petrovskaya N.M.
GRAPHIC PREPARATION OF STUDENTS ELECTROMECHANICAL
SPECIALTIES IN CONDITIONS OF MODERNIZATION OF THE RUSSIAN
EDUCATION
Institute of Education, Psychology and Sociology of the Siberian Federal
University, Krasnoyarsk, Svobodny 79
The article examines the role of new information technologies in the updated
educational system in teaching students of electro-mechanics with interdisciplinary
connections, preparing them for what follows professional activities to meet the
requirements of a modern economy.
Key words: informatization of education, professional competence, learning
efficiency, geometry, mathematics, engineering graphics.
The concept of modernization of Russian education defines the competence
approach, as an important conceptual provisions updating the content of education
and the development of state educational standards of higher education of the third
generation. Quality management education, including graphics, should be based on
the principles of ISO 9000, which in the 2008 version is considered the process
approach to the stages of the life cycle of services [6]. However, in accordance with
the concept under consideration for evaluation of services of the educational process
as an indicator qualimetric encouraged to take intelligence specialist.
The Bologna Declaration, adopted in 1999, made a number of goals that,
according to the Bologna Process, will create a single coherent European Higher
Education Area. The basic unit of Professional Standards are two main groups of
competencies - nadprofessionalnye (key) and professional, the formation of which
will enhance the fundamental bachelors and specialists [1]. During training, general
professional disciplines in the development of methodological support, various
subject-sign systems, providing support for teachers through the creation and
implementation of tools and conditions to achieve the result – the acquisition of
competencies.
The introduction of new educational standards based on the formation of
students' professional competencies and nadprofessionalnyh methodological activities
aimed at teaching to combine into a single set of content, methods, forms of
education, which is based on a textbook to improve student learning in the first place
due to the intensity of self- operation.
Growing amount of knowledge to students with decreasing hours of classroom
time requires optimization of the educational process. Engineering graphics is the
foundation of engineering education, forming the basic knowledge necessary for the
study of special subjects. Considering the problem of improving quality in teaching
descriptive geometry – a general professional engineering disciplines, we can not
exclude such important parts of the process as a creative activity and personal selfdevelopment [4] Descriptive geometry – the basis of graphics. In education, the
discipline, occupying an important position, needs to manage the quality of teaching.
One of the problems associated with quality management, needs to be addressed – the
special organizational and methodological training audiences (special furniture,
lighting, individual drawing tools, computer equipment, etc.). In addition, the quality
of the process of mastering the material associated with the rational redistribution of
the number of hours for individual consultations. Application of the methods of
descriptive geometry for applications requires linking specific courses to the program
for the subject "Descriptive geometry and engineering graphics." For example, for
students to explore the electromechanical profile "graphic profiling helical surfaces
instruments", hence the theme "Curves and Surfaces", etc. For an accurate
understanding of the tasks and the correct application of descriptive geometry and
engineering graphics students have to perform practical tasks in enterprises under the
guidance of a teacher and provided large-scale prototypes of real-world objects [6].
Created at design virtual product model contains information about the topology and
geometry of the parts and products in general, physical and mechanical
characteristics of the material [5].
Given that the amount of knowledge engineer is from the base and variable
components, the task of choosing the objects and their components should be
provided general engineering and interaction producing departments. Produce
department, with knowledge of the latest technologies in their specialties, help
departments that teach engineering drawing, form not only the jobs package, but
already in the first year engineering to form the vocabulary of the students.
In the graphic design students' real objects-creases the motivation to increase
jobs for the decision, as it is associated not only with the delivery of semester tests
and examinations, but mainly with the increase of their functional characteristics for
future engineering. Because when the drawings are used as real objects, activates the
learning process, in differentiation of specific elements of the objects are considered
industrial situation, and when considering the method of demonstration drawings
gaming.
Effectiveness study of descriptive geometry and engineering graffiti largely
depends on the use of new information technologies. Most powerful performance
brings the use of three-dimensional computer graphics and animation. Multimedia
software lectures not only gives an opportunity to diversify illustrative material, but
thanks to new technology that transformed the traditional form of education, it
becomes more interesting, allowing students to present and understand complex
theoretical material. Animation and electronic slides help students recognize the
different display of spatial objects in the plane, help the development of spatial
thinking and raise the level of mastery of the material. [3].
Development of modern technologies with the use of graphic design and
computer graphics software AutoCAD, Kompas, SolidWorks as a design tool
products of high quality should be based on objects, organically related to special
disciplines, and with quality and performance of real machines and facilities.
As shown, the application of the learning process of three-dimensional computer
graphics, animation, use of workbooks sposobstexist more productive learning
students of technical terms and concepts, the acquisition of practical skills, the
formation of students' self-management skills, development of spatial thinking. This
increases the efficiency of independent work of students both in preparing for the
practical exercises and exams, as well as their performance, despite the weak initial
training [2-3].
Thus, the development of modern methodological support, the use of new
interaction techniques in e-learning environment, the widespread use of new
multimedia
software
and
hardware systems, advanced telecommunications
infrastructure, including an open information space, and communication, which
involves all the participants of the educational process - it all together taken, can
address a range of problems, including such concepts as the implementation of an
individual approach to student support self-sufficiency and creative work of the
student, support collaboration, the development of modern international community
demanded skills. Specifically, global and critical thinking, effective communication
in oral and written communication skills, ability to work in a group, quickly adapt to
changes in the information and communication technologies
References.
1.
Baidenko V.I .Identifying competencies of graduates, as a necessary stage of
designing a new generation of SES VPO: method. allowance. – M., 2006. – 55 p.
2.
Borisenko I.G. Innovative technologies in teaching descriptive geometry in the
formation of professional competence. // Bulletin ISTU – 2011 – № 12 (59). – 398 p.
Pp. 355 – 357.
3.
Borisenko I.G, Petrovskaya N.M. Information technology in teaching graphic
disciplines in the formation of professional competence / / Bulletin ESSTU. – 2012. –
№ 4 (39). Pp. 38–42.
4.
Grachev S.V., Vitkalov V.G. An innovative approach to practical training in
descriptive geometry // Sat: Improving training of students in the field of graphics,
design, and standardization. – Saratov – 2001. – Pp. 102–104
5.
Golovina L.N. Systematic approach to the design and technological preparation
of Engineering. // Proceedings of Samara Scientific Center of the Russian Academy
of Sciences. – 2012. – Volume 14, № 1 (2). Pp. 693–696.
6.
Petrine NM Improving the quality of education graphics engineers //
Proceedings of the Scientific and Technical Conference "Improving the quality of
training" – Krasnoyarsk – 2002. – S. 146–149.
J21310-003
UDC 622.274.
Kalmykov V.N., Zubkov A.A. Volkov P.V.,
Pushkarev E.I. Latkin V.V.
TECHNOLOGIES OF THE MECHANIZED FASTENING OF
EXCAVATIONS OF STRENGTHENED COMBINED SUPPORT WITH USE
OF BEING SELF-FIXED ANCHORS AND CONCRETE "WET" ON
UNDERGROUND MINES OF URAL
"Magnitogorsk State Technical University of G.I.Nosov",
Magnitogorsk, Lenin Avenue 38, 455000
The assessment of possibility of fastening of excavations of underground mines
of the Ural region strengthened combined support on the basis of installation of
being self-fixed anchors and drawing "wet" concrete is made.
Keywords: Being self-fixed anchor support, "dry" and "wet" technology of a
putting concrete, fastening of excavations, an economic assessment.
Labour productivity in work connected with the application of shotcrete,
increases significantly during the transition from dry process machines to the latest
robotic installations operating on a "wet" technology. The average replacement-level
performance in the wet method concrete typically exceeds the performance of the dry
4-5 times. The use of shotcrete application systems significantly reduces the share of
manual labor as compared to the traditional way, increases the speed of
developments. [1]
To reduce unproductive idle faces and improve mine safety caused by the
erection of a metal arch support, asked to review the technology attachment mining.
Reduce time to mount mine workings may be achieved through the combined use of
lining, which has in its composition and shotcrete samozakreplyayuschuyusya
Anchors with reinforcing cages (reinforced composite lining). This type of lining is
characterized by ease of installation and start operation immediately after the
introduction of the trace. [2]
Usilennnaya combination lining is a structure consisting of an anchor
samozakreplyayuschegosya (NWA), reinforcing cages (instead of wire mesh) and
shotcrete.
For the economic evaluation of different mounting options workings calculated
the cost of fixing 1 rm generation, cross-sectional area - S = 19,5 m2 for the
following types of lining: curved metal support of spetsprofilya SVP, reinforced
composite lining of concrete anchors and shotcrete, reinforced with metal mesh,
reinforced lining combined with samozakreplyayuschihsya anchors.
In the justification of the complex equipment concrete consumption is taken in
volumes for Uchalinskoe group - 2.9 m3/hr for Uzelginskoy - 13.3 m3/hr. Since the
enterprises mount in one session, the group mines Uchalinskoe need for concrete in a
volume of 20 m3/smenu and Uzelginskoy - 93 m3/smenu. [3]
To evaluate the economic results of the implementation of technology "wet"
nabryzgbetonirovaniya A comparative calculation of the cost of 1 m2 shotcrete cover
the "dry" and "wet" method of fastening. [4] Application of the technology of "wet"
nabryzgbetonirovaniya will reduce costs mount Uchalinskoe mine at 9.5% and
increase the cost of Uzelginskom, Youth and Lake underground mines.
In connection with the possibility of increasing the speed of the transition from
"dry" to "wet" method nabryzgbetonirovaniya been adjusted schedule Works at
penetration of excavation, resulting in cycle time was reduced from 21 to 14 h, and
the length uhodki per day increased from 2 7 m to 4.05 m [5].
Thus, the application of the "wet" technology nabryzgbetonirovaniya achieved
reducing the cost of fixing on mine Uchalinskoe by 23.3% (9.9 mln. / Year) for
Uzelginskomu mine by 1.5% (2 million rubles. / year).
References:
1 . Volkov P.V.Metodika's wolves of an assessment of options of movement of
ore at working off prikonturny Stocks / Gibadullin Z.R. wolves of the Item of
Century//Messenger of MGTU. – 2009 . - No. 3. - Page 11-13.
2 . Volkov P.V.Izyskaniye's wolves of options of systems of development for
dredging of pribortovy stocks at combined geotechnologies/Kalmykov V.N.,
Grigoriev V. V., Volkov P. V.//the Messenger of MGTU. – 2010 . - No. 1. – Page 1722.
3 . Volkov P.V.Obosnovaniye's wolves of parameters of the geotechnological
module "Clearing Works" at development of stocks in prikonturny zones of
pits/Kalmykov V.N., Meshcheryakov E.Y.//Messenger of MGTU. – 2011 . - No. 4.
4 . Volkov P.V. Razrabotka's wolves of the integrated technological schemes of
intensive development of stocks of border zones of pits / Kalmykov V.N., Volkov P.
V., Meshcheryakov E.Yu. // The combined geotechnology: complex development
and preservation of a subsoil of Earth: works of the international scientific and
technical conference, Yekaterinburg, 2009: SB. works. – Magnitogorsk: MGTU, 2011. – Page 31-33.
5 Volkov P.V. Wolves of the Item of Century. About classification it is opened
– underground systems of the development / Kalmykov V.N., Volkov P. V.//the
Combined geotechnology: complex development and preservation of a subsoil of
Earth: works of the international scientific and technical conference, Yekaterinburg,
2009: SB. works. – Magnitogorsk: MGTU, - 2011. – Page 58-66.
J21310-004
UDC 004.052, 004.716
Nyrkov A.P., Sokolov S.S., Belousov A.S.
NOISE IMMUNITY AS A FACTOR OF NETWORK RELIABILITY
DATA TRANSMISSION ON TRANSPORT
Federal State Financed Educational Institution of Higher Professional
Education “Admiral Makarov State University of Maritime and Inland Shipping”,
Russia, Saint-Petersburg, Dvinskay st., 5/7.
This article describes the solution of ensuring the stable operation of the data
transmission network on transport from the standpoint of improving its immunity.
Keywords: data transmission network, noise immunity, transport networks
Introduction
In modern society, any sector of the economy cannot exist without using modern
information technology and computerized collaboration tools. Transportation
industries are not the exception.
Informatization of transport sector in the form of technical and technological
diversity is a distinctive feature of a variety of data transmission channels software
and application hardware
The distance at which data is transmitted in infocommunication data networks,
on transport can be from several meters to thousands of kilometers, so the important
task is to provide effective noise immunity techniques as a factor of stable integrity of
networks
1.
Methods of noise immunity ensuring
By noise immunity we shall mean ability to provide a reliable error-free data
transmission network by external interference of various types.
Modern methods of providing noise immunity may be conditionally divided into
four categories:
1. Change of physical characteristics of the transmission channel.
2. Using the special tools of interference suppression.
3. Change in the way of organizing the reception and / or transmission.
4. Encoding of the information. [1, 2, 3]
The first category includes various methods of increasing quality characteristics
of data transmission channels. For example, replacement of the twisted pair cable
for higher categories cables, that use additional shielding [4]. Also, in some cases,
wireline data transfer channels are laid in additionally protected cable runs. In
wireless communications channels more difficult transceiver devices are used. That
increases noise immunity, for example, by increasing the signal / noise ratio[5].
Means of a special noise reduction include linear and nonlinear noise generators
and other devices that are used separately. Among the methods that can increase the
noise immunity by changing methods of organization receiving / transmitting a signal
the following methods are possible: the method of diversity reception, using of
modulation for less number of states, using of different methods of decision-making
on the transmitted signal, using of spread spectrum of signals and other[6].
All of the above methods have a lot of subjective factors, that impose certain
restrictions on their use. Each method is applicable only in a specific class of
problems, but, the fourth category has a distinctive feature - common use because
coding method depends on neither data channel, nor the structure of the signal
[7,8].
2. Encoding methods
The history of error detection and correction codes begins in 1948 with the
article by Claude Elwood Shannon "A Mathematical Theory of Communication."
Shannon expressed in his article's main idea. The idea is that the construction of too
good channels is unjustifiable and using of encoding is more advantageous
economically. It is from that moment the active learning and the development of
noise combating codes started. Today, there are large number of different algorithms
of coding and decoding the information for transmission over the communication
channels. At step of coding of the information redundancy of various types is inserted
and it is used during decoding the information to detect or correct errors that occurred
due to external factors and noise.
The algorithms can be grouped according to various criteria and categories. By
way of information processing codes can be divided into 2 classes: block and
convolutional. First class divides data into blocks of a certain length and processes
each block separately, the second class of codes processes and transmits information
in the form of an endless stream.
The combination methods of coding should be noted. These codes are known as
concatenated codes. In this code, the information first is encoded by one algorithm,
and then another encoding algorithm is used for the already coded information, so
called concatenated code.
The popular scheme of concatenated codes is an algorithm that encodes
information by Reed-Solomon codes, then the information undergoes interleaving
operation, which resulted in that characters in adjacent positions are located at
different distances from each other, and are encoded by a convolutional code. On the
receiving side after the decoding of the convolutional code, the deinterleaving
operation sorts large blocks of errors are sorted and they fall into different codewords
of the Reed-Solomon code, thus further reducing the probability of error in decoding
is possible.
The codes, using not only the time share also should be noted. Making a
symbolic redundancy lead to reduction of useful information transmitted, therefore
data rate is reduced. Today the codes using spatial resource are also widely used.
Such codes are called space-time. Their essence is that the information is not
transmitted from one source, but from several simultaneously. Thus form a spatial
redundancy. The received signal is processed by specific algorithms, and makes
possible to determine by most accurate shape of the transmitted signal, and, therefore,
produce the most accurate decoding.
Conclusion
Most of the known methods of providing noise immunity are differences in the
application. As a consequence, in the construction of information systems with
different data channels and the different types of the transmitted signals, we have to
deal with different approaches to the organization of protection from interference that
causes differences in financial, organizational and technical aspects. [9] Thus, the use
of a generic method - space-time coding - will provide flexibility to provide noise
immunity.
References
1. Nyrkov A.P., Sokolov S.S., Ezhgurov V.N.., Maltsev V.A., EFFECTIVE
INFORMATION MODEL MODELS OF THE TRANSPORT PROCESS. Sworld
collection of scientific papers based on international scientific and practical
conference. 2012. Т. 13. № 4. p. 38-42.
2. Nyrkov A.P., BAshmakov A.V., Sokolov S.S., NOT-CRYPTOGRAPHIC
METHODS OF INFORMATION SECURITY IN WIRELESS NETWORKS.
Information security issues. Computer systems. 2010. № 3. p. 27-30.
3. Nyrkov A.P., Sokolov S.S., BAshmakov A.V., THE METHODOLOGY OF
DESIGNING
INFORMATION
SYSTEMS
SECURITY
IN
TRANSPORT.
Information security issues. Computer systems. 2010. № 3. p. 58-61.
4. Nyrkov A.P., Dmitrieva T.V., Sokolov S.S., METHODS OF IMPROVING THE
EFFICIENCY OF PORTS IN INTERNATIONAL TRANSPORT CORRIDORS.
River transport (ХХI cen). 2009. Т. 1. № 42-1. p. 75-77.
5.
Kudinov
V.A.,
Nyrkov
A.P.,
ALGORITHMIC
PROVIDING
PARALLELIZABLE STRUCTURES IN AUTOMATION SYSTEM THAT
PROVIDES PROTECTION OF THE INFORMATION. Information security issues.
Computer systems. 2009. № 4. p. 17-22.
6. Sokolov S.S., THREAT MODEL INFORMATION SECURITY. The University
for Water Communications. Journal 2009. № 2. p. 176-180.
7. Sokolov S.S, Belyaeva N.A.,. FUNCTIONAL STRUCTURE OF AUTOMATED
SYSTEMS TRANSPORT STORAGE INFRASTRUCTURE. The University for
Water Communications. 2012. № 3. p. 124a-129.
8. Nyrkov A.P., Dmitrieva T.V. MATHEMATICAL MODEL RESERVATION
SYSTEM
AND
OPTIMIZATION
OF
IT.
The
University
for
Water
Communications. 2011. № 2. p. 98-101.
9. Nyrkov A.P., Rudakova S.A. METHODICS OF INFORMATIZATION AUDIT
OF OBJECTS REQUIREMENTS OF INFORMATION SECURITY. The University
for Water Communications. 2012. № 3. p. 146-149.
J21310-005
UDC 004.2
1
Tusinov A.G., 2Sklyarenko S.A.
HELTH – SAFE FOOD IN SPORTS
1
"Russian State University of Tourism and Service"
2
"Moscow State University of Food Production"
The report presents the definition of "health – safe food", justified it`s basic
principles, and examines the power system for the athletes and the author shows
characteristic dishes roll "veal baked with pumpkin" on the basis of these principles.
Keywords: Health – safe food and the principles of health – safe nutrition food
development of athletes, health – safe dish "veal baked with pumpkin"
The likelihood of achieving high results is impossible without a very large
physical and neuro-psychological pressures on athletes during training and
competition. Overcoming these loads is accompanied by modifications of the
metabolic processes of the body.
To compensate for the energy expenditure and the activation of anabolic
processes and processes of recovery of the athletes should supply adequate amounts
of energy and essential dietary factors.
Dietary recommendations athletes should be based on both experimental
studies of the effects of exercise on some parameters of the state regulatory system
and metabolism in animals, and in studying the characteristics of the biochemical and
physiological processes during exercise the athletes. [2]
Unfortunately, at present there is not enough scientific evidence to recommend
diets for representatives of various sports, adequate daily caloric consumption of
energy and the corresponding real needs of athletes in essential nutrients. [3]
At the same time, with actual power athletes during training and competition
does not meet the basic requirements of a balanced diet. In connection with this, we
can assume that the inclusion in the diet of athletes dishes designed or adapted to the
basics of health-save food is very appropriate.
Under the health-food way to keep health is understood by the need to achieve
balance and adequate intake of nutrients into the body.
The term "health-save food" based on the idea of homeostasis, the violation of
which leads to the disease. This approach assumes that supply strategy to suit the
individual organism, not a diet. To the basic principles of health-save food include:
1) preservation of the natural balance of the need for a sufficient supply of food
and materials;
2) the inclusion in the daily diet of 10 health-save promoting products (at least
one of them).
3) The application of modern kitchen appliances and equipment that will help
keep all the nutritional properties of the products and reduce the use of fats and
excretion of carcinogenic substances in the preparation. [1]
Features of the technology of cooking is to select the correct heat treatment,
such as: cooking, including a couple, stewing, baking. Passion for some athletes raw
food - salads, including the raw liver, Japanese dishes - sushi and sashimi - would be
welcome if it does not there was a risk of intestinal infections and disorders.
Possible replacement of ordinary food meal replacement or full use of these
substitutes as necessary, but do not replace them for more than two meals a day. They
should complement and balance the power athlete, not replace it. According to some
experts, the additives should provide no more than 25% of core nutrients. The same is
the situation with the vitamins. Of course, a good multivitamin and especially
vitamin-mineral complex is absolutely essential, but it should be reasonable to treat
his choice and observe moderation in dosages. Recommended supplements: protein,
creatine monohydrate, a multivitamin and mineral salts, amino acids.
In order to properly build a power athlete should remember that the rhythm of
life in for sports is different from the rhythm of the common man. The athlete
accustomed to regular physical exercise, and nutrition, and recreation (to sleep)
strictly according to the regime. In this regard, the rhythm of all systems of the athlete
is very different from the rhythm of the organ systems of people not involved in
sports, that is homeostasis athlete is different from regular people. [4]
Building a power athlete on the basis of health-save you should use all the
product group, the number of food consumption of energy consumption depends on
the athlete.
Shows the characteristics of dishes based on the principle of health-save food
"casserole of beef with pumpkin." Ingredients: 1) pumpkin 2) veal, 3) ground
tomatoes, 4) Cheese 5) sour cream. 100 grams of finished product prihodits: proteins
- 12.5 fat - 7.5, carbohydrates - 8,8; calories - 154.7 Kkal/648, 19 kJ. Minerals (mg):
Ca - 172,25; Na - 201,05; K - 247,05; S - 124,25; F - 208,1. Vitamins: PP, E, B
vitamins, high in vitamin C - 4.7 (mg).
The technological process of cooking: prepared and processed foods (pumpkin,
beef, tomatoes) cut plates. Veal repel, salt and pepper, grate the cheese and mix with
sour cream. Lay a baking dish with parchment paper and arrange layers prepared
foods. The first layer of the meat, the other tomatoes, top with pumpkin and oil
prepared and mixed with cream cheese. Recommended serving temperature dishes,
from 50 to 650 C.
In our opinion, these methods must be applied, and the organization of power
athletes, as the consumption of products in the list of health-save the athlete will
receive the necessary nutrients, and the technology developed or customized courses
based on health-save nutrition can help reduce the intake of fat is not desirable and
will reduce amount allocated to the preparation of carcinogens.
References:
1.Burbina, T.S. Maintaining the health and development of human intelligence.
The second book. The practice of pedagogy and psychology equilibrium supply
[Text] / T.S. Burbina. - Samara: Samara. Dep-tion Literary Fund, 2008. - 109 p.
2.Balanced diet athletes / M.I. Kalinski, A.I. Pshendin Kiev health 1985 - 127p.
3. Rogozkin VA Pshendin AI Athletic nutrition. - Moscow: Physical Culture
and Sport, 1989. - 160 p.
4. Elena Boyko Nutrition and diet for athletes. - Moscow: Veche, 2006. – 176p.
J21310-006
Radionov A.A., Radionova L.V.
TECHNOLOGY PRODUCTION OF HIGH - STRENGTH WIRE
WITH HIGH PLASTIC PROPERTIES
South Ural State University
This article describes the technology production of high-strength wire with high
plastic properties. Based on studies we offer to select drawing routes providing a
uniform strain over the cross section of wire. The deformation uniformity in the wire
cross section depends on the single strain, half-angle dies and the friction coefficient
in drawing. The paper assessed the impact of drawing routes on power parameters of
the process of wire drawing. Of the basis these research we developed a new method
of drawing wire and a program for the PC named “Automatic calculation of drawing
routes”.
Keywords: wire, high-carbon steel, drawing machine, angle dies, friction
coefficient.
High-carbon steel wire is used in the manufacture of ropes, springs and valves
for prestressed concrete. These products are critical parts of complex machines and
structures, so they have to meet high standards of quality.
The main problem in the wire production from high grades of steel is to obtain
high ductility of high strength metal. Wire drawing technologies used now are not
always enabling us to obtain high strength wire with good plastic properties. Often,
high-strength wire is rejected due to the premature loss of plasticity and lamination.
In order to improve the plastic properties of high-strength wire some research
was conducted.
Traditionally, the calculation of drawing modes is reduced to the calculation of
total and single strain with limitation on the Tensile strength as well as on engine
power of wire drawing machines. It does not take into account tense-deformed state
of metal in the deformation zone and its dependence on the basic technological
factors (total and single strain, the die angle, the friction coefficient, temperature and
speed control wire drawing).
Of the basis of studies we offer to select drawing routes providing a uniform
strain over the cross section of wire.
The deformation uniformity in the wire cross section depends on the single
strain, half-angle dies and the friction coefficient in drawing.
We suggest using the following formula to select a single strain:
2
æ 1 - arctg( tga + f ) ö
e =1 - ç
÷ ,
è 1 + arctg( tga + f ) ø
(1)
f – friction coefficient;
a – half-angle dies.
If equality holds (1), then the deformation of the wire cross section is uniform. If
2
e <1 - ç
÷ ,
(2)
then in the surface layer of the wire are compressive stresses. If
2
e >1 - ç
÷ ,
(3)
then the surface layer of the wire are tensile stresses.
When you select a single degree of deformation is convenient to use the
graphs constructed by the formula (1). Fig. 1 shows a graph to select the type
of stress in the wire, depending on process parameters.
e ,%
compressive stresses
50
45
40
u n ifo
35
rm d
at
e fo rm
ion
a = 40
30
tensile stresses
25
20
15
0 ,01
0 ,02
0 ,03
0 ,04
f
0 ,06
0 ,05
Fig. 1. Type of residual stresses in the surface layer
depending on process parameters
Of the basis of studies we offer to select drawing routes providing a uniform
strain over the cross section of wire. The deformation uniformity in the wire cross
section depends on the single strain, half-angle dies and the friction coefficient in
drawing. By choosing a certain combination of these three variables it is possible to
provide a uniform deformation of the wire cross section (Fig.2). To confirm this idea
we carried out some experiments. Wire rod made of steel 70 in the diameter of 5.5
mm was drawn through dies with different half-angle to get the diameter of 4.0 mm.
e ,%
a =70
50
a = 60
45
a = 50
40
a = 40
35
a = 30
30
a = 20
25
20
15
0 ,01
0 ,02
0 ,03
0 ,04
0 ,05
0 ,06
f
Fig. 2. A single strain required for the uniform deformation of the wire cross
section, depending on half-angle dies and the friction coefficient
MPa
4000
3500
3000
2500
0
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1,0
1,2
1,4
1,6
1,8 mm
Fig. 3. Microhardness over the cross section the wire diameter of 4.0 mm
(half-angle dies 7 degrees)
In the first case 7 degrees half-angle dies were used, and in the second – 5
degrees. Measuring the microhardness over the cross section showed that in the first
case, deformation penetrates the entire wire cross section (Fig.3), while in the second
case, only the metal surface layers are deformed (Fig.4).
MPa
4000
3500
3000
2500
0
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1,0
1,2
1,4
1,6
1,8
mm
Fig. 4. Microhardness over the cross section the wire diameter of 4.0 mm
(half-angle dies 5 degrees)
In the formula (1) the friction coefficient is the unknown quantity. To define this
quantity in real production conditions, we carried out some experimental
investigations. For this purpose, we used a device developed by us [1, 2]. The
research results are presented in table 1.
To confirm the possibility of improving the mechanical properties and wire
quality industrial experiment was held. Wire rod with the diameter of 5.5 mm of steel
70 was drawn to the diameter of 3.0 mm. Drawing routes calculated by the proposed
proportion obtained:
33%
33%
33%
- sample № 1 (tensile stresses) – 5,5 ¾¾
¾® 4,5 ¾¾
¾® 3,7 ¾¾
¾® 3,0 ( 2a = 10 0 );
33%
33%
- sample № 2 (uniform deformation) – 5,5 ¾¾
¾® 4,5 ¾¾
¾® 3,7 ¾¾¾® 3,0( 2a = 8 0 );
33%
33%
33%
- sample № 3 (compressive stresses) – 5,5 ¾¾
¾® 4,5 ¾¾
¾® 3,7 ¾¾¾® 3,0 ( 2a = 6 0
33%
).
Table 1
The friction coefficient, depending on angle dies,
types sub-oil coating and lubrication
Angle die,
0
Sub-oil coating
Lubrication
Friction
coefficient , f
Drill
8
Phosphate
Liquid
Soap
0,06
BVS -1
0,05
BVS -2
0,05
Soap
0,04
BVS -1
0,03
BVS -2
0,03
Soap
0,05
glass (nNa2O *
mSiO2)
Drill
12
Phosphate
Liquid
BVS -1
0,04
BVS -2
0,04
Soap
0,07
BVS -1
0,06
BVS -2
0,06
Soap
0,05
BVS -1
0,04
BVS -2
0,04
Soap
0,06
BVS -1
0,05
BVS -2
0,05
glass (nNa2O *
mSiO2)
The resulting wire experienced a rupture, twisting and bending (table 2).
The results showed that the strength properties (Tensile strength, yield strength)
remain practically unchanged, while the plastic characteristics increase: relative
elongation by 25-30%, relative narrowing by 12-15% and the number of twists by 1822% and the number of bends by 35-40% compared to the traditional production
method.
Table 2
The mechanical properties the wire of diameter of 3.0 mm
Sample
Tensile
Yield
Relative
Relative
The
The
strength,
strength,
elongation,
narrowing,
number
number of
s B , MPa
s 0.2 , MPa
d ,%
y ,%
of twists,
bends, n
m
1
1640
1425
2,5
56
40
18
2
1635
1390
3,0
60
43
20
3
1645
1435
3,5
64
48
26
On the basis of the proposed method we made a new method of drawing wire
[3, 4] and a program for the PC named “Automatic calculation of drawing routes”
used at "Beloretsk Metallurgical Plant" (Russia, "Mechel Steel Group") [2, 5].
References:
1. Radionova L.V., Kharitonov V.A., Zyuzin V.I. New technological lubricants
for steel wire drawing /Steel in Translation. 2001. № 12. P. 49-50.
2. V.A. Kharitonov, L.V. Radionova Designing resource-saving technologies of
production of
high-carbon
steel wire,
based
on modeling:
Monograph.
–
Magnitogorsk.2008. 171 p.
3. Patent Russian Federation № 2183523 (2001) Method of manufacturing high
carbon wire / V.A. Kharitonov, L.V. Radionova, V.I. Zyuzin.
4. Radionova L.V., Radionov A.A. Energy approach to the influence of
countertension on drawing /Steel in Translation. 2008. Т. 38. № 5. Р. 358-361.
5. A.A. Radionov
Automatic electric drive of the mills for steel wire
production: Monograph. – Magnitogorsk. 2007. 311 р.
J21310-007
UDK 621.317.73
Boiko J.M., Boryachok R.O.
MODELING SATELLITE DATA TRANSMISSION CHANNELS WITH
CASCADE SIGNAL-CODE STRUCTURES
Khmelnitskiy National University, Khmelnitskiy, 11/3 Institutska Str., 29000
The paper represents modeling satellite data transmission channel with cascade
encoding. The detailed scheme of digital satellite data transmission channel with
external,
internal
encoder
and
interleaving
has
been
developed.
The
recommendations are given regarding type and structure of cascade encoder
components. The basic characteristics and specific operation of satellite data
transmission channel with cascade encoding and quadrature phase modulation have
been researched by using simulating instrument Matlab-Simulin.
Keywords: noise stable encoding, cascade encoding, signal-code structure.
Introduction
The basic way to improve the data transmission reliability in satellite digital
systems is a process of adding redundancy to original data. This process is carried out
by noise stable encoding. The coder’s primary aim is to execute noise stable encoding
operation [1]. The data transmission reliability in the digital systems can be assessed
by BER – Bit Error Rate [2]. In this case BER is the probability of erroneous
receiving and transmitting per data bit averaged for statistically high volume of
transmitted information. Satellite data transmission systems are specific to assume for
making recommendations to gain most optimal using noise stable encoding in these
systems in order to create a structure of the ground receiving facility processing
satellite signals. Here is a circumstance to be considered as inputting redundancy at
constant data transmitting rate of the source causes reducing symbol duration and
also at constant transmitter power – to decreasing power per symbol. The error
probability BER increases in this case. However the final error probability in decoder
output (as shown below) will be less than that in case of not coded transmission due
to error correction while encoding. The valuable indicator of encoding effectiveness
is also the energy benefit to be gained while encoding [1]. Codes assessment is
reasonable to carry out by the degree they approach to Shannon threshold [1].
Theoretically this threshold defines potentially reachable signal to noise ratio at fixed
encoding rate. It is noteworthy that all codes, which will be considered below,
comply with Shannon threshold. To implement codes having high block length and
high correcting ability, cascade codes (CC) are reasonable to use in transmission
channel. This case requires using many-level encoding. The most optimal is two-level
scheme. The Rid-Solomon code can be used as an external one, as for internal one
various codes may be chosen. The conducted research indicated using convolution
codes (CnC) as internal ones to be the most beneficial. To create satellite data
transmission channels it’s recommended to use convolution encoders of the following
structure:
k £7
- number of data symbols incoming to encoder input per tact, the
encoding rate R =
k 1
= – characterizes redundancy, which is inputted at encoding.
n 2
Code (7, 1/2) is transparent to ambiguity.
The Rid-Solomon code having block length n=255 is recommended to use for
external encoder. The code has size of data block k=223, the minimal Henning
distance [1] d=33. The code is capable to correct 16 errors. The encoder blockscheme is represented in fig. 8. The code structure contains 233 data symbols, and 32
testing ones. Generating polynomial in the Galois field is GF (2 8 ) . The initial data
code combination is expressed by polynomial F ( x) = x 8 + x 7 + x 2 + x + 1 . The specific
selection of the represented polynomials is first of all entailed by necessary
minimizing technical complexity of encoders.
The effective way for spacing errors as packs in time is the interleaving
procedure. Using interleaving procedure practically allows creating for a codec the
discrete channel without memory or with reduced one. In other words the primary
aim at using interleaver in external encoder (Rid-Solomon) output is to make symbol
errors independent on each other so errors of external encoder would spread
uniformly, because the external code encoder operation is significantly worsened by
correlated errors in several consequent symbols. Such disadvantage of convolution
interleavers as need to clean memory registers on working with data blocks of final
length can be eliminated in satellite channel due to transmitting high streams of data,
for example when transmitting continuous digital video signal.
The structural scheme of the satellite data transmission channel is represented in
fig. 1.
Fig. 1. The structural scheme of the satellite data transmission channel with
internal relative encoding and interleaving: TC – data transmission channel; DS
– data stream
Projecting encoding system requires considering the range of parameters in
particular such as error probability (codes effectiveness is estimated by amount of
corrected errors, the volume of redundant data), frequency bend available for
connection channel and the time rate of its parameters, minimal signal to noise ratio
at which system is to provide the set quality, processing resources available at
transmitting and receiving ends of satellite connection channel, and thus complexity
of encoding and decoding (as hardware so PC software). In accordance to structural
scheme in fig. 1 the Simulink model of satellite data transmission system is
represented in fig. 2.
Fig. 2. Simulating model of satellite data transmission channel with cascade
encoding
QPSK – modulation (soft solution) and cascade encoding (external encoder RidSolomon, internal encoder – convolutional (171, 133)), encoding at R = 1/2 rate and
decoder Viterbi producing soft and hard decoding algorithms are used in the channel.
Соnstellation – diagrams [1] in receiving and transmitting ends of the satellite digital
channel is represented in fig. 3 a, b. The data transmission channel is represented by
the free space channel which parameters are set in compliance with parameters of
satellite orbit METOP and estimating attenuation and power budget of data
transmission channel [2]: orbit attitude – 837 km, signal loss in free space – 156 dB,
receiving station antenna diameter – 2 m, receiver noise temperature – 290 Ко. Using
such simulation model allows research for example of transmission station amplifier
characteristics nonlinearity effect on the data transmitting quality; the phase noise
level effect on the total amount of corrected errors while the receiving process.
Research of model in the mode of insignificant amplifier characteristics nonlinearity
– at level 30 dB, at presence of significant phase noise (the value indicating a power
fading
rate
at
shifting
frequency) of the receiver
at the level -48 dBc/Hz @
100 Hz and -100 dBc/Hz
@ 100 Hz (the power is
measured
in
decibels
relative to power in center
a)
b)
Fig. 3 Сonstellation – diagram at
receiving a) and transmitting b) ends of
satellite channel
frequency) results in the
following:
due
to
frequency
fluctuation
(phase noise) – QPSK –
demodulator does not recognize the phase change of the carrying frequency, but
instead by error fixes phase change, both of them cause recording false value of the
received bit into a buffer. Thus, the more the convector phase noise the more error
rate in demodulator output, and cascade decoder of the receiving station (the total
amount of corrected errors has changed in conditions of experiment in the range from
16 to 13).
In order to estimate energy benefit of cascade encoding, spectrum
characteristics, the simulating modeling satellite data transmission channel with
cascade encoding (external encoder Rid-Solomon (255, 223), interleaver, internal
encoder – convolutional (171, 133)), QPSK, decoding (soft) Viterbi) was carried out.
Modeling process assumed quadrature generators frequencies in receiving and
transmitting ends to be brought in phase.
Figure 4 represents energy spectrum of signals at transmitting and receiving
ends of satellite data transmission channel.
а)
b)
Fig. 4. Energy spectrums of signals at transmitting and receiving ends of
satellite data transmission channel with cascade encoding: a) at transmitting
end; б) at receiving end, after attenuating convector
In particular figures 5, 6, 7, 8 demonstrate calculated relationships of bit error
BER for signal-code structure (SCS) mentioned before and signal to noise ratio (
Eb / N 0 ) for AWGN channel with encoding rate 3/4, 1/2. So the specified code at
encoding rate 3/4 has ЕВК » 4.4dB (BER=10-4). In case of producing data
transmission channel at 1/2 encoding rate EBK equaled 5.9 dB (BER=10-4).
Fig. 5. Bit error BER dependencies
Fig. 6. Bit error BER
in relation to signal to noise ratio (
dependencies in relation to signal to
Eb / N 0 ) for AWGN channel: 1 – CC:
noise ratio ( Eb / N 0 ) for AWGN
(РС (255, 223), CnC (171, 133), QPSK)
channel: 1 – CC: (РС (255, 223), CnC
R=3/4; 2 – for not encoded QPSK
(171, 133), QPSK) R=1/2; 2 – for not
encoded QPSK
noise ratio ( Eb / N 0 ) for AWGN channel:
noise ratio ( Eb / N 0 ) for AWGN
1 – CC: (РС (255, 247), CnC (171, 133),
QPSK) R=3/4; 2 – for not encoded
QPSK
channel: 1 – CC: (РС (255, 247), CnC
(171, 133), QPSK) R=1/2; 2 – for not
encoded QPSK
The changes in code structure of the external encoder on PC (255, 247) in case
of cascade encoding cause decreasing encoding energy benefit (EEB). So figures 7, 8
represent results of estimating BER in case of using satellite channel SCS CC: (РС
(255, 247), interleaver, CnC (171, 133), QPSK). So in case of encoding rate 3/4, ЕВК
» 4.2dB, and in case of producing data transmission channel at encoding rate 1/2,
EBK equaled 5.6 dB (BER=10-4). Besides, we can make conclusion that at increasing
encoding rate the energy benefit decreases. The selection of satellite data
transmission channel should be made by applying cascade codes, optimal for
correcting errors, providing redundancy and encoding rate.
Conclusions
- It has been determined that improving data transmission noise stability in
satellite digital channels is reached by using cascade encoding scheme;
-
It has been defined that in case of producing satellite channel (external code
Rid-Solomon (255, 223), interleaver, internal code – convolution code (171, 133),
QPSK) at encoding rate 3/4, EEB » 4.4 dB (BER=10-4). In case of producing
transmission channel at encoding rate 1/2, EEB equaled 5.9 dB (BER=10-4). At
increasing encoding rate and code structure the energy benefit decreases;
-
By means of Simulink – model of satellite communication system it has
been researched the effect of characteristics of receiving and transmitting ends of the
data transmission channel with cascade encoding on overall quantity of errors
corrected while encoding.
References:
1.
Бойко
Ю.М.
кодування/декодування
передавання
інформації
Імітаційна
при
в
реалізація
вирішенні
способів
завдань
супутникових
завадостійкого
підвищення
каналах
зв’язку
вірності
//Вісник
Хмельницького національного університету. – Хмельницький. – 2012. - №1. –
С. 190-200.
2. Juliy Boiko, Victor Stetsiuk, Victor Michan Improving noise immunity of
QPSK demodulation of signals in digital satellite communication systems//
TCSET’2012 IEEE. 21-24 February, Lviv – Slavske.
J21310-008
Mykhailova G.N. , Bulenok S. N.
THE PROBLEMS OF INNOVATIVE TECHNOLOGIES SAFETY
Kiyv National University of Trade and Economics,
Kioto st. 19, Kyiv, Ukraine, 02156
In this article we describe the use of language English
Annotation. The analysis of terms safety and security is held, the dialectics of
properties of garments with bulking filler is given, the safety indices and
characteristics of garments with bulking filler are analysed, the research norms and
methods of environmental pollution caused by the given goods’group manufacturing
are highlighted.
Key words: security, safety, garments with bulking filler.
Numerous studies witness, that the people’s health depends on the absence of
diseases and physical defects as well as it is determined by the three sets of factors genetically inherited, socio-economic and ecological. The chemical substances
intensive introduction into all branches of national economy allows to assume that the
chemical factor is one of the leading factors for many key units of hygiene [1].
There is a need to differentiate between the two notions – security and safety.
Nowadays the goods safety theory and practice issues are given a significant
consideration, which is justified by a great number of publications [2-3]. The authors
consider the contradictions in a terminology base and assume that safety means the
production characteristics rather than its state.
There are two notions in the Ukrainian language – security and safety. Security
is a state, in which none or nothing is threatened by danger, but safety means the
absence of danger [4].
The contemporary textile materials and fabrics in the context of the people’s
health safety have to be considered as a product of the chemical substances complex
negative effect. First of all, the textile fabrics are affected by the raw materials nature,
the technological processes peculiarities of their manufacturing. In other words – the
textile production natural characteristics. In particular: chemical characteristics
(chemical danger), physical-mechanical properties (mechanical danger), electrical
ones (electrical danger) etc.
The long-lasting accumulation of certain chemical substances in a person’s body
during the textile fabrics exploitation may lead to the person’s and their descendants’
genetic apparatus dysfunction, the central nervous system, kidneys and lungs
affection as well as the other organs malfunction.
Nowadays heavy metals and pesticides rank the first ones in the world
concerning the ecosystem pollution priority. The latter can be rather steady
compounds and be preserved in the soil as well as in the natural raw materials
(cotton, flax, wool) for long. Besides that, raw materials and final products made of
the natural raw materials are processed with special substances, which protect them
from the microorganisms’, moths’, rodents’ destructive effect during storing and
transportation.
The heavy metals, pesticides, chlorine, capacious organic compounds, dioxins
etc. can get into natural fibers in the process of their growth by means of ground
waters and air.
Heavy metals can affect negatively as they can pollute textile fabrics and clothes
in the process of dyes application, technological processes peculiarities at the expense
of the ecosystem pollution. At present the most wide-spread contaminants of
ecosystem are bismuth, cadmium, cobalt, manganese, copper, zinc, nickel, tin,
mercury, lead, antimony, chromium. Among them, lead, mercury and cadmium
belong to the environmental global pollutants of the first grade of danger [5].
A crucial issue on the safety of dyes which are able to provoke negative
biological effects during the process of textile fabrics and clothes use is still remained
unsettled in the domestic hygienic research practice.
It is a well-known fact that the dyes which are allergens are used in the textile
industry of Ukraine. In technological processes of raw materials processing and
fabric manufacturing the employing of finishing compositions, textile auxiliary
substances (e.g. thermosets - phenol-aldehyde, melamine phenol-aldehyde etc.) is
allowed, which leads to the rise in manufacture effectiveness and the appearance
improvement. The compositions and substances mentioned above are not always
removed completely from products and materials at different stages of technological
process. Due to the atmospheric factors influence and mechanical loading the
destruction by-products may be emitted into the under clothes space during the
clothes exploitation, and the negative consequences may arise (skin irritation,
allergenic etc.) due to the process of sweating [1].
Thus, textile materials and fabrics are the source of a possible negative effect of
chemical substances which are different in their designation, grade of danger,
biological effects. Taking into consideration the fact, that from their birth humans are
in direct contact with textile materials and fabrics and their chemical contaminants
possible migration affects the human body within the lifespan, it is obvious that at
present the issue on safety is a crucial one for textile materials and fabrics.
Unfortunately, the products made of natural raw materials are still considered to
be safe for human’s health.
In Ukraine the issues on clothes and footwear hygiene are the ones which have
no their “own” standards and regulations concerning their chemical substances
migration. But only standards of chemical fibers enclosure in materials for children’s
clothes and footwear are valid in Ukraine. These standards are stated in San R&N №
42-125-4390-87 “Chemical fibers enclosure in materials for children’s clothes and
footwear in accordance with hygienic indices” [6 ].
Moreover, the garments with bulking filler form a separate group of fabrics. As
the sleep occupies the main part of human life. But the healthy sleep requires that
mattress, pillow and blanket have to be comfortable as well as they should have high
mechanical, physical characteristics, safety standards etc.
The range of garments with bulking filler is formed in accordance with
consumers’ requirements depending on the age and target, natural and social
conditions of use, individual preferences etc.
The goods quality is a critical issue at the current stage of market relations
formation.
The goods quality control is widely used in commerce, design, industry and
agriculture. Also it involves the whole “product life cycle”: the stage of technical
task, development phases, sale and service, competitiveness’ assessment.
The industry produces fabrics for domestic purposes to sleep and rest: pillows,
blankets, bedspreads, mattress covers, warmth keeping counterpanes and other items
with bulking filler.
Nonwoven cloth, down or balls made of polyester fibers are used as a filler.
The utility of these goods is revealed through their consumer properties, that
means those properties, that allow consumers to satisfy certain needs, requirements
[7].
According to Fig.1, goods safety occupies a great place in satisfying consumers’
needs and requirements with textile articles.
It is known, that the natural raw stuff usage will significantly ensure the finished
products harmlessness. In Ukraine the fabrics with bulking filler which is made of
natural fibers (sheep's wool, hemp, cotton, flax) for domestic purposes to sleep and
rest are in great demand. Special attention is paid to the Ukrainian traditional raw
materials – flax and hemp.
Characteristic
s
Consumer
Properties
Utilitarian
Properties
Properties that
meet
Safety
Fig. 1. The properties’ dialectics of fabrics with bulking filler
Bast fibers belong to the natural fibers of plant origin. Textile fabrics made of
them and designed in the style “eco-natural” are very popular throughout the world
due to their alternative appearance and their properties set. Such textile fabrics have
higher medico-biological and protective characteristics. Due to this unique complex
of bast fibers attributes as being hygienic, high strength, low electrical resistance,
comfort, natural bactericidal action there is a constant growth in demand worldwide
for textile bast fabrics for domestic purposes. Hemp cloths possess unique
characteristics. In particular, hemp cloths are antistatic, hygienic, absorb up to 30 %
of perspiration and 95 % of ultraviolet rays. They ensure comfortable temperature
and humidity of the under clothes space and at the same time the perspiration
elimination from body surface. Garments made of these cloths are recommended to
wear for those people who tend to suffer from rheumatism, dermal allergy, spine
diseases [8]. The separate subgroup of attributes that are complied with hygienic
demands is presented by safety characteristics (fig. 2).
harmful
- substances quantity
SAFETY
substances
- рН
alkalinity
combustion
- ignition minimal duration
ability
-
electrisation
specific
surface
electrical
resistance;
- charge mark;
Fig. 2. Safety indices and characteristics of fabrics with bulking filler
The safety of fabrics with bulking filler depends on the purpose and human skin
contact degree. Extremely important indicator is combustion ability (ignition), since
both natural and synthetic raw materials are easily inflammable, but synthetic raw
stuff give off hypertoxical substances.
To ensure consumers’ requirements as to safety of garments with bulking filler a
significant role is assigned to an electrization ability. Statistical electricity charges
may appear on the garments in the manufacturing process as well as in their service
period. Thus, electric field voltage can reach 5000V/sm on the lavsan and acrylic
garments. Electrostatic charges accumulation, their size and certain polarity cause
garments sticking to a human body, their sparkling, cracking, rapid contamination
due to the dust attraction.
Accessible foreign sources analysis has shown that in the European countries
clothes, textile and leather materials are estimated according to safety indices in
compliance with norms regulated by Instructions and standards.
For this reason the International Association of Investigation and Trial in Textile
Ecology is functioning in Europe (“Oeko-Tex-100”). This Association comprises 12
countries (Germany, Austria, Italy, Switzerland, France, Belgium, Great Britain,
Spain, Scandinavian countries, Netherlands).
It deals with research as well as the development of scientifically grounded
specifications to ensure the textile materials and their garments safety. Production
which has been undergone a trial in specialized probationary laboratories and in the
field of textile ecology (“Oeko-Tex-100”) is obligatory labeled.
The basis of the European countries standards is the control of migrating
chemical substances complex with skin irritation and allergenic effects and remote
effects.
In accordance with the international standard “Oeko-Tex-100” textile goods
must be subjected to the analysis in order to detect the organic substances
concentration. This standard regulates the admissible level of harmful substances
content in textile materials and garments depending on the category they belong:
1. Textile goods of children’s range;
2. Textile goods that are in direct contact with a human body;
3. Textile goods that are not in contact with a skin;
4. Ornamental textile materials.
The first and second categories of criteria (А1 and А2) stated in the EU
Instructions are called “ecological” ones. The category of criteria А1 refers to the
article’s composition (e.g. alkali – for wool, chemical substances pesticides which are
used to process natural fibers to store – for cotton and wool, antimony – for polyester
fibers, zinc - for polyurethane fibers etc.).
The second category of criteria А2 involves processes and chemicals including
dyes. And through all textile goods manufacturing phases it regulates the permission
to employ definite substances as well as contents norms or harmful chemical
substances migration, among them: oils, wax, size, softeners, detergents, heavy
metals, free or partially hydrolyzed formaldehyde, chlorophenol, compound dyes
which contain metals and azo dyes etc.
A positive measure is an elaboration of the state standard SSTU 4239-2003
“Textile and leather materials and wares for consumer service. Main hygienic
demands”, which came into force on the 1 of October, 2004. This standard is
conformed with standards of the “Oeko-Tex-100” system in the section concerning
the hygienic demands. The textile production hygienic demands are differentiated
depending on its designation and to what extent it contacts with a human skin.
The problem of environmental pollution occurred during manufacturing process
of garments with bulking filler is a crucial one.
The maximum allowable content (MAC) of hazardous substances in working
area air during products manufacturing must correspond to the demands of SSS
12.1.005 [9] and data given in the table.
Table 1
Hazardous chemical substances and methods of their monitoring
Chemical
substance
name
MAC,
p.r.z.
Security
level
formaldehyde
0,5
2
phenol
0,3
2
benzol
15/5
2
dust:
cotton, wool
2,0
4
lavsan dust
5.0
3
Control methods
«Methodical
instructions
on
gasochromatological measurement of
formaldehyde in working zone air» №
4595-88 from 30.03.88.
«Methodical
instructions
on
tricresol concentration (mixture of о-,m-,
p- cresols) and phenol in working zone
air» №4590-88 from 30.03.88.
«Methodical
instructions
on
benzol, toluol, о-, m-, n- xylols,
cyclohexane, ethylacetate and butyl
alcohol in working zone air» № 4168-86
from 06.11.86.
«Gravimetric measurement in working
zone air and in dust ventilating plants
systems» №1719-77 from 18.04.77.
«Gravimetric measurement in working
zone air and in dust ventilating plants
systems» №1719-77 from 18.04.1977.
Thus, nowadays, when a society development is aimed to guarantee the health
care and people’s high level of life, it is assumed that textile goods safety, especially
of those with bulking filler, depends on their designation and contact degree with
people’s skin. So, a risk-free production (or production with minimal level of risk) for
people’s health and safety, is a safe one.
Bibliography:
1. Prodanchuk M.G., Senenko L.G., Dyshinevich N.E., Rukavtsev G.I.,
Saveleva О.М., Polischuk S.О. Textile Materials and Clothes – Security Current
Problems // Light Industry. – 2004. - №4. – P.36-37.
2. Aronov I.Z. Production Quality and Safety: What Is Primary Point? / I.Z.
Aronov // Standards and Quality. – 2006. – №1. – P. 34-37.
3. Belov V.P. Terminology Base of Safety Theory / V.P. Белов, А.D. Golyakov
// Standards and Quality. – 2003. – №7. – P. 32-35.
4. Contemporary Ukrainian Language Big Glossary / Comp. and editor-in-chief
V.Т. Busel. – К.; Irpin: PH «Perun», 2004. – 1440 p.
5. Osypenko N.І. Research of New Worsted Cloths Safety // Goods and
Markets. – 2006. - №2. – P.188-193.
6. SAN R&N 24-125-4390-87 Chemical Fibers Putting in Materials for
Children’s Clothes and Footwear in accordance with Hygienic Indices. – М., 1987. –
8 p.
7. SSU 3993 – 2000. Commodities Science. Terms and Definitions.
8. Mykhailova G.М. Optimization of Structure Parameters and Bast Cloths
Properties Characteristics // Commodities Science and Commercial Entrepreneurship:
speciality professionalization, research, innovation: Materials of Intern. scien.-pract.
conf. (15-16 April 2009., Kyiv) / editor-in-chief А.А. Маzаrаkі. – К.: Кyiv. KNUTE,
2009. – P. 231-233.
9. SS 12.1.005-88. General Sanitary and Hygienic Demands to Working Zone
Air.
J21310-009
UDC 532.528
Anisimov V. V., Ermakov P. P.
CONSTRUCTION OF EXPERIMENTAL JET CAVITATION
APPARATUS
SHED “Ukrainian State University of Chemical Technology”
An experimental cavitation apparatus is presented. The design features and
principles of it’s work are shown. The features of mathematical processing of the
experimental data, obtained on the developed apparatus are considered
Keywords: cavitation, experimental apparatus, cavitating nozzle, sensor,
automation.
Cavitation is the phenomenon of the vapor, gas or vapor-gas bubbles appearance
from nuclei under local low pressures impact with probable following their collapse.
For the first time humanity was faced with cavitation in the end of the XIX
century, when testing high-speed ships [1,2] as with a purely negative phenomenon,
which led to the erosive destruction of machine parts, noises and vibrations. Since the
mid-twentieth century the direction of using the cavitation for processes of chemical
technology intensification got development.
Cavitational technologies are widely used in many fields of chemical industry,
particularly in the general chemical, food, petrochemical industries. The most
common application of cavitation is intensifying the processes of fine mixing,
dispersing, emulsification, absorption [2,3]. Also cavitation is used to intensify or
even initiate chemical reactions [4].
Widespread use of cavitation in industry determines the necessity in further
research of this phenomenon both from fundamental and from applied side.
There are many constructions of devices for creating cavitation. Most part of
them are designed for solving industrial purposes and has low suitability for
researches. A much smaller part of devices for creating cavitation have laboratory,
research purposes. Therefore, an actual task is to develop the research devices for
creating cavitation, which would allow access to new actual information as about the
process of cavitation, and about the efficiency of a cavitating element.
Investigation of cavitation is a wide area of researches. Therefore, before the
development of an apparatus the basic requirements and objectives that it must
confirm should be determined.
As the main objectives of the experimental cavitation apparatus development
were selected:
- carrying out large number of experiments with small labor input;
- investigation the shapes and sizes of cavitation field;
- the study of a wide range of cavitation nozzles.
Based on the above objectives cavitation experimental apparatus is developed,
the general view of which is presented in Fig. 1.
а)
b)
Fig. 1. General view of cavitation apparatus
a – construction of apparatus; 1 – buffer tank; 2 – gear pump; 3 – valve; 4 –
manometer; 5 – pressure pipeline; 6 – cavitation nozzle; 7 – sensor; 8 – plate; 9 –
engine; 10 – distribution node; 11 - discharge pipeline; 12 – pressure compensator; b
– apparatus photo.
Apparatus (Fig. 1, a) works as follows. Fluid from the buffer tank 1 is sucked by
gear pump 2, then under pressure, regulated by valve 3 and the measured by
manometer 4, is fed through the pressure pipeline 5 to cavitation nozzle 6. In
cavitation nozzle 6 fluid greatly accelerates and cavitational bubbles begin to grow
there. After exiting the nozzle cavitational bubbles collapse and produce waves of
pressure, which can be fixed by sensor 7. Then the liquid during some time locates in
the buffer tank 1, is being mixed, and then re-enters to the gear pump 2 through the
suction pipe. Thus is multiple processing of fluid is carried.
Drive of apparatus is provided by an engine with capacity of 2.2 kW and a
frequency of shaft rotation 25 s-1. Torsion movement from the engine is transmitted to
the gear pump providing flow of fluid under pressure up to 2.5 MPa and volume flow
3·10-4 m3/s. Fluid under pressure is fed to a distribution node 10.
In the distribution node 10 liquid flow is divided between the pressure pipeline 5
and the discharge pipeline 11 by the valve 3. Adjustable discharge of fluid is needed
for smooth adjustment of pressure in the pressure pipeline and related with it fluid
velocity.
The pressure, created by the pump, is measured by manometer 4. Between the
manometer and a distribution node an air pressure compensator 12 is placed. The
necessity to place compensator is determined by the instability of liquid from gear
pump supply, which leads to pressure oscillations in cavitation nozzle and also
prevents fixing the shows of the manometer.
System of sensor displacement is shown in Fig. 2
Fig. 2. System of sensor displacement
1 – outlet of pressure pipeline; 2 – cavitation nozzle; 3 – rod; 4 – guide
bushing; 5 – screw-clamp; 6 – corps of sensor holder; 7 – vibroisolating
pads; 8 – sensor; 9 – foot ring; 10 – cable of sensor.
System of sensor displacement provides movability of sensor relative to the
nozzle in the axial direction (axis l) in the range of 0 ÷ 80 mm and in the radial
direction (axis r) in the range of 0 ÷ 60 mm.
Sensor holder adapted to fix the sensor 8 based on piezoelectric element “ЦС-5”
or similar.
The signal from the sensor 8 (Fig. 2) through the cable 10 is transmitted to
oscilloscope.
The signal from the sensor (Fig. 3) may be written by digital oscilloscope
BM8020, converted to digital form and transmitted to the computer. On the computer
signal is visualized and stored in a file format «.dat» using program USB DiSco 3.14.
Fig. 3. Scheme of sensor signal processing
The following steps may be executed not directly during the experiments, but in
any time after. Each oscillogram is rewrited to format «.txt». After that it is suitable
for processing in mathematical package MathCad or another.
Processing in MathCad is carried out in two stages: a complex processing of
each oscillogram and analysis of all the experimental data with the construction of the
necessary plots, performing the necessary calculations.
Complex processing of signal oscillograms from the sensor includes:
- standardization of signal (bringing the number of points in the
oscillogram to 1024);
- vibrations, which are in advance nontypical for cavitation, impact rejection;
- symmetrization of the oscillogram to the time axis;
- determination of the signal intensity as a single number.
Procedure of complex mathematical processing oscillogram is next.
File with oscillogram in format «.txt» is imported to MathCad. The typical
oscillogram of signal from the sensor before processing is shown in Fig. 4.
Fig. 4. Typical oscillogram of signal before processing
Fig. 4 shows that typical oscillogram contains oscillations of different
frequencies. Cavitational oscillations have high frequencies (roughly from 1000 Hz)
and period close to t. Besides cavitational oscillations there are other oscillations of a
different nature (such as vibrations from unstable fluid supply from pump with period
T) on oscillogram. For rejection the noncavitational oscillations Fourier transform is
used. As the result of this transform the boundary between cavitation and other
oscillations becomes clearly visible (Fig. 5).
Fig. 5. A typical spectrum of the signal from the sensor
Processed with Fourier transform oscillogram is to symmetrizized to horizontal
axis (time axis).
After processing the oscillogram using Fourier transform it becomes suitable for
estimation the intensity of oscillations in the oscillogram. Estimation of cavitation
oscillations in oscillogram of signal from the sensor is determined by three criteria:
- the arithmetic mean of the ten largest maximums of oscillogram;
- the arithmetic mean of the ten largest minimums of oscillogram;
- the arithmetic mean deviation of the signal from zero.
Thus after the complex processing oscillogram reduces to single value, which
characterizes the signal from the sensor in current experiment. This value is used in
the second part of the mathematical processing of the experimental data.
It should be noted that the performance of all the complex processing of
oscillogram is completely automated. Researcher only specify a file to import, and
the program displays the calculated value of the sensor signal. This allows to, once
setting a program, quickly perform a large number of oscillograms processing. The
recommended number of points in plan of the experiment is about 125. When the
number of points over several hundred, their processing becomes time-consuming, so
that it is appropriate to use the modification of above program, designed for pack
processing. In this case, the researcher processes multiple (12, 32, etc.) points
simultaneously through which the time of processing the total number of experiments
is significantly reduced and the recommended number of experiments can be
increased even up to several thousand.
So the presented cavitation apparatus allows to carry out as multifactorial
studies of cavitation nozzle behavior and cavitation process in general. It is provided
both by construction of apparatus and by automated method of processing the results
of experiments. Besides apparatus has great productivity and is close to the industrial
design, what reduces the scaling values in the transition from laboratory to industrial
application.
Literarure:
1. Pirsol B. Cavitation. Mir, Moskva, 1980.
2. Reynolds O. The causes of racing of the engines of screw steamers,
investigated theoretically and by the experiment. Tr. Inst. Naval Arch. V14 Sc.
Papers, 1, 56-57, 1873.
3. Rozdestvensky V. Cavitation. Sudostroenie, Lvov 1977.
4. Smorodov E., Galiahmetov R., Ilgamov M.
Physics and chemistry of
cavitation. Nauka, Мoskva, 2008.
J21310-010
UDC 620.178.16:621.893:678.664
Anisimov V.N.
THE PRINCIPLE OF PRODUCING THERMOPLASTIC
POLYURETHANE COMPOSITES OF IMPROVED WEAR RESISTANCE
Ukrainian State University of Chemical Technology,
The influence of the main structural parameters and methods of modifying
thermoplastic polyurethanes and their compositions on their strength, deformation,
rheological and tribotechnical characteristics has been studied. A complex approach
to producing polyurethane compositions of improved wear resistance has been
suggested.
Key words: thermoplastic polyurethane, molecular weight, ratio of hard
segments, functional additions, improved wear resistance
Introduction
Thermoplastic polyurethanes, which entered the world market over fifty years
ago, are increasingly used in industry. The annual growth rate of their production is
3-5%, and the composition range is rapidly expanding [1, 2].
Specific chemical structure of polyurethanes associated with their block
copolymer structure, on the one hand, offers great potential for variations in the
composition of their macromolecules and, consequently, their properties; on the other
hand, it greatly complicates the systematization of data on their interrelations.
Moreover, the compositions of polyurethane-based materials have mostly been
developed empirically, and data on the relationships between their compositions and
properties are often incomplete and contradictory. There are numerous publications
on the subject; however, their results are scattered and lack generalization, especially
when it comes to the production of polyurethane composites for tribotechnical
purposes. For this reason, the development of the principles of producing
polyurethane-based composites of improved wear resistance through variations in
their macromolecular structures, starting constituents, and methods of modification is
an urgent scientific and technological problem, which is of great practical importance
for practically every industry in Ukraine.
Subject of investigations
The study is aimed at the development of thermoplastic polyurethanes and
polyurethane-based composites of improved wear resistance through variations in
their macromolecular structures, nature and type of starting constituents, and
modification techniques.
Objects and methodics of investigations
Thermoplastic polyurethanes (TPU) synthesized at OAO Polimersintez
(Vladimir, Russian Federation) are chosen as the object of investigation. They are
TPU based on oligoesters, such as oligobutylene glycoladipate (OBGA500) of
molecular weight about 500, butanediol and diisocyanate (TPU OBGA500);
oligoethylene glycoladipate (OEGA2000) of molecular weight about 2000, butanediol
and diisocyanate (TPU OEGA2000); and
molecular
weight
2000
(OEBGA2000),
oligoethylene butyleneglycoladipate of
butanediol
and
diisocyanate
(TPU
OEBGA2000), and TPU based on polyether oligooxitetrametilenglicol (OOTMG) of
molecular weight about 1000, butandiol and diisocyanate (TPU OOTMG1000) as well.
Binary mixtures of different TPU compositions are obtained by mechanical
mixing of the raw materials in the melt on automatic thermoplastication machines at a
pressure of 80 - 100 MPa and a temperature of 180 - 190º C.
Physical and mechanical properties of the polyurethanes are estimated
according to GOST 270-75 on a universal machine TT-DM-4 "Instron." Hardness of
the test materials was measured on the TM-2 device according to GOST 263-75. The
melt flow characteristics are evaluated on the IIRT-M instrument under the load of
21.2 N and the temperature of 180 or 190° C.
The TPU tribotechnical characteristics were studied on a disk friction machine
using “disk – finger-sample” technique at the slip speed V = 0.4 m/s and specific load
p = 0.2 MPa.
The results of the study were computer-processed using the software package
MathCAD 7 pro.
Main results of investigations
As it was earlier found, the molecular weight and ratio of hard segments are the
main characteristics, which determine the TPU properties [3, 4].
Polyurethane thermoplastic materials of a molecular weight that corresponds to
intrinsic viscosity [η] = 0.8 – 1.1 dl/g have the most optimal structural ordering, they
exhibit a minimum value of wear by dry friction, friction in the water, under the
action of abrasive particles; they also show the lowest coefficient of friction and
increased heat resistance (fig. 1).
The study of tribotechnical characteristics and wear pattern of the TPU as a
function of the hard segments concentration revealed that extremes characterized by
the minimal values of wear rate, including abrasive wear, and minimal friction
coefficient correspond to the ratio of hard segments ϕh = 30 – 50 mas.% (fig 2).
Hence, through adjusting the structural parameters, such as molecular weight
and ratio of hard segments, at the stage of synthesis, it is possible to produce
materials with preset performance characteristics. This approach have been used as a
base in developing brand compositions of thermoplastic polyurethanes VITUR™
(NPO “Polimersintez”, Vladimir, Russian Federation).
However, for TPU processing industries in the C.I.S. countries, which are
characterized by a small-scale production with a wide range of products, the above
approach seems to be labour-consuming and costly. That is why modification of
TPU-based composite materials at the processing stage is today a prevailing method
of their production.
Fig.1. Dependences of the thermoplastic polyurethane wear rate I on
intrinsic viscosity [η] (V = 0.4 m/s, p = 0.2 MPa):
1 – OBGA: BD: MDI = 1: 0.5: 1.5; 2 – OBGA: BD: MDI = 1: 1.5: 2.5;
3 – OBGA: BD: MDI = 1: 3: 4; 4 – OEGA: BD: MDI = 1: 0.5: 1.5;
5 - OEGA: BD: MDI = 1: 4: 5
Fig.2. Dependence of the thermoplastic polyurethane wear rate on the
ratio of hard segments φh:
1 – OBGA500: BD: MDI; 2 – OBGA2000: BD: MDI;
3 – OEGA2000: BD: MDI; 4 – OEBGA2000: BD: MDI;
5 – OOTMG1000: BD: MDI
The study suggests producing a polymer matrix by mixing materials that differ
in their chemical compositions at the level of the oligoester constituent. In this case,
the presence of hard segments of the same chemical structure in the polymer blend
ingredients allows obtaining two- and multi-component systems with high
compatibility and a specified set of properties. The above hard segments of the
same chemical structure are formed from diphenilmethane diisocyanate (MDI) and
1,4-butanediol.
The properties of oligoester-based polyurethane thermoplastics of different
chemical compositions OBGA, OEGA, and OEBGA and with different molecular
weights of 500 to 2000 are shown in fig. 3. There is a concentration range of 80:20–
60:40 (wt.%), which indicates the optimal combination of the deformation and
strength characteristics such as tensile strength (ft), tensile modulus Et , the
elongation at rupture εt , with the values of the rheological and tribotechnical
characteristics (fig. 3). It should also be noted that the above characteristics change
several-fold over the whole concentration range. The properties are improved through
the optimization of phase separation due to a bimodal molecular weight distribution
in the flexible phase.
The properties of polyurethane thermoplastics based on polyester blends
OBGA, OEGA, OEBGA with molecular weights varying from 500 to 2000 and
polyether OOTMG, molecular weight 1000, are shown in fig. 4. Polyester-based TPU
are known to possess improved physical and mechanical characteristics, better light
and thermo oxidation resistance, they are cheaper and easier to process. Oligoetherbased polyurethanes show better frost resistance and hydrolytic stability; they also
exhibit higher microbial resistance [5].
When
mixed,
the
polyether-/polyester-based
TPU
that
include
an
oligoether/oligoester component of varying nature and different molecular weights
exhibit significant, several-fold changes in strength and deformation characteristics
(fig. 4). The properties are apparently improved by optimizing the phase separation
due to the fact that the flexible phase has a bimodal molecular weight distribution,
and the whole mixtures have good compatibility.
Fig.3.
Dependences
of
tensile
strength ft (1a), tensile modulus E (2a),
elongation at rupture εr (3a), melt flow
IFM (4a), Shore A hardness HA (1b),
wear rate I (2b), friction coefficient f
(3b) of thermoplastic polyurethanes
based on oligoester blends
Fig.4.
Dependences
of
tensile
strength ft (1a), tensile modulus E (2a),
elongation at rupture εr (3a), melt flow
IFM (4a), Shore A hardness HA (1б),
wear rate I (2б), friction coefficient f
(3б) of thermoplastic polyurethanes
based on oligoester/oligoether blends
This type of behavior makes it easy to produce the binary mixtures in any
processing plant and provides the opportunity to use every product obtained under the
optimum conditions.
Modifying TPU with solid lubricants (graphite, molybdenum disulfide, PTFE,
etc.) and epoxyphenol oligomers provides for high wear resistance and good antifriction characteristics under the conditions of dry friction, which allows raising the
upper temperature limit of efficiency of the TPU products by 40-50º C [6, 7].
Fine powders of alloys based on iron, nickel, and copper were introduced to
increase the thermal conductivity [8].
The introduction of a polyelectrolyte complex (PEC) based on sodium
polyacrylate and vinyl ammonium chloride into the composition contributes to the
penetration of water and moisture from the environment into the network structure of
the lyophilic PEC. This leads to a concentration of the working fluid on the working
surface of the material and promotes the formation of a separating liquid film
between the friction surfaces. As a result, there is a decrease in the coefficient of
conjugation friction, and an increase in durability [9].
To reduce the viscosity of the melt, still residues of the production of higher
aliphatic amines of C17 – C21 fraction were injected into the TPU. These materials had
high flow and formability which enables the production of large-size products of
complex shapes [10].
Final processing of TPU in thermal fields of varying intensity (exposure in the
heat chamber, exposure to infrared rays and laser light) 5 to 10 times improves the
resistance of polyurethane compositions to wear by friction in water [11].
Conclusion
1. Analysis of the experimental studies confirmed the validity of an integrated
approach to the production of high wear-resistant polyurethane compositions. It has
been found that a number of characteristics (physical and mechanical, dynamic,
tribotechnical) exhibit an extreme dependence.
2. Optimization of the systems studied enables determine the most promising
formulations of polyurethane composites for use as sliding bearings, moving and
stationary sealants, elastic elements, etc., both domestic and imported.
References:
1.
Skakun
Yu.V.
Termoplastychni
poliuretany:
budova,
vlastyvosti,
vykorystannya / Yu.V.Skakun, Yu.M. Nizelsky // Polimerny zhurnal. – 2007. – Tom
29. – No.1. – pp. 3-9
2.
Shtompel
V.I.
Struktura
lineynyh
poliuretanov
/
V.I.Shtompel,
Yu.Yu.Kercha. – Kiev. – Naukova dumka, 2008. – 247 p.
3.
Letunovsky
M.P.
Vliyaniye
molekularnoy
massy
na
svoystva
termoplastichnyh poliuretanov / M.P.Letunovsky, V.V.Strahov, V.N.Anisimov I dr. //
Plasticheskiye massy. – 1987. – No.9. – pp.23-24
4. Anisimov V.N. Vliyaniye zhestkih blokov na mehanicheskiye harakteristiki
I abrazivostoykost poliuretanov / V.N.Anisimov, A.A.Semenets, M.P.Letunovsky,
V.V.Strahov // Fizyko-himichna mehanika materialiv. – 2002. – No.1. – pp.79-82
5. Termoplastichny poliuretan “Vitur”: Katalog / [sost. Strahov V.V.]. –
Vladimir: Transit-Iks, 2002. – 17 p.
6. Pat. 53746 Ukraina, MPK7 CO8L75/04 Polimerna kompozytsiya / Anisimov
V.N., Kurachenkov V.M., Semenets O.A.; zayavnyk i vlasnyk patentu Ukrayinsky
derzhavny himiko-tehnologichny universytet. – No.200042013; zayavl. 10.04.00;
opubl. 17.02.03, Byul. No.2
7. A.C. 1669947 SSSR, MKI4 CO8L75/04. Poliuretanovaya kompozitsiya /
V.N.Kurachenkov, V.N.Anisimov, V.V.Strahov (SSSR). – No.4394615/05; zayavl.
18.01.89; opubl. 15.08.91, Byul.No.30
8. Pozytyvne rishennya na vydachu patentu na vynahid “Poliuretanova
kompozytsiya” / Anisimov V.N.; zayavnyk Ukrayinsky derzh.him.-teh.univ-t. No.a
2011 02954; zayavl. 14.03.2011
9. Pat. 99543 Ukrayina, MPK7 C08L75/04 (2006.01). Polimerna kompozytsiya
/ Anisimov V.N.; zayavnyk ta patentovlasnyk DVNZ “Ukrayinsky derzhavny
himiko-tehnologichny universytet”. – No. a 2011 02951; zayavl. 14.03.11; opubl.
27.08.12, Byul. No.16
10. Pat. 97455 Ukrayina, MPK7 C08L75/04, C08K3/04, C08K5/17 (2006.01).
Poliuretanova kompozytsiya / Anisimov V.N.; zayavnyk ta patentovlasnyk DVNZ
“Ukrayinsky derzhavny himiko-tehnologichny universytet”. – No. a 2011 02955;
zayavl. 14.03.11; opubl. 10.02.12, Byul. No.3
11.
Kurachenkov
V.N.
Vliyaniye
initsiiruyushchego
izlucheniya
na
iznosostoykost termoplastichnyh poliuretanov / V.N.Kurachenkov, V.N.Anisimov,
V.V.Strahov, N.P.Nazarenko // Problemy treniya I iznashivaniya: Resp. mezhved.
Nauch.-tehn. Sb. – 1990. Vyp. 37. - pp. 83-86
J21310-011
UDC 621.385.2:628.981
Bayneva I.I., Baynev V.V.
AUTOMATED SYSTEM DESIGN OF THE LIGHT DEVICES
Abstract: In this paper we described the problems of light device calculation
and design, the principles of the developed software for the light devices automated
modeling and design.
Key words: modeling, program, system, light devices, reflector, design.
Light device consists of such elements as light source, optical system, start
regulative equipment, constructive nodes. Its parameters greatly depend on light
device design feature and noticeably influence upon its features as a whole.
The problem of light device calculation is to determine a geometric form of
optical system elements in order to get a required light distribution. Lighting
materials used for optical system element fabrication, and its work conditions must be
taken into account. Mirror reflector must provide the required form of light power
curve.
The software for automated system is developed in order to carry out such
calculations and then design of light device. The use of the automated modeling and
design system allows:
- to develop the light devices of different constructions for different purposes
promptly and effectively;
- to evaluate thetechnical-economic efficiency of light system;
- to determinethe main parameters of light device system and involve it with
construction of light device as a whole.
The raw data for the program LighTooLux 1.1 (fig. 1) is the required light
distribution, the light source type, the count and location of the light sources, the
material optical factors, the radiation useful angle.
Figure 1. Work window of program LighTooLux 1.1
There are following standard ways of light power curve evaluation in the
program:
1 light stream maximization;
2 light stream maximization inside radiation useful angle;
3 light power curve leveling inside radiation useful angle;
4 maximization of difference between average light power in side radiation
useful angle and average general light power.
Conclusion
The developed program LighTooLux 1.1 allows calculating and building the
reflector profileas a matter of information about light sources, material reflection
factors, light power curve types and other data.
Bibliography:
1. Bayneva I.I., Baynev V.V. Matematicheskie i programmnie sredstva
modelirovania svetovih priborov. “Systemi I sredstva informatiki”, 2012. T.22. №2.
S.95-105.
2. Programma dlya EVM №2012612870 RF. Programma dlya modelirovania i
proectirovanya svetovih priborov razlichnogo ispolnenia i naznachenia / I.I. Bayneva,
V.V. Baynev; pravoobladatel «OgarevMordovia State University»; 23.03.2012.
J21310-012
UDC 303.732.4
Stepanenko I.A. Lukyanov V.S.
INVESTIGATION OF THE CHARACTERISTICS OF THE
ELECTRONIC PAYMENT SYSTEM BY ANALITICAL MODELING
Volgograd State Technical University
In this report the analytical model of the electronic payment system, built on the
basis of the financial cryptographic protocol “anonymous cash checks” is described.
This model identifies the main characteristics of the system, such as performance,
load of the individual centers, the average service time, etc. Also, the bottlenecks of
the system are identified with the developed analytical model.
Key words: analytical model, anonymous cash checks, characteristics,
performance, queuing system.
The article performs the investigation result of developed analytical model of the
system, which is based on financial cryptographic protocol "anonymous cash
checks"[1].
The system itself is formalized as a queuing system (Pic. 1).
Pic. 1. Formalization of the system in the form of QS
The analytical model is software, which allows to find the characteristics of the
system under various load conditions using the Buzen’s method and the average
values method.
For the calculation you must specify the following input parameters:
1. The intensity of the input applications (Λ);
2. The total number of applications (N);
3. Service time of the each center (T);
4. Failure probability of the service (P).
Input data:
1. Λ = 10 a/s;
2. 10 ≤ N ≤ 100 a;
3. Turnover time of TCP packet in the communication channel - RTT(s) = 0.05
4. Time of the extraction from the queue and putting into service = 0.01
5. Time of the signature verification (s) = 0.1;
6. Client generates wrappers(s)= 0.5;
7. Bank checks wrappers(s) = 0.7;
8. Client checks the bank’s signature(s) = 0.1;
9. Seller checks the bank’s signature(s) = 0.1;
10. Client generates additional information for the seller(s) = 0.3;
11. Seller checks the client’s additional information(s) = 0.4;
12. Payment confirmation by the bank(s) = 3;
13. Probability of completion of the service with the error in S4 center = 0.4;
Obtain the dependence of the performance and the average residence time of
application on the total number of applications in the network (pic.2).
Pic. 2. Dependence of the performance and the average residence time of
application on the total number of applications in the network.
Comparing the dependences, we can conclude that: increasing of the number of
applications in the network, on the one hand, leads to an increase in productivity,
which can be seen as a positive factor, but on the other hand - to increase the
residence time of applications, which is undesirable.
Point N0 ~ 23 is the benchmark values for the number of applications in the
system. A further increase of the number of applications in the network is
impractical, since it leads to a sharp increase in the residence time of applications in
the network with a slight increase productivity.
With an increasing number of applications (N) in the network nodes we can see
appearance of the queue, and it is obvious that if we increase application count in the
network then the lines will be longer at the S4 center and, therefore, the residence
time of applications in the system will be longer too.
When the number of applications reaches 23, the loading of S4 center is close
to 1, with virtually stops of the growth of productivity. Node S4 is a "bottleneck" of
the network (pic.3).
Pic. 3. Dependence of the load factor of S4 center on total number of the
applications in the network.
S4 can be unloaded by reducing the time of service in this node or by increasing
of the number of servers.
An analytical model has a number of assumptions [2]:
1. Incoming flow of applications is pausson’s flow;
2. The distribution of application service time in the network center is
exponential in the centers of the discipline FIFO, or general for the centers
of the disciplines IS, PS, and LIFO;
3. Queue at the centers of the network is not limited;
4. Number of channels in multi-line centers is not limited
From these assumptions, it follows that the model does not take into account the
loss of orders due to overflow queues or lack of channels and locks for service can’t
be considered too.
For more accurate and detailed characteristics, it’s necessary to construct a
simulation model of the system.
References:
1. Schneier, B. Applied Cryptography / B. Schneier / / Moscow: Triumph. 2002. - S. 137-150.
2. Lukyanov, V.S. Models of computer networks with certifying centers:
monograph. / V.S. Lukyanov, I.V. Cherkovsky, A.V. Skakunov, D.V. Bikov; VSTU.
- Volgograd, 2009. - 242 p.
J21310-013
UDC 620.197:621.643
Vasilenko A.F. Vasilenko N. V.
CONTROL OF PROTECTIVE CAPACITY OF STATIONS OF
CATHODIC PROTECTION OF THE GAS PIPELINE
Kuban state technological university, Krasnodar, Moscowskay, 2, 350072
In this report it is considered distributions of protective capacity of stations of
cathodic protection on pipeline length.
Keywords: cathodic protection, protective potential, metal corrosion, gas
pipeline.
For control of security of the gas pipeline the system of corrosion monitoring
has to exercise control of protective potential of the gas pipeline as heat-sink
parameter considering all set influencing security of a pipe of factors in real time.
The key parameter defining quality of electrochemical protection by stations of
cathodic protection, the size of potential of the gas pipeline of rather saturated
copper-sulfate electrode of comparison is. Saturated copper-sulfate electrode of
comparison possesses rather normal hydrogen electrode with a constant potential of
+0,3 V at a temperature of 20 С º.
In 1928 Robert Dzh. Kuna during experiments I drew a conclusion that
protective potential a minus 0,85 V rather electrode of comparison is relative reliably
prevents corrosion [2]. Depending on structure of the environment and other
conditions for achievement of the same effect of suppression of corrosion the various
size of protective potential is required. Therefore there is the minimum value of
min
min
protective potential E Э . E Э
is defined on the basis of design inspection of the
district by the projecting organization.
Thus, the problem of protection of the gas pipeline is reduced to a problem of
min
maintenance of protective potential E Э
throughout the gas pipeline.
From an economic benefit establish rather powerful station of cathodic
protection, having placed about it group of anodes. In this case protective current
flows on soil from anodes, gets on the pipeline and gathers to токоотводу in a
connection place (a drainage point). Thus in process of removal from a point
токоотвода cathodic potential decreases.
For definition of distribution of protective potential on length of the pipeline we
use the differential ratios defining change of potential in metal and the earth on length
of the gas pipeline and the changing potential between the earth and a surface of a
pipe along the gas pipeline (fig. 1).
I
dX
X
dVT
Eэ
dI/dX
Vз
Iобщ
r
Аноды
Fig. 1. Distribution of potentials and currents on pipeline length
Current from a source flows on the anode (it is presented by a point), from the
anode on the ground to the pipeline, then through isolation directly to metal, further
on pipe metal to a point of a drainage and, at last, comes back to a source of a direct
current. Thus, the electric chain is closed.
Designations and parameters: VT – the gas pipeline potential, i.e. power failure
in a pipe body from a drainage point to a point x; V3 – the capacity of the earth
concerning the anode in a point x; EЭ – electrochemical potential, between metal and
the soil, defining the local density of protective current.
Potential of EЭ is expressed as follows:
E Ý = - dl × r èç
d èç
,
p × D × dx
(1)
where I – current in the pipeline, A; ρиз – the specific resistance of isolation,
Ω•m; δиз – thickness of an insulating layer, m; D – diameter of a pipe, m.
VT potential in a body of a pipe changes on coordinate x and depends on the
specific resistance of metal of the pipeline (ρТ), wall thickness (δТ) and its diameter.
As current on length of the pipeline changes, it is possible to write down only
differential ratio:
dVT = I × r T
dx
.
p × D × dT
(2)
For calculation of distribution of a field in the earth it is possible to use model
for a dot source of current. On sufficient removal from anodes it is possible to
consider that the field is distributed evenly in all directions in the form of a
hemisphere. Change of potential in the earth is defined by power failure in a spherical
layer from the current which is flowing down from the anode:
dVÇ = - I îáù × dRÇ ,
(3)
where Iобщ – the general current which is flowing down from the anode, A; dVЗ –
change of capacity of the earth at some distance from the anode, in relation to
infinitely remote point, V; dR3 – change of resistance of a spherical layer, Ω.
Solving system of the differential equations (1, 2, 3) we receive the differential
equation:
I îáù r ãð
d 2 EÝ
RÒ
=
E
Ý
p
dx 2
Rèç
é
3x 2
ê 2
êë y + x 2
(
)
5 2
+
(
ù
3 2 ú .
y2 + x2
úû
1
)
(4)
For the equation (4) the approximate common decision is given:
Е Э = С1еa х + С 2 е -a х +
I общ r гр
p
(у
2
+х
2
)
.
(5)
On the basis of real measurements of characteristics of soil of concrete sites of
gas pipelines it is possible to calculate value of constants С1, С2.
For example, for a gas pipeline site with parameters: EЭ − 1,85 V; EЭmax − 1,98
V; I общ − 15 A; r гр − 15 Ω *m; y − 400 m; x − 1425 m; rТ − 1,40 * 10-7; d T − 0,008
m; D − 0,82 m; r из − 48 kΩ are received the following values of constants
С1 = 0 ,9; С2 = 0 ,9 . These coefficients determine the stationary potential of the gas
pipeline.
For definition of an area of coverage of one installation of cathodic protection
on the equation (5) schedules of distribution of protective potential on length of the
gas pipeline (fig. 2) are received.
φ[V]
φ[V]
l [m]
φ[V]
l [m]
φ[V]
l [m]
l [m]
Fig. 2. Distribution of protective potential on gas pipeline length
In fig. 2a the schedule describing distribution of protective potential for the gas
pipeline with isolation with a resistance of 100 kΩ m, cathodic current 30A and level
of corrosion aggression of soil with a resistance of 15 Ω /m is submitted. From the
schedule it is visible that the gas pipeline 5 000 m long is completely protected (level
of potential is higher minimum 0,85 V). In fig. 2б the schedule in case of decrease
isolation resistance to 100 Ω is submitted. Change of resistance of isolation to 100 Ω
led to a situation when station of cathodic protection isn't able to make protection of
the gas pipeline throughout. Protected there is a site about 2 000 m, instead of the put
5 000 m. Increase of cathodic current to 100 A, doesn't lead to basic change of a
situation (fig. 2в).
One more situation dangerous to the gas pipeline is in this situation shown,
protective potential in a point of a drainage came nearer to dangerous level in 2,5 V at
which active process of a saturation by hydrogen of metal of the gas pipeline begins.
It is necessary to allocate a situation when soil has low corrosion aggression
(resistance about 50 Ω /m), and the gas pipeline low level of resistance of isolation
(fig. 2g). In this case in a drainage point at current 25 A, potential exceeds level 3,5 V
that leads to pipe destruction because of a saturation by hydrogen, and on the ends of
a zone of protection of potential doesn't reach a minimum level of 0,85 V. In that case
change of operating modes of station of cathodic protection in any way won't allow to
make protection of the gas pipeline and it is required to carry out overhaul of
isolation of a pipe.
Proceeding from stated, it is possible to come to the following conclusion that
protective potential has to be supervised at least in three points (in a point of a
drainage and on the ends of a zone of protection), as points defining the maximum
and minimum value of potential. Thus the system has to supervise that protective
potential in these points didn't leave for admissible borders.
For control of protective potential in a drainage point the station of cathodic
protection has to be equipped with the device providing measurement of protective
potential. For ensuring control of protective potential on the ends of a zone of
protection the system of corrosion monitoring has to turn on the device with a limited
resource of the food, providing measurement of protective potential on the ends of a
zone of protection.
For receiving a full-fledged picture of protection of the gas pipeline the system
of corrosion monitoring has to supervise key parameters of the rectifier, such as
current of loading and output tension.
References:
1. Aksyutin O. E. About measures for increase of reliability of functioning of
the gas transmission system of JSC Gazprom: collection of reports of the III
International conference Topical issues of anticorrosive protection (PACP 2009), on
October 14-15, 2009. – M.: Gazprom VNIIGAZ, 2009. – Page 3-11.
2. Beckman V., Shvenk V. Cathodic protection against corrosion: Directory /
Century Bekman, V. Shvenk [translation from German]. – M.: Metallurgy, 1984. –
496 pages.
3. Vasilenko A.F. Vasilenko N. V., Bogdanov V. V. Development of the
program of hardware point of management by stations of cathodic protection [Text] /
A.F.Vasilenko, N. V. Vasilenko, V. V. Bogdanov//News of higher educational
institutions. North-Caucasus region. Technical science, 2010. No. 6. – Page 61-66.
4. System of corrosion monitoring of NGK-SKM: Operation manual. Edition
1.96. – Saratov: "Neftegazkompleks-EHZ", 2010. – 21 pages.
J21310-014
UDC 664.3:547
Melnik A.P., Matveeva T.V., Papchenko V.Y.,
Kramarev S.O., Malik S.G., Getmansev A.M.
TECHNICAL ASPECTS OF NEW MONOACYLGLYCEROL
OBTAINING TECHNOLOGY
National technical university “Kharkov polytechnic institute”
In the report scientific aspects of simultaneous obtaining of monodiacylglycerol (MAG, DAG) and ethanolamides by amidation of sunflower oil
triacylglycerols (TAG) by monoethanolamine have been considered. It was
established that amidation reaction proceeds by stages with MAG DAG and glycerol
formation along with monoethanolamide. Identification of products have been
carried out by titrimetric and potentiometric methods.
Keywords:monoacylglycerols,
diacylglycerols,
triacylglycerols,
glycerol,
monoethanolamine, amidation.
Monoacylglycerols (MAG) are surface – active substances which are widely
used as an emulsifiers in perfume, cosmetic and food industries. For example,
addition 0,1 – 0,5 % of MAG in flour in composition with fats, which are added to
bread, increasing its quality and slow down the stale of it, addition of MAG into
dough for pasta decreased breakage of it and prevents sticking them together.
Addition of MAG into cream for cakes not only increases quality of product but also
decreases usage of eggs. And also better digestion of fats could be obtained when use
MAG in margarine and cooking oils. Analysis of scientific sources showed that
replacement of ordinary triacylglycerol (TAG) on blend of MAG and diacylglycerols
(DAG) leads to preventing fat deposits.
Nowadays distillated monoacylglycerols of edible fats and oil are used at the
food and cosmetic enterprises, which are produced by complicated technologies.
Main obtaining technology is esterification of fatty acids by glycerin or glycerolysis
of fats and oils in the presence of chemical catalysts or enzymes with subsequent
molecular distilling.
Alkylcarbonamides are surface active substances, which are widely used in
cosmetic industry and by hand cream or shampoo production. As an
monoacylglycerols,
alkylcarbonamide,
in
particular
monoethanolamides,
aremanufacturing via multistep synthesis, with use a lot of heat and electricity.
Thus, investigations which are devoted to development of simple simultaneously
MAG and ethanolamides of fatty acids obtaining technology are actual.
The aim of work is investigations which are directed to development of
scientific basis of simultaneously monodiacylglycerol and monoethanolamides
obtaining by amidation of sunflower oil triacylglycerols with monoethanolamine
(MEA) with further its separation out of reaction masses.
Amidation of sunflower oil by MEA developed in ideal mixing reactor.
Temperature in
reactor
maintained automatically with accuracy ± 0,5 ºC.
Identification of amidation products held by titrimetric and potentiometric methods,
IR-spectrometry and thin layer chromatography. Monoethanolamides concentration
determined by nonaqueousperchloricacid titrationin the media of acetic anhydride.
Monoethanolamides concentration determined by chloric acid titrationinthe media of
isopropyl alcohol. Results of investigations were processed by least square method.
Interaction of sunflower oil TAG with MEA caught be described or by grossreaction or by reaction with stepwise formation of DAG, MAG, glycerol (Gl) and
parallel monoethanolamide formation. But calculations of free energy of reactions
showed that passing of tetramolecular reaction is impossible and stepwise passing of
interaction between TAG and MEA isconfirmed. Stepwise passing of reaction is also
confirmed by results of thin layer chromatography (pic. 1).
As shown on picture 1, spending of TAG and formation of DAG, MAG, Gl and
monoethanolamide are observed by increasing the time of reaction. IR spectrometry
also confirmed presence of monoethanolamides: carbonyl group detected at the
1650 cm-1 and carbonyl group in esters come out in the interval 1740 – 1760 cm-1.
By comparison MEA concentration, which is consumed in the reaction with
MEA concentration which is determined by nonaqueous potentiometric titration,
established that all MEA is used on monoethanolamide formation, and that is
confirmed absence of byreactions.
On the base of foregoing, conversion rate of MEA depending on time and
temperature have been developed. Have been established, that reaction of TAG, DAG
or MAG with MEA occur halfway in first 30 – 40 minutes. After that the rate of
amidation significantly decreases and there is no change in it until the end of reaction.
100
В, %
80
60
40
20
0
0
20
40
60
t, min
Pic. 1. Content of reaction mass components by the time of reaction
between TAG and MEA (1 : 2) analyzed by TLC, where ♦ - TAG, ■ – DAG, ▲ –
MAG, □ – Gl, ○ – monoethanolamide
Thus, his kinetic investigations confirmed thermodynamic calculations about
stepwise proceeding of amidation process. Maximum amidation rate reached under
423 K, and MEA conversion rate in this conditions reached 95 %. On the base of
determined components concentrations considering chemistry of interaction and
hydrogen bonds between molecules of reaction masses the reaction rate constants and
thermodynamic parameters of TAG, DAG and MAG reactions with MEA are
calculated. Established that highest rate constant belongs to the reaction of TAG with
MEA and the smallest – MAG with MEA.
References:
1. Melnik A.P., Matveeva T.V. The study of the kinetics of alkilkarbonamidov
derived from fats / Vestnik of Kharkov State Polytechnic University. – Kharkov:
HDPU, 1999. – Issue. 33. – Р. 46 – 48.
2. Melnik A.P., Matveeva T.V. On the kinetics of the formation of derivatives
alkilkarbonamidov of fats / Vestnik of the Kharkov State Polytechnic University. Kharkov: HDPU, 1999. – Issue. 90. – Р. 66 – 68.
3. Melnik A.P., Matveeva T.V. The technology for producing MEA of oil and
fats. / Vestnik of the National technical university "Kharkiv polytechnic institute". –
Kharkov: NTU "KPI", 2002. – № 2, Р. – P. 89 – 93.
4. Melnik A.P., Matveeva T.V., Papchenko V.Y. Obtaining monoacylglycerides
of triacylglycerides sunflower oil / Vestnik of the National technical university
"Kharkiv polytechnic institute". – Kharkov: NTU "KPI", 2004. – № 41 – P. 56 – 60.
J21310-015
UDC 681
Chupakhina L.R. Kireeva N. V.
RESEARCH OF CHARACTERISTICS OF THE NETWORK TRAFFIC
Povolzhskiy State University of Telecommunications and Informatics,
In this report examines the research of the system of mass service type G/G/1.
Approximation of functions of distribution through cumulant analysis allows to take
into account properties of real network traffic.
Key words: queuing system, cumulant analysis, Weibull distribution,
exponential series.
The study characteristics of network traffic in a modern network of traditional
analysis, based on the Poisson, can not reliably describe them. The input data flow
with the property of self-similarity and nonstationarity may simulate or, at least, to
predict its behavior. To study the model we take a queuing system type G/G/1.
Features of this system are arbitrary values, so you need the most accurate description
of any known function first, and then compare it to any.
Explore the unknown probability density function. Choosing a common
distribution with «heavy» tails: Weibull, Pareto, lognormal, you can simulate a
system of type G/G/1.
Consider the approximation of the density function of the Weibull distribution.
Weibull distribution function (1) is:
-(
F ( х) = 1-e
x α
)
β
, x>0 ,a>0, b >0 ,
(1)
where α - the shape parameter, β - the scale parameter [1].
The density of the Weibull distribution (2) is as follows (Fig.1):
f(х) = αβ- α x α - 1e
-(
x α
)
β
.
(2)
0,2
0,15
0,1
0,05
0
0,00
10,00
20,00
30,00
40,00
50,00
60,00
-0,05
Fig. 1. Weibull density function f(x)
Now consider the way to represent the unknown density by cumulant analysis.
One of the important properties of the cumulant description of random variables and
processes is that a finite set of cumulants always corresponds to a real function that
approximates the probability distribution [2]. With cumulant representation model the
same density function of the Weibull distribution, but only considering the realistic
network.
For the selected values α and β taking into account the first six moments of the
function and its expansion in the Edgeworth series, you can get an approximation of
an arbitrary distribution function W(x) in the form (Fig.2).
0,18
0,16
0,14
0,12
0,10
0,08
0,06
0,04
0,02
0,00
-0,020,00
W(x)
f(x)
10,00
20,00
30,00
40,00
Fig. 2. Comparison of the two densities of the Weibull distribution
f(x) and W(x)
Therefore approximate the function by a cumulant representation is possible.
But even more interesting problem is the consideration of the unknown density
expansion in exponential series. [3]
Thus, to find the characteristics of type G/G/1 factors to consider.
Unknown function, which is subject to the input stream of packets, it is
expedient to provide, through its probability density. The possibility of removing the
parameters and time of receipt of service with real traffic at the entrance of the
system allows them to operate in the investigation of different ways.
Analysis of characteristics of real traffic is different, but most importantly, that it
satisfies the conditions occurring in the telecommunications system.
References:
1. Law Averill M., Kelton V. David Imitating modeling. Classics of CS. 3rd
prod.2004. - 848 p.
2. Malakhov A.N. Cumulant analysis of casual not Gaussian processes and their
transformations. M, Soviet radio. 1978. - 376 p.
3. Kleynrok L. Theory of mass service. Transfer with English / the Lane.
I.I.Grushko; edition V.I.Neumann – M: Mechanical engineering. 1979. - 432 p.
J21310-016
UDC 625.75
Naumenko A. I., Bavbel J. I., Lyshchik P. A.
LABORATORY STUDIES OF COMPLEX BINDER, WITH THE
STRENGTHENING OF SOILS OF ROADBED OF FOREST ROADS
Belarusian state technological university, Department of transportation wood
Now at building of highways of general use design of road clothes from the
strengthened materials allows increasing terms of their service and provides the
increase of transport-operational indicators. At designing road clothes of wood
roads it is necessary to consider specificity of their work taking into account increase
in weight of lorry convoys and experience of improvement of road soils properties.
Key words: forest roads, strengthening of soils location, metallurgical slags.
Introduction. One of the directions of increase in durability of road clothes
should consider improvement of properties of initial road-building materials. It can be
carried out on the basis of use of a waste of industrial productions. In the republic of
Belarus there are ferrous metallurgy enterprises which produce metal in considerable
quantities. When a waste product is formed, there are slags of various properties and
structure. When melting different marks of steel at the Belarusian metallurgic plant
(BMP) the following kinds of slags are formed: top, granulated, long, domain, carbide,
converted, and short. Slag, as a rule, is a by-product, used as secondary raw material
for obtaining building materials (for example, slag glass ceramics), lime and
phosphoric fertilizers, and also it is a reverse product in a number of metallurgical
processes. Steel-smelting slag is used to make large gravel for road building. Besides,
it is used in cupola manufacture for Fe, Mn and SaO extraction.
Basic statements. Metallurgical slags and products of their processing are used
in road and hydraulic engineering building, manufacture of building materials, facing
plates, in agriculture, chemical industry, medicine and other industries.
Properties of domain slags are investigated full enough; they are widely used in
building, including highways. However a group of enterprises, such as BMP, when
manufacture basic production form the electrosteel-smelting slags, their properties
sharply differ from those of domain manufacture. Being uninvestigated, such slags do
not find wide application in road building, therefore huge stocks of non-granulated
self-scattered slags have been accumulated at these enterprises .
Metallurgical slags are effective substitutes of natural stone materials, they are
recommended for building and repairing of highways. The properties of large gravel
from slag are not inferior to those of a product received from hard kinds, and
sometimes they surpass them. Taking into account their physical and mechanical
properties, sand, large gravel and their mixtures apply to construct constructive layers
of road of all kinds – coverings, bases, additional layers of bases etc. [2, 3].
Powdered, steel-smelting and domain slags are low marked binders, they are
intended to create monolithic bases of roads; their durability is considerably raised when
small amount of cement and lime is added as an activator (up to 10 % of weight).
Strong bases of highways are obtained from a mixture of large gravel from
active slag and weak limestones. –Large gravel from open-hearth furnace slags is
successfully used to plug road basis made of large gravel. A peculiar feature of
asphalt-concrete coverings received with application of steel-smelting slags is
absence of deformations of shift even at heavy traffic of heavy transport. Slag large
gravel contains some amount of chips which is considerably increased with rolling
during a construction of a road bed.
Researches concerning definition of strength characteristics of a mixture
containing various percentage of slag are conducted to ground the utility of gravel
materials properties improvement. The granulometric structure of slag and sandURL: http://www.sworld.com.ua/e-journal/J21310.pdf
gravel mixtures is defined by sieve method [1, 2, 3]. The examined slag has been
preliminary powered in vitro in a special cylinder. As extracted particles posses the
size 0, 14-20 mm, the analysis is conducted without washing by water [4, 5].
The most important indicator of durability of road beds is the elasticity module.
To define the module of elasticity it is necessary to consider such parameters, as the
maximum density and optimum moisture of a mixture.
The maximal density and optimal moisture of a ground are established
according to the diagram of dependence of density from moisture (fig. 1). The
diagram is constructed based on the experimental data resulted in the table 1.
γsk, kg/m3
2450
2400
2350
2300
2250
2200
2150
2100
5,6
11,2
12,1
12,8
13,9
,%
Fig. 1. The dependence diagram γsk = f (W)
Table 1
Results of researches
Indicators
Definitions
1
2
3
4
5
5,05
5,05
5,05
5,05
5,05
7,38
7,66
7,70
7,75
7,74
0,001
0,001
0,001 0,001 0,001
Volume weight of a damp ground γ0, kg / м3 2330
2610
2700
2690
2700
Moisture of ground W, %
11,2
12,1
12,8
13,9
Weight of the empty cylinder Р2 , kg
Weight of the cylinder with the condensed
ground Р1 , kg
Volume of the cylinder V, м3
5,6
Weight of a sample bottle qб, г
Weight
of a sample bottle with a damp
ground qв, г
Weight
of a sample bottle with a dry
ground qс, г
Volume weight of a skeleton of a ground
γск, kg / м3
14,40
14,35
13,39 14,40 13,39
24,52
28,45
28,21 27,34 28,69
23,98
27,03
27,42 25,94 26,82
2206
2347
2409
2385
2327
According to the diagram: optimum moisture Wоp = 12,1 %; the maximum
density of a ground γmax = 2409 kg/m3. Using the received data, calculation of road
beds based on a method of an elastic deflection by means of the computer program
Radon [6] has been carried out.
Conclusions. For the road building purposes slag is suitable mainly of the
second discharge, its crystal structure does not contain a considerable amount of
burning lime grains. Crystalline solid open-hearth furnace slag possesses durability of
more than 100 МPа, small water absorption capacity, cold-resisting property.
Physical and mechanical properties of slag are characterized by volume weight 3100–
3300 kg/m3, water absorption of 0,5-2 %; cold resistance from above 100, durability
at compression 80–120 МPа. The mixture of strong large gravel with a slag powder is
used for the construction of bases of road beds depending on slag concrete type.
Nowadays, a new composition of binder materials on the basis of the Belarus
metal plant has been worked out. Slags should be used more widely instead of natural
sand and gravel. A layer of 20–30 cm slag is sufficient for hardening 1 km of road
and for its width of 3,5 m 600–900 tons of slag is required (depending on a filling
thickness). When slags are applied as the bases of road coverings it is possible to
choose optimum grading which will provide durability increase by 7 % and saving of
applied materials up to 10-12 %.
Besides, by results of samples tests it is necessary to state a quick increase of
durability of a strengthened material. So, on the seventh day of hydration of the
material, its durability has made 70 %. The given indicator is especially important at
building of forest roads as it allows to reduce time between the beginning and the
termination of road-building works and commissioning of new road constructions.
References:
1.
Materials and products for road construction: Reference book/ N. V.
Gorelyshev, etc.]. – М: Transport, 1986. – 288p.
2.
Prockopets V.S. Production and application of road building materials on
the basis of the raw materials modified by mechanical activation / V.S. Prockopets,
V.S. Lesovick. – Belgorod: BSTY of V.G. Shuhov, 2005. – 264p.
3.
Babaskin Y.G. Road soil study and the mechanics of bed roads / Y. G.
Babaskin. – Minsk: BSPA, 2001. – 223p.
4.
Vyrko N.P. Praktikum on road soil study/ N. P. Vyrko, I.I. Leonovich –
Minsk: High school, 1980. – 255p.
5.
Kazarnovsky V.D. Fundamentals of engineering geology, road soil study
and mechanics of road ground / V.D. Kazarnovsky. – М, 2007. – 284p.
6.
RADON 2.2. Calculation of road beds. The user's guide. – Minsk: «Credo
Dialogue» Company, 2006. – 125p.
J21310-017
UDC 631.563:628.852:635.82
EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE STORAGE ON NATURE LOSSES AND
QUALITY OF CHAMPIGNON BISPORED
National University of Life and Environmental Sciences of Ukraine,
Questions of influence of storage temperature on the marketability and nature
losses of mushrooms of champignon bispored are presented in this article.
Keywords: mushrooms, champignon bispored, storage, temperature of storage,
quality, marketability, natural losses.
Introduction. Mushrooms are a valuable food and a source of plant proteins.
Now in Ukraine the leading place among cultivated mushrooms had champignon
bispored. At the storage of mushroom its marketable quality is quickly loses because
they must keep at low temperatures. The optimum storage temperature is 0 till 2 oC.
However, in practice, isn’t always possible to provide this regime. So, important is
determine the change marketability mushrooms and nature losses of weight that occur
when temperature of storage change.
Materials and methods. Champignon bispored strain ІБК-25I used in studies.
Mushrooms stored at temperature: minus 1, 1, 3 and 5 oC. Repeatability was fourtime. Relative humidity storage of mushrooms was 90 ± 1%. Control was production,
which kept the temperature 1oC [1]. Mushrooms kept during 6 days. Natural losses of
products and changing commercial quality determined during of storage. Commodity
quality mushrooms were evaluated by visually (appearance, color, smell, surface
condition, integrity, consistency, number of mushrooms with the opened veil of
mushroom cap. Densities of fruiting bodies of mushrooms before and after storage
were determined by the formula N.A. Bisko (1992) [2]. Nature losses of weight were
determined by method of fixed samples. Samples were weighed before storage and
every day of storage.
Results. Changes in quality of mushrooms determined after 6 days of storage
by organoleptic parameters and their marketability. It was found that the best storage
temperature of mushroom 1oC (control). Fruit bodies corresponded to the
requirements of standard products. They remained whole, dense, slightly changed of
color and smell. Number mushrooms with open and partially disclosed of cap were
small and did not exceed 3%. Increasing temperature of storage carry out to
deteriorated of mushroom quality. Peel of mushrooms get darker, its elasticity was
lost, quantity of mushrooms with open caps was increased and some from them
affected by diseases. At the storage temperature is 5 oC appeared centre of mold smell
which characteristic at the aging of mushrooms. These mushrooms aren’t suitable for
sale in fresh form, but they can be used for processing after sorting.
Temperature of storage minus 1oC promoted to freeze partially or fully fruiting
bodies of mushrooms. The structure of the mushrooms tissue was destroyed and not
recovered after thawing products. Fruit bodies of mushrooms are dark, slippery and
soft. These mushrooms are unsuitable for processing because this temperature regime
for storing of mushrooms is not advisable.
Losses of weight of cultivated mushrooms champignon bispored during storage
include loss of dry matter and moisture. Nature losses of mushrooms for storage
during 6 days depending on temperature and wave of fruiting were 4,9-7,2% (Table).
Yield of commodity fruiting bodies of mushrooms during its storage 6 days at
temperature 1oC were 92,6-93,8%, depending on the wave fruiting, at the 3 ° C –
89,2-89,8 %, but 5 oC – 73,5-75,4 % (Table). The nonmarket fruiting bodies of
mushrooms formed by full or partial disclosure caps, darkening of the peel, lesions of
disease. Their number depending on the wave fruiting was 1,8-2,3% for 1oC, 4.5-5.0
% for 3 ° C; 17,7-19,3 % for 5 ° C, respectively.
The highest density of carpophore (5.34 g/cm) had fruiting bodies of the first
wave of fruiting after storage at temperature 1 oC. When temperature of storage was
increasing then density carpophore was decreases.
Table
Preservation of fruiting bodies of mushrooms of champignon bispored of
strain ІБК-25 depending on the temperature, % (average for 2001-2005)
Temperature
of storage, оС
Output the
Nature losses
nonstandard
fruiting bodies
Output
commodity
fruiting bodies
Density of
carpophore,
g/сm
The first wave of fruiting
1(control)
4,9
1,8
93,3
5,34
3
5,7
4,5
89,8
5,28
5
6,9
17,7
75,4
5,21
The second wave of fruiting
1(control)
5,1
2,3
92,6
5,31
3
5,8
5,0
89,2
5,28
5
7,2
19,3
73,5
5,20
Conclusions.
The optimal temperature for storage champignon bispored is 1 oC. Increasing
of temperature of storage up to 3 till 5 oC carry out to lost marketability mushrooms
after 6 days its storage. They are not suitable for sale in fresh form, but can be used
for processing. Temperature of storage mushroom minus 1oC carry out to its freeze
and after thawing is not suitable for further use.
Literature.
1. DSTU ISO 7561-2001. Cultivated mushrooms. Guide to cold storage and
refrigerated transport (ISO 7561: 1984, IDT) /O. Gurbuz (per. i nauk.-texn. red.). –
Chunnui vid 2003.07.01. – Ofits. Vud. – K.: Derjstandart Ukraine, 2002. – IV, 3 p.
2. Bis’ko N.A. Champignon bispored and Pleurotus ostreatus in artificial
ecosystems: Dis. Doctor. biol. Sciences: 03.00.24 / Bisko Nina Anatolievna. – K.,
1992. - 432 p.
J21310-018
UDC 631.563:628.852:635.82
EFFECT OF STORAGE CONDITIONS ON BIOCHEMICAL
PARAMETERS OF MUSHROOMS OF CHAMPIGNONS BISPORED
The influence of temperature storage on biochemical parameters of mushrooms
of champignons bispored are presented in this article.
Keywords:
mushrooms,
champignons
bispored,
storage
temperature,
biochemical parameters.
Introduction. Statistical data of Food and Agriculture Organization of the United
Nations indicated that supply population of our planet's food is a cause concern. The
main problem is the lack of protein and its imbalance in the diet of people. In last
decade indicated a rapid increase of production and consumption of cultivated edible
mushrooms in fresh and processed form. Scientists projected that in the future much
of human needs in proteins will be supply by industrial production of edible
mushrooms [1, 2]. It should be noted that Ukraine due to favorable geographical
location and climatic conditions, has the opportunity in the future to become a major
supplier of fresh and processed mushrooms to Europe. Today in our country the
leading place among cultivated mushrooms had champignon bispored.
During of storage mushrooms quickly lose its marketable quality, so they must
keep at low temperatures. The optimum storage temperature is 0…2 oC. However, in
practice, is not always possible to provide this regime. So, important is to determine
influence of storage temperature on biochemical indicator of mushrooms.
Materials and methods. Champignons bispored strain ІБК-25 used in the
studies. Mushrooms stored during 6 days at a temperature 1, 3 and 5 °C and relative
humidity - 90 ± 1%. Repeatability is four. Control was production, which kept the
temperature 1oC. Quality of fruit bodies of mushrooms before and after store
estimated by biochemical analysis: 1) dry substance (thermostatic-gravimetric
method by drying to constant weight at a temperature of 105 °C (GOST 28561-90.
Products of fruits and vegetables processing. Methods for determining the dry
substances or moisture); 2) protein nitrogen (by Barshteyn) 3) Vitamin C (by Murray,
GOST 24556-89. Products of fruits and vegetables processing. Methods of vitamin C
determination). The average sample of mushrooms for analysis was 20 fruiting
bodies with average weight [3].
Results. Process of mushrooms storing escorted by changes in their
biochemical composition (Table). Studies indicated that quantity of dry substances
Table
Content of biochemical substances in fruit bodies of mushrooms of
champignons bispored strain ІБК-25 during its storage at different temperatures
(average for 2001-2005)
Biochemical substances
Temperature of
storage,
о
С
vitamin C, мг%
dry substance, %
protein nitrogen, %
before
after
before
after
before
after
storage
storage
storage
storage
storage
storage
the first wave of fruiting
1(control)
9,4
8,9
3,0
3,0
5,6
5,1
3
9,4
8,5
3,0
3,0
5,6
4,9
5
9,4
8,0
3,0
2,8
5,6
4,5
the second wave of fruiting
1(control)
8,6
7,8
2,9
2,9
5,4
5,0
3
8,6
7,4
2,9
2,8
5,4
4,4
5
8,6
7,1
2,9
2,7
5,4
4,0
and vitamin C decreases. Quantity of protein nitrogen decreases or does not
changes. Mushrooms of champignons bispored of first wave of fruiting which storage
at 1oC had 9.4 % of dry substances at the beginning of storage and 8.9% in the end;
ascorbic acid – 5.6 mg% and 5.1 mg%, respectively. Quantity of protein nitrogen
does not changes and equalled 3,0 %. Increasing storage temperature carries out
increasing losses of dry matter, protein nitrogen and vitamin C.
So, when mushrooms of champignons bispored of first wave of fruiting stored at
the temperature was 5 °C than dry substances decreased from 9.4 till 8.0 %, Vitamin
C – from 5.6 till 4.5 mg%, protein nitrogen – from 3.0 till 2.9 %.
During this period of storage fruiting bodies of mushrooms, depending on
storage temperature lost in relative values were 5.3–18.1% of dry substances and 4,1-
25,9 mg% of vitamin C. Quantity of protein nitrogen practically unchanged at the
temperature is 1–3 °C and decreases at 5 °C on 6,7-7,1%.
Conclusions.
During of storage period of fruiting bodies of mushrooms depending on
temperature lost in relative values were 5.3–18.1% of dry substances and 4,1-25,9
mg% of vitamin C. Quantity of protein nitrogen practically unchanged at the
temperature is 1–3 °C and decreases at 5 °C on 6,7-7,1%.
Literature.
1. Тravelian V.Е. Mushrooms. Source of edible proteins. / V.Е. Тravelian – M.:
Urojay, 1979. – P. 237–254.
2. Yrmoliyk S. Cultivation of mushrooms – way determination of problem
nutrition // Propozutsia. – 1995. – № 12. – P. 61.
3. Technique of experimental affair in vegetable growing and gourd growing /
[pod. red. Belika V.F.] – М.: Agropromizdat, 1992. – 319 p.
J21310-019
UDC 663.791:631.526.3:663.48
Bober A.
RATIONALE PROCESSING CONES HOPS IN PELLETS TYPE 90
National University of Life and Environmental Sciences of Ukraine
This paper theoretically and experimentally proved the feasibility of processing
cones hops aromatic and bitter hops varieties of hops pellets type 90.
Keywords: hop cones, hop pellets type 90, aromatic and bitter varieties of
common resin, total soft resins, solid resins, a- and b-acid.
Introduction. Analysis of the current state of production and use of hops
showed that only at the brewery remained low power classic technique of beer in
which to ohmelinnya beer wort is traditionally used cones pressed hops. Powerful
brewery Ukraine switched to the use of various types of grains, ethanol and carbon
dioxide extracts of hops, resulting in improved working conditions and reduced loss
of bitter substances, polyphenols and essential oils in their long-term storage,
increasing the efficiency of a- and b-acids and essential oil in the manufacture of
beer.
It is expected that production processing of hops in subsequent years will
increase. In the current context debug manufacture these products in Ukraine is
extremely important. Analysis of domestic and foreign developments showed that the
most rational way of processing hop cones is their granulation [2].
Hop pellets type 90 can accommodate the full range of necessary materials for
brewing and hops are equivalent. Also, consider that granulated hops convenient
dosing by weight when packing and ohmelinni wort. Improves -acids contained in the
pellet hopsadispersion, extraction and isomerization [3]. In addition, bulk density
latter is much smaller than the pressed cones hops, resulting in reduced transportation
and storage costs [1].
However, despite the fact that there are more than 70% of native hops processed
into granules, almost no research data that is devoted to complex losses of bitter
substances, including their components and groups in the process of granulation,
which would enable research to substantiate their appropriateness and use granulated
hops in brewing.
Results. Studies have shown that the process of obtaining granules of total resin
does not change and remains at the same level as cones and granulated hops (Table
1).
Table 1
Content and composition of bitter substances in hops cones and pellets type
90 aromatic and bitter varieties
Varieties of
Common
hops
resin,%
General
soft
resin,%
Solid
resin, %
Index
a-acids, % b-acids, %
oxidation
(Io)
1
1
2
14.1 14.1 11.7 11.6
2.4
2.5
21.8 21.8 18.9 18.8
2.9
3.0
Polisskuy
20.5 20.5 18.2 18.0
2.3
Promin
21.2 21.2 18.4 18.3
NIR05
2.72
Klon
18
Slovy
inka
2
3.35
1
2.70
2
3.20
1
2
1
2
1
2
2.4
2.3
4.0
3.9
3.9
3.7
7.2
7.0
2.5
6.3
6.0
5.5
5.4
0.28 0.49
2.8
2.9
5.4
5.2
4.7
4.6
0.28 0.52
0.50
0.48
0.28
0.44
0.31
0.31
0.04
0.28 0.59
0.27 0.41
0.03
Примітки: 1 – cones; 2 – pellets type 90.
The content of total soft resins under granulation practically does not change.
Thus, the content of these compounds in pellet hops type 90 in the aromatic varieties
such as Klon 18 and Slovyinka was lower by 0.9 and 0.5% in grades bitter type
Polisskuy and Promin of 1.1 and 0.6% (relative) compared with cones hops.
However, if in the process of making beads is a slight decrease in their soft resin,
with components such total bitter substances as solid resin observed their growth.
Bitter substances – is a collective concept. They consist of several components.
Therefore, we investigated the content and composition of the main components of
bitter substances of hops a- and b-acids which have significant value in the process
of brewing.
The results of the research, the content of a-acids (the main bearer of bitter hops)
in pellet type 90 was lower in grade for Klon 18 - 4.2%, Slovyanka - 5.1% Polisskuy
- 4.8% and in grade Promin - 3.7% β-acid content - under 2.5%, 2.8%, 1.8% and
2.1% (relative) compared with the original (cones) hops.
Conclusion. Upon receipt of hop pellets type 90 on modern lines granulation
loss of specific target components (general resins, total soft resins a- and b-acid) do
not exceed 5% (relative). Wood hops in their composition are virtually
indistinguishable from native cones hop, and their biochemical composition depends
on the selection of the variety from which they are derived.
References:
1. Hodovanuy A.A. Using Hops and his / A.A. Hodovanuy, N.Y. Lyashenko,
I.G. Reitman, Y.S. Ezhov / Ed. Y.S. Ezhova - K.: Vintage, 1990. - 336 p.
2. Hodovue Reports for the production of hop and beer firms in the world
"Hopsteiner", "Joh. Barth & Sohn "2011-2012 h.
3. Lyashenko N.I. Biochemistry hop and hmeleproduktov / Monograph /
N.I. Lyashenko. - Zhytomyr: Polyssya, 2002. - 388 p.
J21310-020
UDC 004.031, 007.51
Sokolov S.S., Ezhgurov V.N.
CARGO FLOWS OPTIMIZATION OF MULTIMODAL TRAFFIC
Federal budget institution of higher professional education “Admiral Makarov
State University of Maritime and Inland Shipping”, Russian Federation, SaintPetersburg, Dvinskaya 5/7, 198035
Introduction
Increased efficiency in the transport sector is directly related [1] to the degree
of standardization and automation of processes. The general development of
multimodal traffic requires development of new software solutions to support
traffic [2,3]. One of these decisions was the software "cargo flows optimization of
multimodal traffic".
About the program
Creation of the program "cargo flows optimization of multimodal traffic"
required for automation of companies engaged in escort traffic and placing a cargo
in their own warehouses. The program was required to commit provider
organizations, warehouses, which was carried out delivery, a fact of checking the
goods declared and the actual quantity and quality of goods, etc.[4,5,6]
Work with the program should be divided into several stages.
The first stage is creation of a database of the program, which serve as the
basis for reference. All handbooks directly connected to each other, which
facilitates the monitoring and filling of individual program elements. Since you
must select one of the elements of the reference, as a further step to it will catch up
data from other reference.
During the second stage , work with the documents on the basis of completed
reference, operator forms as needed (for example, provided the consignment note)
necessary document. Which, if necessary, can be added to the program, not only
manually, but also imported from outside (file, composed by a specific format).
The program also allows you to print a document and / or export it to an external
file, compiled by the accepted pattern (a form of delivery note) [7].
The third stage is the work with reports. Operator may build reports based on
the data entered into the program. Such reports help to indicate transparency of the
program, allow you to track cargo flows and correct the work of both operators and
the warehouse [8,9].
Program is realized on the basis of Visual Basic for Application (VBA). This
approach reduces the cost of implementing the program for small businesses,
because it requires a licensed copy of Office software and support of the
programmer who is knowledgeable in VBA at a basic level. Integrated system of
prompts, background and ability to record macros, allows you in short time to learn
creating of software on VBA and implement small-scale software.
Functional characteristics
Aware of the core processes of multimodal cargo flows , the main features of
the program is as follows:
· commit arrive at the warehouse goods;
· commit retired from the warehouses goods;
· commit documents circulation between stores and suppliers;
· maintain statistics on such elements of the cargo delivery:
o used containers;
o goods transported;
o used transport units;
o carriers making deliveries;
o warehouses, which are used for the processing, storing and dispensing.
More detailed functional diagram of the program is shown in figures 1, 2 and
3.
Start
Authorizatio
Continue
End
User/Admin
User
Administrator
Administration
(Fig.2.)
Reference
Documentation
End
Form
Reference
Documentation
Отчеты (Fig.3.)
End
Fig.1. Functional diagram of the program (general scheme)
Form
Administration
Staff
Form
Backup
Restore
End
Fig.2. Functional diagram of the program (the administration)
Reports
The current status of
t
Fo
rm
Receipt at the
warehouse / warehouse
Fo
rm
Acts of marriage
Fo
rm
Report output
documents
Fo
rm
End
Fig.3. Functional diagram of the program (reports)
Example program
The example of the program is presented in figures 4 and 5.
Fig.4. List of trade bills
Fig.5. Adding waybill
Conclusion
Further development of the software, the authors see in its development to
the program complex, covering all aspects of the existence of multimodal cargo
flows, namely the plan to build the software: "Management of forwarding activities
of international transport corridors", "Automated tracking road freight transport
within multimodal cargo flows".
References:
1. Nyrkov A.P., Sokolov S.S., Ezhgurov V.N., Malcev V.A. EFFECTIVE
INFORMATION MODELS OF TRANSPORT PROCESSES. Sbornik nauchnyh
trudov Sworld po materialam mezhdunarodnoj nauchno-prakticheskoj konferencii.
2012. T. 13. № 4. S. 38-42.
2. Nyrkov A.P., Bashmakov A.V., Sokolov S.S. NONRYPTOGRAPHIC
METHODS OF INFORMATION PROTECTION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS.
Problemy informacionnoj bezopasnosti. Kompjuternye sistemy. 2010. № 3. S. 27-30.
3. Nyrkov A.P., Sokolov S.S., Bashmakov A.V. TECHNIQUE OF DESIGNING
SECURE INFORMATION SYSTEMS ON TRANSPORT. Problemy informacionnoj
bezopasnosti. Komp'juternye sistemy. 2010. № 3. S. 58-61.
4. Nyrkov A.P., Dmitrieva T.V., Sokolov S.S. METHODS OF THE
INCREASING
EFFECTIVENESS
OF
PORTS
IN
INTERNATIONAL
TRANSPORT CORRIDORS. Rechnoj transport (HHI vek). 2009. T. 1. № 42-1. S.
75-77.
5.
Kudinov
V.A.,
Nyrkov
A.P.
ALGORITHMIC
PROVISION
PARALLELIZABLE STRUCTURES IN AUTOMATION SYSTEM THAT
PROVIDES PROTECTION OF THE INFORMATION. Problemy informacionnoj
bezopasnosti. Komp'juternye sistemy. 2009. № 4. S. 17-22.
6. Sokolov S.S. A THREAT MODEL INFORMATION SECURITY OF
ORGANIZATION. Zhurnal universiteta vodnyh kommunikacij. 2009. № 2. S. 176180.
7.
Sokolov
AUTOMATED
S.S.,
Beljaeva
SYSTEMS
N.A.
TRANSPORT
FUNCTIONAL
STORAGE
STRUCTURE
OF
INFRASTRUCTURE.
Zhurnal universiteta vodnyh kommunikacij. 2012. № 3. S. 124a-129.
8. Nyrkov A.P., Dmitrieva T.V. MATHEMATICAL MODEL RESERVATION
SYSTEM
AND
OPTIMIZATION
OF
IT.
Zhurnal
universiteta
vodnyh
kommunikacij. 2011. № 2. S. 98-101.
9. Nyrkov A.P., Rudakova S.A. METHODICS OF INFORMATIZATION
AUDIT OF OBJECTS REQUIREMENTS OF INFORMATION SECURITY.
Zhurnal universiteta vodnyh kommunikacij. 2012. № 3. S. 146-149.
J21310-021
UDK 622.232
Stasiuk V.M.
THE VIBRATORY MACHINES WITH PNEUMO-MECHANICAL
CONTROL: EFFECT OF THE POLYTROPHIC INDEX ON POWER
CONSUMPTION
Lutsk national technical university
Lutsk, Lvivska Street, 75, 43018
The results of investigations of the dependency of power consumption of the
working procedure of vibratory machines with pneumo-mechanical control upon the
polytrophic index are presented.
Key words: polytrophic index, power intensity, pneumo-mechanical control.
Introduction. Nowadays the vibratory machines with pneumo-mechanical
drives are widely used in different branches of national economy, such as mechanical
engineering, chemical or food industry etc. The main reasons are their high reliability
in the conditions of dust pollution, fire safety, simplicity of maintenance and others.
Among pneumo-mechanical drives, which are used in these machines, special
attention should be paid to the drives with pneumo-mechanical control because they
ensure more efficient using of expansion power of previously compressed air (during
some phases of operating cycle). However, using of compressed air as a working
body of these pneumo-drives prearranges rather large financial costs for their
operation. That is why in the conditions of constant price rising of all energy
resources the question of reduction of prices of operation of vibratory machines with
pneumo-mechanical drives (among them with pneumo-mechanical systems of
control) has been gained special urgency nowadays.
One of the ways of decision of this task is reduction of power intensity of
working processes of these machines decreasing of expense of compressed air during
the operating cycle. In order to simplify the research of working processes of
vibratory machines with pneumo-mechanical drives thermodynamic processes in
their operating chambers are often considered adiabatic. This approach facilitates
essentially the process of creation and investigation of mathematic models, but the
results of theoretic and experimental research are substantially different in this case.
In reference to consumption of compressed air its experimental value is usually
higher than magnitude determinate in the result of investigation of complex
mathematic model or received according to simplified methods.
The results of carried out research affirm that working processes in drives'
chambers of these machines are polytrophic during most of the phases. Moreover, the
magnitude of polytrophic index has been fluctuating to some extend depending on
specific of thermodynamic process in the chamber. In this case the stages of filling of
operating chambers with compressed air from the line of feeding and air emptying are
always polytrophic.
The dependency of the consumption index of compressed air of the investigated
drives upon the magnitude of polytrophic index has been proved by our calculations.
Having taken San-Venan and Vansel equations as basic ones and having done a range
of their transposing using such components as efficient areas of constructive elements
of the system of air intake and air emptying, as well as having used appropriate
results of the investigation of pneumo-drives with pneumo-mechanical systems of
operation [1, p. 242] and [2, p. 425-426], we have got dependences that prove the
above statements:
GM =
pÌ (1 - s a ) e
nt 0s H .k
3 n -1
GÂ =
-
t
t 0V
é (s - s a ) j (s * ) s a
× ê H .k
+
y
j
s
s
(
)
H
k
H
k
.
.
ë
ðÂs Â2 n (1 - s a ) e
-
t
t 0 ÂVÂ
t
3 n -1 é
ù
2ns à 2 n ê(1 - s a ) e t 0 ÂVÂ + s a ú t 0 Â
êë
úû
ù
1
(s H . k ) ú ;
û
é
( n -1) ù
s Â . k - s a ) j (s Â * ) ú
(
ê
,
×ê
n +1
ú
êë j (s Â.k ) s Â2.kn ( 3n - 1) úû
where GM, GВ – mass air consumption according to the phases of filling and
emptying of the drive's operating chambers; ðM , ðÂ - air pressure on the way of
feeding and the line of exhaust; s a – ratio of operating pressure in the drive's
chambers to atmospheric pressure; t – time constancy of pneumatic inert element; t 0 URL: http://www.sworld.com.ua/e-journal/J21310.pdf
time constancy of filling and emptying chambers; V, VÂ - volume of filling and
emptying chambers; n – polytrophic index; s H .k , s B.k - relation of critical pressure for
the phases of filling and emptying of operating chambers; j (s * ) - function of
consumption while critical relation of pressure during the phases of chamber filling;
j (s H .k ) , j (s Â.k ) - function of consumption in non-corrected exponent for the phases
of filling and emptying of operating chambers; y 1 (s H .k ) - function of relation of
pressure while filling of chamber; s B – relation of operating pressure in drive's
chambers and emptying pressure; t 0 Â - time constancy of emptying of chamber;
j (s B * ) - function of consumption while critical relation of pressure during emptying
of chamber.
Conclusion. The received dependences estimate the effect of the polytrophic
index on power consumption of vibratory machines with pneumo-mechanical
systems of control. Using optimal modifying of other parameters (elements of
formulas) it is possible to correct consumption of compressed air and reduce power
intensity of the working processes of these machines.
Literature:
1. Stasiuk V.M. Vyznachenia stalyh napovnenia ta sporozhnenia robochyh
kamer pnevmatychnyh pryvodiv iz mehanichnym zvjazkom mizh elementamy
systemy povitrorozpodilu / V.M.Stasiuk, L.O.Gumeniuk // Visnyk Natsionalnogo
universytetu vodnogo gospodarstva ta pryrodokorystuvania. – 2006. - №2 (34).
Chastyna 1. – S. 367 – 372.
2. Stasiuk V.M., Stasiuk V.V. Doslidzhenia systemy vpusku-vypusku pryvodiv
iz pnevmomehanichnym keruvaniam / V.M.Stasiuk, V.V.Stasiuk // Visnyk
Natsionalnogo universytetu vodnogo gospodarstva ta pryrodokorystuvania. – 2009. №3 (47). Chastyna 2. – S. 424 – 429.
J21310-022
UDC 004.052
Kokoulin A.N.
METHODS FOR LARGE IMAGE DISTRIBUTED PROCESSING AND
STORAGE IN LH*RS SCHEMA
Perm national research polytechnic university,
Russia, Perm, Komsomolsky prospect, 29
This paper presents a novel approach to develop distributed data-driven storage
systems. The core concept behind this approach is the implementation of LH* schema
that allows highly available distributed data storage to be created. We propose the
novel method of image data decomposition and distribution among storage nodes to
enhance main characteristics of schema. This method is close to image pyramid
structure (also known as MIP maps) that allows the entire large image to be tiled,
cropped and scaled but is less redundant and allows the image data in system
become manageable.
Keywords: distributed storage, imagery data, image processing, LH*RS, highly
available storage
This paper describes an approach that leverages the functionality of LH*RS –
distributed data storage concept [2]. LH*RS is a high-availability scalable distributed
data structure (SDDS). An LH*RS file is hash partitioned over the distributed RAM
of a multicomputer, e.g., a network of PCs, and supports the unavailability of any k ≥
1 of its server nodes. The high-availability management is based on Reed-Salomon
erasure correcting coding. The value of k transparently grows with the file to offset
the reliability decline. The resulting parity storage overhead is about the lowest
possible. The capabilities of LH*RS offer new perspectives to data intensive
applications, including the emerging ones of grids and of P2P computing [2]. The
invented LH*RS is positioned as the general-purpose method, and its efficiency does
not depend on the data file type. We can analyse the way to optimize its performance
characteristics, in particular for the case of imagery data.
There are two main issues that appear with image files visualization and
exchange:
· Processing large images, for example high-resolution astronomy and
geospatial image coverings;
· Processing requests for multiple copies of a single image with distinct scale
and resolution, for example, web-site pictures having thumbnail, medium and highresolution quality images stored separately.
In our opinion, all these problems appear due to imperfect file format of image
data. Historically images were stored and processed on local computer or server and
this way was efficient for random infrequent users’ requests. Most image processing
software assumes you can load the entire image into memory and then perform an
image operation. In the case of frequent requests of web users it leads to an excess
traffic and network overload, and we have to store multiple image copies rather than
one image in highest resolution. In the case of gigapixel photos it is impossible due to
low memory or low bandwidth problems and some techniques as Data pyramiding
are used.
Data pyramiding is an image scaling technique that has been used in terrain
rendering to reduce computation and eliminate aliasing problems [1]. For a large
input dataset with hundreds or even thousands of mega pixels, it is important to be
able to view the data at different levels of detail, from a perspective that overlooks
the entire dataset down to a small area for a close look of the terrain. From an
overlook perspective, the scale from the input space to the image space could be
hundreds to 1, in which case there is no need to render the input data at its highest
resolution. An input data pyramid is built by repeatedly dividing the input image by a
factor of 2 in each dimension. A multi-level input pyramid requires about 1/3 more
memory than the single highest resolution image, which could be significant when
trying to fit large datasets to any particular machine.
Section II of this paper introduces the technique that reduces memory
consumption using improved LH*RS concept for image storage.
Let's consider main principles of distributed fault-tolerant data storage system:
1. Imagery Data Decomposition and Distribution Among Storage Nodes.
The basic idea of multilevel block structure is to construct independent blocks
from correlated imagery data for each level. We can consider the uncompressed
image as multidimensional array and form blocks of several layers, by analogy to
data pyramiding technique. Basic blocks corresponds to the top of pyramid and we
can assemble the image in lowest resolution of them. Values for basic blocks data are
aggregated or interpolated by the color values of neighborhood area. Next level
blocks use the basic blocks data as the initial values, which forms the palette. We can
form image of some quality using blocks of both basic and first levels. We can
continue assembling the pyramid until we reach the original resolution of the image
file.
For example, we have the imagery data containing RGB color components.
Each pixel contains three independent values - R, G, B, so we can store array of R
values in one block, G values in other, B values in third and store them in different
storage nodes. Data in blocks of any level i depends on data in blocks of lower level
i-1. This can be performed in different ways and the simplest way is shown on fig.1.
Fig 1. Multilevel block structure
The lowest (basic) levels contain color values which can be calculated as
average of the corresponding subsets of higher level data (e.g.: R(0,x+1,y) is an
average value of subset {R(1,x-1,y-1),R(1,x-1,y), R(1,x-1,y+1), … R(1,x,y)
...R(1,x+1,y+1)}). After the block assembling we get the multilevel array structure
which corresponds to the entire original data. Using this structure we can serve any
request with different data quality demands, constructing the answer from several
levels of blocks instead of sending the entire (original) array, without processor
resources consumption. For example, if client is the PDA application with QVGA
display of 64K colors, connected by GPRS, it can request only necessary image
blocks and construct desired low-quality image, and another client, residing on PC
can require the full-quality image using all blocks; all of these clients work with the
same physical distributed storage URL.
Moreover, we can produce additional levels, containing the extended values for
imagery data. For example, we are processing the RAW image from camera or PNG
file. Color depth of these images is better than of RGB schema, used in standard
pictures and JPEG images. We can split the color component values to different
blocks as shown on fig.2.
Fig 2. Splitting the color value into several parts
2. Fault-Protection basics.
The high-availability management is based on Reed-Salomon erasure correcting
coding. We can expand these correcting techniques with new capabilities: we can
change the code redundancy among blocks of different levels (on fig.3) and we can
protect only the significant bits (digits) of imagery data (on fig.4).
Fig 3. Assembling image from blocks
As it is shown on fig.3, the basic level blocks are protected with higher
redundancy, because they store foundations of all the image assembling procedures.
The higher is the level of the block, less significant is the content, so less redundant is
the encoding. The highest level blocks can be even unprotected, or be protected using
only significant digits.
Fig 4. Creating checksums only for significant digits.
3. Compression basics.
We can apply different methods of compression for blocks of different levels,
for example, lossless image compression on the basic-level blocks, and lossy methods
as JPEG2000-like compression for the higher levels (on fig.5). This helps to dispense
the logical redundancy but prevents from data loss on the basic levels.
Fig 5. Compression methods for blocks of different levels.
4. Security issues.
We can apply different access permissions for different levels of blocks. The
main benefit is that it is unnecessary to create different copies of images for each
permission. For example, if we allow users to preview the image, but the highresolution image is not free, than we can encrypt the higher-level blocks and leave the
basic ones opened.
A new result of the paper is suggested approach to build distributed faulttolerant storage system of imagery data. Developed storage schema contains the sole
copy of imagery data at highest resolution and scale. Image is decomposed into data
blocks of several levels. The image with the required scale and resolution is
reconstructed from the corresponding set of downloaded blocks on client’s side. The
developed method allows adopting the encoding and compression algorithms usage
and algorithm redundancy on the block level. Thereby we can flexibly manage the
redundancy, security permissions and resource consumption.
References:
1. D. Stanfill, Using Image Pyramids for the Visualization of Large Terrain
Data Sets, International Journal of Imaging Systems and Technology, vol. 3, 1991.
2. Witold Litwin, Rim Moussa, Thomas J. E. Schwarz. LH*RS: a highly
available
distributed
data
storage.
[Online]
Available:
http://portal.acm.org/citation.cfm?id=1316816 .
J21310-023
UDC 543.5
Lomachenko D.V.
THE PROPERTIES OF GYPSUM-SAND ADMIXTURES USED FOR
ARTIFICIAL STONES MANUFACTURE WITH VARIED ORGANIC
COMPOUND-BASED ADDITIVES
Belgorod Shukhov State Technological University,
Russia, Belgorod, Kostykov str. 46, 308012
The gypsum-sand admixtures is widely used now for artificial stones
manufacture in Eastern Europe, including Russia. One of the main problems in this
field is a quick setting of the admixture which can decrease their workability. The
influence of some kind of retard agents for the gypsum-sand mixture using for
artificial stones was researched.
Key words: gypsum-sand admixtures, artificial stones, hydroxy acid
Recently the issue of artificial stone in the developed economies of the world
gets more and more development. Currently, these materials are becoming more
common in Eastern Europe, particularly in Russia. One of the main types of artificial
stones used for interior work, materials made on the basis of gypsum and sand. For
samples obtained from this type of material is very important to have some retard in
setting time [1], which allows to obtain a higher workability samples. In this paper,
the use of additives was evaluated with the organic nature of the use of which would
increase the setting time gypsum-sand mixture, and at the same time to increase the
strength of the resulting mixture and improve the rheological properties.
Evaluating the impact of three different additives based hydroxies was
researched. Citric acid is used traditionally refers to retarders, and has similar
properties lactic acid, which has a lower cost, and the additive based on
polymethylenesulfonates.
Additives used in quantities 0.01, 0.02 and 0.03%, respectively. Gypsum-sand
mixture made of gypsum and sand in the ratio of 1 to 2. For this experiments gypsum
deposits from Rostov Region, Russia and sand deposit from Saratov Region, Russia
were used. Fineness modulus of sand was the value of 1.7. Later, sand and gypsum
mixed in the indicated ratios and shut water in an amount of 60-65% by weight of
gypsum, at the same time introduced a certain amount of a addition. Assessment
setting gypsum-sand mixture was performed on Vicat apparatus with the definition of
setting time every 30 seconds, based on the standards established in the Russian
Federation (Table 1).
Таble 1
Samples setting times beginning with addition, min-sec
Type of Admixture
Addition based on
Quantity of addition, %
0
0.01
0.02
0.03
4-30
15-30
21-00
25-00
4-30
13-30
16-00
18-00
4-30
5-30
6-00
6-30
citric acid
Addition based on
lactic acid
Addition based on
polymethylenesulfonate
Data presented in the study suggest that the use of all three supplements
provides a slight increase in setting time of gypsum-sand mixture. However
supplements based on citric acid and lactic acid are more effective retardation
compared with the additive based on polymethylenesulfonates, using supplements of
0.01%. So based admixture polymethylenesulfonates added of 0.01% delaying setting
only 2.5 minutes, which is insufficient, while the use of other additives can provide
more substantial results. In this supplement based on lactic acid shows a slightly
lower efficiency compared with the additive based on citric acid.
After that, the measurements of the strength were conducted. Evaluation of
strength characteristics performed at 2 and 28 days in bending and compression
strength.
Таble 2
Compressive and bending strenght of samples in 2 and 28 days age
Type of Admixture
Сompression strength,
Bending strength, MPa
MPa
2 days
28 days
2 days
28 days
12.4
12.0
3.6
3.6
0.03 %Lactic acid
9.9
9.6
3.3
3.2
0.03% Citric acid
10.1
9.9
3.3
3.3
0.03 %
12.2
12.2
3.7
3.4
Sample without
additives
Polymethylenesulfonate
Evaluation of strength and compression is gypsum-sand samples were aged 2
and 28 days (Table 2). Strength properties of gypsum and sand samples are
important, but not decisive in the assessment of their quality, as in the course of their
careers, they do not experience significant stress. Strength of samples using additives
based on citric and lactic acid at 0.03% was 82 and 80% of the strength of sample
which contain no addition at 2 days of age. These experiments suggest a possible
efficiency of complex additives which could contain two or more components which
could retard setting time and at the same time increase their strength.
REFERENCES:
1. Kosenko N.F, Belyakov A.S., Smirnova M.A. 2010. Effect of mechanical
activation procedure on the phase composition of gypsum. Inorganic Materials.2010
№5 P. 545-550.
J21310-024
UDC 628.4.032
Kopytenkova O.I., Kurepin D.E., Aliev O.T.
MODERN METHODS OF CONTROL OF PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGICAL
STATE OF MACHINISTS HIGH-SPEED TRAFFIC
Petersburg State University of Railway Transport
St. Petersburg, Moscow Avenue, 9, 190031
This report examines the psychophysiological factors affecting the driver's highspeed movement in his work. A modern and advanced methods of control.
Keywords: driver, complex of monitor control, crownscopy, bioelectrocount
digital, noise, vibration, hronorefleksometr, cardiocorbel.
Implementation, and use of high-speed critical step in the development strategy
of a country. Without high-speed rail, rail can not be called modern, as well as
technological. This is especially important for Russia, the country of large distances.
The countries with high-speed rail link Russia joined in 2009, when Moscow
and St. Petersburg was launched train "Sapsan" of speeds up to 250 km / h "Sapsan" the result of cooperation between "Russian Railways" with a major German trains
Siemens AG, which is specifically designed for Russia express Velaro Rus. Running
"Sapsan" was the beginning of a national system of high-speed traffic. In December
2010, revealed high-speed rail train «Allegro» between St. Petersburg and Helsinki.
Plans for a high-speed highway Moscow-Vladimir, Nizhny Novgorod, Kazan,
Yekaterinburg. [1]
Active development of high-speed traffic in our country requires qualified
personnel, including drivers.
A thorough professional selection, and training in a specialized training center
for high-speed train service helps to increase the interest of the employer in
maintaining health and high efficiency drivers to ensure traffic safety.
In process of labor activity at the driver in a high-speed impact lots hazards
(noise, vibration, inappropriate workplace illumination in the dark, electromagnetic
radiation and static electricity, etc.). A special place is occupied by the adverse
effects on the group of drivers psychophysiological factors, neuro-psychological
overload mental strain amid monotonous work with periodic emotional stress,
overload analyzers (auditory, visual, tactile). Adverse physiological factors contribute
to the negative effects on the body other factors.
Nervous and emotional stress associated primarily with increased vigilance
when driving trains and strict adherence to the timetable, with a personal risk and a
high degree of personal responsibility for the trouble-free movement.
In addition, the intensity of the work locomotive crew is largely determined by a
constant and high level of readiness to take the necessary measures in case of
emergency. [2]
It is known that during long flights, especially the night, in the locomotive there
is a real danger of reducing the level of consciousness. Conditions affecting the
monotony of the constant voltage attention monotony (stiffness) of the working
posture, soothing low-frequency vibration of uniform and other factors. Sometimes
sleepiness increases gradually, in other cases, there are instant "failures" of attention
[3].
One of the first cause of death is cardiovascular disease drivers, now the cases of
suicide. Have lower life expectancy.
For these reasons the special significance of the problem of professional
selection for the job in a very stressful working conditions and create an automated
system for continuous monitoring of psycho - emotional state of the driver.
Necessary to realize the system control psychophysiological state driver to
register as concentration and the state of psycho - emotional stress. This will improve
not only safety, but also more control over the health of the driver, which ultimately
will increase the duration of its life.
For the purposes of professional selection currently existing methods of
examination should be supplemented with research response to the changing colors
and sounds, as well as reactions to the differentiation of sound and light signals with
hronorefleksometr. This testing will allow for the selection of professional
individuals with persistent high levels of the central nervous system, the auditory and
visual analyzers resistant to psycho - emotional stress.
There are many modern methods of control over the psychophysiological state
of the driver. One of the areas of research implements diagnostic tool
"Bioelectrography digital" in which diagnosis is performed on the pathological
changes of electrically induced luminescence of fingers and toes - a method EBL.
This allows, according to the developers, to identify pre-clinical disorders and
latent disease. To assess the degree of emotional stress, assess energy status,
evaluation of endotoxemia (dirty).
Other direction realizes crownscopy intended to diagnose energy, emotional and
physical state of the person using the dynamic gas discharge visualization (Kirlian
effect).
Crownscopy allows to define the state of adaptive reserves, the dynamics of the
processes occurring in the body - when re-diagnosis [4].
The most promising include complex control monitor psychophysiological state
vehicle operator company "Transas". It allows you to support the effective
functioning of the biotech-locomotive engineer. The hardware part of the complex
consists of a digital sensor pulse shaper plethysmogram, kardiointerval meter.
Registration heart rate is by far and near telemetry. The hardware consists of
cardiobelt and repeater (radio station). Cardiobelt has sensors of physical activity,
temperature, GPS.
Valuation techniques include psychophysiological state driver's definition of
stress and concentration (mental effort) rights. And the scale of fatigue / tiredness.
Advantage of the complex is the ability to control the on-line on the basis of
consistently recorded duration cardio. This allows you to determine the probability of
error-free driver, and his mobilization readiness, which is subjectively experienced as
a feeling of complete harmony of mental and physical strength and maximum
functional integration at the level of the central nervous system, the capacity of the
visual analyzer driver [5].
Thus, to ensure the health and high performance locomotive engineers in highspeed should be supplemented with professional selection process study of the
functional state of the central nervous system using hronorefleksometra organization
and continuous monitoring of psychophysiological state assessment method of
psychophysiological state driver includes the definition of concentration and the
degree of development stress.
References:
1. National system of high-speed movement (NSVD) [Electronic resource]:
http://speedrail.ru/national_system_for_high_speed/
2. Kudrin V.A., Prokhorov A.A. Health protection of workers of locomotive
brigades and safety of movement of trains on the railways: Management. - M, 2000. –
107p.
3. Management of Standards. Railway Safety. Devices of wakefulness of the
driver on the railways of Great Britain. Review of systems.
4. Kirlian's scientific and medical center "Belovodye" – the
bioelectrocount
Endoekologichesky
Rehabilitation
[An
electronic
resource]:
http://www.luminis-med.ru/
5. Kurepin D. E., Aliev O. T. «The perspective direction of research of a
psychophysiological condition of drivers of vehicles». The materials VІ International
scientific and practical the Internet – conferences. «Problems and prospects of
development of a science at the beginning of the third millennium in CIS countries»,
Pereyaslav-Khmelnytsky, December 22-24, 2012. 15-18p.
J21310-025
Radionov A.A., Maklakov A.S.
OPERATING CONDITIONS OF AN INDUCTION MOTOR WITH
FREQUENCY CONVERTER, BASED ON VSI WITH PWM, AND AFE
RECTIFIER DURING VOLTAGE DIPS
South Ural State University (National Research),
Chelyabinsk, Lenin ave 75, 454080
In this report we describe the conditions of the system with frequency converter
based VSI with PWM, induction motor with vector control and the active rectifier
during voltage dips. To analyze the spectrum of harmonics on the primary and
secondary winding of the transformer.
Key words: voltage dip, active rectifier, frequency converter on the base VSI
with PWM , induction motor, vector control.
Now wide application is found by electric drive systems with frequency
converter, on the base voltage source inventor (VSI), with pulse wide modulation
(PWM), induction motor and active front end (AFE). They represent worthy
alternative replacement to electric drives of a direct current in view of their
reliability, power efficiency, quality and simplicity of a design. Modern development
of element base power - and microelectronics allows to realise necessary accuracy of
regulation of various co-ordinates of the electric drive under trying conditions works.
In reversible alternating current (AC) drives a lot of attention is paid to the
recuperation during braking and reverse where necessary to consider the range of
harmonics. In such systems, electric widely used active rectifiers based on (insulated
gate bipolar transistor) IGBT, which can be applied in all areas of industry, such as in
heavy and in light, in view of expediency.
The basic advantage of use of AFE rectifiers on the basis of IGBT is reliable
switching between them. Switching does not depend on supply power, thus, provides
reliable and steady work even in the conditions of instability and low power of a
network and as much as possible reduces influence on a power line [1]. In passive
regimes the AFE rectifier works as the simple rectifier. Transistors are adjusted so
that to keep in active regimes at constant level voltage of an AC and to provide
sinusoidal a line current. Thanks to self-regulation of the bridge IGBT switching
device provides power factor approximately equal to one. The advantages of AFE
based on IGBT: self -switching power stage, the fuses are off when the supply voltage
dips, low current harmonics filtering costs are not available, a quick adjustment for
optimum current control voltage changes, the inverter can increase the direct current
(DC) voltage to rated even voltage dips (motor can operate at full power). [2].
The aim of this work is the study of: the conditions of the system with frequency
converter based VSI with PWM, induction motor with vector control and the AFE
rectifier during voltage dips, the analysis of the spectrum of harmonic components on
the primary and secondary of the supply transformer.
In Fig. 1 is a functional scheme the studied in the program MATLAB Simulink
R2009a presented.
Fig. 1. Imitating model of the system in the program MATLAB Simulink
R2009a
AFE rectifier is made on the basis of twelve-pulse IGBT module with PWM,
which reduces ripple current and voltage in the DC link. The regulatory system is
made dual circuit, dual internal control system current consumption of network and
external single-channel automatic control system rectified voltage. The internal
system represents the combined system of automatic control combining principles of
regulation on a deviation. Regulation of the vector network currents are in the
rotating coordinate system oriented vector voltage. In line with this feedback loop
provides the coordinates of the transmitter network phase currents. Error signals set
and actual values of the transformed current processed proportional-integral (PI)
current regulators. Internal automatic control system is subject to current network
controller external system of the rectified voltage of the active rectifier. The regulator
output voltage active rectifier is executed proportional-integral (PI).
Voltage inverter is made six-pulse based IGBT module with PWM. The voltage of
the DC - 490 V. AC motor with squirrel-cage rotor is equipped with indirect vector
control with respect to the vector orientation of the rotor flux linkage with
proportional - integral (PI) current regulator and proportional (P) speed control.
Induction motor parameters: p = 2, P2 = 37 kW, U𝑁 = 380 V , n𝑁 = 1450 rpm,
R1 = 0,088 Ohm, L1 = 0,8 mH, R 2 ′ = 0,231 Ohm, L2 ′ = 0,8 mH, J = 1,599 kg ∙ m2
The results of studies of the conditions of the motor with a rated load torque on the
shaft and the rated speed when voltage dips in Fig. 2, 3.
Uа(t)
Iа(t)
pu
Ud(t)
Time, s
Fig. 2. Transient curves at voltage dips
ω(t)
pu
Δω=8,3%
Time. s
а)
pu
Ms(t)
M(t)
Time. s
b)
Fig. 3. Curves of transients at work of the motor with the nominal moment
on a shaft and with rotation rated speed during time voltage dips
In fig. 2 , fig. 3, a and fig. 3, b shows the curves of transients, where: M(t) −
electromagnet torque, Мs (t) − the load torque, Ud (t) − the voltage of the DC, ω(t) –
angular speed of the motor, Ia (t) − current on a secondary winding of the
transformer of a phase А, Ua (t) − voltage on a secondary winding of the transformer
of a phase А, in relative units. At the moment of time t = 1,5 s is the maximum shortterm drop in DC bus by 30%, while the failure of less than 1 ms. The voltage level of
the DC steady state is 75% of rated voltage. Short-term maximum drawdown
dynamic torque on the shaft of the motor is 55%, while less than 30 ms. Speed starts
to decrease up to the time t = 1,85 s at which M = Мs , and speed deviation at this
point and has a maximum value of 8,3%.
In Fig. 3 shows the histogram of the harmonic spectrum at the primary and
secondary windings of the transformer, the vertical axisfn /fb , when fb = fs = 50 Hz ,
horizontal - harmonic number.
% of fundamental harmonic
harmonic number
a)
harmonic number
b)
Fig. 4. The histogram of a spectrum of harmonics on primary (a) and
secondary (b)
The analysis of histograms (fig. 4, and fig. 4, b) has shown that on all spectrum of
harmonics the system has satisfactory indicators except 23 and 31st harmonic.
On the basis of the given research, it is possible to draw a conclusion that at
insignificant voltage dip (to 15 %) a motor working condition in systems with
converter on the base VSI with PWM and active rectifier have no essential changes.
At considerable voltage dips (from 20 %-30 %), the motor cannot create a time the
requested rotating moment, and speed decreases until when M = Мs , after voltage
restoration in networks, speed it is restored on former level. The analysis of a
spectrum of harmonics has shown that the system practically does not render
influence on a network in a zone of low-frequency components.
References:
1. Belyaev D.V., Veynger A.M., Powerful electric drive AC mains supply. - V
International (16 National) Conference on Automated electric. September 18-21,
2007. 426-428.
2. Radionov A.A., Yarmuhametov R.. Effect of 18-pulse AC-DC converter on
the network under different operating / / Electrical systems and complexes:
Interuniversity collection of scientific papers - Magnitogorsk Interuniversity
collection of scientific papers – Magnitogorsk: Magnitogorsk Publisher., 2012. Issue
19. 182-186.
.
J21310-026
UDC 681.5.09
Pegushin S.L., Shumihin A.G.
THE CAUSES AND THE CONSEQUENCES OF FAILURE
AUTOMATION SYSTEMS IN OPERATION IN REFINERIES USING A
SINGLE BASE OPERATING DATA
Perm National Research Polytechnic University,
Perm, Komsomol prospectus 29, 614990
The report examines the methods to assess and improve the reliability of
systems, emergency shutdown of oil production, based on an analysis of the causes
and consequences of failures of automation systems in operation and the use of a
single database of operational data.
Keywords: oil, industrial process automation, reliability, causes and
consequences of failure, and analysis.
Among the most important characteristics of the efficiency of the system crash
protection special place reliability, defined as a complex system property to preserve
in time within the limit of all the parameters that reflect the ability of the system to
perform its required function in the intended application and operating conditions. It
follows from this definition, the search for improved and adequate methods and
means of assessment, analysis, improvement kinds of characteristics and reliability of
emergency shutdown systems and components is important. Of great importance is
estimation of reliability in the operational phase. This provides a more complete and
informative data on running to determine the functional characteristics and the
amounts of reliability, functionality and maintainability of the numerical
characteristics of failed elements of the technical means of emergency shutdown
systems, use proven methods of design automation systems to ensure the highest
level of reliability of the elements of the complex hardware systems emergency
protection, optimize the cost of production service equipment and unexpected
downtime or production process unit as a whole, leading to significant economic
losses, improve industrial safety of hazardous production facilities.Keeping statistics
on failures and restoration of the technical facilities is much easier to create a single
database. An example of a structural model of a single information database is
presented in Figure 1:
Carrying out maintenance
emergency shutdown
systems engineering objects
Formation changes in planning
maintenance and operation
Operational services
emergency shutdown
systems engineering objects
Forming applications for
replenishment of reserve
equipment, preparation of
defective statements,
reports on carrying out
maintenance, acts of claims
and damage
The database
Analysis of the causes of
failures of the technical
elements of emergency
shutdown systems, the
development of measures to
remove and prevent failures
Formation of standards and
requirements for the
maintenance and operation
Changes in the subsequent
design decisions based on data
in the period of operation
Formation of specifications,
technical specifications,
design work
Fig. 1. Information model of a single database.
For analysis and decision-making to improve the reliability of the equipment
using the data stored in the database may use the technique of analysis of potential
failures and consequences (FMEA – failure mode and effect analysis) [1]. Example
illustrating FMEA applied to the automatic emergency shutdown furnace heating
ekstrakt solution of the plant selective oil refining 37-10 is shown in table 1.
Table 1.
Example FMEA table for automatic emergency shutdown.
Type
of
Type
The
Si
of
consequ
gn al
equip potenti ences of ifi
ment
al
failure
failure
Potenti
Emer Actual
D
gence identificati et
causes
ca
Recom
mendato prio
on
ec
measures
tio measure nu
nc
n
ry
rity
s
mb
e
Tempe HART
transmi of
sensor
tter
failure fault
er
The lack 10 Transmi 3
rature
Visual
2
Availabil 60
tter
inspection,
ity
faults
diagnostics
replacem
monitor
HART-
ent tools
operator
Communic
and
ator
accessori
on
data (4
the )
or
1
of (24)
es
AMS
Reject
Freezin Incorrect 9
Faulty
ion
g
or
electric
inspection,
g
level
bridles
erroneou )
heat,
check
electrical
sensor
s data on
lack of
zero
heating,
(displa
the
insulati
drainage
check
cer
monitor
on,
column
for
transm
insuffici
removal
insulatio
itters)
ent
column.
n on the
(4
risk
Visual
3
for
Checkin
of (12)
washing
selection
of
,
the
check
column
for
with
flushing
a
27
viscous
in
a
medium
viscous
medium.
Sensor Damag Lack of 9
Damage 1
Continuity
failure e
when
test cable
to informati
cable
1
Cable
9
installati
cables
on
insulati
or
accordan
on
perform
ce
ing
the
assembl
standard
y work
documen
on
tation.
on
the
in
with
technol
ogy
object.
Reject
Damag Triggeri
ion
e
soleno cable
id
to ng
Continuity
when
test cable
1
Cable
10
installati
cables
on
or
accordan
producti
perform
ce
on line
ing
the
assembl
standard
y work
documen
on
tation.
clipper
insulati on
clipper on
10 Damage 1
the
the
in
with
technol
ogy
object.
Valve
Damag Actuatio
failure e
cable
10 Damage 1
Continuity
to n of the
when
test cable
valve
cables
1
Cable
10
installati
on
in
insulati producti
or
accordan
on
perform
ce
ing
the
assembl
standard
y work
documen
on
tation.
on line
the
with
technol
ogy
object.
Sensor Loss of Lack of 10 Faulty
1
Visual
3
Checkin
failure solderl
data,
installat
inspection,
g
,
ess
(involunt
ion
installation
quality
valve,
wire
ary)
cable
wires
of
clipper
30
the
opening
installati
or
on.
closing
Conducti
the valve
ng
or
slam
commiss
on
the
ioning
producti
activities
on line
.
In the column "value" of the table in parentheses are coefficients, if the position
is not part of the security and emergency protection.Ratings of severity (significance),
the frequency of occurrence of failure (emergence), the probability of failure
detection (detection) are set on the basis of expert judgment by questioning experts.
Table severity, frequency and probability of detection [2] as follows, respectively.
Table 2.
Rating severity.
Impact
Rating
(severity of
Criterion
Impact on production
consequences)
Failure, causing a sudden loss
10
Catastrophic
of security. Inconsistency with
-
regulations
Failure, causing a gradual loss
9
Very serious
of security. Inconsistency with
-
regulations
8
7
Maximum
allowable
Great
Equipment is safe, but not
functional. The loss of the
main functions
Equipment
safety
Interruption of more than
8 h.
and Interruption of more than
availability, but not fully
4 h.
Equipment works and is safe,
6
Significant
but
some
of
the
device
determines the usability, do not
Interruption from 1 to 4
hours.
function
Equipment works and is safe,
5
Sensible
but some devices do not
function fully
4
3
Slight
Weak
Equipment is operational and
safe for serious tuning
Equipment works and is safe
with a little fine tuning
Interruption from 0.5 to 1
hours.
Interruption of less than
30 minutes. Without loss
of production
The process requires
regulation
2
1
Very weak
None
Equipment is operational and
safe for a minor adjustment
No impact
The process is under
control, but it takes some
adjustment
The process is controlled
Table 3.
Rating frequency of failures.
Rating
The frequency of
occurrence
The interval
between failures,
Criterion
h.
10
Almost always
Less than 2
-
9
Very high
2 – 10
-
8
High
11 – 100
Interruption of more than 8 h.
7
The rather high
101 – 400
Interruption of more than 4 h.
401 – 1000
Interruption from 1 to 4 hours.
1001 – 2000
Interruption from 0.5 to 1 hours.
6
5
Average
probability
Low probability
Interruption of less than 30
4
Rarely
2001 – 3000
minutes. Without loss of
production
3
Hardly ever
2001 – 3000
2
Isolated cases
3001 – 6000
1
Almost never
occur
6001 – 10000
The process requires regulation
The process is under control, but
it takes some adjustment
The process is controlled
Table 4.
Rating the probability of detection of failures.
Rating
Probability of
detection
Criterion
10
Almost not detected
9
Very rarely found
8
Rarely detected
7
Very unlikely
6
Low probability
5
Moderate chance
4
Average probability
3
High probability
2
1
Preventive maintenance can not identify the potential
causes of failure
Outside chance that preventative maintenance will
identify the reasons for refusal
Very small chance of finding the causes of failure in
preventive maintenance
Very small chance of failure detection for preventive
maintenance
Small chance of failure detection for preventive
maintenance
Moderate chance of failure detection for preventive
maintenance
Average chance of failure detection for preventive
maintenance
Greater chance of detection of failure in a preventive
maintenance
A very high
Very good chance of detection of failure in a
probability
preventive maintenance
Almost always
Preventive maintenance can almost always identify
detected failure
the potential causes of failure
To determine the consistency of the opinions of experts, you can use the
dispersion
W=
coefficient
of
concordance
coefficient
or
consent
[3]
hs
12S
d
d 2 (m 3 - m) - d å Ts
, Ts = å (hk3 - hk ) , where Ts - index linked ranks in s ranking; hs
k =1
s =1
- number of groups of equal rank in the s ranking; hk - number of equal rank in the k
2
æ d
ö
1 d
group associated with rank ranking s expert. S = å ç å ris - r ÷ , r = å ris , where r m s =1
i =1 è s =1
ø
m
estimate mathematical expectation; ris - rank or rating assigned s expert i object; mnumber of objects, d- number of experts.
Evaluation of the significance of the coefficient of concordance can be made by
c 2 with a degree of freedom n = (m - 1) :
c2 =
12 S
dm(m + 1) -
1 d
å Ts
m - 1 s =1
2
If c table
< c 2 - then the hypothesis of agreement of experts adopted.
2
If c table
> c 2 - then the hypothesis of agreement of experts rejected.
Thus, in this article the feasibility of establishing a single database refineries on
failures and recovery automation for measuring the severity of failures and make
adequate decisions on measures to prevent them, as well as maintenance organization
[3] and the development of appropriate regulations maintenance.
References:
1.
Analysis of the types and effects of potential failures (FMEA). Reference
Manual. The third edition.
2.
Nikiforov AD Quality management. - M. Bustard, 2004 - 720 p.
3.
Pegushin SL, Shumikhin AG Maintenance planning systems, automatic
emergency shutdown of production facilities with regard to evaluating the reliability
and maintainability - Bulletin of Perm National Research Polytechnic University.
Chemical Technology and Biotechnology. 2012. Number 14. Pp. 13-21.
4.
GOST 27.310-95 "Reliability engineering. Analysis of types, effects and
criticality of failures."
J21310-027
UDC 635.82:664.8.03.014
Medvedkova I.I.
PRACTICAL INFLUENCE OF PROCESSING AND FREEZING
TEMPERATURE ON RESULTS OF THE ASSESSMENT OF QUALITY OF
FIELD MUSHROOMS
Donetsk National University of Economics and Trade
of a name of M. Tugan-Baranovsky, Donetsk, Ul. Shchorsа, 31, 83050
In article practical influence of preliminary processing, temperature of freezing
and storage of mushrooms on their quality and results of an assessment of quality of
field mushrooms is analyzed. In a consequence of that the products exit is formed.
Keywords: mushrooms, preliminary processing, storage, freezing temperature,
quality.
Agro-industrial complex of Ukraine - the big intersect oral association including
set of branches, connected among themselves the reproduction process, which main
objective - ensuring food security of the country within optimum norms of a food of
the population of Ukraine, creation of an export potential of raw materials and the
food.
Owing to negative tendencies in economy, including in agrarian and industrial
complex, a consumption level of the main foodstuff per capita considerably lags
behind scientifically reasonable norms. Uninterrupted providing the population
qualitative domestic is fresher fruit and vegetable production is a priority problem of
the state. Which can be carried out at the expense of the balanced outputs and
demand for production? The simplest option of achievement of a goal is high-quality
storage and processing.
In this regard, an important role in a food allowance of the population it is
allocated for products from natural vegetable raw materials, including to cultivated
mushrooms. The last, on researches of many scientists, is a source of food fibers, full-
fledged proteins, including immunoglobulin, macro - and microcells, a complex of
vitamins, have radio tire-tread and antineoplastic properties.
According to FAO, in the world more than 4 million tons of mushrooms are
made. The world leader on production of cultivated mushrooms is China, in Europe Poland and Holland (235-230 thousand tons). In Ukraine while about 30 thousand
tons of fresh mushrooms a year are made. However, production of mushrooms in
Ukraine grows in comparison with other states the fastest rates in Europe.
Considering economic, geographical and climatic conditions in Ukraine there are all
preconditions to become one of leaders of their production. One of the reasons
constraining their production, insufficient use of opportunities of refrigerating
technologies for preservation of their quality as perishable raw materials is.
The state policy in the sphere of a healthy food of the population of Ukraine is
directed on ensuring quality and safety of foodstuff therefore promotes development
and deployment of a control system of quality. At the heart of modern idea of quality
of foodstuff the principle of the maximum satisfaction of needs of the consumer of
safe production with high consumer properties lies.
However, producers (suppliers) can't satisfy completely need of the consumer
without introduction at the enterprise of the quality management system (QMS)
which covers all stages of life cycle of production.
Freezing used fruit bodies of field mushrooms of white race.
Mushrooms
processed and froze no more than 4 hours after their collecting.
In the course of freezing can arise a number of the defects connected with
quality of used raw materials, and also at non-compliance with parameters of
technological processes? For the storage beginning mushrooms belonged to the
highest commodity grade.
Quality of mushrooms is estimated, generally on organoleptic indicators. It
concerns mushrooms both in frozen, and in the defrozen look. In the latter case the
requirements which performance depends on quality of raw materials are considered.
So, the special attention is paid to color of a thin skin, pulp and soporiferous
plates. These indicators in fresh mushrooms as raw materials characterize degree of a
maturity and quality of field mushrooms. Also they define as carefully to calibrate
mushrooms by the size of a hat and extent of their disclosure.
On color of soporiferous plates it is possible to judge, what the time is passed
after collecting mushrooms as in the course of storage of a hat of mushrooms reveal,
and soporiferous plates with light pink or pink become light brown and brown.
At the same time nutrition value of mushrooms decreases, in them cancerogenic
substances which are very hazardous to health of the person can collect. Results of an
organoleptic assessment of quality of field mushrooms are presented in table 1. From
the provided data it is visible that in the frozen condition mushrooms on quality
practically conform to requirements of the draft of the standard.
Table 1
Results of an assessment of quality of the frozen field mushrooms at a
temperature - 300C
Indicators
Quality Characteristic
Premium
First grade
In the frozen look
Appearence
Mushrooms of the whole, pure one look uniform in form
and sizes
Mechanical
%,
no
damages,
more
Are absent
(on
weight)
Uniformity on
Hat of mushrooms of a roundish form, slightly flat, aren't
to form, %,
damaged
there is more than
Frozen, % on weight,
To three-four bodies, frozen at an edge
no more than 10%
Uneven
hats
on Dispersion of the sizes on the greatest cross diameter of a
diameter, no more than
10%
hat are no more, mm:
20
Are absent
The size of a hat, the
mm, no more than
Maturity
Color of plates
40
-
Closed
-
From pink to the light From beige to dark beige
beige
Color of plates
Length of a leg
White with easy darkening
20
-
In the defrozen look
Color of pulp
White with easy darkening
Color of plates
From beige to dark beige
Color of skin
-
White about darkening, with
the spots, is no more than
Consistence
Smell and taste
Softened
Soft
-
to Mensh expressed, are
peculiar
to
fresh
field
mushrooms
Separates hats
Are absent
More essential changes are noted by us for the defrozen mushrooms. This
process carried out at the room temperature within 6 hours.
Essential changes
underwent such indicators: color of plates and thin skin, consistence, taste and smell.
So, color of soporiferous plates from Pink and light brown in the frozen changed
to light brown, the thin skin darkened and became covered by dark stains. The
consistence of fruit bodies, irrespective of ripeness and color of soporiferous plates,
became soft, and there have to be in the highest grades softened. So, after 9 months of
storage quality of field mushrooms after defrosting worsened - from the highest
commodity grade to the first.
We carried out an assessment of a level of quality of field mushrooms on
separate indicators (table 2), and also complex.
The main decrease in quality happened on indicators which very quickly change
at storage of fresh field mushrooms and characterize a maturity and safety of fresh
production.
Table 2
Organoleptic assessment of quality of field mushrooms previously
processed and frozen at various temperatures
Indicators
Option of storage and characteristic of
Points
indicators
Without the preliminary processing, frozen at a temperature - 200C
Appearance
Fruit bodies uniform by the sizes and the
3
form, deformed
Color of fruits
Dark brown
2
Color of plates
Brown
2
Smell
not expressed, peculiar to field mushrooms
2
Taste
Senny smell
1
Mochalistaya, with considerable loss of
2
Consistance
juice
Scalded, frozen at a temperature - 200C
Appearance
4
form, not deformed
Color of skin
Greybrown
3
Color of plates
Light brown
2
Poorly expressed, peculiar to field
2
Smell
mushrooms
Taste
Empty, poorly expressed
2
Consistance
Soft, with considerable loss of juice
1
Washed by the potassium metabisulphite, frozen at a temperature – 300 C
Appearance
form, not deformed
4
Color of skin
Thin skin darkened, 20% of mushrooms
4
with brown spots
Color of plates
Light brown
3
Smell
Expressed, peculiar to field mushrooms
3
Taste
Expressed, without strangers
3
Softness
3
Consistance
One of major factors of formation of quality of production is not only existence
of objective regulatory base (standards), but also a complex of other factors which
also provide also a quantitative assessment on quality indicators. On the basis of
stated Belinsky the Page, carried out methodological approaches of structuring
functions of quality of fast-frozen production. It is caused by that these products
occupy a major role in structure of a food of the population. And in a total amount the
frozen fruit and vegetable goods occupy 15%, in them the ratio of vegetables of a
foreign and domestic production makes 70:30, fruit - 50:50. At the same time, these
products are object of international trade, requirements to their quality and the safety
accepted in the different countries, have to be coordinated. Especially as in Ukraine
processes on adaptation and harmonization of domestic standards on fast-frozen fruit
and vegetable production from the point of view of quality and safety proceed.
The analysis of data of table 2 shows that the consumer carries to number of the
major indicators, respectively: taste, color, structure, smell, appearance and product
size. Other indicators belong to external information materials, respectively: period of
storage, possibility of survey of goods in packing, other information for the consumer
and, of course, the price. In connection with stated information, and also on the basis
of requirements of standards to other fast-frozen production, we defined a circle of
indicators for an assessment of a level of quality of the frozen mushrooms.
Assessment of quality of the frozen mushrooms carried out in the defrozen look no
later than 2-4 hours after a capture of an average sample. Product temperature,
according to requirements, didn't exceed 2 ºС Page. Organoleptic indicators defined
in the following sequence: appearance, color, smell, taste and consistence.
The given results of an assessment of a level of quality of field mushrooms show
that: high level of quality have processed in solution metabisulphite of potassium and
frozen at a temperature-300С. These mushrooms can be sent both for industrial
processing, and for use to cookeries; the same belongs and to field mushrooms
scalded, they take the second place; mushrooms without processing frozen at a
temperature-200С on a level of quality are on the last place and, in our opinion, have
to be immediately directed for culinary processing.
On the basis of researches of quality of the frozen mushrooms of cream and
brown races and different strains it is necessary to develop the standard. In which
features of change of their quality have to be accurately reflected when freezing and
defrosting.
References:
1. Belinskay
bistrozamoroczenoy
S.O.
Metodologiya
plodoovochnoy
strukturirovaniya
produkzii
[Tekst]
funkziy
kachestva
S.O.
Belinskay
//
Standartizashiya sertifikashiya kachestvo.- 2008.- № 6.- S. 57-63.
2. Razova N.K. Upravlenie kachestvom. [Tekst] / N.K. Razova Kratkiy kurs:
Uchebnoe posobie.- SPB.: Piter, 2003.- 224 s.
3. Belokrilova L.V. Kachestvo dikorastushchich gribov pri zamoragivanii i
chranenii [Теkst] / aftoref/ dis. kand. techn. nauk.: 05.18.15 / L.V. Belokrilova Novosibirsk. - 17 s.
J21310-028
UDC 664/639.2.081
1
Sukhenko V.J., 2Manuilov V.V., 1Sukhenko J.G.
CORROSION-MECHANICAL WEAR TECHNOLOGICAL
EQUIPMENT FOOD
1
Kyiv, Heroyiv Oborony, 15, 03041
2
Kerch State Marine Technical University, Kerch, Ordzhonіkіdze, 82, 98309
Using of methods thermodynamic of irreversibly process proved that the speed
of corrosive-mechanical metals wear in technological mediums of electrolytes of food
industry depends on linearly loads and speed of slip and depends parabolically on
loss of strength of materials by corrosive-active medium. The methods of control over
process about corrosive-mechanical wear are pointed. Validation of mathematics
model of wear for adequacy was conducted in technological medium of food
industry.
Key words: corrosion, wear, mechanical factors, catalyst, fatigue, durability,
electrochemistry, potential.
The process of material wear accompanies by irreversible loss of mechanical
energy and its conversion in to other types of energy. The mechanism of corrosivemechanical wear of materials in corrosive food medium-electrolytes may be
considered on the basis of thermodynamic system analysis which connects the
microscope parameter of rubbing pair with electrolytical characteristics interaction
and material destruction in special technological medium.
By considering of the fixed process of corrosive-mechanical wear of metals in
technological medium of food industry the thermodinamical system can be defined
by the aggregate of the contacting the destructive bulk of the metal, with the medium
and the grits. This system can be divided in two parts one is the destructive process
and the other one is connected with chemical reaction and the transformation of free
surface owing to destruction.
During the corrosive-mechanical abrasing the quantity of dissipation is defined
not only of plastic deformation but even intensity of electrolytical processes and
quantity of modification of free surface area.
Joint quantitative analysis of heterogeneous processes is possible by
introducing universal power criteria by using of methods thermodinamical
irreversible processes.
Such processes one can describe by dissipative function [1-3]:
i
diS
d W dis
=å
+ I C AC ,
y =Ò
dt
dt
(1)
where y = y SK - dissipative function (speed of dissipated energy in system)
related to the unit of contact surface Sk; T - the temperature of the systems;
i
di S dt = diS SK dt - the modifying entropy of system; d W dis dt - the energy dissipation
speed for process which takes place in system; I C AC =
IC
AC - the power of chemical
SK
reaction; Īс - chemical reaction speed; Ас - chemical affinity of the reaction.
Energy dissipation speed which is connected with plastically deformation and
formation of new surfaces makes:
j
dWdisi
d W pl
dW S
åi dt = dt + åj dt
(2)
Dissipation function of plastification process looks like this [2]:
y pl =
dW pl
dt
= I dAa
(3)
where I a = I a S K - density dislocation of flow; Àa = Dt a - chemical affinity
of process of formation and dislocation transferring; Dt - loss of material strength; a number of dislocations fitted on the material deformation.
Taking surface abrasive wear process as spalling of units on maximum
distorted and loosened (dislocation boundaries), dissipative power of the process of
formation free surface can be defined by the following model:
j
dW S
åj dt = I S 0 Ds 0 + I sm Ds m ,
(4)
where Іso=dSo/Sk×dt і Ism=dsm/Sk×dt - the changing speed of free surface of
oxides and non- oxides; Ds 0 і Ds m - the work of formation of a new unit of the free
surface a new free surface oxides and proceed into consideration points material.
Taking into consideration the equation (2), (3) and (4), the equation (1) can be
present as following:
y = Ia
Dt
a
+ I S 0 Ds 0 + I smDm + I C AC
(5)
On the basis of linearity the law and equation (5), relations with Onsager [3]
reciprocity the system of linearly phenomenological equation follows:
I a = C1
I c = C2
Dt
a
Dt
a
I so = C3
I sm = C4
+ C2 AC + C3 Ds 0 + C4 Ds m
(6)
+ C5 AC + C6 Ds 0 + C7 Ds m
(7)
Dt
a
Dt
a
+ C6 AC + C8 Ds 0 + C9 Ds m
(8)
+ C7 AC + C9 Ds 0 + C10 Ds m ,
(9)
where C1…C10 - phenomenological coefficient.
The brought wear speed must Ī be defined by sum of fluxes densities mass of
oxided Ī0 and non-oxided Im wear products:
I = I0 + I m
(10)
The fluxes I0 and Im may by get on the basis of equation (5) – (9). So as Ī0=Īсno,
that out the equation (7) is the quantity of the fluxes of the oxide metal:
I 0 = I Cn 0 = n 0 (C2 Aa + C5 AC + C6 Ds 0 + C7 Ds m ) ,
(11)
where no - is stoichiometrical coefficient of oxide in the equation of the
chemical reaction.
Substituting the equation (6) and (7) into (5) and taking into consideration,
that ( I m = I sm C11 where, Ñ11 - the coefficient which depends on properties of the
wearing material) [2], and in such way we get:
Dt
1
æ Dt ö
Im =
[y - C1 ç
÷ - (2C3 Ds 0 + 2C2 AC + C4 Ds m )
C11Ds m
a
èa ø
2
(
)
(12)
- C5 AC + C8 Ds 02 + 2C6 Ds 0 AC + C7 Ds m AC + C9 Ds 0 Ds m ]
We define the value y . The whole outer work which was carried out with
rubbing system is where:
W = P × f òð × L ,
(13)
where P - the unit loads; fmp - the coefficient of rub slips; L - the course of rub.
Than dissipative function is:
y = K × P × f òð × V ,
(14)
where K - constant which is characterizing the fraction of dissipative energy
during the wearing; V - the speed of relative slipping of particles of wearing medium
on the rubbing surface.
Excretions (11), (12) and (I4) can give us the quantity of wear speed which is
brought to the unit of surface:
I = I 0 + I m = K1 × P × V + K 2 Dt + K3 (- Dt )2
(15)
where K1, K2, K3 - is the constant, including in itself the quantity Сі, fтр, n0,
Ds0, Dsm, a.
Out of the equation (15) we can see, that the speed of corrosive mechanical
wear depends on linearly on the load and speed of sliding and parabolically from the
material loss of strength by corrosive active medium.
It’s known out of the electrochemistry [4-6], that
Dt =
Dj 0 × n × F
VM
(16)
,
where: Dj0 - is the quantitave of the balanced electrode potential during the
wear; n - metal valence; F - Faraday constant; Vm - male volume of the material.
Substituting the expression (16) into (15) we have:
I = K1 × P × V - K2
Dj 0 × n × F
VM
æ Dj × n × F
+ K3 çç 0
VM
è
ö
÷÷
ø
2
(17)
The given formula (17) of quantity P and V characterizes the outside influence
upon the wear surface, and the potential quantitative depends on as material qualities
of rubbing details, so as the qualities of corrosive medium. If the pair of rubbing
consists if heterogeneous metals, so each of others metals has its own electrode
properties. In this case the controls pair is characterized by mimed electrode
potential.
Pushing the potential of pair of rubbing together with external power supply
into the cathode or and sphere, we may control over process of corrosive-mechanical
wear within define limits not changing the conditions of the rubbing joint load. This
move may be realized by the changing of the structure of the rubbing materials by
protecting coating, by the changing of rubbing regime, or by the inhibition of
technological medium, that is proved by many investigators.
For the control of correctness of the choose of the thermo dynamical model of
corrosive mechanical wear we carried out the calculation of coefficient in the formula
(17) by using the smallest square. In this case the confidence intervals had been
chosen for the probability level 0,95.
Simultaneously there were carried out the practical tests of bronze examples
(Pb5Zn5Sn5) on scheme “bush-bush” on the plant of face rubbing. The experiments
were carried out in the mediums of beer-non-alcoholically industry (table 1). The
slipping speed was 0,2 m/s, specific load was 0,92 MN/m2. The speed of potential
sweep was 2 mV/c during the removal of polarizable curve. The example wear was
defined by gravimetrical method. The results of analytical and experimental tests
were tabulated.
Table 1
Tribotechical and electrochemical received characteristics of bronze
examples, by calculative and experimental methods
Potential
Technological
medium
Wear of examples in mg for 10 km of rubbing path
changes
diring the
head
Lower
medial
calculated
wear, mV
Water (potable)
95,0
10,10
10,50
10,30
10,55
Sunflower oil
14,0
0,4
0,50
0,45
0,50
The discovering results of investigations prove the accordance to the chosen
mathematical modal of process of corrosive-mechanical wear. They also testify the
technological medium property to change the intensity of wear materials by dozens
times. By this the electrode metal potential has the defined role in the topological
medium and its shift Dj 0 in the rubbing process.
We can conclude that the corrosive-mechanical wear can not be considered as
the common summing lift of mechanical and electrochemical factors. It represents the
complex process, where the electrochemical solution acts as catalyst of fatigue
endurance. The rubbing, in itself contributes to the preceding of the electrochemical
corrosion. In the all these processes the system potential plays the considerable role
[5,6].
References:
1. Haase R. Thermodynamics of irreversible processes [Text] Monograph / Rolf
Haase; Darmstadt; Translated from the German ed. A.V Lykov. - Academic Press,
1967.
2. Golego N.L. Fretting corrosion of metals [Text] Monograph / Golego N.L.
Alyabyev A.J., Shevelia V.V.; Kievsiky polytechnics. - K.: Tehnіka, 1974. – 272 p.
3. Groot S.R. Thermodynamics of irreversible processes [Text]: Monograph /
S.R. de Groot. - Moscow: GITTL, 1956. – 281 p.
4. Gutman E.M. Mechanochemistry of metals and corrosion protection [Text]
Monograph / E.M. Gutman. - Moscow, Metallurgy, 1974. – 272 p.
5. Preuss G.A. On the nature of corrosion and mechanical wear of metals:
International Journal / G.A. Preuss, State Scientific Institution MPRI NASB / /
Friction and wear. - 1987. - T.8, № 5. - P.792-797.: ISSN 0202-4977.
6. Sukhenko J.G. Reliability and durability of the equipment and food
processing industries [Text] Tutorial / J.G. Sukhenko, O.A. Litvinenko, V.J.
Sukhenko; ed. of professor Y. Sukhenko. - K.: REC NUHT, 2010. – 547 p.
J21310-029
UDC 004.9:519.8:65
Krap N.P., Yuzevych V.M.
METHODOLOGICAL ASPECTS OF MANAGEMENT OF PROJECTS
OF TOURIST FLOWS
Lviv Institute of Economy and Tourism
Lviv, Mentsynsky street, 8
Physico-Mechanical Institute of NAS of Ukraine
Lviv, Naukova street, 5
In this report for configuration management of tourist flows projects proposed to
use the method of expert estimates. Taking into account-the environment project, that
the main factors affecting the rate of change in the number of tourists flow to
optimize the work of employees of travel companies.
Key words: project management, configuration project environment project,
tourist flows, expert method.
Investigation and analysis of the proposed models, methods and algorithms for
decision making of building projects configuration tourist flows using the expert
method is not fully considered.
Without a thorough and comprehensive study of the factors that affect the
change of tourist flows, it is impossible to create a project that would reflect
relationship relevant factors.
At present there is no fundamental works that would disclose the issues of
project
management
of
tourist
flows
by
means
of
expert
method.
In the process of project management of tourist flows considered the environment of
the project, and the main factors affecting the rate of change of tourist flows [2].
Factor model system is a mathematical ratio that reflects the real relationship
between variables factors. In general it can be written as [2]:
y = f ( X 1 , X 2 , ..., X n )
(1)
where y - a function that depends on the factor variable;
X i - factor variable.
Assess how each factor affects the changes in tourist flows, using appropriate
expert method. Corresponding to the situation presented in (Fig. 1). Based on expert
method studied the environment of the project. The results are presented in Table 1
The management of project configuration tourist flows based on expert
assessment method for setting the most significant factor on the rate of change of
tourist flows made based application package MS Excel.
Еnvironment project
recreational complex (X1),
travel insurance (X2),
security type (X3)
environmental factor (X4)
servicing (X5)
economic and financial factors
transport system (X7)
political and legal relations (X8)
development of trade relations
cultural and historical heritage
Fig. 1. Scheme environment project
Table 1
Results of research of expert opinion
experts
factors
recreational
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Х1
3
4
8
6
5
8
8
6
5
6
travel insurance
Х2
8
5
7
9
8
9
9
8
10
6
security type
Х3
10 10 10
9
6 10 10
9
9
8
environmental
Х4
9
5
7
9
6
7
complex
8
7
8
5
factor
servicing
economic and
financial factors
transport system
political and legal
relations
development of
trade relations
cultural and
historical heritage
Х5
2
4
6
6
6
8
6
6
6
5
Х6
3
5
4
7
5
7
8
7
4
7
Х7
7
6
5
8
4
6
9
9
7
9
Х8
1
7
2
3
6
4
5
4
2
5
Х9
4
5
6
7
2
6
6
5
6
8
Х10
5
6
7
6
3
5
7
8
6
8
An important aspect in the process of expert assessment is the consideration of
expert opinion. Evaluation of consistency of expert opinion held by the coefficient of
concordance using formula (2) [1]:
W=
n ém
m × (n + 1) ù
×
å
ú
ê å x ij 2
3
2
m × (n - n) j =1 ëi =1
û
12
2
(2)
where m - number of experts;
n - number of factors.
After some investigation the most influential factors in the project environment
using the application package MS Excel defined these factors. The results are
presented in Table 2.
Table 2
Results of research
The most
Amount
Ranked
important
of each
factor
factors
factor
x3
91
Percent
the most
important
factor
1
100,00%
x2
79
2
88,80%
x4
71
3
77,70%
x7
70
4
66,60%
x10
61
5
55,50%
x1
59
6
44,40%
x6
57
7
33,30%
x5
55
8
11,10%
x9
55
8
11,10%
x8
39
10
,00%
Based on the research defined the weight of each factor on the environment of
the project by the characterization of changes of tourist flows. Thus found that the
greater the degree of dispersion of a factor by electronic trail effects. Table 2 shows
that the most weight on the draft environment have the following factors: security
type (100%), travel insurance (88.80%), environmental factors (77.70%), transport
system (66.60%), cultural and historical heritage (55.50%), other factors are less
significant in influencing on the change of tourist flows.
Based on calculations found that the expert method is a powerful tool to study
tourist flows. To optimize the tourist flows Рk(Xi) and upgrades project will use
functional quality [5] based on feedback:
tk
J ( Pk ( X i ), FB( X i )) = ò f ( y, u , s )dt Þ opt ,
(4)
t0
where y - vector set effects (yj(t) - the components, j = 1,2, ..., n); u - vector
controls; s - vector uncertain perturbations; [t0, tk] - time interval, which deals with
the process (formation of optimal values of tourist flows Рk(Xi), k = 1,2, ..., m); m total number of tourist flows, which are considered in this project; f ( y, u , s ) - a
feature that displays the quality; FB(Xi) - the function that describes the inverse
communication (Feed-back) between threads Рі and the environment with the views
of experts.
References:
1.
Hrabovetsky B. E. Economic forecasting and planning / B. E. Hrabovetsky. -
K.: Center of textbooks, 2003. - 188 p.
2.
Golubeva T.O. Using evaluation method in problems of invariant control / T.
O. Golubeva, V. M. Dubovoy // Bulletin Vinnitsa Polytechnic Institute. - 2007. - №
1. - S. 5-9.
3.
Zasymenko V.M. Basis of the theory of experiment planning / V.M.
Zasymenko. - Lviv: SI "Lviv Polytechnic", 2000. - 205 p.
4.
Kolesnik O.O. Economics and Statistics tourism market: a monograph / O.
Kolesnik. - Zhytomyr: ZSTU, 2011. - 196 p.
5.
Leybkynd A.R. Mathematical methods and models generating organiz-
tsyonnыh management structure / AR Leybkynd, BL Rudnik, A. Tychomyrov.-M.:
Iz-vo Mosk. Zap, 1982. -230 P.
J21310-030
UDC 531.383 : 532.516
Kondratova J.N., Kondratov D.V., Mogilevich L.I.
PROBLEMS OF HYDROELASTICITY OF THE COAXIAL
CYLINDRICAL SHELLS CONTAINING A STRATUM OF VISCOUS
INCOMPRESSIBLE LIQUID IN CONDITIONS OF VIBRATION
Saratov State University, Saratov, Stolypin Volga Region Institute, Volga
Region Branch MIIT
In this report the mechanical system consisting of two coaxial elastic cylindrical
shells of final length, freely supported on the end faces, pinching a stratum of viscous
incompressible liquid is observed at presence of external vibration. Amplitude
frequency characteristics of interior and external shells are discovered. It is executed
at a support of the grant of President MD-1025.2012.8 and the grant of RFBR 12-0131161-mol_а
Key words: coaxial elastic cylindrical shells, viscous incompressible liquid,
vibration, hydroelasticity.
The mechanical system consisting of two coaxial elastic cylindrical shells of
final length, freely supported on the end faces, pinching a stratum of viscous
incompressible liquid is observed. (fig. 1).
Fig. 1
It is supposed, that an external shell 1 – an elastic cylindrical shell with internal
radius R1 and freely supported on the end faces. An internal shell 2 with external
radius R2 – also an elastic cylindrical shell, it is free supported on the end faces. The
clearance between walls of shells 2 and 1 is completely filled by a liquid 3. The
external surface of an external shell and a surface of an internal shell form the
cylinder in the cylinder in length l2 . A radial clearance of a cylindrical slot
d = R1 - R2 << R2 . Face clearances of the working chamber, with absolutely rigid
walls, have extent a , much greater of a radial clearance (a >> d ) . On system pressure
of a liquid and a portable inertial force act harmonically varying on a time at end
faces. Moving of an internal shell concerning external at end faces is absent. The
mechanical system is considered termostabilized.
The law of progress of mechanical system as absolutely rigid body and its
absolute acceleration is represented in the form of (concerning inertial space)
x0 (t ) = E x f x 0 (w t ), y 0 (t ) º 0, z 0 (t ) = E z f z 0 (w t ) , (1)
W1x1 = &x&0 = E x w2 f x¢¢0 (w t ), W1 y1 º 0,W1z1 = &z&0 = E z w2 f z¢¢0 (w t ) ,
where the prime means a rate of change of a function on its argument, and
E x , E z – amplitudes of forward oscillations; w – frequency of forward oscillations.
In real mechanical systems a ratio d to R2 very few, therefore it is possible to
enter the small parameter y = d R2 << 1 describing width of a cylindrical layer of a
liquid, surrounding an internal cylindrical shell.
The small parameter y allows to simplify statement of a problem of
hydroelasticity with cylindrical shells. We shall pass to dimensionless variables,
entering the reduced pressure for a cylindrical crack [1-3]:
(
)
(i )
x = (r - R2 ) d q = q t = w t z = 2 y l2 Vr = wm(i )w ux Vq = wm w y uq ,
(
)
(i )
(i ) ( i ) ( i )
(i ) ( i ) (i )
(i ) ( i )
V y = wmi w y (l2 2 R2 )uz ; u1 = um U1 u2 = vm U 2 u3 = wm U 3 ,
(i )
( )
(i )
y = d R2 << 1 l = wm d ; c
(i )
2
=E
(i )
[r (1 - (m ) )] i = 1, 2 , l
(i )
(i )
0
0
(2 )
2
(2)
wm(2 ) (1)
= (1) l
wm
The equations of dynamics supporting and damping layer of a liquid in zero
approach on y will become:
é ¶ uq
¶P
¶ uq
¶ u q öù
æ ¶ uq
¶ P ¶ 2 uq
= 0 Re ê
+ lçç u x
+ uq
+ uz
÷÷ú = - ¶q + ¶x 2 , (3)
¶x
¶
q
¶
z
t
¶
x
¶
øû
è
ë
2
2
¶ uz
¶ u z öù
é ¶ uz
æ 2 R2 ö ¶ P ¶ u z
æ ¶ uz
÷÷
÷÷ú = -çç
+ lçç u x
+ uq
+ uz
,
Re ê
+
2
¶
z
¶
t
¶
x
¶
q
l
¶
z
¶
x
è
øû
è 2 ø
ë
¶ ux
¶x
+
¶ uq ¶ uz
d2w
+
= 0 ; Re =
.
¶q
¶z
n
Boundary conditions on impenetrable surfaces in zero approach on y will enter
the name in the form of:
¶U 3(1)
ux =
; u q = 0 ; u z = 0 at x = x*(1) = 1 + l(1)U 3(1) ; (4)
¶t
ux =
wm(2 ) ¶U 3(2 )
; u q = 0 ; u z = 0 at x = x *(2 ) = l(2 )U 3(2 ) .
(1)
wm ¶t
Pressure looks like:
é yE
ù
wm w 2
yE x
p = p 0 + r R2
P - Re ê z f z¢¢0 (t) cos(q + j) +
f x¢¢0 (t) sin (q + j)ú .
wm
y Re
ë wm
û
(5)
Let's consider a case, when the width of a face crack a is much more than width
of a cylindrical crack d ( a >> d ). Conditions for the reduced pressure P at transition
from a cylindrical crack in face:
P = 0 At z = ±1 . (6)
The equations of dynamics of the internal and external shells based on
hypotheses of Kirchhoff -Love [2, 4] in dimensionless variables (2) in view of
condition y << 1 will enter the name in the form of:
(c( ) ) r( )h( ) ìíæç 2R( ) ö÷u ( ) ¶ U ( ) + 1 - m( ) u ( ) ¶ U ( ) 2
¶q
(R( ) ) îçè l ÷ø ¶z
i 2
i i
0 0
i 2
2
i
i
0
i
i
m
1
2
2
i
m
i
1
2
2
2 (i )
(i )
(i ) ü
1 + m (0i ) æ 2 R (i ) ö (i ) ¶ 2U 2(i )
(
i ) (i ) 2 (i ) ¶ U 1
(
i ) æ 2 R ö (i ) ¶U 3
ç
÷vm
÷÷ wm
=0 ;
- m 0 çç
ý - r0 h0 w um
2
¶z¶q
¶
z
2 çè l2 ÷ø
l
¶
t
2
è
ø
þ
(c( ) ) r( )h( ) ìí- 1 + m( ) 2R( ) u ( ) ¶ U ( ) + 1 - m( ) æç 2R( ) ö÷ v( ) ¶ U ( ) +
¶z ¶q
2 çè l ÷ø
¶z
(R( ) ) î 2 l
i 2
i
i
0 0
i 2
i
0
i
i
2
i
m
i
0
1
2
i
2
i
m
2
i
2
2
2
(i ) 2 2 (i )
(i )
é
U 2(i )
¶ 2U 2(i ) ù
(i ) æç 2 R ÷ö ¶ U 2
(i ) 2 (i ) ê
(i ) ¶U 3
úw
a
v
2
1
+
+
m
+
m
m
0
0 ç
2
2
÷
l
¶q
¶q2
¶
z
¶
q
êë
úû
è 2 ø
(i ) ö 2 3 (i )
é
æ
2
R
2
¶ U3
¶ 3U 3(i ) ù üï
(i ) ê
(i ) ç
(i )
÷÷
úý - a0 wm 2 - m 0 ç
+
2
3
l
¶
z
¶
q
¶
q
úû ï
êë
è 2 ø
þ
¶ 2U 2(i ) ö
W
æW
÷ = 0 , (7)
- r(0i )h0(i )w2 ç 12x1 cos q - 12z1 sin q + vm(i )
¶t2 ÷ø
w
è w
(i ) ¶
+ vm
( )
(
)
(
( )
2
)
(c( ) ) r( )h( ) ìí- m( ) 2R( ) u ( ) ¶U ( ) + v( ) ¶U ( ) l
¶z
¶q
(R( ) ) î
i 2
-
( )
é
i
i
0 0
i 2
i
i
0
i
i
m
1
i
m
i
2
2
æ 2 R (i ) ö ¶ 3U 2(i ) ¶ 3U 2(i ) ù
÷÷
ú + wm(i )U 3(i ) +
2 - m (0i ) çç
+
2
3
¶q ú
êë
è l2 ø ¶z ¶q
û
2
a0(i ) vm(i ) ê
(
)
2
2
(i ) ö 4 4 (i )
é
æ 2 R (i ) ö ¶ 4U 3(i ) ¶ 4U 3(i ) ù üï
¶ U3
÷÷
÷
úý +
+ 2çç
+ a0 wm ç
2
2
4
4
l
q
¶
q
¶
z
¶
êëè l2 ÷ø ¶z
è 2 ø
ûú ïþ
2 (i )
W1z1
i
(i ) (i ) 2 æ W1x1
(i ) ¶ U 3 ö÷
= (- 1) qn(i ) x=x(i ) .
- r0 h0 w ç 2 sin q + 2 cos q + wm
2 ÷
*
w
¶t ø
è w
( )
(i )
2
(i ) êæç 2 R
(i )
qn
where
Q (i ) =
rR2 wm(i )w2 (i )
Q ;
=Re y
é yE x
ù
Re yp0
yE z
¢
¢
¢
¢
P
f
f
Re
(
)
sin
(
)
cos
+
t
q
+
t
q
ê (i ) x 0
ú.
(i ) z 0
w
w
rR2 wm(i )w2
m
ë m
û
Conditions free fixing at end faces of external and internal shells will enter the
name in the form of
¶U1(i )
¶ 2U 3(i )
= U 2(i ) = U 3(i ) =
= 0 At z = ±1 . (8)
¶z
¶z 2
The method of indignations is applied to the decision of the received problem of
hydroelasticity. The relative deflection of an shell l which is considered size of much
less unit is accepted to small parameter, that with reference to real mechanical
systems really takes place. The small parameter l entered into consideration allows
linearize a problem in zero approach. Presence at system of a viscous incompressible
liquid leads to fast attenuation of free fluctuations that allows to investigate only the
compelled fluctuations.
The equations of dynamics of shells are solved in the assumption of the
harmonious law of movement of the basis to which the mechanical system fastens,
thus elastic movings of shells are represented in the form of
(i )
(i ) (i )
(i )
u10 = um U10 = um
(i )
(i ) (i )
(i )
u20 = vm U 20 = vm
¥
å sin
k =1
¥
å cos
k =1
¥
(i )
(i )
u30
= wm(i )U 30
= wm(i ) å cos
k =1
{(
) (
)
}
2k - 1
(i )
(i )
(i )
(i )
pz a10
C cos q + a10 S sin q sin t + ju1 + a10O ,
2
{
} (
)
2k - 1
(i )
(i )
(i )
(i )
pz a20
S cos q + a20C sin q + a20O sin t + ju 2 , (9)
2
{(
) (
)
}
2k - 1
(i )
(i )
(i )
(i )
pz a30
C cos q + a30 S sin q sin t + ju 3 + a30O .
2
As a result there are elastic movings shells, and also their peak-frequency
characteristics:
A(i ) (w) =
num (i )
,
den
(10)
(
(
)
(
)
( j ) (i ) ( j ) (i ) ( j )
( j ) (i )
( j ) (i )
num (i ) = a11
a11 de1 g1 b33 + 2 a11
a11 de1( j )de1(i ) g1( j ) g1(i )b33
b33 +
where
2
2
)
( )
+ 4w e (a ( )a ( )de( ) g ( ) B ( ) ) + (a ( ) g ( ) g ( ) ) i = 1, 2 j = 1, 2 i ¹ j ;
den = (g ( ) g ( ) ) + (288v - 8w e )a ( )a ( )de( )de( ) g ( ) g ( ) B ( ) B ( ) +
( j ) (i ) 2 (i ) (i ) ( j ) ( j ) (i )
( j ) (i ) (i ) ( j ) (i ) 2
+ a11
a11 de1 g1 b33 + 4 we 2 a11
a11 de1 g1 g1 g 2 B0 +
2 4
j
11
1
2
(
i
11
i
i 2
0
j
1
1
2 2
2
i
11
2 4
2
)
j 2
i
1
1
1
2
11 11
1
1
(
2
1
2
1
)
2
2
1
0
2
0
(
)
(1) (2 ) (1) (2 ) (1) (2 )
(1) (2 ) (1)
+ 16 w2e 4 + 2304 v 2 w2e 4 a11
a11 de1 de1 B0 B0
+ 144v 2 de1(1)a11
g 2 B0 +
(
2
)
(
2
)
(2 ) (1) (2 ) 2
(1) (1) (1) 2 (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 )
+ 144v 2 de1(2 )a11
g 2 B0
- 1152v 2 we 2 a11
de1 B0 a11 g 2 de1 B0 -
(
(1) (1) (1) (1) (2 ) (2 ) (2 )
- 1152v 2 we 2 a11
g 2 de1 B0 a11 de1 B0
)
2
.
Calculations under formulas (10) have shown, that for each member of some for
deflections usually meet 6 significant resonant frequencies in AFC on each shell. It
speaks that the received oscillatory system «an elastic shell – a viscous
incompressible liquid – the elastic shell» starts to operate as a unit. Besides as well as
for model with pressure difference, in models at influence of vibration probably to
use only the first member of decomposition of numbers (9). On fig. 2 schedules are
resulted for A(1) and A(2 ) .
Рис.2
References:
1.
Kondratov D.V., Mogilevich L.I. Uprugodinamika maschin i priborov na
transporte.– M.: RGOTUPS, 2007, 169 c.
2.
Mogilevich L.I. Dinamika vzaimodeistviya uprugog cilindra so sloem
vyazkoi neszimaemoi gidkosti // Izv. RAN MTT. 2004. № 5. C.179-190.
3.
Mogilevich L.I.,
Popov V.S., Popova A.A. Dinamika vzaimodeistviya
uprugih elementov vibromaschini so sdavlivaemim sloem gidkosti, nahodyashimsy
mezdu nimi // Problemi mashinostroeniya i nadegnosti maschin. 2010. № 4. C.23-32
4.
Goldenweiser A.L., Lidsky V.V., Tovstik P.E. Svobodnie kolebaniya
tonkih uprugih obolochek. M: Nauka. 1978. 383 c.
J21310-031
U.D.C. 664-4/66-963
Zaviryuha M., Pilip V.
ENERGY INDICATORS OF DUAL RETAINING CUTTING OF
CORNSTALKS
Nikolaev National Agrarian University, Nikolaev, Krilova St. 17a, 54000
In this report we describe was suggested method analytical estimation of power
energy indicators process of dual retaining cutting corn stalks in an integrated
shredding machine
Keywords: cutting corn stalks, blade, cutting force optimization
Problem statement. Cutting process is a specific type of shredding and
therefore is depended of the general laws of the destruction of materials under the
action of external forces. But this process has its specific features, that more fully
reflected in the theory of blade cutting. In the theory of shredding cutting two sets of
issues are considered, including the combination of questions of the blade cutting
theory, which study the influence of different factors on the changes of the angle
sharpening blade and energy intensity of shredding process [2].
Lack of grinding of leaves and stems leads to that it can not be used as the
roughage, and also reduces its mineral value as a biofertilizings. In turn, intensive
mechanical impact of working parts of machines for shredding on raw materials can
lead to the loss of native properties of corn stalks and even to their physical and
chemical degradation [3, 4]. The crushed leaves and stems got by means of such
machines have a friable consistency so the ready product has a unsatisfactory
organoleptic parameters. Therefore, while designing machines for corn and silage
should take into account the hybrid origin of plants and its complicated physical and
chemical structure. In this regard, working bodies of the apparatus for shredding
should have the geometric parameters and to provide such regimes of shredding
which do not affect the chemical composition of raw materials and grind it with a
high quality with the necessary degree of dispersion and with minimal energy
consumption.
A significant part of the energy spent on the shredding process is dissipated in
the product and converts into heat provoking intensive blade dulling. So the design of
the devices for shredding should be based on detailed research of processes of cutting
corn stalks taking into account the existing forces and energy parameters.
Purpose of the work. The study is aimed at assessing of analytical parameters
the energy of dual retaining cutting corn stalks, in particular in the integrated device
for shredding the leaves and stalks of corn and identifying areas for further
improvement of the working parts of shredders to reduce energy consumption and
ensuring the high quality of the initial product.
The analysis of references. The theory of blade cutting has been developed by
the scholar V. Goryachkin, it received further development in the works of V.
Zheligovskiy, M. Resnick, and in the works of other scientists.
While evaluating the methods of shredding, and designs of working elements of
the machines for shredding, at first one should take into account the physical and
mechanical properties of the shredded material and choose such ways of influencing
the material when its destruction can be achieved with the least load and energy
consumption.
By the contact line of the blade and the layer of the material high contacting
normal breaking loads appear. In this case, the faces of the wedge called chamfers, do
not create significant effect on the cutting process . Goryachkin V. found that in the
process of blade cutting sliding motion of blade is crucial , as it significantly reduces
the limit of the normal pressure on the material that is necessary for the cutting
process and provides a clean cut. The penetration of a knife in the layer of material in
the presence of lateral movement is explained by the influence of number of factors,
the most important of those is the angle of blade sharpening [6].
From the analysis of the main conditions of the blade cutting the most important
are such parameters mode in shredding as normal pressure of the blade on the
material, the lateral sliding motion of blade and kinematic transformation of angle
sharpening. The angle of blade sharpening is set by the type of crushed material.
According to the data of Efremov M. the increase of cutting forces with blunting the
blade while working with shredding plant with small angles of the working elements
sharpening is less than while working with big angels. While analyzing the
experimental data, it was concluded, that the lower sharpening angle, the less force of
cutting according to the acuteness varies. Choose a sharpening angle at which the
blade is steady enough to fracture, retains its sharpness for a long time and efforts are
minimal.
The analysis of recent research and publications dedicated to the process of
cutting of organic materials [1, 6] shows that most of them are aimed at optimizing
the overall energy performance of the process to the specific conditions of the
apparatus for shredding. However, it is set [2, 3, 4, 5] that the complex process of
cutting of organic materials can be divided into a number of simpler process: the
destruction of the structure of materials, the deformation of the product in the cutting
area, the friction between the instruments and the raw materials, etc. Therefore,
systematical study of the basic elementary components of the cutting process helps to
increase the knowledge in the area of biological resources and to create and improve
the devices for shredding using energysaving technologies and getting high-quality
crushed leaves and stems of maize.
The research is based on an analytical synthesis of knowledge in physics,
physic-chemical mechanics of materials, theory of cutting of organic and synthetic
materials to assess the impact of significant factors on the energy indexes of corn
leaves and stalks cutting.
Results of the work. In the process of shredding the leaves and stalks of corn
the energy from the machine’s drive is constantly brought to its cutting elements.
Thus, in the local area of the interaction of the blade and the product the external
power is supplied, and the system of "blade-stem" cannot be considered as closed
one. In addition, there is a significant energy dissipation adjacent to the cutting area
of the product. It means that in separate system, "blade-stem" the law of the
preservation of energy can not be applied [6]. However, the shredding with blade can
be considered as the formation of cracks, the side surfaces of which are loaded by
stress distribution, which is caused the forces due to the action of the wedge blade to
the stem. For such crack a classical balance and equations impulses can be used [1,
5]. Forces, arising by contact of wedge-like instrument and the product during its
movement do some work and transfer energy to sliced parts of the stalks of corn.
According to the theorem of "live" forces for a full continuous medium inflow
of external energy can be expressed as the sum of the work for the elementary
processes that accompanies the grinding process (Fig. 1) (rupture of structural
connections, deformation, friction, etc.).
Fig. 1. Resistance occurs when the blade penetrates into the stem
While cutting corn stalks 80-85% of total energy expenditure is used for plastic
deformation and 15-20% to overcome the molecular forces or surface energy. The
tension of shredding decreases proportionally to the decrease of preliminary
deformation. Deformations depend on the area of the contact blade (Fig. 2), the
material that is cut, and of angle sliding blade by such equations:
where
0 < b < 45°
k f = 1-
45 < b < 90°
kf =
tgb
,
2
1
,
2tgb
(1)
(2)
k f - coefficient of specific contact area of the blade and the material
being cut.
Fig. 2. Scheme to determine the coefficient of the specific area of contact
blades and stems of maize
From the analysis of equations presented in the monograph of L. Moroz [6]
describing the shredding of solids, as well as ones based on other studies [2, 3, 4, 5],
we can make the conclision that total work needed on shredding corn stalks, is equal
to the sum of the following components:
5
å dE = dE
i =1
where
1
+ dE2 + dE3 + dE4 + dE5 ,
(3)
dE1 - the elementary work to overcome the cohesive forces of the
structural links of corn stalks;
dE2 - the elementary work on the plastic deformation of corn stalks, located in
the area of the blade tool in front of incision;
dE3 - the elementary work of set sidewall cross section and deformation of corn
stalks near these sidewalls;
dE 4 - the elementary work to overcome the frictional forces on the sidewalls of
the tool;
dE5 - the elementary work to provide the crushed particles of corn stalks the
kinetic energy.
To substantiate the critical speed and is minimal cutting forces it is necessary to
determine the modes included into the process of cutting. Assuming that the phase of
cutting is developed in deformable zone and provokes the stress state of stem fibers
and their subsequent destruction, while analyzing this process it is expedient to
distinguish three successive regimes, determining the critical cutting speed [5]:
1. Quasistatic regime, in which the cutting speed is less than the first critical
one. Transition occurs from the destruction of the material in weak cross
sections,where the layer does not coincide with the plane of the cut, to the destruction
of the material in the plane of the cut. So the expense of cutting force increases. Time
of influence of edges of the blade on the raw is inversely proportional to speed.
Therefore while increasing of the distance from center of rotation of the blade, with
same values of the quantity of linear strain, the time of influence on raw materials is
reduced, and also the volume deformation of the material is reduced which really is
inversely proportional to linear speed, or of the radius vector point edge in the
rotational movement of working elements.
2. Impact regime, at which the impact action on the blade product takes place. In
this case, the description of the cutting process, is related to the use of impact theory.
The value of the accelerations of the material layers reaches significant values.
3. Wave regime, in which the cutting speed exceeds the speed of sound
propagation in the material, it occurs emergence of shock waves in comminuted
mass. Tension is transmitted to the material with the speed of sound. When exceeding
the cutting speed by the speed of propagation of the voltage, strain becomes
concentrated and localized in the blade.
While blade cutting the material is destroyed mainly by the pressure of dihedral
angles vertices of the working part of the blade, called the blade. The working
process of cutting edge material consists of two stages: preliminary compaction and
the actual cutting. Let’s represent it as a curve (Fig. 3).
The initial part of the curve shows the compression process called sealing.
Cutting process is characterized by a wavy curve showed by a sequence of elastic (bc,
de) and plasticity (ab, cd) deformations which terminate the destruction of the
material. The compression force, exerting by the side of the blade can disrupt the
process of cutting, is called the critical force.
Fig. 3. Growth of the efforts under shock interaction with the tool of corn
Value of a deflection of the stem will affect the whole work of cutting. With
increasing deflection the time of cutting at a constant speed will increase, and the
impact effect of the blade on the stems is reduced. It negatively affects the operation
of cutting apparatus. Therefore It was proposed the structure of cutting pair including
a blade and two of the countercut elements tested in the integrated device for the
shredding. Experimentally obtained the values of the gap between the cutting and the
countercut elements were obtained [8]:
0,03 × d ³ e ³ 0,1 × d ,
where
d
(4)
- the average diameter of the stem.
In this case, we reach the desired quality of the shredding of leaves and corn
stalks with a minimum speed of cutting and work on deflection and cutting the stalks
of corn.
Analyzing the obtained experimental data and unite them with the energy basis
of the cutting process to obtain an expression for the determination of the overall
work of cutting double retaining:
2
ì
hcm
t l E × k f × tga ×
ï5
d × l × s пр × x0
h × V × dt × dl +
× (p × sin j + cos j ) + ò ò
ïå dE =
piз
1
4
ö
æ
ï i =1
0 0
ç1 - g ÷ × l
ï
è e ø
ï
ï
+ òòò P cm × sin a + P об × сosa × x ij × dt × dV +
ï
V
ï
í
ö
æ
÷
ç
ï
3
E × k f × m × d × hcm
hcm ÷
ç
ï
× V різ × dt × ds1 +
+ р0
+ òò f
ç
ï
1 ö
cos b ÷
æ
S1
÷
ç 2 × h × ç1 - g ÷
ï
è e ø
ø
è
ï
ï
m × V02
ö
æ
b
ï
÷÷ × cos a × V різ × dt × ds 2 +
,
+ òò f × çç N + р 0
sin
cos
2
a
b
×
ïî
ø
è
S2
(5)
The conclusions. While cutting the leaves and stems the cutting tool does the
(
)
work associated with the deformation of stems, of its structural samples gap and all
these elementary processes are accompanied by the friction of the product over the
surfaces of the instruments.
So to optimize the work of shredding apparatus, where instruments carry out
double retaining while cutting stems maize, the volume of the energy for cutting it is
necessary to analyze the influence of kinetic and geometrical parameters on each
component of the tool and to implement the optimization of the total cost of work or
energy, taking into account the quality of shredding indicators.
References:
1. Vinnikova L. Theory and Practice of meat processing / L. Vinnikova. Ismail: SMNL, 2000. - 172 p.
2. Zaviryuha M. Investigation of cutting integrated shredding device / M.
Zaviryuha // Problems of designing, manufacturing and operation of agricultural
machinery, Kirovograd National Technical University. - Kirovograd, 2011.
3. Zaviryuha M. The experimental researches for the explanation geometric
parameters of the integrated shredding device / M. Zaviryuha // Agricultural
Machinery. Coll. Science. century. Vol. 22. - Luck: Eds-ed. Department LNTU,
2012. - 280 p.
4. Zaviryuha M. Mathematical model of cutting corn stalks / M. Zaviryuha //
Scientific Bulletin of Lugansk National Agrarian University. Series: Engineering. Lugansk: Publishing LNAU, 2012. Number 35. - 285 p.
5. Zaviryuha M. Theoretical studies of integrated shredding device / M.
Zaviryuha // Bulletin of the Lviv National Agrarian University. Series: Engineering. Lviv: Publishing LNAU, 2012. - 341 p.
6. Moroz L. Mechanics and physics of deformation and fracture of materials / L.
Moroz. - L: Mechanical Engineering, 1984. - 224.
7. Parton V. Mechanics elastic plastic the destruction / V. Parton, E. Morozov. Moscow: Nauka, 1985. - 504 p.
8. Pat. 75506 Ukraine, IPC A 01 D 45/00 Method of cutting plants with thick
stems / O. Bondarenko, M. Zaviryuha - № u 2012 03634, appl. 04/25/2012, publ.
10.12.2012, Bull. Number 23.
J21310-032
UDC 631.355.072/1
Havrysh V.I., Rakul O.I.
MATHEMATICAL MODELING OF LONGITUDINAL DEFORMATION
WAVES DISTRIBUTION IN CORN’S EAR DURING ITS PICKING
Mykolaiv National Agrarian University, Mykolaiv, Krylovа St. 17a, 54038
Summary. The mathematical model of the propagation of longitudinal waves of
deformation in the middle ear of corn has been developed. On the foundation of the
above model the further directions of research have been appointed.
Keywords: corn, corn picking, mathematical model, waves deformation, rodwaveguide.
Introduction. Harvest is the most expensive field activity in the production of
corn for grain. Combines incorporate the ear picking, husking and cleaning process in
one machine. One of the most important processes is corn picking. It has a great
influence on corn quality, yield and growers’ profits. That is why a corn picker is one
of the main mechanisms of any corn combine harvester.
A working process of all corn picking devices constitutes in stretching stalk until
its destruction. But very high speed and great efforts of picking results to departure of
ears outside of a reaper. As a result yield decreases [3]. Therefore the development of
new machines for corn picking is actual scientific problem and its solution demands
analytical research.
Analysis of last researches. The deep theoretical studies of this matter have been
done by famous scientists: P.P. Karpusha, L.I. Anisimova, N.V. Tudela,
K.V. Shatilov, M.I. Konopeltsev, K.I. Shmat, E.V. Truflyak and so on. But the results
do not provide the necessary data to solve many problems. They are mainly devoted
to theoretical ground of pulling stalks and corn picking on devices of picker type,
calculation capacity and productivity of harvesters and do not cover the issues of
technological process of work, which have become actual.
The aim is to develop a mathematical model of the distribution of longitudinal
strain waves in the middle ear of corn.
Results of research. We can consider this process in according to analogous of
longitudinal strain waves distribution in rods and wire under the impulse load. Thus
the core of the mechanics is solid, transverse dimensions are much smaller than the
longitudinal. The rod may be subjected to strain as compression and stretching and
rope may be subjected to strain just as stretching. The rod and wire are waveguides.
In our case, the rod-waveguide is the ear of corn, the wire-waveguide is stalk.
Distribution of longitudinal strain waves in waveguides is described by the
known wave equation [1]
rS ( z )
¶ 2u
¶t
2
=
¶æ
¶u ö
ç ES ( z ) ÷ ,
¶z è
¶z ø
(1)
where z – longitudinal coordinate (0 ≤ z ≤ l); l – length of the waveguide; t –
time (0 ≤ t < ∞); u – a function of longitudinal strain; Е – modulus of elasticity of the
1st kind (Young's modulus) of the waveguide material; ρ – density of the waveguide
material; S – cross-sectional area of the waveguide.
The function u = u(z, t) is the solution of the wave equation (1).
We believe that the waveguide material is homogeneous, and its physical
parameters (E, ρ) are constant. The case of inhomogeneous waveguide will be
discussed in the next section. Taking into account the accepted assumptions equation
(1) can be written in the form
2
¶S ( z ) ö ¶u ù
2 é¶ u æ 1
=
а
+
×
ç
÷ ú;
ê
0
2
(
)
S
z
¶
z
¶t 2
¶
z
è
ø ¶z û
ë
¶ 2u
а02 =
E
r
,
(2)
(3)
where а0 – the speed of propagation of deformation along the waveguide.
If S(z) = S0 = const, then ∂S/∂z = 0 and equation (2) takes the form
¶ 2u
¶ 2u
¶t
¶z 2
= а02
2
.
(4)
In a more general case a change of section S(z) in length is displayed as (Fig. 1)
m
æ z ö
S ( z ) = S 0 çç ÷÷ , m = 0; 1; 2,
è z0 ø
where S(z0)= S0.
(5)
Fig. 1. Longitudinal sections of rods-waveguides:
a – cylindrical; b – paraboloid of rotation; с – conical
If m = 0 we have a cylindrical rod-waveguide, with m = 1 – rod-waveguide in
the form of a paraboloid, and when m = 2 – conical rod-waveguide.
At the same time we believe that the cross-section in all cases is a circle. Note
that the objective function S(z) in another form causes great difficulty in solving
equation (2) at least makes it impossible to obtain an analytical form solutions.
If the law of section S(z) changes has the form (5), then
1 ¶S ( z ) m
= , and the
S ( z ) ¶z
z
wave equation (2) takes the form
m ¶u 1 ¶ 2u
= 0.
+ ×
¶z 2 z ¶z а02 ¶t 2
¶ 2u
(6)
This linear wave equation, that according to the adopted value of the number m,
can take the following kinds:
when m = 0
¶ 2u
¶z 2
-
1 ¶ 2u
а02 ¶t 2
= 0;
(7)
when m = 1
1 ¶u 1 ¶ 2u
= 0;
+ ×
¶z 2 z ¶z а02 ¶t 2
¶ 2u
(8)
when m = 2
¶ 2u
¶z 2
+
2 ¶u 1 ¶ 2u
×
= 0.
z ¶z а02 ¶t 2
(9)
The general solution of equation (7) has the form
æ
æ
z ö
z ö
u ( z , t ) = f1 çç t - ÷÷ + f 2 çç t + ÷÷ ,
a0 ø
è a0 ø
è
(10)
where f1, f2 – unknown functions of wave arguments
t10 = t -
z
;
a0
(11)
t 20 = t +
z
.
a0
(12)
Wave argument (11) corresponds to waves moving in the positive direction
along 0z. Wave argument (12) corresponds to waves moving in a negative direction
( )
along 0z. That function f1 t10 describes a wave moving towards growth z, and the
( )
function f 2 t 20 describes a wave moving towards decreasing z.
The general solution of the wave equation (9) for conical rod (m = 2) has the
form
u(z, t ) =
[ ( )
( )]
1
f1 t10 + f 2 t 20 .
z
(13)
Equations (10) and (13) are sufficiently simple to interpret.
The general solution of equation (8) for m = 1 can be obtained by operating
section (Laplace transform)
u
2
¥
( p, z ) = ò e - pt u (z, t )dt ,
(14)
0
where р – parameter of transformation (complex value); u2 – transformants
transformation; u(z,t) – function-original.
As a result of the transformation (14) equation (8) in the images (transformants)
is displayed as:
¶ 2u 2
¶z 2
2
1 ¶u 2 æ р ö 2
+ ×
- ç ÷ u = 0.
z ¶z çè а0 ÷ø
(15)
Equation (15) is an ordinary differential equation (Bessel equation) solution
which has the form:
æ pz ö
æ pz ö
u 2 ( p, z ) = c1 × I 0 çç ÷÷ + c2 × K 0 çç ÷÷ ,
è a0 ø
è a0 ø
(16)
where с1, с2 – constant integration; І0, К0 – Bessel functions of the first and the
second kinds of order zero.
To obtain solutions for the original u = u(t,z) it is necessary to perform inverse
Laplace transform (16).
Complete mathematical formulation of the problem of determining the wave
field strain must include the wave equation (2), the initial and boundary
conditions [2].
The initial conditions describe the state of the rod (waveguide) that stresseddeformed at the initial time (t = 0). Usually the initial conditions are displayed as
zero, then
t = 0; u (0, z ) = 0;
¶u (0, z )
= 0.
¶t
(17)
Boundary conditions describe the waveguide interaction with the environment at
the ends z = 0 and z = l. Thus, if the rod is rigidly mounted on the end, then
z = 0; u (0, t ) = 0 .
(18)
If the rod-end of the waveguide at z = l is free, then
z = l;
¶u (l , t )
= 0.
¶z
(19)
If the rod is loaded, then
z = l;
¶u (l , t )
= F (t ) .
¶z
(20)
Satisfying general solution of the wave equation u = u(z,t) by initial and
boundary conditions we find solution of the initial-boundary value problem for the
wave equation.
If the function u = u(z,t) is known, then efforts can be found in the rodswaveguide
T ( z , t ) = ES
¶u ( z , t )
,
¶z
(21)
Т (z, t )
.
S
(22)
or tension
s (z, t ) =
Conclusions.Mathematical model of longitudinal deformation waves in the
middle of ear of corn during its picking has been obtained as a result. The direction of
further researches is to model of technological process of corn picking using the
obtained mathematical model.
References.
1. Пановко Я.Г. Основы прикладной теории колебаний и удара / Я.Г.
Пановко. – Л.: Машиностроение, 1976. – 320 с.
2. Сагомонян А.Я. Волны напряжения в силовых средах. Учебное
пособие / А.Я. Сагомонян. – М.: Изд.-во Моск. ун-та, 1985. – 416 с.
3. Шатилов К.В. Кукурузоуборочные машины / К.В. Шатилов, Б.Д.
Козачок, А.П. Орехов и др. – М.: Машиностроение, 1981. – 224 с.
J21310-033
UDC 631.354
Varnakov D.V.
METHODS OF SELECTING THE DIAGNOSTIC PARAMETERS IN
DETERMINING PARAMETRIC RELIABILITY OF THE ENGINES OF
MOTOR VEHICLES
Ulyanovsk State University,
Ulyanovsk, Leo Tolstoy 42, 432048
The paper deals with parametric estimation of reliability, the reliability of
predicting parametric complex parameter and its influence on the properties of the
tow vehicle speed, its dynamic characteristics. The method of assessing the impact of
an integrated indicator on the dynamic characteristics of vehicles.
Key words: parametric reliability, traction and speed properties of the vehicle,
vehicle dynamics, an integrated indicator of fuel quality.
In modern vehicles, the engine is the most complex and expensive element,
efficiency of which affects the by its dynamic response. The effectiveness of the
vehicle is characterized matched traction-speed properties of the design values, which
evaluates performance metrics. Each indicator provides a quantitative assessment of
certain properties in assigned traffic conditions, and their totality - the technical level
of the vehicle. Among the many indicators can highlight the dynamic factor.
Dynamic factor characterize the traction-speed characteristics of the motor vehicle
transport. The indicators can be determined during testing the vehicle or by
simulation of on a computer. The analysis of the efficiency of the engine can be
carried out at a test-bench by monitoring key parameters of work.
Of motor parameters are: the engine speed, torque, while fuel consumption dose,
time and fuel consumption, torque.
Analyzing the components, it was found that the greatest relationship in which
the power and fuel consumption (the coefficient and the coefficient of 0.74263
0.63418 respectively, of a unit describing the strength of the link principal
components and baseline). [2]
Found that the accuracy of the evaluation of the effectiveness of the engine is
not impaired if the number of estimates from 7 (8) to 2 (3).
Based on this study suggested a complex criterion for the quality of the engine:
[2]
n
K S = å m i K pi
i =1
(1)
m i - normalized weighting factor i parameter;
K pi - criterion of the quality of the engine i parameter;
n - number of parameters used in the estimation.
Using complex criterion efficiency of the engine is possible to assess the
performance of the vehicle. The complex technical systems are characterized by a
gradual loss of efficiency. To determine the failure of complex technical system must
set allowable limit inefficiencies. Then the state of its output values for this limit can
be considered parametric failure.
The values of the conditions under which the technical system goes from a state
of operability in inoperable condition is the boundary of the field of operability.
These boundaries are determined by the state of the internal parameters, the quality of
the technical components of the system elements.
Comparing the current state of the parameter with the field of operability can
exercise control over the elements of the technical system in process operation.
Thus, it is possible to carry out quantitative assessments of the internal and
external factors on the generic parameter. Further, the stock performance (reliability)
refers to the deviation of the generalized parameter of the nominal values of the
boundaries of efficiency, which leads to the (transition The motor inefficient
functioning) parametric failure.
Prediction of parametric of
engine failures can be done using statistical
regularities of reserve for reliability that characterizes the generic parameter changes
over time.
Prediction of parametric of failure by the complex parameter can be regarded as
stable state of the technical system for limiting modes.
Stable state of the technical system for limiting modes, described by the
inequality [1]:
j1 (a 0 , h1 , h 2 ) £ С1 или ³ С1 ü
ý
j 2 (a 0 , h1 , h 2 ) £ С 2 или ³ С 2 þ
(2)
а0, η - the internal and external parameters of the engine;
С1 , С2 - сritical (limiting) point on the boundary of stability, corresponding to
the transition from stable to unstable parts of the work on each of the parameters
under consideration.
Using a functional diagram of a technical system or from the boundary tests
revealed the "dangerous" trend of the parameters. By "dangerous" means such areas,
which lead to the exit of the engine in the region of unstable operation.
In (2) being calculated deflection with signs corresponding to the "dangerous"
areas. The inequalities (2) take the form [1]:
j1 [a 0 , (h1 ± Dh1 ), (h 2 ± Dh 2 )] = С1 , ü
ý
j 2 [a 0 , (h1 ± Dh1 ), (h 2 ± Dh 2 )] = С 2 .þ
(3)
Solving the system (2), we obtain values η1 ± Δη1 and η2 ± Δη2, ensuring stable
operation of the engine when you change the same treatment in the areas considered
inefficient functioning of the appropriate size and Δη1 , Δη2 at time t0.
For known predictors а = f(t) is possible to determine the values of the internal
parameters for a certain point in time to build the same area efficiency for them.
In all cases, setting the normal (nominal) value of the mode parameters (Δη=0),
return operation points in the initial position of any Вн(ηн). The minimum distance
between the initial values of the operating points and critical values in the direction of
the "dangerous" direction and determines reserve parametric engine reliability. If the
determination of the direction is difficult, as reserve parametric reliability make the
minimum distance between the point of any Вн(ηн) and the boundary of sufficient
reliability.
As an complex indicator characterizing the properties of traction-speed can
select a dynamic factor. Dynamic factor - a dimensionless quantity that characterizes
the potential of the car for overcome road resistance or acceleration. Dynamic factor
characterizes the traction and high-speed characteristics of the car.
In general, the equation of motion of the vehicle can be written [3].
М Д итрh тр / rк0 - k w АЛn 2
mа g
=y +
d ПМ dv
×
,
g dt
(4)
МД – engine torque; uтр – transmission ratio; ηтр – the efficiency of the
transmission; rк0 – rolling radius of the wheel with the Mk = 0 (driven wheel); kw –
coefficient of air resistance; Ал – vehicle frontal area; v – vehicle speed; mа – mass of
the vehicle; ψ – total road resistance coefficient; δПМ – coefficient of the reduced
mass of the vehicle; g – acceleration of gravity;
dv
– acceleration of the vehicle.
dt
The left-hand side of equation (4) is the dynamic factor car, can be represented
by the equation:
D=
М Д и трh тр / rк0 - к w АЛn 2
mа g
,
(5)
Graphic representation of the dynamic factor depending on the speed of D = f(v)
in all gears transmission is called the dynamic characteristics of the car (Figure 1).
- the dynamic factor;
----
- border dynamic factor.
Figure 1 - The vehicle dynamics
Dynamic factor D depends on the design parameters of the vehicle and its mode
of motion.
Using the method of forecasting sufficient reliability for the complex parameter
can indirectly evaluate and model the vehicle dynamics. Consequently, the predicted
value of the dynamic factor will be within the boundaries of the dynamic factor, and
to go beyond them in the event of a parametric failure.
Conclusions:
1. The use of factor analysis allows us to indicators that make the greatest
contribution to the variation of a set of attributes (94%), while maintaining sufficient
accuracy assessment.
2. Formation of stable operation depends on the technical condition of the
engine, which can be represented as a complex parameter.
3. The boundaries of sufficient reliability of the engine will determine the
boundaries of the dynamic factor (probability of being in it), and to assess the
reliability of the engine parameter can model the state of dynamic factor of the car, as
a measure of its efficiency.
References:
1. Alexandrоvskay L.N., Afanasiev A.P., Lisov A.A., Modern methods of
ensuring reliability of complex technical systems. - Moscow: Logos, 2001. – 208 p.
2. Varnakov V.V., Pogodin A.V., Varnakov D.V. Evaluation of the quality of
repair of engines for certification of the results of break-in tests. Repair,
rehabilitation, modernization, № 8/2005. Moscow, pp. 19…22.
3. Tarasik V.P., Brench M.P. "The theory of cars and engines" Minsk.: LLC
"New Knowledge", 2004, - 400 p.
4. Shishonok N.A., Repkin V.F., Barvinsky L.L. Foundations of reliability and
maintenance of electronic equipment. - Moscow: Soviet Radio, 1964. - 551 p.
J21310-034
UDC 517.977
Semichevskaya N.P., Kulchanovsky S.A.
ROBUST CONTROL OF NONLINEAR NONSTATIONARY OBJECT
WITH STATIONARY OBSERVER AND EXPLICIT-IMPLICIT
REFERENCE MODEL
Amur State University
Abstract
This article is focused on synthesis of the robust algorithms for control systems
with a priori uncertain nonstable nonlinear scalar object with stationary observer of
Luenburger and low inertial explicit-implicit reference model.
Keywords: Robust algorithms; Stationary observer; Nonlinear scalar objects;
model.
1. INTRODUCTION
Design of robust and/or adaptive systems, where proposed object behavior is
formed by using эталонной model, considers the problem of getting information
about values of the object, that can’t be measured. For instance one of the methods to
solve this problem is using of stationary observer, that allows us to valuate controlled
object conditions values.
The main goal of this paper is to discover a new method, of synthesis control
systems with the scalar nonlinear object using stationary observer with the full order
and fast explicit-implicit reference model.
2. PROBLEM FORMALIZATION
Let’s consider a system with the nonlinear controlled object in the conditions a
prior parametrical indetermination. Dynamic of this object in space of conditions is
described by following equations:
T
dx (t )
,
,
,
= Ax ( x, t ) + bu (t ) + f x (t ) y (t ) = L x1 (t ) x Î X
dt
(1)
where
x(t ) Î R n –
u (t ) Î R
– control income;
y (t ) Î R –
outcome;
influence, x – a set of undefined parameters from some known
f xT (t ) = éêë0 0...0 f n (t ) úûù –
set X ,
conditions vector;
f n (t ) £ f 02 = const ; b T = éêë0 0...0 1ùúû .
Let’s consider that nonlinear vector function Ax ( x, t ) is given as:
Ax ( x, t ) = A(x ) x(t ) + bd x ( x1 (t )), A(x ) = A = AM + bc 0T (x ), c 0 (x ) = c 0 ,
ax
d x ( x1 (t )) = x1 sign( x1 (t )) ,
(2)
where AМ – proposed matrix; A, c0 – stationary matrix and stationary vector;
0 < ax £ 1.
Required dynamic low inertial explicit-implicit reference model (high-speed
model) is given in equations:
dz M (t )
= a0 z M (t ) + a0 r (t ) , y M (t ) = z M (t ) ,
dt
where
z M (t ) , y M (t ) , r (t )
(3)
– is standard value, outcome and income value; a0 = const
> 0, a0 >>1 – is rather big value. According to (4), (5) might be mathematical model
transformed in equal form:
T
dxM (t )
= AM xM (t ) + br (t ) , n M (t ) = y M (t ) = g xM (t ) ,
dt
where
xM (t ) Î R n –
(4)
is standard conditions vector and matrix AМ must be chosen in
the such form that transform function of standard model is following:
WБЭМ ( s ) = g T ( sE - AM ) -1 b =
g T ( sE - AM ) + b
a
= 0
det( sE - AM )
s + a0
For control system (1), (2), (4) let’s show equal mathematical form and term
error
e(t ) = xM (t ) - x(t ) :
de(t )
dt
T
T
= AM e(t ) + bm (t ) , n (t ) = g e(t ) = g ( xM (t ) - x(t )),
m (t ) = r (t ) - u (t ) - c 0T x(t ) - d ( x1 (t )) - f n (t ).
(5)
Object conditions vector can’t be measured, except x1(t) value, we can recover
all values of the vector x(t). Estimation of the vector is made by observing current
outcome changes. For this purpose we use Luenburger observer with full order
according to (1), (2), (3).
T
dx (t )
= A* x (t ) + bu (t ) + Ny (е) , y (t ) = L x (t ) = x1 (t ) ,
dt
n (t ) = g T x (t ) ,
where
x (t ) Î R n
(6)
– observer’s conditions vector;
y (t )
– observer’s outcome;
n (t ) –
general observer’s outcome; A* = (AM - NLT) – observer’s condition matrix,
eigenvalues of the matrix are calculated from conformable values of vector N; values
of vector N are calculated using requirement of equality polynomial coefficients
det( sEn - A* ) и det( sEn - AM + NLT ) ; g = gK
mode of values n (t ) and n
M
-1
, K – is a coefficient of the coordination in stable
(t ) .
Problem definition. It’s required, for the system (5), (6), that to function in the
conditions of a priory indeterminate parameters
define explicit control law view
u(t ) = u( r (t ), x (t )) ,
x ÎX
and initial conditions x(0), to
in such way , that limit correlations
hold true
lim
x M (t ) - x (t ) @ lim
x M (t ) - x (t ) £ d x2 ,
t ®¥
t ®¥
(7)
lim y M (t ) - y (t ) @ lim
y M (t ) - y (t ) £ d y2 .
t ®¥
(8)
t ®¥
Basing on main synthesis steps, using gyperstability test, it was created
nonlinear robust control law:
u (t ) = ( h0 x T (t ) x (t ) + h2 r 2 (t ))n (t ) + h3n (t ) .
(9)
3. NUMERICAL EXAMPLE
It’s considered robust system (1), (2), (3), (6), (9) with following vales of control
object parameters:
1
0 ö
æ 0
ç
÷ , g T = éêë100, 20, 1ùúû , d ( x ) = sign( x (t )) x , 0 < q £ 1 .
A=ç 0
0
1 ÷
ç - 2.5 0.5 - 8.5 ÷
ø
è
q
1
1
1
Imitation modeling is realized with income r(t) and influense (noise) f(t):
r(t)=2/3|0.5 – cos(0.06pt)|,
f(t) = 0.3 cos(0.03t), ||f(t)||<0.5.
Observer’s parameters where calculated for value a0=10:
1
0 ö
æ 0
÷,
ç
AM = ç 0
0
1 ÷
ç - 1000 - 300 - 30 ÷
ø
è
120 ö
÷
ç 3600 ÷
÷
ç
è - 20000 ø
N = æç
Robust control law coefficients have following values: h1=25, h2=50, h3=50.
Dynamic of changes of control system (1), (2), (3), (6), (9) parameters is shown
on the pictures.
Fig.1. Controled object outcome standard model zM(t) and observer
Fig.2. Difference error.
Fig.3. Control income.
z (t ) .
4. CONCLUSIONS
Method discovered in this paper is used for building robust control systems with
scalar nonlinear object, with fast standard model and stationary observer with full
order. This method allows to create high-quality automatic control systems, with the
fast stabilization, and reducing difference error.
REFERENCES
1.Luenburger, D. (1966). Observers for multivariable systems. IEEE
2.Transactions on Automatic Control, 11, 190–197.
3.O’Reilly, J. (1983). Observer for linear systems. New York: Academic Press.
4.Park, J., Shin D., Chung T. (2002) Dynamic observers for linear time-invariant
systems. Automatica 38, 1083–1087.
J21310-035
UDC 517.958:621.225:621.454
Plaksina I.V., Kondratov D.V.
HYDROELASTICITY GEOMETRICALLY IRREGULAR SHELL
CONTAINING THE STRATUM OF THE VISCOUS LIQUID AND
ABSOLUTELY RIGID CYLINDER, IN CONDITIONS OF HARMONIC
PRESSURE
Stolypin Volga Region Institute,
Russia, Saratov, Sobornaya, 23/25, 410031
The mathematical model of system representing of a tube ring profile formed by
two surfaces of coaxial cylindrical shells interacting with viscous incompressible
liquid is considered. The external environment is vectorially irregular, and internal absolutely rigid cylinder. It is executed at a support of the grant of President MD1025.2012.8 and the grant of the RFBR 12-01-31154-mol_a.
Keywords: geometrically irregular shell, hydroelasticity, viscous incompressible
liquid, coaxial shells.
The composition of many modern machines and assemblies includes thin-walled
members. Application of thin-walled constructions allows to diminish total weight of
a construction, and as use of a liquid serves for a support of a stability to exposures.
Such constructions consisting of coaxial thin-walled constructions and a viscous
liquid between them, are widely applied in modern railway, automobile and an air
transportation, and also space-rocket systems [1-4].
However use of thin-walled members demands the account of agency of elastic
compliance of constructions with the simultaneous account of agency of a liquid that
represents, even in the elementary statements, extremely complicated and labourconsuming problem. Therefore the problem of creation and research of models of
such mechanical systems which are extreme coming nearer the original, searching of
suitable notations of the resolving differential equations and the methods of their
integration comprehensible to applications to a practice, and allowing to examine
dynamic processes in the given systems is actual. Besides necessity of construction of
such mathematical models it is confirmed by practice.
Let's observe the mechanical system consisting from coaxial elastic of an
outermost shell and absolutely rigid interior cylinder and viscous incompressible
liquid between them. The fluid displaces under affecting of harmonically varying
pressure on the ends of mechanical system. We shall assume, that the exterior elastic
shell is geometrically irregular freely supported by the ends. The system is thermally
stabilized.
The mathematical model of observed mechanical system represents the linked
set of equations which is powering up nonlinear partial equations of the NavierStokes and a continuity equation, partial equations for the exposition of dynamics of
the external elastic ribbed cylindrical shell, gained proceeding from hypotheses
Kirchhoff-Love with use of a variational principle of Hamilton, with matching
boundary conditions. For the exposition geometrically irregular surfaces of a shell
generalized functions Heaviside are used.
The gained linked problem of hydroelasticity is solved in dimensionless
variables a perturbation method after two small parameters describing a relative
breadth of a stratum of a liquid and a relative bending flexure external elastic
geometrically an irregular shell in the conjecture of the harmonic law of a differential
head in system. Such approach is widely applied in Mogilevicha L.I., Popova V.S.'s
operations [2-5]. Use of the specified approach allows to linearize a problem of
hydrodynamics which is solved in the conjecture, that elastic migrations of an
outermost shell are unknown. Expressions for components of a velocity and a
hydrodynamic pressure of a liquid are as a result gained.
The shape of migrations elastic geometrically an irregular cylindrical shell we
shall choose in the form of trigonometrical of some on the space coordinate with the
factors, being harmonic functions on a time. Substituting expressions for components
of a velocity and a hydrodynamic pressure of a liquid in dynamic equation of a shell,
we shall gain system integro-differential the equations for which solution we shall
search method Bubnov-Galerkin in the first, second and third oncoming. As a result
we shall gain expressions for a bending flexure of an external ribbed shell both
amplitude and phase frequency characteristics of a bending flexure.
Calculations have displayed, that for research of behaviour of a bending flexure
it is enough to use method Bubnov-Galerkin as a first approximation as the
subsequent oncomings add additional peaks AFC which there are less than peaks
discovered as a first approximation.
The literature:
1. Bashta T.M. Machine-building hydraulics. - M.: Mashgiz, 1963. - 696 p.
2. Mogilevich L.I., Popov V.S. Applied hydroelasticity in mechanical
engineering and instrument making - Saratov: SSAU, 2003. - 156 p.
3. Mogilevich L.I., Popov V.S., Popova A.A. Oscillation of a cylinder sleeve of
the explosive motor with a water cooling under act of shock loadings from piston
group // Problems of engineering industry and reliability of machines. 2008. №3. P.100-106.
4. Mogilevich L.I., Popova A.A., Popov V.S. Dynamics’s priests of interaction
of an elastic cylindrical shell with a laminar layer of a liquid inside of it with
reference to a pipe-line transport // the Science and Technics of transport. 2007. №2. P. 64-72.
5. Kondratov D.V., Kondratova J.N., Mogilevich L.I. The pulsing laminar flow
of a liquid on an elastic cylindrical tube of ring cross-section // Informations of the
Russian Academy of Science. Mechanics of a liquid and gas. - 2009. - №4. - P. 6072.
J21310-036
UDC 514.8
Boiko S.M., Honcharov V.V.
GEOMETRY OF LUNAR TERMINATOR
Institute of Chemical Technology, V.Dal’ East-Ukrainian National University
(Rubezhnoe)
Since ancient times people paid special attention to the satellite of our planet –
the Moon. It isn't surprising, after all it can be observed even with the naked eye.
Our satellite study started from the second century AD. Already then, scientists
have studied the motion of the moon in the starry sky and determined its size and
distance from Earth. Of course, it was not quite accurately, because at that time there
was no special equipment. With the advent of telescopes, scientists began to study in
more detail the surface of the satellite, to mark the craters and pits. The amount of our
knowledge is incomparably increased from the beginning of the space age.
Composition of the lunar soil became known and scientists have got its samples,
made a map of the downside. A September 13, 1959 Soviet spacecraft "Luna-2" first
time reached the Moon. And in 1969 "Apollo 1" landed safely and astronaut Neil
Armstrong became the first man who set foot on the lunar surface. Despite the fact
that the lunar program was soon phased out, it was able to deliver 380 kg of rock and
spend a lot of testing and research.
And, although the Moon accompanies mankind from its origin and influences on
many processes on Earth (for example, the tides), we know very little about it.
Among questions which can be addressed to the satellite of our planet, there is
one which can stymied many people. Most likely, everyone noticed how the Moon
cyclically changes the visible form (fig. 1). In fact, the form of our satellite doesn't
change. Curvature of terminator (the line dividing shined and unlit speak rapidly the
Moon) changes only.
There is a question: with what it is connected? Many won't see anything
surprisingly in it and will answer that it is shadow from our planet (fig. 2). Well, but
how to be with a phase when the Moon is halved exactly and without any curvatures
(fig. 3 a)? Either our planet at some point is taking hexagon shape (fig. 3 b), or it's
not a shadow.
Fig. 1. The various phases of the Moon
Fig. 2. The shadow of the Earth
To understand this situation it is necessary to resort to the methods of
geometrical optics and engineering graphics [1, 2].
It is well-known that the Moon, being the satellite of our planet, rotates together
with it round the Sun. Changing the lunar phase is due to changes in the conditions of
lighting of a sphere of the Moon by the Sun at its motion on an orbit.
Also the important role is played by the angle of observation for its terminator.
Assuming that the Moon is an perfect spherical body and taking into account the
considerable distance from it to the Sun, it is possible to consider that light, falling on
its surface, is a stream of parallel beams (fig. 4).
а
б
Fig. 3. The division of the Moon half-and-half
Fig. 4. Moon's position when straight-line terminator is observed
In that case, terminator, which we see from the Earth, is the line of intersection
of the sphere and the light cylinder with cross-section diameter equal to the diameter
of the Moon.
With change of a relative positioning of the Earth, the Moon and the Sun the
angle of observation for the terminator of our satellite is changed that causes change
the shape of visible part of the Moon and also leads to emergence of "crescent ". The
illuminated side of the Moon always points toward the Sun, even if it is hidden
behind the horizon (fig. 5).
Fig. 5. Moon's "crescent"
At the point when the angular distance of the Moon from the Sun is 90°, we see
a straight line - the division of the satellite in half.
Based on this model, we get a complete picture of the cyclic changes the
outlines of our planet's satellite (fig. 6).
Fig. 6. The cycle of the changes of the lunar outlines
Thus, there is nothing mystical in changes of outlines of immemorial satellite of
the Earth. Knowledge of descriptive geometry from the section about the intersection
curved surfaces give a clear answer to a question about a different form of the lunar
month. Terminator's form is a circle, which is the result of the section of the light
cylinder. Varying the degree of its curvature is determined by the angle observing it.
Computer visualization, which is shown in this paper, illustrates these conclusions. In
this paper, on the example of the lunar terminator, it is shown that knowledge of
descriptive geometry, engineering and computer graphics help to solve problems, not
only the nature of applied engineering, but also the theoretical trend, in particular,
problems of optics, astronomy, etc.
References
1. Фролов С.А. Начертательная геометрия: учебник для втузов. – М.:
Машиностроении. 1983, - 240 с.
2. Винокурова Г.Ф., Кононова О.К. Наглядные изображения: учебное
пособие. – Томск: Изд-во Томского политехнического университета. 2007, 119 с.
J21310-037
UDC 543.275.1.08
Bilynsky Y.Y., Ionina K.Y.
THE CONTROL OF NATURAL GAS DEW POINT TEMPERATURES
BY WATER AND HYDROCARBONS
The device for controlling natural gas dew points by water and hydrocarbons
are described in the article.
Key words: dew point, humidity, natural gas, hydrocarbons, fiber.
Natural gas is a very important energy source and a row material for the
chemical industry. There are many demands for its quality which are stipulated by
international agreements. The most important index of goodness for natural gas
which specifies the conditions of monophase transportation is moisture content that is
indirectly evaluated by dew point temperatures by water and hydrocarbons [1, 2].
Thereby the instruments for measuring moisture content develop actively. These
instruments have to increase the accuracy of moisture detection in gas during
transporting and storage in order to draw a conclusion on the necessity of drying.
However, the problem of measuring lies in the possibility of overlapping of gas dew
point temperatures ranges by water and hydrocarbons. That is, if there are pentanes
plus in gas which can condensate before water vapour, this will cause the measuring
of dew point temperature by hydrocarbons or the temperature between hydrocarbons
and water. That's why a problem arises for the high-precision measurement of natural
gas moisture content to establish one-to-one mapping of received dew point
temperature to the condensated gas component, or to use two individual canals for a
separate measurement of two dew points. Thereby a task appears to develop such a
device for gas humidity control which can take into account (estimate) the presence
of pentanes plus, starting from butane and higher [3].
The two-channel measuring instrument of natural gas dew points by water and
hydrocarbons (fig. 1) is proposed in this work. The sensing element of this instrument
is a hollow fiber 3 fabricated in a form of cuvette with cone-shaped butts of beaming
input-output. Besides, the fiber part for controlling water and hydrocarbons has
length distributed interlaced mirrored and matt areas, respectively. A few
thermoelectric coolers 6 were used for cooling, and a few temperature sensors 7 were
used for temperature measurement. First channel (1, 5) is intended for measuring dew
point temperature by water, and second (2, 4) – for measuring dew point temperature
by hydrocarbons, particularly pentanes plus.
Fig. 1. Measuring instrument of natural gas dew points by water and
hydrocarbons
Dew point temperature by water is registered at the moment of a sharp stepdown of light flow on the photo detector 5 after condensation on the surfaces of the
mirrors which forms fiber structure at the time of its cooling. During condensation
pentanes plus form a transparent mirrored firm, so the moment of dew point
temperature coming is registered by second channel's photo detector 4 as a result of
sharp increasing of light flow intensity reflected from matt surfaces which are part of
fiber structure.
The change of summary luminous flux which gets on the photo detector at the
fiber exit is estimated by formula:
æ S
æ 1
1 ö
Фвих = ç I 2 e - K X L + IS çç 2 - 2 ÷÷ ò r
ç L
è L0 L øU L
è
U0
2h
é
2
2
2
2
1 ê é n1 n2 - n1 sin u - n2 cos u ù
ê
ú +
÷ 2 ê ê n n 2 - n 2 sin 2 u + n 2 cos u ú
ø êë 1 2
1
2
û
ë
L
ö
tg u
D
du ÷ ×
2h ù
é n 2 cos u - n 2 - n 2 sin 2 u ù ú
2
1
ú ú × k × t к × t узг × t вик ,
+ê 1
2
2
2
2
êë n1 cos u + n2 - n1 sin u úû ú
û
where t к – commutator's loss, t узг – loss due to non-concordance of fields of
view of the reception and lighting channels, t вик – loss due to using only part of the
light flow, k – beam's reflection coefficient, n1 = 1,544 – refraction index of quartz
fiber, n2 = 1,332986 – refraction index of water, I – beaming luminous intensity, S
– fiber sectional area, K x – coefficient of beaming absorption in lengthwise direction,
L – fiber length, D – fiber thickness, h – number of reflections, u – angle of beam
entering into fiber, L0 – the beginning of beam's movement path in the fiber,
U 0 = arctg ( D / 2 L0 ); U L = arctg ( D / 2 L) – minimum and maximum value of light
beam entering angles, respectively, r – reflection coefficient [3].
In the proposed device the laser diodes were used as the light sources 1, 2,
which provides exclusive selectivity of measurement. Using of a few thermoelectric
coolers was possible because of using the coolers control microintegrated system 8,
which allows equalizing the temperature at all length of fiber structure for the
purpose of avoiding the influence of temperature gradient. Relative humidity is
estimated by the value of gas dew point temperature [3, 4]. The proposed structure
allows drawing a conclusion on fitness of analyzed gas based on two indices: dew
point temperatures by water and dew point temperatures by hydrocarbons. After
conducting a series of measurements the microcontroller averages the received
values, compares them with normalized ones and draws a conclusion on gas
conformity to requirements of standards.
The advantage of the proposed device is an easy structure with the ability of
simultaneous control of two parameters, because a number of companies, such as
Michell Instruments and Ametek, are using different types of sensors for a separate
analysis of dew point temperatures by water and hydrocarbons, which considerably
complicates the structure of measuring system, particularly the necessity of using
different types of transformers, and that leads to higher cost [3]. However, the
proposed structure has a disadvantage that is connected with a complexity of cleaning
the fiber from inside in case it gets dirty. That’s why an additional blowing system is
needed. It’s far more convenient to use planar fibers when the beam is not contacting
with the analyzed environment. Such a structure can also have two channels. The first
one is intended for measuring dew point temperatures by water, and the second one –
for measuring by hydrocarbons.
The structure of measuring instrument of gas dew point on the basis of hollow
fiber, that provides an increase of sensitivity and accuracy due to selectivity of
measurement based on dew points by water and hydrocarbons, is proposed in the
article.
References:
1. Berliner М. А. Humidity measurement. / М. А. Berliner – М. : Energiya,
1973, – 400 p.
2. Natural combustible gases. Humidity measurement methods: State Standard
20060-83. – М. : Izdatelstvo standartov, 1983. – 10 p.
3. Bilynsky Y.Y., Ionina K.Y. Mathematical model of measuring transducer of
gas dew point with measurement selectivity // Visnik Vinnitskogo Politekhnichogo
instituta, Vinnitsa, (№3, 2012). 170-175.
4. Pat. 64355 Ukraine G01N 19/00. Condensation hygrometer of natural gas /
Bilynsky Y.Y., Ionina K.Y.; patentee and holder of patent – Vinnitsa National
Technical University; dec. 14.03.2011; publ. 10.11.2011, Bul. №21.
J21310-038
UDC 004.2
Kuznetsov E.M.
ANALYSIS METHODS CICN
Volga State University of Telecommunications and Informatics
This article discusses the methods of corporate computer networks.
Keywords: CICN, analysis research methods CICN.
Problem of research and optimization of enterprise LAN engaged in many
Russian and foreign scientists: E. Tanenbaum, Ivanov KI, Kulgin M. Schwartz, M.,
Yanbyh GF, Krylov VV Vishnevsky VM ., Klimanov VP [1], Olifer VG Olifer N.
Petrov, M., A. Means, Alekseev IV, Kennedy, K., et al
Having regard to the following methods of queuing of the existing approaches to
the formalization of the description of the functioning of the most common CICN
found the following:
- Method of aggregates;
- A method of piecewise linear aggregative systems;
- A method of escape sequences;
- Predicate form;
- Probabilistic automata;
- Systems and queuing networks.
LAN representation in terms of the language of queuing networks is the basis
for the analytical and simulation LAN. However, this must be properly and
adequately set both the application processing system, and a full set of its internal
states, how often, and "extremely" rare. In this case, the processing properties of the
device there is considerable information about its environment, ie, on the nearest
neighbors in the network, and distant neighbors. Due to the fact that the volume of
such information may increase dramatically, and, in turn, lead to increased routing
traffic, network topology is actually determined not only and not so much the
physical connections in a network of computers, but also by the logical records that a
certain degree of confidence reflect the properties of a real network in the current
moment.
In the paper [1], a methodology for the analysis of probabilistic-time
characteristics (VVH) LAN topologies, components through the development of
mathematical models of the LAN. Moreover, the developed model, both for the
individual functional elements and their composition in a LAN with basic, simple and
complex topologies. This paper defines a new subclass of the models in the form of
open LAN multiplicative queuing networks with dynamic routing matrix, which
allows you to describe CICN with adaptive control and flow distribution. Developed
ways to describe the functioning CICN as systems of balance equations intensities
and load factors (the method of numerical solution of the balance equations, methods
of computing the integral VVH).
The proposed analytical approach allowed us to decrease the time development
of mathematical models of composite LAN topologies and implement a more
profound and rapid analysis of VVH LAN.
Among recently appeared works aimed at improving the efficiency CICN note
thesis [4].
In [1] justified demands, efficient synthesis and complete analysis of the
development of technological solutions CICN. It is shown that the development of
network solutions to be implemented the following functions:
• use statistical, reference and background information as well as information on
the structure and composition of the tasks undertaken CICN;
• This information should also be used to develop a model to enable the use of
the complex in its entirety in the initial phase of operation;
• Provides the ability to view and edit the user the full range of information to be
used in the development and CICN
analysis of the simulation designed network;
• Provides the user the ability to edit network solutions in accordance with the
characteristics of the equipment and communication lines, the organizational
structure of the corporation, the parameters of tasks;
• Deliver the possibility of network analysis solutions obtained by other
methods.
The paper [4] aims to increase efficiency of the processes of modernization and
transformation of trunk, including telecommunications networks. The variants of the
transmission of different types of traffic, including the provision of new network
services, generating additional traffic.
In general, we consider the development of a phased plan for the modernization
and development of the backbone network based on the given initial conditions and
restrictions on the characteristics of the communication quality, the reliability
characteristics. In solving the problem takes into account the projected growth of
traffic, by creating a new communication nodes, the connection of new access
networks, launching new lines. Modernization is installing new lines, installation of
new, changing or moving the switching and terminal equipment, redistribution of
existing information flows.
As a result, especially in view of the major networks and their performance
criteria to be formulated and solved by mathematical modeling of the optimal design
structure of corporate backbone. The structure is represented as an undirected graph.
Carried out in [2] studies are based on the consideration of the simulated LAN
multiplicative as open queuing networks. In modeling methodology was used
probabilistic analysis of the temporal characteristics of LAN topologies, components
based on an analytical modeling. The method for calculating the total decomposition
relating to analytical methods of calculations. When this method is decomposed into
individual network elements that can be represented as isolated single-server queuing
system. The system of equations, derived from the decomposition method is iterative
numerical methods.
References:
1. Klimanov VP Methodology for the analysis of probabilistic-time
characteristics of the local area network topologies based on composite analytical
modeling / Dissertation for the degree of Doctor of Technical Sciences, Moscow,
1992. - 389 p.
2. Kuznetsov EM Design and analysis of test restructuring of local area
networks / / Proceedings of the VIII International Scientific and Technical
Conference "Information technology Technology and Applications" - Penza 2009. S. 93-97.
3. Lipaev VV, Colin K., Serebrovskii LA Mathematical software control a
computer. Moscow, Publishing House of the "Soviet Radio" 1972. -528 S.
4. Kuznetsov EM Restructuring CICN to level it loads / / PhD thesis Stankin,
Moscow 2012
J21310-039
UDC 004.2
Kuznetsov E.M., Banov A.S.
CICN RESTRUCTURING AND ITS EFFECT ON PERFORMANCE
NETWORK
This article examines the restructuring of corporate computer networks.
Keywords: CICN, performance CICN.
One of the key information is the corporate computer network. Corporate Area
Network - is a multicomputer system of one company, consisting of interacting LAN
units [5].
The relevance of this work is of great significance for all kinds of businesses and
organizations of the importance of a stable and efficient operation of corporate
computer networks.
In recent years, much of the debate concerning the development of corporate
management, takes place in the framework of the practical application of modern
information technology.
Of course, depending on the application information systems can vary greatly in
their functions, architecture and implementation. However, we can discern at least
two properties that are common to all information systems.
First, any information system designed to collect, store and process information.
Therefore, the basis of any information system is the storage medium, and data
access. Environment should provide a level of reliability and efficiency of storage
access that match the scope of the information system. [2]
Second, information system oriented to the end user, such as a bank clerk. These
users can be very far from the world of computers. For them, a terminal, a personal
computer or workstation is a mere instrument of their own careers. Therefore, the
information system must have a simple, convenient, easy to learn interface, which
should provide the end user with all the necessary functions for its operation.
Building a corporate network provides:
1. Access implementation specialists in various departments of large enterprises
for general corporate information resources;
2. A single, centralized management, administration, and maintenance of
information - communication resources;
3. Organization of a single e-mail and electronic documents;
4. Effective protection of corporate information assets from unauthorized access;
5. The interaction of the corporate network to the business of large enterprises the systems of other organizations, computer networks of government agencies,
financial - credit agencies, etc., involved in the exchange of information on the rights
of users of corporate telecommunications systems;
6.Funktsionalnuyu scalability, providing a corporate computer network, as a
constantly developing and improving, open to the introduction of new hardware and
software resources to develop and improve the content and quality of information communication services without disrupting the normal functioning of the network.
[6]
To date, the accumulated considerable baggage scientific approaches the
solution of improving the quality of health CICN, both domestic and foreign
scientists. The aim of my work is to study methods of restructuring of corporate
computer networks
Corporate information - computer network is very important for organizations
and is indispensable for the further development of the organization or company. The
main task is to search, study and research methods of restructuring CICN.
References:
1992. - 389 p.
3. Kuznetsov EM The study of operating characteristics CICN order to optimize
its structure / / Proceedings of the conference "Scientific research and its practical
application. Present status and the development '2012 'Volume 4 Engineering - p. 7882.
Moscow 2012
5. SD Kuznetsov. Design and development of corporate information systems
http://dit.isuct.ru/ivt/books/KIS/KIS5/index.html
6. O. Polukeev, D. Koval. Business modeling and information system
architecture http://dit.isuct.ru/ivt/books/KIS/KIS3/DB013.HTM
7. Computer networks. Principles, technologies, protocols / VG Olifer, NA
Olifer. - St.: Peter, 2001. - 672s.
8. M. Kulgin. Technology enterprise setey.Entsiklopediya. - St.: Peter, 2000. 704 p.
J21310-040
UDC 004.2
Kuznetsov E., Skvortsov P.S.
PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS CICN
This article describes methods for analyzing the performance of corporate
computer networks.
Keywords: CICN, methods of performance analysis CICN.
The relevance of this work is of high importance for corporate network to the
success of today's organizations and effective management. The rapid development of
information - communication systems has increased the interest of effective use of
network resources, network, and ready access to them. All this requires various
research and study of the network in order to increase its effectiveness. An important
property of an effective solution to the problem is to minimize labor costs and trends
of development of the organization.
These problems are acute in the computer systems of special purpose. These
objects are:
1. Military facilities;
2. Energy;
3. Transport infrastructure and etc.
For example, uninterrupted movement of trains, cargo and air are impossible
without well-functioning system of communication, instant communication, decision
making, information security systems and diagnostics. The technology of the client server often have difficulty in accessing the server a number of clients. This situation
is becoming more and more frequent with the expansion of services in the network
server. Among providers, there is a lot of competition for their clients. In such
circumstances, customers are becoming more demanding and expect a high quality of
service. Violation of service is not acceptable, because it primarily affects the income
and image of the organization in network downtime. As a consequence, the
organization will lose a lot of customers and it will be a great stimulus for the
subsequent bankruptcy.
The analysis of the literature showed that a number of difficulties associated
with the processing, distribution and transmission of information flows. In this
regard, the role of the networks Data Corporate Information - Area Network (CICN),
their software, and subsequent restructuring.
I believe that this issue is very relevant at this time.
The aim of this work is a summary of the concepts and definitions CICN
restructuring and its impact on network performance, based on the literature and
research of various authors. I would like first of all to define "Corporate Information Area Network (CICN)." I propose to consider several definitions of the concept:
1. Corporate information - area network (CICN) - is an integrated management
system of geographically distributed corporation, based on in-depth analysis of the
data, the widespread use of information systems, decision support, electronic
document management and record keeping. [1]
2. Corporate information - area network (CICN) - is one company
multicomputer system consisting of interacting LAN units. [3]
3. Corporate information - area network (CICN) - is the network scale
corporations that actively use Internet technologies for information exchange. They
belong to a special class of local networks with a large area of coverage. [4]
4. Corporate information - area network (CICN) - corporate WANs by company
or group of companies with a common goal for the production of joint action, that is,
self-made information and computer-based network TCP / IP, perform the same
functions as are the TOS, but also extends to supporting information only within a
single organizational structure predpriyatiy5.
5. Corporate information - area network (CICN) - enterprise information system,
whose main objective is the information support of industrial, administrative and
management processes (business processes) that form the products or services of the
company. [2]
There are a lot many definitions CICN, but I think I have indicated the position
fully reflect the essence of the concept.
Next I would look at some definition of the term "restructuring", but no precise
definition of the sources can not give. Often the term "Restructuring" is replaced by a
more intuitive and familiar for us the term "modernization", "Re-engineering" and so
dalee.Izuchiv many sources, I still managed to find some definitions of the term
"restructuring":
1. In English the "Restructuring» (restructuring) - this is the restructuring of
anything. The Latin word structure (structura) means order, arrangement, structure
[6].
2. Restructuring - is a kind of reorganization, restructuring what else. [7]
At the end of article I would like to say that we have examined only a small part
of the question of restructuring CICN. From the above definitions, we can conclude
that corporate information - computer network is very important for organizations
and is indispensable for the further development of the organization or company.
As the scale of the enterprise and therefore increase the number of network
users, there is a need for restructuring CICN, which in turn will ensure reduction of
labor costs and minimizes the financial costs of the company in upgrading the
computer park.
References:
1992. - 389 p.
3. Lipaev VV, Colin K., Serebrovskii LA Mathematical software control a
computer. Moscow, Publishing House of the "Soviet Radio" 1972. -528 S.
Moscow 2012
5. Ablova IV, Lectures: "Enterprise Information Systems", [electronic resource]:
http://iablov.narod.ru/ 08.11.2012 21:55:42
6. Spiridonov DV Article: "Terminology: information technology», [web-site]:
http://www.docflow.ru/edu/glossary/detail.php?ID=15787 09.11.2012 0:20:08
7. "Corporate Area Network (FAC), the concept and purpose," [electronic
resource]: http://necroms.narod.ru/o15.html 08.11.2012 23:44:02
8. Lecture notes: "Information and computer networks. Concept and types of
computer
networks,
"[electronic
resource]:
http://do.gendocs.ru/docs/index-
17561.html 08.11.2012 23:56:47
9. Lecture notes: "The concept of networks. Corporate information systems.
Structure and purpose of CIS. Characteristic. Requirements for the organization
CICN.
Processes.
Multilevel
organization
CICN»,
[web-site]:
http://www.pandia.ru/text/77/132/926.php 09.11.2012 0:09:08
10. «Expert RA», [web-site]: http://raexpert.ru/researches/restructuring/part1/
09.11.2012 0:27:28
11. Collection of articles: "Crisis management enterprise" [electronic resource]:
http://www.anch.ru/articles/rest2.html 09.11.2012 0:44:49
J21310-041
UDС 621.65.01
Bobkov A.V.
DEFORMATION OF STREAM BY MEANS OF RESISTANCE,
DISPERSED ALONG CROSS-SECTIONAL
INTERSCAPULAR CHANNELS OF CENTRIFUGAL MACHINE
Komsomolsk-on-Amur state technical university
The problems of increase of power efficiency of shoulder-blade machines are
considered by means of sources of indignation of stream, machines set in driving
wheels.
Keywords: shoulder-blade machine; driving wheel; frontal turbulization of
stream; turbulent indignation, gradient of static pressure.
Deformation of stream under the action of revolting factor is accompanied by
the change of speed, pressure, temperature and closeness of tubes of current of
working body. As the indicated factor often use the turbulization of stream by means
of the resistance dispersed along cross-sectional of channel. A turbulization allows to
do even the field of speeds and due to it to localize, for example, the zone of tearing
away, arising up on the areas of change of diameter of channel or turn of stream.
In stationary due to a turbulization it is possible to bring down the level of
hydraulic losses or prevent the self-excited oscillations of static pressure, generated
by the zones of tearing away.
In shoulder-blade machines, being totality of immobile and running around
channels, except the decline of hydraulic losses there is other task: increase the
brought power over of the machine by implication characterized by the coefficient of
pressure [1, 2]. This parameter is especially important for the shoulder-blade
machines used in transport systems: aviation, space and other in that there are
limitations on mass and sizes of devices.
Question, how will a frontal turbulization of stream influence on by the
coefficient of pressure of shoulder-blade machines?
For realization of analysis, from a few well-known constructions of turbulent
возмутителей [3, 4] we will choose flow through stream turbulizer (ST) as the thinwalled perforated partition located on periphery of driving wheel [5], see a fig. 1.
We will accept, that distribution of speeds is in a stream, running into ФТ
uneven and has regular character. We will break up all stream on n tubes of current.
We will distinguish the i tube of current (see a fig. 2). We will write down
equalization of Bernoulli for an area 2-2 - 2¢-2¢:
p 2i + r
W 2 sin 2 b2¢i
W22i sin 2 b2i
+ DpSТ ,
= p 2¢i + r 2¢i
2
2
(1)
where р 2i , р 2¢i , и W2i, W2¢i - static pressure and relative speed, accordingly, in
sections 2-2 и 2¢-2¢; r - closeness, b2i , b2¢i - angles of slope of trajectory of relative
motion are in sections 2-2 и 2¢-2¢; DрSТ - hydraulic resistance of ST, equal:
DpSТ
WS2Тi sin 2 bSТi
,
= x SТ r
2
(2)
where parameters with the index of SТi behave to the parameters of flow
through SТ in the zone of i tube of current, xSТ - coefficient of resistance of SТ. We
will accept in the first approaching:
2
SТi
W
W22i sin 2 b2i
=
,
fS2Т
(3)
Driving
wheel
ST
Fig. 1. ST is set on peripheries of driving
wheel
where fSТ = å
f аоо
f SТ
- coefficient of living section of SТ, fаоо - an area of one
opening is in SТ, fSТ - area of surface of SТ.
We will enter the coefficient of smoothing of stream in k- й to the tube of
current W2 k after her passing through SТ:
W
Tube
of
Fig. 2. Kinematics parameters of tube of current at a flow
through stream turbulizer (SТ): а) to SТ; b) after SТ
W2i =
W2i - W2¢i
.
W2i
(4)
Taking into account the entered denotations a formula (1) assumes an air:
(
)
W 2 (1 - W2i ) sin 2 b 2¢i - sin 2 b 2i (1 - xSТ fS2Т )
.
p 2i = p 2¢i + r 2i
2
2
(5)
The analysis of expression (5) shows that on condition of smoothing of the field
of static pressure after SТ ( р 2¢i =const.) height of pressure in the zone of braking
before SТ straight proportional W22i , will be uneven along front of turbulent
indignation.
Setting of SТ on periphery of driving wheel results in appearance of additional
gradient of static pressure in the channels of driving wheel. Generation of additional
unevenness in a stream will have a positive result: increase of over fall of static
pressure in circuitous direction between pressure and back parties of shoulder-blades
of driving wheel and, as a result, to the increase of coefficient of pressure.
The analysis of results of deformation of stream in the channels of shoulderblade machine allows to draw conclusion about expedience of the use turbulent not
only for smoothing of stream but also as generators of additional gradients of static
pressure. It is due to it possible to soup up shoulder-blade machine, not changing her
radial sizes and localizing zones decompressed on included in a pump.
References:
1. Bobkov А.V., Tsvetkov Е. О. Increase of pressure qualities of centrifugal
pump of the system of temperature control // International magazine of the applied
and fundamental researches. 2012. № 10. P. 110.
2. Bobkov А.V., Tsvetkov Е. О. About the problem of power balance at the use
of stream turbulizer of stream a shoulder-blade machine // International magazine of
the applied and fundamental researches. 2012. № 10. P. 111.
3. Bobkov А.V. Estimation of influence of frontal stream turbulizer on hydraulic
resistance of diffuser // Modern problems of science and education. -2012. -№ 3. URL: http://www.science-education.ru/103-6337 (date of appeal: 29.05.2012).
4. Bobkov А.V. Problems of spatial turbulization of stream are in the driving
wheels of shoulder-blade machines // Collection of scientific works of Sworld on
materials of international research and practice conference. - 2011. -Т. 2, № 3. - P.
36-37.
5. A copyright certificate 240480 the USSR, ICI 2 F04D 29/22. Centrifugal
pump / А.С. Shapiro, L.V. Nekljudov, B.V. Ovsyannikov and et al (USSR). – №
1216642/25–08. It is declared 06.11.68; It is published 21.03.69, Bull. № 12.
J21310-042
UDC 621.002.3-002.237
Lysak I.A., Lysak G.V.
THE MODIFICATION OF MELT-BLOWN POLYPROPYLENE
MATERIAL INFLUENCE OF THE FIELD OF MICROWAVE RADIATION
National Research Tomsk Polytechnic University,
634050, Russia, Tomsk, Lenina, 30
Molecular structure of melt-blown polypropylene material, before and after
exposure to the microwave radiation of a fixed capacity, was investigated by using
methods of thermal and X-ray structure analysis. It is shown that smectic
mesomorphic structure of polypropylene melt-blown material is transformed into the
monoclinic α-crystal structure under the influence of the microwave radiation.
Key words: polypropylene, melt-blown, molecular structure, machine building
Currently polymer nonwoven materials massively used in machine building
industry, considerable advantages of them have melt-blown polypropylene materials
(MPM) [1]. They are characterized by extensive specific surface area, resistance to
hostile environment and low flow resistance. Decisive impact on the properties of
polypropylene and its products has a molecular and supramolecular structure of the
polymer chain. It is known that the external physical influences, such as the field of
microwave radiation, can have an impact on its structure [2].
Thus, the aim of this work was to investigate the changes in the structure of the
MPM at short exposure of the field of microwave radiation to create materials with
directionally altered properties.
Prepared a series of samples MPM [3] before and after exposure to the
microwave radiation at the microwave with an output power of 1 kW and an
operating frequency of 2,45 GHz. X-ray diffraction (XRD) was performed using the
diffractometer XRD-6000 with CuKα-radiation. Thermal analysis was performed
using simultaneous thermal analyzer NETZSCH STA 449 C Jupiter.
According to the XRD, structure of the initial samples represented 33% of the
smectic mesomorphic form, which is identified by the presence of two broad peaks
located at 2q = 14,8°(5,99) и 21,4°(4,19). The proportion of the amorphous phase is
67%. At the same time, the microwave exposure initiates processes of structural and
phase transformations of the samples. Influenced by the impact of the microwave
radiation unstable smectic mesomorphic form is transformed into the most
thermodynamically stable α-crystalline monoclinic, which is characterized by a
monoclinic unit cell with parameters a=6,65 А°, b=20,96 А°, c=6,50 А°, β=99,3.
The results of XRD analysis confirmed the results of thermal studies. Thermal
analysis of the original polypropylene nonwoven has shown weight loss from the
initial weight of the sample less than 2% in the temperature range 40–190 °С and a
small endothermic effect (40–50 °C). This suggests that that the heating is
accompanied by the removal of unstructured water molecules, adsorbed on the fiber
surface. Melting peak of the sample starts around 130 °С and has maximum at
164 °C. Before melting endothermic peak there is a weak exothermic peak at about
100 °C, due to the process of transformation of the smectic phase in monoclinic
structure, which is consistent with the data presented in [4].
Thermal analysis of the samples of MPM after exposure to the microwave
radiation confirmed transformation smectic phase to crystalline due to heating as a
result of dipole shifts of water molecules. The DSC curve has only one endothermic
melting peak of the crystalline phase. As seen from the TG curve in the temperature
range 40–190 °С no loss of mass of the sample, indicating that the removal of water
molecules from the sample surface by microwave heating.
Thus found that the orientation of the adsorbed on the fiber surface water
dipoles along the force lines of alternating microwave field causes heating, and the
smectic mesomorphic structure of the MPM is completely transformed into the stable
monoclinic α-crystalline.
Therefore, modification of MMP at influence the microwave radiation leads to
an increase in tensile strength, heat resistance, hardness, i.e. is improved the physical
and mechanical properties of polypropylene materials. This opens up the possibility
to create and use the polypropylene nonwovens with new competitive advantages in
machine building industry.
References:
1. Pinchuk L.S., Goldade V.A., Makarevich A.V., Kestelman V.N. Melt
Blowing: equipment, technology, and polymer fibrous materials. Berlin, Heidelberg,
New York: Springer, 2002, 212 p
2. Microwave processing of materials / Committee on Microwave Processing of
Materials: An Emerging Industrial Technology, National Materials Advisory Board,
Commission on Engineering and Technical Systems, National Research Council Washington, DC : National Academy Press, 1994 - . 150 p
3. Patent № 2345182 RU. The device for producing fibrous materials of
thermoplastic / G.G. Volokitin, D.A. Filonenko, N.K. Skripnikova, A.A. Shchukin,
I.A. Lysak - publ. 27.01.2009
4. Asakawa H., Nishida K., Matsuba G., Kanaya T., and Ogawa H. // Journal of
Physics, 2011. - V. 272. - p. 11-14.
J21310-043
UDC 004.942:[631.342+630*24]
Bukhtoyarov L.D., Sergienko D.S.
RESEARCH INTO IMPACT FORCE ON A FLEXIBLE SEGMENT OF
INERTIAL CUTTING ROTOR ACTUATING DEVICE
Voronezh State Academy of Forestry and Technologies,
In this report the process of acceleration and stabilization of flexible actuating
device after impact force on one of its segments is described.
Key words: simulation model, rotor, chain, the contact of solids.
When growing forest cultures it is necessary to conduct their lighting, which is
cutting of shoots of secondary species. For cutting machines with rotors are applied
on which flexible inertial cutting working bodies are fixed (Fig. 1). During rotation
by the forces of inertia, the chain takes horizontal position and cuts undesirable
undersized trees and shrubs. [1]
Fig. 1. General view of the brush cutter and a model of the rotor
In the interaction of working body with cut vegetation on the chain is
influenced by the force of cutting resistance. Since the chain is flexible, then
obtaining analytical solution is not a trivial task. We have developed a simulation
model of the rotor of brush cutter, which determines the kinematic and dynamic
characteristics of the process of acceleration, and dropping of shoots [2, 3]. In this
paper we consider the stabilization process of chain after stroke impact, depending on
rated rotation speed of the rotor. The general problem is as follows:
[ M ]&s&(t ) + [C ]s&(t ) + [ K ]s (t ) = f (t ) ,
(1)
where [K] - stiffness matrix; [C] - damping matrix; [M] - mass matrix; s (t) vector of displacement; s&(t ) – velocity vector; &s&(t ) –vector of acceleration.
The initial conditions are: rotor weight 10.82 kg; weight of the first and second
links 0.318 kg each one, coordinates of weight center of the rotor, mm (0, 0, 10) and
the coordinates of weight center of the first and second links, mm (-144.6, 17.43,
2.68), (148.46, 101.5, 2.79).
Rotor acceleration with flexible inertial cutting bodies takes place in accordance
dependencies with the specified by us (Fig. 2)
Fig. 2. Acceleration characteristics of the rotor
Three seconds later, flexible working body goes to the nominal operating mode
and in 0.001 seconds force is applied to it, characterizing the impact effect (Fig. 3).
Fig. 3. Time scale showing the stroke moment and the general appearance
of the rotor indicating direction of force application to the chain link
Fig. 4. The time variation of the potential energy at the second link in the
chain for the following modes: a) acceleration to 420 r / min, b) acceleration
to 840 r / min, and c) acceleration to 1500 r / min, and d) acceleration to 2000 r /
min.
Fig. 4 shows that in high frequency stabilization of chain after stroke will take
less time. Thus, the stabilization time at the speed 2000 r / min. is two seconds, and at
a frequency of 480 ... 840 r / min. within 10 seconds after application of the stroke
there are changes of potential energy of chain.
We have developed a simulation model which allows taking computer
experiment with different design parameters of the rotor and flexible working body,
and to justifying the feed rate depending on the intensity of impact loads (cutting of
shoots).
Literature:
1. Bartenev I.M. Structures and parameters of the machine to clear forest land /
I.M. Bartenev, M.V. Drapalyuk, P.I. Parsons, L.D. Bukhtoyarov. - M. // Flint:
Science, 2007. - 208.
2. Bukhtoyarov LD, Sergienko DS. The study of acceleration and shock chain
of small-diameter trunk trees and shrubs / / Journal of Forest Engineering. - 2013. № 1 (9). - P. 110-115.
3. Drapalyuk M.V. Bukhtoyarov L.D., Sergienko D.S. The study of the
kinematics chain with rotor acceleration in the horizontal and vertical / / Journal of
Forest Engineering. - 2012. - № 4 (8). - P. 101-110.
J21310-044
Piontkovskaya S.А., Mastaeva S.P., Petinov Y.О.
ANALYSIS OF TRANSITION THERMAL PROCESS IN
AUTOMOTIVE LAMPS
Togliatti State University, Togliatti, Belarusian,14, 445667
The article is devoted to the justification of the use of the parameters of the
transition thermal process in the technical diagnosis of vehicle lighting products.
Key words: transition thermal process, incandescent, diagnostic parameter
To justify the use of the technical diagnosis of vehicle lighting products, as an
alternative diagnostic parameter instantaneous value of current, at the initial moment
of commutation of incandescent, it is necessary to analyze the thermal transition in
the incandescent and put the theoretical dependence of the instantaneous current of its
design parameters.
Consider the transition process in the vehicle incandescent with the following
assumptions:
-
heat removal from the filament is neglected (adiabatic process);
-
believe that the specific heat is independent of temperature, a comparative
analysis of this gives an error of not more than 5%.
Resistance of the filament:
R(J ) = r
J
l
; r = r 0 (1 + aJ ) ,
S
(1)
- current temperature.
Incandescent current by Ohm's law:
i (t ) =
U
U
,
R(J )
(2)
- board voltage, fixed in time.
The heat released in the incandescent due to the current flow:
dQ = i 2 (t )R(J )dt
(3)
dQ = cglSdJ ,
(4)
Thermal state of the conductor:
c - heat capacity of filament material; g - the proportion of the material; l - the
length of the filament;
S-
the filament section; dJ - the temperature increment of the
thread.
Heat balance:
cglSdJ = i 2 (t )R(J )dt
(5)
A similar problem is solved by thermal calculation of fuse elements. Solution of
the problem is significantly simplified, since current fuse is specified by parameters of
protected circuit. In this case, changing resistance of the filament determines its
current.
In case (5) we divide variables:
i 2 (t )dt = cglS
dJ
dJ
2
(
)
i
t
dt
=
c
g
lS
ò
ò
R(J ) или
R(J ) .
(6)
But, as the resistance is
R(J ) =
l
r 0 (1 + aJ )
S
(7)
the right side of the equation takes the following form
сglS ò
A–
dJ
cgS 2
=
r0
R(J )
dJ
cgS 2 1
=
ò (1 + aJ ) ar 0 ln A (1 + aJ ) ,
a constant.
Substituting into equation (6), we obtain
2
ò i (t )dt =
cgS 2
ar 0
ln
1
(1 + aJ ) Þ - ar 02 ò i 2 (t )dt = ln 1 (1 + aJ ) .
A
A
cgS
Making successive transformations, using the properties of powers and
separation of variables, we obtain:
1
ar 0
t+B
=
2i (t ) сgs 2
,
2
В – a constant.
Thus
i 2 (t ) =
1
ö
æ ar
2çç 02 t + B ÷÷ ,
è сgs
ø
and finally:
i (t ) = ±
1
æ ar
ö.
2çç 02 t + B ÷÷
è сgs
ø
We’ll find the constant В.
Let at t = t1 , i(t ) = i(t1 ) , then (8) takes the following form
i (t1 ) = ±
1
æ ar
ö
2çç 02 t1 + B ÷÷ .
è сgs
ø
We perform basic algebraic calculations
(8)
i 2 (t1 ) =
1
ö
æ ar
2çç 02 t1 + B ÷÷
ø
è сgs
ar 0
1
t +B= 2
2 1
сgs
2i (t1 )
B=
ar
1
- 02 t1
2i (t1 ) сgs .
2
Substituting the found value В in (8)
1
æ ar
1
ar ö
2çç 02 t + 2
- 02 t1 ÷÷ .
2i (t1 ) сgs ø
è сgs
i (t ) = ±
i (t ) = ±
1
æ ar
1 ö
÷
2çç 02 (t - t1 ) + 2
2i (t1 ) ÷ø
è сgs
i (t ) = ±
Let
i (t1 ) = i (0) =
t1 = 0 ,
in
this
case
1
2ar 0
1 .
(t - t1 ) + 2
2
сgs
i (t1 )
J = Jнач ,
then
R(Jнач ) =
lr 0
(1 + aJнач ) ,
s
Us
and as a result we obtain
lr 0 (1 + aJнач )
i (t ) =
s
2ar 0
l r02 (1 + aJнач ) 2
t+
cg
U2
2
.
(9)
This dependence (9) can be used to calculate the transient current in a real
circuit. The validity of this expression with the assumptions can be considered within
the time from power on to the establishment of the current.
Analyzing (9), we can make the following conclusions:
-
the second term of the radicand in
t =0
specifies the initial value of the current
i ( 0) ;
-
the first term of the radicand specifies the transition thermal process;
-
in general, the equation (9) allows us to estimate variations in characteristics of
the incandescent when possible violation of its production, thus, to use the
parameters of transient not only for diagnosis of the assembled vehicle, but also
for the quality control of certain incandescent.
Let t уст – to be a time, when J achieve the operating temperature of the filament
(for wolfram it’s 2700°С). Then (9) transforms into
t уст =
cg æç s
l 2 r02 (1 + aJнач ) 2 ö÷
2
÷.
2ar 0 çè I уст
U2
ø
(10)
Assuming that
I уст =
P
U,
(11)
than (10) takes the form
t уст =
cg æ s 2U 2 l 2 r 02 (1 + aJнач ) 2 ö
ç
÷÷ .
2ar 0 çè P 2
U2
ø
(12)
In practice, the value t уст expressed by (12) can be used to establish the time of
the recording equipment (sweep duration, while the program calculate the parameters
of the transition process, etc.).
We define the first derivative of the current at the time of commutation:
3
ö
2ar 0 æ
di (t )
Us
aU 3 s
ar 0U 3s 3
ç
÷
=
=
=2cgs 2 çè lr0 (1 + aJнач ) ÷ø
cgl 3 r02 (1 + aJнач )3 .
dt t = 0
cgs 2l 3 r03 (1 + aJнач )3
Dividing constants and design parameters of the incandescent, finally we
obtain:
di (t )
s
aU 3
=
× 3
2
3
dt t = 0 cgr0 (1 + aJнач ) l
(13)
Thus, instantaneous value of current at the initiate moment of commutation of
the incandescent might be used while diagnostic of vehicle lighting products as an
alternative diagnostic parameter.
J21310-045
UDC 614.73.16
A.V. Litvinenko, N.P. Yuhimenko
PNEUMATIC CLASSIFICATION OF THE GRANULAR MATERIALS
Sumy state university, 2 Rimskogo – Korsakova street, Sumy 40007
This article deals with the classification process, apparatus used for
classification, characteristics of the new apparatus, test results using the new model.
Key words: pneumatic classification, particle, separation, flow part, terminal
velocity, hydraulic resistance.
Granular materials separation processes become more and more important
nowadays due to high demands which are put to raw materials and middling products
and because of production increase. High demands are put to the dispersed materials
which are raw materials or final products in chemical, mining, building and other
industrial branches. Often the final products are in the form of powder, coarsegrained material or granules, quality of which depends much on their uniformity.
Classification (fractionating) is a process when mixed granular materials are
separated into two or more segregated populations of granules thus main product can
contain very small quantity of the materials from other classes. Fractionating of the
granular materials is used for mineral fertilizers production [1] and for production of
electrodes (when high dispersed particles must be removed from the raw material in
the burning furnace) It is also used for cleaning and preparation of the seeds, which is
an important agricultural technological process necessary before sowing.
High separation level in the dispersed materials classification process has big
influence not only on the raw material unit consumption and its quality but also on
the productivity and efficiency of other machines and apparatus in the technological
scheme, and as a result it has influence on the technical and economical capacity of
the production in general.
Main aims of the separation processes in different industrial branches are the
following:
1) to get the dust -free products with minimal quantity of the fine grades;
2) to remove the coarse grades for getting the finely dispersed product;
3) to separate the material on some grades where each grade has different
average size, and quantity of the fine and coarse grades in each product is limited;
to separate the polydispersed material into more than two grades each
having the stated granulometric composition.
Pneumatic classification is based on the speed difference of the different
fractions particles terminal velocity in the airstream. This method of classification is
more improved than mechanical and hydraulic classifications and has some
advantages. Using pneumatic classification method it is possible to separate the
original material into all physical and mechanical characteristics of the fractions: size,
form, surface roughness and density.
Comparing with hydraulic classification
method pneumatic method makes it possible to get the products dry and so the energy
consumption when using the pneumatic method is much lower. These advantages of
the pneumatic method make it widespread in different industrial branches.
The simplest construction of the pneumatic apparatus was in the form of the
vertical chamber in the middle part of which the polydispersed material was put. This
apparatus did not become popular because its productive capacity was low and
fraction separation was not good enough. Later models were in the zigzag form, F.
Kaiser apparatus [2], where thanks to gas flow turns there appear centrifugal forces
and particles circulation process begins.
It is easier to produce the apparatus which are in the form of straight vertical
chamber with rectangular section where there are lots of shelves at an angle to the
flow through the opposite sides of the chamber. Quite good separation results one
gets using the apparatus where in the vertical chamber there is created the fluidizated
layer on the specific grate. [3,4]. One of the first apparatus of this kind is Gonnel
modernized apparatus [5].
Barskiy M.D. [6] taken into consideration F. Kaiser research, proposed new
principles of the efficient gravitational process classification and worked out their
physical fundamental principles. Main point of these principles is that gas suspension
motion is unsteady due to cascade of contact elements which are in the separation
channel. Cascade pneumatic classification apparatus designs are actively developed;
so in the new designs one uses full downward perforated shelves.
To improve effective granular materials separation and to find new spheres for
its usage one improves cascade pneumatic apparatus mostly by creating new contact
elements. [7]. But contact elements quantity causes local resistance when rising
airstream moves and it influences on the apparatus energy consumption. The more
shelves are in the apparatus the more intensive is the phase contact, but in this case
hydraulic resistance increases and apparatus energy consumption increases too. So
our aim is to design an apparatus which hydraulic resistance is minimal because there
are no shelves contacts inside and as a result energy consumption is much lower.
For research purposes we designed laboratory stand of the apparatus for
pneumatic classification. We made many tests find out the best operating mode and to
test the quality of granular materials separation. Quartz sand was used as a test
material. Test results are in the table 1 and in the diagram (pic.1) Summing up the
results in the table and diagram one can see that using this apparatus we get coarse
fraction quantity about 96% and fine fraction quantity about 95%. Thus fine fractions
quantity in the coarse grade and coarse fractions quantity in the fine grade is about
5%.
Table 1
Tests are made using binary mixture: coarse fraction -0,63 + 0,4 mm and
fine fraction - 0,4+ 0,16 mm
Test sample
Original material
%
Fine fraction
%
Coarse fraction
%
Weighed
Fraction -0,4+0,16 mm, g
quantity, g
1129,2
591,4
526,1
574,9
50,91
562,70
94,68
22,50
4,28
Fraction –0,63+0,4 mm, g
554,3
49,09
28,70
4,83
503,60
95,71
%
Granulometric characteristics (air consumption 0,024 m3/c)
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
-10
0,13
Material
Fine fraction
Coarse
fraction
0,23
0,33
0,43
Particles size, mm
0,53
0,63
Pic.1. Screen analysis curves of particles on fractions
Tests were made without contact elements in the apparatus design. We worked
out and used rhomb-shaped flow part. We also designed the bunker for two sides
loading which enables to load fractions from both sides of the apparatus
simultaneously or separately using either one or another.
Having done the research the following process peculiarities were noticed:
1) Continuous product loading has negative impact on the separation quality, so
the periodic loading is preferred. Periodic product loading has positive impact on the
separation process and when using this loading there is no rolling swirl in the
separation section since this swirl prevents the gas flow from withdrawal of the fine
fractions from the layer.
2) After having done the tests and having compared the results it was found out
that using this apparatus design one can achieve effective classification without using
the contact elements inside its housing. Since the flow does not swirl and it moves
from wall to wall which causes additional resowing it has positive impact on the
separation quality.
3) To get the best separation material quality it is important to provide the best
opening and closing angles of the rhomb and necessary separating zone height.
4) When choose the best modes for controlling the flow speed main product
which one gets contains no more than 5 % of other classes fractions.
5)
So as a conclusion the test which are made prove that rhomb shaped
apparatus have good potential in using them for grain materials separation.
References:
1. P.V. Klassen, I.G. Grishaev. Osnovnie processu texnologii mineralnux
ydobrenii. – М.: Ximiya, 1990. – 304с.
2. Kaiser F.Der Zickzack - Sichter- eine Windsichter nach neuere Prinzip //
Chem. Ing. Tech., 1963, Bd. 35, №4, S. 273-282.
3. Trydu Evropeiskogo soveshaniya po izmelcheniyu. М.: Izdatelstvo literatyru
po stroitelstvy, 1966. - 603 с.
4. O.M. Todes, O.B. Tsitovich. Apparatu s kirachim zernistum. – L.: Ximiya,
1982. – 296с.
5. A.P. Muhlionova, B.S. Sazhina, V.F. Frolova. Raschet apparatov kipachego
sloya: Spravochnik. – L.: Ximiya, 1986. – 352с.
6. M.D. Barskiy, V.I. Revnivzev, U.V. Sokolin, Gravitacionnaya klassificaciya
zernistux materialov. - М.: Nedra, 1974. – 232с.
7. N.P. Yuhimenko, S.V. Vakal,
N.P. Kononenko, A.P Filonov. Apparatu
vzvechennogo sloya. - Symu: Sobor, 2003. - 304 с.
J21310-046
UDC66.074.1:547.912
Lyaposchenko O.O., Nastenko O.V., Logvin A.V., Al - Rammahi M.M.
PHYSICAL MODEL OF HIGH-DISPERSE GAS-CONDENSATE
SYSTEMS FORMATION IN TURBULENT GAS FLOW
Sumy State University, Sumy, 2 Rimsky-Korsakov st., Sumy 40007
This article deals with physical conditions of high-disperse gas-condensate
systems formation, and also the main mechanisms of their separation. As a result of
made research one formulated possible ways of gas-separation equipment
improvement and development.
Keywords: natural gas, hydrocarbon condensate, mechanisms of separation,
coagulation, crushing, pulsing, radius of the droplets.
Extracted from the depths of the oil fields hydrocarbon gases are saturated with
water vapor. Raw natural gas includes large amount of liquid drops, consisting of
mineralized water and gas condensate, as a rule, in the amount of 30-40 g/m3, and
sometimes 200-800 g/m3. Therefore, such gas condensate mixtures before they enter
the main pipelines or productions lines are subjected to separation which includes
separating mechanical impurities, water and hydrocarbon condensate.
To explore and study the basic mechanisms of gas -condensate systems
formation and separation it is necessary to have knowledge about size distribution
(fractional structure) of dispersed particles, the average droplet size and volume
content of the liquid phase. The specified parameters of the gas-condensate mixture
cannot be accurately determined, but it is possible to make their quality assessment, if
one considers various mechanisms of liquid drops formation and formation of highdisperse gas-condensate systems.
As it was said above, gas-condensate systems contain both solid mechanical
impurities and high-disperse drop moisture. The difference between the liquid and
solid disperse phases is that in the first case, the particles have a smooth spherical
shape and at the coagulation process they merge, thus forming also individual
spherical particles. Solid particles can be of various forms, which at the coagulation
process form separate multi-component structures which, in turn, also have different
shapes.
Droplets in the gas stream can be formed without condensation or in the process
of condensation [1]
When there is no condensation process, the primary mechanisms for the drops
formation in a turbulent gas flow are the processes of coagulation and fragmentation.
Both of these processes take place simultaneously. As the result droplet size
distribution take place. This distribution, if it is assumed that turbulent flow is
homogeneous and isotropic, has the form of standard logarithmical distribution [1, 2]:
é ln 2 ( R/R 1 ) ù
n* × R 1
n (R ) =
exp êú
σ×R
2 × σ 2 ûú
ëê
(1)
3 × W exp ( -2,5 × σ 2 )
2
; R1 = R ср exp ( -0,5 × σ ) ;
Where n* =
4
4 × π × 2 × π × R ср
W – Volume concentration of liquid phase; σ2- distribution dispersion; Rcp average radius of droplets.
Drops in a turbulent gas flow break when their radius exceeds a certain critical
radius [3]. Drops which radius size is less than the crytical one can only coagulate.
Drops breaking in a turbulent gas flow takes place due to the inertial-forces
effect and due to big difference of liquid and gas densities, as well as due to the
difference of pulsating velocity, i.e. the velocity of turbulent fluctuations, which flow
around the droplets, at opposite drops ends[3].
Drop deformation and breaking are caused by small-scale pulsations λ, because
large-scale pulsations undergo relatively little change on the distances which are
equal to the drop diameter.
Drop breaking doesn’t take place when the dynamic pressure is balanced by the
force of surface tension. Therefore, drop balance is possible when the following
parameters are equal [3]:
2
2/3
2/3
0,5 × ρ2/3
=å
L × ε0 × R
R
(2)
Where ε0 – specific dissipation of energy; ρL - density of fluid.
Using the formula (2) one can find the critical radius of a drop. When the radius
size is bigger than the crytical one the drop breaks. ε0 is expressed through flow
parameters:
ν3G
ε0 = 4
λ0
(3)
Where υ – coefficient of kinematic viscosity;
Formula for the critical radius of droplets:
æ
ö
R КР : ç å ÷
è k f × ρG ø
3/5
æ ρG ö
×ç
÷
è ρL ø
2/5
×
d 2/5
U 6/5
(4)
Where kf – coefficient of drop aerodynamic resistance; ρG – density of gas.
We use the dimensionless parameter called the Weber number:
We =
Н
s
=
ρG × U 2 × d
(5)
s
Where H - dynamic pressure; σ - surface tension.
Then the formula (3) can be written as:
æρ ö
R КР
= k f-3/5 × We-3/5 × ç G ÷
d
è ρL ø
2/5
(6)
In a turbulent gas flow there also takes place the process of intensive droplets
coagulation. There are two basic mechanisms of coagulation [3]: the inertial
mechanism and the mechanism of turbulent diffusion. Inertial mechanism is based on
the assumption that the drops are not completely captured with turbulent fluctuations.
As a result the relative velocities which drops get due to turbulent fluctuations depend
on their (drops) mass. Turbulent diffusion principles are based on the assumption
that drops are completely captured by the turbulent fluctuations strong enough to pull
the drops together. As the droplets move chaotically under the influence of turbulent
fluctuations, their motion is similar to the diffusion and can be characterized by the
turbulent diffusion coefficient.
Inertial mechanism of coagulation. Let’s consider a drop of radius R2. The
number of this drop meetings with drops of radius R1 per time unit under the
influence of the inertial mechanism in a turbulent flow [3]:
β12 = π × ( R1 + R 2 ) × ( R12 - R 22 ) ×
2
ρL × ε3/4
0
× n1
ρG × ν
5/4
(7)
G
Where n1 - R1 radius droplets number in unit volume.
Formula for calculating the droplets number n:
ρ × U9/4
dn
1
= - × π × R ср4 × L 5/4 3/4 × n 2
dt
2
ρG × ν G × d
(8)
In the right side of the formula (8) is the coefficient 1/2, since when calculating
the number of drops collisions the interaction of identical drops is counted twice.
Droplets volume content:
4
W = × π × R 3ср × n
3
(9)
Then the formula (8) will be:
2
d æ R ср ö W æ R ср ö 0 ρL × U9/4
×ç
ç
÷=
÷ ×R ×
3/4
dt çè R 0ср ÷ø 8 çè R 0ср ÷ø ср ρG × ν5/4
G ×d
(10)
0
Where R ср - the initial radius of droplets.
The mechanism of turbulent diffusion. Let’s consider two maximum possible
cases R2<<R1 и R2 ~R1 not taking into consideration the surrounding resistance.
In the first case, drops get close under the influence of pulsations λ~r-r1, and in
the second - λ ~ r, where r - the distance between the centers of considered drops.
Using these limiting correlations, as well as the symmetry condition λ(r, R1, R2) = λ(r,
R2, R1), we obtain the following formula for estimation of the pulsations which can
bring together drops of arbitrary radius [3]:
λ - r -R1 R 2 +
R1 × R 2 × ( R1 + R 2 )
R12 + R 22 -R1 × R 2
(11)
Turbulent diffusion coefficient without motion limitation of the drops [3]:
D to =
μG
× λ2
2
ρG × λ o
(12)
Where μ G - coefficient of dynamic viscosity.
Frequency of R2 radius drops collisions with a drop of radius R1 is equal to the
diffusion flow Jt, which one can express solving the diffusion equation that in the
spherically symmetric case is:
dn ö
1 d æ 2
× × ç r × Dt × 2 ÷ = 0
2
r dr è
dr ø
The formula for the flow [3]:
(13)
æ
J t = 4 × π × ç r 2 × Dt ×
è
æ ¥
dn 2 ö
dr ö
=4 × π × çç ò 2
÷÷ (14)
÷
dr ør = R1 + R 2
è R1 + R 2 r × D t ( r ) ø
For droplets of equal sizes (R1 = R2) [3]:
1/2
æ U3 ö
J t = 96 × π × n 20 × R ç
÷
è νG × d ø
3
2
(15)
Liquid droplets formation in the condensation process. When there are devices
tied to the separator inlet which change gas temperature and pressure (devices for
initial condensation) small droplets (nucleations) can be generated in the flow. Such
devices are the choke, the heat exchanger and turbine. Liquid phase formation (fog) is
based on the process of adiabatic expansion of the gas mixture, whereby mixture
volume increases while vapor pressure and temperature decreases , as the expansion
takes place due to the internal energy of the gas.
The degree of supersaturation s is the ratio of vapor pressure in a gas рυ to the
saturated vapor pressure рυ ∞ above the flat surface of the same liquid:
s=
pυ
,
pυ¥
p υ ¥ = exp æç C è
Eö
T ÷ø
(16)
Where T - absolute temperature, C - constant;
E = 0,12 × M L × l
(17)
Where МL - MW condensing vapor molecular weight; l – specific heat of
vaporization.
Over the convex surfaces, which have drops, heavy vapor pressure is higher than
that of a flat, due to the capillary pressure, and it increases with decreasing radius of
the drop [3]. Therefore, a necessary conditions for vapor condensation in the gas
volume is the availability of supersaturating, allowing compensate the high pressure.
Vapor condensation starts only at a certain supersaturation level called critical
[3]:
3/2
é
ù
7 ML æ å ö
s КР = exp ê1,74 ×10 ×
×ç
÷ ú
pL è T ø úû
êë
(18)
Condensation rate on the surface of the droplet is determined by the diffusion of
vapor to the surface, so at high rate of supersaturation change ds/dt, diffusion rate can
be insufficient to equalize the vapor pressure in the whole volume. In this case, the
vapor pressure at the surface of the droplets can be significantly different from the
vapor pressure in the thickness of the mixture. As a result, there is a large
supersaturating, leading to an intensive nucleation in the initial stage of the process.
After analyzing the basic conditions of aero- dispersion systems formation, we
can conclude that to increase separation process efficiency it is necessary to use precondensation devices. When gas-liquid mixtures pass through these devices steady
phase equilibrium in the pipeline breaks. As a result, droplets nucleation processes
take place and also some mass exchange processes are possible- condensation and
evaporation. Violation of thermodynamic phase equilibrium is caused by pressure p
and temperature t changes. The main interests arouse such parameters values when
liquid drops size increase and it eases their separation from gas in the gas separator.
So that, to increase the efficiency of the separation processes in the gas
separation devices it is necessary to intensify the processes of the fluid dispersed
droplets coagulation. It is possible if the form of the curved channel flow area in the
separator is changed. So one can change the velocity, pressure and inertial moment of
the dispersed particles along the separation channel and as a result the process
efficiency can be increased.
Change of thermodynamic parameters of the gas-condensate system has a
positive impact on the separation process efficiency. It can be used for working out
the new unique designs of the separators-condensers, where separation and
condensation processes take place simultaneously in one device.
References:
N. A. Fuks. Mehanika aerozoley. M: — 1985 g. — 351 s.: il.
Sklabinskiy
V.I.,
Lyaposchenko
O.O.
Mehanizmy
formuvannya
visokodispersnoyi kraplinnoyi ridini u pototsi prirodnogo gazu. - Sbornik "Fizika
aerodispersnyih sistem". — 2004. — S.7-15.
Sinayskiy E. G., Lapta E. Ya., Zaytsev Yu. V. Separatsiya mnogofaznyih
mnogokomponentnyih sistem. — M.: OOO «Nedra-Biznestsentr», 2002. — 621 s.: il.
J21310-047
Aitchanov B.H., Baimuratov O.A.,
Kozhamzharova D.K., NikulinV.V.
STRUCTURAL TRANSFORMATION AND ANALYSIS OF A
CONTROL SYSTEM BASED ON DIGITAL DYNAMIC PULSE
FREQUENCY MODULATION FOR OBJECTS WITH TRANSPORT DELAY
Kazakh National Technical University after K.I.Satpaev
Almaty, Satpaeva 22
Abstract — This paper we considered the process of structural transformation of
the digital control system with dynamic digital pulse-frequency modulator, whose
behavior is described by difference equations, supplemented by logical relations. To
exclude the logical conditions of DPFM there was built an equivalent discrete
nonlinear digital system, where parametric connections are replaced to the signal
ones. Our simulation experiments demonstrate that our nonlinear control system
offers adequate representation of the digital dynamic pulse-frequency modulator and
has advantages compared to previously developed solutions. Also, this work confirms
that the structural transformation is unique in the study of nonlinear systems in
particular in digital control systems with digital dynamic pulse-frequency modulator.
Keywords - pulse-frequency modulation, controlled plant, discrete filter, pulse
generator, microcontroller
Introduction
The development and usage of the modern digital automatic control systems
lead to the appearance of new problems, the solution of which requires a new
approach, new or improvement of previously developed systems. Currently, there are
quite a number of digital automatic control systems in various branches of science
and technology [1] - [6].
Control systems with dynamic pulse-frequency modulation are widely used in
practice [DPFM]. Because of the high degree of noise immunity and simple software
implementation [2], [3], [5].
System design
Many technological objects are characterized by delay and operate in a
stochastic environment, which make necessary to consider the effect of the delay and
the impact of internal and external random noise during the design.
Figure 1. shows the block diagram of the dynamic pulse-frequency control
system (DPFCS) [6] which is based on the principle adopted by the dynamic pulsefrequency modulation
Fig. 1. Dynamic pulse-frequency modulation control system
Dynamic digital pulse-frequency control system is a closed system consisting of
DPFM, rectangular pulses generator (PFG) and the object of control. DPFM function
and PFG are implementing microcontroller, in output of which there will be formed
the rectangular frequency-modulated single pulses with a width h [7].
DFPM which implemented in a microcontroller due to discrete nature of its
work will be digital, which has a number of specific features. Studying and research
of which can be greatly promoted, if build a closed digital system equivalent DFPM.
Digital DPFM can be presented as discrete filter (DF) and pulse device (ID) [8].
In the discrete filter DF some dynamic transformation of grid signal x [nT] in to
lattice signal y [nT] are performed. At time nT=nνT , when the value of y [nT] is
equal to or exceeds the value of Δ, where Δ - threshold, the pulse generating unit IU
~
generates unit impulse function d [(n-nν)T] with the correct sign and is reset all
memory cells, which are part of the digital filter DF:
ì1,
î0,
d [(n - nn )T ] = í
~
if
n = nn ,
if
n ¹ nn .
(1)
Following from [2], [6], [8] - [9], the model of digital DPFM will form as a
closed system with a block diagram (Fig. 2a), it contains a block of reset BoR, which
can be characterized by some nonlinear operator and a relay element (RE) (Fig. 2b).
а) Block scheme
b) Characterization of nonlinear element
Fig. 2. Block scheme of a nonlinear equivalent system
The equations of the motion of dynamic digital pulse-frequency control system
DPFCS with regard to the description of its DPFM elements and control of object
will take the form [5] - [7]:
x [nT] = f [nT] - z[nT]
(2)
z[nT ] = H [l , g 0 , y * [nT ] 0 £ g £ T ]
(3)
y[nT ] = Ф [ y (rT ), x (rT ) , g m T nn £ r £ nn +1 ]
(4)
y * [nT ] = å ln +1 d [(n - nn +1 )T ]
n
(5)
l n +1 = sign y[n n +1T - 0] ,
(6)
y[n n +1T - 0] = l n +1 × D ,
(7)
y[n n T + 0] = 0
(8)
where f [nT] - the input signal,
x[nT ] = x(t )
t = nT
- error signal, y * [nT ] - output
signal of discrete DPFM, y[nT ] - the output of the digital filter F, g m - modulation
parameter which introduced to account of the delay of the controlled object g m ³ g 0 ,
z[nT ] -
the output signal of the object of control described by an operator, g 0 -
parameter, taking into account the delay of the object.
Structural transformation of Control System
One of the main tasks is finding the form of operator A[x,y*,γm] such that the
system shown in Fig. 3 generates the same sequence of pulses as a digital DPFM. Let
a linear digital filter DF be described by an l-th order difference equation.
a0 y[(n + 1)T ] = a1 y[nT ] + a 2 y[(n - 1)T ] + ...
+ a l y[(n - l + 1)T ] + b1x[nT ] +
+ b 2 x[(n - 1)T ] + ..
... + b l x[(n - l + 1)T ]
(9)
By applying z-transform to (9) we obtain:
U (z ) (a 0 z - a 1 - a 2 z -1 - ... - a l z - l+1 ) = X(z ) (b1 + b 2 z -1 + ... + b l z - l+1 ) + a 0 z y[0] +
(
)
(
)
+ a 2 + a 3 z -1 + ... + a l z - l + 2 y [- T ] +
+ a 3 + a 4 z -1 + ... + a l z - l +1 y[- 2T ] + ...
... + a l y[(- l + 1)T ] + (b2 + b3 z -1 + ...
... + bl z - l + 2 x[- T ] + ... + bl x[(- l + 1)T ])
(10)
Let us introduce new notation
G ( z ) = a 0 z - a1 - a 2 z -1 - ... - a l z - l +1
(11)
R (z) = b1 + b 2 z -1 + ... + bl z - l +1
(12)
l
(p = 1, 2, ..., l).
Q p (z) = å a i z p -i ;
i=p
(13)
l
(p = 1, 2, ..., l).
Fp (z) = å bi z p - i ;
i=p
(14)
Then, by taking into consideration expressions (11) – (14), equation (10) can be
re-written as follows
U (z ) =
ö
R (z ) æ
1 l
1 l
ç X(z ) +
+
+
Q
(
z
)
y
[(
p
1
)
T
]
å
å Fp ( z) x[(- p + 1)T ] ÷÷
p
ç
p
=
1
p
=
2
G (z ) è
R (z )
R (z )
ø
(15)
Let the initial time be nvT. Let us assume that y(nvT – 0) ≠ 0, then a solution to
equations (9) and (10) becomes
¥
~y [nT ] = w [(n - m )T ](x[mT ] + (x[mT ] +
å
m=0
l
+å
m
~
å g [(m - k ) T ]d [(k - nn )T ] y [(nn - p + 1)T ]+
p =1 k = nn
l
+å
p
m
~
å f [(m - k ) T ]d [(k - nn )T ] x [(nn
p = 2 k = nn
p
ö
- p + 1)T ]÷÷,
ø
n n < n < n n+1
(16)
where
ì R (z ) ü
w [m T ] = Z-1 í
ý;
î G (z ) þ
ì Q (z ) ü
g p [m T ] = Z-1 í p ý;
î R (z ) þ
ì F (z ) ü
f p [m T ] = Z-1 í p ý;
î R (z ) þ
When controlling plants with a transport delay [17], equation (16) can be rewritten as
~y[nT ] = å¥ w[(n - m )T ](x[mT] + + ål åm g [(m - k ) T ]~
d [(k - n n )T ] y [(n n - p + 1)T ]ö÷ p
m =0
p =1 k = n
ø
n
l m
~
- h[kT ] - m[kT ] + + å å f p [(m - k ) T ]´d[(k - n n ) T ] x [(n n - p + 1) T ]
p=2 k =n n
(17)
By comparing equations (16) and (17), we conclude that
y[n n +1T ] = ~
y[n n +1T ]
if
components of the signal are in the following form.
l
m
h [mT ] = å å g p [(m - k )T ]* ...
p =1 k = nn
~
* d [(k - nn )T ] y [(nn - p + 1)T ] +
l
m
+ å å f p [(m - k )T ]* ...
p = 2 k = nn
~
* d [(k - nn )T ] x [(nn - p + 1)T ]
(18)
And
ì
ïx[mT], если n n < m < (n n + g m )
m[mT] = í
ïî0,
если (n n + g m ) < m < n n +1
(19)
To obtain the reset signal η[mT] let us consider transformation of the signal
y[nT] performed by a relay element RE, which can be given by the following
nonlinearity φ(y).
ì + 1, if y [nT ] ³ D ,
ï
u [nT ] = j ( y[nT ]) = í0, if - D < y [nT ] < D ,
ï - 1, if y [nT ] £ -D ,
î
(20)
Let us introduce a new signal
ì 1, if y [n]T ³ D,
s[nT ] = u 2 [nT ] = í
î0, if y [n]T < D.
(21)
By analyzing expression (17) we conclude that
~
s[nT ]= d [(n - n n )T ],
nn £ n £ n -1
(22)
In order to form additional signal μ[nT], let us use the existing output signal
s[qT]. Then signal μ[nT] can be expressed in the form of a product as follows.
m[nT] = x[nT] c[nT]
(23)
where
r
c[nT ] = å q g m [(n - q)T ] s [qT ]
q=0
(24)
Then the impulse response transfer function can be found as follows.
qg m [nT] = Z-1{G g m (z)}
G g m (z) =
z
-g
× [1 - z m ]
z -1
Equations (17) – (18) and (22) – (24) give a complete description of a nonlinear
operator A[x,y*,γm]. Using these equations we can come up with a structural model
of a digital DPFM shown in Fig. 3.
Fig. 3. Structure of an equivalent model of a digital pulse-frequency
modulator
By comparing the derived model of a digital DPFM presented in this paper with
a similar model discussed in [9] we can see significant differences. First, we are not
using a discrete-time integrator block. Also, instead of a bi-stable relay function with
hysteresis we are using an unambiguous nonlinear relay-type function that has a
sensitivity dead-zone. Both features allow significant simplification of the analysis of
the model of the digital DPFM.
Simulation Example
The process of control synthesis discussed above can be applied to building
control systems for dynamic processes. As an example, let us consider a second-order
system that can be described by the following differential equation in the state-space
form.
·
x = Ax + Bu
(25)
where
é0
А=ê
ëа 21
1ù
,
а 22 úû
é0ù
В=ê ú
ëb 2 û
(26)
The output signal can be found in the following fashion.
y = Cx , C = [1
0]
(27)
As a physical system example, let us consider an electric drive system with a dc
motor. The values of matrices A and B were chosen from [13] so that comparison of
the results could be performed.
a 21 = 0, a 22 = -25, b 2 = 50
(28)
The above-mentioned paper also discussed a control system with pulsefrequency modulation and a state observer.
The simulation model of a dc-drive system and the proposed pulse-frequency
modulation controller were implemented in the Matlab/Simulink environment using
the sampling time of 1ms. The simulation experiments were conducted under the
same conditions as those described in [13]. The main objective was to control
position of the shaft of an electric motor.
The signal applied to the input of the system was in the form of a step function
with amplitude of 0.4 rad. It should be noted that in order to avoid large values of
derivatives in calculations, the signal was first passed through a low-pass filter with
bandwidth of 15 rad/s. The results are presented in the following four figures.
Fig. 5. Step response of the digital control system
Fig. 6. Speed of the digital control system
It can be seen that response time of the system is approximately 0.3 s.
Fig. 7. Tracking error of the digital control system
It can be seen that with the selected value of the input signal, the control effort
presented in Fig. 8 is a sequence of pulses whose frequency approaches zero as the
system converges to the steady state.
Fig. 8. Control effort of the digital control system
Changing the amplitude of the input signal yields very similar results in terms of
the dynamic response. By comparing the results presented in this paper to those in
[13] we can see several advantages of the proposed system. The overall system has
improved characteristics. In particular, the response time is reduced by 25% from 0.4
s to 0.3 s. In addition, the proposed DPFM uses a sampling rate of 1 kHz while the
system in [13] was based on a 10 kHz controller. Therefore, the proposed system can
be implemented in a more cost-efficient way by using simpler and less expensive
hardware.
Conclusions
In this paper, we considered the process of structural transformation of the
digital control system with dynamic digital pulse-frequency modulator, whose
behavior is described by difference equations, supplemented by logical relations. To
exclude the logical conditions of DPFM there was built an equivalent discrete
nonlinear digital system, where parametric connections are replaced to the signal
ones.
Our simulation experiments demonstrate that our nonlinear control system offers
adequate representation of the digital dynamic pulse-frequency modulator and has
advantages compared to previously developed solutions.
Due to the results of the experiment we can clearly see that the characteristics of
the overall system have been improved for 25% than the previous result.
Furthermore, the proposed DPFM uses a sampling rate of 1 kHz while the system in
[13] was based on a 10 kHz controller.
Future work in this area can be conducted in the field of mathematical modeling
of the systems in the form of functional discrete-time Volterra series and their linear
approximations. The latter can be used to study dynamic accuracy, and also to
perform synthesis of digital control systems of this class.
References
1. J. Wu, S. Wo, and G. Lu, Asymptotic stability and stabilization for a class of
nonlinear descriptor systems with delay, Asian Journal of Control, Vol. 13, 361–367,
2011.
2. F.M. Malik, M. B. Malik, and K. Munawar, Sampled-data state feedback
stabilization of a class of nonlinear systems based on Euler approximation, Asian
Journal of Control,Vol. 13, 186–197, 2011.
3. A.S. Ghaffari, S. H. Tabatabaei Oreh, R. Kazemi, and M. A. R. Karbalaei, An
intelligent approach to the lateral forces usage in controlling the vehicle yaw rate,”
Asian Journal of Control, Vol. 13, 213–231, 2011.
4. B.H. Aitchanov, B. K. Kurmanov, and T. F. Umarov
Dynamic pulse-
frequency modulation in objects control with delay, Asian Journal of Control, Vol.
14, No. 5, 1–7, 2011
5. Y.S. Popkov, A.A. Ashimov, and K.S. Asaubaev, Statistical theory of
automatic systems with dynamic pulse-frequency modulation, Nauka, Moscow, 1988.
6. B.H. Aitchanov, Time-domain quantization in dynamic pulse-frequency
systems with transport delay. Poisk, Natural and technical sciences series, No. 3, 219223, Almaty, 2003
7. B.H. Aitchanov, On the analysis of stochastic digital pulse-frequency
modulation systems with transport delay, Poisk, Natural and technical sciences series,
No. 2, 209-214, Almaty, 2004
8. A.A. Ashimov, K.S. Asaubaev, and B.H. Aitchanov, Statistical analysis of
digital integral pulse-frequency modulation control systems of objects with transport
delay. Development of automatic control systems for technological processes. 3-10,
KazPTI, Almaty, 1983.
9. B.H. Aitchanov, Pulse-frequency modulation control systems with transport
delay, Proc. 3rd International Science and Practice Conference “Science and
Innovations,” 54-58, GRAD-BG, Sofia, 2007.
10.
M. Schwartz, Information transmission, modulation, and noise,
McGraw-Hill, 1970.
11.
R.W. Rochelle, Pulse-Frequency Modulation, IRE Transactions on
Space Electronics and Telemetry, 107-111, 1962.
12.
G. Gestri, Pulse-frequency modulation in neural systems, Biophysical
Journal, Vol. 11, 98-109, 1971.
13.
B. Friedland, Design of Observer-Based Pulse-Frequency-Modulated
Feedback Control Systems, Proc. IECON 2010, 36th Annual Conference of IEEE
Industrial Society, 187-192, 2010
14.
Y.Z. Tsypkin, Theory of nonlinear pulse systems, Nauka, 1973.
15.
K.S. Asaubaev, A.A. Ashimov, and Y.S. Popkov, Modeling of automatic
control systems with pulse-frequency modulation, Automatics and Telemechanics,
No. 2, 52-63, 1977.
16.
Y.A. Lim, Modeling of digital control systems with dynamic pulse-
frequency modulation. Automatics and Telemechanics, 172-176, 1978.
17. H. Guretskiy, Analysis and synthesis of control systems with delay,
Mashinostroenie, 1974
J21310-048
UDC 681.518.2:159
Kol`sunov A.A., Kompaniets V.S.
ON THE APPLICATION OF INFORMATION-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
“CHART 2020” IN THE CABINET OF VISION CORRECTION
Southern Federal University,
Taganrog, Tchehova 2, 347928
In this report briefly describes the features and trial operation results of
information-diagnostic system “Chart 2020” (developed at the SFedU Department of
Psychology and Life Existence).
Key words: information-diagnostic system, ophthalmology.
The human visual perception evaluation is a daily demanded procedure in
ophthalmology and psychology. However, in many psychological and medical
institutions in the country, especially in the periphery, outdated and inefficient
methods and instruments are used for this. To solve the problem it was developed a
computer information-diagnostic system (IDS) “Chart 2020”, which basic
functionality allows:
- man visual acuity evaluating;
- the presence of refractive errors detecting (with M. Amsler grids, circles
Snellen, etc.);
- patient vision nature determining: the binocular is the norm, the simultaneous
monocular (in detecting abnormalities in binocular vision, strabismus angle measured
and the type of deviation);
- anomalies in color perception detecting (using polychromatic tables EB
Rabkin, Isshhary);
- automating the filling of electronic and printed forms, forms with detailed
information on the diagnosis or identified color perception anomalies with expert
comments.
These features of the developed system have superior functionality then the
closest analogue ('Vizus 2 "developer Astroinform SPE).
Figure 1 provides an example of a start screen form IDS with a menu.
Fig. 1. The example of a start screen form IDS Chart 2020 with a menu
Interface features of IDS are the two pop-up menu bar (see Fig. 1). Normally,
they are hidden, without disturbing the main use of the program, and "float" only
when the mouse cursor is in the bottom or right side of the screen. Bottom panel control menu - allows you to select modes IDS, collapse, disable the application,
manage the red line, and display charts, diagnostic cards. Right panel - menu "Chart»
allows you the selection of various diagnostic tools in several categories, display user
manual, diagnostic and reference information.
Figure 2 provides an example of an options screen form IDS.
Fig. 2. The example of an options screen form IDS Chart 2020
During the trial operation of IDS Chart 2020 from 25/05/2012 to 10/01/2013 in
the Cabinet of vision correction (Taganrog, MOH License: LO - 61-01-000697,
www.ккз-таганрог.рф) was adopted more than 2500 patients with the following
results:
1. The time spent on preschool children visometry is significantly reduced due
to the addition of special tables Orlova-Sivceva.
2. It has become possible to check visually impaired visual acuity without the
account of fingers (vis <0.1).
3. The ease of visometry is increased: staff does not need to point the table; the
remote control is used to switch tables and select techniques in IDS.
4. Many diagnostic procedures are simplified with maintaining the reliability:
- assessment of the vision nature (the colors for each eye in the IDS can be
configured for currently available filters);
- astigmatism identifying through the introduction of a number of tests;
- color perception anomalies type determining (procedure time is reduced to 5
minutes by automating the calculation).
Thus, with the introduction of IDS Chart 2020 we can expect:
- the reduction of the reception time during the complex patient examination in
the ophthalmology office up to 10-15 minutes,
- the increasing of the staff work comfort and quality.
In the current version of the program the additional options are implemented to
configure IDS, for example, to work in low-light conditions of working place, the
heat and humidity are high , it is impossible to install the projector signs etc.
J21310-049
UDC 621.787.4
Bobrovskii N.M., Melnikov P.A., Bobrovskii I.N.,
Ezhelev A.V., Lukyanov A.A.
LINES OF SURFACE PLASTIC DEFORMATION OF MACHINE
DETAILS DEVELOPMENT
Tolyatti State University, Russia, Tolyatti
The problem of increasing reliability of machine details has become increasingly
important due to the increased mechanical and thermal intensity of modern designs
[15, 19]. At the same time, the increase in static strength of parts is not always
equivalent to an increase in their durability, since with increasing point of maximum
load increases the probability of fatigue and brittle parts failures. The use of highstrength steels is limited to their great sensitivity to stress concentration, various
surface defects, contamination of non-metallic inclusion, hydrogenation. Therefore,
when along with high elasticity values details must have great resistance to variable
and dynamic loads, stress corrosion, the use of high-strength steels is ineffective [1,
2].
Of the modern hardening means numerous arsenal (which are not the same, and
sometimes in different directions affects individual properties) is not always easy to
choose the optimal type of hardening for that particular case. Comparison of the
effectiveness of different means to increase the details service durability (oriented
cold-hardering,
various
chemicothermal
processing
and
thermomechanical
processing; superficial hardening, steel refining, etc.) makes it possible to identify
areas of their rational use, taking into account the factors limiting parts reliability in
these conditions.
It has been established that the products constructive durability is largely
determined by the structure and the surface layers properties. Various methods are
used to superficial layers hardening of parts, the main of which are: case-hardening,
chemicothermal processing, surface plastic deformation (SPD), the surface
thermomechanical processing.
The category of the hardening surface processing methods should include strain
hardening methods. The most prevalent of these is the SPD method. Due to the
peculiarities of the influence this method allows to realize the potential properties,
such as high-strength steels. This type of reinforcement creates the real possibilities
of using high-strength steels for details with design and technological stress
concentrators even when the significant overloads take a place [1]. Fatigue strength
of high-strength steels with martensitic structure, with other things being equal, is
determined by the combined influence of the four main materials characteristics:
static strength, residual stresses, resistance to brittle fracture, and sensitivity to stress
concentration. The value of each characteristic shown accordingly in period of the
crack nucleation and development. If the static strength is essential for resistance to
crack nucleation, the brittle failure resistance plays a crucial role in the resistance to
crack development, and residual stress and sensitivity to stress concentration realize
their influence on both stages of the fatigue process. Considering the large influence
of not only the strength but also the ductility on the high-strength steels fatigue limit,
it is important to evaluate the influence of these parameters in the hardening with
SPD.
The different versions of the known methods hardening processing classification
are given (fig.1). [1, 3].
Comparative analysis of hardening processing methods by rolling-off and
diamond burnishing.
This paper describes a new technology finishing and hardening processing by
burnishing with wide selfplaced tool - burnisher.
This method has some advantages in comparison with known methods of
hardening the mechanism and rate of impact on the workpieces surface. Wide
burnishing also has features that are inherent to analogs: rolling-off hardening by
roller (or ball) and diamond burnishing [12].
Fig.1. Classification of SPD methods
The paper [4] describes technological methods of SPD, which relates to the
methods of static surface deformation.
SPD - it is details processing by pressure (without cuttings), which deform the
surface layer only. SPD is perform by a tool which deformable element (balls, rollers,
or a different figures configuration) interact with the surface by the rolling, sliding or
intrusion schemes (fig.2).
In these elementary schemes or a combination of methods are based all the SPD
methods.
Fig.2. Basic schemes of deforming elements interaction with work surface: a
– rolling; b – sliding; c - intrusion
When rolling is SPD scheme, roller or ball is pressed against the details surface
with a fixed force P, is moved relative to it, making at the same time a rotation
around its axis (fig.2, a).
In the local contacts area of the deforming element with work surface hearth of
plastic deformation appears, which moves with the tool, due to the surface layer
sequentially deforms at the depth h, equal to the depth distribution of deformation
zone. The size of deformation zone depends on technological factors processing force P, shapes and sizes of the deforming element, flow, hardness of material, etc.
The same factors depends on plastic deformations intensity of the surface layer
and as a result - a qualitative changes in it: reducing the surface roughness, increased
hardness, higher yield point of the metal, the appearance of compressive residual
stresses, etc. In turn, with the correct technology the state change (modification) of
the surface layer can increase the durability and other performance properties of
details [5, 6, 7, 8].
In accordance with GOST standard 18296-72 SPD with rolling tool is called roll
forming. In turn, roll forming subdivides into rolling-off and flattening-out,
depending on what surfaces are: convex (shafts, fillets), flat or concave (such as
holes).
The advantage of roll forming is friction reduction between the deforming
element and the work material.
In a tool for roll forming rolling elements mounted on bearings or placed in
separators.
Burnishing and mandrelling are SPD methods, deforming elements are working
with sliding scheme (fig.2, b). For these processes deforming elements should be
made of materials with high hardness (diamond, hard alloy, etc.) and unwilling to
grasp adhesively to the work material.
Burnishing is used for hardened steels and details with a low stiffness SPD, i.e.
when it is impossible to apply the roll forming process. The disadvantages of the
burnishing are low productivity and low tool life [4].
Mandrelling (synonyms: deforming streching, calibration) is used for holes
processing. This high-production process combines the features of finishing,
hardening, calibration and forming processes. Forming processing is used for getting
a splines and other small corrugations on the details surface.
The thickness of the hardened layer at mandrelling is adjusted by tightness, i.e.
the difference between the diameters of the deforming element and the hole. Under
the certain proportion of tightness and wall thickness the plastic deformation can lead
to the expansion of the cylinders diameter, because of holes calibration will occur.
There are combined processing methods, which combine SPD with other
physical and mechanical influence on the workpiece, such as a laser, application of
ultrasonic vibrations [16], the electric current through the tools contact point,
preheating or precooling of the workpiece, etc. The SPD methods combined with the
cutting processes are also combined processing methods.
There are various designs of tools for roll forming, burnishing and mandrelling
that are designed for a wide range of details and surfaces.
Roll forming, burnishing and deforming streching are static surface deformation
methods. Shape stability and deformation zones size in the stationary phase of the
process is a hallmark of these methods.
Along with these methods in engineering there are a number of SPD methods
based on a dynamic (impact) tools influence to the surface.
Rolling-off and diamond burnishing are the most simple and effective methods
of finishing and hardening processing. Despite the fact that roller burnishing or ball
burnishing has a place rolling with sliding, and in diamond burnishing – sliding,
between them there is a similarity in the microprofiles formation mechanism,
deformation of the surface layer and in the ratio of the forces and friction coefficients.
This similarity makes it possible to establish some general rules for both processes,
on basis of may be established the rationality of their application, and optimal
processing modes described in paper [9].
Diamond burnishing. In diamond burnishing the deforming tool is a diamond
crystal, which is situated in a special holder. Most often, diamond is fixed by
soldering with silver solder, which has a relatively low melting point (600-650 °C).
Universal burnisher (fig.3) consists of a frame 1 and diamond 2.
Fig.3. Diamond burnisher
Burnisher is mounted in special device, installed in the tool-holder of lathe.
Pressure at burnishing with the elastic contact is usually created using a calibrated
spring. When the workpiece rotates a tool has a traverse motion. Burnishing is
performed in conditions of friction, which distinguishes this process from rolling-off.
Due to the high hardness of diamond burnishing successfully used for finishing and
hardening processing of various materials details, in particular, of hardened steel in
different structural states.
At the burnishing process diamond practically little deformed. Because of this,
and because of the small spheres radius of its working part (in practice the radius of
the sphere diamond burnisher is applied to 0.5-3.5 mm), the contact surface of the
tool with the workpiece is negligible. This makes the creation of high contact
pressures required for the plastic deformation accomplishment with low normal
forces transmitted by deforming tool onto the details working surface. The normal
force at burnishing is 5-30 kgf, which is much less in comparison with ball
burnishing. In addition to high hardness diamond has a low friction coefficient of
metal and high thermal conductivity. Opportunity of polishing its spheres working
area with a high degree of purity in the burnishing process provides a shiny surface
with low roughness.
At the diamond burnishing process the diamond tool is implemented in the metal
under the action of the normal force. On the surface of contact friction forces is
occurred. The intensity of external friction with SPD depends on the material
properties, value of the deforming stress, the mode and form of contact and adhesion
links between the tool and working surface. In the plastic contact (with burnishing),
the coefficient of friction includes deformation fdef and adhesion fadh components:
f = f def + f adh
(1)
Deformation component can be determined by the approximate formula:
f def = 0,55 ×
hI
,
R
(2)
hI - burnisher intrusion depth, and R - radius of its working surface.
The value of the adhesive component, particularly in the application of cooling
mixture, which reduces adhesive interaction, for most materials is negligible
(fadg=0,01...0,05) and depends on the work material and its roughness, and not on the
mode of processing [10]. It should be noted, that the burnishing of some materials
and, particular, titanium, adhesive interaction between diamond and working metal is
reinforced, so the coefficient of friction increases and titanium grains adhere to the
tools working surface. In such cases, the diamond burnishing is ineffective.
Research has shown that with an increase of the force PI friction coefficient
increases and reaches its maximum value at the optimum PI (fig.4). Coefficient
increment is justified by the simultaneous increase of the normal force and the depth
of burnishers intrusion, and by increase in deformation component fdef. With further
increase of the normal force intrusion of the tool is hampered, which reduce and then
stops increasing of deformation component.
Fig.4. Dependence of friction coefficient f from force in carburized steel
12H2N4A processed by diamond burnishing
Depth of the tools intrusion into the metal and, consequently, the friction
coefficient at burnishing significantly is depended on the metals hardness.
Experimental studies with burnishing with optimal forces different materials
established a correlation between the hardness and coefficient of friction.
With the increase of the hardness, the tool intrusion depth decreases, that leads
to reduce deformation component fdef, and therefore the friction coefficient (fig.5).
Fig.5. Dependence of friction coefficient from microhardness after different
steels processing by burnishing
The radius of the diamond sphere depends on the coefficient of friction, as
follows from (2). This influence is related to the change in the depth of intrusion by
the change of the radius. Flow and speed of the burnishing has some influence on the
friction.
It should be noted that the overall coefficient of friction at burnishing different
materials according to the article [10] is 0,03-0,12.
To reduce friction, increase tool life, cooling, and get less rough surface after
burnishing is used a cooling mixture: industrial oil 20 and sulfofrezol. According to
[11], with the diamond burnishing, the application of industrial oil tool wear is
reduced by almost in 5 times less in comparison with the processing without cooling
mixture.
The main parameters of the hardening by rolling-off process and diamond
burnishing.
In diamond burnishing and rolling-off processes roughness of finished surface
and hardening of the detail depends on the process parameters. When process
parameters set correctly detail acquires high performance properties. Conversely, a
bad choice, even one of the parameters, such as pressure, can lead to partial
destruction of the surface (delamination) and reduce details durability. The depth of
the hardened layer is determined by unit pressure on the contact area and its size. The
degree of hardening depends on the pressure. This is confirmed by the shallow depth
of hardening and increased surface hardness, obtained as a result of shot-blasting. At
impact the pellets, in spite of high pressure, the small size of the contact areas leads
to the spread of plastic deformation at a shallow depth.
Depth of hardening associated with the diameter of the impression when
spherical punch is indented, with the size of ellipse when elastic contact of two parts,
with the value of tools and details convergence or unit pressure and the balls
diameter. In all cases, either directly or indirectly size of the contact area matters.
Special experiments in [9] established the dependence of the hardening depth Δ
from the size of contact area Fk. This dependence obtained at ball burnishing (fig.6),
expressed by the formula:
D = k × n Fk ,
(3)
k and n - coefficients depending on the size of the instrument, as well as on the
size and material of detail.
Fig.6. Dependence of the hardening depth from the contact area by roller
burnishing with the pressure: 1 - 250 kgf/mm2; 2 - 140 kgf/mm2
For details of average size of 45 steel processed by ball burnishing with
diameter 10 mm, pressure in contact 140-250 kgf/mm2, coefficient k = 1,48...2,0, and
n=2. Coefficient k increases with pressure increasing.
The main parameters of the burnishing and rolling-off processes are: 1) the
mean contact pressure p; 2) contact area Fk; 3) the value of transmitted normal force
from the instrument to the work surface; 4) the size of the deforming tool R; 5)
traverse motion s; 6) processing speed v. The first two parameters that determine the
effectiveness of hardening depends on the power, tool dimensions, material
properties and dimensions of the workpiece. Traverse motion affects the work surface
roughness and evenness deformation in the axial direction. In addition, the traverse
motion determines the amount of repetitive deformations of each surfaces part, which
may affect the hardening and residual stresses. The course of the deformation process
in the center, hardening gradient, and quantity of evolved heat depends on the
processing speed. The remaining processing parameters include the number of
working strokes and the type of lubricant.
Technological maps shall specify such parameters that controlled during
processing. Above all, they include the normal force PN , flow, number of passes and
the size of the deforming tool.
The technological process of burnishing with wide selfplaced tool.
In Tolyatti State University proposed and developed a new technological
process finishing and hardening treatment by burnishing with wide selfplaced tool.
Work [12] generalizes the first research results and practical application of the
new technology wide burnishing, it shows the original process flowsheets, designs of
the tools and technical devices for a wide burnishing processing details of structural
steel and high-duty cast iron with machine processing time 6...10 sec. It is possible to
replace the previously applied technology grinding with abrasive belts cooled by
kerosene. In comparison with other possible alternative method of burnishing by
diamond indenter with a point contact and traverse motion a new wide burnishing
process by cemented-carbide tool can improve the performance of the same
processing parts type up to 75 times.
Possible technological schemes of burnishing with wide selfplaced tool are
shown in (fig.7). Burnishing head design is shown in (fig.8).
Fig.7. Main technological schemes of wide burnishing process with wide
selfplaced tool
Fig.8. Wide selfplaced tools design
The process of burnishing with wide selfplaced tool is close to the traditional
burnishing with diamond spherical indenter. In both cases, the hardening occurs in
sliding friction with intense loading in the contact zone.
The roller burnishing as wide burnishing is a highly productive method of
finishing and hardening processing, as deforming the details surface across its entire
width [14]. Its advantage is hardening in the rolling friction, which is more favorable
in comparison with sliding friction. To perform the modern precision and quality
processing requirements it is necessary to ensure the basing [17, 18]. Structurally, the
device for rolling-off more complicated than wide burnishing device, as it is
necessary to provide rollers self-adjustment relatively the working surface of the
detail and its rotation without binding under heavy pressure. Implementation of the
wide burnishing process needs in a special burnishing tool, which design was
developed in a small innovative company in Tolyatti State University [13].
Wide burnishing process allows to get the necessary productivity for mass
production with reducing the roughness of the workpiece and increase the
microhardness of the surface layer. For this reason, the mass car production in a
continuous release for a long time a large number of processing details the preference
for introduction was given to the method of burnishing with wide selfplaced tool.
Today, with the application of wide burnishing technology processed more than 10
million details.
References:
1. Balter M.A. Uprochnenie detalej mashin. M. : Mashinostroenie, 1978. 184 p.
2. Brondz L.D., Voronov V.F. Vlijanie poverhnostnogo uprochnenija na
sherohovatost' vysokoprochnyh stalej pri povyshennyh temperaturah ispytanija. - V.
kn.: Poverhnostnyj naklep vysokoprochnyh materialov. – M. : ONTI-VIAM, 1971. P.
213-221.
3. Rykovskij B.P., Smirnov V.A., Shhetinin G.M. Mestnoe uprochnenie detalej
poverhnostnym naklepom. - M. : Mashinostroenie, 1985. 152 p.
4.
Smeljanskij
V.M.
Mehanika
uprochnenija
detalej
poverhnostnym
plasticheskim deformirovaniem. M. : Mashinostroenie, 2002. 299 p.
5. Ardashinkov B.N., Vitenberg Ju.R. Issledovanie vlijanija sherohovatosti i
naklepa na iznosostojkost' // Tehnologicheskie metody povyshenija kachestva
poverhnosti detalej mashin. - Leningrad, 1978. P. 162-167.
6. Balandin V.M., Gur'ev A.V. Vlijanie poverhnostnogo plasticheskogo
deformirovanija na iznosostojkost' normalizovannoj stali // Trudy Volgogradskogo
politehnicheskogo instituta. - Volgograd, 1975. №7. P. 9-17.
7.
Vejcman
M.G.,
Vajnshtejn
V.G.
Uprochnenie
titanovyh
splavov
poverhnostnym plasticheskim deformirovaniem // "Vestnik mashinostroenija", 1975.
P. 73-75.
8.
Dubenko
V.V.
Obrabotka
detalej
almaznym
vyglazhivaniem
//
Mashinostroitel', 1974. №34. P. 36-37.
9. Papshev D.D. Otdelochno-uprochnjajushaja obrabotka poverhnostnym
plasticheskim deformirovaniem. - M. : Mashinostroenie, 1978. 152 s.
10. Torbilo V.M. Silovoe vyglazhivanie // Sovershenstvovanie processov
abrazivno-almaznoj i uprochnjajushhej tehnologii v mashinostroenii. - Perm', 1983.
P. 57-60.
11. Granovskij Je.G. Izmerenie iznosa almaznyh vyglazhivatelej // Izvestija
vuzov. - 1968. №11. P. 128-131.
12. Bobrovskij N.M. Razrabotka nauchnyh osnov processa obrabotki detalej
poverhnostno-plasticheskim
deformirovaniem
bez
primenenija
smazochno-
ohlazhdajushhih zhidkostej // Tol'jattinskij Gosudarstvennyj Universitet. - Tol'jatti,
2008. 170 p.
13. http://tehnomasch.ru/ (date request: 12.03.2013).
14. Bobrovskij N.M., Mel'nikov P.A., Bobrovskij I.N., Ezhelev A.V., Lukyanov
A.A. Tehnologicheskoe obespechenie tribologicheskih svojstv sal'nikovyh sheek
detalej mashin // Izvestija Samarskogo nauchnogo centra RAN. 2012, volume 14.
№1(2). P. 340-343.
15. Zaharov O.V. Stabil'nost' silovogo zamykanija kontakta pri bescentrovom
shlifovanii na nepodvizhnyh oporah // STIN. 2011. №7. P. 8-10.
16. V.I. Malyshev A.S. Selivanov, A.S. Petrova Fizicheskie osobennosti
plasticheskoj deformacii poverhnostnogo sloja pri mehanicheskoj obrabotke v
ul'trazvukovom pole // Mezhdunarodnaja nauchno-prakticheskaja konferencija
«Nauchnye issledovanija i ih prakticheskoe primenenie. Sovremennoe sostojanie i
puti razvitija ‘2012». – Issue 3. Volume 7. - Odessa : KUPRIENKO, 2012. P. 36-43.
17. Bobrovskij S.M., Malysheva E.Ju. Arhitektura informacionnoj sistemy
ocenki integrirovannyh sistem menedzhmenta // Vektor nauki Tol'jattinskogo
gosudarstvennogo universiteta. – Tol'jatti, 2012. №1(19). P. 64-67.
18. Gorshkov B.M., Remneva O.Ju., Vylegzhanin D.V., Samohina N.S. Opytnojeksperimental'naja ustanovka dlja ocenki jeffektivnosti povyshenija tochnosti
koordinatno-rastochnyh stankov // Vektor nauki Tol'jattinskogo gosudarstvennogo
universiteta. – Tol'jatti, 2011. №2(16). P. 121-124.
19. R. Dikov Programma dlja opredelenija razmerov rabochih jelementov
instrumentov dlja vyrubki i probivki. Proizvodstvo. Tehnologija. Jekologija.
Nauchnye trudy. Sb. monografij №11, volume 1. – M : STANKIN, 2008. P. 176-180.
J21310-050
UDC 664.7/05 (075/8)
Denisko O.A., Tkachuk A.I.
EXPERIMENTAL STUDY OF TECHNOLOGICAL EFFICIENCY
VIBRATING PEELING GRAIN
National University of Life and Environmental Sciences of Ukraine, Ukraine
The report discusses the experimental set of quality indicators based process
flaking grain by disk machine vibration action from managed parameters: amplitude,
frequency and direction of the disturbing force of vibrator, the angular velocity of the
rotary disc and grain moisture.
Keywords: Shelling disk machine vibratory action, experiment, performance
scaling, capacity
There are many methods and machines for shelling grain during processing it on
cereal. In the literature review of research and methods of disk shelling machines
traditional design with rotating and fixed disks work [1]. The analysis of these studies
showed that they meet the quality of the process, the output of cereals, unground
understated excessive grain and energy loss, low performance and so on. Potential is
shelling machine disk vibration action, which has vibratory disk forced vibration
relative to the rotational drive grain between drives cyclically deformed [2]. The
current technology vibration flaking grain is not verified in practice that significantly
reduces the efficiency of their use. The purpose of research - qualitative indicators set
depending buckwheat hulling process of dynamic parameters of the machine, the
angular velocity of the rotary disc and grain moisture.
The program of experiments included determination of technological efficiency
vibrating shelling buckwheat at different dynamic and kinematic parameters and
modes of reasoning and rational parameters shelling machine vibrating action. To
assess the quality of the scaling used conventional criteria [1,3] generalized
coefficient of technological efficiency shelling machine E, peeling coefficients K,
integrity kernel Kі and capacity machine Q :
Е = K K і , K = (С1 - С 2 ) / С1 , K і = Dk / (Dk + Dd + Dm ) ,
Q = G /t ,
(1)
де С1 , С 2 – content in corn seeds not husked inlet and outlet of the machine;
Dk , Dd – number of whole and crushed grains, resulting in the peeling;
Dm – amount of flour obtained in the process of peeling;
G – mass processed grains during t , s .
Methods included pre-sorting experiments buckwheat six factions, hydrothermal
processing of grain before peeling and determine its moisture content, shelling corn
and calculation of (1) according to sieve analysis and timing process. Studies were
conducted on the experimental setup [3] with elastic supports oscillating parts with
different unbalanced mass vibrators and schemes of their installation (Fig. 1).
Regulating devices vibrators changed relative amplitude of disturbing force
Ap = D B / p ( D B – corner placement sector goods) in the range 0 - 0.9 in
increments 0,3, angle of
a
in the range 0 – p / 2 in increments p / 6 , stepwise
transfer - angular velocity of rotary disc within 15 - 45 rad/s. Grain moisture change
corresponding selection parameters hydrothermal treatment within 16 - 22% in
increments of 2%.
Fig.1. Apparatus: 1 - rotary disk, 2 - oscillating disc,
3 - elastic support, 4 – vibrator, 5 - grain.
For the experiments were selected sample of buckwheat in accordance with
GOST 10852-86 and GOST 13586.3-83. Would crack corn at different fixed values
of the parameters Ap , a , w , і B and at constant frequency w1 = 157 s -1 of
maximum inertia force dipoles vibrators Pm = 180 Н . To determine the effect of
twisting vibration disk 2 on the coefficients of technological efficiency, would crack
at the grain kernel and humidity B =20%, which was chosen experimentally for
quality under cyclic loading grain compression ( a = 0 , moment of inertia forces
vibrators Pjxy × d B sin a = 0 ). According to the experiment constructed a graph K, Kі ,
E , Q of varying parameters (Figure 2 - 4).
The maximum value K = 0,825 obtained for the parameters: В = 22%,
w = 45 s -1 , w1 = 157 s -1 , a = 0,
Q = 0,045 kg / s . From these graphs shows that
the cyclic loading with increasing compression Ap to 0,8 increases the coefficient
scaling K is approximately two times increase from changes in grain moisture is
almost constant and amounted to about 25%. From the graph (Figure 3) shows that
the coefficient of the integrity of the nucleus K decreases with increasing amplitude
of the disturbing force Ap and increases with humidity B. The intensity of growth K
in excess of moisture in B > 20% significantly reduced, so there is no reason to
increase it. The most informative indicator is the ratio of performance scaling E,
which reflects the influence of vibration load and humidity on grain yield peeled with
a maximum content of whole kernel to select rational mode shelling machine with the
highest yield of the whole kernel.
Fig.2. Dependence of the amplitude scaling K disturbing force at different grain
moisture: w = 45 s -1 , w1 = 157 s -1 , a = 0,
Q = 0,045 kg / s .
Fig.3. Dependence of the core integrity K and efficiency E of the amplitude
scaling disturbing force Ap at different humidity kernel.
Positively affect the performance scaling angular fluctuations oscillating disk.
They occur when a rise in amplitude and grain points discs variable shear stress.
Within the angle a changes from 0 to p / 2 these load increase efficiency ratio
scaling (Fig. 4, a), which reaches a maximum value of 0,97 at a » p / 2 .
Fig.4. dependence of the coefficients K, Kі , E the angle of installation
a
with optimal value of amplitude disturbing force: Ap= 0,70; ω= 45 s-1;
w1 = 157 s-1, Â = 20%, Q = 0,045 kg / s .
Fig.4. dependence of the coefficients K, Kі , E and performance the machine:
Q , (кg/s) rotational speed of the disc w (rad/s) at rational values of
parameters:
w1 = 157 s -1 , В = 20%, a = 580 .
References:
1. Ginsburg M.E. Technology mill products. - M.: Kolos, 1981. - 256.
2. Unіversal shelling machine. Utility patent number 41,495 UA / Datsishin O.V.,
Tkachuk O.A., Tkachuk A.І.; Announced 17.12.2008, Publ. 25.05.2009, Bull. № 10,
2009.
3. Tkachuk A.І. Eksperimentalnaya installation for the study of vibrational peeling
grain / A.І. Tkachuk, O. Denisko. / / Scientific Bulletin of NUBіP Ukraine, Issue 144,
Volume 3, the series of "Technology is the power industry of agriculture" - K.: 2010. № 3, 274-280
J21310-051
U.D.C. 631.354.2.076
Boyko A., **Bondarenko O.
RESERVATION AS AN EFFECTIVE METHOD OF ENSURING THE
RELIABILITY OF COMPLEX AGRICULTURAL MACHINERY
National University of Bioresources and Environmental Sciences of Ukraine
**Nikolaev National Agrarian University, Nikolaev, Krilova St. 17a, 54038
In this report examined ways to improve the reliability of complex agricultural
equipment by reserving its component systems
Keywords: technic, reliability, redundancy
Complications of agricultural equipment and giving it versatility at reduced
energy performing operations poses new requirements to ensure the required level of
reliability of machines.
For mechanical systems, which basically is the modular units of agricultural
machinery, higher reliability can be achieved in two ways. The first of these is
associated with an increase in the reliability of components (parts) of the
systems. This way is realized mainly in finding and implementing new, more durable,
wear-resistant and corrosion-resistant materials, methods and technologies to
strengthen the systems.
The second way involves structural changes in the design decisions of various
components and assemblies. Unfortunately, this promising trend has not got far
enough amplification in mechanical systems including agricultural machines. There
are different reasons for this. First, the structural changes involve the introduction of
additional elements is extremely necessary for the functionality of the
system. Second, structural reservations require new solutions in building structures,
which in turn leads to more unconventional approach to the development of machines
to the need for analysis of their potential and reliability in the design stage.
Towards structural reserving both unloaded (passive) and loaded (active) for
mechanical systems have done very little. Each of these types of redundancy has its
advantages and disadvantages.
The concept of passive reservation should include the necessity of the
introduction of technical system of determined range and number of parts fixed as
reserve parts, a resource which is smaller than the total machines’ resource. This
type of reservation also includes various possible regulation, which are expected in
the construction of machines and are caused by the amortization of the parts,
vibration and changes in their relative position, with re-working, regrinding etc.
Thus, the necessity of passive reservation is dictated by the natural processes of
exploitation and loss of operability of devices and nodes in consequence of
manifestation of certain types of damages.
Agricultural
machinery
basically
refers
as
mechanically
renewable
systems. Periods of its cyclical recoveries when damaging of certain parts and
components.
The renovation of normal functioning of machines depends not only on the
provided by their maintainability and availability of spare elements provided by their
design but also by the technical equipment, the use of advanced methods of
diagnosing and staff base repair and maintenance. So support in machines’ operation
is the complex task and its solution depends not only on the construction of machines,
but also on the field of repairs and maintenance.
In the present communication equipment and the field of services can be
regarded as a complete single system, the effective functioning of which is essential
to achieving a specified level of reliability of machines.
In the actual operation of the machine is always gets old. Physically, this is due
to the processes of wearing, fatigue, corrosion, clogging etc. These processes
inevitably lead to a decrease in the level of work capacity, which can be characterized
by the intensity of failures.
At the same time repair and maintenance base of technical service machines
can be in different possible states of the reduction potential and capacity (aging) to
develop due to the introduction of new technologies and methods of maintenance and
repair.
For a comprehensive assessment of the status and trends of changes in the
general level of reliable machines performance, especially of seasonal destination,
you should consider a coherent system "machine - maintenance" in dynamic display
of their characteristics.
One of the common situations in the evolution of the considered system can be
events when with a total natural aging of equipment the repair maintenance base
remains at a certain achieved level . Then with the passive redundancy of individual
parts and components, states and transitions of the system presented by following
scheme (Fig. 1).
m10
l00
l0'0
m11
l10
1
0
l10'
Figure. 1 States and transitions of the passive redundancy with aging
techniques and the same level of field maintenance.
The system starts with the working capacity of "00" as the main element that is
included in the work, and an additional reserve is serviceable. During operation laden
enabled element can stop, and then the system goes into a state of "10". It is
characterized by the fact that the first (main) element is stopped, and the second
(backup) serviceable and the whole system remains able to work. However, such a
transition is possible through an intermediate state "0" 0 ", which is artificially
introduced into the description of the system as a sham to simplify the task of
mathematical formalization of the system when the intensity of transitions from state
to state is variable. [1].
With a state of "10" when the system can only work on the backup item it goes
into a state of total abandonment, "11", through the second intermediate state "10 '".
As a result of actions to restore elements of the system it goes from the
incapable for working state "11" goes into "10" in the recovery of one of the elements
or the operation can completely original "00" in the recovery of both elements
(primary and backup).
In marked graph (Fig. 1)the arrow shows the possible transitions that occur with
intensities li and mi . Moreover li - Characteristics are failure rate, and mi Characteristics are intensities updates.
Thus a system with passive redundancy has two working capable states "00" and
"10" and one incapable "11" that characterizes its refusal.
Nowadays the loaded reservation has not found wide use in mechanical
engineering systems. Most examples of its effective use can be found in radio
electronics, computer engineering, electrical equipment, automatic systems [2, 3].
Yet more examples of active reservations are represented in biological systems,
where reliability problems become problems of evolutionary survival and
development of particular species.
To conduct the research in identifying the impact of gradual aging technology
for its reliability in the application of active reservation is possible by systematic
analysis in modeling the process of transition of the system researched in different
possible states and detection of probability in finding it in any condition.
Graphical description of the behavior of the duplicated system with loaded
reserve can be represented by the following delineated graph (Fig. 2)
As displayed in Figure graph has sufficiently developed structure. It contains six
states connected by relevant links of the system transitions from state to state.
The work begins with a system state of "00", referred the working capable
operation of the system when both elements (primary and backup) are in good early
position. In this case, the parallel connection of equivalent elements in active
redundancy has no difference between the primary and backup elements, they are
equal in maintaining the whole system reliability. Let’s aAssume that after inclusion
in the work with the gradual aging the loaded main element of the system
accumulates damage the whole system going into an intermediate state " 00 ' ".This
provision may have two ways of developing. Either, while continuing to work in the
prescribed mode, the system goes into a state when loaded (running) element refuse
" 01 ", or the backup element starts working and becomes loaded and in the result of
cumulative damage process the system transforms into a state of" 0 '0 ' ". From this
state, as from the state of" 01 " the system during prolonged operation in any case
goes to state" 0 '1 " which is characterized by failure of one element and accumulated
damage in another. This provision prevents a possible complete system failure when
both main and reserve items deny. This situation is described as " 11 ". The release of
it can only be the restoring of the system with its technical maintenance or repairing
till the initial state" 00 ".
Fig. 2. Marked graf of the states and transitions with the active laden
redundancy aging technique and constant level in the field of maintenance
Characteristic of this system with active redundancy, the presence of aging
techniques and adopted constant maintenance is its great "vitality" despite the
constant accumulation of damage. This means that with a properly chosen level of
reliability, it may be able to use it for a long time. Therefore the feature displayed on
the graph is that the only situation when the system loses the serviceability is in the
condition " 11 ". Other possible states indicates the serviceability of the
system. However, it is important to note that the detected working states are not
equivalent in safety margin and in their functional capabilities. In the latter, it
depends on the particular constructive solution of the system and its purpose.
Thus, without exaggeration, one could argue that to achieve the required level
of reliability of technical systems, especially complex ones, more attention should be
paid to the structural mass redundancy.
The problem of effective use of redundancy gets its particular relevance when
analyzing equipment failures based on actual conditions of use. In addition, the
determination of dynamics in change the reliability depending on the condition of the
infrastructure maintenance machines is today of great practical importance.
References:
1. Ushakov I. Technical reliability systems. Directory / I. Ushakov. - M.: Radio
and Communications, 1985. - 606 p.
2. Azarskov V. Reliability of systems management and automation. Textbook /
Azarskova V, Strelnikov V. - K.: NAU, 2004. – 164 p.
3. Volkovich V. Models and methods for reliability optimization of complex
systems / Volkovich V., Voloshin A., Zaslavsky V., Ushakov I. - Kiev: Naukova
Dumka, 1993. – 311 p.
J21310-052
U.D.C. 631.355.4
Gruban V.
THEORETICAL ANALYSIS STRUCTURAL AND KINEMATICS
PARAMETERS DEVICE FOR CLEANING HEADS TO DEVICE COMBINE
FOR COLLECTION OF CORN
Nikolaev National Agrarian University, Nikolaev, Krilova St. 17a, 54038
In
the
article
it
was
got dependences and the basic structural and
kinematics parameters of cob-peeling device.
Key-words: corn-gathering machines, cob-peeling devices, pressuring device.
Inroduction. The technical level of corn gathering combines as well as of all
agricultural machines, is determined by the degree of perfection in basic working organs
and indexes of quality of implementation in technological process, its reliability,
power-consumption and resource-demanding. The quality of implementation in
technological process criteria are regulated by agrotechnical requirements on a
machine for collection of corn on grain. Without the observance of these
requirements no corn-gathering technique can be called modern and effective and it
cannot be competitive.
Analysis of previous researches results. The great work on the experimental and
the
theoretical study in this field
are conducted by the
different research institutes of the former USSR and designer bureau of the Kherson
combine plant. Deep theoretical researches dedicated to the calculations of cobpeeling devices were carried out by such famous scientists as A.Buyanov,
V.Bondarjov, M. Reznyk etc. But these researches do not give the necessary data for
resolving number of tasks in the calculation of cob-peeling devices, they mostly
explain the questions of the calculations of their passing features and the efficiency of
corn-gathering machines. Existing modern elements of the theory methodologically
relies on the theory of the working machine’s efficiency, provided for other fields of
machine-building, the theory of machines and combines exploitation and the studying
of corn-gathering machines’ work into the virtual circumstances of exploitation[3].
The practice of corn-gathering machines design today requires to work out the
theory of the corn-gathering machine’s efficiency, which is tightly connects the
process of design and the real circumstances of exploitation. This could give the
possibility to detect the unproductive usage of working hours, to find the ways of its
increasing and to get the necessary data for prediction of the further machines
improving while designing them.
Exposition of basic material. Modern cob-peelling devices at best under certain
conditions are able to provide the degree of purification of cobs wrappers at 8690%. The degree of purification cobs from wrappers by cob-peeling devices depends
on many factors, including the length and amount of steam cleaning rollers, the angle
of the horizon and speed, the activity of the working surfaces of rollers and their
diameter, the presence of clamping devices and others.
The contact force clamping the fork blades has great influence on the quality of
cleaning process, which ultimately affects its amortization.
Fig. 1 shows the kinematics of the interaction of the clamping device with
rubber blades 2 and fork 1. Let’s consider the three most typical mutual position of a
single blade and fork: fig. 1a corresponds to the initial moment of contact, fig. 1b
shows the moment when the blade is curving to the position of max bending and
fig. 1c shows the moment when the blade is curving after passing the position
of max bending. Let’s consider the mathematical model of the interaction of the blade
at the time of max deformation. The rubber blade will assume a flat elastic rod with a
console fixing in it A (Fig. 2) Analysis of the blade as elastic beams - console shows
that it is subjected to great deformation of deflection.
For the mathematical description it should be used the theory of bending beams
with large deflection [1]. We believe that the console is influenced by the power P¹
attached to the free end of the console. According to [1] beam deformation equation
is:
EI
dq
= -M ,
dl
where E - modulus of elasticity of the material;
I - moment of inertia of the cord;
Θ - bending angle (angle of the line basins);
dl - element curve bending beam;
M - bending moment.
(1)
Fig. 1. Kinematics in interaction of clamping device
Fig. 2. Scheme of the great depression console:
1 - starting position, 2 - deflection position.
Moment of inertia of the beam:
I=
bh 3
,
12
where b - width of the blade;
h - the thickness of the blade.
(2)
The current length of the beam l lies in the range 0 ≤ l ≤ L where L - length of
the blade. The value of the curvature of the beam d Θ / dl is associated with a bend w
(x) known formula [1]:
d 2w
dq
dx 2
=
,
3/ 2
dl é
2ù
dw
æ
ö
ê1 + ç
÷ ú
êë è dx ø úû
(3)
In the case of small deformations w (dw / dx) 2 <1 formula (3) takes the form:
dq d 2 w
»
,
dl
dx 2
(4)
which is the basis of the linear theory of bending, but in this case it cannot be
applied. Bending equation (1) must be supplemented with boundary conditions:
at the fixed end:
l =0:
q =p /2 ,
(5)
at the free end:
l =1:
M =0
.
(6)
Thus, determining of the parameters of bending beam has boundary value
problem (1), (5), (6). Integrating equation (1) with the boundary conditions (5), (6)
we can get:
l=
where
In
EI
2p
p/2
ò
q
dq
cos q B - cos q
,
Θ - angle bending at the free end beam with l = L.
(7)
Fig. 3. Dependence of
L , y B , xB ,
bending in point B
Let’s makePerform some calculations. Fig. 3 shows the results of calculation and
Fig. 4 each max bending effect on the parameters Θ in the bending beam.
Wondering ratio
contact force
H/L
the curve
Defining the angle Θ B we’ll find
H / L(q B ) .
p1 .
æ IE
p1 = ç 2
è 2L
æqB
öç
÷ç
ø 0
è
2
ö
÷ ;
cos q - cos q B ÷
ø
dq
ò
(8)
or
æ IE
p1 = ç
è 2H 2
æqB
öç
÷ç
ø 0
è
ö
÷.
cos q - cos q B ÷
ø
cos q dq
ò
(9)
For easier calculation in Fig. 4 the graphs of functions are shown
æqB
f1 (q B ) = çç
è0
2
ö
÷ ;
cos q - cos q B ÷
ø
dq
ò
æqB
f 2 (q B ) = çç
è0
ò
2
ö
÷ .
cos q - cos q B ÷
ø
dq
(10)
(11)
Fig. 4. Influence of max bending
qB
on the parameters of bending beams
Conclusions. According to the conducted research theoretical and outgoing
dependencies of corn cob is pressed against cleaning rollers with its weight and force
of clamping blades. As a result of these forces action between the cob and rollers the
contact forces
N1 , N 2 .
heads. In addition, as
rollers. If
F1 > F2 ,
appears . In turn, forces
N1 ¹ N 2 , m1 ¹ m 2
F1 , F2
will seek to break the wrapper
by virtue of inequality
F1 ¹ F2
will fork rotation on
then the rotation will be clockwise when
F2 £ F1 ,
rotation is
counterclockwise.
References:
1. Agriculture of Ukraine: status, trends and prospects. Inform.-analyte.
collection. / Edited. P. Cabluka et al. - K.: IAE UAAS, 2003. - No. 6. - 763 p.
2. Balkarov R. Justification optimal parameters corn units. In.: Improved
performance of the machine and tractor units. Collection of scientific works. - M.:.
MIISP, 1985. - P. 84-86.
3. Rowdies A. The method of determination of the optimal kinematic modes of
clamping devices. / A. Rowdies // tractors and agricultural machinery. - 1965. - № 2.
- P. 19-21.
4. Cartridge P. Konopeltsev N. Substantiation of parameters and operating
modes of the device snapping stripper type. Tr. SAN Melitopol. T XVII. Issues of
agricultural mechanization, 1972. Pp. 42 - 45.
5. Marchenko V. Market machines. Features of and prospects for the market of
agricultural machinery in Ukraine. / V. Marchenko, M. Guz // News Machinery. 2009. Number 1. - P. 26.
J21310-053
UDC 69.059.7
Nechepurenko D.S., Epifantseva S.V.
THE CLASSIFICATION OF WAYS TO IMPROVE BUILDINGS
ENERGY EFFICIENCY OF RESIDENTIAL QUARTERS AT COMPLEX
RECONSTRUCTION AND HOUSING DEVELOPMENT
Prydniprovs’ka State Academy of Civil Engineering and Architecture
In this report we describe the process of energy saving forming at complex
reconstruction and housing development of residential quarters. We define main
possible ways to implement subsystem “forming energy saving of civil buildings of
residential quarter that has to be reconstructed”.
Key words: energy saving, complex reconstruction, housing development,
residential quarter, morphological analysis.
Ukraine’s unused potential of energy saving according to [1] is about 40%.
Therefore the question of residential buildings energy efficiency becomes urgent
today.
The energy efficiency improving in the residential sector is possible to achieve
by creating energy-efficient residential buildings (new construction) and by
improving energy efficiency of existing residential fund (reconstruction).
According to statistical information of commissioning housing for the last 10
years, it is possible to draw conclusion that basic reserve of increase of energy-saving
in a residential fund lies not in new construction, but in the field of reconstruction of
existent buildings (the complex reconstruction of residential buildings).
The concept of complex reconstruction of residential buildings [2] is based on
integrated urban development approach to solving problems, the essence of which is
that the choice of destinations and content reconstruction and repair of housing is
based on the incorporation of urban, historic, cultural and landscape value of building
area. Herewith the object of complex reconstruction is not a separate residential
building with a certain level of physical and moral deterioration, but building block
(residential quarter) and urban situation as a whole. The complexity of the approach
is determined by that all known events (major repair, modernization, construction,
renovation and demolition) are considered as equally possible, and their
implementation is for transforming and extending the lifecycle of outdated or
dangerous emergency residential fund and sealing buildings including urban
situation.
Energy saving at the complex reconstruction of residential buildings is forming
under the influence of two main groups of technical-organizational decisions:
technical-organizational decisions related to energy efficient building, and technicalorganizational decisions related to energy efficiency engineering systems (internal
and external).
The aim of this article is to explore the forming process of energy saving system
at complex reconstruction of residential structures and highlight possible ways to
implement the basic functions of this system.
For this purpose, first of all we allocate two subsystems:
1) The energy-saving forming of buildings in micro district (quarter) that has to
be reconstructed;
2) The energy-saving forming of engineering systems in micro district (quarter)
that has to be reconstructed.
For the selection of ways to implement the basic functions of these subsystems
we apply principles of morphological analysis.
Morphological analysis is a method for exploring all possible solutions to a
multi-dimensional, non-quantified problem. It consists of the following stages:
1) a description of the desired functional properties of the system;
2) identify the most complete list of the main functions of the system;
3) identify alternative ways to implement each function;
4) generating all possible systems, each of which consists of a chain that takes
into account exactly one way to implement each function;
5) evaluation of the effectiveness of variants;
6) selection of the most appropriate variant [3].
Within this article we will focus in more detail on third stage and consider the
first subsystem – the energy-saving forming of buildings in micro district (quarter),
that has to be reconstructed.
The objects of this subsystem is a set of residential and public buildings
(operating and projecting) that can be located within a residential quarter (micro
district) during the complex reconstruction and housing development. These are the
objects of outdated housing (two-stored, three-stored houses of old construction,
houses of the first mass series) and modern high-rise residential buildings, etc., and
also public and administrative buildings.
According to Directive 2010/31/EU of the European Parliament and of the
Council of 19 May 2010 on the energy performance of buildings [4], member states
shall ensure that by 31 December 2020, all new buildings are nearly zero-energy
buildings (passive houses). That is why it is appropriate to approximate indicators of
reconstructed buildings to passive building standards during the complex
reconstruction of residential buildings [5]:
- Annual heating demand of building is not more than 15 kWh/m² per year;
- Prevent the presence of “bridges of a cold”;
- Compact form of building construction;
- Passive use of solar energy through the building orientation to the south and
the shading lack;
- Improved glass units with special profiles and heat transfer coefficient of
window UW <0,8Wh/m² and g-Wert = 50%;
- Air tightness – pressure test result, n50 ≤ 0.6 h-1;
- Heat recovery ventilation, return rate of heat > 75%;
- Highly efficient devices with save electricity for household;
- Water heating using solar collectors or heat pump;
- Passive air heating through, for example, the ground heat exchanger.
Based on foreign and domestic experience, we can identify next ways to realize
the subsystem of the energy-saving forming of buildings in micro district (quarter) at
the complex reconstruction:
External walls:
- Increase the heat resistance of existing building envelope by 10%; by 20%:
- Outer heat preservation: plastering system (system of the fastened heat
preservation with subsequent finish plaster);
- Outer heat preservation: hinged-ventilated facades systems;
- Inner heat preservation;
- Using multilayer exterior panels with effective heat insulation and inflexible
links;
Windows:
- Reducing the number and area of openings to the rules of natural lighting;
- Insulation and sealing gaps around the perimeter of window and door
openings (polyurethane foam, foam strips with adhesive or sealing layer of porous
soft rubber, silicone, etc.);
- An extra glass or vacuum sealed one-, two-chamber double-glazed window;
- Using the warm-strips;
- Install external blinds and shutters designed to reduce infiltration, heat loss
and reduce overheating of buildings in summer;
- Replacement balcony blocks.
Roof or overlapping ceiling of the upper floor:
- Heat preservation of the overlapping ceiling of the upper floor;
- Heat preservation of pitch roof (between the rafters and over rafters);
- Heat preservation of flat roof ("cold" roof with insulation by pumping and
"warm" roof);
Basement or ground floor:
- Installation of insulated panels for ceiling;
- Heat insulation floor in the absence of basement;
- Floor heat insulation in heated basements.
The above methods can be defined as those relating to component parts of
building envelope.
However, energy efficiency of buildings and structures is also formed by
reconstruction of technical building systems:
Heating systems:
- Replacement of one-pipe heating system on two-pipe system;
- Establish an autonomous heating system of the house – roof boiler;
- Install combined house heating system using solar energy;
- Install geothermal house heating system;
- Replacement of one-pipe system on electric heating system in apartments;
- Installation small-size boiler for heating supplies in apartments;
- Installation radiator reflectors on each radiator (convectors);
- Heat insulation building heating systems in unheated rooms;
- Using heat pumps;
- Replacement no regulating elevator on regulating;
- Establish regulating valve and circulating pump;
- Replacement of dependent heating system on independent: installation
ductile heat exchangers;
- Replacement of dependent heating system on independent: installation
individual thermal point with means of management and accounting;
- Installation a house heat consumption accounting;
- Installation apartment radiator ball valves regulation or residential automatic
radiator thermostats of heat consumption;
- Establish residential radiator storage-distributors of heat consumption
(evaporating or electronic type);
- Installation an apartment heat consumption accounting;
Air conditioning and ventilation systems:
- Install air handling system (mechanical ventilation system that provides the
least possible energy consumption of fan);
- Installation recuperators ventilated air;
- Heat utilization of ventilated air;
- Use rotary air distributors which can provide air with a large temperature
difference;
Hot water systems:
- Heat insulation of hot water system’s pipes in unheated rooms;
- Provide the necessary water circulation due to design decisions and the use
of low-noise pump without foundation;
- Heat wastewater utilization;
- Installation a house water temperature regulator;
- Installation an accumulating tank;
- Replacement of existing apartment nodes to heating water for centralized hot
water supply system;
- Replacement gas water heaters to electric;
- Establish a house hot water accounting;
- Establish an apartment hot water consumption accounting;
Gas supply system:
- Replace the existing building liquefied gas supply on the natural gas supply
system;
- Replace the existing building natural gas supply system on the electric;
- Replace the existing building liquefied gas supply on the electric;
- Installation of house gas regulatory cabinets;
- Establish an apartment gas consumption accounting;
Electricity system and electrical equipment:
- Installation of electric cable heating system;
- Installation electric ice melting systems;
- Replacement of internal electric networks.
In practice, for each separate building (object of the subsystem) in projects of
complex reconstruction of residential buildings there is possible to use any means of
energy efficiency improving or their combinations.
Through this, it is possible to achieve reducing the need for consumption of fuel
and energy resources by about 50%, and even more.
Because buildings (which are located within a residential quarter during the
complex reconstruction and housing development) can refer to different phases of
construction, different architectural and design solutions, the value of physical
deterioration and others, selecting variant of reconstruction and combination of
energy-saving methods, we should be governed by certain restrictions and use
conditions of certain means which will be considered in further research.
References:
1.
www.ukrstat.gov.ua
2.
The conceptual foundations of regional development policy of complex
reconstruction of residential real estate with a maximum use of existing buildings and
infrastructure city territories: monograph / [V.M. Kirnos, V.G. Andreev, E.P. Uvarov
and others]; edited by V.M. Kirnos. – Dnipropetrovs’k: Science and education, 2010.
– 121 p.
3.
Gusakov A.A. Systems engineering construction: monograph / A.A.
Gusakov. – M.: Stroyizdat, 1983. – 440 p.
4.
Directive 2010/31/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 19
May 2010 on the energy performance of buildings / http://ec.europa.eu
5.
http://passiv.de/en/
6.
Energy saving at the residential fund: problems, practice, perspectives:
Digest. – K.: NDIproektrekonsruktciya, Deutsche Energie-Agentur GmbH(dena),
Instituts Wohnen und Unwelt GmbH (IWU), 2006. – 144 p.
J21310-054
UDC:620.91:697.7
……………………………………………………………………….. MolotkovV.E.
USE OF NONCONVENTIONAL POWER FOR WATER-PREPARATION
AND HEAT SUPPLIES OF INDEPENDENT INDUSTRIAL TARGETS OF
MARINE AQUACALTURE
Institute of marine technology problems FEB RAS,
690091, Vladivostok, Suchanova 5а.
In the given work ecologically pure technologies of independent power supply
systems of water-preparation of an industrial target (shop) of marine aquaculture
with use of renewed power resources are considered. The opportunity of use of
nonconventional power for industrial targets in climatic conditions of coast of Peter
the Great bay of a northwest part of sea of Japan (Primorye Territory) is proved.
Keywords: the accumulator, the water-preparation, renewed power resources,
cultivation, of marine aquaculture, a heat supply, technologies, power supply.
Conditions of a climate at coast of a northwest part of sea of Japan define a
number of problems of development industrial of marine aquaculture of Primorye
Territory, major of which is power supply of modern technologies cultivation sea
organisms in the hydraulic engineering constructions located in island territories and
coastal. Industrialization of marine aquaculture demands enough high power inputs
[1]. The majority aquacultures are located in coastal areas and island territories of
Peter the Great bay (sea of Japan) and remove from networks of traditional power.
Now for independent power supply of industrial objects (shops, factories) of marine
aquaculture use fuel-organic power resources which at burning render harmful
influence on an environment. One of perspective ways of the decision of a problem of
reduction or full reduction of harmful emissions is use of the systems generating
thermal or electric energy, ecologically pure renewed natural energy sources working
with use (RE), for example, a wind and the sun.
On receipt of a solar energy in Primorye Territory borrows one of the first places
in Russia [2, 3]. By estimations of some researchers wind and solar resources in
Primorye Territory can be used successfully for reception thermal and electric
energies with application of solar water-heating installations of collector type
(STWH), photo-electric and wind electro-generators for systems of hot water supply
and heating of various administrative, household and agricultural objects [3, 4, 5].
In Institute of marine technologies problems of the FEB RAS is developed a
function chart-technological of power supply of an industrial target (shop) cultivation
аге invertebrates animals of marine aquaculture which includes the modular thermal
and electric generating systems using ecologically pure solar and wind renewed
power resources.
The shop (object) with hydraulic engineering systems incubation and cultivation
are of marine hydrobionts (pools), represents an one-storey building in the size
12х24m on external perimeter (to a total area 290 m2), height of a wall of 6 m
without taking into account a roof. Protecting designs (walls and a roof) are executed
from are sandwich-panels by thickness of 0,125 m, a floor not warmed, in the form of
a concrete coupler on a ground, thickness 0,1m. In a building of shop are located:
reserve capacity for the sea water, connected by the pipeline with pools of various
volume for cultivation are of marine hydrobionts, heat exchanger for heating
(cooling) water, modular systems of filtration clearing of a circulating water
technological stream for each pool, system of heating of air of shop, auxiliary
mechanisms, monitoring systems of water in pools and all modular subsystems of
water-preparation, the block of the central management. Total amount of used
technological sea water in system are pools 200 m3 (daily replacement of water of all
system 20 m3).
Outside of a premise of shop devices of a fence and dump of water with
mechanical filters, the block thermal heat recovery technological sea water, the solar
heating installation (STWH) with solar collectors and the soil accumulator of long
storage of heat and a cold, the system of accumulation of heat (cold) with use of
superficial waters of adjoining water area, the solar photo-electric installation (SFE)
for development of the electric power demanded on illumination, work of executive
mechanisms, devices of the control and automatics are located. The reserve electrogenerator is used for maintenance of work the thermal pump (ТP). In the developed
combined scheme of power supply at shortage the warmth energy for heating (the
winter period) or cooling of water (the years period) in hydro-systems of pools it is
used reserve reverse the thermal pump (fig.1). In areas of a territorial arrangement of
marine aquaculture with high wind potential (island territories) for development of
the electric power instead of SFE installation the wind oscillator is applied.
Modular systems of direct heating the heat exchanger due to a solar energy
(solar thermal installation with the thermo land-accumulator), selection of heat or a
cold from adjoining sea water area, the thermal pump and system of heating of air of
a building of shop are filled by the nonfreezing heat-carrier.
The solar power plant can work in a direct mode of heating of circulating and
flowing sea water in pools (the contour C) (fig.1). The temperature of water in pools is
adjusted mixing are steering thermo of valves after the thermo of water-preparation in
a separate contour (the contour A) and submission of flowing water from water areas (
contour E). The fence of sea water from water area in reserve capacity and pools and
its dump from hydraulic engineering system of shop functions continuously. Use in the
technological scheme of water-preparation (fig.1) the heat recovery heat allows to
lower expenses of heat for heating sea water in system to 70 % in winter and up to 50
% in warm the periods of year. Maintenance of necessary ecological and technological
parameters of the sea water used in pools for biotechnologies cultivation of marine
hydrobionts and in reserve capacity, is carried out by means of systems of filtration
clearing (are contours K, E). At a fence of sea water and dump systems of a
mechanical filtration and disinfecting are used.
For an estimation of capacity of a thermal source by a standard technique [6]
objects necessary for a heat supply were defined total thermal losses which develop, of
thermal losses through protecting designs, expenses of thermal energy for heating of
ventilating air in shop and on heating of water in pools (tab.1).
Table 1.
Temperature modes in pools and in the sea (depth 10) and expenses of thermal
energy for heating of sea water in pools
Month
I
II
III
IV
V
VI VII VII
I
18 20 20 20
IX
X
XI XI
I
14 14
t0С
14
14 14 14
18
14
Waters in
pools
t0C In
-1,2 -1,2 -0,3 2,3 5,0 8,3 13, 16,8 14,2 10,0 4,6 2,3
the sea on
2
[11]
Heating 3,68 3,28 3,3 2,7 2,9 2,4 2,2 1,20 1,64 1,92 2,3 2,9
of water,
7
5
MW∙hour
The temperature of air indoors is accepted to equal temperature of water in
pools. Air exchange in is accepted 0,5 m3 / (m2∙h). In a modelling variant settlement
capacity of thermal losses of object was estimated at a minus 24°С (at average
temperature of the coldest five-day week security with factor 0,92 [6]), in view of
heating of sea water in pools, has made 23,3 kW∙h.
In a modally variant thermal expenses for heating of water in the pools located in
a building of shop cultivation are of marine hydrobionts have been calculated. Thus
average long-term all the year round climatic conditions of area of an arrangement of
object for concrete area of water area of Peter the Great bay, in particular, area of a
gulf the East (tab. 1.) (on depth of 10 m numbers of supervision of temperature of air
and a thermal mode of sea water undertook last 30 years [7]) are considered.
In figure 2 data of thermal losses of a building of shop, a share of a solar energy
in a heat supply of the object, developed are presented to the STWH with the area on
an adsorber 84м2 and the land-accumulator, expenses of thermal energy for heating of
water in pools. Thermal losses of object, in view of heating sea water in pools make
122 MW/year.
The thermal land-accumulator is executed in the form of drill fields. The thermal
capacity of the in view of seasonal losses for area of research makes 105 MW/year. The
sector of heating of the geothermal accumulator consists from 12 vertical drill probes on
60m. The capacity of geothermal sector of cooling according to average value of the
maximal temperatures of water in years months for a gulf the East [7] will make 14,21
MW/year. Average maximal capacity of cooling of 9,8 kW. The sector of cooling
consists from 5 vertical drill probes on 60m.
Calculations have show, that at the set modes of heating of sea water in pools
and its replacements in system 20 ton in day solar thermal installation completely
provides power expenses for heating of sea water in pools at average thermal losses of
object in various the time periods of year (fig.2).
Fig.1. A function chart-technological of the combined system of water-preparation
and power supply of an independent complex of marine aquaculture:
1 - the steering thermo of valve; 2-the pump circulating; 3 - the heat exchanger; 4the probes of sector of heating; 5- the probes of sector of cooling; 6- the heat recovery; a
contour А- thermoregulation the temperature restriction, circulating with flowing water
in pools and reserve capacity additional; a contour B - heating-cooling of pools, reserve
capacity; a contour C – thermoregulation, solar heating and night cooling, in a mode of
direct solar heating; a contour Д - selection of heat and a cold of superficial waters of
adjoining water area; a contour Е - circulation of fresh water, water exchange of pools,
heat exchanger for recycling heat and diluter waste water; a contour K - filtration
clearing, ecological normalization of water in pools; a contour M - heating (cooling) of
air of a building of shop.
In the given calculation average security by heat of object in view of direct heating
sea water in pools due to гелиосистемы is accepted 100 % at sufficient solar light,
seasonal losses in the soil accumulator and selection of heat by means of утилизатора
waste waters from water system of shop. For indemnification of losses at a deviation
from average data warmly for heating water in pools and heating of air of a premise of
shop it is accumulated in the thermo land-accumulator during the warm periods of an
annual season from adjoining water area by means of system of selection of heat from
water area (contour Д, fig.1). The system of selection of heat (cold) from sea water area
works according to a current condition drills sectors and to calculation of a stock of
power supply technological cycle. The analysis of long-term supervision of a
temperature mode of waters of a gulf the East resulted in work [7], have shown an
opportunity of selection of thermal energy from a surface of water area during from
second decade of May till the first decade of November at of long standing temperatures
of superficial waters 14-240С and the maximal values of this parameter 25-270С
(August). During the cold seasonal periods of year at lack of heat the duplicating system
of generation of heat of a heat supply of object by means of the thermal pump (by
capacity of 10 kW) is used.
Offered technologies of independent power supply of shop (object) of marine
aquaculture with use RE for regulation by temperature modes of water in hydraulic
engineering systems for cultivation of marine invertebrates and systems of heating
allow:
·
To use ecologically pure power resources of renewed energy sources (a
wind, the sun) for independent power supply of systems of water-preparation;
·
To spend process of cultivation are of marine invertebrates in an all the
year round cycle in not dependences on climatic conditions of region;
·
It is essential to lower environmental contamination.
MWt.hour
(а)
(б)
(в)
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
Fig. 2. Quantity of thermal losses of object (a), a share of a solar energy in a
heat supply of object (б) and expenses of heat for heating of sea water in pools (в).
References:
1. Molotkov V.E., Volkov A.V. energy sources in hydraulic engineering systems
cultivation of marine hydrobionts // Bulletin FEBRAS. №3. 2008. With. 105-111.
2.Bezrukich P.P. What for of Russia renewed energy sources? // Energy:
economy, technik., ecology. 2002. №10. With. 2-8.
3. Ilin A.K., Kovalev O.P. Opportunity of use of a solar energy in Primorye
Territory // Bulletin FEBRAS. 1992. №5/6. With. 63-72.
4. Kovalev O.P., Wolkov А.В., Loschenkov V.V. Use of a solar energy in
Primorye Territory // Bulletin FEBRAS. 2001. №5. With. 293-298.
5. Slesarenko V.V., Kopylov V.V., Княжев V.V. Estimation of efficiency of
installations of solar power in systems of a heat supply // Bulletin FEBRAS.2010. № 3.
With.125-130.
6. Bogoslovskij V.N., SkanavyA.N. Director of the designer. Internal sanitaryengineering devices. Ч. 1. Heating. М.: Stroyizdat, 1990. 344 with.
7. Gaiyko L.A. Feature of a hydrometeorological mode of a coastal zone of Peter
the Great bay (sea of Japan). Vladivostok: Febrasscience, 2005.150 with.
J21310-055
UDC.372.8
Machekhina D. V.
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY IN THE GRAPHIC PREPARATION
STUDENTS. INTERNET: "FOR" AND "AGAINST"
Polytechnic Institute of the Siberian Federal University
Krasnoyarsk, ul. Kirenskogo 26
The problems related to the computerization of education in the information
society, the goal of this process is to help students new outlook, information culture.
The role and place of Internet technologies in the educational process. As well as the
advantages and negative phenomena in the learning process associated with the
Internet.
Key
words:
information
society,
information
technology
education,
information, internet technology, the Internet.
Computer science and society, in recent years, acquiring a global character, is
one of the strategic directions of the development of civilization, the results of which
we see everywhere today, and which will largely determine the shape of the new
civilization is emerging - the global information society. [3] Modern society requires
the transition to an entirely new level of access to quality education. Education
reform due to the transition to the information society, with integration into the global
system of education, which is associated with the development and implementation
of the educational process the new information and communication technologies.
This process is seen as the creation of a unified educational electronic environment.
[4] The purpose of this process is the formation of a system of scientific thinking of
students, environmental, and information culture, creativity and high morals qualities that will enable them to successfully adapt to live and work in a global
information society. [1]
The presence of the Internet allows students and teachers to use it for
educational tasks: participate in online conferences, obtain information from the open
encyclopedia, which will be interactive lectures. Internet technology is constantly
expanding
educational
opportunities,
provide
practical
experience
in
the
implementation of the learning environment.
Internet technologies in education: give the possibility to organize the learning
process more interesting, provide the necessary information at the right time, to
participate in research projects, students are used to communicate between
themselves and with the teachers. And in this regard, even more important is the role
of the teacher, which is the most important task - to learn to live in a world of
information, do not get lost in the huge flow of information, to be able to find and use
the knowledge. [1] Internet technologies in education correspond to the realities of
today. Their introduction to the process of education is the knowledge that have been
received and are now receiving the results of which form the learning process.
Powerful software, its full integration with the Internet gives students the opportunity
to share information obtained during the development of new knowledge. Advantages
of the Internet in the educational process is clear - this is the speed any information,
communication, self-realization, additional education, expansion of territorial
boundaries, provision of leisure, the formation of information literacy, including the
ability to work with information (to find, analyze, organize, and use).
Along with the enormous opportunities and benefits of the Internet in
education, there are significant drawbacks - it's messy false information, obtaining
and sending false information, the formation of false notions about objects, events
and processes, and health deterioration (loss of vision, lack of exercise, the bending
posture, mental and intellectual impairment ) secret societies (fans, suicides, etc.),
obscene language, pornographic resources, websites extremist nature, a large amount
of the imposed advertising etc.
Like any relatively new phenomenon, the Internet generates a lot of
controversy - from unfounded fears to unrealistic expectations. Which leads to
ambiguity of ethical evaluations of Internet, because it belongs to no one, no one is
controlled, and therefore - not controlled, members of virtual communication is
generally anonymous and may at any time withdraw from the contact, and the
possibility of legislative regulation of this area of life is small, at least today. This
gives the user an illusory sense of unlimited freedom - until permissiveness. Student,
as well as anyone who feels the illusion, and it drives him to many immoral and
sometimes illegal actions. In our view, there are significant disadvantages of using
the Internet as a source of information applicable to higher education. They are
mostly related to the use of finished works to prepare for classes or rent them instead
of their own. Here we can highlight the following points.
First, when a student takes work, downloaded from the Internet and signed his
name, he breaks one of the three fundamental principles of network ethics: the
principle of "inviolability of private property." As applied to a virtual ethics
adherence to this principle means that the right to information and ownership of
copyright. In other words, students are engaged in copyright infringement,
plagiarism, which under Russian law is a crime. [2] We can as much as to say, so do
everything, and that people will publish their work, but the fact remains.
Second, download the finished work and passing it, or use it as a ready material
for preparation for classes, tests whether the exam, the student process of self-rule
processing and assimilation of information. After all, while he independently studied
books, articles, data, he learns of them, highlights the main thing, sort, structure, that
is trained. If the work is simply printed, defeats the purpose of self-study, which is
just as important a part of the training, as well as lectures.
Third, the negative aspect of the use of the Internet as a source of information
is the lack of quality in the network. Under poor quality meant unreliability or
inaccuracy certain share information. A huge amount of information already existing
on the internet and coming there every day no one controls or edit, so often found
student information can be just someone's opinion or hypothesis, not a proven fact,
the term may meet a typo, an interpretation may not be accurate or dual. As a
consequence, the student will not be able to finish and properly understand the topic
of interest.
Fourth, the level of training of users looking for this information. He, too, is
not up to par. After all, the computer and all its systems (Internet search engines, in
particular) is the only machine that performs the user's query. What is the query - this
is the result. Therefore, this problem has hidden her decision. Internet as a source of
information - aid training. To search and find relevant, quality information you need
to have a certain level of knowledge and skills, not to blame the poor quality of
information [2].
Problems associated with the use of the Internet by students as a source of
understandable practices, such as the Department of Descriptive Geometry and
Drawing. Two groups of students were given an assignment on "Plug Connections."
In carrying out the job when you perform a calculation hairpin connection. The first
group was given Manuals detailing the job. The second group was given only the task
information for the task had to find their own. The result was as follows: in the first
group successfully completed the task 85% of students in the second - 34%
successful (66% - did not account hairpin compounds not found or did not pay
attention to the fact that the length of the studs screw connected depends on the
material details in which this stud screw connected).
So in conclusion we can draw several conclusions.
First, the Internet as a fundamental trend today is twofold, which is especially
evident in the field of education.
Second, the development of the information society today is not so much
technological as information-psychological problem, because its solution should
significantly change the social consciousness.
Third, the information society is no alternative, as it is the main direction of the
development of civilization in the 21st century, which had already come all
developed and many developing countries.
References
1. Borisenko I. G. Information in the educational system: the characteristics of the
socio-philosophical research. / / Bulletin ISTU. - 2012. - № 4 (63). - 347 p. Pp. 298302.
2. Higher
education
and
the
Internet.
Mode
of
access:
http://2balla.ru/%20component/option,com_ewriting/Itemid,116/index.php?option%2
0=com_ewriting&Itemid=116&func=chapterinfo&chapter=2876&story=2306
3. Pfanenshtil I. A., Borisenko I.G., Role of information technology in
overcoming the transformation processes in Education / / Philosophy of Education. 2012. - T. 43. Number 1. - Page. 59-67.
4. Pfanenshtil I.A., Yatsenko M. P., Borisenko I. G. Information technologies and
their role in the stability of the national educational system. / / Bulletin ISTU. - 2013.
- № 1. - Page. 274-279.
J21310-056
UDC.372.8
Klesova K. I.
MODERN TRAINING GRAPHIC DISCIPLINES
Polytechnic Institute of the Siberian Federal University
Krasnoyarsk, Kirenskogo, 26
This article is dedicated to exploring the possibilities of using computer
technology in education, namely, the use of multi-media training and demonstration
programs to improve the quality and speed of learning, improving digestibility of
knowledge for teaching graphics and special disciplines.
Key words: computer technology, engineering graphics, information education
The life of modern man, and cannot be imagined without computers.
Computers have simplified the man's life around. From the house you can now learn
remotely, if someone does not get to go to school, always on hand to online library,
for you can do a variety of presentations, allowing more visually present information,
and to remember and understand visual information much easier, which is to the ear
difficult to read, it is very convenient to format the text in the form of tables, charts,
etc.
The rapid development of modern information technology in education using
multimedia tools, provides new opportunities in teaching graphic disciplines. Graphic
training requires appropriate knowledge, develops spatial representation and
imagination, a prerequisite for a successful preparation of young people to the
profession [7]. The introduction of innovative methods, forms and means of
education to create a new strategy for training in technical colleges. Thus, teaching
courses in descriptive geometry and engineering graphics has become in recent years
a new dynamic. Growing amount of knowledge to students while reducing class
hours required time optimization of the educational process [1]. Effectiveness study
of descriptive geometry and engineering graphic can largely be improved through the
use of new information technologies, the greatest efficiency will also use threedimensional computer graphics and animation. Multimedia software lectures not only
gives an opportunity to diversify illustrative material, but thanks to new technology
that transformed the traditional form of education, it becomes more attractive,
allowing students to present and understand complex theoretical material [2]. With
the introduction of new training facilities there are new challenges. For example, the
use of computer-aided design (CAD) repeatedly to increase the accuracy and speed of
execution.
During training, students create graphic disciplines set of documents
homework, term papers and dissertations. Also, in real learning processes can be
used, and worked previously solved problems associated with the practical activity of
the future graduate [5, 6]. For future specialist is not just a set of drawings, sketches,
diagrams, with an explanatory note in electronic form, and engineering information
system with classified structure, interactivity, visualization, etc. And the digital
prototype products (project) at creation and approval goes through the same stages
and adjustments before.
The use of 3D-modeling with the first lesson helps students to quickly acquire
the necessary competencies and personality traits can competently perform drawings
with built-in libraries and create your own library of design elements. Expanded the
range of tasks for the practical classes, the number of tasks for independent work.
Innovation in teaching impact on students' motivation to learn our traditional
disciplines: descriptive geometry and engineering graphics, which is expressed not
only in the results of examinations, but also in the increasing interest among students
for the challenges of increased complexity. Simultaneously developed and
implemented the criteria of assessing students using innovative teaching techniques
of graphic disciplines.
In my view, there are pros and cons in innovative educational technologies.
Advantages are obvious, using modern computer technology, we can: for a limited
time to show a large amount of graphic material, return to the previous material (in
contrast to the chalk and board) to show the main stages of the decision-consuming
tasks, to show 3D images of surfaces at any angle, use animation, to show the use of
the individual figures on actual structures.
But there are also disadvantages to them I would like to include: the programs
that we use for drawing something, are expensive, need to purchase a license,
requires a lot of computers to equip students to work in the programs and services
(configuration, update software, maintenance, etc.), which in turn rests on the
financial and human resources.
Modern society - a society of information technology, it is interested in the
well-educated and competent professionals capable of independently and be active,
make decisions, flexibility to adapt to the changing conditions of life. Modern person
must have a high level of professional autonomy and mobility is a specialist in
demand in the labor market today. Maintaining a high level of education - the main
factor of social and economic progress and an essential condition for sustainable
development of any country, and it needs to be improved across the higher education
system [3]. In accordance with these requirements developed state educational
standards for the training of future engineers, which identifies the main types of
future careers of graduates: Design, organization and management, production and
technology, experimental research. In solving the problems in higher vocational and
technical education significance acquire technical disciplines that form the basis of
future professional engineering knowledge, capacity for innovation and engineering
to its construction. For example, when analyzing the careers of graduates of 20002012 years found about 20% of cases where competence aided drafting, based on
«AutoCAD», «Compass" is used in everyday practice specialists. [4]. These
disciplines include engineering and computer graphics. In recent years, has expanded
the range of problems solved by the methods of descriptive geometry and engineering
graphics, which are widely used in computer-aided design (CAD), engineering and
manufacturing of complex technical objects, reinforcing the importance of this
discipline in engineering education. Therefore, special attention was graphic
education students, the development of information for graphic communication.
Today there is no reason to dispute the fact that the use of information
technology has a significant impact on educational technology, enhancing their
ability to achieve the objectives in the education system. Since the study of
descriptive geometry and engineering graphics associated with the implementation of
drafting work, the computer graphics is a great help to students for the acquisition of
graphic skills. In other words, the computer in solving the problems of traditional
education is used as a new graphical tool and serves to improve the quality of
education. However, a holistic view of the usefulness of modern information
technology to improve educational technology aimed at acquiring image information
on the development of subject position of students is currently underdeveloped [8].
In conclusion, I can say that innovative technologies have been introduced into
our lives not so long ago, but we use them in everything and everywhere, innovative
technologies facilitate our lives. We are in the new millennium, where people closely
related to computers, we have to use what is created for our own convenience, for our
own good.
References.
1. Borisenko I.G. Innovative technologies in teaching descriptive geometry in the
formation of professional competence. / / Bulletin ISTU. - 2011. - № 12, p. 355-357.
2. Borisenko I.G. Competence approach in teaching descriptive geometry and
engineering graphics / / Bulletin KrasGAU - 2011. - № 12 (63). - 334 p. Pp. 300 302.
3. Borisenko I.G., Petrovskaya N. M. Information Technology in Teaching
graphic disciplines in the formation of professional competence / / Bulletin ESSTU. 2012. - № 4 (39). C 38-42/
4. Kamoltseva A.V., Katargin V.N. Methods and forms of integration
competencies of graduates of modern transport profile / / Proceedings Sworld based
on international scientific and practical conference. - 2013. - № 1.
5. Katargin V.N., Koryagin M.E., Morozov, D. A. Evaluation of staff for the
automotive service on the basis of a mathematical model of training maintenance
workers. / / Transport company. 2011. - № 7. - Page. 36-39.
6. Katargin V. N., Pisarev I.S. Repair components of vehicles operated within the
dimensional relations / / Automotive industry. 2008. - № 3. - Page. 27-29.
7. Stoler V. A., Kasinsky B. A. Teaching descriptive geometry using multimedia
computer-access mode: http://dgng.pstu.ru/conf2011 / papers/7/
8. Theory and practice of an innovative approach to education in preparing future
engineers of graphical disciplines. Electronic resource: http://dissers.ru/avtoreferatidissertatsii-pedagogika/a66.php (date accessed February 10, 2012 d)
J21310-057
UDC 664.641.1
Stadnuk I., Konevech M., 1Vasyliv V.
QUALITY CONTROL IN KNEADING THE PASTRY
Ternopil Ivan Pul’uj National Technical University, Ternopil
1
National university of life and environmental sciences of Ukraine, Kyiv
The analysis methods of process control kneading, the main factors that affect the
formation of dough. A mathematical model of the process of kneading, and new
design solutions for giving shaft mixer machines that will intensify the process of
mixing and improve the quality dough.
Key words: the process of kneading, dry dough, dough formation, quality
control procedures dough mixing machine working chamber, the coefficient of
heterogeneity, plasticizing dough.
Wide implementation in the baking industry of intensive mixing process is
associated with increasing demands for quality of finished products. Quality is a
determined by punctual following the prescription of the test - especially the
moisture. In this case, the accuracy of the components is determined by the work of
dispensing equipment and the construction of dough kneading machines for the
corresponding mode of operation. It is known that the choice of optimal mixing
parameters - duration of mixing, dosing sequence of flour, yeast and additives, water
temperature and dough in the process (first and last) - the problem of industrial
research laboratory of the enterprise. Today, the most common method is of
determining the moisture is based on drying the sample to a constant weight and
weighing it before and after drying. These methods are laboratory and very
complicated, that`s why are difficult to automate. There are different methods to
control the moisture of dough. But none of considered methods of moisture control
provides the quality of mixing.
In most kneading machines of domestic and foreign production, semi-finished
product in the chamber is mixed with working bodies of various configurations.
Therefore, in terms of production it is desirable to have a reliable objective methods
for determining the consistency of the dough to replace the sensory methods of
assessment. It is established [1, 2] that the system variables of the process and
indexes of the performance of dough forming can be affected by: quantity and quality
of the ingredients of the dough, the specificity of the vibration dozing machine of
flour, configuration of kneading drum and plasticizer, the modes of the three stages
mixing - temperature, duration, and, most important, pressure. With the rapid
development of modern computer technology in the field of mixing mathematical
modeling is widely used, but the doughmixing with non-blade working body and
regulatory surface of plasticizer has first been considered [3, 4]. In works [1, 2, 4] the
sequence and duration of dosing of the components, a significant effect of mixing
body and compression on the change dough properties with the help of construction
plasticizer are considered in detail. Criteria for evaluating the quality of the mixture is
the coefficient of variation, %:
VC =
100 1 n
(ci - c) 2 ,
å
c n - 1 i =1
(1)
where c - arithmetic mean value of the concentration of the main component in
all n samples of the mixture,%;
ci - concentration of the main component in the i-th sample of the mixture, %.
Regarding to dough mixing, this criteria is the coefficient of heterogeneity, as it
increases the heterogeneity mixture increases in the first minutes too, and further,
there is a smoothing of homogeneity.
The analysis of the experimental curves Vc = f (t) (t-mixing time) got from the
studies of dough kneading machines of periodical work and different constructions,
showed that the kinetic curve of the process of mixing has three characteristic plots.
Each plot represents a certain time period of mixing [5].
The process that occurs in the working chamber of dough kneading machines,
can be considered as a system with incoming and outcoming flows and is shown
schematically in the form of connection between the signals:
,
(2)
where c (t)in - instantaneous concentration of the main component in the input
stream;
a (t)out – the same, but in the final mixture;
A - conversion operator.
A set of mathematical expressions A - a statistical description of the system. It
does not depend on time and is determined for the process of mixing with scheme,
and it looks like this:
where H(p) -the transfer function.
A record of the transformation operator in equation (2) can be obtained using the
dynamic characteristics of the medium: the weight h(t) and the transfer H(p) function.
In this case h(t) - a function of time describing the response of the system at a given
time t to a unit impulse function d(t), which is being given to the entrance of the
system at time t - t3 (t3 – not delay of the signal, it means the time of pulse passage
through the system).
The unit impulse function, or delta-function: d= 0, if t > 0; d=¥, if t =0;
(3)
The transfer function H (p) is the Laplace function transform:
(4)
where p - complex change (p = a + ib, where a i b - real and imaginary parts of a
complex number і =
).
Using the function H (p), equation (2) for a linear system can be written as:
C(p)out = H(p) C(p)in
(5)
where C (p) – converted function according to Laplace C (t).
Considering the fact that plasticization of dough is based on the respectively
defined processes in chambers of dough kneading machines, this ensures to install
their patterns and calculate the rational parameters of individual operations.
References:
1.
Stadnuk I.Y. Application methods of vibration and pulsation kneading
dough in developing new machines / I.Y. Stadnuk, A.T. Lisovenko // Hlebopekarska i
konditerska promislovist Ukraini, 2009 - №4, - s.37-40.
2.
Stadnuk I.Y. Basic theory of plasticization dough / I.Y. Stadnuk, A.T.
Lisovenko // Hlebopekarska i konditerska promislovist Ukraini, 2009 - №5, - s.22-23.
3.
Kulen R.V. Mathematical Programming (with elements of information
technology) / R.V. Kulen, E.A. Yunkova, A.B. Galcov – K.: MAUP, 2000, - 124s.
4.
Mihaylichin M.S. Simulation of kneading bezlopatevym working body /
M.S. Mihaylichin, I.Y. Stadnuk // Hlebopekarska i konditerska promislovist Ukraini,
2011 - №9, - s. 22-23.
5.
Lisovenko A.T. Technological equipment bakeries and ways to improve
/ A.T. Lisovenko – M.: Legkaya i pichevaya promichlenost, 1982. – 208s.
J21310-058
UDC 66.011
Schutyuk V.V., Vasulenko S.M.,
Bessarab A.S., 1Vasyliv V.P.
INNOVATIVE SOLUTIONS TO RESEARCH IN DRYING
TECHNOLOGY OF FOOD RAW MATERIALS
National university of food tecnologies, Kyiv
1
National university of life and environmental sciences of Ukraine, Kyiv
Reasons over of growing interest are brought in the processes of drying, and
also some aspects of cooperation of industry and scientific university collectives in
embodiment and application. The tendencies of research of processes of drying, that
appear on the joint of different areas of science with the use of forward possibilities
of technical process, are examined.
Key words: drying, intensity, efficiency, power aspects, dry food foods.
The main purpose of drying in food industry is preservation of dried product.
Improving of drying technology provides increasing of technical and economic
indexes, taking into account environmental considerations, improvement of product
quality.
The growing interest in drying is recently observed in developing countries to
compare with relatively stable in other continents [1, 2]. Also the interest to the
drying process the amount of received patents on drying in the U.S. in the last two
decades, up to 240 per year shows. [3] Considering the direction of the agrarian
economy of Ukraine, development of drying technology is an attractive and
promising. As a lot of different dried products are exported to Ukraine, the question
of its own production is extremely acute.
Ways to intensify the process of drying. Reducing capital and operating costs of
dryers depends on the feasibility of drying rate increasing with the following of
product quality demands. It is known that the raw material for drying is characterized
by surface and internal moisture. Drying rate in removing surface moisture depends
on the value of the external heat transfer and mass transfer coefficient, because the
mass transfer resistance is outside the dried material. The increasing of turbulence of
drying agent, mechanical vibration or flow oscillations leads to high rates of drying.
Ultrasound or sound effects increase the drying rate, but complicate the mechanisms
of intensification. When using overheated steam at a temperature of inversion as
desiccant drying rate becomes higher than the hot air, but at temperatures below the
critical, we can see the opposite – it becomes lower. The use of an electromagnetic
field can heat volume polar liquid that will evaporate. This virtually eliminates the
heat transfer resistance of the material.
Most of these options of intensifying drying are tested [4]. However, not all
ideas can be applied today, as most of them are associated with changes in quality of
products. Moreover, the introduction of new technologies leads to a complication of
equipment, requiring a pre-feasibility study to industrial application.
The use of multi-stage dryers. In the presence of surface and internal moisture in
the material for effective following of the process of drying drying mode and even
type of dryers in some cases should be different to remove these two different types
of moisture. Zoning of dryers along their length is typically used in conveyor and
tunnel facilities to ensure optimum drying heat-sensitive materials with the
intensification of the drying process. [4] Removal of surface moisture is even more
intensive process, which requires a short residence time of the product in the dryer,
while the removal of internal moisture is a slow process that requires a long exposure
time and therefore, larger dryers. To extract mainly surface moisture are fluidized
bed, roller, spray dryers, etc. For long-stay of raw circulation, tunnel, belt dryers, etc.
are used. For the successful use of multistage drying raw material should have both
types of moisture in sufficient amounts for two-stage drying process duration is
sufficient for industrial implementation. In some cases, the first step can be used to
remove surface moisture to reduce the adhesive properties of the product, sufficient
for further drying, for example in a fluidized bed [5].
The use of modern trends intensify drying requires an integrated systems
approach to multidimensional and multidisciplinary modeling of concurrent
processes of impulse, energy and mass. Also, studies will need more active
collaboration of researchers in order to achieve an effective contribution to basic
research and industrial application. Future developments should take into account the
constant increase in environmental and economic requirements, provided a high
quality of finished product.
References:
1. Fernandez M.A., Arlabosse P., Descoins N. Thermally-assisted mechanical
dewatering: State-of the-art and new developments. PRES’05.– Palermo, Sicily, Italy,
22–25 May 2005.
2.
Strumillo
C. Perspectives
on
Developments
in
Drying.–
Drying
Technology,2006.– 24.–P. 1059–1068.
3. Mujumdar A. S., Passos M. L. 2000. Drying: Innovative technologies and
trends in research and development. In: Developments in Drying. A. S. Mujumdar
and S. Suvachittanont (Eds.): Kasetsart University Press,Bangkok: Thailand.–
P. 235–268.
4. Advanced drying technologies/ Tadeusz Kudra, Arun S. Mujumdar.– CRC
Press is an imprint of Taylor & Francis Group, 2009.– 455 p.
5. Mujumdar A. S., Passos M. L. Developments in Drying. Kasetsart University
Press: Bangkok, Thailand, 2000.– P. 235–268.
J21310-059
Ryzhkova T.N.
EFFECT OF FERMENT MICROFLORA COMBINATIONS ON
QUALITY AND OUTPUT OF GOAT’S CURD
Kharkiv state zooveterinary academy, Ministry of Agricultural Policy and Food
of Ukraine, 62341, KSZVA, Malaya Danilovka, Dergachi district, Kharkiv region.
Summary. The data on the effect of some types of ferment microflora as well
as some ferment microflora combinations on the quality and output of goat’s curd
have been presented in the article. It has been found out that the use of some ferment
combinations promotes the production of curd with less foreign flavour and less
goat’s suint odour and the increase in the output of curd as compared to some other
types of ferment.
Key words: ferment combinations, goat’s milk, curd, output
Introduction.
Nowadays the new trend has been observed in the dairy
industry – processing of goat’s milk into drinkable milk and fermented dairy
products. The presence of the national standard for goat’s milk, stored milk promotes
the development of the above trend [1].
Analysis of recent investigations and publications. It is well known that sour
milk products including curds are of great significance in the dietary of the
population because in addition to its nutritional value the curd has diet and medicinal
properties. The technology of curd production is based on the use of lactose
fermentation under the influence of ferment microflora [2 - 3].
It should be pointed out that most scientific publications have been devoted to
the development and improvement of curd technology from cow’s milk.
The data on the development of curd technology on the industrial basis with the
use of biotechnological methods aimed at the reduction of specific features of flavour
and suint odour of goat’s milk in the above fermented product have not been found
yet.
In this connection special attention should be paid to the ferment that consists of
propionic acid bacteria. The above bacteria play the major role in the production of
rennet cheese at high temperature of second heating of cheese grain. They are
supposed to be the source of acids that effect the manifestation of spicy sweetish
flavour and odour in cheese from cow’s milk at high temperature of heating [4].
It has been stated that some strains of propionic acid bacteria P. Freudenreichii
ssp. shermani and P. Acidipropionici have the great probiotic potential and due to that
they are used in the production of sour milk drinks [5].
Besides, it has been informed that acidophilic microflora ( L. acidobacillus)
introduced into the process of rennet cheese production in the amount of 1.0…1,5%
of the total amount of milk inhibits the development of fatty sour bacteria. Thus, the
necessity of the use of nitrates that have cancerogenic properties is excluded [6 - 7].
The aim and the tasks of the article are to determine the effect of both some
types of ferments and ferment combinations made from them on the organoleptics
(flavour and texture) of curd from goat’s milk and its output.
Presentation of the main body of the investigation.
The assessment of the surface, texture, colour, flavour and odour was conducted
organoleptically; the temperature and net weight – by GOST U 6066 : 2008, the mass
rate of fat – by GOST 3625; titratable acidity – by GOST 3624.
The total amount of ferment microflora was determined by GOST 10444.11 by
the dilution cultivation colony calculation method on the solid agar medium (MPS)
and GRM, the compatibility of different kinds of ferment cultures – by the method of
All-Union Scientific and Research Dairy Institute [8].
To reduce the specific features of goat’s milk (goat’s suint odour and flavour)
that become more intensive in the finished kinds of sour milk products the selection
of ferments has been thoroughly conducted in order to reduce significantly the
manifestation of the above shortcoming. The choice has been done in favour of the
most common types of ferments used in the production of curd from cow’s milk
including ferment “MSт”, Lactobacillus acidophilus (unviscous strain) and
Propionibacterium sp.
The production ferments used in curd making were prepared with goat’s
skimmed sterialized milk in accordance with the instruction in force on the ferment
production for sour milk products from cow’s milk.
The results of the investigation given in Table 1 present the data on the
presence or lack of the mutual growth and development of each ferment
included in the ferment combinations made by us, where, the composition of variant
2 was: 50%-LA, PB- 30% and AC - 20%; variant 3: 60 % - LA, 30 %-PB and 10 % AC; variant 4: 55 %-LA, 25 %- PB and AC - 20%; variant 5: 60 % - LA, 25 % - PB
and 15% - AC.
Table 1
Productivity of ferment microflora combinations during their combined
cultivation, CFU /cm3
Number of
Parameters
variant
Before cultivation
Variant № 2
Variant № 3
Variant № 4
Variant № 5
After cultivation
(6,0 ´ 105)–LA,
(3,0 ´ 105)–PB, (4,9 ´ 105)–LA, (4,1 ´ 105)–PB,
(1,5 ´ 105 ) - AC
(3,0 ´ 105) - AC
(6,5 ´ 105)–LA,(3,0 ´ 105)–PB,
(4,8 ´ 105)–LA, (4,8 ´ 105 )–PB,
(2,0 ´ 105) - AC
(3,5 ´ 105)-AC
(6,0 ´ 105)–LA, (3,0 ´ 105)–PB,
(4,5 ´ 105)–LA, (4,2 ´ 105)–PB,
(2,0 ´ 105) - AC
(2,1 ´ 105)-AC
(6,0 ´ 105)–LA, (3,0 ´ 105)–PB,
(4,9 ´ 105)–LA, (4,8 ´ 105)–PB,
(3,0 ´ 105) - AC
(4,5 ´ 105)-AC
Note: LA - lactococci in the leaven of ferment « MSт» ; PB – propionic acid
bacteria ; AC - acidophilic sour milk rod-shaped bacteria.
It can be seen from table 1 that the experimental sample of curd № 2 provided
the growth of acidophilic rod-shaped bacteria by 1,5 ´ 105 CFU /cm3 while the amount
of propionic acid bacteria increased by 1,1 ´ 105 CFU /cm3 and the amount of
lactococci slightly decreased.
The productivity of acidophilic rod-shaped bacteria in the experimental sample
of curd № 4 increased by 0,1 ´ 105 CFU /cm3 while the amount of propionic acid
bacteria increased by 1,2 ´ 105 CFU /cm3 and the amount of lactococci slightly
decreased.
In the experimental sample of curd № 3 by the ratio of ferment cultures: LA 60 %, PB - 25 % and AC – 15 % due to the decrease in the amount of lactococci (by
1,1 ´ 105 CFU /cm3 ) the quantity of propionic acid bacteria increased by 1,8 ´ 105
CFU /cm3 . The amount of acidophilic microflora increased by 1,5 ´ 105 CFU /cm3.
Consequently, the symbiotic relationship between the above three types of
starter
cultures,
the
most
effective
manifested
in
sample
№ 3 (60% - LA, 30% - PB and 10% - AC) and № 5 (60% - LA, 25% - PB and 15% - AC).
The batches of curd have been produced with the use of aqueous solution of the
mixture made from ascorbic and citric acids in the concentration that provides both
the growth of it ratable acidity of goat’s milk from 15…16 оT to 20…21 оT - the
level that is similar to the value of the cow’s milk and the concretion of the softer
goat’s clot as compared to the cow’s one proposed by the authors of the article and
that was used in the development of rennet cheese from goat’s milk
Whole goat’s milk was normalized by mass rate of fat with due regard for the
mass rate of protein in the initial milk [9].
Then the normalized mixture of goat’s milk, fat 2,9 %, when produced the curd
of 18 % fat was pasteurized at the temperature (78±2) о C for 15…20 seconds.
After that the mixture of milk was cooled to the temperature of fermentation and
clotting (32 ±2) оC and 1 % aqueous solution of milk coagulating ferment preparation
(MFP) of microbial origin “Fromasa” was added at a rate of 1 g of preparation per 1
ton of milk and the solution of calcium chloride.
The normalized mixture of goat’s milk was processed to produce curd with the
introduction in the curd production process both the traditional ferment «MSт» that is
used in the processing of cow’s milk (control batch № 1) and the ferments that
consist of propionic acid bacteria and acidophilic sour milk rod-shaped bacterium ,
the experimental batch № 2 and № 3, respectively.
The normalized mixture of goat’s milk similar by its physical and chemical
parameters was fermented by each of the three above-mentioned types of ferment.
The total amount of ferment used in the processing of goat’s milk into curd was 3 %
of the mass of milk.
Such representatives of lactococcus as Lactococcus lactis subsp. lactis,
Lactococcus lactis subsp. cremoris (biovar, diacety lactis) with the addition of
Lactococcus subsp. lactis were in the composition of the bacterial ferment («MSт»)
used in the production of the control batch of curds from goat’s milk.
The clustering of the normalized mixture of goat’s milk was done for 7…8
hours till the formation of the clot having acidity (65±2) о T.
When produced the control batch of curd № 1 with the traditional ferment
“SMT “ the second heating of the obtained clot of milk after its cutting into cubics
with the use of the above ferment to stimulate the process of syneresis was conducted
at the temperature (36±2) 0 C that is optimum for the development of lactococci.
When produced the experimental batches of curd № 2 and № 3 the second
heating of the obtained dense curd clot after its cutting into cubics was conducted at
the temperature (45±2) 0 C and (50±2) о C for 15…20 minutes, respectively.
The control variant of curd № 1 was produced with the use of one type of
curd ferment «MSт».
Propionic acid bacteria (PB) took an intermediate position and were from
20…30 % of the total amount of ferment.
Physical and chemical values of the curd from goat’s milk with the use of
certain types of ferment have been analyzed (table 2).
Table 2
Physical and chemical parameters of curd with the use of certain types of
ferment
Type of curd batch produced with ferment
«MST», control Propionic
Parameters
batch № 1
acid Acidophilic
bacteria, experi- rod-shaped
mental batch
bacterium,
№2
experimental
batch № 3
In curd
Mass rate, %:
- fat
18,01±0,5
18,52±0,5
17,5±0,5
- protein
17,0±0,5
17,5±0,5
16,5±0,5
- moisture
64,4±0,5
64,6±0,5
65,0±0,5
Acidity, оТ
190,0±0,5
180,0±0,5
200,0±0,5
- fat
0,53±0,04
0,42±0,04
0,61±0,04
- protein
0,43±0,06
0,32±0,04
0,5±0,06
Acidity, оТ
18,0±0,56
17,0±0,44
20,0±0,96
Density, оA
24,61±0,98
23,83±0,87
24,64±0,95
In curd whey
Mass rate, %
It can be seen from table 2 that the curd ferment provides the acidity and
physical and chemical parameters that meet the requirements of the standard to the
curd produced from cow’s milk.
No trustworthy difference between the values of the mass rate of fat and
moisture in the control and experimental batches of curd as well as between the loss
of fat and protein with curd whey have been found out (P ≤ 0,95).
The use of the ferment that consisted of acidophilic sour milk rod-shaped
bacterium provided the production of the best texture of curd, the use of ferment that
consisted of propionic acid bacteria provided the lowest acidity of the curd.
The loss of the mass rate of protein with curd whey in the experimental
batch № 2 (P ≥ 0,95) was higher by 0,11 % as compared to the analogous value
in the control batch of the product № 1.No trustworthy difference between the above
values in the control and experimental batch of curd № 3 was found out (P ≤ 0,95).
The curd produced with the use of propionic acid bacteria had the lowest acidity,
but the use of acidophilic rod-shaped bacterium promoted the formation of the
highest level of titratable acidity in the curd.
The titratable acidity in the experimental batch of curd № 2 was lower by 10 оТ
but the curd batch № 3 with the acidophilic ferment was higher by 10 оТ as compared
to the analogous value in the control batch of the product № 1 where the traditional
type of curd ferment «MSт» was used (P ≥ 0,95).
Organoleptic assessment (flavour and odour) and curd texture produced with the
use of the above types of ferment microflora was carried out by the commission.
It has been found that the curd batch with the acidophilic ferment was
characterized by the best texture. The above type of ferment provided the effective
decrease in the foreign flavour and goat suint odour. The use of the ferment with
propionic acid bacteria provided the most effective decrease in the foreign flavour
and goat suint odour. Thus, it has been stated that each of the above ferments has its
positive properties.
In order to use the positive characteristics of each ferment under
investigation the ferment combinations have been developed. In addition to the
control variant of the curd № 1 produced with the use of only one ferment «MSт»
four variants of curd with the use of the ferment combinations that contained three
the above –mentioned types of ferment microflora have been produced;
Experimental batches of cottage cheese is produced in accordance with the
requirements of our developed SU 15.5 - 00493758 - 001: 2011 "Cottage cheese from
goat's milk" and the instruction manual for them [10].
"where", the first – control variant of ferment «MSт» that is traditionally used in
the production of curd from cow’s milk had lactococci (LA) in its composition. The
results of the analysis of the curd are presented in Table 3.
Table 3
Physical and chemical parameters of curd “Osobyy”
Variant № and ratio of ferments used, %
Parameters
№1
Ferment
№2
№3
50:30:20
60:30:10
№4
55:25:20
№5
60:25:15
“MSт”,
100%
In curd
Mass rate, %:
- fat
18,01±0,05
17,51±0,05
18,02±0,05
17,53±0,05 18,01±0,05
- protein
17,0±0,05
18,0±0,05
18,2±0,05
18,03±0,05
18,5±0,05
In whey
- fat
0,50±0,05
0,6015±0,05
0,50±0,05
0,50±0,05
0,50±0,05
- protein
0,45±0,05
0,2±0,05
0,22±0,05
0,23±0,05
0,21±0,05
- moisture
64,4±0,5
64,6±0,5
65,0±0,5
64,8±0,5
64,6±0,5
Acidity, оТ
192,0±0,05
198,0±0,05
194,0±0,05
200,0±0,05 198,0±0,05
Norm
6889±0,01
6796±0,01
6790±0,01
6793±0,01
147,2±0,01
147,3±0,01
147,2±0,01 147,2±0,01
of
6792±0,01
expenditure
of mixture to
produce 1 kg
of curd
Output
of 145,2±0,01
curd from 1
ton of milk
mixture, kg
Note. The composition of ferment combinations: № 1 - ferment «MSт»; № 2 –
ferment from propionic acid bacteria; №3 – ferment containing acidophilic sour milk
rod-shaped bacteria.
It can be seen from table № 3, that the control variant of curd № 1 was
produced with the use of one type of curd ferment «MSт». The traditional type of
curd ferment «MSт» (with LA) had the highest specific weight in the ferment
combinations from 55…60 % and the type of
curd ferment
that consisted of
acidophilic sour milk rod-shaped bacterium (AC) had the lowest specific weight from
10 % to 20 %.
The proportion of propionic acid bacteria (PB) in the raman combined starter
culture is intermediate in comparison with lactococcus and lactobacillus, and is 20 ...
30%. The total amount of starter used in the cheese manufacture variants - 3, 0%.
The lowest acidity characterized prototype version of № 3 titratable acidity which
although was 2 оТ, from a large, compared to the control № 1, but less than,
respectively, at 4, 6, and 4
о
T, than experienced options version of № 2, 4 and
version of № 5 (P ≥ 0.95).
No trustworthy difference between the values of the loss of the mass rate of
fat with curd whey in the control variant № 1 and experimental batches of curd № 2,
№ 3, № 4 and № 5 have been found out.
The mass rate of protein in the experimental batch of curd № 2…№ 5 was
higher than in the control batch of curd № 1 by 0,5, 1,2, 1,03 and by 1,5 %,
respectively (P ≥ 0,95). It can be explained by the decrease in the losses of protein
with whey in the experimental batches of curd № 2…№ 5 by 0,23, 0,21, 0,2 and by
0,22 %, respectively (P ≥ 0,95).
The output of curd with ferment culture combinations was larger as
compared to the analogous value in the control batch of the product № 1 with 100%
ferment from lactococci by 2,0…2,1 kg that is 1,4…1,5 %.
Organoleptic assessment of the control and experimental batches of the curd
(taste, odour and texture) as well as the assessment of their quality in points using the
maximum 15-point scale (5 points for each of such values as flavour, odour and
rexture) was carried out by the commission.
The assessment of the quality of the control variant №1 and the experimental
variants of curd made with the use of the ferment microflora combinations has shown
that the quality of all experimental variants of curd № 2… № 5 was higher as
compared to control variant № 1.
Thus, the parameters of flavour and odour of the experimental batches of curd №
2 - № 5 were different from the control variant (№ 1) of the product by the presence
of the leveling of foreign flavour and goat suint odour and also by the “grainy”
texture as compared to the oily texture of the control variant of the curd № 1.
Conclusion.
1. Symbiotic relations between three types of ferment cultures were revealed in
two out of five variants of goat’s curd: № 3 ( LA -60%, PB – 30% and AC – 10% )
and variant № 5 ( LA 60 %, PB – 25 % and AC – 15 %).
2. Variant of the curd № 3 was the best one by flavour, odour and texture. The
specific peculiarities of foreign taste and goat suint /odour were significantly
reduced and the texture was grainy and homogenous.
3. The output of the experimental batches of curd with the use of ferment culture
combinations (due to symbiotic relations between them) was larger by 1,4…1,5 % as
compared to the analogous value in the control variant of the product when only one
type of ferment microflora was used.
Literature:
1. Goat’s raw milk. General technical conditions (SSTU 7006: 2009) – [
Introduction into practice of 01.01.2010]. – K. State standard of consumption of
Ukraine, 2010. – 9 p. – (National standards of Ukraine).
2. Technology of dairy products of small scale production / A.V. Onopriyko,
A.G. Khramtsova, V. A. Onopriyko. – Mart. – Rostov-on-Don, 2004. – 411 p.
3. Kigel N.F. Ferment cultures for fermented dairy products: main types // N.F.
Kigel // Dairy industry. - 2005. – P. 26 - 29.
4. Kolesnikova S.S. Quality of milk and new technologies of cheese developed
in Ukraine / S.S. Kolesnikova // Dairy farming. - 2006. –P. 12.
5. Kolesnikova S.S. Biological treatment of milk and cheese making / S.S.
Kolesnikova // Cheese and butter production. – 2000. – № 2. – P.26.
6. Myagkonosov D.S. Effect of propione acid bacteria on taste of dairy products
/ D.S. Myagkonosov, N.P. Zakharova, G/D/ Perfilyev // Cheese and butter
production. – 2003. – № 5. – P.15.
7. Yankovskyy D.S. Propione acid bacteria in the composition of biologically
active preparations and sour milk products / D.S.Yankovskyy, G.S. Dyment, O.P.
Potrebchuk // Visnyk of agricultural science. – 2007. – № 8. – P.60 - 62.
8. Bannikova L.A. Selection of sour milk bacteria and their use in dairy
industry/ L.A.Bannikova. – M.: Food industry. – 1975. – 255 p.
9. Ryzhkova T.M. Patent for useful model № 45707 “Method of cheese clot
production when rennet cheese from goat’s milk is produced”, registered in the State
Register of Patents of Ukraine for useful models, 25 11.2009, Bul. № 22. – 4 p.
10. TC U 15.5- 00493758 – 001:2011 “ Sour milk curd from goat’s milk.
Technical conditions” [Introduced into practice : 2011 – 01 -01]. – K.: State standard
of consumption, Ukraine, 2010. –24 p. – (State standards of Ukraine. Technical
conditions).
J21310-060
UDC 534.2
Golovkina L.V, Umayrov R.Y.
RESEARCH OF CONTRAPERTURE SPEAKERS IN ACOUSTIC
Kharkov national university of radioelectronics,
Kharkov, pr. Lenina 14, 61166
The possibility of determination of optimum distance for halfaperture speaker
between a driver and reflecting plate was described. Properties of driver are used on
an orientation and reflections of plate surface. A calculation showed the insignificant
diminishing of half distance in a halfaperture speaker as compared to contraperture
speaker and possibility of replacement of contraperture speakers by halaperture
speakers.
Key words: the halfaperture speaker, contraperture speaker, optimization, level
of sound pressure.
In [1] the possibility of determining the optimal distance between two
oppositely-driver to create omnidirectional speakers in acoustics was demonstrated.
This distance is determined by the angle of the driver aperture pattern and the total
sound pressure at some distance from the driver during supplying certain power.
Application contraperture principle defines the pressurization in the air column
between the drivers, the point of emission is situated between there. It creates socalled «monopole of pressure», the point of sound source. It is a solution of the «farfield» problem [2].
If the length of the standing wave: λст =λ/2, where λ – the length of the traveling
sound wave is known, the distance between adjacent node and anti-node is λст/2=λ/4.
The condition λ/4 is the limiting distance, Δ, by removing of two oppositely drivers
with radius RE and effective radiating surface SE or in halfaperture – reflecting plate
with an area of SR, i.e. 0,5RE ≅ Δ < 0,25λmax, SR=(1/3-4)SE [3].
Condition 0,5RE ≅ Δ does not allow to use the directional properties of drivers
and does not determine the exact distance between them, and the condition Δ <0,25
λmax generates unreasonably «increased size» of the system.
Contraperture speakers were investigated in accordance with the optimal values
of the distances between the oppositely directed drivers presented in [1]. It was the
need for research to identify and clarify the optimal distance in halfaperture speaker,
when, with the reflecting plate is used instead of the second driver.
If the two waves of oppositely drivers of full contraperture speaker give a
resultant wave whose front is a sphere, then the presence of two point contraperture
sources in some homogeneous and isotropic medium two spherical waves are excited
and in an arbitrary point of space there is a superposition of waves and highs and
lows are changing its position in space.
The study of these processes for full contraperture speaker, for halfaperture
speaker, as well as for two full contraperture speakers and two halfaperture speakers
compared with conventional stereo systems have become necessary to confirm the
empirical relationships for these speakers.
Two models were prepared with the possibility of installing a speaker in the
case, reflecting plates and changes the distances between them. Also, these models
are used to measure the total level of the sound field, and in this case the distance
between layouts set equal to 1 m.
Optimum distance between the drivers is determined by the intersection of
graphs of sound pressure from the distance P (r) and the vertical angle of dispersion
from the distance to the system center φ (r) [1]. For the parameters of the speaker LH
= 74,8 dB and R = 0,05 m (0.00252 м3volume of the case with internal dimensions
of 0.1 x 0.14 x 0.18 m with the port tube length 0.045 m and diameter 0.025 m), the
distance between the speakers was Н = 19.34 cm (its half r = 9,67 cm).
Below is the structure of the elements of models and their photographs (Fig. 1)
for the research of the full contraperture speaker, halfaperture speaker and their
combinations.
1, 2 – cases for broadband drivers 3, the reflecting plate 4.
Fig. 1. The elements of layouts and designs for research
The distance to the reflecting plate, НП,
HП =
H
×k ,
2
(1)
where k =
L1
– the reflection coefficient of the surface; L1, L2 – noise levels. For
L2
the measured values L1 и L2, НП = 9,16 cm.
The characteristic size of the reflecting plate
æa ö
l = 2 H П tg ç ÷ ,
è2ø
(2)
where α – scattering angle of the broadband driver (60° is taken into account).
The characteristic size of the plate was 10.5 cm The side of the plate should be
increased in proportion to the chassis to which the driver was set, i.e. taken as equal
to the depth of the case for the driver.
The angle of the vertical orientation j
æ HП
è 2R
j = arctg ç
æH
ö
÷ + arctg ç П
è l
ø
ö
÷.
ø
(3)
The angle of the vertical direction was about 800.
The results of the AFC measurement (Fig. 2), full contraperture speaker (solid
line – 1) and halfaperture (dotted line – 2) are shown below.
Fig. 2. AFC of the speakers
The graphs of the measurements obtained (Fig. 3) the dependence of the general
average sound pressure level at 0.5, 1, 1.5 and 2 meters from the speakers (and stereo
pairs) as compared with conventional speaker and stereopair: 1 – two contraperture
speakers; 2 – two conventional systems (stereo), 3 – one conventional speaker
system, 4 – one halfaperture speaker, 5 – two halfaperture speakers, 6 – one
contraperture speaker.
Fig. 3. The dependence of the speakers average sound pressure level from a
distance
Nature of the change of average sound pressure level (measured from all sides)
from the distance showed little change for single speakers: full contrapertur speaker
and halfaperture (see characteristics 6th and 4th respectively).
For two full contraperture speakers and two halfaperture speakers characteristics
are very different (see respectively 1th and 5th), and if the two halfaperture speakers
conditionally «repeated characterization» of a single speaker, a pair of full
kortaperture speakers are closed in sound field characteristics to conventional stereo
pair with similar drivers and cases (see 1th in comparison with 2th).
As a result of this work demonstrated the possibility of determining the optimal
distance for halfaperture speaker between the driver and the reflecting plate. Used the
properties of the driver in focus and the reflective properties of the plate surface.
Calculations showed a slight decrease in the half-distance in halfaperture speaker
compared with contraperture. The general nature of AFC has not changed for two
types of speakers that really confirms the identity of the replacement conraperture
speakers by halfaperture speakers. The nature of changes in the levels of sound
pressure from a distance for two conraperture speakers showed their similarity with
the characteristics of a conventional stereo pair.
References:
1. Golovkina, L.V. Creation speakers in all sides direction in acoustics //
Technological audit and backlogs of production, 2012, Volume. Systems and
management processes.– № 4/1(6). pp. 9–10.
2.Сontrapertur
acoustic.
Available
http://baseacoustica.ru/index.php/Kontraperturnaya-akustika.html
at:
(accessed
30
January 2013).
3.Vinogradov
A.V.,
Gaydarov
A.S.
Patent
2187888
(RUSSIAN
FEDERATION). Loud speaker. Published in B. I., 2000. № 99112108/28.
J21310-061
UDC 622.352.1:622.22
Pershin G.D., Karaulov N.G., Ulyakov M.S.
THE RESEARCH OF HIGH-STRENGTH DIMENSION STONE MINING
TECHNOLOGICAL SCHEMES IN RUSSIA AND ABROAD
FSBEI HРE “Magnitogorsk State Technical University named after G.I.
Nosov”, Chelyabinsk region, Magnitogorsk, Lenin Avenue 38, 455000
In this report we describe analysis of granite blocks mining technological
schemes in Finland, Italy, Portugal, Spain and Russia. The presented data indicate
the need of the rational way choosing to prepare blocks for excavation for the
specific conditions of development.
Key words: diamond cable car, performance, granite blocks, primary monolith,
secondary monolith, damping filling, horizontal cut.
Multi-system natural solid mass fracturing, forming natural joints of different
volume, is the peculiarity of the high – strength block stone deposits. In mining
processing, saw cuts, forming artificially created joints, are imposed on the natural
cracks of the solid mass. During the consequent cutting, blocks of regular geometric
shape are obtained [1].
Granite blocks open cast mining method is realized according to three schemes:
one-, two-and three-stage. The choice of one or another scheme depends on the size
of the natural stone blocks solid mass, which are determined by fracturing index.
Practically, in most cases the number of stages comprises two or three.
One -stage scheme provides the finished product obtaining after blocks
separation from the solid mass (1-10 m3). Excavation of blocks shaped to a standard
size is achieved with the help of this operation. At present, this scheme is seldom
applied.
Two-stage mining is needed because of extractive blocks (monoliths) large size
while using natural fracturing solid mass. In this case, monolith, separated from the
solid mass differs from the required dimensions and should be cut into blocks of
necessary size and shape.
Two-stage block mining technology consists of two steps: monolith of 80-800
m3 separation from solid mass and secondary cutting (Fig. 1).
Fig. 1. A two-stage scheme of granite blocks mining with monolith tipping:
a - primary monolith separation of from the solid mass; b - monolith tipping on
the damping filling ; c, d - marketable blocks monolith cutting
In Figure 2 the tipped monolith cutting by the blast-hole method with the
mechanical wedges application in the granite quarry Luboiu (Italy) is shown.
Herewith a diamond wire machine is used to separate the monolith along the
horizontal sheet (DWM).
a
b
Fig. 2. Quarry Luboiu. Sardinia (Italy): a - DWM horizontal cut, b - cutting
of monolith tipped on the damping filling
In case of longitudinal and cross crack systems are close to the vertical direction,
and bed-sheeted crack bedding are horizontal or low-inclined (incidence angle up to 5
degrees), the separation is performed without tipping (Fig. 3).
Fig. 3. Two-stage scheme of granite blocks extraction without monolith
tipping
In Figure 4 a two-stage scheme of granite blocks extraction without monolith
tipping at Mansurovsky granite deposit (Russia) is shown [2].
Cat-988H
Fig. 4. Scheme of monoliths separation and cutting without tipping at
Mansurovsky granite deposit: 1 - loader, 2 - blocks, 3 - self-propelled drilling rig
DC 120
The main difference between a three-stage scheme from the two- stage scheme
consists of the greater volume 300-3000 m3 monolith separation from the solid mass
(Figure 5) [3-5].
Fig. 5. Three-stage scheme of granite blocks extraction with monolith
tipping and cutting in the parallel or orthogonal direction to the crack system (
Lower Sanarskoe granodiorite deposit, Russia):
a - primary monolith separation (10 * 6.8 * 5 m), b - secondary monolith
cutting (10 * 1.7 * 5 m), c - secondary monolith charging on the damping filling
and its division into blocks (1.7 * 1.2 * 1.5 m)
The process selection of stone volume extraction preparation by three-or twostage scheme is realized dependently on the bench height, its component layers
number and working sites possibilities for monolith carving into marketable blocks.
According to the technology under consideration, initially large monoliths are
separated from the bench. The monolith length can reach several dozen meters, and is
divisible, as a rule, to the distance between jointing cross cracks in the monolith
faces. The large monolith width should be a divisible value to the marketable block
length or width. Further, a great monolith is divided into smaller units in the
longitudinal or cross directions, which is the second stage of preparatory work.
Secondary monolith as well has dimensions divisible to the marketable block basic
size. Then, there is a third stage, when taking into account the bench height horizontal
layers, marketable blocks are obtained from the secondary monoliths.
Geometrical parameters, shape and quality of blocks mined abroad do not
correspond to the Russian ones. The minimum dimensions of commercial granite
blocks from abroad are 2.5 m3, while in our country blocks even less than 0.5 m3 are
in the processing. In Spain and Italy, many of mined blocks are stored in warehouses
for a long time because of excess. In Russia, on the contrary, because of their lack
enterprises can not use their full capacity. Many stone treatment plants have to buy
imported granite blocks.
The amount of employed in the European quarries is 3-9 people. This is
explained on the one hand by high-performance equipment application, and on the
other hand by the lack of security, staff engineers excess and occupation
combination. Over and above the equipment maintenance is carried out under “ third
party services” provision.
In Russia engineer staff is inflated, because of Soviet officialdom traditions, and
the number of permissive documents breaks all the world records. Everyone has to be
responsible for something, but the traumatism does not reduced.
Two techniques of high-solid rock mining are primarily used abroad: Finnish
and Spanish.
Further we shall consider the examples of their typical deposits [6]. Kuru Grey
(Finland) and Rosa Porrino (Spain) quarries are of greatest interest.
Granite deposit Kuru Grey (Fig. 6) is located near the city of Tampere (Finland)
and has been mining since 1950. With an annual output of 4,500 marketable blocks
only three people work there: a loader driver, self-propelled drilling rig DC 120 and
manual jackhammer operators. They also may perform other work.
It turns out that one mining worker has 1500 m3 of marketable blocks per year.
Fig. 6. Kuru Grey Granite deposit (Finland)
The deepen-solid exploitation system is block mining by horizontal and slightly
inclined beds-benches. Separated monolith parameters are the following: the optimal
length is 40-60 m, height 1.2 m, width 1-1.5.
Cut slot is formed by Sandvik drilling rig (boring rig Sandvik DC 700, equipped
with hydraulic hammer drill HL710, drilling depth up to 29 m, holes diameter from
64 up to 102 mm is recommended). Carrying through the cut slot they firstly drill by
bits of 89 mm diameter, then of 76 (smaller diameter provides rational drilling-in).
With the help of self-propelled drilling rig DC120 (drilling depth is up to 9 meters,
the holes diameter is 24-45 mm, equipped with hydraulic hammer drill HEX1) holes
of 24 mm in diameter with an interval of 30 cm are drilled. The deposit was
prospected by two external and internal common trenches with a trace of spiral shape
without contiguity. Ramps in quarries are as bulk as well as constructed in the granite
solid mass (using natural bed-sheeted cracks). Drilling with a hand held hammer drill
is used to prepare the quarry benches.
WA600 loader (Fig. 7) produced by Komatsu with a bucket capacity of 6.5 m3 is
additionally equipped with quick-detachable pitchfork and blocks tilter for monoliths
tipping on some bulk bedplates from chip and bore meal. The separated blocks are
transported by loader to the temporary store house which is located in the quarry
worked-out area.
Fig. 7. WA600 loader block transportation
The technology also provides primary monolith explosive separation by Forsit
tubes. Detonation occurs consistently partially and, therefore, this rock blasting
method does not affect the stone modularity.
Rosa Porrino deposit (Fig. 8) is located in the north-western Spain near Porrini.
This upland deposit, with the lack of loose stripping, has been developing since 1960.
At present, the number of employees comprises 9 people, 4 of them are detached by a
customer.
With a marketable blocks capacity of 12,000 m3 per year 1,333 m3 comes to one
worker.
Fig. 8. Rosa Porrino granite deposit (Spain)
High-benched three-stage technology of DWM blocks mining is used at the
quarry.
Sawing is carried out by quarry machines CBC75HPN (power 55 kW, the
diameter of the drive pulley 810 mm) and CBC-MD75HP (57 kW, 810 mm)
produced by the Spanish company Grani Roc (city of Leon), which is the part of
Grupo Hedisa Cor (Fig. 9).
Fig. 9. Diamond wire machine SHS 75 HPN
(produced by Grani Roc)
Maximum sawing productivity reaches 10 m2 / h. It is noteworthy that at the end
of the working day in the absence of people diamond wire machines are left running.
Water for wire cooling is not reused. Long hole drilling machine (pneumatic, crown
diameter of 90 mm, produced by Grani Roc company) provides pilot boreholes
drilling. Horizontal borehole is at height of 10-20 cm from the surface of the mining
floor. The main reason of the actual performance lag from the designed is the
complexity of the pilot boreholes docking and, as a consequence, small equipment
utilization coefficient. Due to the probe use for holes prospecting (Grani Roc) the
process of docking becomes much easier and takes less time. Stitch drilling rig COF2 is applied in the secondary monolith cutting (height 15 m, length 30-40, width 1.5
m). It is equipped with two pneumatic drilling hammers with expected technical
performance of 0.6 m / min, produced by Grani Roc company. There is a fixed
distance of 30 cm, set by the manufacturer between drilling hammers. Holes are
drilled with a diameter of 32 mm with 15 cm section. Mechanical wedges and
pneumatic hammer is used to separate blocks. Finished blocks are loaded in trawl and
transported to the store house (transportation distance is about 400 m). Two loaders
work at the quarry: CAT 988 F (6.5 m3 bucket capacity), CAT 988 B (8 m3 bucket
capacity). The secondary monolith tipping is performed with the use of hydro
bedplates.
A compressor (produced by Atlas Copco company) is foreseen for stitch drilling
rig installing and a diesel generator is foreseen for diamond wire machines operating.
Expanding powders similar in composition to the LDCs (ICOLD) - Masa Expansiva
produced by Sumi Roc (Grupo Hedisa Cor) are also used at Spain granite quarries.
The maximum spacer force from the powder and water mix arises after 24 hours.
Having analysed the best granite deposits developments in Finland, Italy,
Portugal, Spain, Russia and literature sources we can make the following
generalizations.
The acquaintance with foreign experience of highly solid stone mining allowed
to get known the market requirements for block quality.
These requirements are completely incompatible with Russian regulatory acts
(GOST 9479-2011).
The research and experience of the diamond wire application shows the high
wire wear when high strength stone cutting. Due to the high consumption of diamond
tools on solid rock and its high cost it is advisable to use diamond wire cutting in
combination with a borehole way of monolith separation. [6].
The analysis [1-7] showed that the following operations in the monolith
separation from the solid mass are used:
– horizontal cut with diamond wire cutting using;
– vertical cross sawing cut is produced with the diamond wire;
– vertical longitudinal sawing cut with the use of diamond wire cutting or
borehole method with special hose or hydro wedges (рис. 10).
or:
– sawing cut in the vertical, longitudinal and cross sheets is performed using
diamond wire machine;
– creation of horizontal separation sheet using the borehole method with special
hose.
Diamond sawing horizontal cut is carried out at an angle of 2-4 degrees deep in
the solid mass to get the opportunity for the water supplying to the wire with a stone
contact point. Water can be also supplied under pressure along the vertical wellbore.
a
b
Fig. 10. Prugnola quarry on island Sardinia (Italy): a - the use of a drill
borehole way to create a vertical longitudinal cuts, b - the creation of horizontal
separation by a drill borehole way
In each case, the combination of diamond wire sawing cut and borehole way of
the monolith separation will be conditioned by the naturally massif fracturing,
provided the lowest operating costs for the stone volume preparation to excavation.
Cutting monolith in marketable blocks are usually carried by a borehole way
with different gripper systems and should take into account the natural form joints
making up the monolith.
The presented data indicate the need of the rational way choosing to prepare
blocks for excavation for the specific conditions of development. Equipment, singly
chopped out of the Finnish or Spanish mining scheme, purchased for our enterprises,
does not affect the productivity increasing in block production within the accepted
technology in Russia.
References
1. Першин Г. Д., Караулов Г. А., Караулов Н. Г., Караулов А. Г. Влияние
высоты добычного уступа на выход мраморных блоков товарной кондиции //
Горный журнал. – 2008. – №1. – С. 25-26.
2. Першин Г. Д., Пшеничная Е. Г., Хасанов Х. Ф., Ахабзянов Р. М.
Повышение эффективности добычи блоков на Мансуровском месторождении
гранитов // Добыча, обработка и применение природного камня: Сб. науч. тр. –
Магнитогорск: ГОУ ВПО «МГТУ им. Г. И. Носова», 2009. – С. 4-17.
3. Синельников О. Б. Добыча природного облицовочного камня. – М.:
Издательство РАСХН, 2005. – 245 с.
4. Синельников О. Б. Финский карьер блочного камня «Пиетиля». Горный
журнал, 2011. – №5. – С. 73-75.
5. Тарасенко А. В., Кондратьев Л. А., Савельев Г. П. Вскрытие алмазноканатными машинами нижележащих горизонтов на гранитном карьере
Восточно-Варламовского месторождения // Камень вокруг нас. – 2009. – №21. –
С. 25-29.
6. Дубровский А.Б., Уляков М.С. Выбор оборудования при разработке
Нижне-Санарского месторождения гранодиоритов // Горный журнал. – 2011. –
№5. – С. 67-70.
7. Карасев Ю. Г. Технология горных работ на карьерах облицовочного
камня. – М.: Недра, 1995. – С. 21, 22.
J21310-062
UDC 004.2
Vishtak O. V.
THE DIRECTION OF THE SOFTWARE IMPLEMENTATION OF THE
ELECTRONIC EDUCATIONAL RESOURCES
Balakovo Institute of technique, technology and management (a branch)
Saratov State Technical University named after Gagarin»
In this paper we study the direction of the software implementation of automated
training systems of the electronic educational resources.
Key words: software implementation, automated training systems, electronic
educational resources, island information technology.
Pedagogical studies in the field of computer support for vocational education
have more than 30-year history. During this period, the educational institutions of the
USA, France, Japan, Russia and some other countries have developed a large number
of computer-aided training systems oriented on different types of computers. Abroad
the
development
and
implementation
of
electronic
educational
resources
(educational, methodical, informational, etc.) consider a very expensive affair due to
its high-tech, which provides for joint work of the high qualified specialists:
psychologists, teachers of various subjects, computer designers, programmers.
In methodological terms of development and use of automated training systems
and electronic educational resources are developed in several directions.
The first direction is supported in its based on the idea of programmed
instruction. In its framework are developed and operated by automated training
system (ATS) in various academic disciplines. The basis of the ATS are the so-called
copyright systems, allowing the teacher-developer enter the training material to the
database and program with the help of special copyright languages or other means of
algorithms for its study. Representatives of the ATS, built on the algorithms of
programmed instruction, for a long time were: abroad PLATO, in our country the
family of the ATS high school. Since the beginning of 90-ies in Russia and the CIS
countries apply instrumental environment for the development of computer courses
on a personal computer of IBM PC type of a foreign Private Tutor, LinkWay) and
domestic production: ADONIS, the LESSON.
The second direction of the program-pedagogical support of professional
activity is as if the secondary area of informatization of various sectors of human
activity (science, technology, economy). This is a separate program packages of
programs, elements of the automated systems (ACS, CAD), intended for automation
of labor-intensive calculations, the optimization of research of properties of objects
and processes on mathematical models. The use of such software in the training
traditionally is more widespread than the use of the AOC, as in our country, and
abroad.
Since the beginning of the 80's intensively develops a new direction in the
computerization of education - intellectual educational system (IOS) based on the
works in the field of artificial intelligence. A substantial part of the IOS are a model
of the learner, the learning process, subject area, on the basis of which for each
student can be a rational strategy of training. Knowledge base IOS may contain,
along with formal knowledge, expertise in the subject areas and in the sphere of
education. Work in the field of IOS promising, but are still at the stage of laboratory
research and, despite some examples of successful applications, the level of media
technologies have not yet come out.
Creation and introduction in educational process of personal computers caused
new technical and didactic abilities. It is the freedom of access to the PC, the
simplicity of dialogue of communication and individual path of learning. The use of
graphic illustrations in the electronic educational resources allows not only to
increase the speed of information transfer learner and to raise the level of
understanding, but also contributes to the development of such important for the
specialists of any industry qualities, as figurative thinking.
In the market of computer technologies appear more promising for the purposes
of professional training of technical and software innovations. This is the optical
external storage devices with large amounts of memory, tools hypertext, multi - and
hypermedia, a system of «virtual reality» of a computer, equipped with technical
means of multimedia, allows the use of didactic opportunities of video - and audio
information. With the help of hypertext systems realizes the possibility of creating
cross-references in text areas, that makes it easier to find the desired information by
key words. System hypermedia allow you to associate with each other not only text,
but also graphics, digital speech, sound recordings, photographs, animations, video
clips. The use of such systems allows you to create and widely disseminated a variety
of electronic educational resources.
The development of the information-telecommunication networks gave a new
impetus to the systems of distance learning, provided access to huge amounts of
information stored in digital libraries New hardware and software, build the capacity
of the computer created the conditions of free access to large volumes of information
for students active in databases, knowledge bases, electronic archives, directories,
encyclopedias.
Development of hardware and software means of information technologies
provide a good technical capacities for the implementation of various didactic ideas.
Unfortunately, however, the methodical aspects of IT are not kept pace with the
development of technical means, as in a methodical plan IT integrate knowledge of
such heterogeneous Sciences as psychology, pedagogy, mathematics, Cybernetics,
Informatics, and psychological and pedagogical basis is crucial in this integration.
The quality of electronic educational resources is incorporated at the design stage in
the preparation of educational content with regard to the specific destination of the
resource and provided to the subject area [1]. Therefore, remains a topical direction
of the development of automated training systems and electronic educational
resources - the method of «direct programming», that is, the direction of the so-called
«island» informatization of educational process, when to create them is created by the
creative team, which performs the work on the realization of the didactic and
technological cycle of their creation, including tested in the educational process.
In studies L.H.Zaynudinova shows the dynamics of the use of different
approaches and implementation of computer training programs on General technical
disciplines, which confirms clearly expressed tendency to predominant use of the
method of direct programming, characteristic for the «island of informatization» of a
particular academic subject [2].
In the implementation of projects under the method of «direct programming» is
characterized by big labor and big enough time range, high requirements to the
professionalism of the members of the writing team, and especially for the
programmers, the complexity of the coordination of the whole staff. But the
disadvantages are compensated by the advantages, characteristic for the «Islands of
information»: the possibility of creation of the automated training systems and
electronic educational resources, taking into account the specifics of the subject area;
the ability to dynamically as educational material, and information management;
possibility of a development of the author's variant of the interface, the method of
presenting the material, structure of the whole complex with respect to the discipline.
Thus, in pedagogical practice is still topical initiative of teachers, which form the
creative teams on creation and introduction in educational process of the automated
training systems and electronic educational resources.
References:
1. Antonova A.V., Vishtak N M. Information technologies as a basic component
of innovations in education. The teacher of XXI century. 2010. T. 1. № 3. p. 22-25.
2.Zaynudinova L.H. Creation and use of electronic textbooks (on the example of
General technical disciplines): the Monograph. Astrakhan, Publishing house of
CNTEP, 1999. 364 p.
J21310-063
UDC 004.2
Vishtak N. M.
INFORMATION SUPPORT
SCIENTIFIC-RESEARCH WORK OF STUDENTS
Balakovo Institute of technique, technology and management (a branch)
Saratov state technical University named after Gagarin»
In this paper we study the structure of didactic and informational-mean for the
support of scientific-research work of students of the University.
Key words: computer science, scientific-research work of students, the method
of projects, electronic educational resources.
Modern society becomes open system, which is characterized by the following
trends: technology of production, the increasing influence of information as a
resource for social and economic progress; intensive development of informational
and technical support of all fields of activity, requires from the specialists of the deep
base of knowledge and on the basis of the acquisition of new, to go beyond the
«narrow specialist» and become a professional, capable of exercising complex
professional activities.
Introduction in manufacture of new technologies requires a constant
independent work with various sources of knowledge [1]. Increase of competitiveness
of production requires specialists to be ready for independent, creative and costeffective solutions encountered a variety of economic and scientific-technical tasks,
to have a systematic vision of the production processes, to be able to manage the
team.
Preparation of bachelors and masters, possessing profound knowledge base,
professional management skills, the ability to engage in constant creative selfeducation to the full extent feasible in higher technical school through an
organizational form of training, as the scientific-research work.
The implementation of scientific-research works requires students focus,
internal motivation, high self-organization, self-discipline and personal responsibility
[2]. But, on the other hand, independently and successfully carried out scientific
researches give the student satisfaction as a process of self-knowledge, selfdevelopment, as an opportunity to the implementation of the future professional
activity. But according to M.I. Dyachenko and L.A. Kandibovich correctly organize
their work may not 45.5% of the students. Therefore, on the part of teachers is very
important is the process of organization of management of scientific-research work of
students, ensuring its information support.
Very promising at present the opportunities of the organization of students '
scientific research, development of their skills of self-government and self-education,
starting with the first course, is the pedagogical technology - a method of projects.
«The project method assumes the solution of any problem, which requires, on the one
hand, the use of various methods and means of education, and on the other, the
integration of knowledge from different fields of science, engineering, technology,
creative areas» [3, p.57].
In the basis of methods of projects - development of cognitive skills of students,
development of skills to construct their own knowledge, the development of
independent skills of work with the information, skills to orient in the information
space of the studied domain, the training of the students in the identification and
formulation of research problems, conduct their analysis, finding ways of their
solution, as well as the organization of purposeful joint activities of the students.
This method focuses on independent learning activities of students at indirect
management on the part of teachers.
The higher technical school of the greatest interest are science research projects
of students (SRPS) the use of information technology.
When performing SRPS is the formation of the following competencies: ability
to conduct the collection and analysis of scientific-technical information, ability to
participate in the formulation and carrying out of experimental researches, the
capacity of analysis and synthesis of the results of professional studies, ability to
draw up the results of scientific research and to submit them for protection. Also
when performing SRPS students learn how to generate competitive ideas and
implement them in projects.
In SRPS in computer science distinguish the following stages:
ü
the initial stage - the formulation of the project, including the definition
of the objectives of the project;
ü
stage of planning - development of the ways of carrying out the project;
the stage of implementation of the project;
ü
the stage of completion of the works on the project, including
documentation of the results, the presentation and discussion of the results of
scientific-research work.
Thus, SRPS in the process of its implementation goes through various stages,
called in total life cycle of the project.
For the implementation of the various functions of management of the project
and create a high motivational attitude studying computer science requires timely,
full information support, both for students and for teachers. For this very promising is
the use of didactic and informational mean for the support of scientific-research work
of students (DIMS SRPS), which set out the objectives of the scientific-research work
of students, shows the need for and importance of information culture for future
engineers, as well as provide information about the method of projects, on the topics
of projects, their implementation, the presentation and discussion.
Management of activity of the trainee, participating in the project, takes place
through the idea of how a result, the achievement of which it is directed. Therefore,
in the formulation of the generalized objectives of the project previously should be to
identify a range of problems to be solved in the project.
Given that the scientific and research projects, as a rule, are made at the turn of
several subject areas, on the first stage of formulation of the generalized objectives of
the project is very important to reveal the students of the cause-and-effect connection
of computer science with other disciplines cycle of General professional and special
disciplines. Thus, summarized the implementation of SRPS in computer science: the
development of cognitive and research skills of the students, the development of the
information culture, including guidance in the information space, the implementation
of collection, processing, analysis and systematization of scientific-technical
information on the project with application of modern information technologies; the
development of the skill independently to construct their own knowledge, as well as
the acquisition of communicative abilities and skills, should be presented in the
DIMS of research work in the module “The goals and objectives of research work».
Through the registration and disclosure of the purposes of implementing the project is
the implementation of such a didactic principle as a consciousness, which
significantly increases the effectiveness of the independent students activity,
contributes to its extra motivation.
Step goal-setting smoothly in the planning stage of projects implementation,
which allows you to focus the students ' attention on the main objectives, achieving
regular carrying out of the projects, which significantly facilitates the self-control
students. At this stage, is the definition of research methods, information sources,
determination of ways of decision of tasks of the project. Information support of this
segment in the DIMS SPRS is presented module «Planning of research work».
Information support of the implementation phase of projects and reporting the
results is performed in the module «the Best projects», in which discusses various
ways of their presentation, as well as additional components, including articles,
essays, reports and presentations at research conferences.
Thus, the information support of scientific-research projects of students, is
optimally possible when using didactic and informational-mean for the support of
scientific-research work of students, reveals the goals and tasks of the scientificresearch work of students in the process of implementation of the projects on
computer science, which reveals the importance of the formation of information
culture of students in relation to their future professional activity through the method
of projects, creating a high motivational attitude of students in a course of
information science.
References:
1. Hodakova N.A. Actual questions of study at the University. Fundamental research.
2009. № 5. p. 115-116.
2. Hodakova N.A. Information technologies in the research of the students. Distance
and virtual learning, 2007. № 7. p. 58-65.
3. New pedagogical and information technologies in the system of education /Under
ed. E.S. Polat. - M.: Publishing centre «Academy», 1999. 224 p.
J21310-064
UDC 621.18.01
Mikhailov A.G.,Batrakov P.A.,Terebilov S.V.
APPLICABLE INVESTIGATION OF GEOMETRIC
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE BOILER FURNACE ON THE FORMATION
OF NITROGEN OXIDES
The problems of formation of nitrogen oxides during combustion of organic
fuels in the boiler set out in the national and international literature in recent years.
Offered chemical reactions and mathematical models that accompany the emergence
of thermal, fast and fuel NOx. The assessment of the influence of the shape furnace
boiler in the composition of the gaseous products of combustion of fuel.
Keywords:
Combustion, oxides of nitrogen, thermal, fast, fuel.
The main toxic component formed during the combustion of natural gas and fuel
oil furnaces of steam and hot water boilers, is the nitrogen oxides NOx. Nitrogen
oxides have a negative impact on human health, particularly in the respiratory
system. And although the amount of nitrogen oxides produced naturally, much higher
than the emissions from the effects of human activity, it is necessary to take into
account that anthropogenic emissions of nitrogen oxides are concentrated in the areas
of human activity. Therefore concentration NOx in urban areas by one to two orders
higher than the natural background concentration [1]. Based on this, this paper
focuses on solving the problem of reducing the emissions of oxides of nitrogen gasoil power plants and boiler houses.
One of the most important parts of an autonomous heating boilers is a low
power, which are necessary for the production of steam and hot water. Intensify the
process of energy transfer and improve the characteristics of the small boiler are
possible by changing the geometrical characteristics of the boiler furnace.
Modeling of processes taking place in the furnace of the boiler, by means of the
design of the ANSYS [2, 3].
To describe the turbulent flow of reacting gases used turbulence model with two
equations. This turbulence model is called k-ε with two equations (k - turbulent
kinetic energy, ε - the amount of dissipation of the kinetic energy).
Consider the basic equations that describe the reactive gas mixture under the
following basic assumptions [4]: a gas mixture filling the furnace volume – gray
body; the heat from the flame to the wall is carried primarily by radiation, convection
and molecular heat conduction; the pressure inside the boundary layer does not vary
along the normal to the surface of the body and are, respectively, the pressure on the
outer edge of the boundary layer; the total heat transfer at the interface between the
gas mixture – a wall made due to advection and radiation; reactive gas CH4 - 100%,
oxidant – air.
1. Continuity for the entire mixture:
𝜕𝜌
(𝜌𝑼) = 𝟎,
𝜕𝑡
(1)
+∇•
where ρ – density of the gas mixture, U – velocity vector, t – time.
2. Continuity for each component:
𝜕(𝜌𝑌𝐼 )
𝜕𝑡
+
𝜕(𝜌𝑢𝑗 𝑌𝐼 )
𝜕𝑥𝑗
=
SI – the rate of I-component, YI =
𝜕
𝜕𝑥𝑗
𝜕𝑌
�Г𝐼𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝜕𝑥𝐼 � + 𝑆𝐼 ,
(2)
𝑗
rI
– the concentration of a substance Ir
component, ρI – the density of each I-component, Г𝐼𝑒𝑓𝑓 = Г𝐼 +
𝜇𝑡
𝑆𝑐𝑡
– diffusion
coefficient, ГI – diffusion coefficient for the I-component, µt – the turbulent
component of the dynamic viscosity , 𝑆𝑐𝑡 =
viscosity.
𝜈
Г𝐼
– Schmidt number, ν – the kinematic
3. Moments:
𝜕𝜌𝑈
𝜕𝑡
+ ∇ • (ρ𝑼 ⊗ 𝑼) − ∇ • �𝜇𝑒𝑓𝑓 ∇𝑼� = −∇𝑃′ + ∇ • (𝜇𝑒𝑓𝑓 ∇𝑼)𝑇 + 𝐵,
(3)
where B – is the sum of the body forces, μeff – effective turbulent viscosity, P pressure.
In formulas (1) - (3) using the following notation:
𝑈𝑥
𝜕𝑈𝑦
𝜕𝑈
𝜕𝑈
𝑼 = �𝑈𝑦 � , ∇ • 𝑼 = 𝑥 +
+ 𝑧,
𝜕𝑥
𝜕𝑦
𝜕𝑧
𝑈𝑧
𝜕
𝜕
𝜕
⎡ (𝜌𝑈𝑥 𝑈𝑥 ) +
�𝜌𝑈𝑦 𝑈𝑥 � + (𝜌𝑈𝑧 𝑈𝑥 ) ⎤
𝜕𝑧
𝜕𝑦
⎢ 𝜕𝑥
⎥
𝜕
𝜕
𝜕
⎢
⎥
∇ • (𝜌𝑼 ⊗ 𝑼) = ⎢ �𝜌𝑈𝑥 𝑈𝑦 � +
�𝜌𝑈𝑦 𝑈𝑦 � + �𝜌𝑈𝑧 𝑈𝑦 �⎥
𝜕𝑦
𝜕𝑧
𝜕𝑥
⎢
⎥
⎢ 𝜕 (𝜌𝑈 𝑈 ) + 𝜕 �𝜌𝑈 𝑈 � + 𝜕 (𝜌𝑈 𝑈 ) ⎥
𝑥 𝑧
𝑦 𝑧
𝑧 𝑧
𝜕𝑧
𝜕𝑦
⎣ 𝜕𝑥
⎦
4. Energy and dissipation:
𝜕(𝜌𝑘)
𝜕𝑡
𝜕(𝜌𝜀)
𝜕𝑡
𝜇
+ ∇ • (𝜌𝑼𝑘) = ∇ • ��𝜇 + 𝑡� ∇𝑘� + 𝑃𝑘 − 𝜌𝜀 − 𝑆 𝑅 ,
𝜎
𝜇
𝜀
𝜀
+ ∇ • (𝜌𝑼𝜀) = ∇ • ��𝜇 + 𝑡� ∇𝜀� + (𝐶𝜀1 𝑃𝑘 − 𝐶𝜀2 𝜌𝜀).
𝑘
𝜎
𝜀
(4)
(5)
where SR – source term; С e 1 , С e 2 , s k , s e – the constant [2, 3]; Рk – the
turbulence production due to viscous and buoyancy forces; Pkb – the buoyancy
production term
[2, 3]:
2
𝑃𝑘 = 𝜇𝑡 ∇𝑼 • (∇𝑼 + ∇𝑼𝑇 ) − ∇ • 𝑼(3𝜇𝑡 ∇ • 𝑼 + 𝜌𝑘) + 𝑃𝑘𝑏 . (6)
3
5. The definition of enthalpy:
htot total specific enthalpy is given by:
htot = h + k,
(7)
where h – specific enthalpy stationary gas mixture.
6. Determination of viscosity:
k-ε model is based on the concept of eddy viscosity, it is:
μeff = μ + μt,
(8)
where μ – dynamic viscosity. This model assumes that the turbulent viscosity is
related to the turbulent kinetic energy and dissipation
𝜇𝑡 = 𝐶𝜇 𝜌
where Cμ – constant [2, 3].
𝑘2
𝜀
,
(9)
The variables k and ε are the result of solutions of differential transport
equations for the turbulent kinetic energy and dissipation.
7. The equation of state:
The equation of state proposed by Redlich-Kwong [2, 3]:
𝑃=
𝑅𝑇
𝜐−𝑏+𝑐
–
𝑎(𝑇)
,
𝜐(𝜐+𝑏)
(10)
where υ – specific volume; a, b, c – constants.
8. Initial conditions:
Accepted values for all parameters in the system of equations for the time t = 0
and the initial temperature T = 300 K.
9. The boundary conditions:
For the mathematical modeling of specific flows of multi-component reactive
gas is necessary to put the corresponding boundary conditions [2, 3]:
– Slip condition on a solid surface W
𝑼|𝑊 = 0.
(11)
q = q C + q R,
(12)
– Define the conditions of complex heat transfer at the wall
where q – heat flux through the boundary layer of the reactive gas mixture to the
wall, qC – advective heat flux, qR – radiative heat flux ( determined using the Monte
Carlo method).
- impermeability;
- pressure gradient in the direction normal to the surface.
Input:
- mass velocity;
- gas concentration;
- turbulence intensity;
Output:
- pressure P.
Equations (1 – 12) are included in the k-ε model, with the appropriate boundary
and initial conditions in three-dimensional formulation are solved numerically using
ANSYS CFX [2, 3].
The computational domain is a horizontal cylinder, 1.0 m long, with a crosssection of 0.66 m2 (Fig. 1) at a mass flow rate of the fuel-air mixture inlet 0.061 kg/s.
Fig. 1. The temperature distribution in the furnace
The main results of the calculations was to determine the values of the
temperature, velocity and concentration of the products of combustion. Including the
concentration of nitrogen and oxygen [4].
The combustion of organic fuels in boilers nitrogen contained in the air,
interacting with oxygen to form oxides:
NOx = NO + NO2 + N2O
The main fraction NO generated in the combustion is (95 – 99%). NO2 dioxide
and nitrous oxide N2O produced in much smaller quantities.
Formation monoxide (oxide) of nitrogen by burning fuel CH4 is due to the
oxidation of atmospheric nitrogen N2. Currently known three mechanisms by which
the formation of nitrogen oxides: thermal, fast and fuel. In the formation of thermal
NOx and fast – a source of nitrogen is air, and in the case of the formation of fuel NO
– nitrogen components of the fuel consumption.
The mechanism of formation of thermal NOx in the corresponding boundary and
initial conditions in a three-dimensional formulation are solved using ANSYS CFX
[3]. It was proposed by Y.B. Zeldovich [6, 1] and includes the following reactions:
O + N2 → NO + N,
N + O2 → NO + O,
It was later supplemented by the reaction of atomic nitrogen with hydroxyl and
was named an extended mechanism of Y.B. Zeldovich:
OH + N → NO + H,
Thermal NOx formation reactions are characterized by high activation energy, so
the formation of nitrogen oxides occurs at high temperatures above 1800 K. The
thermal NOx increases rapidly from the beginning of the combustion zone and
reaches its highest value immediately after the maximum temperature zone. Further
along the torch NOx concentration hardly changes. The expressions for the rate
constants k of each of the three reactions are presented in [3] and are as follows:
𝑘1 = (1,8 ∙ 1011 )exp �−
38370
𝑇
�,
𝑘2 = (6,4 ∙ 109 )exp �−
k3=3,0·1013.
3162
𝑇
�,
The formation of thermal NO identifies the following major factors: the
temperature in the combustion zone, the excess air ratio and the residence time of the
combustion products in high temperature zone. The amount of this component
SNO, thermal determined by the expression:
SNO,therma =WNOkthermal[O][N2],
where kthermal = 2k1, WNO – molar mass of thermal NO; [O], [N2] – molar
concentration of oxygen and nitrogen.
Studies combustion of hydrocarbon fuels carried Fenimore [3, 1], showed that
the front of the flame for a very short time the formation of nitrogen oxides by a
mechanism different from that proposed Y.B. Zeldovich. Discovered by nitric oxide
has been called fast enough because of the high speed of its formation to the root of
the torch. In this area observed significant amounts of hydrogen cyanide HCN, which
is explained by reacting molecular nitrogen with hydrocarbon radicals:
CH + N2 → HCN + N,
HCN + O2 → NO + ...,
The reactions of fast oxides NO occur quite vigorously at 1200 ... 1600 K.
The amount of this component SNO, prompt is given by [3]:
𝑆NO,𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑚𝑝𝑡 =
3
1�
𝑊 �2
2
𝑊NO 𝑘𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑚𝑝𝑡 [O2 ] [N2 ][𝐹𝑢𝑒𝑙] � � ,
𝜌
kprompt =Aprompt exp (– TAprompt)/T,
WNO is the molar mass of NO, Aprompt – by Arrhenius. These formulas for the
calculation of reaction rates apply only to flows with small values of Re (Reynolds).
Fluctuations parameters can have a dominant influence on the rate of formation of
NO in turbulent systems. In this case, the calculations used statistical methods [3].
The objects for computational studies by the authors examined the boiler
furnace with profiles circle and an ellipse. Computational models have the following
geometrical characteristics (Fig. 2).
a)
b)
Figure 2. Geometric characteristics of computational models:
a – the circle: a – diameter of the circle;
b – vertical ellipse: a – semi-major axis, b - minor axis
It is established that a change in the profile shape of the circle to an ellipse with
an increase in convective phenomena. It is accompanied by a decrease in the relative
concentration of nitrogen oxides NOel / NOokr (NOel - mass concentration of nitrogen
oxides in the furnace outlet with profile of the cross-sectional ellipse NOokr - mass
concentration of nitrogen oxides in the furnace outlet with profile of the crosssectional circumference) at the output of the boiler furnace (Fig. 3), decreasing the
maximum and average temperature T (Fig. 4) of the gas mixture inside the furnace
and recycling process in accordance with the equation:
1
NO + 𝜈𝐹 𝐹𝑢𝑒𝑙 → N2 + 𝜈CO2 CO2 + 𝜈H2O H2 O ,
2
(13)
where v - stoichiometric ratio; Fuel - type of fuel.
All of the above phenomena lead to a decrease in the relative concentration of
NOel / NOokr at the outlet of the furnace up to 22 % in the range of a / b from 1.2 to
1.4.
Fig. 3. The dependence of the relative concentration of NOel / NOokr
on the ratio of the semi-major axis to the minor axis of the ellipse
1250
Т, К
1225
1200
1175
1150
1,00
1,10
1,20
1,30
1,40
1,50
a/b
Fig. 4. The dependence of the temperature of the gas mixture by volume
averaged on ratio of semi-major axis to the minor axis of the ellipse
1250
1200
Т,К
1150
1100
1050
1000
1,00
1,20
1,40
1,60
1,80
2,00
δ
Fig. 5. The dependence of the temperature of the gas mixture by volume on
ribbing coefficient
Similar effects – reducing the average temperature in the gas volume (Fig. 5),
the phenomenon of recycling are achieved using a cylindrical furnace with an inner
cross ribbings (Fig. 6).
Figure 6. Design model of a cylindrical furnace with inner cross-ribbing
We can see the dependence of the relative concentration of NOor / NOokr on the
ribbing coefficient δ in figure 7, where NOor – mass concentration of nitric oxide on
the output of a cylindrical furnace with a ribbing, δ – the ratio of the surface area of
the finned boiler furnace without ribbing. This implies that the design allows the
furnace to reduce the concentration of nitrogen oxide and 50 % in the range from
1.05 ribbing coefficient to 1.5.
Fig. 7. The dependence of the relative concentration of NOor / NOokr on
the ribbing coefficient
Findings
It is shown that the combustion process in the boiler furnaces always
accompanied by the movement of gas – air, fuel gas and combustion products are
interrelated set of convection, heat and chemical processes. Just the burning of
organic fuels is the formation of nitric oxide (oxide) by the oxidation of nitrogen in
the air.
Changing the profile of the cross section of the combustion chamber of a circle
to the ellipse and the internal ribbing of the cylindrical furnace leads to:
1. Intensification of convection.
2. Increase recirculation of combustion products.
3. Reducing the concentration of nitrogen oxides in the outlet of the furnace.
References:
1. Росляков
П.В.,
Закиров
И.А.
Нестехиометрическое
сжигание
природного газа и мазута на тепловых электростанциях. – М. : МЭИ, 2001. –
144 с.
2.
Михайлов А.Г., Батраков П.А., Теребилов С.В. Численное
моделирование процессов тепломассопереноса при горении газообразного
топлива в топочном объеме // Естественные и технические науки. – 2011.–
№5(55).– С. 354-358.
3. ANSYS CFX-Solver Theory Guide. ANSYS CFX Release 11.0 / ANSYS,
Inc. // Southpointe 275 Technology Drive. – Canonsburg : PA 15317, 2006. – 312 p.
4. Алексеев Б. В. Физическая газодинамика реагирующих сред. – М.:
Высшая школа, 1985. – 464 с.
5. Михайлов А.Г. Вопросы образования оксидов азота при сжигании
газообразных и жидких топлив // Омский научный вестник. – 2009. – № 3 (83).
– С. 103 – 106.
6. Пашков Л. Т. Основы теории горения. – М. МЭИ, 2002. – 136 с.
J21310-065
UDC 681
Chupakhina L.R., Kireeva N. V.
MODELLING OF ANY FUNCTION OF DENSITY OF DISTRIBUTION
BY THE SUM EXHIBITOR
Povolzhskiy State University of Telecommunications and Informatics, Samara,
Lev Tolstoy 23, 443010
The question of approximating an arbitrary function of the density distribution
through its decomposition into a sum of exponential functions. Analyzes methods,
which will allow to determine the parameters of the system G/G/1.
Key words: queuing system type G/G/1, the distribution of «heavy» tail, the sum
of exponents.
Consideration of a modern telecommunication network is an interesting and at
the same time a difficult task, particularly during the investigation and presentation in
the form of an analytical model of service. Modern society it is impossible to limit
the consumer's resource for finding information, and the characteristics and
parameters of the flow of queries should meet the high performance, have flexible
configuration and integrate with a variety of interfaces.
Flow of packets arriving at the input of the maintenance of the device, and
circulating in it, has non-stationarity, similarity, and arbitrary intensity [1].
It is expedient as a model system of mass service (SMS) to choose a system with
an arbitrary distribution of the input stream and service processes of type G/G/1 [2].
The idea of the research consists in approximation of a random process (in our case,
the probability density and intensity of service requests) using a sum of exponential
functions. It is worth noting that this method has several limitations to obtain the
minimum error.
To describe processes occurring in a real system of communication, most
commonly used distributions with heavy tails: Weibull, Pareto, lognormal.
Distribution data are adequate from the point of view of search of the law of
distribution functions of the approximating an arbitrary probability density accepted
traffic. If we consider the decomposition of an arbitrary density of the amount of the
Exhibitor, we get the opportunity of definition of parameters and characteristics of
the SMS of type G/G/1.
In particular, it is possible to simulate the function of the density of the Pareto
distribution, no different from its real function (1).
The density of the Pareto distribution is the following:
α β
f(х) = ( )α+1 , x > β, α > 0,β > 0,
β х
(1)
where is a α - parameter of the form, β - scale parameter [3].
One of the methods of approximation of an arbitrary function of the distribution
density is the Prony method - method for simulation of the sample data in the form of
a linear combination of exponential functions (Exhibitor). Using this method is an
approximation to the data using some deterministic exponential model [4]. One
important property of the method is that the signal can be converted to the amount of
the Exhibitor, and thereby assess its components.
Thus, we approximate the function of the probability density distribution, which
is in network traffic, you can decay into the ranks of the Exhibitor. It is known that
the decomposition of the number of Exhibitor with fixed indicators of any function
analytic in a convex domain.
References:
1. Shelukhin O.I. Fractal processes in telecommunications M.: Radiotekhnika,
2003. – 480 p.
2. Chupakhina L.R., Kireeva N.V., The construction of the distribution function
of the real traffic using a cumulant analysis // Infocommunication technologies. 2013. - Volume 1, No. 1. - 33-36 р.
3. Law Averill M., Kelton V. David Imitating modeling. Classics of CS. 3rd
prod.2004. - 848 p.
4. Berdyshev V.I., Petrak L.V. Approximation of the function, the compression
of numerical information, applications. - Ekaterinburg: Ural branch of RAS, 1999, 295 p.
J21310-066
Radionov A.A., Maklakov A.S., Karyakina E. A.
STUDIES OF INFLUENCE ON NETWORK 24-PULSE RECTIFIER ON
BASIS OF THYRISTOR CONVERTERS
South Ural State University (National Research), Chelyabinsk, Lenin ave 76, 454080
In currently used in power drives 24-pulse rectifier circuit. Such a rectification
circuit can significantly improve the quality of the rectified voltage and current
consumption of the network to nearly sinusoidal.
The objectives of this study are: to study the effect on the network 24 pulse
rectifier based on thyristor converters with serial and parallel connection of bridges
with different angles of regulation, spectrum analysis of the harmonic components of
the power supply.
For realization of 24-pulse rectifier using four transformers, which are shifted by
the secondary voltage of +15 º, -15 °, 0 ° and 30 ° [1]. Connection diagram of the
transformer windings with shift vectors of the primary voltage relatively the vectors
of the secondary voltage of the first harmonic at +15º is shown in Fig. а, and vector
diagram of the transformer shown in Fig. 1, c. This shift is achieved by dividing the
winding into two parts, and the electrical connection of these windings in such a way
that the flow of the phase and the adjacent phase are oppositely directed. Thanks to
such connection, the vectors are added to form a shift to +15 º relative to the vector
voltage greater section. Connection diagram of the transformer windings with shift
vectors of the primary voltage relatively the vectors of the secondary voltage of the
first harmonic at -15º, is shown in Fig, b. The ratio between the parts of the primary
winding is the same, and such a shift is achieved by varying of connection points to
the primary winding [2].
A -U``BC
U`CA
U`CA
UÀB
UÀB
UÀB
U`BC
U`BC
U`CA
UAB
UCA
-U``CA
-U``CA
-U`ÀB -U``BC
-U`ÀB -U``BC
UBC
15° U`BC
-U`ÀB
C
A a
A a
C c
B b
C c
B b
c)
B
35°
-U``CA
D
а
Uca
Uca
O
Uab
Uca
Uab
Uab
Ubc
a)
Ubc
b
b)
Ubc
d)
120°
c
Fig. 1. Schematics connecting of the transformer windings (+15 º) (a), the
connecting circuit of the transformer windings (-15 º) (b), vector diagram of the
primary (s) and secondary (d) voltage
Based on the primary voltage vector diagram in Fig. 1, c, calculate the
proportions in which the primary winding is divided.
Assume that the length of vectors 𝑈`𝐴𝐵, 𝑈`𝐵𝐶, 𝑈`𝐶𝐴, (see fig. 1, c) equal to 1. The
angle between the vectors 𝑈`𝐵𝐶 and −𝑈`𝐶𝐴 equal to the angle between the line ac и
vertor 𝑈𝑏𝑐 (fig. 1, d) and equal to 180º - 60º = 120º. Then the angle DBO equal to
180º - 120º - 15º = 45 º. Draw a perpendicular DO to the segment BC.
Consider the triangle DOC
𝐷𝑂 = 𝐷𝐶 ∙ 𝑠𝑖𝑛15° = 1 ∙ 0,342 = 0,259,
and triangle BDO
𝑂𝐶 = 𝐷𝐶 ∙ 𝑐𝑜𝑠15° = 1 ∙ 0,94 = 0,966,
𝐵𝐷 =
𝐵𝑂 =
𝐷𝑂
0,259
=
= 0,366
𝑠𝑖𝑛45° 0,707
0,259
𝐷𝑂
=
= 0,259.
1
𝑡𝑔45°
Then length of the segment BC to equal
𝐵𝐶 = 𝐵𝑂 + 𝑂𝐶 = 0,259 + 0,966 = 1,225.
Thus, the total length of winding is
𝐷𝐶 + 𝐵𝐷 = 1 + 0,366 = 1,366 о. е,
and the relation between the parts of winding as follows:
- on most of the winding have the total number of turns
1
𝐷𝐶
=
= 0,732 = 73,2%,
𝐷𝐶 + 𝐵𝐷 1,366
- smaller part of the winding respectively
0,366
𝐵𝐷
=
= 0,268 = 29,8%.
𝐷𝐶 + 𝐵𝐷 1,366
Let us find voltage on each winding. We take the total value of the primary
voltage of the two windings (𝑈𝐴𝐵, 𝑈𝐵𝐶, 𝑈𝐶𝐴, ) 100%. The voltage drop across each of
the windings is:
𝑈11 = 0,732 ∙ 𝑈н ;
𝑈12 = 0,268 ∙ 𝑈н ;
where 𝑈н − nominal voltage of the primary winding.
Structural schemes 24-pulse rectifier based on thyristor converters with serial
and parallel connection of bridges are shown in fig. 2 a, and fig. 2, b respectively.
Converter 1
Converter 2
Converter 3
Converter 4
Converter 1
-15°
Converter 2
0°
Converter 3
R-L - load
R-L - load
a)
b)
Transformer 4
+15°
Transformer 3
+30°
Transformer 2
0°
Transformer 1
Supply power
Transformer 4
-15°
Transformer 3
+15°
Transformer 2
Transformer 1
Supply power
+30°
Converter 4
Fig. 2. Structural schemes 24-pulse rectifier based on thyristor converters with
serial (а) and parallel (b) connection of bridges
Structural schemes have been implemented in the MATLAB SIMULINK.
Parameters of the scheme are as follows: 𝑈𝑠 = 10 𝑘𝑉 – supply voltage, 𝑈2𝑟 = 3 𝑘𝑉 –
rated voltage of the secondary winding of each transformer, 𝑆𝑡𝑟 = 5700 𝑘𝑉𝐴 – rated
power of each transformer, 𝑆𝑠𝑐 = 100𝑀𝑉𝐴 – short-circuit power network, 𝑅𝑙𝑜𝑎𝑑 =
0,5 𝑜ℎ𝑚 – load resistance, 𝐿𝑙𝑜𝑎𝑑 2 𝑚𝐻 – inductive load resistance. The results of the
study in parallel connection of bridges are illustrated in fig. 3. In the case of serial
communication bridges the transition are similar, the only difference is that the
rectified voltage is added: ∑ 𝑈𝑑 = 𝑈𝑑1 + 𝑈𝑑2 + 𝑈𝑑3 + 𝑈𝑑4 , and the current flowing
through the load and valves identical is equal to: ∑ 𝐼𝑑 = ∑ 𝑈𝑑 /𝑍, where Z – load
impedance. In parallel connection of bridges, the current flowing through the load is
equal to: ∑ 𝐼𝑑 = 𝑈𝑑 /𝑍, and the valves – ∑ 𝐼𝑑 /4.
Fig. 3 shows curves transients of thyristor converters with different angles of
adjustment. Sinusoidal current in all operating modes. DC voltage pulsate with the
pulse frequency during the period 24, and the amplitude of pulsations ∆𝑈𝑑 at angles
𝛼 = 15° 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝛼 = 30° is 3% - 15% from the rectified voltage. In operation with
𝛼 = 70° pulsation amplitude reaches 60%, indicating that the quality of the rectified
voltage is a disadvantage thyristor converters for small angles regulation. Voltage
dips occur when switching thyristors and the number of dips is 24 per period. Depth
of the dip depends on the current consumption of the network and short-circuit power
𝑆𝑠𝑐 .
Fig. 4 shows the histogram of the spectrum of harmonics in the current consumed
from the network (on the vertical axis 𝑓𝑛 /𝑓б , where 𝑓б = 𝑓с = 50 Гц , the horizontal
axis - the harmonic number).
Alfa = 15°
Ua,V
Ub,V
Uc,V
Alfa = 40°
Alfa = 70°
Uн
Ia, A
Ib, A
Ic, A
U d, V
ΔUd1
Udн
ΔUd2
Ud
ΔUd3
Time, s
Fig. 3. Transient curves in the 24-pulse rectifier circuit based on thyristor converters during operation with different
angles of regulation:
𝑼𝒅 − 𝑫𝑪 𝒗𝒐𝒍𝒕𝒂𝒈𝒆, 𝑰𝒂 , 𝑰𝒃 , 𝑰𝒄 − 𝒏𝒆𝒕𝒘𝒐𝒓𝒌 𝒑𝒉𝒂𝒔𝒆 𝒄𝒖𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔, 𝑼𝒂 , 𝑼𝒃 , 𝑼𝒄 − 𝒏𝒆𝒕𝒘𝒐𝒓𝒌 𝒑𝒉𝒂𝒔𝒆 𝒗𝒐𝒍𝒕𝒂𝒈𝒆𝒔
harmonic number
Fig. 4. Harmonic spectrum of the network current
The analysis of the spectrum of the harmonic current network of 24-pulse
rectifier showed that the entire frequency range (up to 2000 Hz) has virtually no
effect on the network. The maximum peaks were at 23 and 25 harmonics and make
up about 0.3% of the fundamental harmonic.
Based on studies, we can conclude that the use of 24-pulse rectifier circuit
produces a fully sinusoidal current drawn from the network to all the thyristor
converters adjustment range. Using this scheme in the high-power networks, voltage
dips during switching thyristors, will be negligible. The scheme of the parallel or
serial connection of bridges have the same effect on the supply network, with current
consumption of the same magnitude.
References:
1. Kornilov, G.P., Nikolaev A.A., Hramshin T.R., Murzikov A.A. Modeling of
electrotechnical complexes of metallurgical enterprises: studies. Allowance. Magnitogorsk Magnitogorsk Acad. State. tech. University. G.I. Nosov, 2012.-235s.
2. Radionov A.A., Maklakov A.S. Operating conditions of an induction motor
with frequency converter, based on VSI with PWM, and AFE rectifier during voltage
dips \\ Collection of scientific papers SWORLD on materials international conference
"Modern directions of theoretical and applied research '2013 '19-30 March 2013
J21310-067
UDC 634.0.863.4
Nenko M.V., Popovich O.M.
PILOT INSTALLATION FOR THE EXTRACTION OF SUGAR FROM
HYDROLYZED TIMBER
Institute of Chemical Technology of the Volodymyr Dal East Ukrainian
National University (Rubezhnoe),
Rubezhnoe, Lenina 31, 93009
To extract the sugars that are in the form of a concentrated solution into particles
of cod cellolignin obtained for vapor-phase prehydrolysis of wood, we have proposed
countercurrent extractors with new designs.
From the known structures such devices differ by possibility of intensified
countercurrent multistage extraction process in the system solid - liquid, especially in
the processing of solid phase with particles which have different seeming average
density and therefore are very different in buoyancy in the extractant.
Transportation of solid phase in the apparatus on the steps of the contact is
carried out by gas-liquid flow which is formed by bubbling gas through a layer of
extractant, and between degrees - with airlifts, equipped with devices for the
separation of the three phases.
These features make it possible to preserve the shape and structure of the
particles of the solid phase at sufficiently intense hydrodynamic modes, allowing to
exercise further processing of the solid phase easily.
Method of extraction process previously based on proposed mathematical model
and determining the kinetic coefficients of the process described in [1, 2].
Assessment of performance units and test the proposed method were carried out
on enlarged research unit, mounted on a stand of hydrolytic plant.
Installation (Fig. 1) consisted of one stage of the device - thermally insulated
steel cylindrical casing 1 with a diameter of 0.4 meters and a height of 1.6 m.
Loader for solid phase was consisted of two parallel vertical cylindrical tanks
that were heated, 2 with fitted with slanted bottoms 3, each of them has been outlet
solids, provided with annular seat 4 of closure device. This device has been designed
as a valve 5, threaded rod 6, support nut 7 and sealing gland 8. The upper part of each
container to load it solid phase was achieved with neck tightly closed lid 10 and
bottom tanks using advanced knee 11 is connected through a downhill tee pipe 12 of
the boot device 13. It was located rotary dispenser 14, the blades of which are made
of tight rubber. Dispenser was set in rotation by an electric motor 15 through gear 16
and the CVT 17.
Fig. 1. Scheme of research installation
Nozzle 18 was located inside the hull. This allows to regulate the stay of the
solid phase by the change of degree in the length of its path. Uploading of solid phase
with extractant was carried out using airlift unloader 19 through the pipe 20 in the
variable volume device 21 with perforated bottom, mounted on a pallet 22.
In addition, the installation consisted of auxiliary tanks 23 and 24, which were
heated and served as vessels-montezhyu for pumping of extract, as well as similar in
design capacity of 25 ÷ 28 provided with internal coiled steam heaters and airlift
mixing devices.
The installation was equipped with the necessary test equipment and valves to
control material flow and temperature mode.
Heating air entered the apparatus, was performed in the steam heater located
separately from with standalone automatic temperature regulation.
It was found in previous hydrodynamic testing apparatus that stable operation
while providing airlift unloader average residence time of the solid phase on the
degree of exposure (120 ÷ 600 sec) was observed at the rate of liquid phase
0,8·10-4÷0,2·10-3 m3/s and costly volume ratio of the solid and liquid phases equal.
Study of countercurrent extraction process, conducted in a similar two-step
installation, with appropriate given the time spent on the steps of the phases
corresponding costs of these phases and the set of extractant which was recirculated
the degree (the latter according to the flow rate required to ensure stable operation of
the airlift) was conducted in experiments on plant. Volumetric flow rate of the
extractant, which was used when working on the installation, was determined based
on the required for the practice of mass ratios expenditure liquid and solid phases (by
weight dry matter entirely in the solid phase) equals 3,5 ÷ 10.
Cellolignin, required to conduct experiments at the facility, was treated by
vapor-phase prehydrolysis pine (in the 1st series of experiments) and birch wood
chips.
The average composition of wet cellolignin was as follows (% coniferous and
deciduous, respectively): absolutely dry matter – 39.40 and 40.00; moisture – 53.46
and 50.30; reducing substances – 6.14 and 8.60; acid – 1.00 and 1.10. In the
calculation process were used average values of linear dimensions of cod derived by
measurements of particles from an average sample of material.
Setting a specific time of phase contact, and past values needed to calculate the
two-stage countercurrent, was calculated the concentration of extractant in the
apparatus at each of the stages of extraction. Then the process was implemented on a
pilot plant.
For example, in Tables 1 and 2 the conditions and results of the two experiments
(experiment number 1 with pine cellolignin, № 5 with leaf) are shown.
Table 1
Parameters of extraction mode
№
Average
The average The average
study linear particle volumetric
sizes of solid flow of solid
phase,
Li·103, m
phase,
The average
Mean residence
volumetric volumetric flow time of the solid
flow of
of extractant,
phase on the
extractant,
that recirculates
degree of
to the extent,
extraction,
Q·104, m3 ⁄s
t расч = t экстр , с
Q·105, м3 ⁄с Q·105, m3 ⁄s
1
19х12х3,5
0,58
0,74
0,8
330
2
19х12х3,0
0,56
1,90
2,0
325
Table 2
№
study
№
degree of extraction
In the solution,
which was in the
solid phase that
came with the i-th
stage, СТ, i
In extractant that
acted in i-th degree,
СС, i
В екстрагенті, що
виходив із
аппарата i-тої
ступені, Са, i
The concentration of sugars, %
Calculated
Experimental
The relative mistake in
the value of concentration
Са, i і Са, i, exp.
The experimental results
1
1
8,26
1,260
1,330
8,63 1,26 1,32 0,8
2
7,47
0,560
0,590
5,75 0,56 0,70 18,6
1
11,66
0,881
0,929
13,20 0,88 0,90 3,2
2
10,51
0,373
0,393
11,40 0,37 0,40 7,7
5
СТ, i , СС, i , Са, i,
exp. exp. exp.
Analysis of the results shows that the maximum of the abolition concentration
of extract that comes from the degree of extraction does not exceed 12 ÷ 18% of the
calculated values of these concentrations. And much difference between the initial
concentrations are usually observed at the output of the second degree. The latter can
be explained by the likely presence of a redistribution of the concentration field in the
solid phase between the output of the first degree and entering the second stage of
extraction.
The experimental results on the pilot plant show that the proposed method of
calculation process for extraction of solid-liquid with sufficient accuracy for
engineering calculations can be used to calculate the impregnating extraction
installation for extracting sugars from hydrolyzed wood with the necessary
completeness of removal.
References
1. Ненько M. В. Математична модель нестаціонарного анізотропного
твердо фазного екстрагування / M. В. Ненько, В. В. Гончаров // Хімічна
промисловість України. – 2011. – №1 – C. 10 – 13.
2. Ненько M. В. Методика определения коэффициентов массоотдачи в
трехфазных системах / M. В. Ненько, В. В. Гончаров // Наукові дослідження –
теорія та експеримент 2012 : Восьма міжнародна науково-практична
конференція, 28-30 травня 2012 р. : Матеріали конференції. – Полтава, 2012. –
С. 67-68.
J21310-068
UDC 628.041.753.415–034.791
Gorbunov A.A., Lamkov E.A.,
Ruzmanov V.S., Fedorenko A.S.
POSSIBLE APPLICATIONS OF AMALGAM METHOD
FOR PRODUCTION OF FLUORESCENT LAMPS OF SMALL
DIAMETER
Saransk, Bolshevistskaya, 68, 40005
The construction and the technology of production of fluorescent lamps of small
diameter with the use of amalgam method are described in this article.
Keywords: fluorescent lamp, amalgam, construction, technology, mercury.
In 2007 members of the department of light sources of the faculty of light
engineering of Ogarev Mordovia State University in cooperation with specialists of
NIIIS named after A. N. Lodygin developed and produced monitoring fluorescent
lamps (FL) with a capacity of 20 and 40 W in the tubes of 32 mm diameter with the
use of amalgams (amalgam composition of 70% Pb + 30% Hg) instead of mercury in
liquid form. In contrast to standard lamps they contain a controlled amount of
mercury (2 to 30 mg). As well in 2007 – 2008 members of the department of light
sources of the faculty of light engineering of Ogarev Mordovia State University
developed a method of controlling the amount of mercury in linear fluorescent lamps.
In 2011 they received a patent on this method and the device for controlling the
amount of mercury [1].
The construction of monitoring LL with a certain amount of mercury is similar
to the construction of standard mercury LL of LB type:
-
a tube-bulb with a phosphor layer;
-
2 stems, consisting of a plate, a blade, current leads, an exhaust tube and
oxidized electrodes;
-
2 lamp-bases with pins and getinaks gaskets;
-
argon inert gas under pressure of 266 ± 10 Pa.
The technology of production of such lamps differed from that of industrial in
following features:
-
after welding of bulbs they were pumped out on an pumpdown post,
equipped with a metering bin of amalgam rod with the weight, measured in advance,
at that a tube of glass, preventing the passage of the amalgam rod in the lamp bulb,
placed in the exhaust tube of the lamp before pumping;
-
the amalgam rod dosed in the exhaust tube of the lamp, that passed standard
thermal vacuum processing and cooled to room temperature;
-
the lamp was sealed off with a longer exhaust tube and carried to a unit for
distillation of mercury from an amalgam into the lamp bulb;
-
the end of lamp with a longer exhaust tube was placed in a furnace of the
unit for distillation of mercury;
-
by heating the furnace to a temperature of 20 ÷ 30 °C below the melting
point of an amalgam (~ 250 °C) during a predetermined time (for different lamps that
time varied from 0,5 to 3 hours) the mercury evaporated from the amalgam into the
lamp bulb;
-
the longer exhaust tube with the remained (depleted with mercury)
amalgam was sealed off from the lamp;
-
the sealed-off exhaust tube was opened and the amalgam was weighed for
the second time;
-
an amount of mercury in the lamp determined as the difference of masses of
amalgam rods before pumping of the lamps and after the exhaust tube was opened.
Thus, it was possible to produce lamps with the following quantities of mercury:
2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 27, 30 mg.
At present, LL in tubes T5 (a bulb of 16 mm diameter) are widespread.
The advantage of such lamps is their low material capacity that made it possible
to save up to 30-50% of glass, phosphor, refractory metals, aluminum, mercury in
production, as compared with standard LL.
Also, there are no precision methods of dosing mercury in the LL nowadays and
most manufactures of these lamps cannot ensure the amount of mercury in their
products, thereby calling in question the declared operational characteristics.
The need for research on this subject is caused with the demand for solving a
problem of reduction of mercury in the LL to the minimum allowable quantities,
reducing the consumption of mercury in the production of LL, accelerating and
reducing the cost of LL testing for compliance of mercury amounts with standard
documentation and reducing mercury contamination of rooms, when the lamps are
produced, as well as they are used.
Moreover, the need for research on this subject is caused with the requirements of
the experts in certification of lighting products, made in respect of manufactures, to
disclose information about operational characteristics of a lamp, including the amount
of mercury it contained, in inventory documentation.
The purpose of these researches is the development of construction and
technology of production of fluorescent lamps in T5 tubes with the minimum
necessary amount of mercury, with the use of amalgam method for mercury loading,
as well as the improvement of the test unit by means of reequipment of a recording
device with modern program facilities for controlling the quality of measurements,
based on a concept of virtual devices with mathematically developed software, and its
external ergonomic configuration.
Literature:
1. Gorbunov, А.А. The method of non-destructive control of the amount of
mercury in a tubular fluorescent lamp and a device to exercise it. / А.А. Gorbunov,
А.А. Ashriatov, А.S. Fedorenko. // Patent for an invention № 2410791. Request
2010102332/07, 25.01.2010. Сl. MPC H01J 9/42. Publ.: 27.01.2011. Bul. №3.
J21310-069
UDC 621.548
Tleuov A.,Pyastolova I., Tleuova A.
PROSPECTS OF WIND POWER PLANTS CONSTRUCTION IN THE
REPUBLIC OF KAZAKHSTAN
S.Seifullin Kazakh Agro Technical University, Kazakhstan
Astana, av. Victory 62, 010010
This paper examines the prospects of wind power plants construction on the
basis of the distribution wind speeds analysis at specific heights 10 and 80 m from
the earth's surface for different regions of Kazakhstan.
Keywords: Climate, Topography, Average wind speed, Wind atlas, Height wind
speed recording.
Introduction
Kazakhstan is located in the central part of Eurasia. The length of its borders is
12,200 kilometers, 600 kilometers of which lie on the Caspian Sea. Natural and
climatic conditions of Kazakhstan is largely determined by its deep continental
location. Almost half of the country is desert or semi-desert, and a quarter of the
territory - steppes. This is reflected in Fig. 1.
Fig. 1. Physical map of the Republic of Kazakhstan
High-mountain region occupy about 10 % of the territory. In the Southeast, on
the border of Kazakhstan and China, is a large mountain range - the Jungar Alatau.
To the East is more ancient mountain system - Altai. The average height of the
mountain peaks here from 2500 to 3500 meters and the highest point reaches a height
4506 m. The surface relief of Kazakhstan dictates the latitudinal distribution of wind
speeds from North to South and from West to East.
As an example, the map of the Akmola region, which shows that most of the
territory is treat for steppe type devoid of forest vegetation (Fig.2). This is one of the
conditions of placement of wind-power stations.
Fig.2. Physical map of Akmola region
Kazakhstan occupies a huge area and therefore bounded by the regions that are
very different according to the climate conditions in the West Siberian lowland in the
north of the country and with Central Asia - in the south. Under the influence of cold
and warm air masses formed a sharply continental climate of Kazakhstan, which is
characterized by hot summers, cold winters, large seasonal and daily temperature
changes, as well as the uneven distribution of rainfall.
Winter in Kazakhstan begins in November and ends in April, the winter air is
dry and cold. Basically is a clear frosty weather, sometimes frosts to -50°C in winter
thus can be a thaw.
In Kazakhstan, spring starts in May and ends in May, the weather is very
changeable in spring, clear weather the cold snap may be replaced with a temperature
difference of 10°C.
Peculiarities of climate in Kazakhstan to consider when choosing technical
characteristics and performance of wind power plants. These climatic conditions, as
the experience of construction in Kazakhstan of specific system of wind power
plants, impose certain restrictions on the conditions of exploitation in our climatic
conditions
(low
temperatures,
high
speed
winds,
freezing
surfaces).
For efficient use of energy of wind stream you must have detailed information
about it. General meteorological characteristics of the given meteorological stations,
for this is insufficient. Required characteristics, taking into account the natural
structure of the wind, the limits of the validity and representativeness of the initial
data etc.
The basis of all the wind power calculations is the wind energy cadastre, which
is the aggregate of aerological and energy characteristics of wind to reveal its energy
value and determine the possible working modes of windmills.
The main cadastral wind parameters include:
- average annual rate;
- annual and diurnal;
- repeatability of wind speeds of gradation;
- distribution of wind periods and periods of calm in duration;
- maximum speed;
- specific power and the specific energy of the wind flow;
- wind resources of the district.
Data on average wind speeds for long periods of time serve as a source of
information about the General level of intensity of the wind. The average long-term
wind speed is one of the criteria for evaluating the efficiency of wind energy. By its
size in the first approximation one can judge about perspective of application of the
wind in a particular area.
The wind is characterized by the velocity vector. Consider how change occurs in
the characteristics of the territory of Kazakhstan. Fig.3 shows the wind Atlas of
Kazakhstan to the height of 10 m from the earth's surface, which was developed by
specialists of companies «Pb Power» and «Windlab Systems» (Australia) within the
framework of the joint project of UNDP/GEF and the Ministry of energy and mineral
resources of Kazakhstan « Kazakhstan - wind power market development initiative».
до 3
мс
от 4
до 5 мс
свыше 6 мс
Fig. 3. Wind Atlas of Kazakhstan at 10 m height
The value of the velocity of the wind was assessed in a number of categories, the
numerical values of which are given in table 1. These criteria were fixed from the
condition that the economically viable wind speed must exceed 4-5 m/s.
Table 1
Assessment categories wind speed
category
Low
The value of long-term < 6
Normal
Good
High
Exceptional
6-<7
7-<8
8-<9
>9
wind speed, m/s
As follows from (Fig. 3 and 4), the majority of the territory of Kazakhstan the
average wind speed is within 3-4 m/s (low-grade). Wind speed in the range of 4-6
m/s was observed mainly in the North of the Republic and in mountainous and
Piedmont areas, near-normal). On the coast of the Caspian Sea wind speed reaches 67 m/s (good). This should be considered when contemplating the use of wind turbines
of small and average capacity height of the tower does not exceed 12-18 m.
Fig. 4 . Map of the distribution of annual average speeds
wind at 10 m height by regions of Kazakhstan
Fig. 5. Distribution of wind speeds on the territory of of the Republic of
Kazakhstan at a height of 80 m from the earth's surface
In the low layers of the earth's surface and up to 500 m there has been a dramatic
increase in wind speed as the distance from the earth's surface (Fig.5). Comparison of
the velocity in winter and summer time shows that changes in wind speed with height
of summer is much less than in winter. This can be explained by the smaller values of
the vertical temperature gradient in the winter is comparatively summer. As can be
seen from Figure 5 has the greatest wind potential Northern Region of Kazakhstan.
In the framework of the UNDP project were conducted feasibility studies on
construction of wind power plants near some points, the results of which are reflected
in the table. 2 and in Fig. 6.
Table 2
List of the studied sites for wind farm construction
No.
p/p
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Name of site
Dzungarian gates
Shelek corridor
Korday
Zhuzymdyk-Chayan
Аstana
Yereimentau
Karkaralinsk
Arkalyk
Atyrau
Fort-Shevchenko
Region
Almaty
Almaty
Zhambyl
SKA
Akmola
Akmola
Karaganda
Kostanay
Atyrau
Mangystau
Wind speed
on the app.
50 m
9,7
7,7
6,1
6,7
6,8
7,3
6,1
6,2
6,8
7,5
The expected
capacity of the
wind farm
50 MW
100 MW
10-20 MW
10-20 MW
20 MW
50 MW
10-20 MW
10-2 MW
100 MW
50 MW
Fig. 6. Kazakhstan map showing the locations of installation meteomacht
Conclusion
1 Topography Kazakhstan favorable and meets the requirements for placement
of individual wind turbines and wind farms.
2 In general the average wind speed at 10 m (conditions of use wind turbines
small and medium power) is not more than 4-5 m/s, which is rated as "low" category.
3 In some areas of possible construction of wind farms, but the annual average
wind speed at 80 m can be classified as "good".
4 When choosing accommodation of large wind farms should consider the
configuration and transmission lines with the possibility to wind farms.
References:
1. Tleuov A.Kh., Tleuov T.Kh. Ispolzovanie netradicionnyx vidov energii v
Kazakhstane. – Almaty: Bilim, 1998. -204 s.
2. Tleuova A.A., Tleuov A. Kh., Oshkina A.S. Opredelenie srednix skorostej
vetra Akmolinskoj oblasti.//Vestnik nauki KazGATU.- Astana, 2006. -№2(41).-6 s.
3. Tleuova A.A., Ayapbergenov K.M., Tleuov A. Kh.
Rekomendacii po
ispolzovaniyu vetroenergeticheskix ustanovok v agropromyshlennom komplekse.Astana, KazATU, 2008. – 81 s.
4. Tleuova A.A. Ayapbergenov K.M., Tleuov A. Kh. Rekomendacii po vyboru
mesta razmeshheniya avtonomnyx vetroelektricheskix ustanovok maloj moshhnosti.Astana, KazATU, 2008. – 17 s.
J21310-070
UDK 621.512
Bolshtyansky P.A., Lysenko E.A., Bolshtyansky A.P.
AUTOMATION OF WORK OF VALVES OF THE PISTON
COMPRESSOR
Omsk state technical university, Russia
Omsk, Mira pr., 11, 644050
ECM (1985-Ltd) Qiryat-Bialik, Israel
In given clause the expediency, an opportunity and prospective algorithm of
automation of work of valves of the piston compressor is considered. Basis of a
design of the valve - an electromagnet which influences a mobile element of the valve.
Control is carried out with use of the present and calculating indicator diagram of
the process in the cylinder.
Keywords: the piston compressor, valves, automation
There is a problem of untimely opening and closing of valves in the piston
compressor. It reduces profitability of work.
Practically all scientists who are
engaged in research of machines of volumetric action, speak about it (look, for
example [1]).
On fig. 1 some variants of indicator diagrams of the piston compressor having
not optimum movement of lacking element of the delivery valve are shown.
D
D
D
D
Fig. 1. Some variants of the indicator diagram of the piston compressor at
incorrect of the delivery valve (too rigid spring - at the left, too soft - on the
right):
P - pressure, PH - pressure of pumping, PB - intaking pressure, V - working
volume of the cylinder, DVM - additional expansion from the inactive volume, caused
by misoperation of the delivery valve, tK - the actual moment of opening of the
delivery valve, tKN - the ideal moment of opening of the delivery valve, DPnom -
pressure difference on the valve at its correct work, the shaded area - additional losses
of work in the valve.
Movement of a mobile element of the valve is influenced with numerous factors
- weight of a mobile element, weight and rigidity of a spring (at its presence),
friction, size recoil the valve from a saddle and the lift limiter, the phenomenon
damping and others.
During designing the compressor try to consider all aspects of work of the
valve/. To maintenance of its efficiency apply perspective constructive decisions and
methods of multipleparameter optimization. Thus solve, usually, two problems - the
minimal resistance of the valve to a stream of gas passing through it and the minimal
speed of impact of a mobile element with a saddle and the lift limiter that provides a
high resource of work of the valve.
Such technique has rather essential defect. The matter is that piston compressors
work under stationary conditions (first of all - concerning pressure of forcing) only in
structure of technological lines. In all other cases (and it is a lot of them) compressors
work at variable pressure of pumping and at different temperatures of details of the
cylinder, the piston and gas. In this connection to define the design data of automatic
valves providing optimum work of a mobile element it is practically impossible.
In connection with stated there is a problem of control of movement of a mobile
element of the valve. Recently for other machines of volumetric action (for example,
for internal combustion engines) this problem try to solve by application of the
electromagnetic devices interfaced to some controllable size (position of working
body, pressure, temperature, etc.) through the microprocessor and the amplifier of a
signal.
Concerning the valve of the compressor it is necessary to define, at once what to
supervise is necessary pressure in a working cavity of the cylinder. Such approach
has allowed to develop application of automatic valves which now widely use, and it
has structurally simplified system of distribution of gas and has increased
profitableness of work of compressors on variable mode of operation.
In this case the system of submission of a signal on opening of the valve can
look as follows (fig. 2).
The gauge of pressure 7 constantly sends a signal to the controller 9 where this
signal is compared to the established values of pressure suction and pumping. Besides
the controller 9 constantly receives signals about passage of a crank bottom (A) and
top (B) dead points, that in connection with presence in MP of the basic generator of
time allows to calculate angular speed of rotation of a cranked shaft of the
mechanism of a drive 1 and on the equation of moving of the piston to define during
each moment of time its position.
S
В
A
М
D
S
Н
Fig. 2. The scheme of automatic opening and closing of valves of the
compressor with an electromagnetic drive:
1. Crank-and-rod mechanism. 2. The cylinder. 3. The piston. 4. A working
cavity of the cylinder. 5, 6. Suction valve and delivery valves with an electromagnetic
drive (springs of return conditionally are not shown). 7. The pressure sensor.
8. The indicator diagram. 9. The control module. SC - converters of a signal, ADS the analog-digital converter, MP - the microprocessor, DAC - the digital-to-analog
converter, SA - the amplifier of signals
Definition of the moment of operation of an electromagnetic drive of movement
of a mobile element of the delivery valve begins in point D which is in advance
carried in the smaller party from pressure of forcing РН upon some size.
In this point in MP calculation of the further growth of pressure in the cylinder
on a corner of turn of a crank (actually - on time) which is implement or with use of
full mathematical model (in view of outflow, an overflowing and heat exchange), or
easier on politropic model for the ideal compressor (see, for example, [1-4], etc.) is
carried out.
Definition of time E-F of delay of opening of the valve on the equation of
dynamics of its mobile element in view of work of an electromagnetic drive which
allows to calculate time point Е when the signal from MP should be sent on a
winding of an electromagnet of the valve 6 is simultaneously spent. It allows to open
the valve just during that moment when pressure in the working cavity of the cylinder
4 has reached pressure of gas in a line of forcing.
The organization of closing of the valve in a point (during the moment of time)
G can be made two methods.
Most idle time - unique and unconditional closing of the delivery valve in
position of the piston in ВМТ, the moment of submission of an impulse should
advance point G for the period of operation of an electromagnet of the valve.
The second method provides constant tracking on site F-G of a difference of
pressure between pressure in a cavity 4 and - to submit to lines of forcing, and if this
difference becomes less beforehand set an impulse on closing of the valve to not
admit return current of gas from a line of forcing in a cavity of the cylinder. It can
arise at rather low frequency of rotation of a drive, at the worn out piston
condensation and at greater currents of gas through leakiness of the soaking up valve
in the end of a course of the piston at its approach position in ВМТ when speed of
change of volume of a cavity 4 is very low. However and in this case closing of the
valve in point G is obligatory.
Process G-H of expansion of gas of dead volume, as a rule, is short-term, and
opening of the soaking up valve should occur during moment H. Therefore right after
passages by the piston of position ВМТ the system begins measurement and
calculation of the forecast of approach of the moment when pressure in a cavity 4 will
appear equal to pressure of suction РВ. The design procedure, as well as during
compression, can be carried out by two ways (see above).
As a rule, in real machines process suction occurs without greater fluctuations of
pressure, and closing of the soaking up valve can be made unequivocally in position
of the piston in НМТ (the moment of time C).
The offered way and the scheme of its realization can give rise to researches in
the field of automation of work of valves of piston machines by use of mathematical
models of calculation of working processes of these machines.
The bibliographic list
1. Bolshtyanskiy A.P. Kompressori s gazostaticheskim centrirovaniem porshnya
(Compressors with gas bearing piston)/ A.P. Bolshtyanskyi, V.D. Belyi, S.A.
Doroshevitch. Omsk, OmGTU, 2002. – 405 p.
2. Bolshtyanskiy A.P. Porshnevie kompressuri s beskontaktnim uplotneniem
(Piston
compressors
with
contactless
condensation)/
A.P.
Bolshtyanskyi,
V.E. Scherba, E.A. Lisenko, T.A. Ivachnenko. Omsk, OmGTU, 2010. – 416 p.
3. Plastinin P.I. Porshnevie kompressori (Piston compressors). In 2 tomes, T. 2,
Teoriya i raschet (The theory and calculation). – M.: Kolos, 2006. – 399 p.
4. Scherba.
V.E.
Nasos-kompressori.
Rabochie
processi
I
osnovi
proektirovaniya (The pump-compressors. Working processes and bases of designing)/
V.E. Scherba,
A.P.
Bolshtyanskyi,
V.V.
Shalai,
E.V.
Hodireva.
Mashinostroenie, 2013. – 368 p.
–
M.:
J21310-071
UDC 167.3:620.193.27
1
3
Sukhenko J.G., 2Dzyub A.G.,
Manuilov V.V., 1Suhenko V.Y.
RESEARCH PROCESS FRETTING EQUIPMENT AND FOOD
PROCESSING INDUSTRIES
1
03041, Ukraine, Kyiv. st. Geroev Oborony, 15
2
National University of Food Technologies,
01033, Ukraine, Kyiv. st.Vladimirskaya, 68
3
Kerchensky State Marine Technical University,
98300, Ukraine, Crimea, Kerch, st. Ordzhonikidze, 82
In this paper the technique to study fretting metallic structural materials in
corrosive process media, electrolytes and food processing industries. The role of the
electrode potential in the processes of friction and wear of materials and the
possibility of control of processes of deformation and fracture of metals by means of
the polarization of friction systems.
Key words: food environment, electrolytes, friction, wear, polarization potential,
the technique, wear resistance, corrosion
Formulation of the problem
n sliding metals in solutions of electrolytes two-phase (metal-solution) or threephase (metal 1 - solution - metal 2) the system should be considered as specific
electrochemical, which premenimy relevant laws and electrochemical methods.
Therefore the technique to study fretting must take into account the electrochemical
mechanism of the process, which could be the basis for the development of methods
to improve efficiency Tribo mates equipment and food processing shook off [1,2].
Objective of the work
Theoretical basis and experimental research method to check the wear of
metallic materials in the corrosive process media and food processing industries.
The research results
The interaction of the external environment and the metal surface is usually
considered from the point of view of the boundary film formation, adsorption
reduction of strength and ductility of a deformable metal, chemical modification of
the surface layers [3,4]. It is known that most of the chemical properties of crystalline
materials determined by the behavior of dislocations. Consequently, the influence on
the mechanical properties of the medium solids can be associated with its interaction
with the dislocations on the surface [5,6]. Features of the conditions that are created
at the solid, determined by the presence of free surface energy. Currently,
representative of the strength of solids as the magnitude proportional to their surface
energy, it is common. It is lowering the surface energy is the basis of the known
effect Rebinder. Effect of temperature on the metal deformation process usually
begins with the reduction of surface energy by physical adsorption, which is the
primary instrument. [6] In the future, this process is superimposed secondary
phenomena - chemical, electrochemical, physical, etc. For their course requires a
certain activation energy, which depends on the specifics of the process. In the case
of deformation and fracture of metals in corrosive environments (stress corrosion,
which include corrosion cracking, corrosion fatigue and corrosion-mechanical wear)
the special role played by mechanical and electrochemical activation. Plastic
deformation of solids contributes to the manifestation of the mechanochemical effect
[8,9], is to facilitate the chemical reaction between the external environment and the
metal. When these processes in media - electrolytes play an important role in the
electrochemical phenomena metal electrolyte solution. The metal electrode immersed
in the electrolyte solution is electrically charged with respect, giving rise to a
potential difference. According to the equation of Gibbs-Lippmann, σ can be
determined from the expression
dσ = - εdφ - ΣГidμi,
(1)
where σ - the free energy surface of the electrode; ε – электрический заряд
единицы поверхности электрода;
Гi – adsorption i-component it simply entails;
mi – chemical potential of the solution.
If φ = sonst above equation becomes the Gibbs adsorption formula
σ = - ΣГidμi,
(2)
on the basis of which explains the decrease of the free energy surface, leading to
the appearance of the effect Rebinder. At constant composition of the solution, we
obtain the Lippmann
dσ =- εdφ,
(3)
which describes the shape of the electrocapillary curves and establishes the
connection between the surface energy capacity and charge. From equation (3) that
changes in σ φ changes can be achieved independently of the presence of surfaceactive substances (surfactants) in the solution. According to equation (3) in pure
solution surface energy is maximum at zero charge of the electrode surface (dσ / dφ =
0). φο called the potential of zero charge, and plays an important role in adsorption
processes. It is shown that the adsorption of organic compounds on the electrode can
occur only near φο. By moving the electrode potential of φο or the adsorption of
surfactant decreases the hardness of the metal.
Establishing the nature of the polarization curves slow stage (transport of the
reactants, their rank or others) is one of the main objectives of electrochemical
kinetics during friction of metals. To solve it, can be successfully used the method of
comparing the polarization curves taken with or without stripping the surface, which
provides useful information about her condition and the nature of inhibitory stages of
the electrode process [4]. Update the surface usually resolves its inhibition caused by
the formation and adsorption phase films and no significant effect on the electrode
charge transfer stage. With regard to the problems of wear, this method should be
complemented by the study of the mechanical properties of the rubbing metal, which
will establish a link between the electrochemical and mechanical parameters of
friction. The experiments have established the critical speed above which does not
result in a further shift of polarization curves. When υ <11 m/s kinetics of electrode
processes is largely determined by the rate of production of films, most notably in the
area of speeds of 0.4 - 3 m/s. Explain the polarization effects need to be checked,
there is no doubt that we have direct evidence of the influence of φ on the processes
of plastic deformation in sliding in electrolytes, what are the set of environments and
food processing industries.
Findings
1. Fretting of metallic materials in industrial environments, electrolytes, food
production has electrochemical nature and should be studied using potentiostatic
method and the polarization resistance.2. In the selection of the friction pairs to work
in technological environments, electrolytes and food processing industries need to
sweep the potential difference and the friction was the highest.3. For right choice of
wear-resistant materials for the food processing industry, working in conditions of
fretting, to determine the corrosion rate of friction to using the extrapolation of real
polarization curves plotted directly on the samples placed in a real model or food
processing environment.4. The electrode potentials of the friction surfaces - the
fundamental characteristics of electrochemical systems that determine the intensity of
the fretting and food processing equipment.5. The polarization of the frictional
contact affects the processes of the evolution of the dislocation structure of the
friction surfaces and can be used to control the energy-power characteristics of the
wear.
References:
1. Сухенко Ю.Г. Надійність і довговічність устаткування харчових і
переробних виробництв: Підручник. / Ю.Г. Сухенко, О.А. Литвиненко, В.Ю.
Сухенко; під ред. професора Ю.Г. Сухенка.- К: НУХТ, 2010. - 547с.
2. Сухенко Ю.Г. Технологічні методи забезпечення довговічності
обладнання харчової промисловості: Монографія. /Ю.Г. Сухенко, О.І. Некоз,
М.С. Стечишин. - К.: Елерон, 1993. – 108 с.
3. Карпенко Г.В. Влияние среды на прочность и долговечность металлов:
Монография. – К.: Наукова думка, 1976. – 126 с.
4. Сухенко В.Ю. Зносостійкість евтектичних покриттів під впливом
соляного розчину [Текст] / В.Ю. Сухенко, Ю.Г. Сухенко, Ю.І. Бойков, В.В.
Мануілов // Продовольча індустрія АПК: наук.-практ. Журнал. – К.: 2013 - № 1
– С.6-9.
5. J. Hirth Theory of dislocations [Text] / John Price Hirth, Jens Lothe. –
McGraw-Hill, 1967 – 780 p.
6. Сухенко В.Ю. Обґрунтування основ забезпечення зносостійкості
м’ясорізальних інструментів. Проблеми тертя та зношування: наук.-техн. зб.К.: НАУ, 2012. - Вип. 57. - С.76-92.
J21310-072
UDC 544.032; 544.72
Valuhov D. P., Pigulev R. V., Sidorov K. I.,
Tarala V.A., Titarenko А.А., Shevchenko M.Yu.
RAMAN INVESTIGATION OF DIAMOND-LIKE CARBON FILMS
North Caucasus federal university
Stavropol, av. Kulakova 2/2, 355000
This paper presents the results of experimental deposition of diamond-like
carbon films synthesized by plasma-chemical method from two hydrocarbons:
methane (CH4) and ethane (C2H6).Raman spectroscopy was used to study the effect of
synthesis conditions on the film structure and composition.
Key words: amorphous hydrogenated carbon, Raman spectra, carbon clusters,
the degree of crystallinity, microcrystalline, nanocrystalline, ultrananocrystalline,
amorphous, substrate bias.
In the recent years diamond-like carbon films appears to be very attractive, due
to their superior mechanical stability and the possibility of changing their properties
in a wide range. However, the problem of qualitative assessment of the structure and
composition, taking into account a great variety of carbon forms, remains still
relevant. In this paper, Raman scattering was carried out to investigate diamond-like
carbon films synthesized by plasma-chemical deposition from two different
hydrocarbon sources.
The results show (Fig. 1) that, regardless of used source components,
hydrogenated amorphous carbon films were always formed demonstrating typical
characteristic Raman spectra. These spectra had a pronounced G-peak in the region
1510-1540 cm-1 and weakly expressed D-peak at 1350 cm-1. Furthermore, all spectra
had a small inclination to the X axis. So, using the slope of the baseline on Raman
spectrum, the concentration of bound hydrogen can be determined. The synthesis
conditions of samples are given in [1].
Fig. 1. Raman spectra of a-C:H samples: A – synthesized from ethane; B –
synthesized from methane
The important characteristic of a a-C:H film is the content of sp2-hybridized and
sp3- hybridized carbon. However, in majority of cases Raman method is up to 50
times more sensitive to sp2-hybridized carbon, so it is concerned in current paper.
Typically, sp2-hybridized carbon content is determined from the intensity ratio of D
and G bands [2, 3]. However, due to the lack of clear data on the number of bands in
the Raman spectrum and also because of the approximation error of the spectra by
two Gaussian lines, another approach is supposed. After subtracting the baseline from
the spectrum, the intensity of the maximum is determined by and intensity at 1350
cm-1. The received ratio of intensities I1350 / I max can be responsible for the share of sp2
carbon in the film. The higher the value, the greater is proportion of sp2 carbon. Of
course, it cannot be referred to as an absolute value, but change of the ratio can show
the character of changes in the structure of the material, for example during
deposition conditions optimization.
Another important characteristic in the Raman spectrum is the spectrum width at
half the intensity at the center of mass. Presumably it is associated with the dispersion
of the size and structure of sp2 carbon clusters.
Although the size of amorphous cluster cannot be determined like crystallite
size, a certain average value which varies depending on the structure of the material
could be concerned.
It is clear that with increase of sp2 carbon atoms proportion, the formation of sp2
clusters will go faster. There are two types of structural changes possible. The first is
that clusters consisting of a large number of atoms appear in the material. In terms of
the probability theory, size scatter should take place. Such scatter displays as
widening of the spectral bands, as the dispersion on carbon bonds in clusters of
different sizes gives greater amount of bands in the spectrum.
The second type involves not only appearance of large sp2 carbon clusters, but
also an increase of their number. In this case, the average cluster size tends to
increase. It should be noted that an increase in the average size should ultimately lead
to the appearance of crystallites in the film, because due to increase of carbon atoms
with sp2 hybridization the emergence probability of the structural forms which
correspond to classical rules of lattice structure will increase. Further increase of the
number of sp2 carbon atoms, will lead to the formation of microcrystalline structure.
On the other hand, reduction of sp2-hybridized carbon atoms proportion will
lead to reduction of the crystallinity degree, i.e., while changing of material structure
from microcrystalline to nanocrystalline, then to ultrananocrystalline and, in the end,
to the amorphous forms the crystallinity of the material will decrease, with clusters
size decrease. Thus, crystallinity is strongly depends on the cluster size.
Fig. 2. Dependence of the Raman spectrum width at the half-height of its
intensity at the center of mass on the synthesis conditions
Based on the considerations and presented dependence (Fig. 2) the following
can be concluded: increasing of the spectrum width up to -400 V indicates increase in
the cluster size, i.e., in this range of deposition conditions qualitative changes in the
structure of the film occur.
At higher bias values, the spectrum width does not change, indicating the
conversions in the structure without changes of cluster sizes, due to increasing
proportion of carbon atoms with sp2 type of hybridization.
The analysis of the spectra obtained by modeling and of Raman spectra of
graphite and amorphous carbon gave empirical expression for the calculation of the
characteristic crystallinity coefficient:
æ
ö I1350
wG × (wG - wc.m. )
÷
Rr = ç
ç ( w1¢¢/ 2 max - wG )(w1¢¢/ 2 c.m. - w1¢/ 2 c.m. ) ÷ I c.m
è
ø
3
(1)
where wG – the position of the maximum in the spectrum; wc.m. – the wave
number at the center of mass in the spectra; w1¢¢/ 2 max – the maximum value of the wave
number at the intersection of a line drawn at half intensity maximum of the spectrum;
w1¢¢/ 2 c.m. , w1¢/ 2 c.m. – maximum and minimum values of the wave number at the
intersections of a line drawn at half intensity at the center of mass; I1350 – the intensity
at a wavenumber of 1350 cm-1; I c.m. – the intensity at the center of mass.
The physical meaning of Rr is that the greater this coefficient, the higher the
probability of existence of ordered clusters in the material, and the higher the
probability of large cluster existence.
From the calculation of the characteristic coefficient of crystallinity, it follows
that when the bias changes from -200 to -1000V (Fig. 3) an increase of this ratio
takes place, therefore size and total content of sp2 carbon clusters increase can be
assumed.
Fig. 3. Dependence of Rr on the deposition conditions
Thus, a method of analyzing Raman spectra of amorphous carbon films
proposed in this paper permits a qualitative assessment of the structure and
composition of these materials.
References:
1) Tarala V.A. Synthesis and research of physical properties of a-C:H films
deposited via HF plasma Тарала, В. А. Tarala // Vestnyk NCSTU Volume 1,
Stavropol, 2007, pp. 5-12.
2) Tunistra, F., Koenig J. L. // J. Chem. Phys. 1970. Vol. 53 № 3. P. 1126-1130.
3) Robertson, J. Mechanical properties and structure of diamond-like carbon//
Diam. Rel. Mat. – 1992. – P. 397-406.
J21310-073
UDC 621.9.02
Bezyazychny V.F.
CALCULATING ESTIMATION OF WEAR INTENSITY FOR THE
CONTACT SURFACES OBTAINED BY MACHINING
Federal State Educational Institution of Higher Professional Education Rybinsk
State Aviation Technical University by P.A. Solovyev
The calculating methods to estimate wear intensity for the edge cut surface
have been set forth subject to machining conditions, the material to be cut as well as
the tool materials. The algorithm of calculating estimation for metal cutting has been
presented in order to provide the surface layer wear resistance and equilibrium
parameters of surface layer quality.
WEAR
INTENSITY, EQUILIBRIUM SURFACE LAYER QUALITY PARAMETERS,
CUTTING CONDITIONS.
To control the cutting procedure in order to provide part running ability it is
expedient to have dependences relating the running ability indices to the cutting
conditions under the given method of part manufacture. If we consider such running
ability as wear resistance, than the contact surface wear intensity value for the
definite combinations of the materials to be cut and the tool materials under the
geometry recommended for the turning conditions could be evaluated by the formula
[1]:
a 0,5e 2,1 æ cS x1 ö
I h = 0,036 2
n çè r y1 r1z1 ÷ø
0,874
(1)
where a2 is the coefficient depending on the contact type. Under the elastic
contact a2 = 0,5; under the plastic contact a2 = 1; e is relative approach of contact
surfaces expressed in fractions of crookedness maximum peak-to-valley height; n is
the action cycle number resulting in material destruction; S is the feed, mm/rev; r is
the tool point radius in plan, mm; r1 is the tool tip rounding radius, mkm. Values of
coefficient с and those of the indices are summarized in Table 1.
Table 1
Values of coefficient с and indices in the formula (1)
The material to be cut
Coefficients
с
x1
y1
z1
ХН73МБТЮ
1016
1,42
1,0
0,85
ВТ9
4865
1,71
1,1
0,96
Л62
608
1,58
1,04
0,95
Ал9
242
1,37
0,95
0,79
Д16Т
82
1,23
1,07
1,07
Лс59–1
123
1,64
0,94
0,93
Мл5
146
1,66
1,25
1,05
Ма2–1
125
2,04
1,54
1,44
Note. The parameter values for the geometrical part of the cutter which
coefficient values can be assumed from Table 7.2 are summarized in Tables 6.3. 6.4.
6.5. of source [1].
Often the issue of surface layer quality control must be solved by means of
cutting condition assignment. In this case it is expedient to assign the cutting
conditions providing the cutting area with the optimal temperature under which there
will be minimal cutter wear. The SFPM rate corresponding to the optimal
temperature is called the optimal SFPM rate. The optimal SFPM rate temperature
provides for the most favorable surface layer quality parameters as well as running
abilities.
The minimal wear of the surface machined is observed under the optimal
SFPM rate machining (Fig. 1). Such dependence can be accounted for the fact that
under the optimal SFPM rates the machined surface has the most uniform distribution
of cusp height and roughness width (Fig. 2).
V = 0, 23 m/sec
V0 = 0, 37 m/sec
V = 0, 73 m/с
seс
Fig. 1. Dependence of wear value
Fig.
2.
Profilograms
of
on SFPM rate under turning of ВТ9- roughness of the surface machined
alloy.
under turning of ХН77ТЮР-alloy
S = 0,2 mm/rev, t = 2 mm, r = 0,5 with the cutter made of ВК8.
mm, a = 10°,
S = 0,2 mm/rev, t = 2 mm, r = 0,5
j = 45°, j1 = 15°, r1 = 30 mkm. mm, r1 = 30 mkm, j = 45°, g = a =
Cutter made of ВК8.
10°.
D – wear value of the surface
Vertical magnification – 2000,
horizontal – 80.
machined;
t1 – friction time.
In this case wear intensity can be estimated according to the following formula:
1,75
0,3
ì
ü1- n0
0,125 é
0,115
0,57 0,345 æ t ö
0,57 0,075 ù
an 0 a1 l ç ÷ + l pbea r1 ú crq ï
ï 0, 6625a1 ê 4,3sin
2,1
èmø
a 0,5
×103 ï
ï
ë
û
2 e
×í
In =
ý , (2)
-0,43
0,874
0,025
0,26 0,74 - n0
0,04 n0 - 0,1
t pa
a n 0t m
sin
n×r
c 0 b r1
(1 - 0, 45sin g ) ï
ï
ï
ï
î
þ
where а1 is the thickness of cut; n0 is the optimal SFPM rate, m/sec; а is the
thermal diffusivity of the material to be cut, m2/sec; l and lp is the thermal
conductivity of the material to be cut and the tool material, Vt/(m×°K); t is the cut
depth; b and e is the tool angle and the tool point angle in plan, radian; tp is the
resistance of the material to be cut to the plastic slip, Pa; a and g are the back and
face cutter angles; b is the contact ark length between the tool and the materiel to be
cut; q is the temperature in the cutting area, °С; сr is the specific heat capacity per
unit volume of the material to be cut, Joule/m3×°K; m = a1/S is the coefficient
depending on the geometrical parameters of the cutting tool; с0 and n0 are the
dimensionless quantities defined according to Table 2.
Table 2
C0 and n0 values
r1/a1
с0
n0
r1/a1 £ 0,05
3,65
0,125
0,05 < r1/a1 £ 0,1
5,31
0,25
0,1 > r1/a1
7,60
0,40
Hence wear intensity is the function of physic-mechanical properties of the
material to be cut and the tool material (the resistance of the material to be cut to the
plastic slip, thermal conductivity and the thermal diffusivity of the material to be cut
and the tool material, cutting conditions (SFPM rate and cut depth, feed), the tool
point geometrical parameters (cutter angles and tool point radii in plan cutting edge
rounding). The results of wear intensity calculation according to the dependence
concerned are summarized in Fig. 3.
1
0,1
0,5
1
1,5
r, mm
0,5
1
1,5
t, mm
0,6
0,7 S, mm
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
10–1
Jh=f(r)
10–2
10–3
10–4
Jh=f(t)
10–5
10–6
10–7
Jh=f(S)
10–8
Jh
Fig. 3. Dependence of the wear intensity on the contact surface machining
conditions. The material to be cut is steel 40Х. The cutter made of Т14K6.
j = 90°; j1 = 15°; a = 10°; g = 15°; by Jh = f (S) – t = 1 mm, r = 0,5 mm
by Jh = f (t) – S = 0,27 mm, r = 0,5 mm
by Jh = f (r) t = 1 mm, S = 0,3 mm/rev.
Analysis of the calculating results has shown that qualitative characteristic of
wear intensity in dependence on the machining conditions seems to be correct. With
the feed gain both the cusp height and the roughness width of the surface machined
increase, whereupon wear intensity of the surface machined grows.
With the gain of the tool point radius in plan the cusp height and the roughness
width decrease as well as the wear intensity of the machined surface. With the cut
depth increase the machined surface wear intensity reduces in relation of the feed to
the cut depth more than 0,2. With the farther increase of the cut depth the machined
surface wear intensity does practically not change, which could be explained through
the similar change of roughness parameters under the cut depth increase.
Taking into consideration that as a rule there is a deviation of characteristic
values for the material to be cut and the tool material from those assumed while
calculation, in terms of quantity the calculating results obtained can slightly differ
from the actual ones.
The following criterion dependence based on the analysis of the above
theoretical dependences has been obtained to get greater accuracy of coincidence for
the calculating results with the actual values of wear resistance properties:
c0 Б с1 Г с2 Д 2,2 М 0,80 (1 - sin a )
R max
=
0,19
b1/ v × r
1,19 с3 æ d ö
E Э ç ÷
è r1 ø
0,17
(1 - sin g )
0,09
(3)
where Rmax is the roughness profile maximum peak-to-valley height; b and n are
the parameters of abut initial curve piece exponential approximation; с0, с1, с2, с3 are
the coefficients depending on the properties of the material to be cut.
Б=
na1
a
r
S
lp
b
; Г=
be ; Д = 1 ; M = ; E = 1 ; E = .
r
a
b1
b1
b1
l
C0, с1, с2, с3 values are summarized in Table 3.
Table 3
Values in formula (3)
The material to be cut
Coefficient
Heat-resistant
nickel-base
alloys
Titanium
alloys
Corrosive and
heat-resistant
steels
Carbon and
alloyed steels
с0
0,0195
0,0334
0,0438
0,0915
с1
0,22
0,10
0,10
0,06
с2
0,33
0,33
0,32
0,26
с3
2,74
2,62
2,62
2,58
In the general case it is expedient to obtain the rated dependence to estimate
the wear intensity subject to the parameter complex characterizing the machining
procedure namely the process rate (feed, cut depth SFPM rate), the cutter geometrical
parameters, mechanical and physical properties of the material to be cut and the tool
material.
This can be done by means of the following formula, which the author has
obtained
0,719-0,2( n+1) +5,2 t
y
0,0316 × 3,7n+1 a 0,5bRz
,
Jh =
ty
0,323( n+1) + 0,161-0,16 t y
2 0,161+ 0,84 t y -0,323( n+1)
s
34,64
æ
ö
m
1
æ
0 ö æ N ö
(n + 1) ç
ç
÷
÷ ç ÷
è E ø
è K f м ø è Ac ø
(4)
where Rz is the cusp height of the contact surface profile, mm; n and b are the
parameters of the abut approximation curve.
According to E.V. Ryzhov’s study the values of n and b can be defined through
dependences [2]
n=
Rp
Ra
,
æR
b = 0,5 ç max
è Rp
ö
÷,
ø
where Ra is the arithmetical average roughness; Rp is the distance from the face
line to the mean line; s0 is working stress in the contact area of bearing faces, MPa; N
is acting load on the contact surfaces, N; Ас is the nominal area, outlined by the
contacting bodies’ size, mm2; m is Poisson’s ratio of the part material; Е is the
modulus of elasticity of the material wearing out faster, Pa; ty is the parameter of the
friction fatigue curve [3]; K is the coefficient characterizing contact stress state (for
brittle materials K = 5, for high-plastic materials K = 3; fм is the value of friction
coefficient molecular component.
In the running-in process the optimal stable surface roughness is created not
dependent on the initial roughness which seems expedient to be created while surface
machining. Thereby it is necessary to develop a mathematical model making
mechanical machining conditional on the equilibrium parameters of machine part
surface layer quality, since as result of running-in process of mating machine parts
the part contact surface comes to such physical state and such structure that the
surface layer possesses minimal potential energy, i.e. presents a stable system
allowing minimal energy dissipation as it stands. The geometrical (roughness) and
physic-mechanical (mikrohardness) properties of surface layer quality forming this
way are called the equilibrium ones.
Under supervision of the author of this study Sutyagin A.N. obtained the
formula interrelating wear intensity with equilibrium parameters of roughness and
part surface layer cold working degree [4]:
2 × 10-3 fТР F 3pSТР Rzравн × éë HV0 ( N равн + 1) ùû - 4 F 2
æ sB ö
, (5)
JV = 20 ç
÷
1,19
2
-3 3p
s
d
è 0,2 ø 2 × 10 2 SТР Rzравн × éë HV0 ( N равн + 1) ùû ( 0,32 × HV0 × N равн )
a0 G
1,19
where JV is wear intensity, m3/m; fТР is the coefficient of friction for the contact
pair material; F is the regular interface force of friction pair elements, N; STP is the
friction path, m; G is the rigidity modulus of the part material, Pа; Rzpaвн/equal is the
equilibrium roughness parameter of the part element adjustment surfaces, m; HV is
the equilibrium mikrohardness of the surface layer of the part under study on the
definite depth, Pа; a0 is the parameter of inter-locating interaction; HV0 is the
unstrained material mikrohardness, Pа; sВ is the part material strength, Pа; s02 is the
conventional yield strength of the part material, Pа; d is the unit elongation of the part
material.
Analysis of the results as to calculation and experimental estimation of sample
wear intensity (made of the following materials: ШХ15, steel 45, steel У7, steel
ЭИ961, and ХН77ТЮР-alloy) under conditions of surface layer equilibrium has
shown that the calculating error as to dependence (5) does not exceed 12 % (Table 4).
Table 4
Comparison of calculated and experimental values of wear
Wear
Stable
Sample
materia
l
Samp
le №
Load roughne
force,
Н
ss,
Rz,
mkm
У7
1
2
1
2
У7
1
2
1
2
13X12
МБФ
А
490
585
686
784
1
2
490
Stable
mikrohar
dness, hC,
MPa
Stable Calculating
cold
wear
working
intensity,
degree,
Jn × 10 ,
N, %
3
m /m
–8
intensity
experiment Error,
al value, Jn
%
× 10–8,
m3/m
2,5
2083
70
0,6548
0,588
11,4
2,5
2120
72
0,6139
0,561
9,5
2,47
2104
81
0,6518
0,606
7,6
2,47
2111
83
0,6104
0,670
8,9
2,4
2200
88
0,6129
0,693
11,6
2,4
2150
86
0,6607
0,684
3,4
2,2
2110
85
0,7690
0,803
4,2
2,2
2120
77
0,8520
0,906
6,0
2,2
2256
69
5,686
5,202
9,3
2,2
2240
73
5,397
5,039
7,1
Table 4(continued)
Wear
Stable
Sample
materia
l
Samp
le №
Load roughne
force,
ss,
Н
Rz,
mkm
ШХ15
1
2
490
Stable
mikrohar
dness, hC,
MPa
Stable Calculating
cold
wear
working
intensity,
degree,
Jn × 10–8,
N, %
3
m /m
intensity
experiment Error,
al value, Jn
%
× 10–8,
m3/m
2
2202
71
6,381
5,79
10,2
2
2361
76
5,162
4,721
9,5
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
Ст3
2
1
2
1
2
1
45
2
1
2
585
686
784
490
585
686
784
490
585
1,9
2270
76
6,545
5,94
10,2
1,9
2320
80
5,945
5,37
10,7
1,7
2330
81
6,644
6,24
6,5
1,7
2340
82
6,487
7,13
9,0
1,4
2370
79
7,276
7,04
3,4
1,4
2360
85
6,792
7,56
10,2
2,5
1330
87
3,550
9,21
10,8
2,5
1350
84
3,534
3,19
10,7
2,2
1380
88
3,616
3,86
6,4
2,2
1360
87
3,788
4,13
8,2
2,0
1210
91
4,600
5,08
9,5
2,0
1400
89
3,800
4,28
11,3
1,9
1260
90
4,574
5,08
9,9
1,9
1370
92
3,991
4,43
10
1,1
2110
91
0,104
0,108
3,6
1,1
2120
94
0,099
0,109
8,7
2,2
2130
96
0,107
0,121
11,6
2,2
2170
99
0,100
0,113
11,5
On the basis of the dependences obtained the methods have been offered to
calculate machining conditions in order to provide machine part surface layer wear
resistance which algorithm is presented in Fig. 4.
The principle of the algorithm is as follows: input of data on the part material:
rigidity modulus G, mikrohardness of the material surface layer HV0, as well as the
part operating conditions: regular interaction force of friction pair elements F, friction
coefficient of contact pair materials fTP and the inter-locating interaction parameter
a0. Using formula (5) the calculation of wear intensity JV is made as well as that of
the corresponding quality parameters of the surface layer in equilibrium (cold
working degree Nравн/equal and roughness Rzравн/equal). Farther algorithm chooses
mechanical machining type (turning, milling) depending on the part geometry,
required machining accuracy and machined surface quality. Calculation of
mechanical machining conditions as to blocks 1 and 2 is accomplished based on the
software mentioned below.
Start
Source Data
Part material properties:
G, HV0 , a0.
Part operating conditions:
F, fТР
Wear intensity
calculation JV
1
1. Turning
2. Milling
Turning conditions
calculation according to the
given values of surface layer
state parameters Rzequal,
Nequal
2
Milling conditions calculation
according to the given values
of surface layer state
parameters Rzequ al, Nequal
Machining conditions
n, S, t
End
Fig. 4. Algorithm for calculating estimation of mechanical machining
conditions in order to provide wear resistance of machine part surface layer
Certificate of registration of industrial design № 3451. Calculation of
mechanical machining conditions providing specified performance of the parts
subject to financial viability [Text]/Bezyazychny V.F., Kozhina T.D., Volkov S.A.;
development center P.A. Solovyov Rybinsk State Academy of Aviation Technology.
Registered in Branch collection of algorithms and programs on 21.04.04.
Certificate of registration of industrial design№ 3452. Calculation of turning
conditions providing specified performance of the parts [Text]/Bezyazychny V.F.,
Kozhina T.D., Volkov S.A.; development center P.A. Solovyov Rybinsk State Academy
of Aviation Technology. Registered in Branch collection of algorithms and programs
on 21.04.04.
Certificate of registration of industrial design № 3457. Calculation of turning
conditions providing specified quality parameters of the surface layer and machining
accuracy [Text]/Bezyazychny V.F., Kozhina T.D., Volkov S.A.; development center
P.A. Solovyov Rybinsk State Academy of Aviation Technology. Registered in Branch
collection of algorithms and programs on 21.04.04.
Dependences of wear intensity on the edge cutting conditions have also been
obtained (Table 5), allowing to calculate wear intensity analytically for the cutting
conditions chosen, to assign or correct the relevant surface machining type permitting
to provide formation of equilibrium geometrical and physic-mechanical parameters of
machine part surface layer quality.
Table 5
Correlation between wear intensity and machining conditions
Material
Dependence of wear intensity on the edge cutting machining
conditions
Steel ШХ15
JV = 3,71 × 10–8S0,054n0,85t–0,12r–0,069j–0,69F0,95
Steel 30ХГСА
JV = 2,945 × 10–8S0,024n0,428t–0,046r–0,077j–0,909F0,907
Steel ЭИ961
JV = 3,294 × 10–9S0,17n0,15t–0,09r–0,11j–0,13F0,89
Steel 45
JV = 2,574 × 10–9S0,27n0,68t–0,2r–0,11j–0,62F0,84
Table 5 summarizes the following dimensions of the parameters included: S is
the feed, mm/rev; n is the SFPM rate, m/sec; t is the cut depth, mm; r is the tool point
radius in plan, mm; j is the main angle in plan, degree; F is the regular interaction
force of friction pair elements, N. These dependences describe the process adequately
by S = 0,05-0,08 mm/rev; n = 0,1-0,2 m/sec; t = 0,25-0,4 mm; j = 45-60°; r = 0,3-1
mm; F = 100-500 N; dry friction; elastic interaction; temperature on the contact less
than or equal to 120 °С.
The algorithm developed for calculating estimation of mechanical machining
conditions in order to provide machine part surface layer wear resistance allows the
technologist to specify mechanical machining conditions at the part manufacture
procedure design stage resulting in surface layer formation with equilibrium
geometrical parameters and physic-mechanical properties reducing running-in time
for machine parts.
Thus, theoretical study shows calculating estimations to be practical in
specifying tribotechnical properties of the machined surfaces or machining conditions
providing given performance.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Bezyazychny V.F. Theory of similarity in mechanical engineering. – М.:
Machinostroyeniye, 2012. – 320 p.
2. Ryzhov E.V. Contact rigidity of machine components. – М.: Machinostroyeniye,
1966. – 244 p.
3. Kragelsky
I.V.
Principles
of
friction
and
wear
calculation.
–
М.:
Machinostroyeniye, 1977. – 422 p.
4. Bezyazychny V.F., Sutyagin A.N. Technological providing of surface layer wear
resistance of machine components. «TRIBOLOGY» issue. Romania, 2011. – pp.
15 – 18.
J21310-074
UDC 658.012.011.56
Kamakin V.A.
DATA FLOW SAFETY TECHNOLOGIES IN PRODUCTION
CONTROL AUTOMATION
Federal State Educational Institution of Higher Professional Education
Rybinsk State Aviation Technical University by P.A. Solovyev
The paper deals with the approaches to the business data security ensuring
data flow safety. Methods to improve data security systems are suggested.
Keywords: automation, information technology, security
Provision of data flow safety is an essential issue solved in the course of
establishing of an efficient corporate information system [1]. Russian enterprises
having identical technological profile differ greatly in attitude to the issue under
consideration. On the one part measures as for data safety are neither planned nor
held till substantial malfunctioning occurs after which all one can do is count losses.
On the other part security departments are set up together with data security services
with sizable staff and often with identical functions. Data access procedures are
developed to a large degree hampering solution of production issues. Consequently
expenses for data security system maintenance as well activity of the enterprise in
accordance with it substantially exceed the extent of potential losses from data
process failures. Here as a rule data security measures are reduced to data access
restrictions, i.e. dissemination security, whereas in the majority of cases data safety
and absence of data corruptions is much more important than limitation of its
dissemination [2].
In consideration of the aforementioned development of technologies is
required enabling setting up data security system at an enterprise which would
provide on the one hand for data flow safety as for all possible destabilizing factors
and on the other hand would not necessitate excessive resource expenditures [2].
Thereto a model to arrange data security system is required. The scheme in
Fig. 1 illustrates the model suggested. The model is universal; it can be used both in
the course of system set up and its improvement. Two fundamental elements form the
basis of the model: system arrangement methodology including an array of methods
to identify problem situations, as well as for planning and implementation of certain
measures. The second fundamental element is the algorithm of work activity
management to provide for corporate data system safety. Fig. 1 also illustrates
technologies ensuring implementation of a certain algorithm element.
The first stage implies analysis and structuring of existing documental flow in
order to plan measures as to further safety. At the second stage target factors are
formulated to plan measures in the course of set up and improvement of data security
system. The third stage includes immediate measure development which efficiency is
estimated at the fourth stage along with application of economic viability method [2].
Provided positive results of efficiency estimation the measures planned are
implemented at the fifth stage. After introduction of measures data security system
quality monitoring is put into practice. These actions are taken at the sixth stage of
the algorithm.
The results obtained are the initial data to accomplish complex audit of data
security system which has to ensure measuring system reliability and weak
component identifying. Based on the data of system efficiency as well as the results
of the audit the measures as to further improvement are developed.
Document
circulation structuring
Security
system
arrangement
Identification of
technology
target security factors
Priority technology
Information
Categorization technology
Economic viability method
security system design
Efficiency
estimation
Project
Efficiency indicators of
implementation
information security system
Performance
measurement
Complex audit of
information security
system
Improvement of
information security
system
Figure 1 – Generalized model of information security system
Prior to development of measures as to data security system arrangement it is
necessary to calculate data cost, i.e. answer the question, in what extent does potential
damage from dessimination or loss of data exceed expenditures for its protection. It is
also necessary to detect the most probable risks, as an ideal system will require
infinite resources. This could be for instance data security from unauthorized access
from outside, i.e. from Internet. In other circumstances threat of impact on data arises
from the staff or data stealing or dessimination are not dangerous but its corruption
can result in considerable losses. In all three cases application of specific data
security methods is required for each situation [4]. It should not be overlooked that
not only objective (actual) system reliability is of the essence but also attitude of
different groups concerned to it. In one instance it is sufficient that the enterprise
itself regards its system reliable enough. In others one has to prove it to some
concerned categories, e.g. to partners who often don’t have a good handle of the
issues under consideration. In this case the list of the measures planned should
include data security system certification. The problems to solve imply
implementation of three technologies which could be designated as follows:
technology
of
danger
detection,
categorization
and
economic
efficiency
measurement.
Technology of danger detection implies taking into consideration the irregular
behavior of data process: unauthorized dissemination, corruption and destruction of
data. At the same time elaboration of measures for all variants of failures will result
in necessity to plan and implement mutually exclusive actions. In this connection
preliminary data structurization as to irregular behavior must be accomplished.
Thereto probabilistic irregular behavior factors of standard data processes have
to be determined. Probabilistic factors are as follows:
- probability of unauthorized data dessimination,
- probability of unauthorized data corruption,
- probability of unauthorized data destruction.
Here is also required to take into account the cases of intentional actions of any
kind on the part of interest groups. Such parties in interest can be designated as
violators though in the data security theory this term is applied to an abstract array of
possible intentional damages of data processes. This interpretation of the term seems
to be logical as a certain person does not as a rule possess maximally theoretically
possible means and correspondingly system protection from him requires fewer
losses than in the case when violator is regarded as an abstract concept. In other
words it is necessary to detect the potential violator interested and having intention to
take certain actions to influence harmfully data flows of an enterprise, as well as to
define the nature of the possible attack to reveal the first-priority direction in
arrangement of a data security system.
There are many cases possible when detrimental impact on data flows is not
linked with intentional actions. For each of the cases a probabilistic factor of
detrimental impact on data flows connected with intentional should be defined
actions, as well as that for the case not connected with such kind of actions.
Probability matrix (1) has to be the result of the research where the rows include
behavior and the columns include premeditation of detrimental actions.
æ p ру
ç
p = ç pиу
çp
è уу
wher
e
p рс ö
÷
pис ÷
p ус ÷ø
,
(1)
p ру – is probability of intentional information
dessimination,
pиу – is probability of intentional corruption,
p уу – is probability of intentional destruction,
p рс – is probability of incidental dessimination,
pис – is probability of incidental corruption,
p ус – is probability of incidental destruction.
In addition to probability one has to define the extent of consequences of
occurrence of this or that situation. The matter is when the probability of detrimental
impact is high but the data are not valuable. In this connection the rate of possible
losses due to detrimental impact on data flows has to be calculated and loss matrix
has to be made up (2).
æ С ру
ç
С = ç Сиу
çС
è уу
wher
e
С рс ö
÷
Сис ÷
С ус ÷ø
,
(2)
С ру – intentional dessimination losses,
Сиу – intentional corruption losses,
С уу – intentional destruction losses,
С рс – incidental dessimination losses,
С ис – incidental destruction losses,
С ус – incidental destruction losses.
Element-wise multiplying (1) and (2), one obtains appropriateness matrix
where the max element row defines the behavior and the column shows designedness
of impact on the data system as to each type of data (3).
x = max(P. ´ C ) ,
wher
e
(3)
x – is the maximal aspect-wise obtained value of viability
factor
In the situations when the matrix elements located in different rows have
approximately identical value or that high enough special combined methods of data
security have to be applied.
On completion of the process implying determination of aspects and
identification of the data security technologies supposed execution of works is
required on implementing of data categorization. Categorization permits solving of
the following problem. Each document defines security process subject to its content.
Process definition requires documenting, i.e. preparation of a method and a procedure
which should also be protected. Consequently one gets endless recursive process
requiring endless involvement of expenditures of time and resources. Insider
information structurizing principle as to secrecy levels accepted in government
institutions underlies the categorization method. This method implies development of
design processes based on two data security technologies: identification of optimal
quantity of information categories and implementation of security process
technologies for the data attributed to the certain category. Security system
functioning on itself should include application of two procedure groups:
identification of the category of a certain document and the procedure of working
with a document attributed to the certain category. Here one should take into
consideration that information can be presented both in paper and electronic format.
Special feature of the approach under consideration is that it takes into account data
categorization variant not only as to its secrecy level but also as to its significance for
an enterprise. Traditionally these are the processes connected with data protection
from dissemination which are determined. Arrangement of an integrated corporate
control information system implies that the essential part of information is transferred
in electronic form. The problem of application of such systems is decrease of their
stability just in terms of their reliability. It conditions the necessity to identify
categorization procedures for data security not only as to dessimination but also as to
corruption or destruction including that resulting from the detrimental impact not
connected with the intentional actions of certain individuals. This task can be solved
by applying the method of data categorization as to its sensitivity.
Arrangement of data security system requires planning of procedures aimed at
measurement of security system efficiency. Security system reliability calculations
accomplished in known sources relate as a rule to performance characteristics; the
main one is the number of key combinations defining direct enumeration stability [3].
The key combination number determines the time required for a violator to get
guaranteed access to information. It is the number that is applied to estimate
efficiency of wide-spread modern data coding aids [4]. To calculate the value of
combination number the following concepts are introduced:
- key length – max number of sign characters the key may comprise, e.g.
width of the key «quality» equals seven;
- key weight – number of key variants falling on one length. E.g. if the
key is formulated in decimal system of enumeration then the key weight
is 10.
Number of key combinations can be calculation by formula (4).
N =V m,
w
(4)
N – key combination number,
here
V – key weight,
m – key length.
To illustrate demonstrably the given factor it is expedient to calculate the time
required for a violator to break the code. Special software and hardware are usually
used for breaking; their processing speed makes up about 1 000 000 combinations per
second without add-on dictionaries and approximately 100 000 combinations per
second applying dictionaries. In the first case access time corresponds with the data
presented in Table 1.
Table 1 – Cryptoanalysis time by direct numeration method
Serial
number
1.
Key type
Binary
Key
weight
2
Key
Key length
combination
Access time,
years
number
128
3,4 × 1038
1,08 ×10 25
Serial
number
Key type
Key
weight
Key
Key length
combination
Access time,
years
number
2.
Decimal
10
24
1× 10 24
3,17 ×1010
3.
Symbolic
63
15
3,91 × 10 21
1,24 ×108
4.
Code page
130
8
8,16 × 1016
2,58 ×10 3
The Table illustrates demonstrably sufficient reliability by the given criterion.
But if such situation were a case in reality then there would be no successful cases of
breaking at all. However such cases happen and unfortunately they are ordinary.
Therefore the existing systems have weak components even from the point of view of
data encryption only; and they do not take into consideration this criterion. Analysis
of publications in the context of this issue has shown that if one regards cases of
successful impact of a violator on the enterprise information flows then they are
directly or indirectly connected with the human factor in more than 90% of cases. In
this connection the factors accounting for human factor should be applied as the main
criterion of data security system efficiency. Economic efficiency of the system should
be one of these factors. Traditional methods of economic efficiency estimation are
inadequate to calculate it; to its definition a technology is suggested which could be
determined as the method of economic viability.
The essence of the given method is based on the fact that efficiency of data
security system is defined through calculation of key (benchmark) indicators
measured in the economical equivalent. The method of economic viability suggests
assessment of expenditure substantiation as to each measure planned as well as
determining of efficiency of the whole complex of data security arrangement
procedures.
The main indicator is calculation of data cost for an enterprise. Here under the
data costs for an enterprise two different parameters are meant. The first one is
organization expenditures on data generation or acquisition. The second parameter is
the measure of damages occurring owing to detrimental impact on the information
processes. In the context of the said the second parameter should be regarded as data
costs for an enterprise since expenditures on obtaining data to oneself in practice
never corresponds to its further so called «market» value. I.e. the second parameter
proves to be more urgent for all that its regular correction is required. Defining this
basic indicator necessitates estimation of possibility of occurrence of this or that
situation. This is useful also for the cases when security cost value is high but
occurrence of event is practically impossible. For instance it can be implemented
subject to the probability calculated for occurrence of this or that event. Here the data
cost for an enterprise must be multiplied by the given probabilistic indicator (in
accordance with formula 5).
C ИП = pс СУ , where
(5)
C ИП – information cost for an enterprise,
pс
– probability of information process corruption,
СУ
– rated extent of losses.
C ИП is the basic indicator determining maximal allowed expenditures on
protection of these data. These expenditures are also the basic indicator for economic
estimation of security system effectiveness. Expenditures on data protection are made
up of two components: implementation costs and costs for measure maintenance.
Detailed description of the method of economic viability is presented in [2].
Description of the said technologies permits formulating generalized structure
algorithm to arrange complex data security system which scheme is presented in
Fig.2. It comprises three main technologies: priority method, categorization method,
and the method of economic viability.
The system offered provides for complex protection of dynamic data with
orientation on the procedures regulated through automated corporate control
information system of an enterprise. The security system developed this way has to
be the object of regular consideration with respect to improvement.
References
1. Belov P.G. Russian national security: categories, models, methods [Text] / P.G.
Belov. – М.: FCNTP CP «Security/Bezopasnost», 2003. – 460 p.
2. Kamakin V.А. Economic estimate of efficiency of corporative data security
measures [Text]/ V.А. Kamakin // Computer and data technology Reporter. – М.:
Machinostroyeniye, 2005. – № 7.
3. Antonov Y.V. Reliability and safety of management-information systems
(estimation and control methods [Text] / Y.V. Antonov, V.P. Belov, А.D.
Golyakov [et al.]. – St. Petersburg: ОАО «NII TM», 2004. – 326 p.
4. Osmolovsky S.А. Stochastic methods of data security [Text] / S.А. Osmolovsky. –
М.: Radio and traffic/Radio i svyaz, 2003.
J21310-075
UDC 621.9.02
Kozhina T.D., Eroshkov V.Y.
PROCESS BASES OF PROVISION OF THE PERFORMANCE
CRITERIA REQUIRED FOR GTE PARTS
Federal State Educational Institution of Higher Professional Education
Rybinsk State Aviation The paper deals with the issues of provision of the
performance criteria required for parts in mechanical engineering in terms of GTE
parts. The suggested methods to assign technological process conditions depending on
the performance criteria required is based on theoretical evidence Technical University
by P.A. Solovyev in the area of similarity theory accounting for the influence of power
and thermal factors on cutting process as well as on the integrated mathematical model
of cutting process.
Keywords: technology, gas turbine engine, performance criteria, similarity
theory, surface layer quality.
Need for fast development of new generation GTE production requires designing
of express and in the first place calculation methods for determination of technological
part process conditions permitting building solutions which would provide for the
required performance criteria at the stage of production process design.
The surface layer of the part is exposed to the strongest mechanical, thermal,
magnetic-electrical, light et al. impacts under operation conditions that’s why the task to
provide its specified parameters at minimal costs remains urgent.
The part function deteriorates and its destruction starts in the majority of cases
from the surface layer. Therefore decisions ensuring specified performance criteria
should be built into at the design stage of manufacturing process applying calculation
methods of assignment of technological process conditions. At this stage, i.e. that of
external improvement, the required performance criteria are predetermined. For
example at the cutting parameters of part processing are influences by a number of
factors: cutting tool wear, variations of allowances and hardness of workpiece surface
layer etc. The second stage of part turning process improvement, i.e. that of internal
improvement, implies obtaining of the required performance criteria through control of
design indices of accuracy and quality of the surfaces to be cut at the stage of operation
accomplishing due to application of cutting process control system enabling to take into
account the impact of disturbing influences and to regulate the cutting process in
accordance with the energy criterion of similitude.
The method suggested to assign technological process conditions depending on
the required performance criteria is based on theoretical evidence in the area of theory
of similarity which takes into account impact of both power and thermal impacts on the
cutting process as well as on the integrated mathematical model of the cutting process.
The theory of similarity takes into consideration the correlation between the cutting
process-dependent parameters (cutting modes, tool geometry, physical-mechanical
properties of the material to be cut and those of cutting medium etc.) and output
parameters of the part quality (surface roughness, value of residual stresses, depth and
extent of cold-worked spots, dimensional inaccuracies).
The generalized scheme of the suggested method to assign technological process
conditions depending on the required performance criteria is presented in Fig. 1.
However considering the scheme one should keep in mind that it is not obligatory that
all the criteria presented in the scheme must be specified simultaneously. Complex of
performance criteria or only one of them but the main one should be defined on the
assumption of the part function and its assembly with other elements of this or that
construction.
The identification task of the required part edge cutting process parameters (feed
S, cutting speed V, cut depth t, tool geometry etc.) ensuring the required performance
criteria of machine parts through control of surface layer quality parameters and cutting
accuracy is typical task within the theory of mathematical modeling improvement. As
the system to be improved the part cutting process on the machine should be regarded in
result of which the surface layer of the part acquires a complex of physical-mechanical
properties described in terms of the performance criteria chosen.
Specified complex of performance criteria
Turbine disks,*
GTE blade roots,
compressor disks:
Shafts, axels,*
Mounting surfaces of supporting
structures:
Butt-end surfaces of*
supporting
structures
Strength**
Friction and wear
Contact rigidity**
*
Heavy-duty GTE
parts:
w y , w n - ***
Strength
of movable compressed joints**
compliance,
y – approach
value
y – tolerant
clearance***
**
s -1 - Fatigue***
strength
Fatigue
resistance**
s в - f. resistance
range
Wearability**
f –friction coefficient***
Joint tightness
**
V - clearance volume in conjunction***
**
*
I h - wear rate***
type of the
surface to be
cut
***
running
ability
criteria of
operation assessment
Technological process conditions
Properties
of the
material
to be cut
s в , s т ,t р
Properties
of cutting
medium
Tool geometry
Dimension
of work
piece
a , g ,j , r
…
s ,t и , НВ ,
Equipment parameters
Parameters of the
surface to
be cut
D, H, B
…
…
…
Cutting parameters: V , S , t , r ,j , r1 , ...
Fig. 1 Layout of engineering support of GTE part performance criteria
The task of process engineer is to choose such technological process
conditions which could provide for the specified complex of performance criteria
{s -1 , у0 ,V0 ,...} or one of these criteria obtained to control the complex of the surface
layer quality parameters {RZ ,s ост , hc , d S }. This task and its solution can be
0
0
0
0
0
presented in the form of a logical sequence of the problem situation the process
engineer is facing in the course of assignment of cutting modes (Table 1).
Table 1.
View of the problem situation process engineer is facing
Main condition, causing
the problem
of Provision
of
performance criteria in
order to ensure failurefree operation of the
part through the whole
service life period
Problem situation
Method of solution
Assignment
machining
conditions
Assignment of machining
conditions through surface
layer quality parameters
control as to the energy
criterion of similitude
Stimulus
1. Reduction of
time-frame for introduction of new
products
2. Working
through the service
life without breakages and failures
Medium,
Demand
{s -10 , у0 ,V0 ,...}
Stimulus – reaction
Goal – action
Control
{RZ , s ост , hc , d S
0
0
0
0
}
In the general case deviation from the optimal value of those criteria
(increasingly or decreasingly the actual criteria value) results in deterioration of part
running ability. Moreover these criteria possess different dimensionalities that’s why
it is necessary to use their relative not the absolute variations of the optimal
magnitude. Based on the aforementioned we will use the following laws
æ s - s -10
f1 (s -1 , у,V ,...) = c1 × çç -1
è s -10
2
æ R a - R a0
f 2 (R a , s ост , hc , s S ) = c1 × çç
è R a0
æ hc - hc 0
+ c 3 × çç
è hc 0
2
2
2
ö
æ y - y0 ö
æ V - V0 ö
÷÷ + c2 çç
÷÷ + c3 × ç
÷ + ...
y
V
0
è
ø
è 0 ø
ø
ö
÷÷ + c 4
ø
2
ö
æs
- s ост0
÷÷ + c 2 çç ост
s ост0
ø
è
ædS - dS 0
× çç
è dS0
ö
÷
÷
ø
(1)
2
ö
÷÷ +
ø
2
(2)
or applying the following designations q1 º s -1 , q2 º y, q3 º V , ... , we can pass to the
general function
2
æ q - qi 0 ö
÷÷ ,
f (Q) = å ci × çç i
è qi 0 ø
i =1
k
(3)
where сi are corresponding weight coefficients permitting to define the contribution
of this or that indicator of the part surface layer quality to its overall reliability;
k is the number of performance criteria;
Q is the complex of performance criteria.
Evidently that while ensuring optimal criteria the magnitude of this function
will be equal to zero.
The next stage of formulation of improvement task is identification of
explanatory variables adequately defining the system. So the following variables
must be chosen as explanatory ones characterizing (defining) the process of part fine
turning:
-
Cutting speed V;
-
Feed S;
-
Cut depth t;
-
Cutting tool geometry: φ, φ1, α, γ, r, ρ1 et al.
Here in each specific case the number of the explanatory variables taken into
account may be reduced or increased and besides any of variables may vary over a
wide range or be strictly fixed.
Thereby the complex of explanatory system variables is chosen which will
further designate through X={x1… xn} (where xi is variable of the system to be
improved, n is the number of variables).
The next stage of task set-up is construction of the system mathematical model
describing correlations between variables and reflecting the influence of explanatory
variables on the objective function of improvement. In the general case the model
structure comprises equations describing physical processes progressing in the
system, as well as equation and inequalities determining the tolerance region of
explanatory variables and requirements to upper and/or lower boundaries of change
in system behavior.
The model suggested is based on the algorithm of calculation of performance
criteria under the specified technological part process conditions. Based on it under
the specified values of cutting speed V, feed S, cut depth t, geometry of the machineattachment-tool-workpiece system one performance criterion can be defined, their
required combination and in the final analysis complex of the required performance
criteria s-1, y, V, I:
s-1 = q1 (V, S, t, …) = q1(X)
y = q2 (V, S, t, …) = q2(X)
(4)
V = q3 (V, S, t, …) = q3(X)
I = q4 (V, S, t, …) = q4(X)
Having substituted these dependences (or the current values of performance
criteria calculated on their base) into objective function one can obtain the analytical
dependence of objective function on the input variables (or calculate its current
value):
2
æ q ( X ) - qi 0 ö
÷÷ = f ( X )
f (Q) = å ci × çç i
q
i0
ø
è
i =1
k
(5)
So we represent the objective function as the function of explanatory system
variables.
Contrariwise a number of constraints are imposed on the cutting process which
is conditioned on technology, physics and mechanics of the cutting process. Their
number and form are determined separately in each specific case; they can possess
both simple and rather complex form of dependences. The most frequent are the
constraints of the following type.
1. Feed limitations
Depth of cut in terms of cutting equipment capabilities cannot exceed the
following range:
S ≥ Smin и S ≤ Smax
(6)
2. Cutting speed limitations
Cutting speed value in terms of cutting equipment capabilities cannot exceed
the range defined by the minimal and maximal spindle rpm:
V ³ Vmin =
p × d × nmin
p × d × n max
and V £ V max =
.
60
60
(7)
Besides these simple limitations the cutting process can be influenced in each
specific case by the constraints connected with process physics and technology
possessing as a rule complex pronounced non-linear character: e.g. limitations of
drive power, cutting tool strength, temperature in the cutting zone, cutting forces etc.
So in the general case we have linear and non-linear limitations imposed on
the improvement process:
ìïh j ( X ) = 0, j = 1, m
í
ïî g j ( X ) ³ 0, j = m + 1, p ,
(8)
where hj (X), gj (X) are the functions of linear and non-linear limitations.
On the base of the said the following conclusions can be drawn.
1. The objective function of the improvement system is based both on complex
dependences of performance criteria and the surface layer quality parameters as well
as on the part cutting mode. These dependences are often presented indirectly and are
non-differentiable.
2. Linear and non-linear limitations are imposed on the improvement process
in the form of equalities and inequalities which also could have complex, table or
interval form of dependences.
On this assumption we can judge that we deal with the most general case of
non-linear mathematical programming which improvement task is to minimize the
objective function f(X), XÎ En at the limitations presented in formula (8).
Based on the suggested logic of the task set it is obvious that improvement of
the objective function obtained requires application of methods of direct search with
regard to the tasks of conditional improvement.
The most effective at that is the algorithm constructed on the basis of penalty
function method applying the method of non-rigid polyhedron and called non-rigid
tolerance method. This method was taken as the basis and all the test tasks different
in objective functions and limitations were solved consistent with it.
Non-rigid tolerance method application allows improving of the values of the
objective function both due to the data obtained in the admissible points of the
solution space and due to the data obtained through certain points lying outside the
admissible region but being close to the admissible ones (further called almost
admissible points). Intervals in which limits the points can be regarded as almost
admissible are reduced in the course of the improvement process, so only admissible
points of X system are included into the limit (on drawing near to the non-linear
programming task solution sought for). Such strategy of optimizing search allows
changing of the general task through the less complex (but having the same solution)
task of minimization of the objective function, namely:
f (X), XÎ En at the limitation Ф(к)- Т(X) ≥ 0,
(9)
where Ф(к) are values of non-rigid tolerance criterion at the kth stage of the search;
Т(X) is the positively defined functional over the set of all the functions
specifying constraints (both in the form of equalities and inequalities) in the task of
improvement.
At the complete improvement of the objective function we will apply the
downhill simplex method (the method of non-rigid polyhedron), being the
development of the wide used simplex method. In this method function n of
explanatory variables is minimized with application (n + 1) of polyhedron vertices in
n-D space En. Each vertex can be identified by vector X. The vertex (point) in En in
which value of f(X) is maximal is projected through the center of gravity of the
vertices remained. Improved values of the objective function are found through
consecutive replacement of the point with the maximal value f(X) by «better» points
till the minimum f(X) is found.
As non-rigid tolerance criterion Ф the positively defined decreasing function
of point data is chosen at that the points being vertices of the non-rigid polyhedron in
En, i.e.
(
)
Ф ( k ) = Ф ( k ) X 1( k ) , X 2( k ) , ... , X n( k ) , .
(10)
Function Ф is the criterion of the tolerance for constraint violation of the task
to be solved in the course of the whole process of optimized search and moreover is
the criterion permitting to identify the moment when the improvement procedure
stops. Variants of certain choice of function Ф are numerous but the most often used
function is as follows:
Ф ( k ) = 2 × (m + 1) × t ,
Ф
(k )
ì ( k -1) m + 1 r +1 ( k )
ü
× å X i - X r( +k )2 ý ,
= min íФ
,
r + 1 i =1
î
þ
where t is value defining the dimensions of initial polyhedron:
m is the number of constraints in the form of equalities;
th
X i(k ) is vector specifying position of the i polyhedron vertex;
(11)
(12)
r = (n - m) is the number of DOF for the objective function f(X) thereby if r<2,
then r = 2 is taken;
X r( +k )2
is vector specifying location of the vertex corresponding with the center
of gravity of polyhedron at n = r;
k = 0, 1, ... is the number of fully completed stages of calculation procedure;
Ф(k-1) is value Ф at the previous (k - 1)th stage of the search.
On application of the downhill simplex method the size of non-rigid
polyhedron is reduced at the approach to the required point; in the limit the complete
degeneracy of polyhedron into the point X* corresponding with the task solution.
Therefore on approaching to function f(X) solution value Ф(k) decreases gradually
Ф(0) ³ Ф(1) ³ ¼ ³ Ф(k) ³ 0 and we have in the limit lim Ф(k) = 0
x® x *
Optimization search has to be continued until Ф(k) is not less than the positive
number chosen e.
We present functional Т(Х) in the following form
1
u +1
æ u +1
ö2
H ( X ) = ç å h 2j ( X ) + åU j × g 2j ( X ) ÷ ,
i =1
è i =1
ø
(13)
where Uj is Heaviside functional possessing the following property:
Uj = 0 at gj(X) ³ 0;
Uj = 1 at gj(X)< 0.
So the functional Т(Х) is root of sum-of-squares of functions specifying
complete collection of broken constraints of the task, at that at any coordinate vector
X inequality Т(Х) ³ 0 is observed, besides for any infeasible point Т(Х) > 0.
General scheme of algorithm operation looks as follows: as optimization
search progresses value Ф(k) decreases which results in contraction of the region of
almost admissible points. At the given Ф(k) in the point X(k+1) one of the variants is the
case.
1. Т (X(k+1)) £ Ф(k). In this case point X(k+1) is either admissible or almost
admissible and corresponding relocation can be regarded as permitted.
2. Т (X(k+1)) > Ф(k). In this case point X(k+1) is regarded as infeasible: it is
necessary to find another point instead of X(k+1) either lying closer to the permissible
region boundaries or appertaining to it. One of the methods is decreasing H(X(k+1)) till
the condition is met
Т (X(k+1)) £ Ф(k)
(14)
Algorithm convergence is provided for the following reasons:
1. Non-increasing behavior of criterion of admissibility is provided by the
construction technique of Ф(k) itself.
2. When the task solution is internal point (in the absence of constraints in the
form of equalities) algorithm convergence is guaranteed by virtue of properties of
non-rigid polyhedron to degenerate into the point only on obtaining of function
optimum f(X). Under these circumstances H (X) does not influence the algorithm
convergence as at the final stages of the search process points Xi(k) (i = 1, ... , r+1) are
internal and thereby H(X(k)) = 0, whence it follows that the limiting conditions in the
form of inequalities are satisfied for all X(k) and the task does not contain active
limitations.
3. When the optimum is obtained in the point being internal the algorithm
convergence is provided due to the following condition
Ф(k)- Т (X) ³ 0.
(15)
Non-rigid polyhedron cannot degenerate into the point until such improved
value f (X(k+1)) is found for which Ф(k)-Т(X(k+1)) ³ 0.
One of the advantages of the non-rigid tolerance algorithm is that the degree of
constraint breaking decreases gradually on approaching to the task solution sought
for. Since at the first stages of search the task limitations should be satisfied quite
approximately and only in the course of the search close by the solution sought for
more accuracy is required; in the course of optimization computational volumes
reduce considerably in comparison with other methods.
Another advantage of this algorithm is also that it is convenient to apply Ф(k)
as criterion to complete the search. It is sufficient to continue the optimization search
until Ф(k) is less than some arbitrary chosen positive number e. On completion of the
search when Ф(k) £ e, total value of functions connected with constraints broken does
not exceed e. Consequently also value of each limitation violation does not exceed e.
If in the process of optimization search under improvement of objective
function values f(X) some point X(k) provided to be infeasible from the point of view
of criterion Ф(k) then it is necessary to identify another point which could be
classified either as the admissible one or as the almost admissible one. Finding of this
point is implemented at the expense of minimization of Т(X(k)) over the set of all
points of the solution space; thereby the process of Т(X(k)) minimization proceeds
until the inequality (14) is fulfilled.
To minimize Т(X) by downhill simplex method it is required to construct a
new polyhedron in the neighborhood of infeasible point X(k), which vertices we will
specify through Wi(S), (i = 1, ... , n+1), where s is the number of completely
accomplished stages of the process of Т (X) minimization. These (n + 1) vertices
have to be chosen so that n of vectors corresponding to any subset of n of vertices are
line independent. In the practice it is sometimes more convenient to construct a
regular polyhedron taking as the reference point X(k).
Search path obtained through Т(X) minimization by the downhill simplex
method depends on dimensions and orientation of initial polyhedron in the task
space. In the case when its dimensions are small in comparison with those in the
permissible region the search path does almost not depend on orientation of the
polyhedron in Еn and the search path resembles the path obtained by the steepestdescent method. In the algorithm of non-rigid tolerance the value characterizing the
size of initial polyhedron is defined by empirical formula t = 0,05Ф ( k ) in the course
of Т(X) minimization at the kth stage of the search. Further the procedure of finding of
admissible or almost admissible point looks as follows.
At each vertex of the polyhedron obtained value Т(X) is calculated, i.e. Т( X̂ ( 0)
)(i = 1, ... , n + 1) are defined. By downhill simplex method Т(X) is minimized. At
the end of each sth stage the minimal of values H( Xˆ ( S ) ) (i = 1,..., n+1), i.e. Т ( Xˆ 1( S )
), are compared with Ф(k). If Т( Xˆ 1( S ) ) < Ф(k), then the determined point is either
admissible or almost admissible. If Т( Xˆ 1( S ) ) > 0, infeasible point Xi(k) is substituted
for point Xˆ 1( S ) and minimization stops. If Т( Xˆ 1( S ) ) = 0 and m = 0, then prior to
come back to object function minimization interpolation is accomplished in result of
which в one assures that point Xi(k) = Xˆ 1( S ) is not too remote from the boundaries
specified by the limitations broken directly before point Xˆ 1( S ) has been found.
If Т( Xˆ 1( S ) ) ³ Ф(k), value is calculated
E
(S )
1 ìï n +1
=
× íå Т Xˆ i( S ) - Т Xˆ n( S+)2
n + 1 ïî i = 0
[(
) (
ü
)] ïý ,
2
ïþ
(16)
where Т( Xˆ т( S+)2 ) is value Т(X) in the center of gravity of polyhedron at the sth stage of
Т(X) minimization. If ES > 10
-7
then minimization goes on at the (s + 1)th stage.
Otherwise the non-rigid polyhedron is close to degenerate into the point whereas
admissible or almost admissible points have not been found. In this case the
algorithm keeps operating implementing the search in each direction being parallel to
axes of coordinates. Beginning from Xˆ 1( S ) , X̂ 1* is defined corresponding to the
minimal value Т(X) at shifting in the direction being parallel to the axis x1; then
beginning from X̂ 1* , X̂ 2* is determined etc. this procedure continues until Xˆ *j is
defined for all n of index value j. The aim is to identify the interval l0 containing the
point with the minimal value Т(X) in the direction chosen. Further search is
accomplished by the method of golden section /
/. The search goes on until the
length of the interval containing point Xˆ *j decreases till the value less or equal to
0,01×Ф(k). On completion of each one-dimensional search checking up is executed in
order to clarify whether condition Т( Xˆ *j ) £ Ф(k) is fulfilled for the new value Т( Xˆ *j ). If
the condition is fulfilled Xi(k) is substituted for Xˆ *j and Т(X) minimization procedure
stops. If on completion of the search in each of coordinate directions one failed to
define admissible or almost admissible point then point Xˆ т* is chosen as reference
point for construction of a new polyhedron having large initial dimensions and a new
search of minimum H(X) is undertaken. If in result of triple repetition of the whole
procedure admissible or almost admissible points are still not found minimization
search stops and is classified as ineffectual.
In the case when optimization task contains limitations only in the form of
inequalities downhill simplex method may turn up to be ineffective to minimize Т(X).
In this case square-law interpolation as to internal and external points is implemented
by which means point В этом случае по отношению к внутренним и внешним
точкам осуществляется X is found lying close to the boundary specified by the
broken limitations.
Proceeding to the search of objective function f(X) by means of non-rigid
tolerance it is required to know the initial point X(0), the number of DOF for the task
r, initial dimension of non-rigid polyhedron t and value Ф(0).
Procedure of finding vertices Xi(0) (i = 1, ... , r + 1) is implemented according
to the following scheme. Ф(0) = 2× (m + 1) × t are calculated and value Т(X) is found
in the initial point X(0). If Т(X(0)) < Ф(0), then X(0) is either admissible or almost
admissible point and initial vertices Xi(0) (i = 1, ... , u + 1) are calculated by means of
the special procedure relative to this point. If Т(X(0)) < Ф(0), then Т(X) is minimized
until admissible or almost admissible point Xi is found; it is the point that is chosen as
the reference one at the construction of the polyhedron.
Algorithm stops its operation under two conditions.
1. When Ф(k) £ e. In this case the search is regarded as accomplished and is
classified as successful (it is the situation that comes up in the majority of cases).
2. When the admissible or almost admissible point cannot be identified by
means of the said search procedure the current search is completed then the starting
point is substituted and/or one turns to other characteristics of the polyhedron, i.e. to
the greater value e.
At applying the developed optimization algorithm by non-rigid tolerance
method in the practice in a number of cases (in particular in objective function
calculation defined through parameters of surface layer quality of the surface to be
cut) untimely program halts are possible connected with application of forbidden
mathematical operations. E.g. a number of formulas of the mathematical model of
cutting process have such exponential expressions as V1.5, S-0.034 etc. Obviously the
base of such expression must be a non-negative number. However in the course of
optimization search by means of non-rigid tolerance method assigning optimization
variables is possible through the values lying outside the admissible region of values
and therefore process variables can take on negative values also. To avoid such
conflict situations transition to the new interim variables Z={z1, z2, ¼
zn} is
suggested connected with initial correlations in the following form
xi = exp (zi), i = 1, … n.
(17)
Owing to this transition in changing interim variables along the whole range of
real numbers initial variables will take on only positive values what completely
excludes appearance of inconsistent mathematical operations and corresponds well
orienting on engineering sense of cutting process variables (V, S, t, …).
In conclusion the following should be mentioned: application of non-rigid
tolerance method with regard to the turning process allowed solving the task of
technological process optimization by means of arrangement of an automated control
system providing for the required performance criteria at the design stage and at that
of production of GTE parts and the parts of general machinery. Based on
mathematical methods of research of non-linear control systems and processes the
system of cutting process control has been created enabling provision of performance
criteria of products as early as at the stage of mechanical processing without
expensive finishing processing methods.
References
Kozhina Т.D. Process bases of management and control of machine part
1.
performance criteria. – Rybinsk: RSATA, ООО «Format», 2001.-519 p.
2.
Bezyazychny V.F. Mathematical support of selection of technological
process conditions providing for the specified quality of mechanical processing. Data
and engineering support of quality and efficiency of mechanical processing.
Collected works of AATI. – Yaroslavl, YPI, 1985.
Kozhina Т.D., Postnov А.N., Kiselyov E.V. Automated measurement of
3.
residual stresses of the part surface layer. Surface layer quality and running ability of
aircraft engine parts. Collected works. – Yaroslavl, YPI, 1990. – pp. 122 – 126.
J21310-076
UDC 621.9
Poletaev V.A.
NEW TECHNOLOGY SOLUTIONS IMPLEMENTED IN THE COURSE
OF GTE BLADE GRINDING PROCESS AUTOMATION
Rybinsk State Aviation The paper deals with the issues of provision of the
performance criteria required for parts in mechanical engineering in terms of GTE
parts. The suggested methods to assign technological process conditions depending on
the performance criteria required is based on theoretical evidence Technical University
by P.A. Solovyev
Creep feed grinding process is the only possible method of automated largeduty gas turbine engine (GTE) blade processing for over 30 years in the RF.
This method features high engineering reliability as to processing of
geometrically-complex parts made of hard-to-grind, heat-resistant and noncorrosive
alloys; it ensures high geometrical accuracy of the surfaces processed as well as the
required quality of the surface layer: roughness; locked-up stresses; depth and degree
of work-hardened spots. [1,2]
The cut-maps applied are diverse types of the flat in-feed grinding
manufacturing scheme. Variants of the scheme are formed due to addition of different
extra reciprocal displacements of cutting and dressing tool, as well as the work piece
to be cut itself to the initial pattern.
GTE blade batch manufacturing is the area where the universally recognized
scheme of the unilateral flat in-feed grinding is mainly used. Fig. 1 illustrates an
example of the processing of that kind: unilateral profile grinding of GTE blade roots.
Fig.1. Work conformal motion scheme
for cutting, dressing tool and billet when flat in-feed grinding
The scheme originated in 1980s in the RF. The scheme makes it possible to
implement the process of creep feed grinding both in one and in several passages.
Herewith part 1, placed in the cassette 2 on the attachment 3, has to travel in the
direction Х with the speed of cutting and quick-action feed; grinding wheel 4 has to
be able to spin with the cutting speed VК and to travel in the direction Z with the
speed of cutting feed; diamond roll 5 has to spin with the dressing speed VР and to
travel normally to the wheel cutting face 4 with the dress feeding speed; diamond roll
6 has to spin with the dressing speed VР [3].
Over a long period of time (over twenty years) this cut-map and its versions
were the only possible schemes to process diverse GTE blade surfaces. That was the
profile of the grinding tool or several tools being as a rule grinding wheels with open
structure ceramic bond which determined the form of the part surface to be cut. Shape
of the longitudinal generatrix formed on the part surface was defined by the number
of simultaneously movable axes in the cutting process. Three axes X, Y, Z were
simultaneously moved. Such manufacturing capabilities of the cutting equipment
permitted processing of blade profile surfaces with linear longitudinal generatrix or
the profiled ones with low curvature of longitudinal generatrix, i.e. manufacturing
capabilities of this scheme are limited.
Versatile grinding machines with five movable axes entered the market of the
RF 10 years ago; they broad considerably application of gas turbine engine blade
manufacturing automation technology. GTE blade five-axes automated grinding is
implemented at the expense of application of the versatile cut-map given in Fig. 2.
The technological cut-map presented permits to grind almost completely all
external and internal surfaces of a nozzle blade in one part positioning. It is obtained
due to consecutive fulfillment of five operations. During the first operation (Fig.3 а)
wheel 2 grinds cylindrical surface of outer blade 4 platform wing. At that attachment
5 is placed at the angle α1 relatively vertical axis which provides for adjusting of
wheel cutting face 2 with the surface to be ground. During the second and the third
operation (Fig. 3 б, в) labyrinth platforms are serially ground with the wheel 3 at the
corresponding angles of attachment 5 inclination, i.e. α2 and α3. Each of the angles
provides for registration of different wheel cutting faces with this or that work piece
surface. Operations four and five (Fig. 3 г, д) imply application of the wheels 2 and 1,
respectively [4].
Fig.2. Scheme of turbine rotor nozzle blade processing
with a set of ceramic grinding wheels
under five-axis reciprocal displacements of part and tool:
а, б, в, г, д – grinding operations 1-5, respectively;
1, 2, 3 – profile grinding wheels; 4 – work piece; 5 – attachment; 6 – rotary
table
The cut-map like this requires ample quantity of movable axes from metalcutting equipment to provide complex reciprocal displacements of cutting tool and
work piece, as well as cutting and dressing tool in operating and setting modes.
Schemes of reciprocal displacements of multipurpose surface grinding machine with
five simultaneously movable axes are presented in Fig.3.
Fig. 3. Scheme of reciprocal displacements
of multipurpose grinding machine units:
а) frontal view; b) side view;
1 – part; 2 – work piece fixture; 3 – grinding wheel; 4 – dress roll; 5 –
dressing tool slide; 6 – grinding head slide; 7 – bed table; 8 – cross-slide; 9 –
rotary table; 10 – rotating pivot
Here part 1 is fixed in the attachment 2 placed on the rotary table 9 with the
possibility to turn around axis Z through 3600 (axis С). The table 9 is placed in its
turn on the pivot 10 with the possibility of its rotation around axis Х (axis А) through
an angle of more than ±900. The pivot 10 is mounted on the fixed base being a part of
a bed plate. Slide 7 moving along axis X is placed on the bed plate. The slide 7 is
dual as it carries the cross slide 8 moving along axis Y. The column on the cross slide
carries the cross-slide box 6. Grinding wheel 3 is mounted on the grinding cross-slide
box 6 and can move along axis Z. The wheel 3 contacts the diamond dress roller 4
constantly which is displaced by the slide 5 as to the wheel cutting face. This means
that the grinding wheel and the dressing tool can move along axis Z.
Thereby this scheme provides simultaneously for five reciprocal displacements
of the part and the tool along the axes Х, Y, Z, А and С, permitting shaping
cylindrical surfaces of any kind including those with the radius R considerably
exceeding the turning radius of the rotary table 9. In particular it results from
simultaneous displacement of the part and the tool at least along axes X and Z. To
ensure constant cutting capacity of the wheel 3 the process of its continuous dressing
is performed, i.e. in the course of grinding the roller 4 moves constantly in the
direction Z by means of the slide 5. Entry into the cutting face of the tool 3 is
fulfilled.
Such versatile cut-map is implemented in the domestic manufacturing
equipment produced by Stankovendt Type SLS-434. This equipment is a
development of a well-known layout of three-axes grinding improved at the expense
of application of advanced option (globe table) with two controllable axes А (turning
around axis X) and С (turning through 3600 around axis Z) [5]. The photo of the
globe table used in the machine SLS-434 is presented in Fig. 4.
Fig. 4. General view of the «globe table» with the layout
for processing of curvilinear surfaces in the five turbine blade unit.
Application of five controllable axes in cut-maps for turbine blade grinding
permits processing of cylindrical blade surfaces. At that the radius of convex
(external) surfaces of the blade wheel is not limited, but the diameter of the internal
surface to be shaped is limited exceptionally by the diameter of the grinding wheel
which has to be inscribed in the surface.
Here a problem of great technological concern is grinding of cam grooves at
the blade assembly and blade wheel ends, which shapes are presented Fig. 5.
а
б
Fig. 5. Cam groove on the nozzle block sector part:
а – groove shape; b – 3D-groove model
Solution of technological problem of that kind required subsequent
improvement of gas turbine engine blade manufacturing automation technology at the
expense of application (in the course of one technological procedure) of wheels with
different diameters which fulfill profile creep feed grinding in the tool rates range
from 25 m/sec to 100 m/sec. Technology of automated GTE blade end groove
processing has been developed at the ОАО «NPO «Saturn». As opposed to the
schemes presented above it includes feature-based (differentiated) processing of
single parts of the groove profile to be shaped with the wheels of different diameters,
Fig. 6.
Aluminum oxide
i di
CBN grinding wheel
h l
а
b
Fig. 6. Two-wheel differential processing of the cam groove:
а – processing of the concave curved groove wall (first step); b – processing
of the convex curved groove wall and bottom (second step)
Nozzle blade groove grinding with the wheels of different diameter is
accomplished under simultaneous reciprocal displacement of the tool and the part in
four coordinates, namely: X, Y, Z and С. The fifth coordinate (А) changes in steps,
namely: while grinding concave groove radius in the course of the whole processing
cycle the nozzle cluster takes one angle position as to axis X, and while grinding
convex groove radius it takes another one.
To process the concave curvilinear groove surface a wheel made of fused
alumina with the ceramic bond and diameter up to 500 mm is used as a cutting tool,
to process the convex curvilinear groove surface а CBN wheel with a considerably
smaller diameter (less than 200 mm) is used.
Such difference in wheel diameters depends on provision of the condition to
inscribe a circle into the groove shape. Therein application of wheels with the size of
more than 200 mm to grind the convex groove surfaces results in «overcuts» on the
concave (opposite) groove side and, correspondingly, vice versa application of
wheels with the size of more than 500 mm to grind the concave groove surfaces
results in «overcuts» on its opposite side.
Thereafter application of wheels with the size of less than 200 mm to grind the
grooves necessitated provision of high geometric accuracy of the surface to be shaped
which predetermined utility of application of CBN wheels with ceramic bond
operating under conditions of HS grinding (80÷100 m/sec).
Application of this cut-map requires subsequent improvement of technological
equipment used under conditions of automated creep feed grinding. Supplementary
wheel dressing mechanisms are required here (separately to dress wheels of fused
alumina and to dress CBN wheels), as well as the mechanism to change cutting tool
and the magazine with wheels of different diameter. Moreover grinding with the
wheels of different diameter changing in a wide range requires ensuring adjusting
spindle RPM in a broad range of rates, especially since grinding with CBN wheels is
accomplished under conditions of HS grinding.
The above requirements to improvement of technological equipment found their
way into the new model of versatile grinding machine SXS-512 produced by the
company Stankovendt, Fig.7.
Introduction of the new technological equipment at the NPO «Saturn» made it
possible to implement the technology of automated turbine blade grinding all over
external part outline, i.e. to process it completely under conditions of creep feed and
HS grinding in automatic cycle. At that 100% repeatable accuracy of the surfaces to
be ground is obtained; process scrap as to geometrical size is completely excluded.
Moreover application of CBN wheels provided for increase of grinding rate in
comparison with processing with grinding wheel rates from 25 m/sec to 80 m/sec, at
cut depth of 5÷6 mm, as well as for increased values of sliding feed from 40 mm/min
to 300 mm/min, i.e. performance rate has increased eight-tenfold.
Fig.7. General view of the multipurpose center for multispeed creep feed
grinding Stankovendt.
Summary:
1. Two main factors provide improvement of automated creep feed grinding
process technology and they are: increase of number of simultaneously movable axes
(up to five); enhancement of size range of the cutting tool applied by turns (use of the
exchange cutting tool magazines).
2. Productivity of creep feed grinding boosts at the expense of CBN wheels
application with ceramic bond which provides for grinding in the speed range of
80÷100 m/sec, i.e. ensuring transition to HS creep feed grinding.
References
1. Poletaev V.A. Gas turbine engine blade manufacturing automation
technology. М.: Machinostroyeniye, 2006 – 256 p.
2. Poletaev V.A, Volkov D.I. Turbine blade creep feed grinding. М.:
Machinostroyeniye, 2009 – 270 p.
3. Silin S.S., Leonov B.N., Khrulkov V.A. et al. Creep feed grinding
technology optimization. М.: Machinostroyeniye, 1989 – 120 p.
4. Poletaev V.A. Turbine blade process technology on grinding machines.//
Polyet, 2005, № 11, – pp. 55-57.
5. Tsvetkov E.V. Manufacturing capabilities of equipment for multi-axis
processing of nozzle assembly sectors by creep feed grinding method // Referencebook. Engineering journal, 2009. №4. – pp. 6-11.
J21310-077
UDC 669.14.021
Shatulsky А.А.
PROBLEM SOLVING AT THE INITIAL STAGE OF CASTING
PRACTICE PROJECTING FOR INVESTMENT PATTERNS OF GAS
TURBINE ENGINE BLADES MADE OF REFRACTORY ALLOYS
Federal State-Financed Educational Institution of High Professional Education
«P. A. Solovyov Rybinsk State Aviation Technical University»
Original classifications of blade-type castings as well as classifications of
ingate-feeding systems (IFS) are offered; correlation between a class of castings,
type of IFS and possible aspects of rejected material on the basis of statistical
analysis is proposed; system of selection of IFS type and calculation procedure for
process of filling-up of a mould cavity by melt, ensuring manufacture of castings with
the minimum quantity of imperfections are developed.
LOST-WAX CASTING, IFS TYPE, CASTING CLASS, CASTING PARAMETERS,
CASTINGS IMPERFECTIONS
Currently available systems of computer-aided design allow executing
qualitatively enough simulation of process of shaping of casting taking into account
the prognosis of origin of possible imperfections. Process of simulation complexity
depends greatly on quality of initial stage of projection problems solution, which is
selection of a position of casting in mould, type of ingate-feeding system (IFS) and
the assigned sizes of its elements. Now for this purpose the subsystems based on
acceptance of standard design solutions and empirical methods of calculation of IFS
sizes are used. However the former use purely qualitative criteria of selection for
acceptance of a design solution, and the latter do not allow to consider singularity of
geometry of casting. As a result due to huge variety of applied alloys, type sizes of
castings and types of ingate-feeding systems such way of projection is rather long and
demands experimental finishing that leads to unjustified prolongation terms of
projection and material spending.
For elimination of the above-stated deficiencies the theoretic-experimental way
of problem solving for the initial stage of the mentioned spectrum of castings
projection has been offered. At its creation basic studies and generalizations of the
casting houses producing blade-type castings operational activity know-how have
been accomplished in order to determine: a) spectrum of castings and applied ingatefeeding systems; b) possible imperfections of castings; c) selected parameters of
casting. It has allowed to propose original classifications of the existing castings,
applied ingate-feeding systems and arising imperfections of castings.
At the process of castings classification geometrical criteria have been chosen
as the main ones: amount of large nodes and presence of an interior concavity;
consequently at the process of ingate-feeding systems classification: amount and
position in inner space of runner ingates (collectors), presence of collective or
individual lost heads, direction of motion of melt at shape filling-up.
Thus, all the castings have been divided into 4 classes:
Class 1 - with two large nodes without interior concavity;
Class 2 - with two large nodes with interior concavity;
Class 3 - with one large node without interior concavity;
Class 4 - with a large node and interior concavity.
Ingate-feeding systems also have been divided into 3 types:
IFS I - with two horizontal runner ingates;
IFS II - with the upper horizontal runner ingate;
IFS III - with the lower runner ingate and the upper lost head;
Classification of imperfections (fig. 1) was completed with the following
methods: expert estimation, the principal components, correlative and cluster
analysis; detection of reasons of their occurrence was carried out by method of an
expert estimation, by analysis of temporary dynamic rows, etc. All the mentioned
allowed to offer physically justified and statistically significant classification of
casting imperfections by manufacture stages on which they arise or by reasons
causing their occurrence/1/.
Parametric criteria were proposed for the exposition of geometrical
singularities of castings and the prognosis of probability of imperfections origin at a
stage of filling-up of a mould cavity by melt. Simulation of process of filling-up of a
mould cavity, using of pair correlations and expert estimation methods has allowed to
determine that from more than fifty offered imperfections of the various combined
parameters, characterizing casting sizes and a casting conditions, the most significant
is the criterion of Кf representing a ratio of average width of blade airfoil portion dave
to its length lп
Кf = dave / lп
As a result of handling of the industrial data after manufacturing of more than
sixty type sizes of blade-type castings and experimentally, by method of trial
castings, it was proved that alternation of rejected castings level for various IFS types
depends on value of parametric criterion of Кf, and for the same casting increase of
amount of the imperfections, arising at a stage of filling-up of a mould cavity by melt
while using different IFS types, takes place with different velocities (fig. 2), so there
exist some critical values of a Кf below which use of this or that type of a ingatefeeding system becomes simply inexpedient due to impossibility to receive a suitable
casting.
Basic groups of imperfections common for blade-type castings
Group I
Imperfections arising at a stage
of filling-up of a mould cavity
by melt
Subgroup I
Clog
Oxide layer
Slag inclusion
Subgroup II
Junction (cold lap)
Non-fill
Group II
Imperfections arising at a stage
of solidification of casting
Group III
Imperfections included at a
stage of manufacturing of a
casting mould
Subgroup I
Microporosity
Clink
Glow
Subgroup I (arising at a stage of filling-up
of a mould cavity by melt)
Puncture
Rod demolition
Subgroup II
Structural
disparity
Subgroup II (arising at a stage of
solidification of casting)
Distortion
Wall thinning
Off-ratio conditions
Layer separation
Subgroup III (other imperfections)
Model imperfection
Spalling
Overcut
Figure 1. Classification of imperfections for blade-type castings
In other words, with increase of length and thinning-down of a blade airfoil
portion level the amount of imperfections of the castings, fabricated with use of a
gating system of type I (that is with two horizontal runner ingates) is augmented
much faster than for the similar casting fabricated with use of a gating system of type
III with the lower runner ingate and the upper individual lost head.
60
Defected castings, %
50
40
30
20
10
0
0,015
0,02
0,025
Parametric test,
0,03
К2
Figure. 2 Quantitative difference of defective blade-type castings depends
on various types of gating systems (1 - gating system of type III , casting of class
II ; 2 - gating system of type I , casting of class II )
It has been fixed that during simulation of process of filling-up of a mould
cavity by melt for castings of classes I and II and ingate-feeding systems of types II
and III at the lower supply of melt in a casting mould concavity non-uniformity of
distribution of velocities depending on blade airfoil portion cut may occur (fig. 3a, b),
and also formation of several characteristic zones (fig. 3c, d) on length of blade
airfoil portion may be observed: initial, located in the lower part of a blade airfoil
portion, laminar - in the mean part and turbulent - at the top.
3
2
1
c) - Re = 250
d) - Re = 600
а) - (dmax-dmin) > 2 b) - (dmax-dmin)
<1,5
Fig.3 Character of fluid motion in a casting mould concavity
Availability and expansion of these zones influences the amount of arising
imperfections of castings and depends on the parameters of a casting described by
value of a Reynolds criterion, type of a ingate-feeding system, casting class, casting
size, and parametric criterion of a Кf (see Table 1). Similar explorations also have
been conducted for other types of ingate-feeding systems and classes of castings. The
result was the following: differentiation of castings by groups of complexity and
definition of Reynolds criterion critical values for each group (see Table 2). The
mentioned data proves minimum quantity of imperfections at a stage of filling-up of a
mould cavity by melt /2/.
Table 1
Correlation between values of a Reynolds criterion, parametric criterion К2 and
level of a rejected material of castings by various type sizes
IFS Casting
type
class
I
I
I
I
I
I
Кf
0,040
0,040
0,040
0,040
0,028
0,028
0,028
0,020
0.020
0,020
dave,
m
0,0030
0,0030
0,0030
0,0030
0,0045
0,0045
0,0045
0,0060
0,0060
0,0060
w
m/s
0,05
0,10
0,15
0,20
0,05
0,1
0,15
0,05
0,10
0,15
Re
250
500
750
1000
375
750
1125
500
1000
1500
Defected castings
(filling-up stage), %
7,3
7,8
8,5
9,4
11,6
14,7
16,8
13,9
25,4
34,6
The derived classifications of castings, ingate-feeding systems, parametric
criterion have allowed to offer the updated technique /3,4/ of IFS type selection for
particular casting considering singularities of its shape and probability of
imperfections occurrence at a stage of filling-up of a mould cavity by melt as well as
at a stage of casting solidification. The estimation and selection of a design solution
were made by means of aspect objective function looking as follows:
Yi =
n
xi
å
i
=1
× ki ,
for which sufficient number of criteria xi, influencing quality and reliability of
the solution and value of weighting coefficients ki should be defined.
For a problem solution the system engineering method has been used. It
consists of exposition of processes and plants by system performances, such as
quality structure of a plant and a gang of its informational indications and functional
links between them. Analysis of blade-type moulding technology of castings proves
that for the exposition of ingate-feeding type selection system four levels of
hierarchical structure are sufficient (fig. 4).
Table 2
Castings complexity groups and critical values of criterion Re
IFS
type
Casting
class
I
I
III
III
III
I
II
I
II
III
Blade-type castings complexity groups
simple
average complexity
Complex
Кf
Recrit
Кf
Recrit
Кф
Recrit
>0,035
>0,035
>0,027
>0,027
>0,027
1000
800
1000
800
1000
0,035>К2>0,025
0,035>К2>0,025
0,027>К2>0,020
0,027>К2>0,020
0,027>К2>0,020
750
700
750
700
750
<0,025
<0,025
<0,020
<0,020
<0,020
500
500
500
500
500
All М1 set of blade-type castings is concentrated at the first level, this set is
completely fabricated by casting method on investment patterns. At the second level
М1 set is divided into four М2 subsets, each corresponding to one of castings classes.
At the third level М2 subsets are divided into М3 subsets which include castings of the
corresponding type size determined by parametric criteria of a Кf. At the fourth level
each of М3 subsets is subdivided into М4 subsets which include castings fabricated
with use one IFS type, characterized by metal utilization factor (MUF), estimated
rejected material level and technological effectiveness of the unit.
Thus, the castings subset of each i-th level of hierarchical structure is defined
by constant (casting method, alloy brand and mould material) and variable
(dimensional performances and geometrical singularities) informational indications,
characterizing functionality of structural unit in hierarchical structure. Between
structural units of levels there exist certain co-relations causing join of lowest levels
structural units into the units of higher levels. For the purposes of casting techniques
projection the most important are those that characterize relative positioning of
structural units. E.g., selection of a ingate-feeding system type is possible only after
the casting positioning in the mould is determined, etc. It is important that any casting
from Мi set should be relegated to only one structural unit at the given level. Input
data includes casting input information (main dimensions, alloy type and aspects,
appropriation) and are set immediately from the draft; it considerably simplifies
system operation .
Blade-type castings set
Castings,
class I
Kf < Kcrit
GFS I
GFS III
Castings,
class II
Kf » Kcrit
GFS I
Castings,
class III
I
Castings,
class IV
III
Kf > Kcrit
GFS III
GFS IV
II
GS III
IV
Block parameters: technological effectiveness, MUF,
probable rejected material %, block weight, block
dimensions, parametric test
Fig 4. Hierarchical structure for IFS type selection (on an example of class
I castings)
Casting class is to be defined on the basis of analysis of its drawing, then value
of parametric criterion is to be calculated as well as possible types of gating system
for which, by applying of known empirical methods, the approximate sizes of basic
elements are subsequently calculated followed by selection of unit arrangements. At
unit arrangement stage limitations on its size (determined by sizes of an interior
concavity of a vacuum holding-melting furnace preheater), and the mass (determined
by capacity of batch induction furnace) are to be introduced.
For the purpose of casting discerning (that is definition of its position in the
system of classifications) the dictionary of indications necessary for the exposition of
castings classes has been developed.
For solution of such a problem in the proposed system of discernment the
logical indications determined by simple propositions like "yes" and "no" were used
as well as quantitative indications determined by values of parametric criterion of a
Кf, that is Кf Кf..crit , К2> Кf.crit , Кf » Кf.crit.
After selection of an optimal ingate-feeding system construction for particular
casting follows refinement of sizes of its separate elements and assignment of key
casting parameters, such as mould temperatures, "ladle" melt expenditure, casting
temperatures. For this problem solution the original technique based on methods of
physical simulation and mathematical analysis has been offered.
At the upper supply of melt with use of ingate-feeding systems of type II at
manufacture of castings classes III and IV (as displayed at fig. 5), as a result of
physical simulation it has been fixed that in process of magnification of melt
expenditure (V) from the ladle pot, and, hence, magnitude of pressure head and metal
movement rate in channels to a casting mould, initially the following processes are
observed:
- spreading of melt along the edges of a mould cavity, and then origination of
flow-cross-section stream that is accompanied by formation of significant amount of
imperfections (clogs, flux contaminations) in the central part of a blade airfoil
portion;
- forming of solid front (minimum quantity of imperfections in casting);
- stream partition on separate drops that also leads to magnification of
imperfections amount (clogs, oxidation film).
By reduction of the mathematical model which includes the Navier-Stokes
equations and entirety with consideration of capillary forces to a dimensionless form
it has been proved that character of melt motion can be described with Reynolds (Re
= w l / ν), Weber (We = ρ w2 l / σ) and Froud (Fr=w2/gl) criterion,
where w - average flow rate of melt in a mould cavity;
l - characteristic size of the of a casting mould channel (used width of
the channel δf);
σ - melt surface-tension.
a
b
.
-6
3
а - V < 3 10 m /s, w<0,15 m/s
b - V > 3.10-6 m3/s, w>0,2 m/s
c
d
.
-6
3
c - V = 8,8 10 m /s, w=0,19 m/s
d - V > 19,8.10-6 m3/s, w=0,44 m/s
Fig 5. Character of fluid motion in a mould cavity.
For development of quantitative associations between parameters of casting
and length L of a compact part of the stream, ensuring filling-ups of a mould cavity
by an one-dimensional stream physical simulation of process has been conducted, at
which experimental data was processed in the above-stated numbers of similarity.
Supposing that physical properties of an alloy in the range (from temperature of
casting to a liquidus temperature) remain invariable, and flow rate of melt w on cut of
a mould cavity width f is constant on the basis of generalization of experimental
data by method of regression analysis the following equations of similarity are
received: For the upper-lateral melt supply
(0,005>df>0,001 m; 0,5>w>0,01m/s)
L = 0,39 . Wedж 0,1 . Frdж0,32 . Redж0,4
(R2=0,946)
For the upper-top supply
(0,005>df>0,001 m; 0,5 >w>0,01 m/s)
L = 0,5. Wedж0,11.Frdж0,33 . Redж0,4
(R2=0,962)
Selection of an aspect of function was defined by value of factor of
determination R2, and adequacy of the offered equations has been confirmed both by
results of analysis of real technology of casting parameters and by method of trial
castings of several batches of castings, with alternation of casting parameters in
necessary breaking points which are mentioned in Table 3. Thus, knowing length of a
blade airfoil portion and equating it L it is possible to discover values of a velocity
and, hence, expenditure from a ladle pot (which defines it).
IFS
type
II
II
Table 3
Influence of casting conditions on the level of castings rejected material
(for blade-type castings)
Castings Stream compact part
Real blade airfoil
Rejected castings at
class
length L, mm
portion length, mm
filling-up stage, %.
40
35
5,3
III
52
56
9,8
59
78
17,3
45
32
6,8
IV
63
64
8,4
64
83
15,1
For the analysis of moulds casting conditions influence at manufacturing
process of castings classes I and II when using ingate-feeding systems of types I and
III on quality of castings by professor V.V.Chistjakov's method circuit analysis of
conditions of moulds casting has been conducted /5/. It has allowed to draw a
conclusion that procedure of conditions selection for particular casting and mould is
reduced to definition of area of fillability (fig. 6), boundaries of which can be selected
by casting key parameters (melt flow rate, casting temperature, mould temperature).
The left boundary is defined by minimum possible melt flow rate, below which
formation of junctions and cold shut is observed; it is controlled by stream front
temperature, and the right boundary - by max possible for the given IFS class and
type casting velocity, determined by critical value of Reynolds criterion, calculated
for various casting type sizes in Table 1.
К2
SC
MC
HC
.
К2
I
II
C2
B2
wmin (tфmin,tзmin)
III
C2
wmax (tфmax,tзmax)
Fig 6. To definition of fillability area for castings manufactured of
refractory alloys (I - area of cold shuts and junctions; II - fillability area; III clogs and flux contaminations area; SC - castings of simple complexity by
configuration; MС - castings of mean complexity by configuration; HС castings of high complexity by configuration (by Кf criterion).
Having assumed that process of filling-up of a mould cavity by melt takes
place by abreast stages and basing on the principle of superposition we will describe
it mathematically by set of equations including: the outflow of melt from a ladle pot
of a holding-melting furnace (1); melt motion in channels of a gating system or a
mould cavity (2); increase of kish crust on walls of the mould (3); stream front
temperature decrease on the mould parts (4).
Having presumed that the melt flow rate, its physical properties on i-segment
of the mould as well as mould temperature are constant, and transmission of warmth
from a melt stream happens only through a lateral area of the semi-infinite form, the
mathematical model becomes:
p × R2 3 1 - k 2
a;
V1 =
(1 + k ) 3 × cos 2 a
HR 2 1 - k 2
(p - j + 0,5 sin 2j )a ;
V2 =
sin 2a × (1 + k ) 2
æ H (1 + m × tga )
ö
- 1÷
R × tga
è
ø
j = arccosç
(1)
1
m =
1+
n
xi
å
i
;
=1
Vi = Fуз × wуз ;
Fуз
wi =
wуз mi
Fi
2bф ( t к - t фн ) t
=
eМ
р
p rж L
(2)
;
(3)
ö
- lai
÷÷ + t фн ,
(
/
\
)
×
×
×
+
×
1
c
b
b
w
r
d
è м м i
м
ф
i ø
æ
t i = (t зал - t фн ) / ехрçç
(4)
tф = const ; tм /y=0/ = tзал = сonst; ti /y=y1 / > tL ,
where V1, V2 - melt expenditure from a ladle pot, m3/s; b - vertical angle of
ladle pot walls inclination, rad; H - ladle pot height, m; R - ladle pot radius, m; a ladle pot angle of rotation, rad/s; m - flow coefficient; xi - system resistance on i-th
filling-up segment; Vi - expenditure on i-th filling-up segment, m3/s; F уз - narrow IFS
sectional area, m2; wуз, wi - flow rate of melt in narrow IFS sectional area and on i-th
filling-up segment, km/s; tзал, tф - initial casting and mould temperatures, оС; li - i-th
mould cavity filling-up segment length, m; di - i-th mould cavity filling-up segment
width, m; cм, rм - specific heat capacity, J/(kg K) and a metal density, kg/m3 (in
liquid state); bм, bф- metal and mould thermal accumulation factors, a W с0,5 / (м2K);
L - latent crystallization heat, J/kg; ai - heat-away factor on i-th mould segment,
W/(м2K); k =ctg b× tg a.
Оn the grounds of generalizations of experimental data regressional equations
have been received, which describe modification of hydraulic resistance magnitude
[depending on] casting mould channel sizes and casting conditions applied for the
given casting type.
So, for round cut pouring ingates, (5 >V> 0,1 l/s; 50< Hст < 300 mm; 10<dст<
30 mm, 0,02 <w< 0,2 m/s):
xст =350.Hст0,95 .dст1,17
(R2=0,957)
for casting of rectangular cut vertical element (5 >V>0,1 l/s; 50< L <300mm; 1<
d <15 mm; 0,02< w <0,2 m/s):
xэо= 0,41.L1,49.d -0,75
(R2=0,916)
Adequacy of the mentioned equations has been proved by comparison of
calculated and experimental data for the moulds applied in real industrial conditions
for manufacture of blade-type castings on values of correlation factors (for ingatefeeding systems of type I R=0,98; for ingate-feeding systems of type III R=0,97 at
fiducial probability Р=0,95). Definition of a heat-exchange coefficient value (from
melt to mould surface) was conducted experimentally by method of local simulation.
The received experimental data for alloys of JS type (Russian version: ЖС, 0,01 <Pr
<0,1) were calculated in similarity numbers that has allowed to receive the similarity
equations for various conditions of melt flow in mould cavities:
Redж <500
R2=0,9
Nudж = 0,43. Redж 0,4 .Prж 0,33
86
1000 > Redж >
R2=0,9
Nudж = 0,26. Redж 0,52 .Prж 0,33
79
500
Redж > 1000
R2=0,9
Nudж = 0,17. Redж 0,7 .Prж 0,49
62
Selection of function type was defined by value of determination factor R2, and
adequacy - by comparison of calculated and experimental data. At calculation by the
offered mathematical model of filling-up the concavity of variable cut casting mould
was divided across the width into stratums, various width di, and throughout the
height into separate sites (segments) li that allowed to calculate distribution of
velocities wi, j and temperatures ti, j on stream front breadth for several cuts.
In order to implement the offered technique with using of Gauss-Seidel method
the corresponding algorithm of optimum parameters selection for both casting and
ingate-feeding system has been developed, as well as the corresponding software,
which includes 4 units:
- The first ensures input of information regarding the designed object,
including data concerning the alloy brand, casting working conditions, its main
dimensions. In other words, that is information which can be received immediately
and directly from the casting drawing;
- The second provides solution for selection of a) casting positions in mould,
and b) gating system type. Input information for it is a) casting class and b)
dimensions determined by value of parametric criterion Кф;
- The third ensures conducting of thermal calculation of mould cavity
fillability. At this stage casting is dissected into separate elements of constant cut and
for each one distribution of temperature of stream front is calculated. If in any
element temperature becomes below the alloy liquidus temperature, or melt flow rate
exceeds greatest possible (restricted by critical value of Reynolds criterion) adjusting of values of initial parameters or gating system dimensions is carried out,
and calculation is iterated once again. As a result of function minimization tфп =f (w,)
we receive best values of summarized square of gating system elements, in particular
SFуз=Fпит which ensures obtaining of casting with minimum level of imperfections;
- The fourth is intended for development of a working production schedule and
registration of a technological information map, which contains all necessary
information about casting process in accordance with GOST requirements.
Calculation results are presented in form of technological information map or casting
master schedule maps, which also include all necessary technological information.
Examples of distribution of velocities and stream front temperatures
calculations are presented at Fig 7.
1448
Temperature, C
1448
1446
1444
1442
1440
1446
1444
1442
1440
1438
Channel caliber, mm
2
2,
20
2,
62
2,
96
3,
15
3,
45
3,8 4,2 3,7 3,4 3,1 2,80 2,4
3,
65
1436
1438
3,
60
Temperature, C
1450
Channel caliber, mm
a)
b)
a) - stream front temperatures at the height of 50 mm from an airfoil shroud
platform;
b) - stream front temperatures at the height of 100 mm from an airfoil shroud
platform.
D - experimental points received by method of tense thermocouples
Figure 7. Calculated values of velocities and temperatures distribution in
a casting mould concavity at its filling-up with melt
CONCLUSIONS:
1. Parametric criteria for exposition of geometrical forms and sizes of shaped
castings are offered, the possibility of their application for imperfections formation
probability prognosis at a stage of filling-up of a mould cavity by melt as well as at
the stage of decision-making on IFS type selection is proved.
2. Common regularities of melt flow in channels of a casting mould of variable
cut are determined, reasons of imperfections formation, typical for a stage of fillingup of a mould cavity by melt are fixed.
3. Existence of area of the guaranteed fillability for castings of blade-type,
fabricated by a casting method on investment patterns is proved, boundaries of this
area are justified, mathematical models of process of mould cavity filling-up
(including conservation laws and criteria of hydrodynamics and castings quality),
superimposing limitations on forms casting conditions are formulated.
4. The application package of computer-aided design of the ingate-feeding
systems, including solutions for initial stages of projection, problems of calculation of
velocity fields and stream front temperatures, selection of optimum parameters of a
casting as well as gating system parameters which can be used for creation of parent
version before simulation of casting process shaping is developed.
References
1. Shatulsky A.A., Izotov V. A., Akutin A.A., Chibirnova J.V. "Mould cavity
melt filling-up process simulation", Zagotovitelnye proizvodstva v mashinostroenii
(Procuring manufactures in machine industry). - 2007, №8. - p. 24-29
2. Shatulsky A.A., Chibirnova J.V. "Perfecting of design procedure for
parameters of casting on investment patterns", Zagotovitelnye proizvodstva v
mashinostroenii (Procuring manufactures in machine industry), - 2007. - №4. - p. 2 6.
3. Moisseev V.S., Neustruev A.A. "Methodology of computer-aided ingatefeeding systems design" // Liteinoe proizvodstvo (Foundry manufacture), 1992. №12. - p. 9.
4. Shatulsky A.A. "Design automation at manufacture of superduty castings of
GTE", Vestnik RGATA imeni P.A. Solovyova (RGATA named after P.A.Solovyov
Bulletin), №2 (12).-2007. - p. 140-153.
5. Chistyakov V. V., Shatulsky A.A. "Theory of filling-up of moulds with
melt", M: Mashinostroenie (М: Machine industry), 1995, p. 191
J21310-078
UDC:621.778.1-423.04
Danenko V.F., Ponkratova G.V.,
Mishchuk H.E., Gultsev E.O.
CALIBRATION PROFILE Z-SHAPED WIRE
Volgograd state technical University
In this work the method of calibration profile at rolling зетобразной wire of
round billet. It is shown that the strain distribution in the cross section profile of the
passages is proportional to the relative wringing line makes better use of the metal
plasticity cold deformation and reduce tool wear.
Keywords: calibration, profile, wire, rope, rolling, the relative compression,
square, line, pass, broadening.
Z-shaped wire used during the formation of both internal and external layers of
ropes of closed design. Design ropes of closed design ensures a smooth, smooth
support surface necessary for work of a number of lifting-transport mechanisms, and
a
high
degree
of
filling
metal
cross-section
of
the
rope.
Manufacturing profile cold deformation of round billet, accompanied by large
variations deformation, connected with the distinction of the form of the crosssections of the source and destination of the product, which causes difficulties when
calibrating profile. These difficulties when determining the size of the serial number
of transition sections of rolled profile eliminated replacement relative profile
compression on the square q = 1 - (d1 / d 0 ) 2 of the relative compression on line on any
of the diametrical cross sections e = (d 0 - d1 ) / d 0 , where d 0 and d1 - the start and end
diameter
of
the
wire,
respectively.
Dependence
e = f (q )
is
e = 1- 1- q
written
(1)
The dependence (1) allows the determination of the compression according to
lines e for shaped sections, according to admissible reductions by space q when
handling
the
pressure
of
a
round
metal.
Rolling зетобразного profile is accompanied by a broadening of the metal in
the areas adjacent to the connector of the rolls. The broadening of the metal is
characterized by a parameter K = Db / Dh = (b1 - b0 ) /(h0 - h1 ) , where Db and Dh - the
absolute broadening and absolute compression, respectively. When rolling on a
smooth barrel (for example, in the manufacture of tape lamination) ratio K = 0, 70
(its maximum values reach 0, 80). At rolling in calibers, where broadening
constrained, K = 0, 20-0, 40. Asking value K , making b0 = d 0 ; h0 = d 0 possible to find
the
diameter
d0
of
the
original
d 0 = (b1 + Kh1 ) /(1 + K )
piece
(2)
In connection with the dependence of the values K from the configuration
caliber, carbon content of the steel, the type of grease, the tension between metal
crates and other factors, the value of the diameter d 0 ,, calculated by formula (2), it
should be clarified experimentally with the aim of obtaining a finished profile
corresponding
to
the
specified
tolerances.
For calibration profile at rolling Z-shaped wire Z5-30 of round billet draw scale
profile finished wire (Fig. 1), which was determined by means of calculation based
on the known views on the strand of her rope and deformation of the wires at the
strand [1]. Extreme points profile connected the line AB, which is divided in half and
from the point O of division conducted a circle of radius d 0 / 2 . At the narrowest point
of the profile (neck) conducted a line CD, connecting the closest point of the cervix,
and extended that line to the intersection with the circle (point G and H in Fig. 1).
Diameter d 0 was determined by the formula (2) if K =0, 5, b1 =AB=6, 99 mm, h1
=CD=2, 55 mm.
Fig. 1. Construction of calibration at rolling Z-shaped wire
Distribution of absolute reductions on line GH after each of the n passes at
rolling
(points
1-4)
carried
out
by
two
variants:
1. In proportion to the value of the relative compression on line
e h = (hn -1 - hn ) / hn -1 ;
2. In proportion to the difference of the linear sizes determined from the known
values of sectional profile for two adjacent passes
Fn -1 - Fn
condition
of
of
equality
of
the
coefficient
[2] (under the
extraction
aisles).
The output points (ends) took over the "skeleton" of the calibration. The point
with the same numbers connected smooth curves so to provide the necessary
compression
and
broadening
of
every
calibre.
Calculation of relative reductions on line GH showed that the conditions
𝜀ℎ = 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑡 of the passages in the calibration profile for option 1, in contrast to the
increasing values e h as hardening of the metal in the case of calibration profile for
option
2
(Fig.
2,a).
The computed values for the h squeeze on line GH from equation (2)
determine the values of b when broadening on line AB and, further, the relative
deformation of broadening e b the aisles. Set values e b decline with growth
Passages
Passages
a)
b)
Fig. 2. Distribution of singular linear deformations compression e h (a)
and broadening e b (b) the aisles when calculating the options 1 (curve 1) and 2
(curve 2)
Compression under the conditions and in a more significant for option 1 (Fig. 2,
b), indicating that the increase of plasticity in the final stages of rolling in case of
calibration
profile
for
this
option.
Conclusions
It is shown that the strain distribution in the cross section profile proportional
to the relative compression on line in production of Z-shaped wire rolling of round
billet makes better use of the metal plasticity cold deformation and reduces tool
wear.
Literature:
1. Avidon D.A. Main principles of development of technology of manufacture
of shaped wire. Ferrous metals: the Bulletin of the scientific and technical
information.
-
1992.
-
№6.
-
P.
33-37.
2. Ermanok M. S., Vatrushin L. S. Drawing of nonferrous metals and alloys. M: Metallurgiya, 1988. - 288 p.
J21310-079
UDC 637.33
Savchenko O.O., Bal-Prylypko L.V.
BIOTECHNOLOGY OF SOFT CHEESE PRODUCTS MADE BY METHOD
OF THERMO-ACID COAGULATION
National University of Life and Environmental Sciences of Ukraine
Kyiv, Heroiv Oborony st., 15, 03041
Organoleptic, physical and chemical indexes of test samples of soft cheese
products made by thermo-acid coagulation are investigated. Rational modes of
making cheese products from milk-vegetable mixture are grounded. Loss of protein
and fat, depending on technological regimes is given.
Keywords: soft cheese product, thermo-acid coagulation, organoleptic mass
fraction of fat, mass fraction of dry substance.
The development of new biotechnologies and the creation of new products with
directional changes in chemical composition and properties is an important area of
modern science that promotes high-quality range of products and improvement of
nutrition. Among the foods cheese is a very important element which became
worldwide product for consumer. Urgent problem for the dairy enterprises is the
introduction of biotechnology of soft cheese products using ingredients of plant
origin [1, 3, 4]. The use of milk fat substitute produced from vegetable oils makes it
possible to increase the biological value of cheese due to its enrichment in
polyunsaturated fatty acids, phosphatides, tocopherols, to reduce cholesterol content
in the finished product.
Key indicators of technology efficiency are organoleptic properties of the
finished product, which determine the demand for a new product. For producers of
cheese products economic performance of the new product is essential.
In previous studies [2] was found that the use degree of dry matter in cheese products
that are manufactured by thermo-acid coagulation, is higher than in cheese products
produced by rennet and acid-rennet coagulation.
The aim of the work was to determine technological regimes of getting soft
cheese product by thermo-acid coagulation of milk and vegetable mixture with high
organoleptic characteristics, high biological value.
During the work physical and chemical, organoleptic, and mathematical studies
were applied. For the experiments milk from one farm was used and to the statistical
reliability all experiments were performed in parallel with the same raw material for
three times every. Before the experiments qualitative assessment of the raw material
was conducted.
Experimental studies were conducted in the scientific research laboratory of
Ukrainian Education and Research Institute of Bioresources Quality and Life Safety
of National University of Life and Environmental Sciences of Ukraine with the
following process scheme.
Unskimmed milk was heated to a temperature of 45 ± 5 ° C and cream was
separated into cream separator. In got skimmed milk at a temperature of 45 ± 5 °C
dry fat free milk was added, the mixture was stirred and maintained at a temperature
of 45 ± 5 ° C for 30-40 minutes for full swelling of proteins. Then milk fat substitute
of vegetable origin was added and homogenized. Then the mixture was heated to a
temperature of coagulation. Serum with constant stirring was added into the heated
mixture with 170-200 °T of acidity of 15% quantity by weight of the mixture at a
temperature of 45-50 °C. Formed cheese mass was kept at a temperature of
coagulation for 5-15 minutes, then it was put into perforated cheese forms, serum was
separated by self-pressing and then the mas was salted and cooled down to a
temperature of 8-10 °C.
Dry fat free milk was added in the optimal quantity - 6% according to the earlier
research [1]. Coagulation temperature was maintained in the range of 80 °C to 85 °C
to maximize use of dry matter and fat [2].
Milk fat substitute was added in accordance to the calculation in an amount that
ensures production of soft cheese product by thermo-acid coagulation by weight of
fat in dry matter 45%. Accounts to normalize milk-vegetable mixture were carried
out according to the chemical composition of the raw materials given in the table.
Table
Chemical indexes of raw materials and cheese product, got from milk-vegetable
mixture
Absolute mass,
Chemical composition, %
Name of raw
material
g
Mass fracture of:
Mass, g
moisture
solids
proteins
fat
proteins
fat
1 000
91,2
8,8
3,2
0,05
32,0
0,5
60
4
96
35
0,5
21
0,3
Vegetable oil
57,1
0,1
99,9
-
99,9
-
57,0
Cheese product
221,2
60,0
40,0
16,5
18
53
57,8
Fat free milk
Dry fat free
milk
Made cheese product was characterized by the following technological
parameters: titrated acidity - 87 °T, mass fraction of fat in the serum, which was
formed - 0.2%, mass fraction of solids in the serum, which was formed - 0.6%.
Organoleptic indexes: appearance - clean surface without mechanical damage,
rather elastic, taste and smell - cheese, milk, without strange flavor and smell, texture
- rather dense, color – white, in whole weight, consistance - dough without cells.
After analyzing the results, we can conclude that finished product fits cheese
planned physical, chemical and organoleptic characteristics.
Conclusions. Studies have confirmed the production of cheese products with
combined milk and vegetable mixture consisting of fat free milk, dry fat free milk
and substitute of milk fat by thermo-acid coagulation, which quality indexes are not
lower than in soft cheeses. Replacing milk fat with milk fat substance of plant origin
makes it possible to increase the output of finished product for dry substances by 12% and decrease fat loss with serum from 0.3% to 0.2%, which can be explained by
more steady distribution of fat small dispersed clot in cheese product. Rational modes
of coagulation mixture - 80-85 ° C, the optimum number of dry fat free milk input 6% were established.
References:
1. Баль-Прилипко Л., Савченко О. Технологічна доцільність виготовлення
м’яких сирних продуктів методом термокислотної коагуляції // Продовольча
індустрія АПК. – 2012. – № 6. – с. 12—15.
2. Баль-Прилипко Л. В., Савченко О. О. Використання сухих речовин під
час виготовлення м’яких сирних продуктів //Сборник научных трудов SWorld.
Материалы международной научно-практической конференции «Современные
направления теоретических и прикладних исследований ‘2013». – Выпуск 1.
Том 10. – Одесса: КУПРИЕНКО, 2013 – с. 96-98.
3. Гутова С. В. Применение растительного сырья в производстве
термокислотных сыров // Тезисы международного симпозиума “Федеральные и
региональные аспекты государственной политики в области здорового
питания”, Кемерово.– 2002. – с. 234-236.
4. Остроумов Л.А. Исследование процесса термокислотного свертывания
молока
с
использованием
различных
коагулянтов/
Л.А.Остроумов,
В.В.Бобылин, И.А.Смирнова, С.Р.Рафалович // Хранение и переработка
сельхозсырья. – 1998. - № 7.
J21310-080
UDC 532.5: 637.134
Matiyaschuk А.N., Matiyaschuk О.V.
USE OF CAVITATION EFFECTS TO HANDLE LIQUIDS
National University of Life and Environmental Sciences of Ukraine; National
University of Food Technologies
Getting a technological effect in devices and food manufacture machines is
associated with a certain energy consumption. It can be noted that in some cases the
index of the energy input is low. In particular it applies to processes of
homogenization and dispersion in a liquid environments. It should be noted that the
these processes take place during the fluid flow through the devices of cavitation
machines. The hydromechanical effects of the environment on the disperse phase,
which is accompanied by its decomposition is happening in cavitation machines. In
most devices for homogenization and dispersion this effect is manifested in action of
cavitation effects on the technological environment. The effects above are seen in
action of cavitation bubbles on the environment field. Size cavitation effect on the
environment depends on the size and number of cavitation bubbles that "splashing"
create a particular cavitation effect [1].
The source of bubbles in the cavitation device is a layer of vapor-gas mixture,
which is formed on the edge of the cavity mixture (Fig. 1) [2]. Due to fluctuations of
tail cavity along the flow direction and in the radial direction crushing of cavity is
taking place, on the vapor-gas bubbles.
p
d
v1¥=const
k-pa
Р1¥=const
1
2
3
4
Figure 1. The scheme of the attached cavity attached
to conical cavitator: 1-cavitator; 2-flow chamber; 3connected cavity; 4 - boundary layer of cavity.
Number of cavitation bubbles formed per unit of time from the volume element
of vapor-gas mixture boundary layer from the side of cavity will depend on the speed
of the liquid and vapor mixture in the boundary layer (Fig. 2).
Figure. 2. Scheme of distribution of speed velocity profile v1x / v1¥ in the
boundary layer of the cavity from the side of liquid.
A hypothesis is proposed according to which the main source of cavitation
bubbles is pulsating boundary layer of gas-vapor mixture on the surface of the cavity.
Wave energy that is transferred along the surface of cavity is concentrated in the
boundary layer [1]. In the condition if the entire volume of the cavity boundary layer
is fully decomposed into vapor-gas bubbles the number of cavitation bubbles that
cavity generates can be determined. The distribution of cavitation bubbles in size and
number is seen in Fig. 3.
Figure. 3. The distribution of cavitation bubbles in size at different stages of
cavitation.
Formed cavitation bubbles during their collapse causing homogenization and
dispersion of food environments. Simultaneously, due to the collapse of the bubbles
with the preservation of symmetry a release of energy in the boundary layer of bubble
that surrounds it is taking place, and it initiates different effects in the flow in a
stream of liquid food environment [1, 4].
In particular, during the processing of milk with 2.7% fat content in the device
with static cavitation device (Fig. 4), there is a maximum homogenization at
cavitation stage 3 ... 3.5, and twice processing of milk in the area of cavitation. The
results of cavitation processing of milk studies is given in the table.
Table
The effectiveness of milk homogenization in the cavitation device
Environment
Processing
Relative length Times
tempreture, °С
of the treatment processing
of Homogenization
effectiveness, %
zone
Milk,
mass 47-50
0,5
2
77,2
fraction of fat
4
73,4
2,7%
10
70,8
2
83,2
4
80,0
10
74,3
2
87,5
4
82,2
10
73,0
2
85,7
4
84,1
10
83,2
2
84,0
4
82,4
10
79,2
2,5
3,0
3,5
4,0
The maximum technological effect was observed on the stage of cavitation,
which corresponds to the maximum emit power during the collapse of cavitation
bubbles [2].
Calculation of the proposed model of cavitation bubbles helps to identify energy
during their collapse, needed for some changes of substances that are in the contact
with the cavitation bubbles in a flow of cavitation devices. The following model of
cavitation bubbles field forming can be used to calculate the structures of
hydrodynamic cavitation device for handling liquids.
Figure. 4. The experimental GC scheme of cavitation installation:
1 – corpus; 2, 3, 9, 10 - valves, 4, 6 – steam gauges, 5 – vacuum gauge; 7 working area with statically placed cavitator; 8 – rotary vane pump.
References:
1. Федоткин И.М., Гулый И.С. Кавитация. Кавитационная техника и
технология, их использование в промышленности / Федоткин И.М., Гулый И.С.
— К.: Полиграфкнига, 1997.— Ч1. — 839 с.
2. Математична модель створення поля кавітаційних бульбашок у
гідродинамічному кавітаційному пристрої / Матиящук А.М., Немирович П.М.,
Хомічак Л.М., [та ін.] // Харчова промисловість.— 2000.— № 45, С.34—39.
3.
Дискретно-импульсный
ввод
энергии
в
теплотехнологиях
/
[А.А.Долинский, Б.И. Басок, С.И. Гулый и др.]. — К.: ИТТФ НАН Украины.—
1986.— 204 с.
4. Мачинский А.С. Кавитационные аппараты. / Мачинский А.С. Козюк
О.В.. Шишлов Д.Н. — М.: ЦНИИТЭИНефтехим, 1990.— 52с . (Обзорная
информация / ЦНИИТЭИНефтехим. — М., 1991, вып.1.)
J21310-081
UDC 004.2
Roslovtsev V.V.
APPLICATIVE COMPUTATIONAL ENVIRONMENTS
CONSTRUCTION
National Research Nuclear University MEPhI,
Moscow, Kashirskoye sh. 31, 115409
In this paper we present a general structure of (applicative) computational
environments with emphasis on objects and environments construction and explicit
representation of objects structure. Complex objects construction is considered in
depth, and objects valuation is outlined. Some possible applications in programming
languages development and conceptual modeling are outlined.
Key
words:
applicative
computational
environment,
heterogeneous
environments, object construction, environment construction.
Introduction. In this paper we present a study on the applicative computational
environments structure, in particular, we discuss what are the smallest basic entities
required to construct an environment. In this respect, our work may be seen as a
continuation of the discussion in [1].
This paper is based on (and, in fact, is a direct continuation of) our several
papers [2,3,4] and, partly, [5], the main focus being on the so-called term-forming
functions (TFFs) structure and objects valuation. This last topic is not covered deeply
enough to present an abstract machine, or a framework to build such a machine(s),
yet our approach is by no means contradictory with existing results, so traditional
compilation techniques may be used. Our intension is to develop a framework to
facilitate (domain-specific) computational environments construction.
In the next section we will briefly reproduce the necessary background
information.
General structure of an environment. In [2,3,4] we presented an extended
applicative prestructure to explicitly capture objects structure. Conventional
prestructure is a pair:
- for an untyped environment: (𝒪, 𝜀),
- for a typed environment: ({𝒪𝜎 }, {𝜀𝜎𝜏 }),
where 𝒪 is a set of set of all objects of the environment (in the case of a typed
environment, this set is divided into a set of domains 𝒪 𝜎 of objects of type 𝜎),
𝜀: 𝒪 × 𝒪 → 𝒪 is the explicit form of the application operation (which is otherwise
denoted as ‘⋅⋅’), 𝜎 and 𝜏 are type symbols, {𝑂𝜎 } and {𝜀𝜎𝜏 } are families with
parameters 𝜎 and 𝜏, 𝒪 𝜎 ⊆ 𝒪 is a (nonempty) set of objects of type 𝜎, 𝜀𝜎𝜏 is the
(typed) explicit application operation.
We suggested a prestructure of the following form:
(𝒟, ℱ),
where 𝒟 ⊆ 𝒪 is the set of primary (or, according to a different terminology [1],
atomic) objects of the environment, and ℱ is the set of term-forming functions.
Objects atomicity is relative in its nature and is subject to choose depending on their
intended usage. Objects atomicity consists in that their further decomposition into
smaller units is either inappropriate or leads to loss of general logical integrity.
Combining atomic object according to a chosen set of rules (means of combining
objects, or term-forming functions as we call them) leads to constructing more
complex objects called derived (again, following the terminology in [1]).
Relatively to the environment under construction, the elements of ℱ are
metaobjects, functions of, generally, different arities. For a term-forming function
𝐹 ∈ ℱ of arity 𝑛 of type 𝑇1 × ⋯ × 𝑇𝑛 → 𝑇𝑛+1 a construction 𝐹(𝑎1 , … , 𝑎𝑛 ) denotes a
composite object made as a composition of objects 𝑎1 , … , 𝑎𝑛 by means of 𝐹. Explicit
application 𝜀 and functional abstraction 𝜆 ⋅.⋅ are examples of such term-forming
functions (TFF). Note the assumption that every applicative environment has
application 𝜀 metaoperation as an element of ℱ by default, and, generally, we shall
omit it in TFF set enumeration.
Assuming 𝒟 and ℱ are domains of primary objects and TFFs respectively and
taking some 𝐷1 ⊆ 𝒟 and 𝐷2 ⊆ 𝒟 and 𝐹1 ⊆ ℱ and 𝐹2 ⊆ ℱ, consider two
prestructures:
𝑠1 = (𝐷1 , 𝐹1 ) and 𝑠2 = (𝐷2 , 𝐹2 )
Definition. Two environments are equal iff their respective prestructures are
equal. Two prestructures 𝑠1 = (𝐷1 , 𝐹1 ) and 𝑠2 = (𝐷2 , 𝐹2 ) are equal iff 𝐷1 = 𝐷2 and
𝐹1 = 𝐹2 , where 𝐷1 ⊆ 𝒟 and 𝐷2 ⊆ 𝒟 and 𝐹1 ⊆ ℱ and 𝐹2 ⊆ ℱ.
Definition. Let 𝐷1 ⊆ 𝐷2 and 𝐹1 ⊆ 𝐹2 and at least one of these inclusions is strict.
Then the environment 𝑠2 is an extension of the environment 𝑠1 : 𝑠1 ⊂ 𝑠2 .
Union and intersection of environments can be defined in quite a straightforward
way: the environment with prestructure 𝑠3 = (𝐷1 ∪ 𝐷2 , 𝐹1 ∪ 𝐹2 ) is the union (of
environments 𝑠1 and 𝑠2 ) and the environment with prestructure 𝑠4 = (𝐷1 ∩ 𝐷2 , 𝐹1 ∩
𝐹2 ) is their intersection. Note that this is not the same as the set-theoretical union and
intersection of classes of objects generated by their respective prestructures.
If 𝑜 is an object in some environment 𝜔 (denoted by 𝑜 ∈ 𝜔) with prestructure
(𝐷𝜔 , 𝐹𝜔 ) and 𝐷𝑜 is the set of atomic objects and 𝐹𝑜 is the set of TFFs used to
construct that object. Obviously, 𝐷𝑜 ⊆ 𝐷𝜔 and 𝐹𝑜 ⊆ 𝐹𝜔 . Then the environment 𝜔𝑜
with prestructure (𝐷𝑜 , 𝐹𝑜 ) is the ‘minimal’ environment in which 𝑜 would be a legal
object, and 𝜔𝑜 ⊆ 𝜔. Of course, 𝑜 ∈ 𝜔𝑜 . Note that if ∈ 𝛼 and 𝛼 ⊆ 𝛽 then 𝑜 ∈ 𝛽.
Constructing an environment. To create environments systematically, we need,
basically, two things: a ‘source material’ of which our objects will be made, and a
‘glue’ to give ‘shape’ to our objects. In house-building, for example, bricks may
stand for the ‘source material’, and cement – for the ‘glue’. The process of building
environments may be iterative, in the sense that having a first environment we can
build a second ‘on top’ of it, and then a third ‘on top’ of the second, and so on.
For such a ‘glue’, we will use the following environment (without typing):
𝔰 = ({〈⋅,⋅〉; 𝜆 ⋅.⋅; 𝜆[⋅].⋅; {⋅}}, {Fst; Snd; ⌊⋅⌋})
Now, when constructing a new environment 𝛼, relatively to an environment 𝛽
(denoted by ’𝛼�𝛽’; we will say that ‘𝛼 is build on top of 𝛽’ or ‘𝛼 is based on 𝛽’, a
more formal definition will be presented later), we need, first, to define the set of its
atomic objects. Let 𝑡 be a non-reducible combinator in 𝛽 (i.e. 𝑡 contains no free
variables, and no redexes according to the normalizing reduction strategy chosen for
the environment 𝛽), and let 𝜎 be a type formula in 𝛼. Then 〈𝑡, 𝜎〉 is an atomic object
in 𝛼. A TFF in 𝛼 is built similarly, only with some augmentations, as will be
explained here below. Given the set of atoms of 𝛼 (which, at least, includes the set of
atomic objects), the set of objects of 𝛼 is defined by induction on objects’ structure:
1. (induction basis) if 𝑎 is an atom then 𝑎 is an object;
2. (induction step)
a. if 𝐴 and 𝐵 are objects, then so is (𝐴𝐵);
b. if 𝑀1 , … , 𝑀𝑛 are objects and ℱ is a TFF then ⌊ℱ𝑀1 … 𝑀𝑛 ⌋ is an
object.
Let us take a detailed look as to how complex objects are created using TFFs. If
TFF ℱ is a λ-term of the form 𝜆𝑥1 … 𝑥𝑛 . 𝑝, then the ‘body’ of a new object 𝑜 =
⌊ℱ𝑀1 … 𝑀𝑛 ⌋ is the result of substitution of every 𝑀𝑖 for all free occurrences of 𝑥𝑖 in
𝑀
𝑀
𝑝: [ 1�𝑥1 , … , 𝑛�𝑥𝑛 ]𝑝. This readily complies with conventional reduction rules for
various λ-calculi and combinatory logics, but, once the substitutions are done, there is
no obvious way to find out the actual structure of the object 𝑜, i.e. which are the parts
the object is made of, and using what TFF. To overcome, at least partially, this
drawback, let us think of TFFs as of a skeleton, a frame, with (named) slots for
specific objects to fit in. Let us use free variables for names of those slots: if 𝑥 is a
variable then {𝑥} is a (named) slot. The easiest way to define ‘object frames’ is this.
Let 𝑋 be a non-reducible object with the only free variables 𝑥1 , … , 𝑥𝑛 . If 𝑋 is a
combinator in a combinatory logic (i.e. 𝑋 contains no variables at all, free or bound),
then, presuming its arity1 be 𝑛, let us take for 𝑋 the object 𝑋𝑥1 … 𝑥𝑛 . The result of the
following substitution is an object frame:
{𝑥 }
{𝑥 }
𝑋� = [ 1 �𝑥1 , … , 𝑛 �𝑥𝑛 ]𝑋,
1
We mean, arity of the TFF; actual arity of the combinatory may be greater.
i.e. every free occurrence of each variable in 𝑋 is replaced with a slot with the
same name. Given an object frame 𝑋�, containing only slots with names 𝑥1 , … , 𝑥𝑛 , we
define a TFF as a following object:
𝜆[𝑥1 , … , 𝑥𝑛 ]. 𝑋�,
where we use a special notation for ‘abstraction over slots’. The substitution into
a slot we will define as follows:
{𝑦, 𝑀}, if 𝑥 = 𝑦
[𝑀�𝑥 ]{𝑦} = �
{𝑦}, otherwise
A complex object, then, is the result of substitution of the argument objects, to
which a given TFF is applied, into that TFF, i.e., given that 𝑎1 : 𝜎1 , … , 𝑎𝑛 : 𝜎𝑛 :
⌊[𝜆[𝑥1 , … , 𝑥𝑛 ]. 𝑡̃, 𝜎1 → ⋯ → 𝜎𝑛 → 𝜎𝑛+1 ]𝑎1 … 𝑎𝑛 ⌋ = ⌊(𝜆[𝑥1 , … , 𝑥𝑛 ]. 𝑡̃)𝑎1 … 𝑎𝑛 ⌋
= ⌊[
𝑀𝑛
𝑀1�
𝑥1 , … , �𝑥𝑛 ]𝑡̃⌋
The actual substitution may be delayed until required by the valuation process,
and complex objects may be represented as a kind of closure that we will denote by
the writing: [𝑀1 , … , 𝑀𝑛 ]. 𝑡̃, and every slot {𝑥𝑖 } will ‘point’ to the element 𝑀𝑖 of this
closure.
TFF representation may be simplified if we assume that 𝑡̃ = 〈𝑚, 𝜎〉. The type of
the TFF may omitted, so the a TFF will look like [𝜆[𝑥1 : 𝑇1 , … , 𝑥𝑛 : 𝑇𝑛 ]. 〈𝑚, 𝜎〉], and its
type be derived: 𝑇1 → 𝑇2 → 𝜎. Along with writing 𝐹𝑎1 … 𝑎𝑛 to denote complex
objects created using a TFF 𝐹 out of objects 𝑎1 … 𝑎𝑛 , we will write also either
𝑀𝑛
𝑀1�
𝑥1 , … , �𝑥𝑛 ]𝑡̃), or [[𝑎1 , … , 𝑎𝑛 ]. 〈𝑚, 𝜎〉]. For example, a
[〈𝑚
� , 𝜎〉] (where 𝑚
� =[
pair constructor (⋅,⋅) may look like this: [𝜆[𝑥1 : 𝑇1 , 𝑥2 : 𝑇2 ]. 〈𝜆𝑟. 𝑟{𝑥1 }{𝑥2 }, 𝑇1 × 𝑇2 〉], a
pair object (𝑎1 , 𝑎2 ) is then represented as [〈𝜆𝑟. 𝑟{𝑥1 , 𝑎1 }{𝑥2 , 𝑎2 }, 𝑇1 × 𝑇2 〉], or as
[[𝑎1 , 𝑎2 ]. 〈𝜆𝑟. 𝑟{𝑥1 }{𝑥2 }, 𝑇1 × 𝑇2 〉].
Definition. We say that an environment 𝛼 is constructed on top of (or is based
on) an environment 𝛽, denoted by 𝛼�𝛽, iff:
1. there exists (at least one) atomic object 〈𝑡, 𝜎〉 in 𝛼 is such that 𝑡 is an
(non-reducible) object in 𝛽;
2. there exists (at least one) TFF [𝑡, 𝜎] in 𝛼 is such that 𝑡 is an entity
obtained from a non-reducible object of 𝛽 as explained above.
The relation ⋅⁄⋅ is total, anti-symmetric and transitive. The presented definition
implies that an environment may be built on more than one other environments.
Now we define the valuation mapping for the environment 𝛼. As may be seen
from that definition, all actual computation is carried out in the environment 𝛽:
1. (atomic an complex objects)
a. ‖〈𝑡, 𝜏〉‖ = 〈𝑡, 𝜏〉
b. ‖[〈𝑚
� , 𝜏〉]‖ = [〈𝑚
�, 𝜏〉]
2. (application)
a. if 𝑜: 𝜏 then ‖〈𝑡, 𝜏 → 𝜎〉𝑜‖ = ‖⌊𝑡𝑜⌋‖: 𝜎
b. if 𝑜: 𝜏 then ‖[〈𝑚
�, 𝜏 → 𝜎〉]𝑜‖ = ‖⌊𝑚
�𝑜⌋‖: 𝜎
c. if 𝑀𝑖 : 𝜏 → 𝜎 and 𝑜: 𝜏 then ‖{𝑥𝑖 , 𝑀𝑖 }𝑜‖ = ‖⌊𝑀𝑖 𝑜⌋‖: 𝜎
3. (embedded valuation)
a. if 𝑀 ∈ 𝛽 and 𝑀: 𝜏 → 𝜎 and 𝑜 ∈ 𝛼 and 𝑜: 𝜏 then ‖⌊𝑀⌋𝑜‖ =
⌊‖𝑀𝑜‖⌋
b. if 𝑀 ∈ 𝛼 then ‖⌊𝑀⌋‖ = 𝑀
Facet environments. Suppose we have to choose a ‘basic’ environment 𝔰⊥ to
build all others on top of it; the question of choosing such an environment is basically
the same as that of choosing computing invariants. There are several options of such
environments suitable for our needs, some them presented here below (respectively:
pure untyped λ-calculus, pure untyped de Bruijn λ-calculus, and ‘pure’ untyped
combinatory logic with the IKS basis):
({}, {𝜆 ⋅.⋅})
({0; 1; … ; 𝑛; … }, {𝜆.⋅})
({I; K; S}, {})
The first two of these provide a variant of functional abstraction operation ‘out
of the box’, and the latter avoid using it at all. They may be combined, as explained
hereafter. Note that combinators, i.e. objects with no free variables, are particular
interest, and it is such objects that we consider in our work in the first place. A
comparison of combinator definition means provided be the three system mentioned
above are presented here below in the table 1.
Table 1
Combinator Definition Means Comparison
Combinatory logic
Variables
Atomic objects
Functional
abstraction
Application
λ-calculus
+
+
+
de Bruijn λ-calculus
+
+
+
+
+
Besides atomic objects, the set of atoms of an environment may include an
infinite set of variables and/or an infinite set of de Bruijn indices. The choice of
including either of the two, if any, is not completely independent of which entities are
chosen for TFFs: if the ‘usual’ λ-abstraction 𝜆 ⋅.⋅ is included, then the set of variables
must be included as well; if the de Bruijn λ-abstraction 𝜆.⋅ is included, then de Bruijn
indices must be included. The other example is that a pair constructor is often
coupled with the two projections, so if one includes in an environments definition a
pair constructor as a TFF, then the projections are to be included as atomic objects.
To address this issue, we may define a (virtually infinite) set of such highly
specialized environments (that we will call ‘facets’ or ‘facet environments’), so that
other, ‘regular’ environments may be constructed as certain compositions of such
facets. Each facet would represent a relatively closed definition of a specific concept
(or a set of closely related concepts). For example, the notion of an 𝑛-tuple may be
defined by providing, for every 𝑛 ≥ 0, a tuple constructor, equipped with the
appropriate number of projection mappings. This enables modular, constructive
definition of applied environments with required properties (i.e. with required
expressive power): if the desired environment requires for a certain construction or
feature, we would simply ‘mix-in’ an appropriate facet. For instance, let 𝛼, 𝛽 and 𝛾,
respectively, stand for a facet defining functional abstraction, Church’s numerals and
𝑛-tuples, with their respective prestructures being: 𝔰𝛼 = (𝐷𝛼 , 𝐹𝛼 ), 𝔰𝛽 = (𝐷𝛽 , 𝐹𝛽 ) and
𝔰𝛾 = (𝐷𝛾 , 𝐹𝛾 ). Then, the environment 𝛼 + 𝛽 + 𝛾 with the following prestructure:
𝔰𝛼+𝛽+𝛾 = (𝐷𝛼 ∪ 𝐷𝛽 ∪ 𝐷𝛾 , 𝐹𝛼 ∪ 𝐹𝛽 ∪ 𝐹𝛾 )
– would be a λ-calculus enriched with tuples and Church arithmetic. Note that
(𝛼 + 𝛽 + 𝛾)� (𝛼 + 𝛽 + 𝛾)
(𝛼 + 𝛽 + 𝛾)�
�𝛽 and
𝛼,
𝛾.
With respect to this, an environment with prestructure (𝐷1 , 𝐹1 ) ‘has’ a given
facet (𝐷2 , 𝐹2 ) iff 𝐷2 ⊆ 𝐷1 and 𝐹2 ⊆ 𝐹1 . Obviously, environments may be defined as
certain ‘compositions’ of (disjoint) facets (i.e. facets with no atomic objects and TFFs
in common). In that case the ⋅⊆⋅ relation between environments is easier to evaluate.
TFFs and variable binding. As an example, let us consider a possible definition
of a facet contributing the (usual) functional abstraction 𝜆 ⋅.⋅. This operation takes a
variable 𝑣 as its first argument and binds in the object 𝑜 supplied as its second
argument. That means, that TFF constructs a pair of the variable 𝑣 and the object 𝑜,
denoted by 𝜆𝑣. 𝑜, and there is a valuation rule associated with such an object, i.e. a
rule that specifies applications of 𝜆𝑣. 𝑜 to which argument objects are valid, and what
is the result of such applications. How exactly this rule is specified is a good
question, the two basic options being either to use whatever available facilities of an
existing environment (that leads to a combinatory-logic-style definition), or to rely on
meta-theoretical means. The latter option leads to the conventional definition based
on the notion of substitution, which, in turn, has to be implemented one way or
another. By the way, the same considerations apply to the combinatory logic: the
primary combinators (e.g. K and S) are to be implemented somehow.
On the theoretical level, in order to define substitution (and hence, functional
abstraction), we will need an infinite set of objects 0, 1, … , 𝑛, … that we will call
variables. The writing 𝜆𝑥. 𝐴 means ‘for some 𝑥 ∈ {0, 1, … , 𝑛, … } consider the term
𝜆𝑥. 𝐴’. In combinatory logic we need variables to specify combinatory characteristics
of the primary combinators. Consider this simple definition of the substitution
operation [𝑀�𝑥 ]𝑁:
1. [𝑀�𝑥 ]𝑥 = 𝑀;
2. [𝑀�𝑥 ]𝑎 = 𝑎, where 𝑎 is an atomic object, and (𝑎 ≠ 𝑥);
3. [𝑀�𝑥 ](𝑁1 𝑁2 ) = ([𝑀�𝑥 ]𝑁1 )([𝑀�𝑥 ]𝑁2 );
4. [𝑀�𝑥 ]⌊𝐹𝑎1 … 𝑎𝑛 ⌋ =?
The question mark is due to that the result depends on whether the TFF 𝐹 binds
any variables in 𝑎1 … 𝑎𝑛 or not. E.g. if 𝐹 = 𝜆 ⋅.⋅ then [𝑀�𝑥 ]⌊𝐹𝑥𝑎⌋ = ⌊𝐹𝑥𝑎⌋ and, if
𝑦 ≠ 𝑥,
[𝑀�𝑥 ]⌊𝐹𝑦𝑎⌋ = ⌊𝐹𝑦([𝑀�𝑥]𝑎)⌋.
Consider,
for
example,
the
object
𝜆[𝑥1 … 𝑥𝑛 ]. 𝐴 which is somewhat different from 𝜆𝑥1 … 𝑥𝑛 . 𝐴. Similarly, we may want
to define TFFs that bind variables in a term, and yet are different from the regular
functional abstraction 2. In this case we may define a special entity, let us call it
binder, that will be responsible for binding variables and keeping binding contexts
(which somewhat facilitates the definition of substitution). Every TFF that needs
variable binding feature, then, should encapsulate such a binder; for TFF-build
objects it will be easy then to determine whether a specific variable is bound or not.
Item 4 in the above definition should look like this:
⌊𝐹𝑎1 … 𝑎𝑛 ⌋, 𝑥 ∉ 𝐹𝑉(⌊𝐹𝑎1 … 𝑎𝑛 ⌋)
4. [𝑀�𝑥 ]⌊𝐹𝑎1 … 𝑎𝑛 ⌋ = �
⌊𝐹([𝑀 ⁄ 𝑥]𝑎 ) … ([𝑀 ⁄ 𝑥]𝑎 )⌋, else
1
𝑛
A more detailed definition would focus on a more constructive definition of
‘𝑥 ∉ 𝐹𝑉(⌊𝐹𝑎1 … 𝑎𝑛 ⌋)’ and requires a (more or less) complete specification of a
binder and of a mapping that searches for free/bound variables in a (complex) object.
Such definitions are pretty obvious, even though one may find them technically
tricky, so we omit them in the present paper.
Conclusion. We will now present an outline on possible applications of the
presented ideas. There are several such areas that we will mention, grouped into two
major branches: computing basics and conceptual modeling.
One intended application of the environment construction system that we here
present is developing a modular computational framework for a family of (e.g.
The simplest example is an operation Π ⋅.⋅ that acts like a quantifier. Let 𝐴 be a term with 𝑥 occurring free in 𝐴. Then,
𝜆𝑥. 𝐴 is a function, whereas Π𝑥. 𝐴 is not. 𝛼-equivalence may still be applicable to Π𝑥. 𝐴.
2
domain-specific) programing languages. Such a framework would facilitate, if not
automate, programming language design, e.g. by using facets for defining ‘standard’
sets of semantic constructions. Also, it would be easier to provide interoperability
features for programs written in different languages.
TFFs entities may be used to construct various object frameworks, e.g. for
knowledge representation purposes, see [6]. The suggested structure [𝑀1 , … , 𝑀𝑛 ]. 𝑡̃ is
suitable for developing integrated relational-applicative solutions. Let 𝑇𝑖 be the type
of 𝑀𝑖 , for every 𝑖 ∈ {1, … , 𝑛}. Then, if 𝑅 is a (possibly derived) relation of type
𝑇1 × … × 𝑇𝑛 , the object 𝑡̃ is an object frame that may be applied to any tuple
(𝑎1 , … , 𝑎𝑛 ) ∈ 𝑅, i.e. it is possible, on the one hand, to separate objects structure from
the actual data, and at the same time, the objects structure may be easily regarded
itself as some data.
Another possible application of the framework in question is virtualization and
heterogeneous environment construction. One may define an environment which
objects would represent instructions and atoms of a high-level assembler, and on top
of such an environment specific applied systems may be built. The operation ⌊⋅⌋ may
be used to ‘embed’ ‘foreign’ objects into an environment (provided there is a type in
this environment to accommodate that object), whereas the actual valuation of the
object would be carried out outside this target environment.
References:
1. Wolfengagen W.E. Applicative computing. Its quarks, atoms and molecules.
// Edited by Dr. L.Yu. Ismailova. – Moscow: “Center JurInfoR”, 2010. – 62 p.
2. Roslovtsev V.V. Objects in Second and Higher-Order Applicative
Computational Environment. // Sbornik nauchnyh trudov SWorld. Proceedings of the
international scientific-practical conference "Modern problems and their solutions in
the science, transportation, and education, '2011"- Issue 4. Volume 5. – Odessa:
Chernomorye, 2011. – pp. 31-36.
3. Roslovtsev V.V. Applicative Computational Environment Structure and
Construction Method. // Sbornik nauchnyh trudov SWorld. Proceedings of the
international scientific-practical conference "Modern problems and their solutions in
the science, transportation, and education, '2011"- Issue 4. Volume 5. – Odessa:
Chernomorye, 2011. – pp. 14-22.
4. Roslovtsev V.V., Luchin A.E. Concept of Higher-Order Applicative
Computational Environment. // Proceedings of the 11th international workshop on
computer science and information technologies CSIT'2009, Crete, Greece, 2009. –
pp. 48-53.
5. Roslovtvsev V.V. Developing applications using dynamical objects and active
computational environment. // The applicative computational systems: Proceedings of
the
conference
on
applicative
computational
systems
(ACS’2008)
/
WolfengagenW.E. (Ed.) – Moscow: NEI Institute of Contemporary Education
“JurInfoR-MGU”, 2008. – pp. 72-87.
6. Wolfengagen W.E. Frame Theory and Computations. / Computers and
Artificial Intelligence, Vol. 3, No. 1, 1984. – pp. 3-32
J21310-082
UDC 621.43.068.1: 66.045.12
Rakov V.A.
MODELING OF HEAT TRANSFER PROCESSES IN THE ENGINE
COOLING SYSTEM WITH HEATING DEVICE
Vologda State Technical University, Vologda, Lenina 15, 160024
This article presents the results of modeling heat transfer processes in a system
with heat recovery from the exhaust gases of internal combustion engine.
Mathematical modeling of thermal processes in internal combustion engines is a
difficult task. This is due to uneven heat capacity of the heated objects. Even more
challenging is the modeling of the system established by element, in this case the
device is heated by the engine exhaust gases. The objective is to understand how the
system will operate with a supply of a certain amount of additional heat in the cooling
system. To simulate the heat transfer process used block model consists of three main
units: the cooling system of internal combustion engine (ICE), the device is engine
preheating system (EPS) and passenger compartment heater [1-5].
Fig. 1 Engine preheating system. 1 - exhaust manifold; 2 – throttle valve; 37 – temperature sensor; 8 – water pump.
In the cooling system during engine warm-up, the process of receiving thermal
energy from the combustion of the fuel mixture (Fig. 2) in the cylinders - QCICE and
EPS
from the EPS during warm engine - QOut.
. Moreover, the amount of incoming heat
energy depends primarily on the load state of the engine. Rejected heat from the
system is a result of the radiation of heat to the environment through the heated
ICE
, ICE - radiant and tap through the heater.
surface - QОДВС , the exhaust system - QEG
The heat from the
fuel burnt
ICE
Qc
He
Qin.
ICE
ICE
Qo
Heat transfer
through the motor
surface
Heater
He
Qout.
QHe
The heat in the
cabin
ICE
QEG
УПД
EPU
Qin.
Qout.
EPU
Exhaust gases
QEG
EPU
QEG
EPU
Qloss.
Hydrodynamic
and heat loss
Fig. 2. System diagram
In step EPS engine warm heat exchange occurs, characterized in receipt of heat
energy from the cooling system QIn.EPS and exhaust gases QIn.EPS from the outlet of heat
EPS
(J). A part of the thermal energy received is consumed in hydro
to the coolant QOut.
and thermal losses EPS or not consumed at all, and further allocated in the exhaust
system ( QEG ).
In the heater exchanger receives a number of thermal energy from the engine
He
EPS
QOut.
and EPS QOut.
. Some of this heat energy is used to heat the air in the passenger
compartment QHe , and is the seat of an internal combustion engine QIn.He . The intensity
of the heat of the heater depends on several factors, the most important of which are:
the coolant temperature, ambient air temperature and the rate of passage through the
heater heat exchanger.
All the units are connected by a single circulation loop.
The output parameter is the time to reach the required temperature of the coolant
in the heater interior of the car, and the objective function is the minimum warm-up
time
G(f 1 ...f n) ® мин.
The relationship between the temperature changes will be as follows:
М 1¢с p1 ( T1,вых . - Т 1,вх. ) - M 2¢ c p 2 ( T2 ,вых . - Т 1,вх. ) = 0 ,
(1)
wherein М 1¢ , M 2¢ - the mass flow of gas and liquid fluid (kg / s); с р1 , c p2 - average
specific heat at constant pressure to heat transfer in these temperature ranges
(J/(кg·К)); T1,вых. ,Т 2 ,вых . - gas and liquid temperatures at the outlet of the heat exchanger;
T1,вх. ,Т 2 ,вх . - the gas temperature and a liquid inlet to the heat exchanger (º C).
С1 DТ 1 - С 2 DТ 2 = 0 или Q1¢ - Q2¢ = 0 ,
(2)
where C1 ,C 2 - the product of the specific heats of the massive costs Q1¢ ,Q2¢ - heat
flows (W).
Given that the heat exchanger is not perfect, some of the heat energy is spent on
the hydrodynamic losses heat to the atmosphere through the outer wall.
Q1¢ - Q2¢ - QП¢ = 0 , where QП¢ – heat flow losses.
Integrating the heat flux at the time we get:
ò (Q¢ - Q¢ - Q¢
1
2
П
in.
out.
)dt = ò (QEPU
- QEPS
- Qloss )dt = 0 , whence
in.
out
.
QEPS = QEPS
- Qloss.
Temperature of the engine is cold T 0 . The energy Q at this time is zero. After
starting the engine each time the system receives a certain amount of heat energy Qi ,
it depends on the amount of burnable fuel and power:
ti
ò
Qсi dt = qч ´ r ´ H U ´ 0 ,3 / 3600 = 3 ´ 0 ,7 ´ 43500 ´ 0 ,3 / 3600 = 7 ,6125 кJ,
ti -1
where q – hourly fuel consumption, l/h;
ρ – density of gasoline Аи-95;
НU – specific heat of combustion, кJ/кg.
The temperature of the liquid coolant in the system will depend on the balance
of income and its heat removal. On the basis of this model may model the engine
warm-theoretical way that allows us to estimate the influence of the EPS and the
various factors on the rate of warming.
Experimental and theoretical studies on the effectiveness of the prototype heat
exchanger allows the a priori estimate (simulate) the process of the whole system
after a cold start. However, such studies involve a number of complex problems. The
first - the need to establish the dependence of the engine coolant temperature
(coolant) engine from time to time tcoll = f(T) . The second - the establishment of the
thermal energy released in the engine cooling system depending on the time
С
= ( T ) . Third, - the establishment of heat withdrawn exhaust system depending on
QICE
EG
the time QICE
= ( T ) . Fourth - the establishment of the vehicle interior heater power
and the number of diverted them to heat, depending on the time QHe. = f ( T ) . The fifth
- the establishment of power the heater control (EPS) as a function of the temperature
of the coolant QEPS = f(T) . Sixth - defining characteristics of engine after warm engine.
The results of calculating the characteristics of warm-combustion engine in
different modes of the heater (Fig. 3) show that an increase in the intensity of the
heater to 100%, ICE is not heated above 55 º C, and the maximum heat in the cabin
will make up no more than 1 kW, which suggests failure of the heater. [6].
t
, ºС 100
9
80
60
55,
40
20
0
0
5
-20
,c
0
5
0
Fig. 3. Intensity increasing coolant temperature at the heater power:
0 - 1% 2 - 20% 3 - 40% kW, 4 - 60% kW, 5 - 80%, 6 - 100%
Switch off the engine coolant heater warms up to operating temperature for 21
minutes. If you turn on the heater: 0.5 kW for 21 minutes the temperature reaches 88
º C, which is turned on at full power coolant to the specified time has warmed only to
55 º C. In the salon will be supplied only 1.4 kW of thermal power. Further engine
coolant temperature will not increase.
EPS power depends on the temperature of the exhaust gases (EG). From
previous studies [7] we know that after a cold engine EG energy is consumed mostly
in the warm-up catalyst and other parts of the exhaust system. Tests have shown that
the efficiency of conversion of thermal energy to heat the coolant EG can reach 50%,
while energy output begins only after the 2nd minute of the engine. Based on this
calculated amount of energy extracted from the EG to heat the coolant. Using the
same percentage rate of heat energy required to heat the coolant at 1 ºC warm-up
pattern found with EPS, as well as with the included at various speeds heater.
t
, ºС
100
80
60
40
20
0
0
-20
5
0
5
0
,c
-40
Fig. 4 The intensity increase coolant temperature: 1 - EPS off without a
heater, 2 - off with the EPS and the heater at maximum capacity, 3 - enabled
EPS and heater running at full power, 4 - enabled EPS and turned off the
heater.
In the diagram (Fig. 4) shows the results of the calculated reliably warm engine.
The theoretical results show that the use of rapid heating device reduces the engine
warm-up time to an operating temperature of from 22 to 10 minutes, and when the
heater is additionally receive 2.5 kW thermal energy is 12 minutes warm while as
without ICE device can not ensure obtaining an amount of power up to 22 minutes.
References
1. Patent of the Russian Federation, № 120923 , MPK B60H1/18. Economizer
heat of exhaust gases of internal combustion engines / VA Rakov applicant and
patentee, VA Rakov - № 2012117682 / 11 (026664); appl . 24.04.2012.
2. Patent of the Russian Federation, № 127690, MPK B60H1/18. Automatic
control of exhaust gas economizer / VA Rakov, A.A. Sinitsyn V.V. Verhorubov
applicant and patentee VPO VSTU - № 2012152765/11; appl. 06.12.2012.
3. Rakov, VA. Study the possibility of accelerating the engine warms cars by
partial use of exhaust heat / VA Rakov, A. Balling // Proceedings of the IV annual
parades - Session of graduate students and young scientists in the fields of science:
Engineering. Economic Sciences. - Vologda VSTU, 2010. - S. 108-114.
4. Rakov, VA. Improvement of energy-saving devices faster engine warmvehicles / VA Rakov // Young researchers - Region: Proceedings of the All-Russian
scientific conference of students and graduate students. In the 2- ton - Vologda
VSTU, 2012. - T. 1. - 453 c.
5. Rakov, VA The use of waste heat for rapid warm-up and heating the interior
of vehicles. / VA Rakov // Transport company. - 2012. Number 11. - S. 49-52.
6. Rakov¸V.A. Using exhaust heat to speed up the engine warm vehicle. / V.A.
Rakov // Scientific enquiry in the contemporary world: Theoretical basics and
innovative approach. L&L Publishing Titusville, FL, USA, – 2012. – С 86-87.
7. The development of energy-saving devices accelerated warming vehicle
engines. The report on the implementation of R & D commissioned by OOO
"Networking load" / VA. Rakov. Vologda. - 2013. - 40.
J21310-083
UDC 621.38
Borysenko A. A.,Protasova T. A.,Protasova K. A.
ANTIJAMMING TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION BASED ON
MULTVALUED BINOMIAL CODES
Sumy State University
The article discusses the use of multivalued binomial numbers as errorcorrecting code. The methods of their formation and detection of errors in them. An
evaluation of noise immunity.
Keywords: multi-valued binomial codes, cryptography, binomial number system,
a range of multi-valued binomial numbers, universal set.
Providing superior noise immunity in the transmission of information at present
remains an urgent task. At present, we know quite a number of different errorcorrecting codes of stable, among which are the error-detecting codes used in data
transmission systems with Recall that as of today are quite common. As used
although these codes have sufficient noise immunity, but in some cases have
increased the complexity of encoding and decoding code combinations especially
when detecting packet errors in them. As a result, the implementation of encoding
and decoding devices in communication systems leads to increased hardware
expenses, and the devices themselves, thus, often have the ability to self, and
therefore can be a source of additional errors. These disadvantages can be avoided by
using a binomial-valued codes, which are an important advantage for fail-safe
transmission of information is the ease of error detection algorithms, and the ability
of self-control coding and decoding devices.
In this paper, for the binomial codes used by a multi-valued l-ry binomial
number system, characterized by the presence in it of parameters m and k, which
define the range of multi-valued properties of binomial forming binomial code:
k
Cm
=
m!
k !(m - k )! .
(1)
The parameter k determines the number of discharges properties multivalued
binomial code and the parameter m with k is the control number число l = m – k ≥ 0,
the excess of which is the sum of the number of digits of a multivalued binomial
evidence, the error is [1,2].
For example, a control number for l parameter values k = 3 and m = 5 is the
number 2. The range of appropriate multi-valued binomial number will be equal to
C53 =
5!
= 10 .
3!2!
It includes the number 000 001 002 010 011 020 100 101 110 200. These
numbers are only the digits 0, 1, 2, the sum of which are valued in the binomial
numbers must not exceed the reference number 2. Its excess means that the error
occurred.
Multivalued binomial numbers can be represented by binary numbers with
capacity equals rounded up to the integer value of the logarithm of the number l + 1.
In the example - it will be two bits, coding the numbers 0, 1, 2 - 00, 01, 10. Error in
transmitting information could happen as in several, and in all places of the binary
number coding binomial numbers. Regardless of this, in excess of the sum of digits
of a binomial number check digit error in it will be detected, including the presence
error packets, which is one of the advantages of this method of error-correcting
coding.
Multivalued binomial numbers form a subset of the allowed number of Ckm their
universal set containing (l+1)k numbers, and the difference (l+1)k — Ckm a subset of
forbidden numbers. It is clear that
(l + 1)k = (m - k + 1)k ³ Cmk .
(2)
For the above example with k = 3 and m = 5 forbidden combinations which are
incorrect, are shown in Table 1. Their number should obviously be the difference
between 27 and 10, that is 17. The appearance of any of these numbers instead of a
multivalued binomial number indicates an error.
Table 1
Forbidden combinations of parameters k = 3 and m = 5
012
120
211
021
121
212
022
122
220
102
201
221
111
202
222
112
210
The probability of error detection can be determined according to the
formula [3]:
P = 1-
Np
N
= 1-
k
Cm
(l + 1)k
,
(3)
where Np - number of allowed combinations, N - number of possible
combinations
Fig. 1 and 2 are graphs of probabilities of errors detected, depending on the
length of the numbers k for different values of the control number l. As you can see
from the graphs, with an increase in the number k probability of erroneous transitions
that are found, tend to unity.
The probability of detected errors
P
Fig. 1. Schedule probability of detected errors for l=4.
The probability of detected errors
P
Fig. 2. Schedule probability of detected errors for l=7.
However, for the noiseproof coding needed the translation of binary numbers in
the binomial numbers and back. One of the simplest methods of converting the
simultaneous operation of binomial algorithms and binary adder account. When they
are used for each step of such an account is compared of the binary count with the
original binary number. When the coincidence of this number with the result of a
binary count binary and binomial score to an end. Result of the conversion will be
presented to the result of the binomial account. Similarly, will go back and the
process of converting the binomial number into a binary number.
Binary counting is a well-known procedure, but the multi-valued due to the
binomial is less well known. Binomial algorithm accounts will consist of the
following operations. The offset is the number zero. The second number is obtained
by adding to the previous junior level zero binomial number one. If after this amount
of numbers it does not become equal to l, then a junior level again adds one, and so is
as long as the least significant bit is received digit equal to the control number l. On
arrival the next unit of junior level is set to zero and significant bit is stored
neighboring unit. If after this amount of digits in the number did not equal l, then
again, you add 1 to the junior level and the cycle is repeated until the second digit is
not received the check number. Then, the transfer of the unit to the next significant
bit and so the account goes on until the number l in the senior category binomial
number that corresponds to the end of the procedure the basis of the account. In this
case, are tried Ckm valued binomial numbers for these parameters m and k. If in the
process of counting the total number of digits to appear in all places of binomial
number a greater l, then it means that an error occurred and the count should be
repeated.
In addition to discussed above the possibility of detection, using a checksum
error in the binomial numbers, they have the ability to protect information from
unauthorized access, as are inseparable codes in which part of the information is
hidden from the casual observer. If these numbers introduce some permutation of
digits, then decrypt the received cipher at great length numbers will be difficult, since
the decoding of exhaustive search, and the other way in this case is practically not
there all the time will have to go to the original post, which requires a lot of time and
resources.
Submitted material shows that the use of multi-valued binomial numbers allows
a simple algorithm that uses the sum of digits of these numbers effectively detect
single errors and their packages and at the same time hide the transmitted
information. With increasing length of the binomial combination increases the
effectiveness of error-correcting coding and limit the probability of error detection
approaches 1.
References:
1. Borysenko A.A., Onanchenko Ye.L., Kobyakov A.N. Sistemy schisleniya s
binomial'nym osnovaniyem. Vestnik SumGU, 1994, No.1, pp. 96-101.
2. Borysenko A. A. Binomial'nyy schet i schetchiki: Monografiya. Sumy, Izd.
SumGU, 2008. 152 p.
3. Berezyuk N.T. Kodirovaniye informatsii. Dvoichnyye kody: Spravochnik.
Khar'kov, Vishcha shkola, 1987. 252 p.
J21310-084
UDC 621.18.01
Mikhailov A.G., Batrakov P.A., Terebilov S.V.
PROBLEMS OF HEAT TRANSFER IN THE FURNACE OF BOILERS.
OVERVIEW OF CALCULATION METHODS
There are the methods of calculating heat transfer in boilers in this article.
Formulated the problem of further development of the calculation of heat transfer
during combustion of the fuel and the ways to solve them.
Keywords: Heat transfer, furnace, calculation methods, burning, convection,
radiation
Russia is a country with a harsh northern climate, where the heating season in
most parts of more than half a year and the average temperature of the heating period
are much lower than in Europe. Therefore, heating in Russia traditionally (more than
80 % of the housing) is provided from centralized sources (combined heat and power
and district heating plants, etc.). The total length of the main Russian regions (based
on the double pipe system) with pipe 600 – 1400 mm is more than 13000 km, with a
distribution of up to 500 mm in diameter – about 90000 km.
Therefore, the introduction of autonomous heating important and will help to
solve a number of problems facing both the public authorities, investors and
developers, as well as to the public.
Russia is currently one of the countries with highly centralized heat supply.
Currently, about 72 % of the thermal energy produced by centralized sources (greater
than 20 Gcal/h), the remaining 28 % are produced from decentralized sources,
including the 18 % – self-contained and individual sources [1].
The total number of smoke-tube boilers in operation according to the literature
[2] in the country, is estimated at 2.3 - 2.5 million units. In this case, the need for 1118% of the market is "covered" by the technically imperfect equipment [2].
In the development of such modern techniques can identify the following areas
[3]:
- improving energy efficiency by reducing heat losses the full and best use of
the energy potential of the fuel;
- reducing the overall dimensions of boilers due to the intensification of the
process of fuel combustion and heat transfer in the furnace and heating surfaces;
- reduction of toxic emissions (CO, NOx, SOx);
- increase the reliability of the boiler unit.
These requirements must fulfill including smoke-tube boilers are widely known
structures reported in the literature [3, 4, 5].
As an example, here is smoke-tube boiler (Fig. 1).
Fig. 1. The scheme smoke-tube boiler.
Furnace - one of the main elements of the boiler unit. It is the combustion
process in which the chemical energy of the fuel is converted into thermal energy of
the combustion products, hereinafter referred to transmit fluids and steam, inside the
boiler. The total amount of heat from the gas source is transmitted to the surface by
radiation and convection [6]. Below is the mathematical model for calculating the
heat transfer in boilers.
1. Integral methods of calculating heat transfer in boilers
In these methods, we consider the theory of similarity in the flue processes using
basic defining parameters. The application of this theory to the system of equations
describing the processes of combustion and heat transfer, allows us to consider the
criteria that determine the characteristics of heat transfer in boilers [7]. Using these
values allows the thermal design of combustion equipment for various purposes
(marine, power boilers, industrial furnaces, etc.) using empirical laws, obtained by
experiment, and reflect the nature of heat exchange between the combustion products
and the wall.
1.1. Heat transfer in the furnaces of steam boilers
In the latest edition of a standard method [8, 9] the similarity theory in
combustion processes using the main determining parameter - number in the
Boltzmann and taken into account self-absorption of thermal radiation in the nearwall layers of the environment through the combustion test Bugera Bu, called the
primary radiation characteristic of the combustion products. The basic design formula
for determining the temperature of the combustion products at the exit of the furnace
TT" is as follows:
Θ"T =
T"T
Bo 0, 6
=
Ta
MBu 0,3 + Bo 0, 6
(1)
where Ta – adiabatic combustion temperature,
æ 1,4 Bu 2 + Bu + 2 ö
÷÷
Bu = 1,8 lnçç
2
Bu
Bu
1
,
4
+
2
ø
è
Bu – effective criterion Bugera,
_
jB pVr c r
Bo =
s 0y ñð ACT Ta3
Bo – the criterion of the Boltzmann radiative heat transfer; Bp - hourly fuel
consumption; Vr – volume combustion unit quantity of fuel;
– the average
volumetric heat capacity of the combustion products in the temperature θα and θ”T;
σ0 – Stefan-Boltzmann constant; ACT – area furnace wall; ψcp – the average value of
the coefficient of thermal efficiency of screens; φ – coefficient of heat preservation
[8, 9].
Characteristics M is determined depending on the relative location of burners in
the furnace within the range of 0.5 to 1.
In this method it is assumed that the heat exchange in the combustion chambers
of boilers occurs by radiation and convective heat transfer proportion is negligible,
therefore ignored in the calculations.
1.2. Heat transfer in boilers of low power
The method of calculation of heat transfer in furnaces boilers of low power [10,
11] is based on a physical model of heat and mass transfer processes, the proposed
SN Shorin in a more general formulation of the problem for the cases of combustion
of gaseous, liquid and solid fuel in the combustion chambers of various geometric
dimensions as the conditions and entering the combustion air-fuel mixture. The
physical model of the process considering heat transfer from the flue gas stream
emitting from the volume of the furnace to its walls through the boundary layer,
which is formed in the wall region. Transfer of heat from the furnace into the
boundary layer by radiation and turbulent diffusion, assuming that the molecular
transfer of heat from the volume to the boundary layer is negligible. Through the
boundary layer heat is transferred radiation and molecular conduction.
An analysis by the proposed model allows to obtain a generalized similarity
equation of heat transfer during combustion of gaseous, liquid and solid fuels:
K T = f æç Rei ; Bu; l ;s ö÷ ,
dÝ ø
è
(2)
where KT – The number of integral heat transfer; Rei – Reynolds number is
calculated by the gas flow rate related to the wall of the furnace; Bu – Bugera
number;
α – coefficient of excess air; l/dЭ – the ratio of the length and the
equivalent diameter of the furnace (geometric criterion); σ – parameter taking into
account the conditions of combustion, combustion method and the type of burner
device.
The method of calculation is based on the use of heat obtained from (2)
dependence of the form
KT =
1
æ l
1 + A sRei0,55 Bu -0,86 çç
x
è dÝ
1
ö
÷÷
ø
- 0 , 75
,
(3)
where A – the numerical coefficient; σ – coefficient taking into account fuel
combustion; ξ – coefficient taking into account the design features and the condition
of the heating surfaces in the furnace.
Number of integral heat transfer KT assesses the performance of the furnace as a
whole and has a physical meaning similar Stanton number, i.e. shows the ratio of the
heat flow of the perceived heating surfaces in the furnace and the maximum possible
if the cooling of the combustion products to a temperature TCT wal:
KT =
(
)
I - I "T
H ë (rw H )c P (T ) Ta - T "T
= a
,
H ë (rw H )c P (T )(Ta - TCT ) I a - I CT
(4)
where Hл – surface heating furnaces, m2; (ρωH) – the mass flow rate of
combustion products, referred to the surface of the heating furnace, m/s; cP(T) – the
specific mean mass, heat capacity, kJ/(kg·K); Ta - theoretical combustion
temperature.K;
T”T – temperature of the combustion products at the exit of
the furnace, K; Ia; I”T, ICT – enthalpy of combustion, respectively, with the theoretical
combustion temperature, a temperature at the outlet from the furnace and wall kJ/kg.
1.3. Heat transfer in furnaces forced boilers
The simplest method for the calculation of radiative-convective heat transfer in
the ship's boilers, low-power was developed by V. M. Buznika [11, 12] In this
method, the temperature at the furnace outlet is found by solving the equation:
4
æT" ö T"
1,39 b I P T çç T ÷÷ + T - 1 = 0 ,
è Ta ø Ta
(5)
where Ta – absolute adiabatic combustion temperature, K; T”T – absolute
temperature of the combustion products at the exit of the furnace, K; βI –
characteristics of heat transfer in the furnace.
b I = b 04 b k ,
(6)
where β0 - factor structure of the temperature field. Can be taken at full load
steam equal to 0,9 ч 0,95; βK – convective heat transfer coefficient. In [11, 12]
showed that the value of βK can be taken approximately constant when the steam
generator load; ΠT – heating criterion.
PT =
s 0 H ëTa3x
BPVr c r
(7)
where βP - hour consumption in m3/s (kg/s); Vr – combustion unit volume of fuel
m3/m3 (m3/kg);
– mean volume heat capacity in the range of combustion
temperatures θα and θ”T, kJ/(m3·K);
cr =
ña Θa - ña" ΘT"
Θa - ΘT"
(8)
σ0 = 5,67·10-8 W/(m2·K4) – Stefan-Boltzmann constant; HΠ –furnace wall, m2;
ξ = 0,9 – coefficient of pollution surface heating furnace.
Currently, for a detailed calculation of the temperature state of the metal wall in
modern boilers require knowledge of the local heat absorption on all parts of the flue
walls. You also need to know the resulting radiative heat flow in the output window
of the combustion chamber. Therefore, combustion of the fuel in the furnace volume
should be viewed as a set of interrelated aerodynamic, thermal and chemical
processes.
2. Zonal methods for calculating heat transfer in boilers
Calculation methods discussed here is well applicable for the calculation of the
characteristics of heat transfer processes of many types of combustion systems [7].
They are quite common and therefore in principle can be applied to any configuration
of the combustion chamber for all fuels. The relative simplicity and matching
physical processes have led to the use of zonal methods to preliminary calculations
sections of radiative heat transfer in process heaters and boilers. These methods can
advantageously be used to assess the effects on the characteristics of the furnace fuel
supply rate, air heating and excessive change during operation.
Fundamentals of the zonal method were laid by G. L. Polyak, Y.A. Surinova, A.
Nevsky, V. Andrianov, H. Hottel [7].
The assumptions underlying this method lies in the fact that the volume of the
combustion chamber is divided into small areas. It is assumed that the temperature,
composition and other physical properties which can have a constant value. Similarly,
surfaces in the chamber divided into zones. It is believed that the temperature and
emissivity of incident and reflected flows are evenly distributed. It is assumed that
the surface of the gray, reflection and emission of energy dissipated. Configuration
zones is selected in accordance with the contour of the combustor and sufficient
reasons of simplicity of calculation process radiation between the zones.
In literature there are various modifications of the zone method. On the one hand
there is the use of simplified models that use this method in the preliminary stages of
the computational studies of power plants – a model of the mixed flow, the model
core flow [6]. A distinctive feature of the latter – a limited number of areas with a
uniform temperature distribution and the coefficients of the incident and reflected
radiation fluxes in them. On the other hand calculations zonal technique can be
defined as areas within the averaged values of the energy characteristics of the
radiation, and their local values [7]. Using an algebraic approximation of solutions of
integro-differential equations of radiation transport is at the heart of further
modernization of the zonal method [7].
A number of studies [7] the convective heat transfer from one zone to another in
terms of coefficients of the convective exchange coefficients of heat transfer by
radiation are determined by the Monte Carlo method.
To assess the influence on the heat transfer in the boundary layer in the furnace
[7], a two-step calculation method using zone method. At the beginning of the zones
defined by the averaged radiation heat flow and temperature. Then, with the
calculated heat transfer boundary layer thickness.
In general, it should be noted that the use of complex methods of calculation
zone heat in boilers efficiently when the radiation – the main component of heat
transfer. These methods are used to determine the energy efficiency of hightemperature heat exchangers [7].
3. Differential methods of calculating heat transfer in boilers
Burning is always accompanied by the movement of gases - air, fuel gas
combustion products. It is not only chemical but also the physical process. More
precisely, the combustion is a collection of interrelated aerodynamic, thermal and
chemical processes. Temperature, concentration of reactants and the other values
change as a result of chemical reactions, and because of the different physical
processes: convection, diffusion, radiation heat transfer, so the chemical and physical
processes must be studied together. Often, physical factors have a decisive influence
on the completeness of combustion, ignition conditions. Only if perfect aerodynamic
mixing processes can be ignored, assuming that the parameters are the same in any
location of the reaction [13].
The study of turbulence is a complex fluid dynamics section. In the process of
burning the turbulence problem is even more complicated by additional factors chemical reactions and radiation [7, 14]. In the development and design of modern
power plants are preferred by numerical methods for the calculation of turbulent
flows [15, 16].
In numerous papers on the subject payment flows in limited quantities based on
the solution of the stationary equations of continuity and motion in the form of the
Navier-Stokes equations. With their help, successfully solved many problems for
laminar flow heat transfer. Although it is believed that the non-stationary NavierStokes equations can describe any turbulent flow, the practical implementation of this
approach runs into insurmountable difficulties at the present time. Widely used in
engineering practice, the calculation of turbulent flows received various
phenomenological and semi-empirical models of turbulence. These include: the
theory of turbulence O. Reynolds turbulence model Prandtl, practical methods for
calculating turbulent flows A. N. Kolmogorov, Prandtl, two-parameters model [7,
16].
The basic equations that describe the reactive gas mixture – are: continuity for
the entire gas mixture; continuity for each component of the mixture, pulse, energy,
turbulent viscosity state.
In mathematical modeling of combustion processes in technology, furnaces due
to a lack of sufficient information on chemical kinetics model is often used a simple
chemical reaction. This model describes the combined effect occurring during the
combustion of hundreds of chemical reactions.
A number of studies in the description of turbulent combustion average speed of
chemical reaction reagents written by analogy with the laminar burning (Arrhenius
theory). D. B. Spalding a model "cliff vortices" to calculate the average rates of the
reactions [7].
Review of the literature shows that the heat transfer and flow field of flue gas in
the combustion chamber is not subject to a comprehensive theoretical analysis. The
few investigations were performed at a number of simplifying assumptions.
Therefore, there is a need for computational and theoretical studies of heat transfer
and flow field of the products of combustion in the combustion chamber, taking into
account the variability of thermal and radiative properties of the medium, the
combustion air-fuel mixture and selective emission of combustion products. Of
greatest interest are research influences the optical properties of the medium and the
lining of the furnace, the geometric dimensions of the furnace and other factors on the
rate of heat transfer in combustion chambers smoke-tube boilers [7].
References:
1. "Energy Strategy of Russia for the period up to 2020." Approved by the
Decree of the Government of the Russian Federation of August 28, 2003 № 1234-r.
2. Ponomarev, I.G., The Russian market of domestic gas boilers / I. G.
Ponomarev, S. V. Makarenkov. – AVOK number 5/2006.
3. Socolov, B.A. Steam and hot water boilers of low and medium power:
studies. benefits for the students. vyssh. Textbook. Institutions. Moscow: Publishing
Center "The Academy", 2008. – 128 p.
4. Pat. 121350 Russian Federation, MPK F 24 H 1/00. Fire-tube boiler /
Nenishev A. S. Mikhailov, A. G., Batrakov, P.A. (Russia) applicant and patentee
Federal State Educational Institution of Higher Professional Education "Omsk State
Technical University". – № 2012119381/28; appl. 11.05.12, publ. 20.10.12, Bull.
Number 34. – 5 p. : 3 ill.
5. Pat. 76103 Russia, MPK F 22 B 7/20. Boiler furnace / Vedruchenko V.R.,
Zhdanov N.V. (Russia) applicant and patentee Omsk State. Univ of Railways. – №
2008114980; appl. 16.04.08, publ. 10.09.08, Bull. Number 25. – 3p. 2 ill.
6. Handbook of heat exchangers: 2 volumes / Per. from English. ed. OG
Martinenko. – M.: Energoatomizdat, 1987. T. 2. 352p.
7. Vafin, D. B. complex heat transfer in power plants: diss. ... Doctor. tehn.
Sciences: 01.04.14: protected June 18, 2009 / Vafin Daniel Bilalovich. – Kazan, 2009
– 263 p.
8. Antonovskiy, V.I. Heat transfer in the furnaces of steam boilers. A
retrospective look at the development of a standard method of calculation. // Thermal
Engineering 2004. Number 9. P. 53-62.
9. Mitor, V.V., Thermal design of boilers (standard method) / V. V. Mitor, I. E.
Dubrovsky, E. S.Karasina under the general editorship. NV Kuznetsov. Ed. 2nd,
revised. – M.: Energiya, 1973. 296.
10. Bratenkov, V.N. Heat small settlements / V. N. Bratenkov, P. A. Khavanov,
L. Y. Wesker, – M. Stroyizdat, 1988. 223 p.
11. Zhdanov N.V. Improving Energy-efficiency combustion of gaseous fuel in
the hot-water boilers gazotrubnyh: Diss. ... Candidate. tehn. Science. Omsk., 2010.
151 p.
12. Bouznik, V.M. Ship steam generators / V. M. Bouznik. – L: Shipbuilding,
1970. 480p.
13. Mikhailov A. G. Methods for calculating the heat transfer in boilers // Omsk
Scientific Bulletin. 2008. Number 3 (70). p. 81 - 84.
14. Hirata, M. Heat transfer in turbulent flows/ M. Hirata, H. Tanaca, H.
Kawamura, N. Kasasi // Heat transfer, Proc. 170th Int. Conf., Műnchen. 1982. p. 31–
57.
15. Launder, V.E. The numerical computation of turbulent flows / V. E.
Launder, D. B. Spalding // Computat. Methods in Appl. Mech. Engng. 1974. V. 3. P.
269-289.
16. Gosmen, A. D. Numerical methods for the study of viscous liquid / A. D.
Gosmen, V. M. Pan, A. K. Ranchel, D. B. Spalding, – M.: Mir, 1972.326 p.
J21310-085
UDC 621.923. 025.77
Moroz T.Y.
WAYS OF INCREASE OF EFFICIENCY OF GRINDING
OF HARDLY PROCESSED MATERIALS
The Kolomna institute (branch) of Moscow state university
of mechanical engineering (MAMI)
Russian Federation, Moscow region, Kolomna, Oktyabrskoy Revolyutsii St., 408
In this article we describe ways of increase of efficiency of grinding of hardly
processed materials with use of the special diamond tool.
The problem of increase in productivity of production of details is the main task
of mechanical engineering.
Now hardly processed materials are applied to production of details with special
properties. Increase of productivity of processing of such materials demands creation
of the progressive cutting tool.
Diamond is the most progressive tool material applied in many branches of
production.
The diamond tool is especially interesting at production of details from hardly
processed materials.
Grinding is the main way of final processing of details. Now we observe a
tendency of growth of application of diamond grinding in mechanical engineering.
Many Soviet, Russian and foreign scientists studied process of cutting of metals.
Balakshin B. S., Korsakov S. N., Korchak V. S., Loladze T.N., Maslov E.N.
Mishnayevsky L.L. Reznikov A.N. Sagarda A.A. Hudobin L.V. Yashcheritsyn P. I.
nd other scientists created theoretical bases of process of cutting of metals [1, 2, 3, 4,
5].
However processes of finishing processing of metals demand further studying. It
is necessary to study thermal processes in a cutting zone for increase of productivity
of grinding.
Let's consider ways of increase of productivity of diamond grinding of hardly
processed materials.
Thermal defects and microcracks on a processed surface are negative factors.
The reason of thermal defects is high temperature in a cutting zone. The processed
surface heats up to 1200 degrees Celsius when we grind titanic alloys. We draw a
conclusion that cooling in a zone of cutting is absent.
We have to reduce temperature in a cutting zone in order that thermal defects
were absent.
Supply of cooling liquid directly in a zone of cutting can significantly reduce
temperature. Liquid moves through openings on a working surface of a grinding
circle.
Let's make calculation of average temperature in a cutting zone:
Z +H
Q=K
ò exp(- x )K 0
Z -H
( x x )dx - kb ò exp(bx - x )ò exp(- bx) × K ( x
¥
Z +H
2
2
0
Z -H
2
)
+ x 2 dxdx ,
(1)
x
К - coefficient:
K=
1
b
12pH
+H
ò Q(z )dz
,
-H
Q z - relative temperature on a surface.
Average density of a thermal stream:
qav =
Q
,
Fg
(2)
Q = qcon ∙ Fт - general thermal stream;
F = Fт + Fop - total area;
qcon - density of a thermal stream on contact platforms;
Fт - the area of platforms of a circle with a thermal emission;
Fop - the area of platforms of a circle with cooling.
Density of a thermal stream qcon is defined without supply of cooling liquid by
openings in a grinding circle.
Average coefficient of heat exchange:
a av =
Qcl
,
F
(3)
Qcl = α·Fop - general heat-absorbing stream;
α = 6·104·V0,8 Watt/(m2· degree) - coefficient of heat exchange;
V ≈ 0,3…0,4 m/sec - speed of cooling liquid.
We draw a conclusion that the most effective way of increase in coefficient of
heat exchange is increase in speed of a current of a stream of cooling liquid.
Let's calculate a temperature field for a full assessment of influence of separate
parameters of openings and a working surface of a circle on temperature in a cutting
zone.
Temperature in a cutting zone:
Tc =
q×a
pl × Sl
S пр
t
2 а
ò
0
é
æ n 2 - H öù
çç
÷÷ú dn ,
erfn
erf
ê
è n øû
ë
(4)
q - density of a thermal stream;
а - heat diffusivity of metal;
λ - heat conductivity of metal;
Sl - longitudinal speed;
τ - time of thermal saturation;
n - integration variable;
H=
h × Sl
- dimensionless size;
2a
2h - length of a platform of a thermal emission.
Relative temperature:
S пр
Qz =
t
2 а
ò
0
é
æ n 2 - H öù
÷÷ú dn ,
êerfn - erf çç
n
è
øû
ë
(5)
The platform with cooling follows a cutting platform and so on. The period
between platforms of cutting has to be such that the processed surface could be
cooled.
Temperature change:
éæ a ö 2
ù é
æa
öù
Tc = T exp êç ÷ a × tc ú × ê1 - erf ç × a × tc ÷ú ,
èl
øû
êëè l ø
úû ë
(6)
dimensionlessly:
éæ a ö 2
ù é
æa
Q 0 = exp êç ÷ a × tc ú × ê1 - erf ç
èl
ëêè l ø
ûú ë
Q=
öù
a × tc ÷ú ,
øû
(7)
Tc
- relative temperature of a cooled surface;
T
α = 0,043·Vcir 0,8 - heat exchange coefficient;
τс - time of thermal saturation.
Thus we can do calculations of influence of a form of a working surface of a
circle on quality of a processed surface.
The method of supply of cooling liquid directly to a zone of cutting will reduce
grinding temperature significantly.
Quality of a processed surface becomes better. Productivity of processing will
increase.
Thus cooling of a zone of cutting through openings in a grinding circle is an
effective way of increase in productivity of processing. The most effective way of
increase in coefficient of heat exchange is increase in speed of a current of a stream
of cooling liquid.
References:
1. Maslov E.H., Postnikova N. V. The main directions in development of the
theory of cutting by the abrasive, diamond and elborovy tool. - M: Mechanical
engineering, 1975. - 48 pages.
2. Mishnayevsky L.L. Wear of grinding circles. - Kiev: Naukova thought, 1982.
- 192 pages.
3. Reznikov A.N., Reznikov L.A. Thermal processes in technological systems:
The textbook for machine-building specialties of higher education institutions. - M:
Mechanical engineering, 1990. - 287 pages.
4. Reznikov A.N. Thermophysics of processes of machining of materials. - M:
Mechanical engineering, 1981. - 279 pages.
5. Yashcheritsyn P.I., Ryzhov E.V., Averchenko V. I. Technological heredity in
mechanical engineering. - Minsk: Science and equipment, 1977. - 256 pages.
J21310-086
Radionov A.A., Maklakov A.S., Karyakina E. A.
STUDY OF INFLUENCE OF THYRISTOR CONVERTER ON THE
SUPPLY NETWORK
South Ural State University (National Research), Chelyabinsk, Lenin ave 76, 454080
A necessary condition for the normal power supply of industrial enterprises is
the reliable supply of energy еelectric power consumers in the required quantity and
quality, which is regulated by GOST 13109-97. In this case, the main influences on
the quality of electricity generation have a power-consuming equipment with nonlinear current-voltage characteristics - thyristor converter units are used for high
power DC drives.
An aim of this research is to assess the influence of the thyristor converter on the
supply network and analysis of the spectrum harmonic components of the primary
winding transformer with different power of supply network.
The voltage distortion inevitably occurs when you use the thyristor converter, as
in the process of switching valves neighboring phases associated with the transient
fault. As a result, in the voltage appear distortion, shape, size and number of which
depends on the circuit of rectifier, power and parameters of network [1-3].
Schematic diagram (fig. 1, a) consists of the following main elements: thyristor
converter, transformer and the mains. The transformed circuit diagram (fig. 1, b)
includes the following main elements: 𝑋𝑠 and 𝑅𝑠 – inductive and resistance of
network, 𝑋𝑡 and 𝑅𝑡 – inductive and resistance of transformer.
Network
Transformer
St
Rs
Network
Transformer
Thyristor
convertor
Ud, Id
M
а)
Xs
Xt
Rt
Thyristor
convertor
Ud,
Id
Current source
b)
Fig. 1. Schematic diagram of the investigated model
The main parameters of the scheme are presented (tab. 1), where 𝑈𝑑 and 𝐼𝑑 –
rectified voltage and current of the thyristor converter; 𝑆𝑡 – rated power transformer.
Table 1
Parameters of scheme
Parameters of the thyristor
converter
𝑈𝑑 , V
𝐼𝑑 , А
700
1400
The parameters of converter
transformer
𝑢к %
𝑆𝑡 , МVA
12
3
Inductive impedance transformer may be defined by the formula:
𝑈2 2 ∙ 𝑢𝑘% 8002 ∙ 12%
=
= 0,026 Ohm
𝑋𝑡 =
100 ∙ 𝑆𝑡
100 ∙ 3 ∙ 106
𝑅𝑡 = 0,1𝑋𝑡 = 0,0026 Ohm
To study the effect of the thyristor converter in networks of different power
assume that the inductive reactance of the network will be defined as [4]: 𝑋𝑠1 =
0,2𝑋𝑡 ; 𝑋𝑠2 = 0,4𝑋𝑡 ; 𝑋𝑠3 = 0,6𝑋𝑡 correspondingly:
𝑋𝑠1 = 0,2 ∙ 𝑋𝑡 = 0,2 ∙ 0,026 = 0,0052 Ohm
𝑋𝑠2 = 0,4 ∙ 𝑋𝑡 = 0,4 ∙ 0,026 = 0,0104 Ohm
𝑋𝑠3 = 0,6 ∙ 𝑋𝑡 = 0,6 ∙ 0,026 = 0,0156 Ohm
The schematic diagram was implemented (fig. 2) in the mathematical package
Matlab application Simulink. The curves of transients when connecting the
transformer windings – Y/Y presented in fig. 3, a, and for 𝑋𝑐1 = 0,2 ∙ 𝑋тр ; fig. 3, b
for 𝑋𝑐2 = 0,4 ∙ 𝑋тр ; fig. 3, c for 𝑋𝑐3 = 0,6 ∙ 𝑋тр . Analogous curves of transients when
connecting the transformer windings – Y/∆ shown in fig. 4, а fig. 4, b, fig. 4, c.
Fig.
2. A simulation model of the thyristor converter program in Matlab
The curves of the mains voltage from the transformer connection Y/Y (fig. 3, а,
fig. 3, b, fig. 3, c) and connection Y/∆ (fig. 4, а, fig. 4, b, fig. 4, c) have a periodic
nature of the distortion, allowing them to harmonic analysis. At the same time, any
periodic function 𝑓(𝜔𝑡) can be represented by a trigonometric Fourier series:
∞
𝑓(𝜔𝑡) = 𝐴0 + �[𝑎𝑣 cos(𝑣𝑤𝑡) + 𝑏𝑣 sin(𝑣𝑤𝑡)],
𝑣=1
where 𝐴0 – steady component; v – harmonic number; 𝑎𝑣 and 𝑏𝑣 – coefficients of the
Fourier series. Similar calculations are performed in Matlab on the specially designed
programs.
U2, pu
1
0
t, s
-1
0,1
0,11
0,12
U2, pu
а)
1
0
t, s
-1
0,1
0,11
0,12
U2, pu
b)
1
0
t, s
-1
0,1
0,11
0,12
c)
Fig. 3. The curves of supply voltage and diagrams of spectra harmonic when connecting the transformer windings Y/Y
U2, pu
1
0
t, s
-1
0,1
0,11
0,12
U2, pu
а)
1
0
t, s
-1
0,1
0,11
0,12
b)
U2, pu
1
0
t, s
-1
0,1
0,11
0,12
c)
Fig. 4. The curves of supply voltage and diagrams of spectra harmonic when connecting the transformer windings Y/∆
Table 2
Experiment results
Connection scheme of
the transformer windings
Y/Y
Y/∆
𝑋𝑐 , Ohm
THD, %
The depth of the
voltage dip
𝑋𝑠1 = 0,2 ∙ 𝑋𝑡
2,33
𝛿, %
15,48
𝑋𝑠2 = 0,4 ∙ 𝑋𝑡
4,48
22,36
𝑋𝑠3 = 0,6 ∙ 𝑋𝑡
6,48
28,6
𝑋𝑠1 = 0,2 ∙ 𝑋𝑡
2,81
17,36
𝑋𝑠2 = 0,4 ∙ 𝑋𝑡
5,12
24,3
𝑋𝑠3 = 0,6 ∙ 𝑋𝑡
7,11
31,9
where THD – a signal is a measurement of the harmonic distortion present and
is defined as the ratio of the sum of the powers of all harmonic components to the
power of the fundamental frequency.
Thus, based on the present study, we can conclude that the connection of the
transformer windings according to the scheme Y / Y, THD and the depth of the
voltage dip during the switching valves in the same network parameters less than
when connecting the transformer scheme Y/∆.
The analysis of the spectrum of the harmonic components of supply voltage at
of different power of networks showed that with a decrease in power of network,
THD and depth of voltage dips is increased.
References:
1. Radionov A.A., Maklakov A.S. OPERATING CONDITIONS OF AN
INDUCTION MOTOR WITH FREQUENCY CONVERTER, BASED ON VSI
WITH PWM, AND AFE RECTIFIER DURING VOLTAGE DIPS // Сборник
научных трудов SWorld. Материалы международной научно-практической
конференции
«Современные направления
теоретических и
прикладных
исследований’2013». – Выпуск 1. Том 5. – Одесса. КУПРИЕНКО, 2013. – ЦИТ:
113-0574. – С. 23-29.
2. Radionov A.A., Maklakov A.S., Karyakina E. A. STUDIES OF INFLUENCE
ON
NETWORK
24-PULSE
RECTIFIER
ON
BASIS
OF
THYRISTOR
CONVERTERS // Сборник научных трудов SWorld. Материалы международной
научно-практической конференции «Современные проблемы и пути их
решения в науке, транспорте, производстве и образовании '2013». – Выпуск 2.
Том 8. – Одесса. КУПРИЕНКО, 2013. – С. 22-27.
3. Сарапулов О.А. Построение векторных диаграмм в программном пакете
Matlab / О.А. Сарапулов, А.С. Маклаков, М.С. Лукманов // Электротехнические
системы и комплексы. – 2012. – Выпуск 20. – С. 182–186.
4.
Корнилов
Г.П.
Моделирование
электротехнических
комплексов
металлургических предприятий. / Г.П. Корнилов, А.А. Николаев, Т.Р.
Храмшин, А.А. Мурзиков // – Магнитогорск: Магнитогорск. гос. техн. ун-та.
Г.И. Носова, 2012. – 235 с.
J21310-087
UDK 621.193.224:681.536.5
Radchenko Yu.N., Іvanov V.І., Zinchenko V.Yu.
THE SYSTEM OF AUTOMATIC CONTROL OF PROCESS OF
INCINERATION OF FUEL IS IN РЕКУПЕРАТИВНЫХ
SOKERS
National metallurgical academy of Ukraine, Dnipropetrovs’k,
Zaporozhya state engineering academy
Preface. Recuperative soakers with heating from the center of bottom, which
fold 25-30 % general quantity of reducing workshops soakers for metallurgical plants
of Ukraine, apply for heating of bars before rolling on the mills «slabber» and
«blooming».
Heating of bars in the soaks of the stated type, as a rule, realize at regime,
which consists of two periods:
– the first period is a period of heating for bars, which is carried out by an
increase of temperatures in the work volume of soaker to her set value at the
stationary expense of gaseous fuel;
– the second period is a period of self-control of bars which will realize at the
set stationary temperature in the work volume of soaker.
Process control of heating of bars is carried out by means of the local systems
of automatic regulation (SAR) of temperature and correlation «fuel-air» with control
actions influences, which serve accordingly expenses of fuel and air.
Analysis of advances. In spite to the enough protracted history of development
and number of advances, recuperative soakers with heating from the center of bottom
have permanent defects fundamentally, that conditioned by them constructive
features.
One of basic lacks of the state soakers it is an uncontrolled run-offs of air from
ceramic recuperators toward taking of combustion products. The value of air losses
which give to the ceramic recuperators at the beginning of soaker campaign presents
30 %, and in a year of its exploitations – arrives 50-60 %. As a result, there is a
gradual decrease of maximal thermal power of soaker in the same direction as his
campaign which results in the increase of specific expense of fuel on heating of bars.
Such position increases and that quality of fuel incineration is regulated with
use of typical SAC by correlations «fuel-air» (by an anchorwoman size is an expense
of fuel, and the expense of air is determined by means of calculation device [1]),
which is unable to provide its. At that such instance realization of calculation
measure for rate of regulative organ opening on the pipeline of air tricking does not
testify to the receipt to the bumer of necessary amount of air. It is related to that at
work of typical SAC for correlation «fuel-air» use theoretical data about the expense
of air which is given on the entrance of recuperator; however his quantity which
actually acts to the bumer is an unknown size through losses in a recuperator.
Thus, for the first period of thermal treatment of bars in the work volume of
recuperative soakers of this type rational incineration of fuel can not be provided,
although duration of the stated period folds the more than half of total time for
heating of bars.
At the productive conditions of reducing workshops of metallurgical plants of
Ukraine qualitative incineration of fuel in soakers with heating from the center of
bottom enough objectively observe a specialists on heating of bars on some signs
(original appearance of flame, speed of temperature increase in the work volume of
soaker and other), id est his realization, thus, depends on qualification of auxiliary
personnel of the stated thermal aggregates. Usually such operation is carried out by
change by the expense of fuel at the hand regime for providing of maximally possible
increase of temperature in the work volume of soaker for the quantity of air that gives
actually. It is executed individually both for every soaker and every loading of bars to
his volume. Errors of adjusting of the typical system of correlation «fuel-air» bring to
the increase of specific expense of fuel on heating of bars and increase of losses of
metal with dross.
On the number of thermal aggregates of the stated type for rise of quality
incineration of fuel carry out correcting of correlation «fuel-air» on content oxygen in
combustion products, which depart. At that rate expense of air which heads for a gasring, determine both the current expense of fuel and set content of oxygen in end
combustion products [2]. However such system is able to provide high-quality
incineration of fuel only in the case when a quantity of air which acts to the bumer is
sufficient for his complete incineration. Except for that, application of the similar
system limitedly by her considerable time lag (duration – to one minute), and also
absence by reliable high temperature sensors.
In work [3] for adjusting of the thermal regime of recuperative soakers with
heating from the center of bottom additionally to stated typical SAC were added SAC
of quality incineration for fuel on content oxygen in combustion products, which take
away from under nozzle space of recuperator.
For the first period of heating of bars, when the fast-acting of SAC does not
have a test case, adjusting of quality for fuel incineration carry out on content of
oxygen in combustion products, which there are effluent away.
So, for loading of bars to the work volume of soaker be means of SAC for
temperature and correlation «fuel-air» provide the maximal measure of rate opening
of regulative organs, which are set on the pipelines of fuel and air out put. Farther the
executive mechanism is disconnected from the regulator of correlation by «fuel-air».
As a result, there are have stabilization of maximally possible expense of air which
heads to a bumer.
After it is carry out adjusting of the set content of oxygen in combustion
products, which depart from under nozzle space of recuperator for soaker. The
regulator of oxygen content, operating on the additionally set regulative organ,
changes the expense of fuel which acts to the bumer, for inhibition in combustion
products of the set content of oxygen, id est, thus, provide incineration of fuel with
the set coefficient of air expense.
During the second period heating of bars there are carry out the gradual
relieving of fuel expense with providing of necessary quality of his incineration by
means of fast-acting SAC correlation «fuel-air». Therefore regulative organs connect
from the regulator for correlation «fuel-air» and the regulator of oxygen content and
the system works in ordinary regime.
The lack of the described chart of adjusting of the thermal regime of
recuperative soakers with heating from the center of bottom is a presence of
additional SAC content of oxygen in end combustion products and also necessity of
placing of additional regulative organ, which it is set on the pipeline of fuel output.
Problem of definition. A task is simplification of SAC thermal regime of
recuperative soakers with heating from the center of bottom and increase of
efficiency of it work.
Basic part of researches. For the decision of the this task it is offered SAC the
thermal regime of soakers for the this type, which provide necessary quality of fuel
incineration of during all process of heating for bars (picture 1).
ÒE
3a
QE
4a
Fuel
3i
FÅ
1a
4i
FÅ
2à
3h
Air
4h
4 5
1
Devices
at place
2
FT
1b
FT
2b
F²R
1ñ
F²R
2ñ
ACS of fuel
expense
Devices on
a panel
1
ACS of air
expense
3
7
3
5
4
6
NS
3g
Ò²R ÒÑ
3b 3c
Í
3d
HS
3e
8
6
2
8
7
NS
4g
HS
3f
ÀCS of airexpense of
temperature in a soker
GI
3j
Q²R QÑ
4 b 4c
Í
4d
HS
4e
HS
4f
ÀCS of quality
for fuel burn
Picture 1. Offered SAC for the thermal regime of soakers
GI
4j
ASC of temperature enter in the complement of such chart, and also, instead of
ASC correlation «fuel-air», enter ASC content of oxygen in end combustion products [4].
Unlike typical ASC temperature, where a regulating influence is fuel expense,
for offered ASC temperature is charges of expense air, and for ASC content of
oxygen in end combustion products is charge of fuel expense.
Process control of heating of bars in the recuperative soakers of the stated type
is carry out thus. After loading of bars to the work volume of soaker SAC of
temperature provides the maximal measure of opening of regulative organ of 4і on
the pipeline of air output, id est carries out stabilization of maximally possible and
exactly unknown quantity of air which acts to the bumer.
In turn, SAC content of oxygen in end combustion products, operating on the
regulative organ of 3і on the pipeline of fuel output, changes the expense of fuel
which acts to the bumer, the same, providing the set content of oxygen in combustion
products. As a result, it have a set value of coefficient of air expense. For call-byvalue in the work volume of soaker of the set level of temperature there are carry out
passing to stabilization of its value by the corresponding relieving of expense for both
fuel and air at the observance of the set content of oxygen in end combustion
products.
Conclusions.
1. During work of recuperative soakers with heating from the center of bottom
with the use of typical SAC of correlation «fuel-air» does not provide necessary
quality of fuel incineration from the out-of-control sources of air from ceramic
recuperators toward taking of combustion products.
2. High-quality inhibition of process of fuel incineration with automatic
recognition of charge of air sources from ceramic recuperators during the campaign
of soaker is arrived by combination of temperature adjusting at charge of air expense
with regulating of fuel expense on content oxygen in end combustion products.
LITERATURE
1. Automatic control metallurgical processes [Text] / А. M. Belenky, V. F.
Bergyshev, О. M. Blinov, V. Yu. Kaganov. – Moscow : Metallurgy, 1989. – 379 p. –
Bibliography is at the end of divisions. – ISBN 5-229-00224-7.
2. Increase of efficiency for fuel burning at continuous control of oxygen
content in smoke gases [Text] / V. Ya. Obozan, I.I. Prosvetov, I. B. Zatoplyaeva, V.
А. Тkachenko // Metallurgical heating engineering : collected of sciense articles of
the National metallurgical academy of Ukraine. – Dnepropetrovsk : Thresholds,
2005. – Vol. 2. – P. 420-425.
3. Management of quality of fuel incineration in recuperative soakers with
heating from the center of bottom [Text] / Yu. N. Radchenko, V. F. Sapov, V. I.
Shibakovsky, V. I. Ivanov // Metallurgical heating engineering : collected of sciense
articles of the National metallurgical academy of Ukraine. – Dnepropetrovsk : New
ideology, 2008. – P. 242-246.
4. To the management by thermal work of recuperative soakers [Text] / Yu. N.
Radchenko, V. F. Sapov, V. I. Ivanov, V. Yu. Zinchenko // Materials of VII internat.
science.-technic. сonf. «Key aspects of modern science». – Sofia : Science and
education, 2013. – Vol. 35. – P. 12-14.
J21310-088
UDC 615.478+614.2
*Uvaisov S.U., **Avdeuk O.A.
ANALYSIS OF PROBLEMS OF IMPLEMENTATION
AND USE OF HEALTH DIAGNOSTIC EQUIPMENT
*MIEM HSE Univ. RT,
**Volgograd State Technical University
Introduction. The most important area of modern medicine is the development
and improvement of diagnostic methods that allow the identification of variations in
health status , and in the case of a timely application to prevent the development of
diseases , lower interest trudopoteri and premature death [ 1,3,4,8 ] .
Methods of medical diagnosis can be divided into three groups [1] : structural
(eg , x-ray , ultrasound ), functional (eg , electrocardiography ) , laboratory .
Conducting diagnostic activities within any group involves the use of medical
information-measuring systems ( IIPI ) of various levels of difficulty , which are
fitted with modern microprocessor technology . As a result , IIPI can get not only
high quality 2D or 3D images of organs and their functional activity , but also with
the appropriate software to automatically analyze medical images with subsequent
diagnosis (medical expert systems ) . This is especially true in the field of evidencebased medicine [2 ] , the main task of which is to reduce the influence of the human
factor in the practice of a physician.
The analysis of several reports made by Accounting Chambers of the Republic
of Tatarstan , Chuvashia , as well as other areas of the Russian Federation within the
framework of the priority national project "Health" , launched in early 2006 ,
revealed a number of problems in the field of high-tech health care and the
development of material and technical basis of the diagnostic service of medical
institutions.
For example , in [ 5 ] that as a result of the audit revealed a lack of real data on
the needs of medical institutions for medical equipment , as well as policies and
standards for equipment replacement and the equipment of health facilities . This
leads to the fact that the characteristics of the purchased equipment is not always
match the needs of the diagnostic and treatment process , expensive systems are used
unevenly and often idle due to a technical fault , the temporary lack of staff and
supplies ( Fig. 1).
Fig. 1. The reasons for downtime of medical equipment [6]
One of the recommendations of the audit are : the introduction of performance
indicators of medical devices based on the number attached to the medical institution
of the population , the organization of distribution equipment ( purchase ) between
medical institutions in view of the demand for research , development methodology
that defines a common approach to organizing and carrying out maintenance medical
equipment.
Analysis of materials [ 7,8 ] revealed additional causes downtime of medical
equipment related to the redundancy of equipment for the health facility and its
inadequate technical level. And they indicated the problem of lack of integrated
service multifaceted medical equipment , both Russian and foreign manufacturers,
which are equipped with modern health care facilities (HCF ) .
The paper [8 ] reflects that the analysis of the regulatory framework of the
Russian Federation, it was revealed the absence of a single codified act regulating the
sphere of circulation of medical products, reflecting all stages of the product life
cycle from design , pre-clinical studies and prior to disposal. An important conclusion
was that the "low staffing diagnostic services, medical personnel , under-funding of
health in terms of ensuring the necessary medical equipment supplies , service and
metrological tests indicate the absence of an integrated program approach to ensure
the medical equipment of health facilities at the stage of project development, and the
implementation of activities under the control PNP "Health" at the federal , regional
and municipal levels. "
Currently, control of medical products (quality control , efficiency and safety of
medical products , the efficient allocation of health care resources , harmonization of
requirements for health care facilities during their licensing optimize their technical
equipment ) system of monitoring of medical devices (AIS MMI ) developed FGBU
" VNIIIMT " Roszdravnadzor [ 9].
Monitoring is carried out in two directions: the state of the market for medical
products and medical devices Park . Structure of AIS data MMI allows electronic
form for each product in a medical facility , which reflects the ongoing maintenance
work , metrology software, operating time, downtime , the current technical
condition, the cost of operation and maintenance schedules and plan procurement,
supply and use of equipment .
The introduction of AIS MMI is certainly an appropriate analysis to determine
the possibility of upgrading the existing fleet of medical devices , but does not give a
clear algorithm equipped with the necessary medical equipment of health facilities .
Conclusions. Thus, the development of medical diagnosis as a high-tech and
expensive medicine is a priority . And so are actual problems: definition of a systemwide perspective of cost-effective criteria and approaches to equip health care
diagnostic equipment in accordance with the profile of medical services , the
development of methods for the synthesis of the complex IIPI and guidance
algorithms of its application.
References:
1. Classification of medical research methods [ Access mode : http://www.0zd.
ru/medicina/klassifikaciya_osnovnyx_metodov.html]. Date of access: 31.07.2013
2 . Koroljuk IP Medical informatics : tutorial / IP Koroljuk . - 2nd ed. , Rev. and
add. - Samara Ltd. " Etching ": SEI HPE " Samara State Medical University ." , 2012.
- 244 .
3 . Fly UP Diagnostic set of basic vital functions of a person by a combined
parameter based on neural networks / Yu.P.Muha , MG Skvortsov, OA Avdeyuk / /
Biomedical electronics , 2001 . Number 4 . - S. 38.
4 . Medical devices for functional diagnostics [ Mode of access : http://www.
znaytovar.ru / s / Medicinskie_pribory_dlya_funkci.html]. Date of access: 31.07.2013
5 . Report of the counting chamber of the Republic of Tatarstan on the results of
audit of the use of medical equipment purchased for future public health agencies for
the implementation of the priority national project "Health" in 2006-2009 and I
quarter of 2010 [ Access mode : http://www.sprt .ru / files / auditvoda.pdf]. Date of
access: 01.08.2013
6. Report on the results of the monitoring activities of the Audit efficient use of
public funds allocated for the purchase of certain types of medical equipment, and
analysis of the effectiveness of the use of this equipment in state and municipal health
of the Chuvash Republic for the implementation of the priority national project
"Health" in 2006-2009, and Q1 2010 . [ Mode of access : http://gov.cap.
ru/SiteMap.aspx?gov_id=108&id=900936]. Date of access: 08/06/2013 g
7. Report on the inspection event "Performance Audit the use of medical
equipment purchased for state and municipal health agencies in order to implement
the national project " Health "in 2006-2009, and during the past period of 2010 ,
together with the control and audit bodies of the Leningrad Oblast and the Republic
of Tatarstan . [ Mode of access : http://www.ach.gov.ru/userfiles/bulletins/2011-0501-buleten_doc_files-fl-2087.pdf]. Date of access: 10/08/2013 g
8. Skvirskaja GP Conceptual approaches to the development and improvement
of medical diagnostics in the Russian Federation / GP Skvirskaja , ML Sveschinsky /
/ Health Care , 2010 . Number three . [ Mode of access : http://www.zdrav.ru/library
/publications/detail.php?ID=74550&redct=Y]. Date of access: 01.08.2013
9. The automated information system for monitoring medical devices ( AIS
MMI ) [ Access mode : http://www.aismmi.ru/]. Date of access: 18.08.2013.
J21310-089
UDC 69.059.7
Makarov N.K.
MATHEMATICAL MODELLING OF BAY OPTION OF
PRIMORSKAYA EMBANKMENT RECONSTRUCTION IN THE CITY OF
SOCHI
Sochi State University, Sovetskaya St. 26 a, 354000, Sochi, Russia
The mathematical model of pebble beaches dynamics under protection of
breakwaters is considered. The model is applied to mathematical modeling of bay
option of Primorskaya Embankment reconstruction in Sochi.
Keywords: artificial pebble beach, settlement storm, sediment transport,
breakwater, dynamics of a beach.
One of important problems of design of sea coastal protection constructions is
modeling of dynamics of artificial beaches which are considered as protection
constructions, and in resort regions – also as the major recreational objects.
Due to the preparation for the Olympic Games of 2014 in Sochi design of
reconstruction of the central Primorskaya Embankment on length about 2.2 km – fig.
1, and also Sochi port reconstruction for the purpose of its transformation into cruise
harbor – fig. 2 is executed.
Reconstruction of the embankment assumes promotion in the sea of the artificial
territory on 35 – 75 m, including the device of the new embankment about 30 - 35 m
wide with creation of a new waves querench and recreational beach not less than 35
m wide.
As one of options of reconstruction of the embankment the option in the form of
a number of artificial capes under protection of breakwaters – fig. 3 was considered.
Fig. 1. Satellite picture of a design site of the coast
Fig. 2. Scheme of reconstruction of the port of Sochi
Fig. 3. Bay option of reconstruction of Primorskaya Embankment
For justification of this project mathematical modeling of dynamics of pebble
beaches in artificial bays under protection of breakwaters was executed.
Basis for modeling of deformations of a bottom and the coast is the fundamental
equation of preservation of weight of substance:
¶ d/¶t + (1/(1-n))´(¶Qм/¶x + ¶Qм/¶y) = 0,
(1)
where d - depth; t - time; n - coefficient of porosity of soil; x, y - axes of coordinates;
Qм - an expense of deposits.
Use of the given equation demands, generally speaking, knowledge of deposits
making an expense separately in cross to the coast and longitudinal the directions.
Sometimes there is accepted a definition of promotion or a coastline receding by
the simplified technique, solving only the one-dimensional equation. Thus is accepted
that the bias of an underwater coastal slope remains invariable in time on this site of
the coast and, thus, the coast is displaced towards the seas (accumulation) or towards
a land (washout) parallel to itself. Such deformations are described by the simple
equation:
DA DQ м
=
Dt
DX
,
(2)
where A - the area of cross section of a coastal slope, Qм - an alongshore expense of
deposits, t - time, X - distance along the coast.
For calculations of dynamics of the coastline the equation (2) will be
transformed to a look:
DA =
DQм
Dt .
DX
( 3)
Considering that DA = dcr DY where dcr - depth of settlement waves breaking,
DY – change of position of the coastline, we will receive finally for change of width
of a surface beach, that is for dynamics of the coastline:
DY = K
DQ м Dt
,
DXd cr
(4)
where К - the calibration coefficient which is considering change of a profile of
a beach in the course of a storm and subject to definition on laboratory or natural
measurements.
For pebble deposits (diameter of ³ 2 mm) the capacity of a stream of deposits is
defined from expression [1]:
ρ h 3сr1% Т Δt
Q Т = 0,087 g
sin2α cr ,
ρ n k oк d 50%
(5)
where: hсr1% - height of a wave is 1% of security in system in the area of the last
collapse, m; - the average period of waves, with; d50% - the median diameter of a
beach material, m; rn - the volume weight of deposits; r - volume weight of water;
acr - a corner of approach of waves to the line of the last collapse; Dt - time of action
of this excitement, days; koк - the coefficient considering influence of degree of form
of a beach material on intensity of its movement.
In the presence of a breakwater between it and the coast there is a wave shadow.
Actually it means that the line of
waves braking draws near the coast and
transporting ability of a water stream (a wave power current in a surf zone) decreases.
As a result the natural mode of transport of deposits changes, and there are
accumulative forms (braids, capes).
Extent of blocking of the coast from waves depends on a breakwater viewing
angle from the coast. As the key parameter characterizing extent of blocking, the
relative distance from the coast to breakwater l/b, where b – length of a breakwater, l
- distance from it to the coast. Then the viewing angle will be defined from
expression: a =53°×b/l. By results of the researches which have been carried out in
the Black Sea Branch of Sea Coastal Protection Constructions of All-union Scientific
Research Institute of Transport Building, on hydraulic models it is established that
the full admission of an alongshore sediment transport requires performance of a
ratio of a £14° and their greatest accumulation behind a breakwater happens at
a ³53°.
In model which is used in this work, for an assessment of decrease in an expense
of deposits behind a breakwater diffraction of waves on it according to [2] and the
corresponding reduction of heights of waves pays off.
The mark of crests of breakwaters was set equal +1.0 m of BS, width of
breakwaters on top - 9 m. Porosity sketches of breakwaters was accepted equal 0.5
(figured blocks).
Results of calculations of dynamics of beaches at originally offered
configuration of breakwaters (fig. 3) in settlement storm from the Southern and
Western directions are presented in fig. 4, 5.
Fig. 4. Dynamics of a beach at predesign option of an arrangement of
constructions in a settlement storm of 2% of security in a mode from the
Western direction
Fig. 5. Dynamics of a beach at predesign option of an arrangement of
Southern direction
From fig. 4, 5 follows that the offered configuration of
beach protection
constructions, doesn't provide demanded stability and width of beaches (not less than
30 m) on design sites, except for the third (beginning from the West to the East) a
site. In the central parts 1, 2 and 4 of sites, and also on the easternmost tip of the
fourth site washout of a beach strip on width to 20 m is observed. Thus width of
beaches is reduced to 12 – 18 m that can lead to destruction of a wave protection
wall.
As the minimum width of a beach has to make not less than 25 - 30 m, it is
impossible to recognize the offered configuration of constructions accepted.
Further modeling of dynamics of beaches is executed at additional breakwaters
in average parts 1, 2 and 4 of sites. When modeling the distance of additional
breakwaters from the coast, and also their length varied.
Acceptable results are received in the presence of the following system of
additional breakwaters:
1 . Site 1 (western). Length of a breakwater is 120 m, distance from a new wave
protection wall to a breakwater - 200 m.
2 . Site 2. Length of a breakwater is 100 m, distance from a new wave protection
wall to a breakwater - 190 m.
3 . Site 4. Length of a breakwater is 110 m, distance from a new wave protection
wall to a breakwater - 210 m.
Results of calculation of dynamics of beaches at an offered configuration of
constructions are presented in fig. 6, 7.
Fig. 6. Dynamics of a beach at a recommended configuration of
Western direction
Fig. 7. Dynamics of a beach at a recommended configuration of constructions in
a settlement storm of 2% of security in a mode from the Southern direction
From fig. 6, 7 follows that the recommended configuration of constructions as a
whole provides rather uniform width of beaches at pass of settlement storm from the
Western and Southern directions.
Thus, the executed mathematical modeling of dynamics of beaches by bay
option showed that for ensuring stability of design beaches it is required to construct
very extended system of breakwaters at considerable depths. Therefore on technical
and economic comparison of options, the preference was given to the option
combining breakwaters with buns.
References:
1. Proektirovanie morskih beregozashhitnyh sooruzhenij. SP 32-103-97.- M.:
Transstroj, 1998.- 86 s.
2. SNiP 2.06.04-82*. Nagruzki i vozdejstvija na gidrotehnicheskie sooruzhenija
(volnovye, ledovye i ot sudov) Gosstroj SSSR - M.:Strojizdat, 1995. – 46 s.
J21310-090
UDC 621.438
Bessarab A.S., Schutyuk V.V.,
Boyko V.I., 1Vasyliv V.P.
METHODS FOR DETERMINING THE FORM OF CHANNELS SPRAY
DEVICE DRYERS
National university of food tecnologies, Kyiv, Volodimirska st., 68, 01601.
1
National university of life and environmental sciences of Ukraine, Kyiv,
Heroyiv Oborony st., 15, 03041
A method of constructing a geometric shape of the flow channel, which provides
a slow transition between the intermediate section of the channel, enabling to reduce
the unevenness of the velocity field in the channel and to reduce the aerodynamic
losses of spray drying device settings.
Key words: Channel, flow, modeling, dryers, spray equipment.
The spray drying equipment efficiency depends on the spay devices operation. The
existent spray drying devices are equipped with pneumatic and mechanical atomizers of
different size and shape. They waste energy whenever gas (liquid) flows, and that’s
caused primiraly by the unevenness of the velocity field and detachable occurrences. The
methods of flow investigation are well-known (a method of contour integration in
relation, electrodynamic analogy etc.) [1, 2]. It’s recommended to perform the calculation
of the boundary layer to be performed based on the established model of plane boundary
layer [3]. The graphic-analytical method of constructing the flow of the channel is the
most efficient for solving this problem. In accordance with it, the task is set to build a
flowing part of the channel with smooth transitions at a great number of intermediate
generators. The chart of radii of cross-sections can be obtained from the graph of the
cross flow change by its inverse quadratic transformation. The following symbols are
r
used: rij – radius vector of random section of j-th beam; αij = Kij – 1 – radial coefficient of
section completeness. Changing K or α along channel axis in the direction of all rays we
get a certain set of values for any Li and the configuration of intermediate sections of the
channel. To determine the value of Kij we use a linear law of variation.
So:
Kij = K0j[1–(Li/L)]+Knj[1–(Li/L)],
(1)
K0j =C
(2)
r
rij
r
rij
/R0; Knj =C /Rn.
To get the complex of polar radii for each intermediate section:
r
rij = K IJ R I .
(3)
Channel with smooth transitions can be built on the two-dimensional potential
theory. The shape and area of input and output sections of the channel, the position of
the axis are known.
We assume that the initial and final section of the channel are similar and closed
looped equipotential lines φ0=const and φn=const. The same is true for the flow lines
ψ0=const and ψn=const. Intermediate sections are built in the shape of the equipotential
lines φi=const (or the flow lines ψi=const) of plane-parralel steady-state field that is
between the selected contours.
The formula of the channel cross-sectional areas change is as below:
Fi=KiF0,
(4)
where F0 – area of the initial section; Ki – multiplication factor that takes in
count expansion (contraction) of the channel section 0≤ i≤ n–1; n–1 – a number of
intermediate sections.
The velocity potential and stream function in polar coordinates r, q ; are as
below:
æ
è
1ö
rø
(5)
æ
è
1ö
rø
(6)
j = ç r + ÷ cos q ;
y = ç r - ÷ cos q .
Tech lines from the dipole lie inside the circle and are tertiary close-looped
curves. The zero line corresponds to the initial flow channel cross section and has the
shape of semicircle. The penultimate section is outlined by n - 1 flow line. The last
section is a circle.
Let's assume that ψ=Ci, where Ci – some constants, that needs to be defined
further. Then we can get the non-dimensional radius vector of the i -th line from this
equation (6):
)
(
r = C i ± C i2 + 4 sin q / sin q .
(7)
After analysing the formula (7) we can claim that the values of Сi<0 and the positive
sign of the square root correspond to the current lines that lie within the upper semicircle.
If the value is С0<0, we obtain a limit line ОАВ<0. In case when Сi→¥, curves described
by equation (7) become circular curves, with areas close to zero. Nondimensional area of
the intermediate circuit is calculated by the formula
Fi =
Ci
2
n
ò
0
C i + 4 sin 2 q
sin q
dq +
p
2
Basing on elliptic integrals of the first genus the expression (5) is as follows:
(8)
Fi =
p ïì
C14
1
í
2 ï 8 C12
î
é
ù ïü
3C12
5C14
1
+
+
+
a
ê
úý ,
2
32 4 + C12
ë 4 4 + C1
û ïþ
(
)
(
)
(9)
where α – other members of the range that are sufficiently small compared to the
first members.
r
The area of the input section is (9): F0 = p / 2 .
The scaling factor for the i -th countour outline is defined by the formula
r r
Fi = F0 = mi .
(10)
Out of this equation (10) using expression (9) we'll get:
mi = 1 -
é
3C12
5C14
+
ê1 +
2
32 4 + C12
8 4 + C12 êë 4 4 + C1
C14
(
)
(
ù
ú.
2
úû
)
(11)
Basing on the law (4) considering formula (10) for dimensional radius vector of
i-th section we'll get:
r r 2 K i F0
r = ri
pmi
(12)
Сi constant that is in the equation (7) is calculated as below. First of all the
equipotential line of the greatest length should be drawn — line ODEL (fig. 1).
B
D
A
O
E
L
fig. 1. The scheme of the dipole
Since the equation of the streamlines are presented in the coordinate system r, θ,
r
we mark the equipotential components ODEL in the new coordinate system and r β
with the beginning
r
r = (1 - sin b ) / cos b ,
where 0<β<π/2.
(13)
The ODEL line is devided into n – intervals of the same length Δl1=h. The
length of each interval Δl1 is calculated by the formula
h=
1
cos b i =1
2
cos 2 b i =1 + (1 - cos b i =1 ) Db i ,
2
(14)
where Δβi=βi–βi-1, it follows that
b i = b i =1
h
cos 2 b i =1
cos 6 b i =1 + (1 - cos b i =1 )
2
.
(15)
r
r
If the beam β=βi, and crosses the line ОDЕL at a point D (βi, ri ), So = βi, ri = ri .
Out of the formula (15) we find the value of βi keeping in mind that the length of
r
the interval is h. ri = ri can be get from expretion (13) where ri, and Сi can be get out
of formula (7). Thus in the equation (7) instead of the value q we use βi. Then out of
r
formula (11) mi is calculated and the value of the radius vector ri is get out of (12).
The obtained values of the radius vectors are used to build the desired contours of
intermediate sections of the channels.
In case of complex profiles of the initial and final sections of the channel, the use of
this method is based on certain mathematical difficulties. Then it’s convenient to build the
intermediate section graphically using a MathCAD package.
At first the initial and the final section of the channel are drawn according to the
selected scale (fig. 2).
90
120
60
150
180
A
30
E
0
fig. 2. Building ekipotentsialov.
After that a long flow line АЕ, is drown, which is divided into segments of the same
length, equal to the number of selected sections of the channel.
Then, a method of electrical modeling is applied to drawn the lines of equal potential
that are crossing the ends of the segments. The crossed-looped lines that are created as a
result are the required form of the intermediate sections. Planimeter determines the area Fi* ,
limited by the i-th equipotential. To calculate the scale mi we use the formular similar to
(10):
mi = Fi * / F0* .
(16)
The increase or decrease of the crossing sections is performed using a
pantograph, having a scaling factor (K/mi)0,5, where, Ki takes to account expansion
(contraction) of the section channel, the same way as in the formula (1).
This method allows to avoid errors at the design stage of channels and branch
pipes of spray drying devices and may be used in the design of converging and
difussing channels with various forms of input and output sections.
Conventional signs:
δ* – displacement thickness,
F – area of the section of the channel,
m2;
m;
L – distance along the channel axis, m;
φ – velocity potential;
r, q – polar coordinates;
ψ – flow function;
β – azimuth direction angle;
r
r - radius vector
R- the radius of an equivalent circle section of the channel, m
Indices:
0
–
section
at
the
channel
beginning;
i – 0…n – section numbers;
j – radius vector direction.
n – section at the channel end;
Conclusions
The simple and pretty precise method has been developed to build the channels
of spay devices that are widely used in the spray drying units.
The method allows to calculate and design channels and pipes with a small
uneveness of the velocity field and low aerodynamic drag.
References:
1. Bessarab A.S. The method of constructing hydrodynamically efficient
channels of power plants / A.S. Bessarab, V.V. Shutiuk, T.A. Vaschuk // Heatprocess ingineering. — 2003.– № 6 (25).– P. 42-45.
2. Holwer D. Shadow graph method in aerodynamics / D . Ho l we r , R.
Нnorth.– М.: Mir. 1966. – 179 p.
3. Draganov B.H. The method of shaping the pipe that is joining the collector
with the supplying port. / B.H. Draganov, A.M. Kolesnikov // Combastion
engines.— 1980 — Edition. 32 — P. 45-50.
J21310-091
UDC 662.767.3
Polishchuk A.V., Kazak, N.I., Polishchuk V.N.
THE RESEARCH OF AN EFFICIENT BIODIESEL NEUTRALIZATION
National university of life and environmental sciences of Ukraine
This paper analyzes the methods of washing. The experimental results of
biodiesel neutralization with 1% aqueous citric acid solution was shown
Keywords: methyl ester, biodiesel, alkalinity, water wash
Introduction. Due to the emergence of a global energy crisis, humanity is
actively searches for alternatives to fossil energy sources. Particular attention is paid
to the search for substitutes for light oils. Because without cars, planes, trains,
humanity does not imagine its continued existence. The large part of the vehicles, the
majority of tractors and other mobile and stationary machines are driven by diesel
engines, which at this stage is mainly work on diesel oil. One of the mineral diesel’s
alternatives can be a methyl ester (biodiesel).
The biodiesel produced using the traditional technology with the heterogeneous
catalyst, must be cleaned, because the alkaline catalyst is corrosive to the engine, the
products of which, falling into the gap between the cylinder and the piston, causing
them to abrasive wearout. When penetrating into the fuel system it can clog fuel
filters or completely block the work of the fuel equipment because the fuel cannot
spray out through the nozzle.
A common method to remove water-soluble impurities is "wet» biodiesel
cleaning, also known as water washing. This process uses water, which serves as a
solvent, washes away impurities, leaving the pure biodiesel [1]. Water washings are
divided into bubble (foam), aerosol and volume.
Foam washing comprises mixing 1/3 of water and 2/3 of biodiesel and air
bubbling through the water layer. Air bubbles provide indirect stirring both liquids they capture a small amount of water and carry it through the biodiesel gathering
catalyst salt (soap), formed by the neutralization of biodiesel by weak acid aqueous
solution, and other impurities. When the bubble is broken at the surface, the water
descends and gathers more soap and impurities. Approximately 6 hours washing the
airflow is cut off and water is drained, fresh water is added and the process repeated.
These water changes occur three times, until the water is clear and its pH is neutral.
The disadvantages of technology is inefficient purification of poor quality
biodiesel or small quantities of biodiesel. Because the bubbles can mix the water and
biodiesel very intencively, this leads to the formation of an emulsion of two liquids.
However, when this method is used washing minimal amount of water compared to
other technologies.
When using spray wash, there is a sprays system, placed over a layer of
biodiesel, with the possibility of water drain after flow through the fuel. Spray rinse
less fuel mixes than bubble and gradually removes soap. The softer mixing means
less chance of forming an emulsion. However, this process uses a larger amount of
water and more sophisticated equipment.
When using volume wash, the equal amounts of water and biodiesel are mixed,
and then they are asserted, the water is drained, and the process is repeated many
times. This method is more time-consuming and uses more water than the bubble
wash [2, 3].
Typically, the washing of biodiesel using a combination of methods of washing:
preliminary spray and then bubble wash or the simultaneous aerosol and bulk
washing. For example, the technology of the production of biodiesel in the U.S.
installed BP-190 provides a two-fold washing biodiesel combined aerosol and bulk
methods [4, 5].
However, in any case, the washing operation is preceded by neutralization,
which is a type of washing step and involves passage of waster mix with a small
amount of acid through a biodiese. The acid reacts with the alkali catalyst, causes the
formation of salts (soaps), which are then washed with water washing .
However, not in domestic nor in foreign literature the amount of acid which
must be added to biodiesel to neutralize is not stated. Therefore, the aim of our
research is to establish the parameters of the neutralization of bio-diesel to bring it up
to standard quality marks.
The results of the study. To remove the effects washing of factors when cleaning
biodiesel, investigation of parameters of biodiesel neutralization were carried out
without followed by washing. Formed soap sedimented by gravity settling for 2-3
days followed by drain. The alkalinity of biodiesel was determined by no
compensation potentiometric titration using a pH meter, which acts as the ion
analyzer AI-123, glass electrode ES-1, the auxiliary laboratory silver chloride
electrode EVL-1M and temperature sensor TC-06.
Methyl ester is prepared by adding rapeseed oil with a ratio of potassium
methylate methanol catalyst (potassium hydroxide) 10 : 0,7 (methyl pH 9.45), 10 :
0.9 (pH=8.32), 10 : 1.1 (pH=7.5) and 10 : 1.3 ( pH=7.35). Then the purification is
made. The alkalinity of the produced biodiesel was determined. Thereafter the 1%
aqueous solution of citric acid, 2, 4, 6, 8 and 10 ml per 100 ml of methyl ester was
added into biodiesel, followed by stirring on a magnetic stirrer at a rotational speed of
the magnetic stirring device 214 rev/min.
Neutralized methyl ester poured into a separatory funnel where the gravitational
sedimentation occurred salts formed within 2-3 days. Washing of biodiesel was not
conducted to exclude its influence on the research results. The precipitated salts were
extracted and carried out methyl alkalinity determination as described [6].
It was planned to determine a dependency of neutralization of methyl ester from
its pH, concentration and volume of the aqueous solution of citric acid. Variation
factors such as the number of washes, the dispersed droplets in the washing, the
agitator speed stirring was excluded .
Experimental results neutralization methyl 1% aqueous solution of citric acid are
shown in fig. 1.
The obtained value of biodiesel alkalinity are compared with a valid alkalinity
biodiesel specified in the German standard DIN 51606 for biodiesel [7], which should
not exceed 5 mg/kg.
It is shown on the Fig. 1 that the target indicator(less then 5 mg/kg) can be
achieved by the addition from 4,5 to 6 ml of pH = 9.45 1% aqueous citric acid
solution to 100 ml of methyl ester or from 4 to 5 ml aqueous acid solution with
pH=8.32. In other cases, the alkalinity of the neutralized biodiesel exceeds 5 mg/kg.
This also applies to neutralize biodiesel at pH 7,5 and 7,35 of all the range of 1%
aqueous solution of citric acid volumes.
0,055
0,05
0,045
Alkalinity, mg КОН/g
0,04
0,035
рН=9,45
рН=8,32
рН=7,5
рН=7,35
DIN 51606
0,03
0,025
0,02
0,015
0,01
0,005
0
0
2
4
6
8
10
Volume citric acid solution, ml on 100 ml biodiesel
Fig. 1. Alkalinity biodiesel when neutralized with various amounts of 1%
aqueous solution of citric acid
Contusions
1. The biodiesel water washing is conducted by bubble, aerosol and bulk
methods. When using bubble washing, the formation of an emulsion of biodiesel and
salt catalyst can occur. Aerosol and bulk flushing are characterized by the use of
more water and more sophisticated equipment.
2. Carrying water washing biodiesel is preceded by its neutralization.
3. The target indicator(less then 5 mg/kg) can be achieved by the addition from
4,5 to 6 ml of pH=9.45 1% aqueous citric acid solution to 100 ml of methyl ester or
from 4 to 5 ml aqueous acid solution with pH=8.32. In other cases, the alkalinity of
the neutralized biodiesel exceeds 5 mg/kg. This also applies to neutralize biodiesel at
pH 7.5 and 7.35 of all the range of 1% aqueous solution of citric acid volumes.
References:
1. Voegele Erin. Report outlines global biodiesel production / Erin Voegele //
Biodiesel Magazine. - 2011. - August 31. - Р. 4.
2.
Пузырьковая
промывка
биодизеля
/
Recscling
повторное
–
использование или возвращение в оборот отходов производства или мусора
[Eлeктронний
рeсурс]
/
2013.
Рeжим
доступу
до
журн.:
http://recyclingforum.ru/showthread.php/250-Пузырьковая-промывкабиодизеля?s=4077b58b0ba1b77a0d26ea9b5a19bb42. Дата доступу: 27/08/2013.
3. Alovert М. Collaborative biodiesel tutorial. "Appleesid" processor / Maria
Alovert // Biodiesel Magazine. - 2005. - 6 p.
4. БП-190. - New York: FIA - 12 c.
5. Технології виробництва біодизеля: [курс лекцій для студ. сільськогосп.
вузів зі спец. 8.092900 – "Екобіотехнологія"] / В.Г. Мироненко, В.О. Дубровін,
В.М. Поліщук, С.В. Драгнєв. - К.: Холтех, 2009. - 100 с.
6. Поліщук О.В. Методика визначення лужності біодизеля / О.В. Поліщук,
Н.І. Козак, В.М. Поліщук // Науковий вісник Національного університету
біоресурсів і природокористування. - 2013. - № 185. Ч. 2 - С. 83-91.
7. International standards for BIODIESEL - Jakarta, Indonesia: Rob-Oil
Corporation - 2 p.
J21310-092
UDC 639.64
Svidlo K.V. 1,Peresichnyi, M.I. 2, Dyakov A.G. 3, D.V. Lipovyi D.V. 1
PROJECT TECHNOLOGY OF VEGETABLE GERODIETETICAL
SMOOTHIE
1
Kharkiv Institute of Trade and Economics of Kyiv University of Trade and
Economics, Kharkiv, Otakara Yarosha 8, 61045
2
3
Kyiv University of Trade and Economis, Kyiv, Kioto 19,02156
Kharkiv National University of Catering and Trade, Kharkiv,
Klochkovskaya 333, 61045
In this paper presents research on moisture content changes of holy thistle,
pumpkin, and oat seed grits and cellulose in the composition of the pectin-zosterynum
against hydromodulus and swelling time. Bond strength between moist or grits /
cellulose and pectin-zosterynum was studied by determining spin-spin relaxation. It
was estimated that value of moist content depends on chemical composition of grits.
Model of vegetable smoothie technology was built in accordance with the obtained
data.
Key words: gerodietetics, smoothie, nuclear magnetic spectroscopy, moist
content, elderly, nutritional correction
The contemporary life is characterized by outstanding achievements in
science and technology. At the same time we envisage dramatic environmental
degradation, mode of life changes, behavioral and emotional burden, endless lack of
time and modified nutrition. Mode of life and food are the major factors which
determine human health, their efficiency and capability to withstand stress which
eventually influence age and quality of life. Basal diet provides the human being with
malleable material and vital power which mold health, physical and creative activity,
lifetime and ability to recreate. A special group of foodstuffs which ensure abovementioned criteria applies to functional food products.
In the recent decades, there appeared a principally new beverage brand
called drinks breakfast or smoothie [1] which is a kind of thick viscid foodstuff. It is
both beverage and breakfast with milk and fruit additives, dietary fibers and vitamins
with chemical composition closely approaching to gerodietetical requirements. The
production of “healthy” foodstuffs is a fast growing market in Ukraine and
worldwide and its market segment of special drinks is not completely formed. The
segment of geterodietetical drinks along with sports and tonic drinks is just
developing.
The production of smoothie requires high-quality natural raw products. For
example, smoothie in Switzerland contains 20% of nonfat sour milk and 52% of fruit
juice (Coop Betty Bossy). In Netherlands, popular smoothie is based on nonfat
yoghurt, little sugar and 60% of natural lime or peach juice (Sisi Frutmania). In
Britain, they prefer it with soya extract with high content of fruit bits (Tom Soya) and
natural carrot juice (Innocent). Ireland produces drinks containing 50% of fruit bits
with nonfat yoghurt (Tropicana Smoothies).
The research of smoothie new technologies demands studying moisture
content as a function of new ingredients used and operating conditions of their
treatment. In many cases, it is moisture content that is the key parameter which
influences quality of ready-made products and is critical while designing new
smoothie technologies.
Degree of swelling of oat, hole thistle and pumpkin grits and cellulose was
studied at room temperature (20°C). To determine degree of swelling, the tested
objects (grits or cellulose of the above-mentioned plants in the composition of pectin
seaweed Zostera (pectin-zosterynum)) were filled up with 10, 15, and 20 g of liquid
according to the defined hydromodulus (1:10, 1:15, 1:20). We made 9 sets of such
specimens because the tested object swelled 10, 20,… 90 min. 1 or 2 minute
centrifugation sessions at the speed of 1000, 2000 or 3000 rpm were carried out every
10 minutes. After that, we poured out the unabsorbed liquid and weighed the
centrifuged damp objects under test and made the formula evaluation (1) [7] by a
standard gravimetric method.
(1)
ἁ𝑚 = 𝑚 − 𝑚𝑜 ⁄𝑚𝑜 ,
where 𝑚𝑜 and m - polymer mass before and after swelling.
In accordance with the general theory of making experiments [8] we built a
table with the results obtained. The table 1 contains the data about degree of swelling
of grits and cellulose centrifuged at a speed of 1,000 rpm during 1 minute as a
function of time of swelling for hydromodulus 1:20.
Observations of nuclear magnetic resonance were carried out in the NMR
(nuclear magnetic resonance) spectrometers. The simplified circuit of the gage unit is
shown in Fig. 1.
Fig. 1. The circuit of the NMR spectrometer gage unit: 1 – permanent
magnet; 2 – specimen; 3 – radiofrequency coil; 4 – thermostat.
Stationary and non-stationary methods of monitoring nuclear magnetic
resonance are used. One of the non-stationary methods is the spin-echo method
proposed by Hahn [9]. This method has been successfully used for studying
relaxation processes and molecular mobility in fluids.
According to the Hahn method, two radiofrequency signals are sent onto
the specimen in a magnetic field with a time interval τ; after that, at the distance of 2τ
there appears a spin echo signal, which has the amplitude defined by the expression
A = A 0 exp é- 2t - 2 g 2 G 2 Dt 3 ù
T2
3
êë
úû
(2)
where T2 – the time of spin-spin relaxation, γ – hydromagnetic ratio of the
nuclei under test, G – permanent magnetic field gradient, D – self-diffusion
coefficient.
So, the examined double-pulse method of spin echo can be used for
studying
spin-spin relaxation time T2 and the self-diffusion coefficient D. In the case of
low molecule mobility of the studied sample, the second summand in the brackets of
equation (2) can be neglected. Then, the spin echo amplitude will be estimated by a
simplified equation.
A = A 0 expé - 2t ù
T2 úû
êë
(3)
Holy thistle, pumpkin and oat grits and cellulose were studied in the
impulse NMR spectrometer with the Hahn method. In the experiment, spin echo
amplitude was tested as a function of τ. The time of spin-spin relaxation time T2 was
calculated by using formula (3).
Vegetable products are the major source of dietary fibers and amino acids.
The largest quantity of dietary fibers was characteristic of recycled secondary
products like cereals, grains, flour seeds (grits, cellulose etc.). This sampling was
made due to available and limitless resources of organic polymers and practical
usefulness of raw vegetables in gero-dietetics. The technological process which was
used for preliminary data processing is characterized by input and output variables.
Each kind of grits may have its own mathematical model which may help develop
optimal parameters of the technological process.
Analyses of publications and previous results [4-6] made it reasonable to
set the following input and output limits for each specimen: treatment time 10…..90
minutes,
hidromodulus value changed within the range of 1:10, 1:20. When making
experiments in order to better understand the obtained results we used reciprocal
hydromodulus values, which changed within the range of 0.1 – 0.05.
The diagrams (Fig. 2, 3, 4), which allow visually to estimate input-moisture
content dependence, were plotted on the basis of the overall experiment for the tested
objects centrifuged at 1,000 rpm for 1 min. in function of swelling time for
hydromodulus 1:20.
It is obvious that grits and cellulose in the composition of
pectin seaweed Zostera swelling intensively grows after 20….. 30 min. and reaches
their maximum after 40 min. for grits and after 50 min. for cellulose. Moreover,
cellulose adsorbs moisture and binds it more firmly than grits, and this dependence is
visible for all kinds of raw materials (Saint-Mary-thistle, pumpkin and oat seeds).
Figures 2, 3, 4 show that, according to the moisture content, values of all
these investigated raw materials can be ranged as follows: pumpkin cellulose →
pumpkin grits →Saint-Mary-thistle cellulose → Saint-Mary-thistle grits → oat grits
→ oat cellulose. So, the value of pumpkin moisture content is much higher than that
of oat or Saint-Mary-thistle. It is caused by significant differences in chemical
composition of grits and cellulose and, secondly, by discrepancies in dispersion.
Higher values of moisture in recycled pumpkin seeds in the composition of
pectin pectin-zosterynum are due to significant content of fruit coat, which is rich in
composite polysaccharide-cellulose and hemicellulose which are characterized by
high ability to swell. Significant difference in moisture swelling kinetics of grits and
cellulose of pumpkin, Saint-Mary-thistle and oat in the composition of pectinzosterynum can be explained by analyzing the NMP spectrometer treated specimens.
Foodstaffs have a wide spectrum of moisture content from few percent in
dried products to almost 100% in drinks. Significant information concerning moisture
conditions in food products is obtained with the nuclear magnetic resonance method.
Spin-spin relaxation time value T2, which significantly depends on water molecular
mobility in a tested object, is an informative measuring parameter. In systems with
small water molecule mobility, spin-spin relaxation time T2 is a low quantity, but in
great water molecule mobility systems, time T2 increases considerably. Thus, we can
make conclusions as to free and bound moisture available in food products, taking
into account the fact that the bound moisture in food has a low mobility and free
moisture has a great mobility which was evident from spin-spin relaxation time
experiments (table 1).
Table 1. Spin-spin relaxation time T2 for grits and cellulose of tested food
products
Т2 ,sеc
Food product name
Holy thistle grits in the composition of pectin-zosterynum
0,083
Holy thistle cellulose in the composition of pectin-
0,031
zosterynum
Pumpkin grits in the composition of pectin-zosterynum
0,046
Pumpkin cellulose in the composition of pectin-zosterynum
0,06
Oat grits in the composition of pectin-zosterynum
0,067
Oat cellulose in the composition of pectin-zosterynum
0,069
Analyzing obtained results, we can see that spin-spin relaxation time T2 relating
to free water is small in all tested products. It means that the tested specimens had
low water molecule mobility i.e. water state in the tested specimens is rather bound
than free.
In terms of threpsology, we can assume that in the cases of
prolonged diseases we must take into account nutrient status of the patients as well –
it especially concerns aged and
ἁ
400
300
200
10 20
30 40
Шрот розторопші
100
50
60
70
0
80
90
Fig. 2. Dependence of holy thistle grits and cellulose in the composition of
pectin-zosterynum on time for hydromodulus 1:20 at 20°C
500
450
400
350
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
Шрот гарбуза
Клітковина гарбуза
10 20
30 40
50 60
70
80
90
Fig. 3. Dependence of pumpkin seed grits and cellulose in the composition
of pectin-zosterynum on time for hydromodulus 1:20 at 20°C
300
250
200
10 20
30
40
50
60
70
150
100
50
0
80
Шрот вівса
Клітковина вівса
90
Fig. 4. Dependence of oat seed grits and cellulose in the composition of
pectin-zosterynum on time for hydromodulus 1:20 at 20°C
old people. Timely nutrient homeostasis for leveling physiological human needs
will facilitate efficient changes in normalizing metabolic disorders.
The metabolic syndrome conception was put forward in 1988 on the basis of the
hypothesis
that
metabolic
disorder
complex
(hyperglycemia, dyslipidemia,
hypertensia) have a common pathogenetic basis which can obviously be insulin
resistance.
Scientists obtained convincing data [10, 11, 12], asserting that insulin activity
deterioration is due to harmful fat consumption, especially saturated fats and transisomers of fatty acids. It is shown that polynsatureted fatty acid (PSFA) ω- 3 has
preventive effects on insulin resistance growth which is affected by rich fat diet, but
PSFA ω- 6 inhibits penetration of eicosapentaenoic acid into cell membranes
(platelets, erythrocytes, neurofilaments, monocytes and hepatocytes), whereby
reducing insulin sensitivity. Thus, high level of PSFA ω- 3 leads to better sensitivity
to insulin, and high ratio of PSFA ω- 6 / ω- 3 is associated with high insulin on an
empty stomach. Isocaloric replacement of unsaturated fatty acids for polynsatureted
fatty acids leads to better sensitivity to insulin, lower abdominal fat, changing neither
the correlation between waist and hip size nor fatty tissue content in the body.
Lactose consumption is positive for insulin resistance, while use of glucose, fructose,
and other carbohydrates negatively influences insulin resistance. Various dietary
fibers and resistant starch positively influence insulin sensitivity too. This influence is
due to the formation of the nutrient-induced short-link fat acids, which block
gluconeogenesis in kidneys, gastro-intestinal hormone secretion with positive effect
on the large intestine neuromotor evacuation function and activation of pancreas
ferments.
A number of studies on dietetics showed [11, 13] that taking hypo-calorie diets
including low-fat milk products, vegetables, fruit, grain and bean products
substantially improves health of patients and, notably, it reduces systolic and diastolic
arterial pressure and glycemia when eating on an empty stomach.
We design a gerodietetic smoothie technology for nutrient prevention of
metabolic syndrome from the position of system approach and in accordance with the
guidelines of medical specialists and nutritiologists. The source of PSFA ω- 3 may be
flax or pumpkin seed oils, which are also rich in fat-soluble vitamins A and E. Flax
seed oil holds 0.32 mg% of retinol and 119 mg% of tocopherol and pumpkin seed oil
contains 0.5 mg% of retinol and 132 mg% of tocopherol. Kefir was chosen as a
source of lactose, which is positive for insulin resistance. Pumpkin, holy thistle and
oat seed grits and cellulose (their functional and technological properties have been
studied well) can be taken as a source of dietary fibers, which positively affect insulin
sensitivity.
The smoothie technology is presented as an integral system with integrate
principal sub-systems C1, C2, B, A, which are functionally aimed at obtaining
gerodietetical-designated smoothie, which is the initial result for the system
functioning.
The chart (Fig. 5) shows that
- subsystems C1, C2 – obtaining prescribed components of independent
semi-finished products with preset quality performances;
- subsystem B – obtaining a semi-finished product from separate semifinished products;
- subsystem A – obtaining articles with quality and safety parameters
which meet the necessary requirements.
s
weet red
bell
pepper
c
t
pa
rsley
hol
y thistle
seed
cellulose
ke
MCP
mato
juice
swelling
hydromodulus
= 1:20
Pecti
n-zosterinum
blending till O = 250
mcm
to
fi
semi-finished
cellulose
vegetable
Mixing
650rpm
T=2-3min.
s
lt
desig
ning
carrot
fl
reali
zation
Pu
mpking
Semifinished smoothie
Smoothie
“Vegetable
Delight”
Fig. 5. Manufacturing scheme of gero-dietetical smoothie preparation
Working out a technological system model for production of smoothie
“Vegetable Delight” gives us an opportunity to thoroughly investigate basic
processes which take place at all stages of the technological process and to assess
their optimum behavior.
In subsystem C1, holy thistle cellulose in the composition of pectin-zosterynum
is swelling at hydromodulus 1:20 in kefir at τ = 45-60 min. In subsystem C2, raw
material preparation – mechanical culinary processing (MCP) of celery and carrot
with their subsequent blending in a blender with τ = 4-5 min. is taking place.
Receipt mixture is forming in subsystem B by combining receipt components of
subsystems C1 and C2 with their further mixing in a blender with τ = 2-3 min.
Subsysteme A includes the stages which allow us to get the finished product with
specified properties, quality index and composition; designing and realization at τ =
+14…..+16°С.
The quality of gerodietetic smoothie was tested for standard quality requirements for
products made according to conventional technology. Additional qualities of the new
product have also been tested in accordance with organoleptic, physical, chemical,
microbiological criteria. The degustation certificates of the gerodietetic smoothie
were acknowledged at the private entrepreneur company “Folomiyeva”, the limited
company “Vostorg” , and at the presentation show “Welcoming days of Moscow
region guests in Kharkiv” which was sponsored by Moscow region government and
Kharkiv regional state administration. It witnesses that the gerodietetic smoothie
looks nice and has excellent consistency, taste and flavor and expert rating shows that
it meets all requirements for high-quality products.
The optimum swelling time of Saint-Mary-thistle and oat grits and
cellulose in the composition of pectin-zosterynum is within the range of 30 ….. 40
min. For pumpkin grits and cellulose in the composition of pectin-zosterynum the
time is 30 ….. 40 min.
For oat, water content in grits and cellulose is the same. Holy thistle
cellulose tends to bind moisture better than grits, and pumpkin does better than grits.
References
1.
Сирохман І.В. Товарознавство харчових продуктів функціонального
призначення: навч. пос.[для студ. вищ. навч. закл.] / І.В. Сирохман,
В.М.Завгородня. –К.:Центр учбової літератури, 2009. – 544с.
2.
Functional Food & Drink
[електр. ресурс] (http:// www.foodbev.com/
subscriptions/magazines/functionaldrinks)
3. Simpson Craig,
Abrahams Darren, Steptoe & Johnson LLP (Brussels)
Functional drinks: anuncertainfuture//LifeSciences, 2005.-#6.-P.47-51. [електр.
ресурс] (http://www.steptoe.com/assets/attachments/1048.pdf)
4. Manthey F. A., Lee R. E., Hall C. A., Processing and cooking effects on lipid
content and stability of alpha-linolenic acid in spaghetti containing ground flaxs //
J.agr. FoodChem. – 2002. –Vol.50, N.6. – P. 1668-1671.
5. Mazza G., Oomah B. Flaxseed, dietary fiber and cyanogens//
Flaxseed in Human Nutrition. – Champaign, Il:AOS Prees,1995. -№1. –
P.263.
6. Bhatty R. Laboratory and pilot plan sex traction and purification of
β-glucans from oat grains// J. Cereal Chem.-1995. - №22. – P.163-170.
7. Теоретичні основи харчових технологій [Текст]: навчальний посібник/
П.П.Пивоваров, [та ін.]; за ред. П.П.Пивоварова. – Х.: ХДУХТ, 2010. -363с.
8. Методы исследований и организация экспериментов. / под ред. проф.
К.П. Власова. – Х.: Гуманитарный центр, 2002. – 256 с.
9. Фаррар Т. Импульсная и Фурье-спектроскопия ЯМР [Текст] / Фаррар
Т., Беккер Э.- М.: Мир, 1973.
10. Зыкина В.В. Индивидуализация диетотерапии больных сахарным
диабетом типа 2 на основе анализа пищевого статуса с использованием методов
нутриметаболомики: Дис. ... канд. мед. наук. — Москва, 2008. — 139 с.
11.
Вискунова
А.А.
Разработка
и
оценка
эффективности
оптимизированных диетических рационов для пациентов с метаболическим
синдромом: Дис. ... канд. мед. наук. — Москва, 2010. — 181 с.
12.
Бирюкова
Е.В.
Молекулярно-генетические,
гормонально-
метаболические и клинические аспекты метаболического синдрома: Дис. ... д-р.
мед. наук. — Москва, 2009. — 314 с.
13. Юдочкин А.В. Современные представления о роли питания и
генетических факторов в развитии метаболического синдрома/ А.В. Юдочкин,
Шарафетдинов Х.Х., Плотникова О.А., Стародубова А.В.// Вопросы питания. –
Том 80, 2011.- №3.- С.18-24.
J21310-093
UDC 004.451.55
Filippov V.N.
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY FOR DETERMINATION
OF ENVIRONMENTAL ACTIVITIES FOR COMPANIES REFINERY
AND PETROCHEMICAL COMPLEX BASHKORTOSTAN
Ufa State Petroleum Technological University,
Provides information on the technical state enterprises refinery and
petrochemical complex in the Republic of Bashkortostan. Notes the influence of
enterprises on the environment.
The authors have developed electronic information databases, allowing to
analyze the effectiveness of environmental monitoring, creating conditions for the
development, supply and implementation of local treatment and disposal of
wastewater at refineries and petrochemical industry of the Republic of
Bashkortostan.
Keywords: information technology, electronic databases, environment, oil
refining, petrochemicals.
The development of the fuel and energy complex, large-scale production of
energy, alas, have a negative impact on the environment. This fact is obvious. So you
have to look for acceptable compromises between the development of the energy
complex and the ability to preserve the quality of the environment.
The Republic of Bashkortostan is certainly one of the most industrialized
regions of the Russian Federation. The concentration of industrial production in the
Republic of Bashkortostan is much higher than the all-Russian figures, especially in
the placement of oil refining, chemical and petrochemical industries.
In cities such as Ufa, Blagoveshchensk, Salavat, Sterlitamak concentrated
chemical, petrochemical and refining industries.
Technological equipment of Russian factories enables today to get from one ton
of oil to average about 16% of retail gasoline (for comparison, in the U.S. the figure
is 43% and in the EU - 23%). On average, the Ufa refinery from one tonne of oil
produce more than 25% of gasoline and stably hold the second place in Russia for its
production. The share of high-octane gasoline is 84.2% [1,2].
To ensure the effectiveness of the analysis of environmental monitoring at
refineries and petrochemical Bashkortostan author developed an electronic
information database that allows you to trace the development of the technological
chain of selected enterprises - research objects [3].
For a visual representation of the database used by the interrelated Web-pages,
which are used to create hypertext markup language HTML (Hypertext Markup
Language). The structure of the database [4] can be described in four basic steps:
- step 1. Home Page database. Opened by running the Index.htm. The page
contains the names of companies refining and petrochemical complex in Bashkiria,
registered in the database;
- step 2. The opening pages of information about a particular company.
Produced by clicking the mouse on the selected company. In the window that
displays the name of the company, the image of the company, below is a brief
description, and finally the left side makes it possible to obtain information on years
of development;
- step 3. View information by year. Produced by clicking the mouse on the
selected year. The table includes the complete information on each specific hardware
setup. In the event that detailed data are not available and can not be represented as a
table, a window, designed in free style. In both cases, the work hypertext links
through which you can view the map of the installation process;
- step 4. View information about the installation. Clicking on the hyperlink get
detailed information about the installation (basic and technological scheme and a
description of it).
By the nature of the environmental hazards of oil refining and petrochemical
enterprises belong to the first category, which ensures a high degree of contamination
of water and air, and soil as a result of unsustainable production activities.
Manufacturing activity is associated with recycling and disposal of waste at
treatment plants. That, therefore, are an integral part of any petrochemical company.
The need to protect water from pollution originated in Bashkiria immediately after
the commissioning of the first refinery - Ishimbai and Ufa. In the factories were built
sewage treatment plants, but they were far from perfect.
The XXI century was a milestone in scientific and technological activities of
mankind and as a result the century, who put a lot of questions on environmental
safety.
Further development of the analysis of the effectiveness of environmental
activities at refineries and petrochemical republic was associated with the
development of two electronic databases:
- database of research carried out and search operations aimed at the
development and implementation of systems (methods) of water protection purposes
at refineries and petrochemical Bashkiria [5];
- database of water conservation measures implemented complexes destination
for refineries and petrochemical plants in Bashkortostan [6].
Integrated use of the developed electronic information databases enables the
analysis of the effectiveness of environmental monitoring, creating conditions for the
development of corrective action, as well as the development, supply and
implementation of local treatment and disposal of wastewater at refineries and
petrochemical industry of the Republic of Bashkortostan.
The developed electronic information database [7] have been implemented and
successfully used in scientific research and analytical departments of a number of
enterprises of Bashkortostan.
References:
1. OAO ANK «Bashneft'» //VESTI, informacionnyi byulleten', 2011.1(62).- S. 12-13. [in Russian].
2.
Soshnikova O. Bol'shaya himiya //Zhurnal «Biznes», 2011.- 5 (128).
S.23-26. [in Russian].
3.
Filippov V.N. Formirovanie i razvitie predpriyatii neftepererabatyvayu-
shego, himicheskogo i neftehimicheskogo kompleksa Bashkortostana /V.N.
Filippov, R.N. Hlestkin //Bash. him. zh. 2008. T. 15. - №4. - S. 75-84. [in Russian].
4.
A.s. 2007620180 RF ob oficial'noi registracii bazy dannyh.
Formirovanie
tehnologicheskih
processov
predpriyatii
neftepererabatyvayushego i neftehimicheskogo kompleksa Bashkortostana /V.N.
Filippov, R.N. Hlestkin: zayavl. 22.03.2007; opubl. 11.05.2007, Byul. 3(60).- S. 353.
[in Russian].
5.
A.s. 2008620366 RF ob oficial'noi registracii bazy dannyh.
Nauchno-issledovatel'skie i poiskovye raboty, napravlennye na razrabotku i
vnedrenie kompleksov (metodov) vodoohrannogo naznacheniya na predpriyatiyah
neftepererabotki i neftehimii Bashkirii /V.N. Filippov, R.N. Hlestkin: zayavl.
12.05.2008; opubl. 03.10.2008, Byul. 1(66).- S. 329. [in Russian].
6.
A.s. 2008620306 RF ob oficial'noi registracii bazy dannyh
Vnedrenie
kompleksov
meropriyatii
vodoohrannogo
naznacheniya
na
predpriyatiyah neftepererabotki i neftehimii Bashkortostana /V.N. Filippov, R.N.
Hlestkin: zayavl. 12.05.2008; opubl. 15.08.2008, Byul. 4(65).- S. 369. [in Russian].
7.
Filippov V.N. Obespechenie ekologicheskogo monitoringa predpriyatii
neftepererabotki i neftehimii Respubliki Bashkortostan /V.N. Filippov, R.N.
Hlestkin //Zashita okruzhayushei sredy v neftegazovom komplekse.- 2012.- №9.- S.
35-42. [in Russian].
J21310-094
UDK 658.012.23
Nazimko V.V.
PLANNING A WATER-TREATMENT PLANT CONSTRUCTION IN
UNCERTAIN ECONOMIC AND LEGISLATIVE ENVIRONMENT
Donetsk National Technical University
ABSTRACT
Stochastic simulation has been used to investigate the schedule of a project for
construction of water treatment plant in uncertain dynamic environment.
Key words: project management schedule, stochastic simulation.
INTRODUCTION
East Ukraine experiences severe environmental problems because this region
has traditionally developed heavy industries such as coal mining, metallurgy,
production of chemicals, etc. In addition, there is a serious shortage of fresh water
because dry climate. That is why sewage treatment is costly here. Some regions have
to pay up to $1.00 per cubic meter of sewage disposal. Typical example is
Krasnoarmeysky region in Donetsk coal basin area where agriculture and coal mining
are two main industries that have been habitually developed in this place.
CJSC Donetsksteel has a Pocrovsky coal company in central area of Donetsk
coal basin (Fig.1). This company consists of a coal mine and a coal preparation plant
(Fig.2) and produces 5-6 million tons of raw coal annually. The company is the main
source of taxes income for Krasnoarmeysk town and employs several thousands
people. Ash content in the raw coal varies from 32% to 40% and the coal preparation
plant uses water cycle for separation rock from the coal. About 450-500 cubic meters
of water is wasted every day with clean coal and rock and the same volume of fresh
water should be added into the water cycle.
From the other hand, local facilities produce 1000 cubic meters of sewage. The
company have to pay for sewage disposal $0.90 per cubic meter. This sewage has
been produced by toilets, café kitchen, shower and laundry module and some
technological services. The sewage is contaminated by faeces, food and coal fines,
detergents and oil. It was decided to construct a water treatment plant to recycle
sewage and to return this water into water cycle of coal preparation plant. Such a
project can save $250,000 per year and improve environment.
UKRAINE
Donetsk ○
RUS
Sea of Azov
Black sea
TUR
Fig. 1. Geographic fragment
Fig. 2. Pockrovska coal company
Ukraine is a young independent country with unstable legislation and economic
rules that aggravates business development. These factors cause some essential
negative unpredictable situations subject to uncertainty. The state legislative system
is now on a stage of evolution from command to market economy. Political
opponents try to cut the legislation to their own current interests because
development of the system is going in an extremely competitive political tournament.
Such political environment creates uncertainty for business and increases economic
risk.
Transit Ukrainian economy is now on stage of development and is very
perceptible to world economic environment. A small fluctuation on world market
may produce a great problem in local economy. This is another source of uncertainty
for business. Mentioned above legislative and economic uncertainties could seriously
impact a cost and terms of the water treatment plant project. Preliminary speculative
assessments of experts have shown that the cost of the plant construction may deviate
from 90% to 130% of primary cost whereas period of construction might increase by
factor 2-3 and more. Therefore the period of the plant construction was the most
critical parameter of the project because elapsing of duration of the plant construction
may seriously reduce return of income from investment.
DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT PARAMETERS
All project has been disintegrated into 19 stages. Duration of the stages has been
assessed by 3-5 experts who had a good experience in coal industry. Three
experienced operators of coal preparation plant and one environmentalist assessed
technological stages of the project and two officers from Donetsksteel department
that supervises agreements evaluated stages of agreements arrangement and
soliciting. Those experts evaluated possible minimal, mode or most probable and
maximum period of every stage. These three parameters have been used to construct
distributions of all periods for sampling. Distribution laws were established on the
basis of these three parameters and on opinions of the experts. As a result, several
distribution laws have been chosen to describe uncertainty of the project stages. In
the case, fixed periods and triangular distributions have been employed, whereas
normal and arbitrary or user defined distributions are as well available. In fact,
arbitrary distribution is universal and may mimic any real histogram. The arbitrary
distribution were input through a set of bins (ten bins for instance).
First version of the project graph architecture depicted in Fig. 3,a and
characteristics of all stages are represented in Table 1.
Table 1.
Description of a “Normal” schedule of the project
Job
Job name
Job duration, days
number
min
1 Sewage
volume
mode
max
Distribution
law
1
2
5 triangular
7
21
60 triangular
3 Sewage sampling and analysis
30
fixed
5 Technology selection
40
120 triangular
1
fixed
estimation
2 Agreement 1
20
4 Analysis of results
6 Tender
30
60
120 triangular
7 Agreement 2
30
45
60 triangular
the
60
120
210 triangular
and
60
130
210 triangular
15 Modules delivery
20
45
60 triangular
16 Construction of pump
60
135
210 triangular
8 Agreement 3
60
120
400 triangular
9 Stage 3a
60
120
400 triangular
10 Stage 3b
60
120
350 triangular
11 Stage 3c
60
120
400 triangular
12 Stage 3d
60
120
400 triangular
50
70
120 triangular
60
80
150 triangular
13 Design
of
technology
14 Design
construction of zero
level works
station and balancing
reservoir
17 Construction
of
water-treatment plant
18 Putting
the
water
treatment process on
stream
and
field
adjustment
19 Plant approval
30
60
90 triangular
Let characterize this version as a “normal” pattern. Critical point of the project
are numbered in the squares and the project stages are indicated by arrows. The
project starts from the stages 1 and 2 that run simultaneously. The jobs set up with
sewage volume estimation and drawing up Agreement 1. This Agreement was
arranged with a local native firm to conduct biochemical analysis of local sewage.
1
1
Fig. 3. “Normal” (a) and “Emergency” (b) patterns of the project
h
Sewage volume estimation may finish in the shortest possible time, namely one day
because this work planed to be done independently. Closing date of this job has been
evaluated as 5 days and most probable period was 2 days (see Table 1). According
the experts’ opinions, optimistic, most probable and pessimistic terms of Agreement
1were 7, 21 and 60 days correspondingly.
Period of sewage sampling and analysis should be fixed at 30 days according a
standard. Such a term provides reliable and representative results of the sampling.
There are a lot of possible options to recover the water from the sewage. In addition
Pockrovska coal company had no previous experience of practical implementation of
water treatment plant construction. That is why closing date for this stage of the
project has been estimated as 120 days. Duration of the tender has been evaluated
according own experience and recommendations of tender committee.
Agreement 2 has been concluded with a mediator who had a license to conduct
relevant job in Ukraine, namely design, construction and tuning of the technology.
Actual design has been developed by a foreign firm on the basis of agreement
between this firm and the mediator.
Having local political and legislative situation, jobs from 8 to 11 are mandatory,
they can not be deviated and were expected as the most critical stages of the project.
Agreement 3 has been concluded with Coal Invest Expertise that must assess cost of
the Agreement 2 and pass the Agreement to State Administration on Labor Safety
(Stage 3a), State Department of Sanitary and Epidemic Service (Stage 3b), and
Ecology Department (Stage 3c). All these stages are not accomplished automatically
but demand supervising of the principal customer, namely Pockrovska coal company.
In addition, we anticipated that another bureaucratic obstacle may arise during the
project implementation due to unstable legislation. Probability of such unpleasant
stage has been estimated as 0.8. This anticipated stage of the project depicted in Fig.
3 by intermitted arrow. In fact, State Bureau of Technogenic Safety has been founded
half a year after start of the project. According the rules, any project that may impact
ecology must pass the Bureau examination (Stage 3d).
Actually, Coal Invest Expertise is to assess costs of financial deals for state
enterprises only. Pockrovska is completely private company, however several laws
are not properly deliberated up to now that provides versatile opportunities for
bureaucrats to stress the business. This factor creates serious uncertainty concerning
period of the stages that are responsible for agreement soliciting. An agreement does
not go through a board automatically but demands constant supervising of business
representatives. Actually any agreement should be “pushed” through a board.
Duration of the period of a bureaucratic stage depends on many factors that are hard
to predict. That is why pessimistic estimations for closing dates of stages from 8 to 12
were so high.
As an example, we will shortly describe typical process of the project
examination in Sanitary department (SD). First, the project is submitted to Coal
Invest Expertise (CIE) and CIE passes it to SD. Standard term of a project
examination should be 10-14 days. When this term expired, the project plus notes and
recommendations should be returned to CIE. CIE sends these notes to the customer,
namely to Pockrovska coal company. The customer should send this notes to local
(Donetsk) sanitary service (LSS). LSS designer calls (unofficially) to actual designer
(in the case it resides in Russia) and asks them to consult him. For example LSS
designer discovered that there are insufficient number of trees around of designed
water treatment plant. The customer corrects the design independently or asks to do
this job actual designer and sends corrections to CIE and another cycle of
examination iterates. It was a real case when LSS designer asked to do analysis of
hard sediments after treatment waste water by the plant that has not naturally been
constructed yet. Next time the LSS designer did not believe that recycled water was
actual result of plant operation because this water was “unrealistically” clean.
PROCEDURE OF STOCHASTIC SIMULATION
We have chosen philosophy that has been exploited in @RISK package [1,2]
because planning a water-treatment plant construction in uncertain economic and
legislative environment is impacted by risk. Table 2 contains input data that used for
stochastic simulation.
Table 2.
Description of input data
Numb
er
Vector
From
To Duratio Distr
of probabili
vector
n, days
ty
Min Max,
To what Correlatio
ibuti
,
correlat
n
on
day
e
coefficient
days
index s
1
1
1
2
2
3
1
5
0
0
2
1
1
2
21
3
7
60
0
0
3
1
2
3
30
0
0
0
0
0
5
1
2
4
40
3
20
120
0
0
4
1
3
4
1
0
0
0
0
0
6
1
4
5
60
3
30
120
0
0
7
1
5
6
45
3
30
60
0
0
13
1
6
9
120
3
60
210
18
0.7
14
1
6
9
130
3
60
210
0
0
15
1
9
10
45
3
20
60
0
0
16
1
6
10
135
3
60
210
0
0
8
1
5
7
120
3
60
400
0
0
9
1
7
10
120
3
60
400
0
0
10
1
7
10
120
3
60
350
0
0
11
1
7
10
120
3
60
400
0
0
12
0.8
7
10
120
3
60
400
0
0
17
1
10
11
70
3
50
120
0
0
18
1
11
12
80
3
60
150
0
0
19
1
12
13
60
3
30
90
0
0
A stage of the project is represented as a vector that directed from node I to node
J. Column “Duration” contains a fixed duration of a stage, a mode of duration for
triangular distribution or an average value of duration for normal distribution for a
stage that characterizes a job that is impacted by uncertainty. Index 0 indicates fixed
stage of a project, indexes 1,2 and 3 correspond to normal, arbitrary and triangular
distribution of a stage duration respectively. Minimum and maximum values of
duration are input in column “Min” and “Max” correspondingly for triangular
distribution. Standard deviation of duration is input in column “Min” for the normal
distribution. Column “To what correlate” contains number N of the vector which
correlates with a current vector M input line. If the next line contains reverse
correlation, i.e. vector M correlates with vector N, then the vectors N and M
correlates or are reciprocally dependent. If the next line does not contains reverse
correlation, the vector N is dependent on vector M. Correlation or regression
coefficient is input in the last column. In the case, we input dependence of the stage
18 on the stage 13. The idea behind this dependence means that the more complex
project, the longer design period and more time is needed to put the water treatment
process on stream and field adjustment.
Critical path of the project has been calculated by algorithm, published in [3].
Computer program has been developed in PASCAL or DELPHI envelope. Examples
from [4,5] were used for verification of the code. Vector (stage) 12 switched on with
a probability 0.8. The program implemented fixed durations for vectors 3 and 4 and
stochastic values of durations for the other vectors as the results of sampling from
triangular distributions. Sampling of 18th vector depended on sampling of 13d vector.
A several hundred cycles have been used to simulate the project in stochastic
environment. We controlled the stop of the simulation with χ2-test of output
distributions using 90% confidence interval. The program outputs next information
for every vector (stage): earliest and closing dates of the start, of the finish, total and
free time reserves. This resulting data can be used for further analysis, for instance to
create histograms, to conduct sensitivity analysis, etc.
In the case of the treatment for water plant project development, assessment of
the earliest and closing dates of construction is the most important practical interest.
It has been found that “Normal” pattern of the project architecture has no free reserve
of time. Hence the earliest and closing dates of the project finish are the same.
Histogram of these dates depicted in Fig.4. This histogram fits normal distribution
according Kolmogorov-Smirnov and Chi-Square tests. Furthermore, any other
histograms for the earliest and closing dates of stages 9, 10, 11 and 12 match normal
distribution.
Variable: 19v1, Distribution: Normal
Kolmogorov-Smirnov d = 0,04616,
Chi-Square test = 1,88510, df = 2 (adjusted) , p = 0,38963
30
No. of observations
25
20
15
10
5
0
267
333
400
467
533
600
667
733
800
867
933
1000
1067
1133
Category (upper limits)
Fig. 4. Histogram of the earliest and closing dates for“Normal”
patterns of the project graph
Parameters of these distributions are collected in the Table 3. The earliest date of
the project finish for the “Normal” pattern (Fig. 3,a). is 500 days. The average
duration and closing date of the project are 731 and 967 days respectively. It does
actually mean that the project may last for more than two years. Such a term is
undesirable because it does not comply with economic goal of the project. There are
three possible scenarios of “Normal” option of the project (Table 4). The most
probable critical path of the project is 1-2-2-4-4-5-5-7-7-10-10-11-11-12-12-13 that
demonstrated by the chain of the nodes. There are may be two other scenarios,
namely 1-2-2-3-3-4-4-5-5-7-7-10-10-11-11-12-12-13 and 1-2-2-4-4-5-5-7-7-10-7-1010-11-11-12-12-13 but their probability does not exceeds 7%. In the last scenario,
critical path bifurcates on the link 7-10 because two vectors (stages 9 and 12) have
the same duration. Analysis of the critical paths clearly demonstrates that main cause
of the project delay is the stages of the Agreement 3 because any critical paths goes
through the chain 7-10 or stages 9-12.
Table 3.
Parameters of the earliest (E) and closing (C) dates for some critical vectors
(stages), days
Number
of
Min
Average
Max
vector
Normal pattern of the project
19C, 19E
500
731
967
9E
200
512
850
9C
290
584
900
10E
200
486
900
10C
300
584
900
11E
200
520
900
11C
200
583
900
12E
200
520
850
12C
290
584
870
Emergency pattern of the project
19E
275
447
650
19C
325
525
950
9E
200
504
950
9C
375
585
950
This research has been accomplished by January 2008 when the project had just
started. However there were some natural optimism at the start of the project and
nobody have not seriously accepted results of this research. Nevertheless as the
project has been progressing, the results attracted more and more attention. Critical
reexamination the project has been made at the point (node) 10 when the stage 12
became reality. This event forced the managers to change architecture of the project
to that depicted in Fig.3,b as “Emergency” pattern. This change does actually mean
that bureaucrat’s activity and real life should not to intersect but it was better to run
them as parallel processes.
Table 4.
Probable critical paths of the “Normal” project
Critical path
Path
probability
1-2-2-4-4-5-5-7-7-10-10-11-11-12-12-13
91.0%
1-2-2-3-3-4-4-5-5-7-7-10-10-11-11-12-12-13
7.0%
1-2-2-4-4-5-5-7-7-10-7-10-10-11-11-12-12-13
2.0%
Table 3 demonstrates that this decision was positive because the earliest average
date of the project finish reduced down to 447days or by 39% and closing date
diminished down to 525day or by 15%. Actually the project total period became even
shorter because the parallelism. The plant started to operate in August 2009. This
looks as a trick but actually it works as may be seen in Fig. 5. Water treatment plant
successfully operates, saves the money for Pockrovska coal company, the cat Boris
enjoys warm atmosphere inside the plant and officers of Ecology Department
continue to examine design of the pant that has already been constructed.
Analysis has demonstrated that most probable critical path has changed in
“Emergency” project because the critical chain 7-10 had been eliminated (Table 5).
Main critical path is 1-2-2-4-4-5-5-7-7-13 now. Actual date of the project start is 17
December 2007. The plant started to operate after 618 days and actual closing of the
project happened 923 days after the project start. Assessment of the average period of
the project finishing is 525 days that is even less that actual date of the plant start.
This discrepancy may be explained some optimism of the experts during evaluation
input data. Another reason of the mismatching is that the expert gave assessments of
input data in 2007 and did not know about the world crisis. Anyway predicted
diapason of the plant start and closing date of the project correspond to the fact
(325<618 - 923<950).
Fig. 5. Operating water treatment plant
Table 5.
Probable critical paths of the “Emergency” project
Critical path
Path probability
1-2-2-4-4-5-5-7-7-13
84.0%
1-2-2-4-4-5-5-6-6-10-10-11-11-12-12-13
3.0%
1-2-2-4-4-5-5-6-6-9-9-10-10-11-11-12-12-13
5.0%
1-2-2-3-3-4-4-5-5-6-6-9-9-10-10-11-11-12-12-13
1.0%
1-2-2-3-3-4-4-5-5-7-7-13
7.0%
CONCLUSION
Philosophy that has been used in @RISK package has proved to be effective and
available to provide reliable results for the case of water treatment plant project
development in uncertain economic and legislative environment. Economic decision
to process sewage independently and return clean water to local circulation in coal
prep plant turned to be successful and actual period of the project development is in
the range that has been evaluated by stochastic simulation. This simulation helped to
modify the project architecture during its development that reduced closing date by
15-39%.
Acknowledgements: Author appreciates senior operator of the plant Struchkova
T.A. for assistance during preparation of initial data for simulation.
REFERENCES
1. Clemen, Robert T. and Reilly, Terrence, 2000. Making Hard Decisions with
Decisions Tools: Duxbury Thomson Learning.
2. Guide to Using @RISK. Risk Analysis and Simulation Add-In for Microsoft
Exel. Version 5.5, May 2009.
3. Kelly J.E., Walker Morgan R., 1959. Critical Path Planning and Scheduling,
Proc. of the Eastern Joint Computer Conference.
4. Communications of the ACM, 1960-1971.
5. Petrova L.G., 1969. Introduction to network planning. Novosibirsk State
University, (In Russian).
J21310-095
UDC 004.2
Chugunov M.V., Osyka V.V., Makhrov G.A.
STRENGTH AND STIFFNESS ANALYSIS FOR MECHANICAL
TRANSMISSIONS IN SOLIDWORKS BASED ON API
Ogarev Mordovia State University, 68 Bolshevistskaya Str., Saransk 430005,
Russia
In this paper the problem of the analysis of strength and stiffness of mechanical
transmissions elements, based on the finite elements methods (FEM) is considered.
The beam/frame model is used. The program module is an AddIn-application for
SolidWorks, expanding and supplementing basic functionality regarding the solution
of a considered problem.
Keywords: mechanical transmissions, FEM, beam/frame model, CAD/CAE
SolidWorks, API, AddIn-application.
SolidWorks - CAD/CAM/CAE-system computer aided design, the engineering
analysis and computer aided manufacture. In particular, specialized module
SolidWorks Simulation allows to carry out the analysis of strength, stiffness,
stability, the frequency analysis and a lot of other procedures for the products of
mechanical engineering. More often this module is applied at the closing stages of
designing as CAE-system which on the basis of use corresponding FEM (Finite
Elements Method) models gives the solution of high accuracy. Besides SolidWorks
includes many libraries of the standard elements, named as ToolBox, used in
assembly context. For example, the library of designing of mechanical transmissions
GearTeq/GearTrax is intended for computer construction of the gears.
ToolBox libraries alongside with an opportunity of construction of parametrical
3D solid models, as a rule, possess the additional functionality inherent in CAEsystems, i.e. at the initial stages of designing allow to carry out the analysis of a
condition and behavior of the element, based, for example, on applied mechanics
methods and other simplified engineering techniques. The reason for that is FEManalysis is computational expensive algorithm.
The problem of development and perfection of libraries Toolbox is actual
problem as the majority of libraries existing at present such do not possess sufficient
functionality. Tool of the decision of this problem is the interface of applied
programming API (Application Programming Interface), delivered in structure of
base configuration SolidWorks. API contains hundreds functions which can be called
from programs of the user and allows to develop applications for SolidWorks, using
it as platform, possessing rather wide functionality [1].
In the given work the following problem is considered: to develop the program
module "Strength", integrated into structure of the parametrical library for
mechanical transmissions elements design with ShaftWorks for SolidWorks and
providing the analysis of strength and stiffness of structures for the given type.
The program has friendly user interface, which completely has been built into
SolidWorks windows (fig. 1). The basic buttons, operating process for modeling and
for the analysis, placed on Task Pane SolidWorks window, and initial data for
computing are placed on the dialogue panels of the window Property Manager Page.
The initial 3D solid model can be generated in detailed representation, as shown in
figure 1, or in the simplified representation then gears are represented in the form of
disks. Results are represented as three-dimensional sketches: as Bezier-curves for the
deformed axis (fig.2) and as the diagrams for the internal force factors in traditional
for applied mechanical form: torsion moment (fig.3); bending moment on the one of
the coordinate plane, for example (fig.4), the factor of fatigue strength is determined
also.
As the method for solving is FEM used with beam finite element type [2]. Such
variant FEM does not differ high requirements to computing resources, but thus
relieves of all cares, connected with static indefinability of the considered structure
and with features of imposing of the boundary conditions.
Program module "Strength" is realized as the dynamic DLL-library created in
MS Visual Studio C ++ environment. The project, which structure it is presented on
fig. 5, includes the set of the interconnected classes constructed by a hierarchical
principle.
Fig. 1. SolidWorks and ShaftWorks widows
Fig. 2. Deformed axis for shaft
Fig. 3. Torsion moment
Fig. 4. Bending moment
Functions of basic class FEM CFEMAnalysis realize: structure discretization
and mesh generating, ensambling, algebra linear equations system solving, matrix
operations. Classes CSubstructure and CElement are intended for formation of the
stiffness matrixes for finite elements and substructures [2], and class CLoadPage
provides formation of dialogue panels for initial data input. Data exchange with
library ShaftWorks is carried out through specially created structures DataSolve.
Fig. 5. Project structure
References:
1. Avedyan A.B., Vikentiev E.E. SolidWorks API – universal template for
integration of business applications. SAPR i Grafika, № 6. 2006. P.32-40. (in
Russian).
2. Maksimovsky D.E., Chugunov M.V. Programming FEM for beam/frame
structures, based on object-oriented approach. Microsoft technology in theory and
practice of programming. Conference Proceeding/ Edited by prof. R.G.Strongin. –
N.Novgorod: NNStU. 2008. P. 409-410. (in Russian).
J21310-096
UDC 658.512.011.56
Shkurina G.L., Kandirin Y.V.
AUTOMATION OF MULTICRITERIA TRUNCATION OF THE SET OF
TECHNICAL OBJECTS
National research university "MEI"
Volgograd state technical university
In work approach to automation of stage-by-stage truncation of
alternatives to rational options, according requirements of the specification of design
of technical objects is considered. For truncation quantity of analyzed objects at
metalevel in the beginning heuristic conditions of an admissibility, and then quality
indicators consistently are used.
Keywords: problems of decision-making, choice of alternatives, consecutive
truncation of options, criteria of a choice.
In the course of design of technical systems not always it is required to find
essentially new decisions at the level of inventions, it is enough to find of more
rational. Automation of these processes is still actual [1,2].
Techniques of estimation and truncation of objects at the solution of problems of
formation of shapes of difficult technical systems, give the chance to receive during
design activity not casual successful results, and with guarantee the best or the worst,
in the accepted sense options. Design actions are presented as hierarchy of steps at
which each level the choice is carried out. Levels have the known set of decisions and
own rule of a choice. The automated systems of a choice allow to pick up the suitable
decision on the set parameters from some number of available alternatives. Creation
of system of the automated choice sets as the purpose to provide directly the designer
or a package of applied programs in SAPR with information on existence in a
database of option demanded on the specification and to choose the best alternative
object according to the accepted principle of an optimality <With, W>.
Systems of the automated choice can be given to databases, and can
independently be used in human-machine systems of design in the form of the
intellectual directories, helping to make the decision on the basis of the criteria
interface of a choice put in automated system [3].
Alternative options in a uniform set of W ={wi}, to i = {1,N} in databases are
presented by the minimum final descriptions being a set of characteristics of P = by
{pj}, j=1, J. The set of characteristics {pj} of technical objects of W ={wi},
depending on conditions of a specific design objective can consist of two nonoverlapping sets of parameters of technical object: subsets of parameters {Ya} and
subset of indicators of quality {k l}.
{p j} = {Ya}
U {k j};
s=1,S; l= 1,M ; S+M=J
Parameters {Ya} belong to characteristics to which values in the course of
a choice quantitative restrictions of type are shown R:
}.
R= {
To indicators of quality {k l} treat the characteristics which value for a choice
of optimum decisions according to the specification needs to be minimized or
maximized.
{k l}
min (max).
Such division of characteristics is necessary, in order that in the course of the
organization of procedures of a choice on a set of possible options W ={wi},
the
general problem of truncation of a set to reduce to two metastages [4]:
- at the first stage from a set of options W ={wi}, to allocate a set of admissible
WД options which satisfies to all restrictions of an admissibility of decisions of R
наimposed on the specification parameters:
Y1, R1, Y1ТЗ
{
………….
Y S, RS, YSТЗ ;
- at the second stage to carry out the subsequent truncation of a set of admissible
WД options according to the accepted criteria requirements of СК (it is possible with
increase of force of statement) from an intefeysny set of system of the automated
choice which is including π-, L-, πL- and d- of statement and also various scalar
"parcels".
Thus, traditional approach to the solution of tasks in systems of the automated
choice assumes that objective of a choice everyone again is solved anew in the
following sequence of truncation of a set of options W:
W
WД
WО ;
WО
WД
W
The logic of a traditional way of a choice is explainable that labor input of the
solution of a task of criteria statements is much higher than costs of a choice of the
admissible options, to satisfying restrictions of СД. From here the conclusion
follows: at a choice on < СК, W>
it is better to solve more labor-consuming
problem СК of repeated comparisons at the last stage – on a set of smaller power of
WД.
The final stage of procedures of the automated choice, comes to an end with
result delivery for decision-making of the decision-maker who has to carry out a final
choice (provided that in WО of optimum alternatives it will appear a little), having
systemically or heuristically estimated a design situation.
Metastages have internal steps of truncation and iteration from different levels.
However, the difficult multi-stage procedures extending time of decisionmaking, are necessary as each following stage specifies the previous decision.
The presented technique of consecutive multi-stage truncation of an initial
set to rational options is invariant and therefore can be used in the educational
purposes or experts by developers of equipment [5]. Approach is realized in the
program complexes developed in MEI(TU) and VolgGTU and introduced in higher
education institutions.
References:
1. Shkurina G. L. Procedures use of a choice for creation of turns of repair of the
equipment.
Nauchno-tehnicheskij vestnik informacionnyh tehnologij, mehaniki i
optiki. 2011, No. 3 (73). Pp 74-78.
2. Kandyrin Yu.V., Sazonova L.T., Shkurina G.L.. Structuring options in
the tasks of multi-criteria choice. Trudy Kongressa po intellektual'nym sistemam i
informacionnym tehnologijam "IS&IT`11". V 4 t. T. 1 : dokl. sekcij mezhdunar.
nauch.-tehn. konferencij "AIS`11" i "CAD-2011" / FGOU VPO "Juzhnyj federal'nyj
un-t" [i dr.]. - M., 2011. Pp 92-97.
3. Shkurina G.L.. Automation of the comparative analysis and truncation of
technical solutions (on the example of design of spinnirs). Dissertacija na soiskanie
uchenoj stepeni kandidata tehnicheskih nauk. Volgograd. P. 190
4. The formalized statement and methods of the solution of problems of a choice
options /Shkurina g.L.; Volgograd.gos.tehn.un-t.- Volgograd, 1995g – 32c: il.Bibliogr.:17 nazv.- Rus. – Deponirovannaja rukopis' v VINITI.
5. Kandyrin Yu.V., Shkurina G.L.. Generation and choice procedures at design
of technical objects. Uchebnoe posobie s grifom UMO vuzov po universitetskomu
politehnicheskomu obrazovaniju. Volgograd: Izd-vo «Politehnik», VolgGTU,1999, 85s.
J21310-097
UDC 663.421
Kretova J.I., Potoroko I.J.
PERFECTION OF BIOTECHNOLOGICAL PROCESSES OF
PROCESSING OF AGRICULTURAL RAW MATERIAL
« the Southern - Ural state university » (National research university),
454080 city of Chelyabinsk, Lenin 76
In the given work the technology of application of electrophysical methods of
processing of the agricultural raw material used during reception of malt is
submitted. It is proved, that application of electrophysical influence allows to receive
non-polluting production due to effective disinfecting a grain of barley, and also
simultaneously to lower power inputs and материалоемкость at improvement of
quality of an end-product - beer.
Key words: electrophysical methods of influence, safety, biotechnological
processes, food raw material.
In the given work the nonconventional method of processing of agricultural raw
material which is directed on perfection of biotechnological processes and reception
of a high quality end-product - beer is considered (examined).
One of the major problems(tasks) facing to the food-processing industry for
today, improvement of quality of made production is. Importance of a problem of
quality of production is predetermined not only conditions of market economy, but
also the social importance, and it, first of all, satisfaction of the population by safe
and qualitative food stuffs [1].
The new technologies introduced in production of the food-processing industry,
allow to solve the given problem(task).
The big interest is represented with nonconventional methods of processing of
raw material which are focused on optimization of biochemical, chemical and
physical and chemical processes and are directed on improvement of quality.
For today development of brewing branch is constrained with the
underdeveloped raw-material base. The "narrowest" place of this branch is
maintenance of branch with high-quality raw material. As raw material for
preparation of beer barley malt which receive from brewing grades of barley serves.
Grain crops including barley, are amazed with microorganisms even during maturing.
At the initial stages of development the grain of barley is amazed with " field
mushrooms », bacterial microflora and in insignificant quantity(amount) yeast. On a
grain it is possible to find out and актиномицеты. At storage of barley there is a
redistribution of structure of microflora, обсеменяющей a grain, gradually
representatives of " field mushrooms » supersede « a mould of storage ». « The
mould of storage », present on a grain, negatively influence his(its) quality. For this
reason the party(set) of barley can become unsuitable for manufacture of malt.
As the quantity(amount) of parties(sets) of a grain of the barley infected with an
infection acting on breweries, increases, therefore there is actual a problem(task) of
his(its) disinfecting before barley will act(arrive) for the further processing or storage.
For disinfecting a grain with the purpose of his(its) decrease(reduction)
обсемененности microorganisms, activation of growth at солодоращении,
decrease(reductions) in losses of valuable substances, improvements of quality apply
traditional methods: disinfection at a stage мойки grains; storage of grain weight in
the cooled condition; repeated clearing, a peeling, grinding; drying; chemical
conservation; ИК-radiation; application γ beams, ultrasound, электронно-ionic
technologies. However any of the listed above ways does not provide full disinfecting
from viruses and mushrooms.
The new way of manufacture of malt offered(suggested) by us eliminates this
lack, allows to receive non-polluting production due to effective disinfecting a grain
of barley, and also simultaneously to lower power inputs and материалоемкость at
improvement of quality of an end-product - beer. Novelty of the given way of
manufacture of malt is confirmed with the patent of the Russian Federation [2].
The given problem(task) is solved that in a way of manufacture of malt from
brewing grades of the barley, including washing of barley by water before soaking,
definition of humidity of barley, his(its) processing in a field of ultrahigh frequencies
(MICROWAVE), according to our invention, brewing barley humidity of 15,5-17,5
% process in the MICROWAVE - FIELD with frequency of 2450 MHz with in the
speed of heating of a grain 0,4-0,8 ºС/с during 60-90 with up to final temperature of a
product 58-60 ºС. Under these conditions are observed an effective mode of
disinfecting of barley from mushrooms of sort Penicillium, Fusarium, Alternaria,
Mucor, and also bacteria and other sporous activators and the greatest intensity of
germination. The data of experimental researches submitted in table 1, confirm the
given fact.
Table 1
Data of research of microwave energy for infection and biotechnological
extract content, %
р. Fusarium
starch content, %
, °С/с
р.Penicillium
protein content, %
t ,с
р.Alternaria
Speed
infection, %
р. Aspergillus
Proces-
Contamination a mushroom
Energy of germination, %
Modes of processing
Temperature of heating, °С
processes
90
0,8
78
0
0
0
0
0
7,15 38,8 74,0
30
0,8
35
0
14
7
3
88
8,15 44,8 73,9
90
0,4
52
0
19
10
2
71
7,65 42,4 73,0
30
0,4
30
93
37
8
5
89
7,8
52,0 72,3
90
0,6
63
0
2
0
0
13
7,4
35,2 75,8
30
0,6
33
13
41
10
1
86
7,8
45,4 72,6
60
0,8
62
0
0
0
0
38
7,15 25,6 73,8
60
0,4
48
37
44
8
3
72
8,4
49,6 72,6
60
0,6
55
0
14
5
1
67
7,4
44,8 75,8
23
100
31
21
6
80
8,4
52,0 72,4
sing time of heating
The control
Using a combination of various parameters of electrophysical influence (an
exposition of processing and speed of heating) it is possible to achieve both
decrease(reductions) обсемененности some barley microorganisms, and activation
of growth of a grain of barley at солодоращении. All this in a complex reduces
losses of valuable substances, promotes reception of a non-polluting grain of barley
and improves quality of an end-product - beer.
Thus, the new way of processing of a grain of barley offered(suggested) by us
brewing, directed on perfection of biotechnological processes of processing, allows to
receive non-polluting production due to effective disinfecting a grain by energy of the
MICROWAVE - FIELD, and also simultaneous decrease(reduction) in power inputs
and материалоемкости at improvement of quality of an end-product - beer.
The literature:
1. Strategy of development food and a process industry of Russia for the period
till 2020 / the Order of the Government of the Russian Federation from April, 17,
2012 N 559-Ó.
2. A way of manufacture of malt from brewing grades of barley. A stalemate.
2283861, опуб. 20.09.2006, БИ 26/ Kretova J.I., (Zdanovich J.I.), Tsuglenok G.I.,
Tsuglenok N.V., etc.
J21310-098
UDC 004.5
Filippova A.G., Belozjerov E.S.,Filippov V.N.
PROGRAM EVALUATION ERGONOMICS USER INTERFACE
WEB-SITES
Ufa State Petroleum Technological University,
Developed a method of designing a typed unified user interface, which includes:
development of a technique of classification interfaces, development of criteria for
usability interface, an assessment of factors that determine the performance and
effectiveness of the software in its design, from which were formed the basic
principles and algorithms of the program tester.
A program-tester developed by students of the Web-user interfaces in
preparation for the final qualifying works, which allows you to identify the key
ergonomic characteristics: efficiency, reliability and performance.
Author's recommendations are given to improve the convenience of Web-based
interface.
Keywords: ergonomics, the user interface, information system, reliability,
information modeling, Web-sites.
The concept of quality of the SU set the international standard ISO DIS 9241-11
- the so-called usability - usability interface, which includes information
performance, efficiency and reliability of the interface as well as user satisfaction
with the work performed [1].
Effective user interface design - is a dialogue between developers and users. It is
based on a clear understanding of what the other side of the user interface are real
people and that the correct design involves intensive communication with them.
Unfortunately, software developers and users are not in the same room, and often
speak different languages. The only instrument of communication for them is the user
interface itself [2].
Interface (joint, the interface device) provides human interaction with the
technical
device
at the reception and evaluation of information, information
preparation and decision-making, executive actions and communications [3].
Technology of the UI and the funds instrumental that are used to implement it,
form a coherent whole. The next step in the development of any of these components
gives rise to the further development of other [4].
There are many recommendations for ergonomics at each stage of software
development. However, due to the tight schedule of graduate design does not have
time for an ergonomic study. In this regard, need to simplify unified method of
creating software with ergonomic software.
In developing own methods of classification interfaces need to pay attention to
the communication aspect of information exchange.
An analysis of 300 subjects of diploma papers issued by the department for 10
years, engineers and bachelors showed that a large proportion (83%) is the software
traditional document-type.
At the stage of technical design than the structural, functional, information and
logic are selected or calculated SEI. Stage design engineering - build and compile the
project finishes testing and measurement of achieved values of SEI. Naturally, this
three-stage design in the educational process is compressed to 3 - 4 months and
actually being in the same stage together.
To test the efficiency of program complex was taken functioning online store
elbravo.com.ua - Internet shop of souvenirs. It is an online store with a medium-scale
production of about 5,000 titles. The program combines the tester:
- a single algorithm of actions the user in the framework of the above-mentioned
software environment consists of a set of actions.
- each action is recorded tester program and writes the statistics file.
- on the basis of analysis and comparison of fixed actions for each test the
following information: 1) Productivity; 2) Efficiency; 3) Reliability.
Evaluation Performance (productivity) is often performed in the terminology
model GOMS, or to the laws of Hick's and Fitt’s for each function or sub-task of UI.
In general, the Performance assesses how quickly the user reaches the target. If the
interface is bad, then the user is studying it for a long time before you commit another
act tends to his goal.
Therefore, according to how much time the user spent on the goal, can judge the
performance of the interface.
Effectiveness evaluation should take into account the degree of influence of the
interface on the completeness and accuracy of the achieve user targeted results.
The accuracy and efficiency of the goal can be understood as the number of
transactions of a type for which the user reaches the target. If one interface allows
you to achieve the goal of 3 clicks and the other for 5, the first interface is more
effective. Although in terms of performance, you can quickly make 5 clicks than 3.
But that is another option.
Evaluation of reliability must take into account the random nature of user
activity, the possibility (probability) of logical fallacies and violations of the right
sequence and timing of user actions in relation to the characteristics of the interface
elements - its layout, brightness, contrast, coding principles, alphabet, font settings,
and the like.
Program Description usability tester.
The program is designed for usability tester interface internet resource
assessment, whether an online store, or another site [5, 6].
The basic principle of the tester is as follows:
1)
An expert on the program server records the standard of the site;
2)
The clients connect to the server and get the job;
3)
Clients perform the task;
4)
The client sends the server the job;
5)
The server compares the results with reference customers and makes the
assessment in terms of performance, efficiency, reliability;
6)
Under construction site on the final assessment of this test.
The tester is arranged so that multiple sites can be created. Each site can have
multiple tests. Each test can have a lot of standards, but the active benchmark for this
test can be only one.
When writing a reference expert set the initial coordinate of the cursor to the
same browser scrolls up and left. So, for all customers will be set for the same initial
conditions.
In addition to the initial conditions were the same required to monitors the same
screen resolution (because the interface site to different resolutions will be differently
displayed, will have different distances of move the mouse to the components, etc.)
and installed on computers testers Microsoft Framework 4.0.3019 [7].
Findings
Developed a method of designing a typed unified user interface, which includes:
development of a technique of classification interfaces, development of criteria for
usability interface, an assessment of factors that determine the performance and
effectiveness of the software in its design, from which were formed the basic
principles and algorithms of the program tester.
Algorithm is developed and written, the program tester UI websites enables you
to test all kinds of information resources on the Internet that can be presented as a
web page.
Investigations UI Web sites, as with the original interface, and with the changes.
The interface was evaluated by indicators such as productivity, efficiency, and
reliability. A feature of this software is that here the author tried to move away from
the most subjective evaluation of the interface from the user, reducing the interface to
the evaluation of mathematical calculation of the many indicators that characterized
the actions of a real user, who worked with the system.
An
assessment
of
the
usability
of
UI
and
copyrights
developed
recommendations to improve the convenience of a web-interface applications that
have affected the characteristics such as: functional completeness, stylistic flexibility;
optional flexibility, sound, aesthetics, the focus of attention.
The developed methodology and software can be used in the field of outsourcing
companies to test the real usability of websites. The software can also be used in
schools to verify that the sites developed by students as part of the course and
diploma projects (works).
References:
1. ISO DIS 9241-11. Ergonomic requirements for office work with visual
display terminals (VDTs). Part 11. P. 7-10.
2. Robert Sheyfler. X Window System: Core and extension protocols: X version
11, releases 6 and 6.1. Digital Press, 1996. P. 7.
3. Konstantain L., Lokvud L. Razrabotka programmnogo obespecheniya. ?
Piter, 2004. S. 492-535. [in Russian].
4. Gul'tyava A.K., Mashina V.A. Proektirovanie i dizain pol'zovatel'skogo
interfeisa: Uchebnoe posobie. Samara, 2004. S. 180-221. [in Russian].
5. A.s. 2013616681 RF o gosudarstvennoi registracii programmy dlya EVM.
Server ocenki ergonomicheskih pokazatelei Web-interfeisov /A.G. Filippova, E.S.
Belozerov, A.E. Belozerov, V.N. Filippov; Zayavl. 2013.06.03.0; Opubl.
2013.07.16.0. [in Russian].
6. A.s. 2013616902 RF o gosudarstvennoi registracii programmy dlya EVM.
Testirovanie ergonomicheskih pokazatelei Web-interfeisov /A.G. Filippova, E.S.
Belozerov, A.E. Belozerov, V.N. Filippov; Zayavl. 2013.06.04.0; Opubl.
2013.07.25.0. [in Russian].
7. Filippova A.G., Belozerov E.S., Filippov V.N. Podhod k razrabotke metodiki
ergonomicheskogo
soprovozhdeniya
vypusknyh
kvalifikacionnyh
rabot
programmistov //Neftegazovoe delo. 2012. Tom 10. S. 125-129. [in Russian].
J21310-099
UDC 004.318
Burdaev V.P.
MODELS OF KNOWLEDGE BASES
The Kharkov national economic university
In the given work on an example of medical knowledge bases some models of
their construction are considered. The basic attention is given model of the
knowledge base based on hierarchical functional system which consists of hierarchy
of classes of data domain, communications between them (conclusion rules). The
problem of a filtration of the knowledge base from positions of adaptation of its rules
to dynamic data domain is considered. The mechanism of interpretation of model of
hierarchical functional system in the conditions of dynamic change of its parametres
(a base class, communications between classes and interactions of objects of classes)
is offered, realised and is investigated.
Keywords: the knowledge base filtration, open system, hierarchical functional
system, ontology.
Modern means the Internet impose certain conditions on architecture and
application of expert systems (ES) − the computer programs, making decisions at
level of experts. Many components ES such as the knowledge base (KB), the
conclusion car, an explanation subsystem, under influence the Internet change the
properties and functions. The increasing role now plays not static knowledge, and
dynamic, not superficial knowledge, and deep. The explanation subsystem is
supplied, the methods based on the argument, received results with attraction
redundancy information. The conclusion car is based on the principles based on
reasonings on association and analogy more and more. And such systems should
work in a real time mode.
Modern information data domains possess dynamic structure, as for example,
networks the Internet, a prediction emergency and the emergency situations, the
distributed training etc. Their features is: presence of huge number independent
сущностей with concret subgoal. To essence are subject to influences of
environment (openness), co-operate among themselves (distribution). Knowledge
bases entity are unique (locality) and form hierarchical coalitions (hierarchy of levels
entities). For construction of models of knowledge bases of such data domains use,
for example, self-organising opened multi-agent systems [1].
Therefore as model dynamic data domain it is understood functional system
which is characterised by some status at present time and some law which describes
change a status eventually. Namely the status of functional system is described by the
data domain facts, and state transition is described by decision-making rules. One of
approaches of construction of the dynamic intellectual systems based on rules, is
considered to work in [2].
In work [3] the mathematical model of dynamic data domain in the form of
hierarchical functional system (FS) in which the knowledge base associates with a
chain of stratifications of knowledge bases is constructed, i.e. represents section of a
chain of stratifications of knowledge bases.
FS it is characterised by following properties:
connectivity - a chain of stratifications of the knowledge base;
complexity - hierarchy of levels of local knowledge bases;
stability (dynamic system behaviour) - the structure of section of a chain of
stratifications does not change at indignations of local knowledge bases. In other
words, change heuristics local knowledge bases of a chain of stratifications is carried
out only, and the base of stratification which is interpreted as environment, remains
not change.
Connectivity FS is expressed in a knowledge base filtration. Let Bi is a local
knowledge base, that is contains rules продукций for definition subgoal Gi which is
on i - that level in hierarchy FS.
The knowledge base filtration is a final system of local knowledge bases Bi
B0 <= B1 <= … <= Bk,
partially-uporjadochnyh (<=) as follows: consequens each rule from Bi contains
in antecedent rules from Bj.
To construct a filtration of the knowledge base it is enough to specify a chain of
rules FS for main objective achievement. Then by means of recursive algorithm is
under construction, other rules for local

Modern scientific research and their practical application

Transcription

Similar documents

XGames.ESPN.go.com

urban ready living

File Processing Using PHP on IBM i

Page Views

RÉSoNANSS: a regional contribution to

PrimeFilm 1800 AFL Low-Cost 35mm Slide/Film Scanning Through

IC-910 SDR Mod

The new RS-35M, June, 2010 - Stu Martin, [email protected]

Tutorial: Create online polls with PHP and MySQL

BALTICA 10